SERVICE MANUAL

Date: 2013/04/26
Table of Contents
Revision history......................................................................................................................................1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual...................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items.........................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-4
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.......................................................................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention...................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 Used Batteries Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.4.1 ALL Areas......................................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.4.2 Germany........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.3 France...........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.4 Denmark........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.5 Finland, Sweden............................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.4.6 Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5 Laser Safety............................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 Laser Safety..................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Internal Laser Radiation................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 Laser Safety Label........................................................................................................................................................A-22
3.5.4 Laser Caution Label......................................................................................................................................................A-23
3.5.5 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT.....................................................................................A-23
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-24
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine..................................................................................................................................A-24
4.2 Warning indications on the boards..........................................................................................................................................A-25
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-27
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS..................................................................................................B-1
1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL..........................................................................................................B-1
2. PRODUCT NAME.......................................................................................................................................................B-2
3. BRAND NAME............................................................................................................................................................B-3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES...............................................................................................................................B-3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS................................................................................................................................................................B-3
4. FEEDING DIRECTION................................................................................................................................................B-4
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................C-1
1. bizhub 652/552/602/502..............................................................................................................................................C-1
1.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.3 Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.4 Materials....................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.5 Print volume..............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.6 Machine specifications..............................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.7 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.8 Print functions............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.9 Scan functions...........................................................................................................................................................................C-7
1.10 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-8
2. DF-618/SP-501...........................................................................................................................................................C-9
2.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
2.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
2.3 Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
2.4 Paper feed prohibited originals..................................................................................................................................................C-9
2.5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals.........................................................................................................................................C-9
2.6 Mixed original feed chart.........................................................................................................................................................C-10
2.7 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-10
2.8 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-10
2.9 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-11
3. LU-301......................................................................................................................................................................C-12

i
 3.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
3.2 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
3.3 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-12
3.4 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-12
3.5 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-12
4. LU-204......................................................................................................................................................................C-13
4.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
4.2 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
4.3 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-13
4.4 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-13
4.5 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-13
5. ZU-606......................................................................................................................................................................C-14
5.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
5.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
5.3 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
5.4 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................................................C-16
5.5 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-16
5.6 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-16
5.7 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-16
6. FS-526......................................................................................................................................................................C-17
6.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
6.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
6.3 Stapling...................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
6.4 Max. paper capacity................................................................................................................................................................C-17
6.5 Type of paper..........................................................................................................................................................................C-18
6.6 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-18
6.7 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-19
6.8 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-19
7. SD-508......................................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.2 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.2.1 Saddle stitching.............................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.2.2 Folding..........................................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.2.3 Tri-folding......................................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.3 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.4 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-20
7.5 Consumables..........................................................................................................................................................................C-21
7.6 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-21
8. PK-516......................................................................................................................................................................C-22
8.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-22
8.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-22
8.3 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-22
8.4 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-23
8.5 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-23
8.6 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-23
9. JS-602.......................................................................................................................................................................C-24
9.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-24
9.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-24
9.3 Paper.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-24
9.4 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-24
9.5 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-24
9.6 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-24
10. PI-505......................................................................................................................................................................C-25
10.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-25
10.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-25
10.3 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-25
10.4 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-26
10.5 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-26
10.6 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-26
11. FS-527....................................................................................................................................................................C-27
11.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-27
11.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-27
11.3 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-27
11.3.1 Non sort/sort/group.....................................................................................................................................................C-27
11.3.2 Sort offset/group offset................................................................................................................................................C-27
11.3.3 Sort staple...................................................................................................................................................................C-28
11.4 Stapling.................................................................................................................................................................................C-28
11.5 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-28

ii
 11.6 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-29
11.7 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-29
12. PK-517....................................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.3 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.4 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.5 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-30
12.6 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-30
13. SD-509....................................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.2 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.2.1 Saddle stitching...........................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.2.2 Folding........................................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.3 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.4 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.5 Consumables........................................................................................................................................................................C-31
13.6 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-31
14. JS-603.....................................................................................................................................................................C-32
14.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-32
14.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-32
14.3 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-32
14.4 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-32
14.5 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-32
14.6 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-32
15. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105........................................................................................................................C-33
15.1 Available function for i-Option...............................................................................................................................................C-33
15.2 Web browser function............................................................................................................................................................C-33
15.3 Photo registration function.....................................................................................................................................................C-34

D OVERALL COMPOSITION............................................................................................................D-1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1 System front view......................................................................................................................................................................D-1
1.2 System rear view.......................................................................................................................................................................D-1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................................................D-3
3. PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................................................................D-4
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM....................................................................................................................................D-5
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS..................................................................................................................................D-6
6. IMAGE FORMING CONTROL....................................................................................................................................D-7
7 PROCESS SPEED......................................................................................................................................................D-8
E SERVICE TOOL.............................................................................................................................E-1
1. bizhub 502/552/602/652..............................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1 Service material list...................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2 CE tool list.................................................................................................................................................................................E-1
2. DF-618/DF-619...........................................................................................................................................................E-2
2.1 CE tool list.................................................................................................................................................................................E-2
3. SD-508........................................................................................................................................................................E-3
3.1 CE tool list.................................................................................................................................................................................E-3

F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................F-1
1. Concept of periodical maintenance.............................................................................................................................F-1
2. Periodical miantenance items......................................................................................................................................F-2
2.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652............................................................................................................................................................F-2
2.1.1 Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts).....................................................................................F-2
2.1.2 Periodical maintenance 3 (life counter; every 300,000 counts).......................................................................................F-2
2.1.3 Periodical maintenance 4 (life counter; every 600,000 counts).......................................................................................F-2
2.2 Option........................................................................................................................................................................................F-2
2.2.1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)..................................................................................................................................F-2
2.2.2 LU-204/301......................................................................................................................................................................F-3
2.2.3 ZU-606.............................................................................................................................................................................F-3
2.2.4 FS-526.............................................................................................................................................................................F-3
2.2.5 SD-508............................................................................................................................................................................F-3
2.2.6 PK-516.............................................................................................................................................................................F-4
2.2.7 JS-602.............................................................................................................................................................................F-4
2.2.8 PI-505..............................................................................................................................................................................F-4

iii
 2.2.9 FS-527.............................................................................................................................................................................F-4
3. Periodical replacement parts list..................................................................................................................................F-6
3.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652............................................................................................................................................................F-6
3.2 Option........................................................................................................................................................................................F-7
3.2.1 LU-204.............................................................................................................................................................................F-7
3.2.2 LU-301.............................................................................................................................................................................F-7
3.2.3 ZU-606.............................................................................................................................................................................F-7
3.2.4 FS-526.............................................................................................................................................................................F-7
3.2.5 SD-508............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.6 PI-505..............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
3.2.7 FS-527.............................................................................................................................................................................F-8
4. Periodical cleaning parts list........................................................................................................................................F-9
4.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652............................................................................................................................................................F-9
4.2 Option........................................................................................................................................................................................F-9
4.2.1 ZU-606.............................................................................................................................................................................F-9
4.2.2 FS-526.............................................................................................................................................................................F-9
4.2.3 SD-508............................................................................................................................................................................F-9
4.2.4 PK-516.............................................................................................................................................................................F-9
4.2.5 JS-602...........................................................................................................................................................................F-10
4.2.6 PI-505............................................................................................................................................................................F-10
4.2.7 FS-527...........................................................................................................................................................................F-10
5. CMS corresponding parts..........................................................................................................................................F-11
5.1 CMS corresponding parts........................................................................................................................................................F-11
5.2 CMS corresponding parts list...................................................................................................................................................F-11
5.3 Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set.........................................................................................................................F-11
6. Concept of parts life...................................................................................................................................................F-12
6.1 Life value of consumables and parts.......................................................................................................................................F-12
6.2 Conditions for life specifications values...................................................................................................................................F-12
6.3 Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part..................................F-13
6.3.1 Object parts...................................................................................................................................................................F-13
6.3.2 Control method..............................................................................................................................................................F-13
7. Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub 502/552/602/652....................................................................................F-14
7.1 Housing section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-14
7.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter..............................................................................................................................................F-14
7.1.2 Replacing the toner filter................................................................................................................................................F-14
7.2 Write section............................................................................................................................................................................F-14
7.2.1 Cleaning of the PH window...........................................................................................................................................F-14
7.3 Imaging unit section.................................................................................................................................................................F-15
7.3.1 Replacing the drum unit.................................................................................................................................................F-15
7.4 Developing section..................................................................................................................................................................F-18
7.4.1 Replacing the developing unit.......................................................................................................................................F-18
7.5 Toner supply section................................................................................................................................................................F-20
7.5.1 Replacing the toner cartridge........................................................................................................................................F-20
7.6 1st transfer section..................................................................................................................................................................F-21
7.6.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit......................................................................................................................................F-21
7.7 2nd transfer/separation section...............................................................................................................................................F-24
7.7.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit....................................................................................................................................F-24
7.8 Toner collection section...........................................................................................................................................................F-24
7.8.1 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port.........................................................................................F-24
7.8.2 Replacing the waste toner box......................................................................................................................................F-24
7.9 Paper feed section...................................................................................................................................................................F-25
7.9.1 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller......................................................................................................F-25
7.9.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy...................................................................................................................F-27
7.9.3 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller......................................................................................................F-28
7.9.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy...................................................................................................................F-30
7.9.5 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller......................................................................................................F-30
7.9.6 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller............................................................................................................................F-31
7.9.7 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller......................................................................................................F-32
7.9.8 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller............................................................................................................................F-33
7.9.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller..........................................................F-34
7.9.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy...........................................................................................F-35
7.10 Vertical conveyance section..................................................................................................................................................F-36
7.10.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover............................................................................................................................F-36
7.11 Registration section...............................................................................................................................................................F-37
7.11.1 Cleaning of the timing roller.........................................................................................................................................F-37
7.12 Fusing section........................................................................................................................................................................F-37
7.12.1 Replacing the fusing unit.............................................................................................................................................F-37
7.12.2 Cleaning of the IH coil unit...........................................................................................................................................F-38
7.13 Duplex section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-38

iv
 7.13.1 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers.......................................................................................................................F-38
8. Periodical maintenance procedure DF-618...............................................................................................................F-40
8.1 Take-up section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-40
8.1.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller........................................................................................................................F-40
8.1.2 Cleaning of the separation roller....................................................................................................................................F-40
8.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller / feed roller........................................................................................................................F-40
8.1.4 Replacing the separation roller......................................................................................................................................F-41
8.2 Transport section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-42
8.2.1 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls...............................................................................................................................F-42
8.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers............................................................................................................................F-43
8.3 Scanning section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-45
8.3.1 Cleaning of the scanning guide.....................................................................................................................................F-45
8.3.2 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section.......................................................................................................................F-45
9. Periodical maintenance procedure LU-204...............................................................................................................F-47
9.1 Paper feed section...................................................................................................................................................................F-47
9.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller...........................................................................................................................................F-47
9.1.2 Replacing the feed roller................................................................................................................................................F-47
9.1.3 Replacing the separation roller......................................................................................................................................F-48
10. Periodical maintenance procedure LU-301.............................................................................................................F-50
10.1 Paper feed section.................................................................................................................................................................F-50
10.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller.........................................................................................................................................F-50
10.1.2 Replacing the feed roller..............................................................................................................................................F-50
10.1.3 Replacing the separation roller....................................................................................................................................F-51
11. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-504..............................................................................................................F-53
11.1 Paper exit section..................................................................................................................................................................F-53
11.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll.......................................................................................................................................F-53
12. Periodical maintenance procedure ZU-606.............................................................................................................F-54
12.1 Punch section........................................................................................................................................................................F-54
12.1.1 Replacing the punch scraps conveyance motor (M7).................................................................................................F-54
12.1.2 Replacing the punch clutch (CL1)...............................................................................................................................F-54
13. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-526.............................................................................................................F-56
13.1 Paper exit section..................................................................................................................................................................F-56
13.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts..............................................................................................................................F-56
13.1.2 Replacing the paper exit roller/A.................................................................................................................................F-56
13.1.3 Replacing the stapler unit............................................................................................................................................F-57
13.1.4 Replacing the paddle/1................................................................................................................................................F-58
13.1.5 Replacing the paddle/2................................................................................................................................................F-59
14. Periodical maintenance procedure SD-508.............................................................................................................F-61
14.1 Stapler section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-61
14.1.1 Replacing the stapler unit............................................................................................................................................F-61
15. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-602..............................................................................................................F-63
15.1 Paper exit section..................................................................................................................................................................F-63
15.1.1 Cleaning of the transport rollers/exit rollers.................................................................................................................F-63
16. Periodical maintenance procedure PI-505..............................................................................................................F-64
16.1 Paper feed section.................................................................................................................................................................F-64
16.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the feed roller /Up..............................................................................................F-64
16.1.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the feed roller /Lw..............................................................................................F-65
16.1.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up....................................................................................F-65
16.1.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw....................................................................................F-66
17. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-527.............................................................................................................F-67
17.1 Paper exit section..................................................................................................................................................................F-67
17.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts..............................................................................................................................F-67
17.1.2 Replacing the upper paddles.......................................................................................................................................F-67
17.1.3 Replacing the lower paddles.......................................................................................................................................F-68

G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY....................................................................................................G-1
1. Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items...................................................................................................................G-1
1.1 Paint-locked screws..................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2 Red-painted screws..................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.3 Variable resistors on board.......................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.4 Removal of PWBs.....................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.5 Precautions for disassembly.....................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.6 Precautions during setup or transportation...............................................................................................................................G-1
1.7 Parts not allowed to be removed...............................................................................................................................................G-1
1.7.1 ZU-606............................................................................................................................................................................G-1
2. Units from which removing is prohibited.....................................................................................................................G-3
2.1 CCD unit....................................................................................................................................................................................G-3

v
 2.1.1 Reason for prohibition.....................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.2 PH unit......................................................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.2.1 Reason for prohibition.....................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.3 Fusing unit.................................................................................................................................................................................G-3
2.3.1 Reason for prohibition.....................................................................................................................................................G-3
3. bizhub 502/552/602/652.............................................................................................................................................G-4
3.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list............................................................................................................................................G-4
3.1.1 Exterior parts...................................................................................................................................................................G-4
3.1.2 Units................................................................................................................................................................................G-4
3.1.3 Boards.............................................................................................................................................................................G-4
3.1.4 Motors.............................................................................................................................................................................G-5
3.1.5 Clutches..........................................................................................................................................................................G-5
3.1.6 Others.............................................................................................................................................................................G-6
3.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Exterior parts)................................................................................................................G-6
3.2.1 Upper front door..............................................................................................................................................................G-6
3.2.2 Lower front door..............................................................................................................................................................G-6
3.2.3 Upper front cover /1........................................................................................................................................................G-7
3.2.4 Upper front cover /2........................................................................................................................................................G-7
3.2.5 Right front cover..............................................................................................................................................................G-7
3.2.6 Lower front cover............................................................................................................................................................G-8
3.2.7 Upper left cover...............................................................................................................................................................G-9
3.2.8 Lower left cover...............................................................................................................................................................G-9
3.2.9 Rear left cover.................................................................................................................................................................G-9
3.2.10 Paper exit rear cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-9
3.2.11 Scanner rear cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-10
3.2.12 Scanner right cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-10
3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1........................................................................................................................................G-10
3.2.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2........................................................................................................................................G-11
3.2.15 Scanner left cover.......................................................................................................................................................G-11
3.2.16 Scanner upper front cover..........................................................................................................................................G-11
3.2.17 Scanner front cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-12
3.2.18 USB interface cover....................................................................................................................................................G-12
3.2.19 Original glass..............................................................................................................................................................G-13
3.2.20 Interface cover/1.........................................................................................................................................................G-13
3.2.21 Interface cover/2.........................................................................................................................................................G-13
3.2.22 Rear right cover/1.......................................................................................................................................................G-14
3.2.23 Rear right cover/2.......................................................................................................................................................G-14
3.2.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover....................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1......................................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2......................................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.27 Lower rear cover.........................................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.28 Front right cover..........................................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.29 Control panel assy......................................................................................................................................................G-16
3.2.30 Exit tray (option: OT-503)............................................................................................................................................G-16
3.2.31 Tray 1/2.......................................................................................................................................................................G-17
3.2.32 Tray 3/4.......................................................................................................................................................................G-17
3.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Units)............................................................................................................................G-18
3.3.1 PH unit..........................................................................................................................................................................G-18
3.3.2 Duplex unit....................................................................................................................................................................G-19
3.3.3 Manual bypass tray unit................................................................................................................................................G-20
3.3.4 CCD unit.......................................................................................................................................................................G-21
3.3.5 Original glass moving unit.............................................................................................................................................G-22
3.3.6 Glass step sheet...........................................................................................................................................................G-23
3.3.7 Exposure unit................................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.3.8 Hard disk.......................................................................................................................................................................G-25
3.3.9 IH coil (FH1)..................................................................................................................................................................G-27
3.3.10 Intermediate transport roller assy...............................................................................................................................G-30
3.3.11 Main drive unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-31
3.3.12 LCC drive unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-32
3.3.13 Scanner chassis..........................................................................................................................................................G-35
3.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Boards)........................................................................................................................G-37
3.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN).............................................................................................................................G-37
3.4.2 Original glass position control board (OGPCB)............................................................................................................G-37
3.4.3 Inverter board (INVB)....................................................................................................................................................G-38
3.4.4 PH relay board (REYB/PH)...........................................................................................................................................G-39
3.4.5 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)...................................................................................................................G-39
3.4.6 DC power supply (DCPU).............................................................................................................................................G-40
3.4.7 Relay drive board (REDB)............................................................................................................................................G-42
3.4.8 Printer control board (PRCB)........................................................................................................................................G-43
3.4.9 How to open PWB box/1...............................................................................................................................................G-44

vi
 3.4.10 PCI board (PCIB)........................................................................................................................................................G-44
3.4.11 MFP board (MFPB).....................................................................................................................................................G-45
3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2.............................................................................................................................................G-47
3.4.13 High voltage unit/2 (HV2)............................................................................................................................................G-47
3.4.14 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB).............................................................................................................................G-48
3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1)............................................................................................................................................G-49
3.4.16 IH power supply (IHPU)..............................................................................................................................................G-52
3.4.17 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1).........................................................................................................................G-54
3.4.18 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2).........................................................................................................................G-54
3.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Motors).........................................................................................................................G-55
3.5.1 ADU transport motor/1 (M31)........................................................................................................................................G-55
3.5.2 ADU transport motor/2 (M32)........................................................................................................................................G-56
3.5.3 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27)...........................................................................G-56
3.5.4 Scanner motor (M201)..................................................................................................................................................G-59
3.5.5 Original glass moving motor (M202) ............................................................................................................................G-61
3.5.6 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)...............................................................................................................................G-62
3.5.7 Transport motor (M25)..................................................................................................................................................G-63
3.5.8 Vertical transport motor (M26)......................................................................................................................................G-63
3.5.9 Transfer belt motor (M1)...............................................................................................................................................G-64
3.5.10 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)....................................................................................................G-64
3.5.11 Registration motor (M2)..............................................................................................................................................G-65
3.5.12 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)......................................................................................................................G-67
3.5.13 Fusing motor (M30).....................................................................................................................................................G-67
3.5.14 Switchback motor (M33).............................................................................................................................................G-67
3.5.15 Exit motor (M4)...........................................................................................................................................................G-69
3.5.16 K PC drum motor (M18)..............................................................................................................................................G-70
3.5.17 K developing motor (M19)...........................................................................................................................................G-71
3.5.18 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)..............................................................................................................................................G-71
3.5.19 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)..............................................................................................................................................G-72
3.5.20 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)............................................................................................................................................G-72
3.5.21 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24)............................................................................................................................................G-73
3.5.22 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5).............................................................................................................................G-73
3.5.23 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7).............................................................................................................................G-74
3.5.24 Take-up motor (M22)..................................................................................................................................................G-74
3.5.25 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)..................................................................................................................................G-75
3.5.26 Cleaner motor (M38)...................................................................................................................................................G-76
3.5.27 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)....................................................................................................G-79
3.5.28 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)................................................................................................................................G-79
3.5.29 Toner supply motor/K (M12).......................................................................................................................................G-80
3.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Clutches)......................................................................................................................G-82
3.6.1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1).....................................................................................................................................G-82
3.6.2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2)..................................................................................................................................G-82
3.6.3 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)..................................................................................................................................G-83
3.6.4 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6)......................................................................................G-83
3.6.5 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7).....................................................................................................................................G-83
3.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Others).........................................................................................................................G-84
3.7.1 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)...............................................................................................................................G-84
3.7.2 Scanner drive cables....................................................................................................................................................G-85
3.7.3 Tray 3/4 lift wire.............................................................................................................................................................G-92
4. Option.......................................................................................................................................................................G-97
4.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list..........................................................................................................................................G-97
4.1.1 DF-618/SP-501.............................................................................................................................................................G-97
4.1.2 LU-204..........................................................................................................................................................................G-97
4.1.3 LU-301..........................................................................................................................................................................G-97
4.1.4 JS-504...........................................................................................................................................................................G-97
4.1.5 ZU-606..........................................................................................................................................................................G-98
4.1.6 FS-526..........................................................................................................................................................................G-98
4.1.7 PK-516..........................................................................................................................................................................G-99
4.1.8 SD-508..........................................................................................................................................................................G-99
4.1.9 JS-602...........................................................................................................................................................................G-99
4.1.10 PI-505.........................................................................................................................................................................G-99
4.1.11 FS-527........................................................................................................................................................................G-99
4.1.12 PK-517......................................................................................................................................................................G-100
4.1.13 SD-509......................................................................................................................................................................G-100
4.1.14 JS-603.......................................................................................................................................................................G-100
4.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (DF-618/SP-501).........................................................................................................G-101
4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)...................................................................................................................................................G-101
4.2.2 Front cover (DF-618)..................................................................................................................................................G-102
4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)...................................................................................................................................................G-102
4.2.4 Document feed tray front cover (DF-618)...................................................................................................................G-103

vii
 4.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-618)...........................................................................................................G-103
4.2.6 DF control board (DFCB) (DF-618).............................................................................................................................G-104
4.2.7 Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) (DF-618)......................................................................................G-105
4.2.8 Switch back solenoid (SD1) (DF-618).........................................................................................................................G-106
4.2.9 Exit switch back solenoid (SD2) (DF-618)..................................................................................................................G-107
4.2.10 Reading motor (M1) (DF-618)...................................................................................................................................G-107
4.2.11 Take-up motor (M2) (DF-618)...................................................................................................................................G-108
4.2.12 Registration motor (M7) (DF-618).............................................................................................................................G-108
4.2.13 Exit motor (M3) (DF-618)..........................................................................................................................................G-109
4.2.14 Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) (DF-618)...........................................................................................G-109
4.2.15 Cooling fan (FM1) (DF-618)......................................................................................................................................G-110
4.2.16 Replacing the stamp unit (SP-501)...........................................................................................................................G-111
4.2.17 Replacing the stamp (SP-501)..................................................................................................................................G-112
4.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (LU-204)......................................................................................................................G-112
4.3.1 Large capacity unit (LU-204).......................................................................................................................................G-112
4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)...................................................................................................................................................G-113
4.3.3 Front cover (LU-204)...................................................................................................................................................G-113
4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)...................................................................................................................................................G-114
4.3.5 Feed cover (LU-204)...................................................................................................................................................G-114
4.3.6 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-204)................................................................................................................................G-115
4.3.7 Lift-up motor (M1) (LU-204)........................................................................................................................................G-115
4.3.8 Paper feed motor (M2) (LU-204).................................................................................................................................G-115
4.3.9 Transport motor (M3) (LU-204)...................................................................................................................................G-116
4.3.10 Dehumidification heater (DH) (LU-204)....................................................................................................................G-117
4.3.11 Lift wire (LU-204)......................................................................................................................................................G-117
4.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (LU-301)......................................................................................................................G-126
4.4.1 Large capacity unit (LU-301).......................................................................................................................................G-126
4.4.2 Upper door (LU-301)...................................................................................................................................................G-126
4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)...................................................................................................................................................G-127
4.4.4 Front cover (LU-301)...................................................................................................................................................G-127
4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)...................................................................................................................................................G-128
4.4.6 Feed cover (LU-301)...................................................................................................................................................G-128
4.4.7 Lift wire (LU-301)........................................................................................................................................................G-129
4.4.8 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-301)................................................................................................................................G-136
4.4.9 Lift-up motor (M1) (LU-301)........................................................................................................................................G-137
4.4.10 Dehumidification heater (DH) (LU-301)....................................................................................................................G-137
4.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-504)......................................................................................................................G-138
4.5.1 Separator (JS-504).....................................................................................................................................................G-138
4.5.2 Front cover (JS-504)...................................................................................................................................................G-138
4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)..............................................................................................................................................G-139
4.5.4 Rear right cover (JS-504)............................................................................................................................................G-139
4.5.5 Upper tray (JS-504)....................................................................................................................................................G-139
4.5.6 Paper guide plate (JS-504).........................................................................................................................................G-140
4.5.7 JS control board (JSCB) (JS-504)..............................................................................................................................G-140
4.5.8 Transport motor (M1) (JS-504)...................................................................................................................................G-140
4.5.9 Route change motor (M3) (JS-504)............................................................................................................................G-141
4.5.10 Shift motor (M2) (JS-504).........................................................................................................................................G-141
4.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (ZU-606)......................................................................................................................G-144
4.6.1 Rear cover (ZU-606)...................................................................................................................................................G-144
4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606).................................................................................................................................................G-144
4.6.3 Right cover (ZU-606)..................................................................................................................................................G-144
4.6.4 Front cover (ZU-606)..................................................................................................................................................G-145
4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)................................................................................................................................................G-145
4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)....................................................................................................................................................G-147
4.6.7 Z folding/conveyance unit (ZU-606)............................................................................................................................G-147
4.6.8 Punch motor (M4) (ZU-606)........................................................................................................................................G-148
4.6.9 Main motor (M6) (ZU-606)..........................................................................................................................................G-149
4.6.10 Registration motor (M1) (ZU-606).............................................................................................................................G-150
4.6.11 Punch shift motor (M5) (ZU-606)..............................................................................................................................G-151
4.6.12 Main motor cooling fan (FM1) (ZU-606)....................................................................................................................G-151
4.6.13 ZU control board (ZUCB) (ZU-606)...........................................................................................................................G-152
4.6.14 Paper size detect board (PSDTB) (ZU-606).............................................................................................................G-152
4.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-526)......................................................................................................................G-152
4.7.1 Upper cover /1, Upper cover /2, Upper cover /3 (FS-526)..........................................................................................G-152
4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)...................................................................................................................................................G-153
4.7.3 Rear left cover (FS-526).............................................................................................................................................G-153
4.7.4 Front left cover (FS-526).............................................................................................................................................G-154
4.7.5 Right cover (FS-526)...................................................................................................................................................G-154
4.7.6 Main tray (Paper exit lower tray) (FS-526)..................................................................................................................G-154
4.7.7 Sub tray (Paper exit upper tray) (FS-526)...................................................................................................................G-154

viii
 4.7.8 Finisher (FS-526)........................................................................................................................................................G-155
4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)...............................................................................................................................G-155
4.7.10 FS control board (FS-526)........................................................................................................................................G-156
4.7.11 Transport control board (TRCB) (FS-526)................................................................................................................G-156
4.7.12 Transport motor/1 (M1) (FS-526)..............................................................................................................................G-157
4.7.13 Transport motor/2 (M2) (FS-526)..............................................................................................................................G-157
4.7.14 Bypass transport motor (M3) (FS-526).....................................................................................................................G-158
4.7.15 Exit roller motor (M4) (FS-526).................................................................................................................................G-158
4.7.16 Main tray lift motor (M5) (FS-526).............................................................................................................................G-160
4.7.17 Paper output roller motor (M6) (FS-526)...................................................................................................................G-160
4.7.18 Stacker entrance motor (M10) (FS-526)...................................................................................................................G-160
4.7.19 2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) (FS-526)..................................................................................................G-161
4.7.20 Trail edge paddle motor (M15) (FS-526)..................................................................................................................G-161
4.7.21 Paddle motor (M16) (FS-526)...................................................................................................................................G-162
4.7.22 Stacker plate motor (M17) (FS-526).........................................................................................................................G-163
4.7.23 Rewind paddle motor (M18) (FS-526)......................................................................................................................G-163
4.7.24 Sub tray paper exit route (FS-526)...........................................................................................................................G-165
4.7.25 Route change gate solenoid (SD1) (FS-526)............................................................................................................G-166
4.7.26 Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) (FS-526).....................................................................................................................G-167
4.7.27 Switch back solenoid (SD4) (FS-526).......................................................................................................................G-167
4.7.28 Transport motor (M201) (FS-526).............................................................................................................................G-168
4.7.29 Fan motor/1 (FM1) (FS-526).....................................................................................................................................G-169
4.7.30 Fan motor/2 (FM2) (FS-526).....................................................................................................................................G-169
4.7.31 Lift wire (FS-526)......................................................................................................................................................G-170
4.8 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PK-516)......................................................................................................................G-173
4.8.1 Punch kit (PK-516)......................................................................................................................................................G-173
4.8.2 Punch oscillating motor (M302) (PK-516)...................................................................................................................G-175
4.8.3 Punch drive motor (M301) (PK-516)...........................................................................................................................G-175
4.9 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (SD-508)......................................................................................................................G-176
4.9.1 Front cover (SD-508)..................................................................................................................................................G-176
4.9.2 Right cover (SD-508)..................................................................................................................................................G-176
4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)..........................................................................................................................................G-176
4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)..................................................................................................................................................G-176
4.9.5 Paper exit tray (SD-508).............................................................................................................................................G-178
4.9.6 SD drive board (SDDB) (SD-508)...............................................................................................................................G-179
4.9.7 Center staple alignment motor /F (M20) (SD-508)......................................................................................................G-179
4.9.8 Center staple alignment motor /R (M21) (SD-508).....................................................................................................G-180
4.9.9 Leading edge stopper motor (M22) (SD-508).............................................................................................................G-180
4.9.10 Center staple motor (M23) (SD-508)........................................................................................................................G-180
4.9.11 Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26) (SD-508)....................................................................................................G-181
4.9.12 Center staple paddle/T (M29) (SD-508)....................................................................................................................G-181
4.9.13 Transport motor (M33) (SD-508)..............................................................................................................................G-182
4.9.14 Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5) (SD-508).............................................................................................................G-182
4.9.15 Exit grip solenoid (SD6) (SD-508).............................................................................................................................G-183
4.10 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-602)....................................................................................................................G-183
4.10.1 Separator (JS-602)...................................................................................................................................................G-183
4.10.2 Front cover (JS-602).................................................................................................................................................G-184
4.10.3 Rear cover (JS-602)..................................................................................................................................................G-184
4.10.4 3rd entrance switching solenoid (SD404) (JS-602)..................................................................................................G-185
4.11 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PI-505).....................................................................................................................G-185
4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)................................................................................................................................................G-185
4.11.2 Rear cover (PI-505)..................................................................................................................................................G-185
4.11.3 Operation panel cover assy (PI-505)........................................................................................................................G-186
4.11.4 Post inserter (PI-505)................................................................................................................................................G-186
4.11.5 PI drive board (PIDB) (PI-505)..................................................................................................................................G-187
4.11.6 PI control board (PIOB) (PI-505)...............................................................................................................................G-187
4.12 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-527)....................................................................................................................G-188
4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)...............................................................................................................................................G-188
4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527).................................................................................................................................................G-188
4.12.3 Front door (FS-527)..................................................................................................................................................G-188
4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)......................................................................................................................................G-189
4.12.5 Front lower cover (FS-527).......................................................................................................................................G-189
4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)......................................................................................................................................................G-189
4.12.7 Horizontal transport unit (FS-527).............................................................................................................................G-190
4.12.8 Stapler unit (FS-527).................................................................................................................................................G-191
4.12.9 FS control board (FSCB) (FS-527)...........................................................................................................................G-191
4.12.10 Paper passage motor/1 (M1) (FS-527)...................................................................................................................G-192
4.12.11 Duplex path switching motor (M2) (FS-527)...........................................................................................................G-192
4.12.12 Exit motor (M5) (FS-527)........................................................................................................................................G-193
4.12.13 Paper passage motor/2 (M3) (FS-527)...................................................................................................................G-194

ix
 4.12.14 Conveyance motor (M4) (FS-527)..........................................................................................................................G-195
4.12.15 Upper lower path switching motor (M6) (FS-527)...................................................................................................G-196
4.12.16 Tray1 path switching motor (M8) (FS-527).............................................................................................................G-197
4.12.17 Exit roller retraction motor (M9) (FS-527)...............................................................................................................G-197
4.12.18 Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10) (FS-527).........................................................................................G-197
4.12.19 Stapler movement motor (M11) (FS-527)...............................................................................................................G-198
4.12.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12) (FS-527).......................................................................................................G-198
4.12.21 Elevate motor (M15) (FS-527)................................................................................................................................G-199
4.12.22 Tray2 shift motor (M16) (FS-527)...........................................................................................................................G-199
4.12.23 Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1) (FS-527)..................................................................................................G-200
4.13 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PK-517)....................................................................................................................G-201
4.13.1 Punch kit (PK-517)....................................................................................................................................................G-201
4.14 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (SD-509)....................................................................................................................G-202
4.14.1 Front cover (SD-509)................................................................................................................................................G-202
4.14.2 Right cover (SD-509)................................................................................................................................................G-202
4.14.3 Staple unit cover (SD-509)........................................................................................................................................G-203
4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)................................................................................................................................................G-203
4.14.5 Paper exit tray (SD-509)...........................................................................................................................................G-205
4.14.6 Staple unit (SD-509).................................................................................................................................................G-205
4.14.7 SD drive board (SDDB) (SD-509).............................................................................................................................G-206
4.14.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20) (SD-509)...........................................................................................................G-207
4.14.9 Upper paddle motor (M21) (SD-509)........................................................................................................................G-207
4.14.10 Lower paddle motor (M22) (SD-509)......................................................................................................................G-208
4.14.11 Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) (SD-509)..................................................................................................G-209
4.14.12 Center staple alignment motor/F (M24) (SD-509)...................................................................................................G-209
4.14.13 Center fold roller motor (M25) (SD-509).................................................................................................................G-210
4.14.14 Center fold plate motor (M26) (SD-509).................................................................................................................G-210
4.14.15 Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3) (SD-509)...........................................................................................................G-210
4.15 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-603)....................................................................................................................G-211
4.15.1 Separator (JS-603)...................................................................................................................................................G-211
4.15.2 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) (JS-603)......................................................................................................G-212
5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS..................................................................................................................G-214
5.1 Installing the key counter......................................................................................................................................................G-214
5.1.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................G-214
5.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................G-214
5.2 Installing the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205).........................................................................................................G-217
5.2.1 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................G-217

H CLEANING/LUBRICATION...........................................................................................................H-1
1. bizhub 502/552/602/652..............................................................................................................................................H-1
1.1 Cleaning parts list......................................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.2 Need lubrication parts list..........................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.3 Cleaning procedure...................................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.3.1 Transfer belt unit.............................................................................................................................................................H-1
1.3.2 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller.............................................................................................................................H-1
1.3.3 Tray 1 separation roller...................................................................................................................................................H-2
1.3.4 Tray 1 transport roller......................................................................................................................................................H-2
1.3.5 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller.............................................................................................................................H-2
1.3.6 Tray 2 separation roller...................................................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.7 Tray 2 transport roller......................................................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.8 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller.............................................................................................................................H-3
1.3.9 Tray 3 separation roller...................................................................................................................................................H-4
1.3.10 Tray 3 transport roller....................................................................................................................................................H-4
1.3.11 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller...........................................................................................................................H-5
1.3.12 Tray 4 separation roller.................................................................................................................................................H-5
1.3.13 Tray 4 transport roller....................................................................................................................................................H-6
1.3.14 Manual bypass tray feed roller......................................................................................................................................H-6
1.3.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller.................................................................................................................................H-6
1.3.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller............................................................................................................................H-6
1.3.17 Intermediate transport roller..........................................................................................................................................H-7
1.3.18 Original glass................................................................................................................................................................H-7
1.3.19 Scanner rails.................................................................................................................................................................H-8
1.3.20 Mirros (1ST/2nd/3rd).....................................................................................................................................................H-8
1.3.21 Lens..............................................................................................................................................................................H-8
1.3.22 CCD sensor...................................................................................................................................................................H-8
1.4 Lubrication procedure................................................................................................................................................................H-9
1.4.1 Fusing unit.......................................................................................................................................................................H-9
2. Option........................................................................................................................................................................H-11
2.1 Cleaning parts list....................................................................................................................................................................H-11
2.1.1 LU-204..........................................................................................................................................................................H-11

x
 2.1.2 LU-301..........................................................................................................................................................................H-11
2.1.3 PI-505............................................................................................................................................................................H-11
2.2 Cleaning procedure (LU-204)..................................................................................................................................................H-11
2.2.1 Pick-up roller.................................................................................................................................................................H-11
2.2.2 Feed roller.....................................................................................................................................................................H-12
2.2.3 Separation roller............................................................................................................................................................H-12
2.2.4 Transport roller..............................................................................................................................................................H-12
2.3 Cieaning procedure (LU-301)..................................................................................................................................................H-12
2.3.1 Pick-up roller.................................................................................................................................................................H-13
2.3.2 Feed roller.....................................................................................................................................................................H-13
2.3.3 Separation roller............................................................................................................................................................H-13
2.3.4 Transport roller..............................................................................................................................................................H-13
2.4 Cleaning procedure (PI-505)...................................................................................................................................................H-14
2.4.1 Pick-up roller /Up, feed roller /Up, separationroller /Up.................................................................................................H-14
2.4.2 Pick-up roller /Lw, feed roller /Lw, separationroller /Lw.................................................................................................H-14
2.4.3 Transport roller /Up.......................................................................................................................................................H-15
2.4.4 Transport roller /Lw.......................................................................................................................................................H-15

I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.................................................................................................................I-1
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION............................................................................................I-1
1.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................................I-1
1.2 Advance checks..........................................................................................................................................................................I-1
2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT...................................................................................................................................I-2
2.1 Use..............................................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................I-2
3. UTILITY........................................................................................................................................................................I-3
3.1 List of utility mode (outline).........................................................................................................................................................I-3
3.2 List of utility mode (detail)...........................................................................................................................................................I-4
3.2.1 One-Touch/User Box Registration....................................................................................................................................I-4
3.2.2 User Settings....................................................................................................................................................................I-5
3.2.3 Administrator Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-8
3.2.4 Other Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-17
3.3 Starting/Exiting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-19
3.3.1 Starting procedure..........................................................................................................................................................I-19
3.3.2 Exiting procedure............................................................................................................................................................I-19
4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX REGISTRATION)..............................................................................................I-20
One-Touch User Box Registration-Outline.......................................................................................................................................I-20
4.1 Create One-Touch destination..................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.1.1 Address Book (Public)/(Personal)...................................................................................................................................I-20
4.1.2 Group..............................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.1.3 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.2 Create User Box.......................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.2.1 Public/Personal User Box...............................................................................................................................................I-21
4.2.2 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.2.3 Relay User Box...............................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations................................................................................................................................................I-22
4.3.1 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations..............................................................................................................................I-22
5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)......................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1 System Settings........................................................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.1 Language Selection........................................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.2 Measurement Unit Settings............................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.3 Paper Tray Settings........................................................................................................................................................I-24
5.1.4 Auto Color Level Adjust..................................................................................................................................................I-25
5.1.5 Power Save Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-25
5.1.6 Output Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-26
5.1.7 AE Level Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................I-26
5.1.8 Auto Paper Select for Small Original..............................................................................................................................I-26
5.1.9 Blank Page Print Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-27
5.1.10 Page Number Print Position.........................................................................................................................................I-27
5.1.11 Select Keyboard...........................................................................................................................................................I-27
5.2 Custom Display Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-28
5.2.1 Copier Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-28
5.2.2 Scan/Fax Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-29
5.2.3 User Box Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-30
5.2.4 Copy Screen...................................................................................................................................................................I-30
5.2.5 Fax Active Screen...........................................................................................................................................................I-31
5.2.6 Color Selection Settings.................................................................................................................................................I-31
5.2.7 Left Panel Display Default..............................................................................................................................................I-31
5.2.8 Search Option Settings...................................................................................................................................................I-31

xi
 5.3 Copier Settings.........................................................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.1 Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple.............................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.2 Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet.....................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.3 Auto Sort/Group Selection..............................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.4 Default Copy Settings.....................................................................................................................................................I-32
5.3.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings....................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.6 When AMS Direction is Incorrect....................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.7 Separate Scan Output Method.......................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.8 Enlargement Rotation.....................................................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.9 Auto Zoom (Platen).........................................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.10 Auto Zoom (ADF)..........................................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.11 Specify Default Tray when APS Off..............................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.12 Select Tray for Insert Sheet..........................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.13 Tri-Fold Print Side.........................................................................................................................................................I-34
5.3.14 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification....................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.15 Half-Fold Specification..................................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.16 Print Jobs During Copy Operation................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.17 Automatic Image Rotation............................................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.18 Finishing Program.........................................................................................................................................................I-36
5.3.19 Card Shot Settings........................................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4 Scan/Fax Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.1 JPEG Compression Level...............................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.2 Black Compression Level...............................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.3 TWAIN Lock Time...........................................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.4 Default Scan/Fax Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings....................................................................................................................................I-37
5.4.6 Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level.........................................................................................................................I-38
5.4.7 Color TIFF Type..............................................................................................................................................................I-38
5.4.8 OCR Operation Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-38
5.4.9 Graphic Outlining............................................................................................................................................................I-38
5.5 Printer Settings.........................................................................................................................................................................I-39
5.5.1 Basic Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-39
5.5.2 Paper Setting..................................................................................................................................................................I-40
5.5.3 PCL Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-42
5.5.4 PS Setting.......................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.5.5 XPS Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.5.6 Print Reports...................................................................................................................................................................I-43
5.5.7 TIFF Image Paper Setting..............................................................................................................................................I-43
5.6 Change Password.....................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.6.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.6.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.7 Change E-mail Address............................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.7.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.7.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.8 Change Icon..............................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.8.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.8.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.9 Register Authentication Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-44
5.9.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.10 Register Authentication Settings-Default Application Selection..............................................................................................I-44
5.10.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.10.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting....................................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11.1 Link File Error Notification.............................................................................................................................................I-44
5.11.2 Proxy Server Use..........................................................................................................................................................I-45
5.11.3 Print..............................................................................................................................................................................I-45
6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS)..................................................................................................................I-46
Administrator Settings-Outline.........................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.1 System Settings-Power Save Settings.....................................................................................................................................I-46
6.1.1 Low Power Mode Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-46
6.1.2 Sleep Mode Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.1.3 Power Save Key.............................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.1.4 Enter Power Save Mode.................................................................................................................................................I-46
6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-47
6.2 System Settings-Output Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-47
6.2.1 Print/Fax Output Settings................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.2.2 Output Tray Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.2.3 Shift Output Each Job.....................................................................................................................................................I-47
6.3 System Settings-Date/Time Settings........................................................................................................................................I-48
6.3.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-48

xii
 6.3.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................I-48
6.4 System Settings-Daylight Saving Time.....................................................................................................................................I-48
6.4.1 Use.................................................................................................................................................................................I-48
6.4.2 Default setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-48
6.4.3 Setting item.....................................................................................................................................................................I-48
6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings...................................................................................................................................I-48
6.5.1 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings.....................................................................................................................................I-48
6.5.2 Time Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-48
6.5.3 Date Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-48
6.5.4 Select Time for Power Save...........................................................................................................................................I-48
6.5.5 Password for Non-Business Hours.................................................................................................................................I-49
6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access.....................................................................................................................................I-49
6.6.1 Copy Program Lock Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-49
6.6.2 Delete Saved Copy Program..........................................................................................................................................I-49
6.6.3 Restrict Access to Job Settings......................................................................................................................................I-49
6.6.4 Restrict Operation...........................................................................................................................................................I-50
6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment.........................................................................................................................................I-51
6.7.1 AE Level Adjustment......................................................................................................................................................I-51
6.7.2 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................I-51
6.7.3 Printer Adjustment-Centering.........................................................................................................................................I-52
6.7.4 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment: Duplex Side 2.......................................................................................I-52
6.7.5 Printer Adjustment-Centering: Duplex 2nd Side.............................................................................................................I-53
6.7.6 Printer Adjustment-Erase Leading Edge........................................................................................................................I-53
6.7.7 Printer Adjustment-Vertical Adjustment..........................................................................................................................I-54
6.7.8 Printer Adjustment-Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................I-54
6.7.9 Finisher Adjustment-Center Staple Position...................................................................................................................I-55
6.7.10 Finisher Adjustment-Half-Fold Position........................................................................................................................I-55
6.7.11 Finisher Adjustment-Tri-Fold Position Adjustment........................................................................................................I-56
6.7.12 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment.............................................................................................I-56
6.7.13 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment.........................................................................................I-57
6.7.14 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment...........................................................................................I-58
6.7.15 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment..................................................................................................I-58
6.7.16 Finisher Adjustment-Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment...............................................................................I-58
6.7.17 Finisher Adjustment-Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment...........................................................................I-59
6.7.18 Finisher Adjustment-1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment.................................................I-59
6.7.19 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor...................................................................................................I-60
6.7.20 Finisher Adjustment-Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment.............................................................................................I-60
6.7.21 Density Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................................I-61
6.7.22 Image Stabilization-Image Stabilization Only...............................................................................................................I-61
6.7.23 Paper Separation Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................I-61
6.7.24 Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-61
6.7.25 Scanner Area................................................................................................................................................................I-62
6.7.26 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge......................................................................................................I-62
6.7.27 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Centering.............................................................................................................I-63
6.7.28 Scanner Area-Horizontal Adjustment...........................................................................................................................I-63
6.7.29 Scanner Area-Vertical Adjustment................................................................................................................................I-64
6.7.30 ADF Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................I-64
6.7.31 Line Detection-Prior Detection Setting..........................................................................................................................I-66
6.7.32 Line Detection-Detection While Feeding Setting..........................................................................................................I-67
6.7.33 Trail Edge Adjust..........................................................................................................................................................I-67
6.7.34 User Paper Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-67
6.7.35 Erase Adjustment-Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings.....................................................................................I-68
6.7.36 PS Designer Settings....................................................................................................................................................I-68
6.8 System Settings-List/Counter...................................................................................................................................................I-68
6.8.1 Management List............................................................................................................................................................I-68
6.8.2 Paper Size/Type Counter...............................................................................................................................................I-68
6.8.3 Meter Counter List..........................................................................................................................................................I-69
6.8.4 Check Consumables List................................................................................................................................................I-69
6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-69
6.9.1 System Auto Reset.........................................................................................................................................................I-69
6.9.2 Auto Reset......................................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.9.3 Job Reset........................................................................................................................................................................I-70
6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings........................................................................................................................................I-71
6.10.1 Delete Unused User Box..............................................................................................................................................I-71
6.10.2 Delete Secure Print Documents...................................................................................................................................I-71
6.10.3 Auto Delete Secure Document.....................................................................................................................................I-71
6.10.4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time.........................................................................................................................................I-71
6.10.5 ID & Print Delete Time..................................................................................................................................................I-71
6.10.6 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................................................I-72
6.10.7 External Memory Function Settings..............................................................................................................................I-72

xiii
 6.10.8 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................................................I-72
6.10.9 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting..............................................................................................................................I-72
6.10.10 Document Delete Time Setting...................................................................................................................................I-73
6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting..................................................................................................................................I-73
6.11.1 Original Glass Original Size Detect..............................................................................................................................I-73
6.11.2 Foolscap Size Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-73
6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings............................................................................................................................................I-73
6.12.1 Header/Footer Settings.................................................................................................................................................I-73
6.12.2 Fax TX Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings............................................................................................................................I-74
6.13.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.13.2 Default setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.13.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings..............................................................................................................................I-74
6.14.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.14.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings........................................................................................................................I-74
6.15.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.15.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.16 System Settings-Default Bypass Paper Type Setting.............................................................................................................I-74
6.16.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.16.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position........................................................................................................................I-74
6.17.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.17.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-74
6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting...........................................................................................................................I-75
6.18.1 Original direction setting display...................................................................................................................................I-75
6.19 Administrator/Machine Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-75
6.19.1 Administrator Registration............................................................................................................................................I-75
6.19.2 Input Machine Address.................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.20 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create One-Touch Destination........................................................................................I-75
6.20.1 Address Book...............................................................................................................................................................I-75
6.20.2 Group............................................................................................................................................................................I-76
6.20.3 E-mail Settings..............................................................................................................................................................I-76
6.21 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box..............................................................................................................I-77
6.21.1 Public/Personal User Box.............................................................................................................................................I-77
6.21.2 Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................................................I-77
6.21.3 Relay User Box.............................................................................................................................................................I-77
6.21.4 Annotation User Box.....................................................................................................................................................I-77
6.22 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List............................................................................I-77
6.22.1 Address Book List.........................................................................................................................................................I-77
6.22.2 Group List.....................................................................................................................................................................I-77
6.22.3 Program List.................................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.22.4 E-mail Subject/Text List................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes....................................................................................I-78
6.23.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.23.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.24 User Authentication/Account Track-General Settings.............................................................................................................I-78
6.24.1 User Authentication......................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.24.2 Public User Access.......................................................................................................................................................I-78
6.24.3 Account Track...............................................................................................................................................................I-79
6.24.4 Account Track Input Method.........................................................................................................................................I-79
6.24.5 Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track......................................................................................................I-79
6.24.6 When # of Jobs Reach Maximum.................................................................................................................................I-79
6.24.7 Number of User Counters Assigned.............................................................................................................................I-79
6.24.8 Ticket Hold Time Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-80
6.25 User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting............................................................................................I-80
6.25.1 Administrative Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-80
6.25.2 User Registration..........................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.25.3 User Counter................................................................................................................................................................I-81
6.26 User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Settings..................................................................................................I-82
6.26.1 Account Track Registration...........................................................................................................................................I-82
6.26.2 Account Track Counter.................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.27 User Authentication/Account Track-Print without Authentication............................................................................................I-82
6.27.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.27.2 Default setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.27.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.28 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List............................................................................................................I-82
6.28.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.28.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-82

xiv
6.29 User Authentication/Account Track-External Server Settings.................................................................................................I-82
6.29.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.29.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.29.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-82
6.30 User Authentication/Account Track-Limiting Access to Destinations......................................................................................I-83
6.30.1 Create Group................................................................................................................................................................I-83
6.30.2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations............................................................................................................................I-83
6.30.3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users......................................................................................................................................I-83
6.31 User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings.......................................................................................I-83
6.31.1 General Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-83
6.31.2 Logoff Settings..............................................................................................................................................................I-83
6.32 User Authentication/Account Track-User/Account Common Setting......................................................................................I-84
6.32.1 Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting................................................................................................................I-84
6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings...................................................................................................I-84
6.33.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.33.2 Default setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.33.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.34 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings................................................................................I-84
6.34.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.34.2 Default setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.34.3 Setting item...................................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.35 Network Settings-TCP/IP Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-84
6.35.1 TCP/IP Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.35.2 IPv4 Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-84
6.35.3 IPv6 Settings.................................................................................................................................................................I-85
6.35.4 DNS Host......................................................................................................................................................................I-85
6.35.5 DNS Domain.................................................................................................................................................................I-86
6.35.6 DNS Server Settings (IPv4)..........................................................................................................................................I-86
6.35.7 DNS Server Settings (IPv6)..........................................................................................................................................I-87
6.35.8 IPsec Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-87
6.35.9 IPsec Settings-IKE Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-87
6.35.10 IPsec Settings-IPsec SA Settings...............................................................................................................................I-88
6.35.11 IPsec Settings-Peer....................................................................................................................................................I-89
6.35.12 IP Filtering (Permit Access)........................................................................................................................................I-90
6.35.13 IP Filtering (Deny Access)..........................................................................................................................................I-90
6.35.14 RAW Port Number......................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.35.15 LLMNR Setting...........................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.36 Network Settings-NetWare Settings.......................................................................................................................................I-90
6.36.1 IPX Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-90
6.36.2 NetWare Print Settings.................................................................................................................................................I-91
6.36.3 P Server Settings: Print Server Name/Print Server Password.....................................................................................I-91
6.36.4 P Server Settings: Polling Interval................................................................................................................................I-91
6.36.5 P Server Settings: NDS/Bindery Setting.......................................................................................................................I-92
6.36.6 P Server Settings: File Server Name............................................................................................................................I-92
6.36.7 P Server Settings: NDS Context Name.......................................................................................................................I-92
6.36.8 P Server Settings: NDS Tree Name.............................................................................................................................I-92
6.36.9 Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Print Server Name..............................................................................................................I-92
6.36.10 Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Printer Number.................................................................................................................I-92
6.36.11 User Authentication Setting (NDS).............................................................................................................................I-92
6.37 Network Settings-http Server Settings....................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.1 http Server Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.2 PSWC Settings.............................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.3 IPP Settings..................................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.4 Accept IPP jobs............................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.5 Support Information......................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.6 Printer Information........................................................................................................................................................I-93
6.37.7 IPP Authentication Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-94
6.37.8 Authentication Method..................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.37.9 User Name....................................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.37.10 Password....................................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.37.11 realm...........................................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.38 Network Settings-FTP Settings...............................................................................................................................................I-94
6.38.1 FTP TX Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-94
6.38.2 FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address......................................................................................................................I-95
6.38.3 FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Port Number...............................................................................................................I-95
6.38.4 FTP TX Settings: Port No.............................................................................................................................................I-95
6.38.5 FTP TX Settings: Connection Timeout.........................................................................................................................I-95
6.38.6 FTP Server Settings.....................................................................................................................................................I-95
6.39 Network Settings-SMB Setting................................................................................................................................................I-95
SMB Setting..............................................................................................................................................................................I-95

xv
 6.39.1 Client Settings...............................................................................................................................................................I-95
6.39.2 Print Settings................................................................................................................................................................I-96
6.39.3 Print Settings: NetBIOS Name......................................................................................................................................I-96
6.39.4 Print Settings: Print Service Name...............................................................................................................................I-96
6.39.5 Print Settings: Workgroup.............................................................................................................................................I-96
6.39.6 WINS Settings..............................................................................................................................................................I-97
6.39.7 WINS Settings: Automatic Retrieval Settings...............................................................................................................I-97
6.39.8 WINS Settings: WINS Server Address 1, 2..................................................................................................................I-97
6.39.9 WINS Settings: Node Type Setting...............................................................................................................................I-97
6.39.10 Direct Hosting Setting.................................................................................................................................................I-97
6.40 Network Settings-LDAP Settings............................................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.1 Enabling LDAP.............................................................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.2 Setting Up LDAP...........................................................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.3 Setting Up LDAP-LDAP Server Name..........................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.4 Setting Up LDAP-Max. Search Results........................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.5 Setting Up LDAP-Timeout............................................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.6 Setting Up LDAP-Initial Setting for Search Details.......................................................................................................I-98
6.40.7 Setting Up LDAP-Check Connection............................................................................................................................I-98
6.40.8 Setting Up LDAP-Reset All Settings.............................................................................................................................I-99
6.40.9 Setting Up LDAP-Server Address.................................................................................................................................I-99
6.40.10 Setting Up LDAP-Search Base...................................................................................................................................I-99
6.40.11 Setting Up LDAP-SSL Setting....................................................................................................................................I-99
6.40.12 Setting Up LDAP-Port Number...................................................................................................................................I-99
6.40.13 Setting Up LDAP-Port Number (SSL).........................................................................................................................I-99
6.40.14 Setting Up LDAP-Certificate Verification Level Settings.............................................................................................I-99
6.40.15 Setting Up LDAP-Authentication Type......................................................................................................................I-100
6.40.16 Setting Up LDAP-Select Server Authentication Method...........................................................................................I-100
6.40.17 Setting Up LDAP-Referral Setting............................................................................................................................I-100
6.40.18 Setting Up LDAP-Login Name..................................................................................................................................I-100
6.40.19 Setting Up LDAP-Password......................................................................................................................................I-101
6.40.20 Setting Up LDAP-Domain Name..............................................................................................................................I-101
6.40.21 Default LDAP Server Setting....................................................................................................................................I-101
6.41 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail TX (SMTP)...........................................................................................................I-101
6.41.1 E-mail TX (SMTP).......................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.41.2 Scan to E-mail............................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.41.3 Status Notification.......................................................................................................................................................I-101
6.41.4 Total Counter Notification...........................................................................................................................................I-102
6.41.5 SMTP Server Address................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.41.6 Binary Division............................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.41.7 Divided Mail Size........................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.41.8 Connection Timeout....................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.41.9 Server Capacity..........................................................................................................................................................I-102
6.41.10 SSL/TLS Setting.......................................................................................................................................................I-103
6.41.11 Port No......................................................................................................................................................................I-103
6.41.12 Port Number (SSL)...................................................................................................................................................I-103
6.41.13 Certificate Verification Level Settings.......................................................................................................................I-103
6.41.14 Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication.......................................................................................................................I-103
6.41.15 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication...................................................................................................I-103
6.41.16 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Time.................................................................................................................I-104
6.42 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail RX (POP).............................................................................................................I-104
6.42.1 E-mail RX (POP).........................................................................................................................................................I-104
6.42.2 POP Server Address..................................................................................................................................................I-104
6.42.3 Connection Timeout....................................................................................................................................................I-104
6.42.4 SSL Setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-104
6.42.5 Port No........................................................................................................................................................................I-104
6.42.6 Port Number (SSL).....................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.42.7 Certificate Verification Level Settings.........................................................................................................................I-105
6.42.8 Login Name................................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.42.9 Password....................................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.42.10 APOP Authentication................................................................................................................................................I-105
6.42.11 Check for New Messages.........................................................................................................................................I-105
6.42.12 Polling Interval..........................................................................................................................................................I-106
6.43 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-S/MIME Communication Settings...................................................................................I-106
6.43.1 S/MIME Communication Settings...............................................................................................................................I-106
6.43.2 Digital Signature.........................................................................................................................................................I-106
6.43.3 E-mail Text Encryption Method...................................................................................................................................I-106
6.43.4 Print S/MIME Information............................................................................................................................................I-106
6.43.5 Automatically Obtain Certificates................................................................................................................................I-107
6.43.6 Certificate Verification Level Settings.........................................................................................................................I-107
6.44 Network Settings-SNMP Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-107

xvi
 6.44.1 SNMP Setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-107
6.44.2 UDP Port Number.......................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.44.3 SNMP v1/v2c Settings................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.44.4 SNMP v3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................I-108
6.44.5 TRAP Setting..............................................................................................................................................................I-110
6.44.6 TRAP Setting When Authentication failed..................................................................................................................I-110
6.45 Network Settings-AppleTalk Settings....................................................................................................................................I-110
6.45.1 AppleTalk Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-110
6.45.2 Printer Name...............................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.45.3 Zone Name.................................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.45.4 Current Zone...............................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.46 Network Settings-Bonjour Setting.........................................................................................................................................I-111
6.46.1 Bonjour Setting...........................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.46.2 Bonjour Name.............................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.47 Network Settings-TCP Socket Settings................................................................................................................................I-111
6.47.1 TCP Socket.................................................................................................................................................................I-111
6.47.2 TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)..........................................................................................................................................I-112
6.48 Network Settings-Network Fax Setting.................................................................................................................................I-112
6.48.1 Network Fax Function Settings...................................................................................................................................I-112
6.48.2 SMTP TX Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.49 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Client Settings.............................................................................................I-113
6.49.1 WebDAV Client Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-113
6.49.2 Proxy Server Address.................................................................................................................................................I-113
6.49.3 Proxy Server Port Number..........................................................................................................................................I-114
6.49.4 User Name..................................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.49.5 Password....................................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.49.6 Connection Timeout....................................................................................................................................................I-114
6.49.7 Server Authentication Character Code.......................................................................................................................I-114
6.49.8 Certificate Verification Level Settings.........................................................................................................................I-114
6.50 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Server Settings...........................................................................................I-115
6.50.1 WebDAV Server Settings...........................................................................................................................................I-115
6.50.2 SSL Setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.50.3 Password Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.51 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Web Service Common Settings............................................................................I-115
6.51.1 Friendly Name............................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.51.2 Publication Service.....................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.51.3 SSL Setting.................................................................................................................................................................I-115
6.51.4 Certificate Verification Level Settings.........................................................................................................................I-116
6.52 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Printer Settings.....................................................................................................I-116
6.52.1 Printer Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.52.2 Printer Name...............................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.52.3 Printer Location...........................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.52.4 Printer Information......................................................................................................................................................I-116
6.53 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Scanner Settings...................................................................................................I-117
6.53.1 Scanner Settings........................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.53.2 Scanner Name............................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.53.3 Scanner Location........................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.53.4 Scanner Information...................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.53.5 Connection Timeout....................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.54 Network Settings-SSDP Settings..........................................................................................................................................I-117
6.54.1 SSDP Settings............................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.54.2 Multicast TTL Setting..................................................................................................................................................I-117
6.55 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Device Setting..................................................................................................................I-118
6.55.1 MAC Address..............................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.55.2 Network Speed...........................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.55.3 LLTD Setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.56 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Time Adjustment Setting..................................................................................................I-118
6.56.1 Time Adjustment Setting.............................................................................................................................................I-118
6.56.2 Auto IPv6 Retrieval.....................................................................................................................................................I-118
6.56.3 NTP Server Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.56.4 Auto Time Adjustment................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.56.5 Polling Interval............................................................................................................................................................I-119
6.57 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Status Notification Setting................................................................................................I-119
6.57.1 Register Notification Address (IP Address)................................................................................................................I-119
6.57.2 Register Notification Address (IPX Address)..............................................................................................................I-119
6.57.3 Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)..........................................................................................................I-120
6.58 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Total Counter Notification Settings...................................................................................I-120
6.58.1 Notification Schedule Setting......................................................................................................................................I-120
6.58.2 Notification Address Setting........................................................................................................................................I-120

xvii
 6.58.3 Model Name...............................................................................................................................................................I-120
6.58.4 Send Now...................................................................................................................................................................I-120
6.59 Network Settings-Detail Settings-PING Confirmation...........................................................................................................I-120
6.59.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-120
6.59.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-120
6.60 Network Settings-Detail Settings-SLP Setting......................................................................................................................I-120
6.60.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-120
6.60.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.60.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.61 Network Settings-Detail Settings-LPD Setting......................................................................................................................I-121
6.61.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.61.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.61.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.62 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Prefix/Suffix Setting..........................................................................................................I-121
6.62.1 ON/OFF Setting..........................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.62.2 Prefix/Suffix Setting....................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.63 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Error Code Display Setting...............................................................................................I-121
6.63.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.63.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.63.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-121
6.64 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings........................................................................................................I-121
6.64.1 IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings..........................................................................................................................I-121
6.64.2 Auth. Status................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.64.3 Reset Job Settings......................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.64.4 Certificate Verification Level Settings.........................................................................................................................I-122
6.65 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting................................................................................................................................I-122
6.65.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.65.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.65.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.66 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting......................................................................................................................................I-122
6.66.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.66.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.66.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.67 Copier Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.67.1 Auto Zoom (Platen).....................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.67.2 Auto Zoom (ADF)........................................................................................................................................................I-122
6.67.3 Specify Default Tray when APS OFF.........................................................................................................................I-123
6.67.4 Print Jobs During Copy Operation..............................................................................................................................I-123
6.67.5 Tri-Fold Print Side.......................................................................................................................................................I-123
6.67.6 Automatic Image Rotation..........................................................................................................................................I-123
6.68 Printer Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.68.1 USB Timeout..............................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.68.2 Network Timeout.........................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.68.3 Print XPS Errors.........................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.68.4 PSWC Direct Print......................................................................................................................................................I-124
6.68.5 Assign Account to Acquire Device Info.......................................................................................................................I-124
6.69 Fax Settings..........................................................................................................................................................................I-125
6.69.1 Header Information.....................................................................................................................................................I-125
6.69.2 Header/Footer Position...............................................................................................................................................I-125
6.69.3 Line Parameter Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-125
6.69.4 TX/RX Settings...........................................................................................................................................................I-127
6.69.5 Function Settings-Function ON/OFF Setting..............................................................................................................I-129
6.69.6 Function Settings-Memory RX Setting........................................................................................................................I-130
6.69.7 Function Settings-Closed Network RX.......................................................................................................................I-131
6.69.8 Function Settings-Forward TX Setting........................................................................................................................I-131
6.69.9 Function Settings-Incomplete TX Hold.......................................................................................................................I-131
6.69.10 Function Settings-PC-Fax RX Setting......................................................................................................................I-131
6.69.11 Function Settings-TSI User Box Setting...................................................................................................................I-132
6.69.12 PBX Connection Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-133
6.69.13 Report Settings.........................................................................................................................................................I-133
6.69.14 Job Settings List.......................................................................................................................................................I-136
6.69.15 Multi Line Settings-Line Parameter Setting..............................................................................................................I-136
6.69.16 Multi Line Settings-Function Settings.......................................................................................................................I-137
6.69.17 Multi Line Settings-Multi Line Settings......................................................................................................................I-137
6.69.18 Multi Line Settings-Sender Fax No...........................................................................................................................I-137
6.69.19 Network Fax Settings-Black Compression Level......................................................................................................I-137
6.69.20 Network Fax Settings-Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method..............................................................I-137
6.69.21 Network Fax Settings-Internet Fax Self Rx Ability....................................................................................................I-138
6.69.22 Network Fax Settings-Internet Fax Advanced Settings............................................................................................I-138
6.69.23 Network Fax Settings-IP Address Fax Operation Settings.......................................................................................I-139

xviii
 6.69.24 Fax Print Quality Settings.........................................................................................................................................I-140
6.70 System Connection...............................................................................................................................................................I-140
6.70.1 OpenAPI Settings-Access Setting..............................................................................................................................I-140
6.70.2 OpenAPI Settings-SSL/Port Settings..........................................................................................................................I-140
6.70.3 OpenAPI Settings-Authentication...............................................................................................................................I-141
6.70.4 OpenAPI Settings-External Application Connection...................................................................................................I-141
6.70.5 Call Remote Center....................................................................................................................................................I-141
6.70.6 Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting...................................................................................................................................I-141
6.70.7 Printer Information......................................................................................................................................................I-141
6.70.8 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting........................................................................................................................................I-142
6.71 Security Settings-Administrator Password............................................................................................................................I-142
6.71.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.71.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.72 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting...........................................................................................................................I-142
6.72.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.72.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.72.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.73 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels...................................................................................................................I-142
6.73.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-142
6.73.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-143
6.73.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-143
6.74 Security Settings-Security Details.........................................................................................................................................I-143
6.74.1 Password Rules..........................................................................................................................................................I-143
6.74.2 Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error........................................................................................................I-143
6.74.3 Confidential Document Access Method......................................................................................................................I-144
6.74.4 Manual Destination Input............................................................................................................................................I-144
6.74.5 Print Data Capture......................................................................................................................................................I-144
6.74.6 Job Log Settings.........................................................................................................................................................I-145
6.74.7 Restrict Fax TX...........................................................................................................................................................I-145
6.74.8 Hide Personal Information..........................................................................................................................................I-145
6.74.9 Hide Personal Information (MIB)................................................................................................................................I-145
6.74.10 Display Activity Log...................................................................................................................................................I-146
6.74.11 Initialize.....................................................................................................................................................................I-146
6.74.12 Job History Thumbnail Display.................................................................................................................................I-146
6.74.13 Secure Print Only......................................................................................................................................................I-146
6.74.14 Copy Guard..............................................................................................................................................................I-146
6.74.15 Password Copy.........................................................................................................................................................I-147
6.74.16 Web browser contents access..................................................................................................................................I-147
6.75 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode..........................................................................................................................I-147
6.75.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-147
6.75.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-147
6.75.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-147
6.76 Security Settings-HDD Settings............................................................................................................................................I-149
6.76.1 Check HDD Capacity..................................................................................................................................................I-149
6.76.2 Overwrite HDD Data...................................................................................................................................................I-149
6.76.3 Overwrite All Data.......................................................................................................................................................I-150
6.76.4 HDD Lock Password...................................................................................................................................................I-150
6.76.5 Format HDD................................................................................................................................................................I-150
6.76.6 HDD Encryption Setting..............................................................................................................................................I-151
6.77 Security Settings-Function Management Setting..................................................................................................................I-151
6.77.1 Usage Settings for Each Function..............................................................................................................................I-151
6.77.2 Maximum Job Allowance............................................................................................................................................I-151
6.77.3 Network Function Usage Settings..............................................................................................................................I-151
6.78 Security Settings-Stamp Settings.........................................................................................................................................I-152
6.78.1 Apply Stamps..............................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.78.2 Delete Registered Stamp............................................................................................................................................I-152
6.79 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings....................................................................................................................I-152
6.79.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.79.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.79.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.80 Security Settings-Driver Password Encryption Setting.........................................................................................................I-152
6.80.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-152
6.80.2 Default setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-153
6.80.3 Setting item.................................................................................................................................................................I-153
6.81 License Settings....................................................................................................................................................................I-153
6.81.1 Get Request Code......................................................................................................................................................I-153
6.81.2 Install License.............................................................................................................................................................I-153
6.81.3 List of Enabled Functions...........................................................................................................................................I-153
6.82 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting.....................................................................................................................I-153
6.82.1 Restriction Code Settings...........................................................................................................................................I-153

xix
7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS).................................................................................................................................I-154
7.1 Banner Printing.......................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.1.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.1.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.2 My Panel Settings...................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.2.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.2.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.3 Device Information..................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.3.1 Use...............................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.3.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.4 Meter Count............................................................................................................................................................................I-154
7.4.1 Counter details..............................................................................................................................................................I-154
8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST.......................................................................................................................................I-156
8.1 Replace paper feed roller........................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.2 Replace separation roller assy................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.3 Change marketing area..........................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.4 Install LCT...............................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.5 Replace drum unit...................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.6 Replace transfer belt unit........................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.7 Replace PH unit......................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.8 Replace printer control board..................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.9 Replace MFP board................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.10 Replace IDC/registration sensor/F, R...................................................................................................................................I-156
8.11 Replace hard disk.................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.12 Add key counter....................................................................................................................................................................I-156
8.13 Execute initialize...................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.14 Execute add. option..............................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.15 Execute F/W update.............................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.16 Add fax board........................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.17 Replace CCD unit.................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.18 Replace mirror unit................................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.19 Wind scanner drive cables....................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.20 Replace scanner motor.........................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.21 Replace scanner assy...........................................................................................................................................................I-157
8.22 Replace scanner home sensor.............................................................................................................................................I-158
8.23 Replace original glass moving unit.......................................................................................................................................I-158
8.24 Replace glass step sheet......................................................................................................................................................I-158
8.25 Replace original glass...........................................................................................................................................................I-158
8.26 Replace original size detection sensor.................................................................................................................................I-158
8.27 Replace DF-618....................................................................................................................................................................I-158
9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................I-159
9.1 List of service mode (outline)..................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.2 List of service mode (detail)....................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.2.1 Machine........................................................................................................................................................................I-159
9.2.2 Imaging Process Adjustment........................................................................................................................................I-160
9.2.3 CS Remote Care..........................................................................................................................................................I-161
9.2.4 System 1.......................................................................................................................................................................I-162
9.2.5 System 2.......................................................................................................................................................................I-163
9.2.6 Counter.........................................................................................................................................................................I-163
9.2.7 List Output....................................................................................................................................................................I-164
9.2.8 State Confirmation........................................................................................................................................................I-165
9.2.9 Test Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................I-165
9.2.10 ADF.............................................................................................................................................................................I-166
9.2.11 FAX.............................................................................................................................................................................I-166
9.2.12 Finisher.......................................................................................................................................................................I-167
9.2.13 Internet ISW................................................................................................................................................................I-168
10. SERVICE MODE....................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.1 Starting/Exiting......................................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.1.1 Starting procedure......................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.1.2 Exiting procedure........................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.2 Date/Time Input mode..........................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.2.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-169
10.3 Machine................................................................................................................................................................................I-170
10.3.1 Trail Edge Color Alignment Adj...................................................................................................................................I-170
10.3.2 Fusing Temperature...................................................................................................................................................I-170
10.3.3 Fusing Transport Speed.............................................................................................................................................I-171
10.3.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj..................................................................................................................................I-171
10.3.5 Printer Area.................................................................................................................................................................I-172

xx
 10.3.6 Scan Area...................................................................................................................................................................I-174
10.3.7 Printer Reg. Loop Adj.................................................................................................................................................I-177
10.3.8 LD adjustment.............................................................................................................................................................I-177
10.3.9 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj...................................................................................................................................I-178
10.3.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment...................................................................................................................................I-178
10.3.11 Thick Paper Interval Setting......................................................................................................................................I-179
10.3.12 ADF Scan Glass Contamination...............................................................................................................................I-179
10.3.13 Non-Image Area Erase Check..................................................................................................................................I-179
10.4 Firmware Version..................................................................................................................................................................I-179
10.4.1 Use.............................................................................................................................................................................I-179
10.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-180
10.5 Imaging Process Adjustment................................................................................................................................................I-180
10.5.1 Gradation Adjust.........................................................................................................................................................I-180
10.5.2 Transfer Belt...............................................................................................................................................................I-181
10.5.3 Max Image Density Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-181
10.5.4 TCR Level Setting.......................................................................................................................................................I-182
10.5.5 Image Background Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-182
10.5.6 Transfer Voltage Fine Adj...........................................................................................................................................I-182
10.5.7 Stabilizer.....................................................................................................................................................................I-183
10.5.8 Thick Paper Density Adjustment.................................................................................................................................I-184
10.5.9 Paper separation adjustment......................................................................................................................................I-184
10.5.10 Manual Toner Add....................................................................................................................................................I-184
10.5.11 Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection.................................................................................................................................I-184
10.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines)..................................................................................................................................................I-185
10.7 Setting up the CS Remote Care...........................................................................................................................................I-185
10.7.1 Using the telephone line modem................................................................................................................................I-185
10.7.2 Using the Fax line modem..........................................................................................................................................I-186
10.7.3 Using E-mail...............................................................................................................................................................I-187
10.7.4 When using a WebDAV server in http communication...............................................................................................I-188
10.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care............................................................................................................................I-190
10.8.1 Input procedure...........................................................................................................................................................I-190
10.8.2 List of software SW for CS Remote Care...................................................................................................................I-190
10.8.3 SW No. 01..................................................................................................................................................................I-190
10.8.4 SW No. 02..................................................................................................................................................................I-191
10.8.5 SW No. 03..................................................................................................................................................................I-191
10.8.6 SW No. 04..................................................................................................................................................................I-192
10.8.7 SW No. 05..................................................................................................................................................................I-192
10.8.8 SW No. 06..................................................................................................................................................................I-192
10.8.9 SW No. 07..................................................................................................................................................................I-193
10.8.10 SW No. 08................................................................................................................................................................I-193
10.8.11 SW No. 09................................................................................................................................................................I-193
10.8.12 SW No. 10................................................................................................................................................................I-194
10.8.13 SW No. 11................................................................................................................................................................I-194
10.8.14 SW No. 12................................................................................................................................................................I-194
10.8.15 SW No. 14................................................................................................................................................................I-195
10.8.16 SW No. 15................................................................................................................................................................I-195
10.8.17 SW No. 18................................................................................................................................................................I-195
10.8.18 SW No. 21................................................................................................................................................................I-196
10.8.19 SW No. 22................................................................................................................................................................I-196
10.8.20 SW No. 23................................................................................................................................................................I-196
10.9 Detail on settings for CS Remote Care.................................................................................................................................I-197
10.9.1 System Selection........................................................................................................................................................I-197
10.9.2 ID Code.......................................................................................................................................................................I-197
10.9.3 Detail Setting..............................................................................................................................................................I-197
10.9.4 Server Setting (E-Mail1 or E-mail2 is selected.).........................................................................................................I-199
10.9.5 Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)..................................................................................................................I-202
10.9.6 Setup confirmation......................................................................................................................................................I-202
10.9.7 Calling the maintenance.............................................................................................................................................I-202
10.9.8 Calling the center from the administrator....................................................................................................................I-203
10.9.9 Checking the transmission log....................................................................................................................................I-203
10.10 System 1.............................................................................................................................................................................I-203
10.10.1 Marketing Area.........................................................................................................................................................I-203
10.10.2 Tel/Fax Number........................................................................................................................................................I-204
10.10.3 Serial Number...........................................................................................................................................................I-204
10.10.4 Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting..................................................................................................................................I-204
10.10.5 Foolscap Size Setting...............................................................................................................................................I-205
10.10.6 Original Size Detection.............................................................................................................................................I-205
10.10.7 Install Date................................................................................................................................................................I-206
10.10.8 Initialization-Clear All Data........................................................................................................................................I-206
10.10.9 Initialization-Clear Individual Data............................................................................................................................I-206

xxi
 10.10.10 Initialization-System Error Clear.............................................................................................................................I-207
10.10.11 Charging CH cleaning.............................................................................................................................................I-207
10.10.12 Problem Unit Isolation Set......................................................................................................................................I-208
10.10.13 Post card transfer table...........................................................................................................................................I-208
10.10.14 Machine State LED Setting.....................................................................................................................................I-208
10.11 System 2.............................................................................................................................................................................I-209
10.11.1 HDD..........................................................................................................................................................................I-209
10.11.2 Image Controller Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-209
10.11.3 Option Board Status.................................................................................................................................................I-209
10.11.4 Consumable Life Reminder......................................................................................................................................I-210
10.11.5 Unit Change..............................................................................................................................................................I-210
10.11.6 Software Switch Setting............................................................................................................................................I-210
10.11.7 CCD Calibration........................................................................................................................................................I-211
10.11.8 LCC Size Setting......................................................................................................................................................I-211
10.11.9 LCT Paper Size Setting............................................................................................................................................I-211
10.11.10 Line Mag Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-212
10.11.11 Data Capture..........................................................................................................................................................I-212
10.11.12 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.............................................................................................................................I-214
10.11.13 Stamp.....................................................................................................................................................................I-215
10.11.14 Network Fax Settings..............................................................................................................................................I-215
10.11.15 User Paper Settings................................................................................................................................................I-215
10.11.16 Coverage Rate Screen...........................................................................................................................................I-216
10.11.17 JAM Code Display Setting......................................................................................................................................I-216
10.11.18 BootUp Screen.......................................................................................................................................................I-216
10.11.19 Install Data..............................................................................................................................................................I-217
10.11.20 Bluetooth Settings...................................................................................................................................................I-217
10.11.21 Auto Power OFF.....................................................................................................................................................I-217
10.12 Counter...............................................................................................................................................................................I-218
10.12.1 Common procedure..................................................................................................................................................I-218
10.12.2 Life............................................................................................................................................................................I-218
10.12.3 Service Call...............................................................................................................................................................I-219
10.12.4 Section Service Call..................................................................................................................................................I-219
10.12.5 Warning....................................................................................................................................................................I-220
10.12.6 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................I-220
10.12.7 Service Total.............................................................................................................................................................I-220
10.12.8 Counter of Each Mode..............................................................................................................................................I-221
10.12.9 Service Call History (Data).......................................................................................................................................I-221
10.12.10 ADF Paper Pages...................................................................................................................................................I-221
10.12.11 Paper Jam History..................................................................................................................................................I-221
10.12.12 Fax Connection Error..............................................................................................................................................I-221
10.12.13 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter......................................................................................................................I-221
10.12.14 Parts Counter (Fixed).............................................................................................................................................I-222
10.12.15 Jam.........................................................................................................................................................................I-223
10.12.16 Section JAM............................................................................................................................................................I-223
10.13 List Output...........................................................................................................................................................................I-223
10.13.1 Batch List CSV Output..............................................................................................................................................I-223
10.13.2 Machine Management List........................................................................................................................................I-224
10.13.3 Adjustment List.........................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.13.4 Parameter List..........................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.13.5 Service Parameter....................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.13.6 Protocol Trace..........................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.13.7 Fax Setting List.........................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.13.8 Fax Analysis List.......................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.14 State Confirmation..............................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.14.1 Sensor Check...........................................................................................................................................................I-224
10.14.2 Table Number...........................................................................................................................................................I-237
10.14.3 Level History1...........................................................................................................................................................I-238
10.14.4 Level History 2..........................................................................................................................................................I-238
10.14.5 Temp. & Humidity.....................................................................................................................................................I-238
10.14.6 CCD Check...............................................................................................................................................................I-238
10.14.7 Memory/HDD Adj......................................................................................................................................................I-238
10.14.8 Memory/HDD State...................................................................................................................................................I-241
10.14.9 IU Lot No...................................................................................................................................................................I-241
10.14.10 Adjustment Data List...............................................................................................................................................I-241
10.15 Test Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................I-242
10.15.1 Procedure for test pattern output..............................................................................................................................I-242
10.15.2 Gradation Pattern.....................................................................................................................................................I-242
10.15.3 Halftone Pattern........................................................................................................................................................I-242
10.15.4 Lattice Pattern...........................................................................................................................................................I-243
10.15.5 Solid Pattern.............................................................................................................................................................I-243

xxii
 10.15.6 Paper Passage Test.................................................................................................................................................I-244
10.15.7 Fax Test....................................................................................................................................................................I-244
10.16 ADF.....................................................................................................................................................................................I-244
10.16.1 Original Stop Position...............................................................................................................................................I-244
10.16.2 Registration Loop Adj...............................................................................................................................................I-245
10.16.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................................I-246
10.16.4 Paper Passage.........................................................................................................................................................I-247
10.16.5 Sensor Check...........................................................................................................................................................I-247
10.16.6 Original Tray Width...................................................................................................................................................I-248
10.16.7 Read Pos Adj............................................................................................................................................................I-249
10.16.8 Feed Zoom...............................................................................................................................................................I-250
10.16.9 Scanning Light Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................I-251
10.16.10 Mixed original Size adjustment...............................................................................................................................I-251
10.17 FAX.....................................................................................................................................................................................I-251
10.18 Finisher...............................................................................................................................................................................I-251
10.18.1 FS-FN adjustment - Center Staple Position..............................................................................................................I-251
10.18.2 FS-FN adjustment - Half-Fold Position.....................................................................................................................I-252
10.18.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Centering Fine Adj........................................................................................................I-253
10.18.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Edge Adj........................................................................................................................I-253
10.18.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch F. Sensor Intensity Adj..................................................................................................I-254
10.18.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-fold).................................................................................................I-255
10.18.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position (Z-fold).............................................................................................I-255
10.18.8 FS-FN adjustment - Punch regist adj. (Z-fold)..........................................................................................................I-256
10.18.9 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Registration Loop Adj....................................................................................................I-256
10.18.10 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Resist Loop Size (PI)..................................................................................................I-256
10.18.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position/2nd Z-Fold Position.................................................................................I-257
10.18.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position.....................................................................................................................I-257
10.18.13 FS-FN adjustment - Center-Staple Pitch Adj..........................................................................................................I-258
10.18.14 FS-FN adjustment - PI Size Detection....................................................................................................................I-258
10.18.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment........................................................................................................I-259
10.18.16 FS-FN adjustment - Finisher Components Test Mode...........................................................................................I-259
10.18.17 FS-FN adjustment - Load Data...............................................................................................................................I-261
10.18.18 FS-FN adjustment - Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj.............................................................................................I-261
10.18.19 FS-FN adjustment - Punch unit edge detection......................................................................................................I-261
10.18.20 Max Staple Limit Setting.........................................................................................................................................I-262
10.18.21 Punch Option Setting..............................................................................................................................................I-262
10.18.22 Max. # of Folded Sheets Setting.............................................................................................................................I-262
10.19 Internet ISW........................................................................................................................................................................I-263
10.19.1 Internet ISW Set.......................................................................................................................................................I-263
10.19.2 HTTP Setting............................................................................................................................................................I-263
10.19.3 FTP Setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-264
10.19.4 Forwarding Access Setting.......................................................................................................................................I-265
10.19.5 Download..................................................................................................................................................................I-266
11. ENHANCED SECURITY........................................................................................................................................I-267
11.1 List of Enhanced Security.....................................................................................................................................................I-267
11.2 Starting/Exiting......................................................................................................................................................................I-267
11.2.1 Starting procedure......................................................................................................................................................I-267
11.2.2 Exiting procedure........................................................................................................................................................I-267
11.3 Enhanced Security................................................................................................................................................................I-267
11.3.1 CE Password..............................................................................................................................................................I-267
11.3.2 Administrator Password..............................................................................................................................................I-267
11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level........................................................................................................................................I-268
11.3.4 CE Authentication.......................................................................................................................................................I-268
11.3.5 Life Stop Setting.........................................................................................................................................................I-268
11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup.................................................................................................................................................I-269
11.3.7 Operation Ban release time........................................................................................................................................I-269
11.3.8 Administrator unlocking..............................................................................................................................................I-269
11.3.9 Engine FW DipSW......................................................................................................................................................I-269
12. BILLING SETTING.................................................................................................................................................I-272
Billing setting..................................................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.1 List of billing setting...............................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.2 Starting/Exiting......................................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.2.1 Starting procedure......................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.2.2 Exiting procedure........................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.3 Billing setting.........................................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.3.1 Counter Setting...........................................................................................................................................................I-272
12.3.2 Management Function Choice....................................................................................................................................I-275
12.3.3 Management Function Choice-Key Counter IF Vendor..............................................................................................I-275
12.3.4 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device................................................................................................I-275
12.3.5 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only......................................................................................................I-276

xxiii
 12.3.6 Management Function Choice-Management Device..................................................................................................I-277
12.3.7 Management Function Choice-Vendor 1....................................................................................................................I-278
12.3.8 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2....................................................................................................................I-278
12.3.9 Setting items that automatically change the setting values........................................................................................I-279
12.3.10 Coverage Rate Clear................................................................................................................................................I-280
12.3.11 License management-Activation...............................................................................................................................I-281
12.3.12 License management-Deactivation..........................................................................................................................I-284
12.3.13 License management-Repair....................................................................................................................................I-288
12.3.14 License management-Initialize.................................................................................................................................I-292
12.3.15 License management-Request Code.......................................................................................................................I-292
12.3.16 License management-List.........................................................................................................................................I-292
12.3.17 License management-Function List..........................................................................................................................I-293
12.3.18 OpenAPI Authentication Management.....................................................................................................................I-293
13. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION........................................................................................I-294
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub 652/552/602/502.......................................................................................I-295
14.1 Scanner section....................................................................................................................................................................I-295
14.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt.........................................................................................................................I-295
14.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit......................................................................................................I-295
14.1.3 Scanner position adjustment......................................................................................................................................I-296
14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit.................................................................................................I-297
14.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit...............................................................I-298
14.2 Paper feed section................................................................................................................................................................I-298
14.2.1 Tray3/4 paper size change.........................................................................................................................................I-298
14.2.2 Skew adjustment of the tray 1/2.................................................................................................................................I-299
14.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2...........................................................................................................................I-300
14.2.4 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4...........................................................................................................................I-301
14.2.5 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the tray 3/4.............................................................................................................I-301
14.3 Bypass tray section...............................................................................................................................................................I-302
14.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit...................................................................................................................I-302
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-618..................................................................................................................I-304
15.1 Original document feed section............................................................................................................................................I-304
15.1.1 Adjusting the height....................................................................................................................................................I-304
15.1.2 Adjusting skew feed....................................................................................................................................................I-304
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-204..................................................................................................................I-306
16.1 Paper feed section................................................................................................................................................................I-306
16.1.1 Centering adjustment of the LCT................................................................................................................................I-306
16.1.2 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the LCT...................................................................................................................I-307
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-301..................................................................................................................I-308
17.1 Paper feed section................................................................................................................................................................I-308
17.1.1 Centering adjustment of the LCT................................................................................................................................I-308
17.1.2 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the LCT...................................................................................................................I-308
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT ZU-606..................................................................................................................I-310
18.1 Gate solenoid/Lw adjustment................................................................................................................................................I-310
18.1.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-310
18.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-310
18.2 1st folding skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-310
18.2.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-310
18.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-310
18.3 2nd folding skew adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-311
18.3.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-311
18.3.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-312
18.4 2nd stopper position adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-312
18.4.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-312
18.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-313
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-516..................................................................................................................I-315
19.1 Punch section.......................................................................................................................................................................I-315
19.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction..................................................................................................................................I-315
19.1.2 Centering adjustment of the punch kit........................................................................................................................I-315
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-508..................................................................................................................I-318
20.1 Paper exit section.................................................................................................................................................................I-318
20.1.1 Second fold position adjustment.................................................................................................................................I-318
20.1.2 Adjustment for Staple Clinch Failure..........................................................................................................................I-318
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-505...................................................................................................................I-321
21.1 PI displacement adjustment (with PK-516 installed).............................................................................................................I-321
21.1.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-321
21.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-321
21.2 PI tilt adjustment (with PK-516 installed)..............................................................................................................................I-322
21.2.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-322

xxiv
 21.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-322
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-517..................................................................................................................I-323
22.1 Punch section.......................................................................................................................................................................I-323
22.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction..................................................................................................................................I-323
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-509..................................................................................................................I-324
23.1 Paper exit section.................................................................................................................................................................I-324
23.1.1 Half-fold skew adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-324

J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.........................................................................................................J-1
1. Confirming the firmware version..................................................................................................................................J-2
1.1 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................J-2
2. USB memory................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.1 Preparation.................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.3 Action when data transfer fails...................................................................................................................................................J-5
3. Internet ISW.................................................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting............................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1.1 Outline..............................................................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1.2 Service environment........................................................................................................................................................J-6
3.1.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting..................................................................................................................................J-6
3.2 Firmware rewriting from the control panel..................................................................................................................................J-8
3.2.1 Firmware rewriting from the control panel........................................................................................................................J-8
4. CS Remote Care........................................................................................................................................................J-10
4.1 Firmware rewriting from the CS Remote Care.........................................................................................................................J-10

K TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM CODE..................................................................................................................................................................K-1
JAM DISPLAY..................................................................................................................................................................................K-1
(1) JAM DISPLAY.....................................................................................................................................................................K-1
(2) Misfeed display resetting procedure..................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 List of the JAM code..................................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.2 JAM that do not display the JAM code......................................................................................................................................K-3
1.3 Sensor layout.............................................................................................................................................................................K-4
1.3.1 bizhub 652/602/552/502..................................................................................................................................................K-4
1.3.2 ADF.................................................................................................................................................................................K-4
1.3.3 LU-204/LU-301................................................................................................................................................................K-5
1.3.4 ZU-606............................................................................................................................................................................K-5
1.3.5 FS-526/PK-516/SD-508..................................................................................................................................................K-6
1.3.6 JS-602.............................................................................................................................................................................K-6
1.3.7 PI-505..............................................................................................................................................................................K-7
1.3.8 FS-527/PK-517/SD-509/JS-603......................................................................................................................................K-7
1.4 Initial check items......................................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5 1*-**...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5.1 10-01, 10-02, 10-10, 10-40..............................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5.2 11-01, 11-02, 11-40.........................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.5.3 12-01, 12-40....................................................................................................................................................................K-9
1.5.4 13-01, 13-40....................................................................................................................................................................K-9
1.5.5 14-01, 14-40..................................................................................................................................................................K-10
1.5.6 15-01, 15-40..................................................................................................................................................................K-10
1.5.7 17-08, 17-20..................................................................................................................................................................K-11
1.5.8 17-09, 17-30, 17-31.......................................................................................................................................................K-11
1.5.9 17-10, 17-11, 17-40, 17-41............................................................................................................................................K-12
1.6 2*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-12
1.6.1 20-01, 20-02, 20-03, 20-10, 20-11, 20-12, 20-20..........................................................................................................K-12
1.7 3*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-13
1.7.1 30-01, 30-02, 30-03.......................................................................................................................................................K-13
1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-30.......................................................................................................................................................K-14
1.8 6*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-14
1.8.1 66-01, 66-11, 66-21.......................................................................................................................................................K-14
1.8.2 66-02, 66-12..................................................................................................................................................................K-15
1.8.3 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33............................................................................................................................................K-15
1.8.4 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34............................................................................................................................................K-16
1.8.5 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15............................................................................................................................................K-16
1.9 7*-**.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.1 72-11.............................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.2 72-13.............................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.3 72-14.............................................................................................................................................................................K-17
1.9.4 72-15.............................................................................................................................................................................K-18
1.9.5 72-16.............................................................................................................................................................................K-18

xxv
 1.9.6 72-17.............................................................................................................................................................................K-19
1.9.7 72-18.............................................................................................................................................................................K-19
1.9.8 72-19.............................................................................................................................................................................K-20
1.9.9 72-21.............................................................................................................................................................................K-21
1.9.10 72-22...........................................................................................................................................................................K-21
1.9.11 72-23...........................................................................................................................................................................K-22
1.9.12 72-25, 72-26................................................................................................................................................................K-22
1.9.13 72-31, 72-34................................................................................................................................................................K-23
1.9.14 72-35...........................................................................................................................................................................K-23
1.9.15 72-38...........................................................................................................................................................................K-24
1.9.16 72-39...........................................................................................................................................................................K-24
1.9.17 72-40...........................................................................................................................................................................K-24
1.9.18 72-41, 72-42................................................................................................................................................................K-25
1.9.19 72-43...........................................................................................................................................................................K-25
1.9.20 72-44...........................................................................................................................................................................K-25
1.9.21 72-45...........................................................................................................................................................................K-26
1.9.22 72-46...........................................................................................................................................................................K-26
1.9.23 72-47...........................................................................................................................................................................K-26
1.9.24 72-49...........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
1.9.25 72-50...........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
1.9.26 72-51...........................................................................................................................................................................K-27
1.9.27 72-60...........................................................................................................................................................................K-28
1.9.28 72-61...........................................................................................................................................................................K-28
1.9.29 72-62...........................................................................................................................................................................K-28
1.9.30 72-64...........................................................................................................................................................................K-29
1.9.31 72-81...........................................................................................................................................................................K-29
1.9.32 72-84...........................................................................................................................................................................K-30
1.9.33 72-85...........................................................................................................................................................................K-30
1.9.34 72-86...........................................................................................................................................................................K-30
1.9.35 72-87...........................................................................................................................................................................K-31
1.9.36 72-90...........................................................................................................................................................................K-31
1.9.37 75-42...........................................................................................................................................................................K-31
1.9.38 75-43...........................................................................................................................................................................K-32
1.10 9*-**.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-32
1.10.1 92-01, 92-02, 92-03, 92-40..........................................................................................................................................K-32
1.10.2 93-01, 93-10................................................................................................................................................................K-33
1.10.3 99-01...........................................................................................................................................................................K-33
2. MALFUNCTION CODE.............................................................................................................................................K-34
2.1 Display procedure....................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.2 List of the malfunction code.....................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.3 S-1...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.3.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.3.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.4 D-1...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.4.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.4.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.5 D-2...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.5.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.5.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.6 P-5...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.6.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.6.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.7 P-9...........................................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.7.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.7.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.8 P-16, P-18...............................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.8.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.8.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.9 P-27.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.9.1 Contents........................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.9.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.10 P-32.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.10.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.10.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.11 L-4.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.11.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.12 L-5.........................................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.12.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-37
3. TROUBLE CODE......................................................................................................................................................K-38
3.1 Display procedure....................................................................................................................................................................K-38

xxvi
3.2 Trouble resetting procedure....................................................................................................................................................K-38
3.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key.......................................................................................................K-38
3.3 Trouble isolation function.........................................................................................................................................................K-38
3.4 List of the trouble code............................................................................................................................................................K-39
3.5 C0***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-45
3.5.1 C0104, C0105...............................................................................................................................................................K-45
3.5.2 C0202............................................................................................................................................................................K-45
3.5.3 C0204............................................................................................................................................................................K-46
3.5.4 C0206............................................................................................................................................................................K-46
3.5.5 C0208............................................................................................................................................................................K-46
3.5.6 C0216............................................................................................................................................................................K-47
3.5.7 C0301............................................................................................................................................................................K-47
3.5.8 C0351............................................................................................................................................................................K-48
3.6 C1***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-48
3.6.1 C1003............................................................................................................................................................................K-48
3.6.2 C1004............................................................................................................................................................................K-48
3.6.3 C1005............................................................................................................................................................................K-49
3.6.4 C1081............................................................................................................................................................................K-49
3.6.5 C1102............................................................................................................................................................................K-49
3.6.6 C1103............................................................................................................................................................................K-50
3.6.7 C1104............................................................................................................................................................................K-50
3.6.8 C1105............................................................................................................................................................................K-51
3.6.9 C1106............................................................................................................................................................................K-51
3.6.10 C1109..........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
3.6.11 C1110..........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
3.6.12 C1112..........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
3.6.13 C1113..........................................................................................................................................................................K-53
3.6.14 C1114..........................................................................................................................................................................K-54
3.6.15 C1115..........................................................................................................................................................................K-54
3.6.16 C1116..........................................................................................................................................................................K-55
3.6.17 C1124..........................................................................................................................................................................K-56
3.6.18 C1125..........................................................................................................................................................................K-56
3.6.19 C1127..........................................................................................................................................................................K-57
3.6.20 C1130..........................................................................................................................................................................K-57
3.6.21 C1131..........................................................................................................................................................................K-58
3.6.22 C1132..........................................................................................................................................................................K-58
3.6.23 C1133..........................................................................................................................................................................K-59
3.6.24 C1134..........................................................................................................................................................................K-59
3.6.25 C1135..........................................................................................................................................................................K-59
3.6.26 C1136..........................................................................................................................................................................K-60
3.6.27 C1140..........................................................................................................................................................................K-60
3.6.28 C1141..........................................................................................................................................................................K-61
3.6.29 C1142..........................................................................................................................................................................K-61
3.6.30 C1143..........................................................................................................................................................................K-61
3.6.31 C1144..........................................................................................................................................................................K-62
3.6.32 C1145..........................................................................................................................................................................K-62
3.6.33 C1150..........................................................................................................................................................................K-63
3.6.34 C1151..........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
3.6.35 C1152..........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
3.6.36 C1153..........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
3.6.37 C1156..........................................................................................................................................................................K-65
3.6.38 C1157..........................................................................................................................................................................K-66
3.6.39 C1158..........................................................................................................................................................................K-66
3.6.40 C1182..........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
3.6.41 C1183..........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
3.6.42 C1190..........................................................................................................................................................................K-68
3.6.43 C1194..........................................................................................................................................................................K-68
3.6.44 C11A1.........................................................................................................................................................................K-68
3.6.45 C11A2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-69
3.6.46 C11A7.........................................................................................................................................................................K-69
3.6.47 C11B0.........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
3.6.48 C11B2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
3.6.49 C11B5.........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
3.6.50 C11C0.........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
3.6.51 C11E0.........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
3.6.52 C11E1.........................................................................................................................................................................K-72
3.6.53 C11E2.........................................................................................................................................................................K-72
3.7 C2***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-72
3.7.1 C2101............................................................................................................................................................................K-72
3.7.2 C2151............................................................................................................................................................................K-73

xxvii
 3.7.3 C2152............................................................................................................................................................................K-73
3.7.4 C2163............................................................................................................................................................................K-74
3.7.5 C2204............................................................................................................................................................................K-74
3.7.6 C2257, C2258...............................................................................................................................................................K-74
3.7.7 C2259, C225A...............................................................................................................................................................K-75
3.7.8 C225B, C225C..............................................................................................................................................................K-76
3.7.9 C2350............................................................................................................................................................................K-76
3.7.10 C2353..........................................................................................................................................................................K-76
3.7.11 C2354..........................................................................................................................................................................K-77
3.7.12 C2557..........................................................................................................................................................................K-77
3.7.13 C2558..........................................................................................................................................................................K-78
3.7.14 C255C.........................................................................................................................................................................K-78
3.7.15 C2564..........................................................................................................................................................................K-78
3.7.16 C2650..........................................................................................................................................................................K-79
3.7.17 C2654..........................................................................................................................................................................K-79
3.7.18 C2A14.........................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.7.19 C2A24 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.8 C3***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.8.1 C3101............................................................................................................................................................................K-80
3.8.2 C3102............................................................................................................................................................................K-81
3.8.3 C3201, C3202...............................................................................................................................................................K-81
3.8.4 C3303............................................................................................................................................................................K-82
3.8.5 C3305............................................................................................................................................................................K-82
3.8.6 C3424............................................................................................................................................................................K-83
3.8.7 C3425............................................................................................................................................................................K-83
3.8.8 C3721, C3722, C3725...................................................................................................................................................K-84
3.8.9 C3724............................................................................................................................................................................K-85
3.8.10 C3822, C3825.............................................................................................................................................................K-85
3.8.11 C3824..........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
3.8.12 C3921, C3922, C3925.................................................................................................................................................K-86
3.8.13 C3924..........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
3.8.14 C392A.........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
3.8.15 C3B02, C3B03............................................................................................................................................................K-88
3.8.16 C3B05, C3B06, C3B07, C3B08..................................................................................................................................K-89
3.9 C4***........................................................................................................................................................................................K-90
3.9.1 C4101............................................................................................................................................................................K-90
3.9.2 C4301............................................................................................................................................................................K-90
3.9.3 C4501............................................................................................................................................................................K-91
3.10 C5***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-91
3.10.1 C5104, C5105.............................................................................................................................................................K-91
3.10.2 C5304..........................................................................................................................................................................K-91
3.10.3 C5306..........................................................................................................................................................................K-92
3.10.4 C5351..........................................................................................................................................................................K-92
3.10.5 C5354..........................................................................................................................................................................K-93
3.10.6 C5356..........................................................................................................................................................................K-93
3.10.7 C5370..........................................................................................................................................................................K-93
3.10.8 C5372..........................................................................................................................................................................K-94
3.11 C6***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-94
3.11.1 C6001..........................................................................................................................................................................K-94
3.11.2 C6002..........................................................................................................................................................................K-94
3.11.3 C6102, C6103.............................................................................................................................................................K-95
3.11.4 C6301..........................................................................................................................................................................K-95
3.11.5 C6704..........................................................................................................................................................................K-96
3.11.6 C6751..........................................................................................................................................................................K-96
3.11.7 C6752..........................................................................................................................................................................K-97
3.11.8 C6901, C6902, C6903.................................................................................................................................................K-97
3.11.9 C6F01..........................................................................................................................................................................K-97
3.12 C8***......................................................................................................................................................................................K-98
3.12.1 C8101..........................................................................................................................................................................K-98
3.12.2 C8102..........................................................................................................................................................................K-98
3.12.3 C8103..........................................................................................................................................................................K-98
3.12.4 C8104..........................................................................................................................................................................K-99
3.12.5 C8106..........................................................................................................................................................................K-99
3.12.6 C8302........................................................................................................................................................................K-100
3.12.7 C8401........................................................................................................................................................................K-100
3.13 C9***....................................................................................................................................................................................K-100
3.13.1 C9401, C9402...........................................................................................................................................................K-100
3.14 CA***...................................................................................................................................................................................K-101
3.14.1 CA051, CA052, CA053.............................................................................................................................................K-101
3.15 CC***...................................................................................................................................................................................K-102

xxviii
 3.15.1 CC001.......................................................................................................................................................................K-102
3.15.2 CC151, CC152, CC153.............................................................................................................................................K-102
3.15.3 CC155.......................................................................................................................................................................K-102
3.15.4 CC156.......................................................................................................................................................................K-103
3.15.5 CC157.......................................................................................................................................................................K-103
3.15.6 CC158.......................................................................................................................................................................K-103
3.15.7 CC159, CC15A..........................................................................................................................................................K-104
3.15.8 CC15B.......................................................................................................................................................................K-104
3.15.9 CC163.......................................................................................................................................................................K-104
3.15.10 CC164.....................................................................................................................................................................K-105
3.15.11 CC165.....................................................................................................................................................................K-105
3.15.12 CC170, CC171, CC172, CC173, CC174, CC180, CC181, CC182, CC183, CC184, CC185, CC186....................K-106
3.15.13 CC190.....................................................................................................................................................................K-106
3.15.14 CC191.....................................................................................................................................................................K-107
3.16 CD***...................................................................................................................................................................................K-107
3.16.1 CD002.......................................................................................................................................................................K-107
3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020.............................................................................................................................................K-107
3.16.3 CD010.......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
3.16.4 CD011.......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
3.16.5 CD030.......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
3.16.6 CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044, CD045, CD046.....................................................................................................K-109
3.16.7 CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A, CD04B..................................................................................................................K-109
3.16.8 CD201, CD202, CD203.............................................................................................................................................K-109
3.16.9 CD211, CD212..........................................................................................................................................................K-110
3.16.10 CD231.....................................................................................................................................................................K-110
3.16.11 CD241, CD242........................................................................................................................................................K-110
3.16.12 CD261.....................................................................................................................................................................K-111
3.16.13 CD271.....................................................................................................................................................................K-111
3.16.14 CD272.....................................................................................................................................................................K-111
3.16.15 CD3##.....................................................................................................................................................................K-112
3.16.16 CD390.....................................................................................................................................................................K-112
3.16.17 CD401, CD402, CD403, CD404, CD405, CD406, CD407......................................................................................K-112
3.16.18 CDC##.....................................................................................................................................................................K-113
3.17 CE***...................................................................................................................................................................................K-113
3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005, CE006, CE007......................................................................................................K-113
3.17.2 CE002.......................................................................................................................................................................K-113
3.17.3 CEEE1.......................................................................................................................................................................K-114
3.17.4 CEEE2.......................................................................................................................................................................K-114
3.17.5 CEEE3.......................................................................................................................................................................K-114
4. ABORT CODE.........................................................................................................................................................K-116
Abort code....................................................................................................................................................................................K-116
(1) Contents..........................................................................................................................................................................K-116
(2) Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................K-116
4.1 CF0**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-116
4.2 CF1**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-116
4.3 CF2**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-117
4.4 CF3**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-117
4.5 CF4**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-117
4.6 CF5**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-117
4.7 CF6**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-117
4.8 CF7**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-117
4.9 CF8**.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-118
4.10 CF9**...................................................................................................................................................................................K-118
4.11 CFA**...................................................................................................................................................................................K-118
4.12 CFB**...................................................................................................................................................................................K-119
4.12.1 CFB0*........................................................................................................................................................................K-119
4.12.2 CFB1*........................................................................................................................................................................K-119
4.12.3 CFB6*........................................................................................................................................................................K-119
4.12.4 CFB7*........................................................................................................................................................................K-119
4.12.5 CFB8*........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
4.12.6 CFBA*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-120
4.13 CFC**..................................................................................................................................................................................K-120
4.13.1 CFC0*........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
4.13.2 CFC1*........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
4.13.3 CFC2*........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
4.13.4 CFC9*........................................................................................................................................................................K-121
4.13.5 CFCA*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-121
4.13.6 CFCC*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-121
4.13.7 CFCD*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-122
4.13.8 CFCE*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-122

xxix
 4.14 CFD**..................................................................................................................................................................................K-122
4.14.1 CFD0*........................................................................................................................................................................K-122
4.14.2 CFD1*........................................................................................................................................................................K-122
4.14.3 CFDA*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-123
4.15 CFE**...................................................................................................................................................................................K-123
4.15.1 CFE0*........................................................................................................................................................................K-123
4.15.2 CFE1*........................................................................................................................................................................K-123
4.15.3 CFE2*........................................................................................................................................................................K-123
4.15.4 CFE3*........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
4.15.5 CFE4*........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
4.15.6 CFE5*........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
4.15.7 CFEA*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-125
4.16 CFF**...................................................................................................................................................................................K-125
4.16.1 CFF0*........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
4.16.2 CFF1*........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
4.16.3 CFFA*........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET ISW............................................................................................................K-126
5.1 Error code list for the Internet ISW........................................................................................................................................K-126
5.2 0x0*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-126
5.3 0x1*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-127
5.4 0x2*.......................................................................................................................................................................................K-127
6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE............................................................................................................................K-128
6.1 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care...................................................................................................................................K-128
6.2 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode...............................................................................................K-128
6.3 List of the CS Remote Care error code.................................................................................................................................K-128
6.3.1 When connecting by modem.......................................................................................................................................K-128
6.3.2 When connecting by e-mails.......................................................................................................................................K-129
6.3.3 When connecting by http.............................................................................................................................................K-131
6.3.4 When connecting by Fax modem................................................................................................................................K-132
7. NETWORK ERROR CODE.....................................................................................................................................K-134
7.1 Display procedure..................................................................................................................................................................K-134
7.2 IEEE802.1X...........................................................................................................................................................................K-134
7.3 LDAP.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-134
7.4 E-Mail/Internet fax.................................................................................................................................................................K-135
7.5 FTP transmission...................................................................................................................................................................K-136
7.6 SMB transmission..................................................................................................................................................................K-136
7.7 SMTP transmission...............................................................................................................................................................K-137
7.8 WebDAV transmission...........................................................................................................................................................K-138
7.9 SMB browsing.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
7.10 User authentication..............................................................................................................................................................K-140
7.11 WebDAV client....................................................................................................................................................................K-140
7.12 WS scan..............................................................................................................................................................................K-141
8. OpenAPI RELATED TROUBLE..............................................................................................................................K-143
8.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................K-143
8.2 Types of Trouble....................................................................................................................................................................K-143
8.3 Solution..................................................................................................................................................................................K-143
9. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE TROUBLE CODE..............................................................................K-145
9.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check)......................................................................................................K-145
9.1.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
9.1.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................K-145
9.2 Fusing heaters do not operate...............................................................................................................................................K-145
9.2.1 Contents......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
9.2.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................K-145
9.3 Power is not supplied to ADF................................................................................................................................................K-145
9.3.1 DF-618........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
9.4 Power is not supplied to option..............................................................................................................................................K-146
9.4.1 LU-204/301..................................................................................................................................................................K-146
9.4.2 FS-526/527..................................................................................................................................................................K-146
10. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option.......................................................................................................................K-147
10.1 Structure of license management........................................................................................................................................K-147
10.2 License management information.......................................................................................................................................K-147
10.3 Error message.....................................................................................................................................................................K-147
10.3.1 License management error.......................................................................................................................................K-147
11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM................................................................................................................................K-148
11.1 How to read element data...................................................................................................................................................K-148
11.1.1 Table number............................................................................................................................................................K-148
11.1.2 Level history 1...........................................................................................................................................................K-149
11.1.3 Level history 2...........................................................................................................................................................K-149

xxx
 11.2 How to identify problematic part..........................................................................................................................................K-149
11.2.1 Initial check items......................................................................................................................................................K-150
11.3 Solution (Scanner system)..................................................................................................................................................K-151
11.3.1 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in sub scan direction..........................K-151
11.3.2 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in main scan direction........................K-152
11.3.3 Scanner system: color spots.....................................................................................................................................K-152
11.3.4 Scanner system: fog..................................................................................................................................................K-153
11.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image........................................................................................................K-153
11.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction)...................................K-154
11.3.7 Scanner system: moire..............................................................................................................................................K-154
11.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image................................................................................................................................K-155
11.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image..............................................................................................................................K-155
11.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image..................................................................................................K-155
11.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS..............................................................................................................................K-156
11.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy................................................................................................................K-156
11.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image...........................................................................................................................K-157
11.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density............................................................................................................................K-157
11.4 Solution (Printer system).....................................................................................................................................................K-158
Solution..................................................................................................................................................................................K-158
11.4.1 Printer system: Blank copy or black copy..................................................................................................................K-158
11.4.2 Printer system: Low image density or rough image..................................................................................................K-158
11.4.3 Printer system: Foggy background............................................................................................................................K-159
11.4.4 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in sub scan direction...................................................................................K-160
11.4.5 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in main scan direction.................................................................................K-160
11.4.6 Printer system: Black spots.......................................................................................................................................K-161
11.4.7 Printer system: White streaks or bands in sub scan direction...................................................................................K-161
11.4.8 Printer system: White streaks or bands in main scan direction.................................................................................K-162
11.4.9 Printer system: Void areas........................................................................................................................................K-162
11.4.10 Printer system: Smears on back of paper...............................................................................................................K-163
11.4.11 Printer system: Uneven image density....................................................................................................................K-163
11.4.12 Printer system: Gradation reproduction failure........................................................................................................K-163
11.4.13 Printer system: Uneven pitch..................................................................................................................................K-164
12. IC PROTECTOR...................................................................................................................................................K-165
12.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................K-165
12.2 IC protector list....................................................................................................................................................................K-165
12.2.1 bizhub 652/602/552/502............................................................................................................................................K-165
12.2.2 DF-618......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
12.2.3 LU-204/LU-301..........................................................................................................................................................K-168
12.2.4 ZU-606......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
12.2.5 FS-526.......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
12.2.6 PK-516......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
12.2.7 SD-508......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
12.2.8 PI-505........................................................................................................................................................................K-170
12.2.9 FS-527.......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
12.2.10 SD-509....................................................................................................................................................................K-171

L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..................................................................................L-1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.......................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652............................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.1 Scanner section...............................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.2 Front side........................................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.3 Back side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.4 Around the write section..................................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.5 Manual bypass tray..........................................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.6 Tray 1...............................................................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.7 Tray 2...............................................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.8 Tray 3...............................................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.9 Tray 4...............................................................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.10 2nd transfer section.......................................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.11 Duplex section...............................................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.12 Fusing/paper exit section...............................................................................................................................................L-8
1.2 DF-618/SP-501 .........................................................................................................................................................................L-9
1.3 LU-204 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-10
1.4 LU-301 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-10
1.5 JS-504 (Option)........................................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.6 ZU-606 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.7 FS-526 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.8 PK-516 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.9 SD-508 (Option).......................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.10 JS-602 (Option)......................................................................................................................................................................L-17

xxxi
 1.11 PI-505 (Option)......................................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.12 FS-527 (Option).....................................................................................................................................................................L-18
1.13 PK-517 (Option).....................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.14 SD-509 (Option).....................................................................................................................................................................L-21
1.15 JS-603 (Option)......................................................................................................................................................................L-22
1.16 OT-503 (Option).....................................................................................................................................................................L-23
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..........................................................................................................................L-24
2.1 BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..........................................................................................................................L-24
2.1.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652................................................................................................................................................L-24
2.1.2 DF control board (DFCB)...............................................................................................................................................L-27
2.1.3 LU drive board (LUDB)..................................................................................................................................................L-28
2.1.4 Punch control board (PKDB).........................................................................................................................................L-28
2.1.5 ZU control board............................................................................................................................................................L-29
2.1.6 FS control board (FSCB)...............................................................................................................................................L-30
2.1.7 Interlock board (IRB)......................................................................................................................................................L-31
2.1.8 SD drive board (SDDB).................................................................................................................................................L-31
2.1.9 PI drive board................................................................................................................................................................L-32
2.2 RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING...........................................................................................................................L-32
2.2.1 How to read the relay connector layout drawing............................................................................................................L-32
2.2.2 bizhub 502/552/602/652................................................................................................................................................L-33

M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................M-1
1. bizhub 502/552/602/652.............................................................................................................................................M-1
1.1 Timing chart in color mode........................................................................................................................................................M-1
1.1.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-1
1.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-1
2. DF-618........................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2.1 1-sided mode............................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2.1.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-2
2.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2.2 2-sided mode............................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-3
3. LU-204........................................................................................................................................................................M-5
3.1 Operating conditions.................................................................................................................................................................M-5
3.2 Timing chart..............................................................................................................................................................................M-5
4. FS-526/SD-508...........................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1 Straight paper exit mode...........................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.2 2 flat stitching staples mode......................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.2.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.3 Saddle stitching mode...............................................................................................................................................................M-8
4.3.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-8
4.3.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-8
4.4 Tri-folding mode........................................................................................................................................................................M-9
4.4.1 Operating conditions.......................................................................................................................................................M-9
4.4.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-9
5. ZU-606......................................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.1 Z-folding+Punch mode............................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.1.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-10
5.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-10
6. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517............................................................................................................................................M-11
6.1 Shift mode...............................................................................................................................................................................M-11
6.1.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-11
6.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-11
6.2 2 flat stitching staples mode....................................................................................................................................................M-11
6.2.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-11
6.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-12
6.3 Center staples mode...............................................................................................................................................................M-12
6.3.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-12
6.3.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-13
6.4 Punch mode............................................................................................................................................................................M-13
6.4.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-13
6.4.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-14
7. JS-603......................................................................................................................................................................M-15
7.1 Tray3 paper exit mode............................................................................................................................................................M-15

xxxii
 7.1.1 Operating conditions.....................................................................................................................................................M-15
7.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-15

N WIRING DIAGRAM........................................................................................................................N-1
1. bizhub 652/552/602/502..............................................................................................................................................N-1
1.1 Main body..................................................................................................................................................................................N-1
2. Option..........................................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.1 Wiring diagram list.....................................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.1.1 Option wiring diagram.....................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.2 Reverse automatic document feeder DF-618...........................................................................................................................N-4
2.3 Large capacity unit LU-204.......................................................................................................................................................N-5
2.4 Large capacity unit LU-301.......................................................................................................................................................N-6
2.5 Z folding unit ZU-606.................................................................................................................................................................N-7
2.6 Finisher FS-526.........................................................................................................................................................................N-8
2.7 Punch kit PK-516.....................................................................................................................................................................N-10
2.8 Saddle sticher SD-508............................................................................................................................................................N-11
2.9 Job separator JS-602..............................................................................................................................................................N-12
2.10 Post inserter PI-505...............................................................................................................................................................N-13
2.11 Finisher FS-527.....................................................................................................................................................................N-14
2.12 Punch kit PK-517...................................................................................................................................................................N-15
2.13 Saddle stitcher SD-509.........................................................................................................................................................N-15
2.14 Job separator JS-603............................................................................................................................................................N-16
2.15 Output tray OT-503...............................................................................................................................................................N-16

O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 652/552/602/502....................................................................O-1

1. INTERFACE SECTION...............................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.1 Front side........................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.2 Rear side.........................................................................................................................................................................O-2
1.1.3 Right side........................................................................................................................................................................O-3
2. SCANNER SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-6
2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-6
2.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................O-6
2.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-7
2.3.1 When the power is ON....................................................................................................................................................O-7
2.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed............................................................................................................................O-7
2.3.3 DF original glass cleaning control...................................................................................................................................O-9
2.3.4 Original scanning area..................................................................................................................................................O-10
2.3.5 Original size detection control.......................................................................................................................................O-11
2.3.6 Image processing..........................................................................................................................................................O-12
3. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)............................................................................................................................O-13
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-13
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-13
3.2.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................O-13
3.2.2 Laser exposure process................................................................................................................................................O-14
3.2.3 Laser emission timing...................................................................................................................................................O-15
3.2.4 Laser emission stop......................................................................................................................................................O-16
3.2.5 Laser emission area......................................................................................................................................................O-16
3.2.6 Image processing..........................................................................................................................................................O-17
4. TONER SUPPLY SECTION.....................................................................................................................................O-18
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-18
4.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-18
4.2.1 Toner cartridge drive.....................................................................................................................................................O-18
4.2.2 Toner hopper drive........................................................................................................................................................O-19
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-19
4.3.1 Replenishing the toner hopper with toner.....................................................................................................................O-19
4.3.2 Replenishing the developing unit with toner.................................................................................................................O-20
4.3.3 Toner cartridge life control............................................................................................................................................O-21
4.3.4 Toner cartridge detection..............................................................................................................................................O-21
4.3.5 Toner spill prevention shutter........................................................................................................................................O-22
5. IMAGING UNIT SECTION........................................................................................................................................O-23
5.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-23
5.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-24
5.2.1 Drum unit drive..............................................................................................................................................................O-24
5.2.2 Developing unit drive....................................................................................................................................................O-24
5.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-24
5.3.1 Imaging unit detection...................................................................................................................................................O-25
6. DRUM UNIT SECTION.............................................................................................................................................O-26
6.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-26

xxxiii
 6.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-26
6.2.1 Photo conductor drive...................................................................................................................................................O-26
6.2.2 Charge corona cleaner drive.........................................................................................................................................O-27
6.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-27
6.3.1 Photo conductor drive gear...........................................................................................................................................O-27
6.3.2 Main erase lamp control................................................................................................................................................O-28
6.3.3 Photo conductor cleaning.............................................................................................................................................O-28
6.3.4 Photo conductor charge control....................................................................................................................................O-29
6.3.5 Charge corona cleaning control....................................................................................................................................O-29
6.3.6 Ozone removal..............................................................................................................................................................O-30
6.3.7 Detection of drum unit/K...............................................................................................................................................O-30
7. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION................................................................................................................................O-32
7.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-32
7.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-32
7.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.1 Toner.............................................................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.2 Developer flow..............................................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.3 Auto refining developing system...................................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.4 Developing bias............................................................................................................................................................O-34
7.3.5 Toner density control....................................................................................................................................................O-34
7.3.6 Detection of developing unit/K......................................................................................................................................O-35
7.3.7 Toner scattering prevention..........................................................................................................................................O-35
7.3.8 Image stabilization control............................................................................................................................................O-36
8. 1st TRANSFER SECTION........................................................................................................................................O-37
8.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-37
8.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-38
8.2.1 Transfer belt drive.........................................................................................................................................................O-38
8.2.2 Transfer belt cleaning section drive..............................................................................................................................O-38
8.2.3 1st transfer roller drive..................................................................................................................................................O-39
8.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-39
8.3.1 1st transfer roller control...............................................................................................................................................O-39
8.3.2 Transfer belt cleaning...................................................................................................................................................O-40
8.3.3 Image stabilization control............................................................................................................................................O-41
9. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION.......................................................................................................................................O-42
9.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-42
9.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-43
9.2.1 Pressure/retraction drive...............................................................................................................................................O-43
9.2.2 2nd transfer roller drive.................................................................................................................................................O-43
9.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-43
9.3.1 2nd transfer roller control..............................................................................................................................................O-43
9.3.2 2nd transfer control.......................................................................................................................................................O-44
9.3.3 2nd transfer roller cleaning...........................................................................................................................................O-44
9.3.4 Paper separation control...............................................................................................................................................O-45
9.3.5 Sensor protection..........................................................................................................................................................O-46
10. TONER COLLECTING SECTION..........................................................................................................................O-47
10.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-47
10.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-47
10.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-48
10.3.1 Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box....................................................................................................O-48
10.3.2 Toner path in the waste toner box..............................................................................................................................O-49
10.3.3 Waste toner box set detection....................................................................................................................................O-50
10.3.4 Waste toner box full detection.....................................................................................................................................O-51
11. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)............................................................................................................O-52
11.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-52
11.1.1 Major components......................................................................................................................................................O-52
11.1.2 Layout of sensors and rollers......................................................................................................................................O-53
11.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-53
11.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-54
11.3.1 Up/down control..........................................................................................................................................................O-54
11.3.2 Paper feed control.......................................................................................................................................................O-55
11.3.3 Paper size detection control........................................................................................................................................O-59
11.3.4 Remaining paper detection control.............................................................................................................................O-60
11.3.5 Paper temperature detection control...........................................................................................................................O-61
12. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)............................................................................................................O-62
12.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-62
12.1.1 Major components (tray3)...........................................................................................................................................O-62
12.1.2 Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)...............................................................................................O-63
12.1.3 Major components (tray4)...........................................................................................................................................O-64
12.1.4 Layout of sensors and rollers......................................................................................................................................O-64

xxxiv
 12.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-65
12.2.1 Tray3...........................................................................................................................................................................O-65
12.2.2 Tray3 horizontal transport...........................................................................................................................................O-65
12.2.3 Tray4...........................................................................................................................................................................O-66
12.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-66
12.3.1 Up/down control..........................................................................................................................................................O-66
12.3.2 Paper Feed control.....................................................................................................................................................O-68
12.3.3 Paper size detection control........................................................................................................................................O-71
12.3.4 Remaining paper detection control.............................................................................................................................O-71
12.3.5 Dehumidification heater control..................................................................................................................................O-73
12.3.6 Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in.....................................................................................................................................O-74
12.3.7 Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in..........................................................................................................O-74
13. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)............................................................................................................O-75
13.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-75
13.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-76
13.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-76
13.3.1 Bypass paper lifting motion control.............................................................................................................................O-76
13.3.2 Paper feed control.......................................................................................................................................................O-77
13.3.3 Paper size detection control........................................................................................................................................O-78
13.3.4 Remaining paper detection control.............................................................................................................................O-80
13.3.5 Detection of bypass unit opened/closed.....................................................................................................................O-80
13.3.6 Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted........................................................................................................O-81
14. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION......................................................................................................................O-82
14.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-82
14.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-83
14.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-83
14.3.1 Vertical transport control.............................................................................................................................................O-83
14.3.2 Transport motor control...............................................................................................................................................O-84
14.3.3 Operation timing..........................................................................................................................................................O-84
15. REGISTRATION SECTION....................................................................................................................................O-85
15.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-85
15.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-85
15.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-85
15.3.1 Registration control.....................................................................................................................................................O-85
15.3.2 OHP detection.............................................................................................................................................................O-87
15.3.3 Paper transport speed control.....................................................................................................................................O-87
16. FUSING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-88
16.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-88
16.1.1 Configuration of the temperature detector element of fusing unit...............................................................................O-89
16.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-89
16.2.1 Heating roller drive......................................................................................................................................................O-89
16.2.2 Fusing pressure roller pressure drive.........................................................................................................................O-90
16.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-90
16.3.1 Fusing speed correction..............................................................................................................................................O-90
16.3.2 Fusing pressure/retraction control..............................................................................................................................O-91
16.3.3 Heating roller heating control......................................................................................................................................O-92
16.3.4 Heating control of the fusing pressure roller...............................................................................................................O-95
16.3.5 Fusing temperature control.........................................................................................................................................O-95
16.3.6 Heating roller temperature sensor..............................................................................................................................O-98
16.3.7 Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection........................................................................................O-98
16.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature control.............................................................................................................O-98
16.3.9 Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control............................................................................O-99
16.3.10 Protection against abnormal temperature.................................................................................................................O-99
16.3.11 Sensor disconnection detection control..................................................................................................................O-100
16.3.12 Brandnew detection................................................................................................................................................O-100
16.3.13 Fusing cooling control.............................................................................................................................................O-100
17. DUPLEX SECTION...............................................................................................................................................O-102
17.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-102
17.2 Drive....................................................................................................................................................................................O-103
17.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-103
17.3.1 Paper conveyance control........................................................................................................................................O-103
17.3.2 Duplex circulation control..........................................................................................................................................O-105
18. PAPER EXIT SECTION........................................................................................................................................O-111
18.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................O-111
18.2 Drive....................................................................................................................................................................................O-111
18.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-111
18.3.1 Transport control.......................................................................................................................................................O-111
19. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL....................................................................................................................O-114

xxxv
 19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................O-114
19.1.1 Image stabilization control chart...............................................................................................................................O-114
19.1.2 Overview of each control..........................................................................................................................................O-114
19.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence..................................................................................................................O-115
19.3 Image stabilization control operating condition...................................................................................................................O-115
19.3.1 In standby state.........................................................................................................................................................O-115
19.3.2 Before, during, and after a print cycle.......................................................................................................................O-116
19.4 Utility/Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................O-116
19.4.1 Expert Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................O-116
19.4.2 Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................O-116
19.5 Image stabilization control operating time...........................................................................................................................O-117
20. IMAGE PROCESSING.........................................................................................................................................O-118
20.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram .............................................................................................................O-118
20.2 Write section image processing block diagram...................................................................................................................O-118
21. POWER SUPPLY SECTION................................................................................................................................O-120
21.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON................................................................................................O-120
21.1.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-120
21.1.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-120
21.1.3 Auto power OFF system...........................................................................................................................................O-120
21.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON..................................................................................................O-121
21.2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-121
21.2.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-121
21.3 Power cables.......................................................................................................................................................................O-121
21.3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-121
21.3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-121
22. FAN CONTROL....................................................................................................................................................O-122
22.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................O-122
22.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-122
22.2.1 Function....................................................................................................................................................................O-122
22.2.2 Control conditions.....................................................................................................................................................O-123
23. COUNTER CONTROL..........................................................................................................................................O-125
23.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-125
23.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-125

PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-618..........................................................................................PA-1

1. SECTION CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................PA-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PA-2
3. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PA-3
4. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PA-4
5. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PA-5
5.1 Paper feed section..................................................................................................................................................................PA-5
5.1.1 Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism..........................................................................................................PA-5
5.1.2 Feeding the original......................................................................................................................................................PA-5
5.1.3 Document set detection................................................................................................................................................PA-6
5.1.4 Original size detection...................................................................................................................................................PA-6
5.2 Transport section....................................................................................................................................................................PA-7
5.2.1 Transfer mechanism.....................................................................................................................................................PA-7
5.2.2 Reading roller pressure/retraction control.....................................................................................................................PA-7
5.3 Turnover/paper exit section.....................................................................................................................................................PA-8
5.3.1 Transferring the original................................................................................................................................................PA-8
5.3.2 Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit...............................................................................................................PA-8
5.3.3 Switch back roller pressure/retraction control...............................................................................................................PA-9
5.4 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PA-9
5.4.1 1-sided mode................................................................................................................................................................PA-9
5.4.2 2-sided mode..............................................................................................................................................................PA-10
5.4.3 Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided)............................................................................................................................PA-10
5.5 Open/close detecting section................................................................................................................................................PA-11
5.5.1 DF 20 degree open/close detection............................................................................................................................PA-11
5.5.2 DF open/close detection.............................................................................................................................................PA-11
5.6 Cooling inside the unit...........................................................................................................................................................PA-12

PB THEORY OF OPERATION LU-301...........................................................................................PB-1

1. SECTION CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................PB-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PB-2
3. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PB-3
4. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
5. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PB-5

xxxvi
 5.1 Paper feed and transport control.............................................................................................................................................PB-5
5.2 Paper level detection...............................................................................................................................................................PB-5
5.3 Paper empty detection............................................................................................................................................................PB-6
5.4 Paper level indicator................................................................................................................................................................PB-6
5.5 Tray lift-up control...................................................................................................................................................................PB-7
5.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................................................................................PB-7
5.5.2 Paper size detection.....................................................................................................................................................PB-8
5.6 Dehumidification heater control...............................................................................................................................................PB-8

PC THEORY OF OPERATION LU-204..........................................................................................PC-1

1. SECTION CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................PC-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PC-2
3. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PC-3
4. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PC-4
5. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PC-5
5.1 Paper feed and transport control............................................................................................................................................PC-5
5.2 Paper level detection..............................................................................................................................................................PC-5
5.3 Paper empty detection............................................................................................................................................................PC-6
5.4 Paper level indicator...............................................................................................................................................................PC-6
5.5 Tray lift-up control...................................................................................................................................................................PC-7
5.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................................................................................PC-7
5.5.2 Paper size detection.....................................................................................................................................................PC-8
5.6 Dehumidification heater control..............................................................................................................................................PC-8

PD THEORY OF OPERATION ZU-606..........................................................................................PD-1

1. SECTION CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................PD-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PD-2
2.1 Straight mode/punch mode (for the small size paper : A5, 5-1/2 x 8-1/2)...............................................................................PD-2
2.2 Punch mode (excluding the small size paper)........................................................................................................................PD-2
2.3 Z-folding mode/punch + Z-folding mode.................................................................................................................................PD-3
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PD-4
3.2.2 Gate drive.....................................................................................................................................................................PD-5
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PD-5
3.3.1 Conveyance path switching..........................................................................................................................................PD-5
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed switching.................................................................................................................................PD-7
3.3.3 Registration control.......................................................................................................................................................PD-8
4. PUNCH SECTION....................................................................................................................................................PD-9
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PD-9
4.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PD-9
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PD-9
4.3.1 Punch control................................................................................................................................................................PD-9
4.3.2 Punch position movement control...............................................................................................................................PD-10
4.3.3 Punch hole switching control......................................................................................................................................PD-12
5. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................PD-14
5.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PD-14
5.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PD-14
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PD-14
5.3.1 Punch scraps conveyance control..............................................................................................................................PD-14
5.3.2 Punch scraps control..................................................................................................................................................PD-15
6. Z-FOLDING SECTION...........................................................................................................................................PD-16
6.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PD-16
6.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PD-16
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PD-17
6.3.1 1st folding control........................................................................................................................................................PD-17
6.3.2 2nd folding control......................................................................................................................................................PD-17

PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-526...........................................................................................PE-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.1 Main tray.................................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.2 Sub tray...................................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.3 Stapling...................................................................................................................................................................................PE-2
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PE-3
3. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION...................................................................................................................PE-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PE-4

xxxvii
 3.2 Horizontal transport mechanism.............................................................................................................................................PE-4
3.2.1 Paper transport.............................................................................................................................................................PE-4
3.2.2 Fan motor......................................................................................................................................................................PE-5
4. TRANSPORT SECTION...........................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.2.1 Route change gate........................................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.2.2 Bypass gate..................................................................................................................................................................PE-6
5. EXIT TRAY SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PE-8
5.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PE-8
5.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PE-8
5.2.1 Tray lift..........................................................................................................................................................................PE-8
5.2.2 Exit roller motor.............................................................................................................................................................PE-9
5.2.3 Main tray transport........................................................................................................................................................PE-9
5.2.4 Sub tray exit................................................................................................................................................................PE-10
6. ALIGNMENT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PE-11
6.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-11
6.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-11
6.2.1 Alignment plate...........................................................................................................................................................PE-11
6.2.2 Shift control.................................................................................................................................................................PE-11
6.2.3 Alignment section transport mechanism.....................................................................................................................PE-12
7. STAPLER................................................................................................................................................................PE-14
7.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-14
7.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-14
7.2.1 Stapler movement.......................................................................................................................................................PE-14
7.2.2 Stapler control.............................................................................................................................................................PE-15

PF THEORY OF OPERATION SD-508...........................................................................................PF-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.1 Folding/saddle stitching...........................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2 Tri-folding................................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PF-2
3. ALIGNMENT SECTION............................................................................................................................................PF-3
3.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-3
3.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PF-3
3.2.1 Alignment......................................................................................................................................................................PF-3
3.2.2 Stopper..........................................................................................................................................................................PF-4
4. STAPLER..................................................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.2.1 Stapler movement.........................................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.2.2 Stapling.........................................................................................................................................................................PF-8
5. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING......................................................................................................PF-9
5.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-9
5.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PF-9
5.2.1 Folding knife..................................................................................................................................................................PF-9
5.2.2 Folding transfer...........................................................................................................................................................PF-10
5.2.3 Tri-folding gate............................................................................................................................................................PF-10
6. EXIT SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................PF-12
6.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-12
6.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-12
6.2.1 Exit..............................................................................................................................................................................PF-12

PG THEORY OF OPERATION PK-516..........................................................................................PG-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PG-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PG-2
3. PUNCH SECTION....................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.2.1 Punch shift drive...........................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.2.2 Punch drive...................................................................................................................................................................PG-4
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-5
3.3.1 Punch standby position movement control...................................................................................................................PG-5
3.3.2 Punch position correction control.................................................................................................................................PG-5
3.3.3 Punch control................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION...........................................................................................................................PG-9
4.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PG-9

xxxviii
 4.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
4.3.1 Punch scraps box control.............................................................................................................................................PG-9

PH THEORY OF OPERATION JS-602...........................................................................................PH-1

1. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PH-1
2. CENTER CROSS SECTION ...................................................................................................................................PH-2
3. MECHANICAL OPERATION....................................................................................................................................PH-3
3.1 Job tray paper transport mechanism......................................................................................................................................PH-3

PI THEORY OF OPERATION PI-505...............................................................................................PI-1

1. PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.1 Auto sheet feeding (online operation).......................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.2 Manual sheet feeding (offline operation)..................................................................................................................................PI-1
2. CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................................................................PI-2
3. PAPER FEED SECTION............................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.1 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.1.1 Paper feed drive.............................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.1.2 Tray lift drive...................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.2.1 Tray lift mechanism........................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.2.2 Pick-up mechanism........................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2.3 Separation mechanism...................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2.4 Registration control........................................................................................................................................................PI-5
3.2.5 Paper size detection control...........................................................................................................................................PI-5

PJ THEORY OF OPERATION FS-527............................................................................................PJ-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH.................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.1 Tray1........................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2 Tray2........................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.3 Stapling....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
3. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION................................................................................................................PJ-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PJ-4
3.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism.........................................................................................................................................PJ-4
3.2.1 Paper conveyance.........................................................................................................................................................PJ-4
3.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism.............................................................................................................PJ-5
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PJ-6
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PJ-6
4.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-6
4.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-7
4.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate...................................................................................................................................PJ-7
4.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate..............................................................................................................................................PJ-7
4.3.3 Conveyance operation...................................................................................................................................................PJ-8
5. EXIT TRAY SECTION.............................................................................................................................................PJ-10
5.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-10
5.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-10
5.2.1 Tray lift.........................................................................................................................................................................PJ-10
5.2.2 Exit to tray1..................................................................................................................................................................PJ-11
5.2.3 Exit to tray2..................................................................................................................................................................PJ-12
5.2.4 Tray2 shift control........................................................................................................................................................PJ-13
6. ALIGNMENT SECTION...........................................................................................................................................PJ-15
6.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-15
6.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-15
6.2.1 Alignment plate............................................................................................................................................................PJ-15
6.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism.................................................................................................................PJ-15
7. STAPLER................................................................................................................................................................PJ-17
7.1 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-17
7.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-17
7.2.1 Stapler movement.......................................................................................................................................................PJ-17
7.2.2 Stapler control.............................................................................................................................................................PJ-18

PK THEORY OF OPERATION PK-517..........................................................................................PK-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PK-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PK-2
3. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PK-3

xxxix
 4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PK-4
4.1 Skew correction mechanism...................................................................................................................................................PK-4
4.2 Punch mechanism...................................................................................................................................................................PK-4
4.3 Punch status detection............................................................................................................................................................PK-4
4.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism..............................................................................................................................PK-5

PL THEORY OF OPERATION SD-509...........................................................................................PL-1

1. PAPER FEED PATH.................................................................................................................................................PL-1
2. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PL-2
3. ALIGNMENT SECTION............................................................................................................................................PL-3
3.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
3.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
3.2.1 Alignment......................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
3.2.2 Stopper..........................................................................................................................................................................PL-4
4. STAPLER..................................................................................................................................................................PL-6
4.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PL-6
4.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PL-6
4.2.1 Stapling.........................................................................................................................................................................PL-6
5. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING...............................................................................................................................PL-8
5.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PL-8
5.2 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PL-8
5.2.1 Folding plate..................................................................................................................................................................PL-8
5.2.2 Folding conveyance......................................................................................................................................................PL-9
6. EXIT SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................PL-11
6.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PL-11
6.2 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PL-11
6.2.1 Exit..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-11

PM THEORY OF OPERATION JS-603..........................................................................................PM-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PM-1
2. CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................................PM-2
3. DRIVE......................................................................................................................................................................PM-3
4. OPERATION............................................................................................................................................................PM-4
4.1 Conveyance/exit section.........................................................................................................................................................PM-4
4.1.1 Paper conveyance........................................................................................................................................................PM-4
4.1.2 Conveyance path switching..........................................................................................................................................PM-4
4.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism..............................................................................................................................PM-4
4.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction.......................................................................................................................................PM-4

PN THEORY OF OPERATION AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503..................................................PN-1

1. AU-101/AU-102........................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
2. AU-201......................................................................................................................................................................PN-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PN-2
2.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PN-2
3. OT-503......................................................................................................................................................................PN-3
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PN-3
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PN-3

PO THEORY OF OPERATION EK-604/EK-605/SC-507...............................................................PO-1

1. EK-604......................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
2. EK-605......................................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PO-2
3. SC-507.....................................................................................................................................................................PO-3
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PO-3
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PO-3

PP THEORY OF OPERATION SA-502..........................................................................................PP-1

1. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................................PP-1
2. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PP-2
Q PARTS GUIDE MANUAL (1st Edition)..........................................................................................Q-1

xl
INFORMATION FOR PARTS GUIDE MANUAL..............................................................................................................Q-1
HOW TO MAKE THE BEST USE OF THIS MANUAL.....................................................................................................Q-2
SYSTEM OUTLINE..........................................................................................................................................................Q-3
1. DIGITAL MFP B/W (bizhub 502/552/602/652)............................................................................................................Q-4
DIAGRAM OF MAIN PARTS SECTION...........................................................................................................................................Q-4
1.1 ADF EXTERNAL PARTS..........................................................................................................................................................Q-5
1.2 ADF PAPER FEED TRAY.........................................................................................................................................................Q-7
1.3 ADF PAPER FEED SECTION..................................................................................................................................................Q-8
1.4 ADF CONVEYANCE SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-10
1.5 ADF SWITCH SECTION.........................................................................................................................................................Q-14
1.6 ADF DRIVE SECTION............................................................................................................................................................Q-16
1.7 ADF PAPER EXIT SECTION..................................................................................................................................................Q-18
1.8 EXTERNAL PARTS................................................................................................................................................................Q-19
1.9 CONTROL PANEL..................................................................................................................................................................Q-23
1.10 IR COVER.............................................................................................................................................................................Q-25
1.11 IR FRAME.............................................................................................................................................................................Q-26
1.12 SCANNER SECTION............................................................................................................................................................Q-27
1.13 CCD UNIT/SCANNER DRIVE..............................................................................................................................................Q-29
1.14 IR BOARD SECTION............................................................................................................................................................Q-30
1.15 PH UNIT................................................................................................................................................................................Q-31
1.16 TONER RAIL.........................................................................................................................................................................Q-32
1.17 CONATCT SECTION............................................................................................................................................................Q-33
1.18 OZONE DUCT......................................................................................................................................................................Q-34
1.19 TONER SUUPLY SECTION.................................................................................................................................................Q-35
1.20 TRANSFER UNIT.................................................................................................................................................................Q-36
1.21 TRANSFER RAIL SECTION.................................................................................................................................................Q-37
1.22 ERASE LAMP.......................................................................................................................................................................Q-38
1.23 TONER COLLECT SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-39
1.24 1ST PAPER FEED................................................................................................................................................................Q-41
1.25 2ND PAPER FEED...............................................................................................................................................................Q-44
1.26 CASSETTE ASSY.................................................................................................................................................................Q-47
1.27 CASSETTE RAIL..................................................................................................................................................................Q-49
1.28 SIZE DETECTING SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-50
1.29 1000-SHEET PAPER FEED SECTION................................................................................................................................Q-51
1.30 LCC DRIVE...........................................................................................................................................................................Q-54
1.31 LEVEL CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-56
1.32 1500-SHEET PAPER FEED SECTION................................................................................................................................Q-58
1.33 LCC CASSETTE RAIL..........................................................................................................................................................Q-61
1.34 LCC LENGTH CONVEYANCE SECTION............................................................................................................................Q-62
1.35 1000-SHEET TRAY..............................................................................................................................................................Q-63
1.36 1500-SHEET TRAY..............................................................................................................................................................Q-64
1.37 CASSETTE TRAY.................................................................................................................................................................Q-66
1.38 MANUAL FEED TRAY UNIT.................................................................................................................................................Q-67
1.39 PAPER EXIT CONVEYANCE SECTION..............................................................................................................................Q-73
1.40 REGISTRATION SENSOR...................................................................................................................................................Q-77
1.41 ROTATION DETECTING SENSOR......................................................................................................................................Q-78
1.42 FUSING SECTION................................................................................................................................................................Q-79
1.43 ADU.......................................................................................................................................................................................Q-80
1.44 PAPER EXIT SECTION........................................................................................................................................................Q-82
1.45 REVERSAL UNIT..................................................................................................................................................................Q-84
1.46 MAIN DRIVE UNIT................................................................................................................................................................Q-86
1.47 FUSING DRIVE UNIT...........................................................................................................................................................Q-87
1.48 BOTTLE DRIVE SECTION...................................................................................................................................................Q-89
1.49 EJECT DRIVE SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-90
1.50 MAIN FRAME........................................................................................................................................................................Q-91
1.51 I/U FRAME SECTION...........................................................................................................................................................Q-92
1.52 REAR FAN SECTION...........................................................................................................................................................Q-93
1.53 DOOR SAFE SWITCH..........................................................................................................................................................Q-95
1.54 HIGH VOLTAGE UNIT..........................................................................................................................................................Q-96
1.55 MAIN POWER SUPPLY UNIT..............................................................................................................................................Q-97
1.56 SHIELD BOX.........................................................................................................................................................................Q-98
1.57 REAR ELECTRICAL SECTION..........................................................................................................................................Q-101
1.58 IH POWER SUPPLY...........................................................................................................................................................Q-102
1.59 WIRING...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-103
1.60 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-109
1.61 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-111
1.62 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-111
1.63 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-112
2. FAX CONTROLLER (FK-502)................................................................................................................................Q-113

xli
 2.1 ALL PARTS...........................................................................................................................................................................Q-113
2.2 ACCESSORY PARTS...........................................................................................................................................................Q-114
2.3 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-114
3. OTHER OPTION (EK-604).....................................................................................................................................Q-115
3.1 EK-604..................................................................................................................................................................................Q-115
3.2 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS....................................................................................................................................Q-116
3.3 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-116
4. OTHER OPTION (EK-605).....................................................................................................................................Q-118
4.1 EK-605..................................................................................................................................................................................Q-118
4.2 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS....................................................................................................................................Q-119
4.3 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-119
5. OTHER OPTION (MK-715).....................................................................................................................................Q-121
5.1 MK-715..................................................................................................................................................................................Q-121
5.2 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-121
6. PAPER FEEDER (LU-301).....................................................................................................................................Q-123
6.1 EXTERNAL PARTS..............................................................................................................................................................Q-123
6.2 FRAME SECTION.................................................................................................................................................................Q-124
6.3 LIFT-UP TRAY SECTION.....................................................................................................................................................Q-125
6.4 FRONT LIFT WIRE SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-126
6.5 PAPER FEED SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-127
6.6 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................Q-129
6.7 REAR LIFT WIRE SECTION................................................................................................................................................Q-130
6.8 DRIVE SECTION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-131
6.9 WIRING.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-132
6.10 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-133
6.11 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-134
6.12 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-134
6.13 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-134
7. PAPER FEEDER (LU-204).....................................................................................................................................Q-136
7.1 EXTERNAL PARTS..............................................................................................................................................................Q-136
7.2 FRAME SECTION.................................................................................................................................................................Q-137
7.3 LIFT-UP TRAY SECTION.....................................................................................................................................................Q-138
7.4 FRONT LIFT WIRE SECTION..............................................................................................................................................Q-139
7.5 PAPER FEED SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-140
7.6 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................Q-142
7.7 REAR LIFT WIRE SECTION................................................................................................................................................Q-143
7.8 DRIVE SECTION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-144
7.9 WIRING.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-145
7.10 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-146
7.11 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-147
7.12 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-147
7.13 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-147
8. OTHER OPTION (MK-720).....................................................................................................................................Q-149
8.1 MK-720..................................................................................................................................................................................Q-149
8.2 DESTINATION......................................................................................................................................................................Q-149
9. OTHER OPTION (ZU-606).....................................................................................................................................Q-151
9.1 MAIN FRAME........................................................................................................................................................................Q-151
9.2 EXTERNAL PARTS..............................................................................................................................................................Q-154
9.3 CONVEYANCE SECTION....................................................................................................................................................Q-155
9.4 PUNCH UNIT (2-3 HOLES)..................................................................................................................................................Q-162
9.5 PUNCH UNIT (2-4 HOLES)..................................................................................................................................................Q-164
9.6 PUNCH UNIT (SWEDEN 4 HOLES).....................................................................................................................................Q-165
9.7 PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION......................................................................................................................Q-167
9.8 Z-FOLDING SECTION..........................................................................................................................................................Q-169
9.9 WIRING ACCESSORY.........................................................................................................................................................Q-171
9.10 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-172
9.11 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-172
9.12 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-172
10. OTHER OPTION (SD-508)...................................................................................................................................Q-174
10.1 ALIGNMENT SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-174
10.2 PAPER EXIT SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-187
10.3 WIRING...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-189
10.4 WIRING ACCESSORY.......................................................................................................................................................Q-190
10.5 JIGS....................................................................................................................................................................................Q-191
10.6 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-192
10.7 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-193
10.8 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-193
11. SORTER/FINISHER (FS-526)..............................................................................................................................Q-195

xlii
 11.1 MAIN FRAME......................................................................................................................................................................Q-195
11.2 EXTRNAL PARTS...............................................................................................................................................................Q-197
11.3 TRANSFER SECTION........................................................................................................................................................Q-198
11.4 ALIGNMENT SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-212
11.5 STAPLER SECTION...........................................................................................................................................................Q-215
11.6 DRIVE UNIT........................................................................................................................................................................Q-217
11.7 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT UNIT SECTION...................................................................................................................Q-223
11.8 WIRING...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-226
11.9 WIRING ACCESSORY.......................................................................................................................................................Q-229
11.10 ACCESSORY PARTS.......................................................................................................................................................Q-230
11.11 MAINTENANCE LIST.......................................................................................................................................................Q-230
11.12 DESTINATION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-231
12. PUNCH UNIT (PK-516)........................................................................................................................................Q-232
12.1 PUNCH UNIT......................................................................................................................................................................Q-232
12.2 WIRING ACCESSORY.......................................................................................................................................................Q-236
12.3 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-237
12.4 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-238
13. OTHER OPTION (PI-505).....................................................................................................................................Q-240
13.1 EXTERNAL PARTS............................................................................................................................................................Q-240
13.2 PAPER FEED SECTION....................................................................................................................................................Q-241
13.3 PAPER FEED DRIVING SECTION....................................................................................................................................Q-243
13.4 CONVEYANCE GUIDE SECTION......................................................................................................................................Q-244
13.5 CONVEYANCE BELT SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-246
13.6 PAPER FEED TRAY...........................................................................................................................................................Q-248
13.7 WIRING ACCESSORY.......................................................................................................................................................Q-251
13.8 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-252
13.9 MAINTENANCE LIST.........................................................................................................................................................Q-252
13.10 DESTINATION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-252
14. OTHER OPTION (JS-602)....................................................................................................................................Q-254
14.1 JS-602.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-254
14.2 WIRING ACCESSORY.......................................................................................................................................................Q-256
14.3 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-256
15. SORTER/FINISHER (SD-509)..............................................................................................................................Q-258
15.1 EXTERNAL PARTS............................................................................................................................................................Q-258
15.2 FRAME SECTION...............................................................................................................................................................Q-259
15.3 PAPER CEASE UNIT.........................................................................................................................................................Q-261
15.4 UPPER STAPLER SECTION.............................................................................................................................................Q-263
15.5 LOWER STAPLER SECTION.............................................................................................................................................Q-266
15.6 WIRING...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-269
15.7 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-270
15.8 ACCESSORY PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................Q-271
15.9 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-272
16. SORTER/FINISHER (FS-527)..............................................................................................................................Q-273
16.1 EXTERNAL PARTS............................................................................................................................................................Q-273
16.2 FRAME SECTION...............................................................................................................................................................Q-274
16.3 PAPER ENTRANCE SECTION..........................................................................................................................................Q-277
16.4 PAPER EXIT SECTION......................................................................................................................................................Q-281
16.5 ALIGNMENT/STAPLER SECTION.....................................................................................................................................Q-285
16.6 ELEVATE DRIVE SECTION...............................................................................................................................................Q-289
16.7 ELEVATE/SHUTTER DRIVE SECTION.............................................................................................................................Q-291
16.8 PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION........................................................................................................................................Q-294
16.9 WIRING...............................................................................................................................................................................Q-298
16.10 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS................................................................................................................................Q-300
16.11 ACCESSORY PARTS.......................................................................................................................................................Q-301
16.12 MAINTENANCE LIST.......................................................................................................................................................Q-301
16.13 DESTINATION..................................................................................................................................................................Q-301
17. PUNCH UNIT (PK-517)........................................................................................................................................Q-303
17.1 PK-517................................................................................................................................................................................Q-303
17.2 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-304
17.3 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-304
18. STACKER (JS-603)..............................................................................................................................................Q-306
18.1 JS-603.................................................................................................................................................................................Q-306
18.2 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND JIGS..................................................................................................................................Q-307
18.3 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-307
19. OTHER OPTION (OT-503)...................................................................................................................................Q-309
19.1 OT-503................................................................................................................................................................................Q-309
19.2 DESTINATION....................................................................................................................................................................Q-309

xliii
bizhub 652/552/602/502 Revision history

Revision history
No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date
D00004568 I.10.18.20 Max Staple Limit Setting Error correction
1 2 2011/09/07
52
D00004564 I.6.1 System Settings-Power Save The explanation was modified.
2 2 2012/08/10
15 Settings
D00004476 O.21.1 Parts energized when the main The explanation was modified.
3 2 2012/08/10
09 power switch is turned ON
4 - Section Q 1 Add to the section Q (Parts guide manual 1st edition) 2012/08/27
D00004570 G.3.3.1 PH unit The adjustment procedure was added.
5 2 2013/01/10
90
D00004497 K.4.13.6 CFCC* The trouble code was added.
6 2 2013/03/18
98
D00010781 A.1. IMPORTANT NOTICE and others. The company name was changed.
7 2 2013/04/01
43
D00004568 I.10.14.7 Memory/HDD Adj. The explanation was modified.
8 2 2013/04/08
01

1
bizhub 652/552/602/502

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.

A-1
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 NOTICE

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
• Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA, INC. (hereafter called KM) strongly
recommends that all servicing be performed only by KM-trained service technicians.
• Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KM does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
• The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly.
• Keep this service manual also for future service.

A-2
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ITEMS FOR DANGE...

2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
CAUTION” are defined as follows.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury

WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury

CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

wound and property damage

2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

: Precaution when
servicing the product.
General
Electric hazard High temperature
precaution

: Prohibition when
servicing the product.
General Do not touch with Do not
prohibition wet hand disassemble

: Direction when
servicing the product.
General
Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.

A-3
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.

3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention

WARNING
• Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KM.

• Do not use any part not specified by KM.

• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

specified by KM.

• Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.

Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KM makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
high heat.
• Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from high heat.
• Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from high heat.

A-4
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

WARNING
• Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from high heat, electric shock, or
injury.

3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit the wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is the obligation of the customer engineer (hereafter called the
CE) to attach the appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to
the supply.

3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

WARNING
• Use a power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having
enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for
the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric
shock.

A-5
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

WARNING
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection
to wall outlet appropriate for the product’s rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire
or electric shock.
• The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in accordance
with the following:
Color of the wire Terminal of the plug
Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
Brown Black
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue White
or colored BLACK

Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

Green-and-Yellow
or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
• Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.

3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and
reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.

A-6
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

3.3.1 Power Supply

(1) Connection to Power Supply

WARNING
• The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
• If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles kw

and the product and another electrical

appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
• Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire. It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.

A-7
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

WARNING
• Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.

(2) Ground Connection

WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
• Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk of
electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection
because of a plastic part that is very
often installed midway within the water
pipe.

A-8
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

(3) Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When a securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KM. Using the damaged power
cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.

A-9
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

WARNING
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.

(4) Wiring

WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.

A-10
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(1) Prohibited Installation Places

WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

(2) When not Using the Product for a long time

WARNING
• When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.

A-11
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

(3) Ventilation

CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time

(4) Stability

CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.

A-12
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

3.3.3 After Service

(1) Inspection before Servicing

WARNING
• Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.

CAUTION
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.

A-13
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

CAUTION
• Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.

(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On

WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a
risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.

A-14
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

CAUTION
• Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.

(3) Safety Checkpoints

WARNING
• When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
• Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
• When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
• When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.

A-15
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

WARNING
• Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
• Check wiring for pinched and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be
sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.

A-16
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
• Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or similar substance in and
around the product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the interior
of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.

CAUTION
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.

A-17
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

CAUTION
• Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.

(4) Handling of Consumables

WARNING
• For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.

(5) Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION
• Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.

3.4 Used Batteries Precautions

3.4.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.

A-18
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

3.4.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.

3.4.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

3.4.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

3.4.5 Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

3.4.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

3.5 Laser Safety

3.5.1 Laser Safety
This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of danger
from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual.

3.5.2 Internal Laser Radiation

• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The laser
diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
A-19
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
Maximum average radiation power bizhub 652/602 13.8μW
(*) bizhub 552/502 11.8μW
Wavelength 775 to 800 nm
• * at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

[2]

[1]

[1] Print Head Unit [2] Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit

(1) U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation)

• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is
mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center
for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
• The label shown on “A.3.5.3 Laser Safety Label” indicates compliance with the CDRH
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
Wavelength 775 to 800 nm

A-20
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

(2) All Areas

CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
Wavelength 775 to 800 nm

(3) Denmark

ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af
funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der
opfylder IEC60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens højeste styrke 30 mW
bølgelængden 775 to 800 nm

(4) Finland, Sweden

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla
tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW
aallonpituus 775 to 800 nm

A-21
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning
specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 30 mW
våglängden 775 to 800 nm

VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle
lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.

VARNING!
Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är
urkopplad. Betrakta ej stråien.

(5) Norway

ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne
bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning,
som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 30 mW
bølgelengde 775 to 800 nm

3.5.3 Laser Safety Label

A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

A-22
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 WARNINGS

* Only for the U.S.A.

3.5.4 Laser Caution Label

A laser caution label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.

3.5.5 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.

A-23
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub 652/552/602/502 INDICATIONS ON THE ...

4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are
advised not to touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution
labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the
caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.

4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

WARNING
CAUTION
Do not burn used toner cartridges.
The area around the fusing unit is
Toner expelled from the fire is
extremely hot.
dangerous.
Touching any part other than those
indicated may result in burns.

WARNING
Do not burn the used waste toner
box. Toner expelld from the fire is
dangerous.

A-24
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub 652/552/602/502 INDICATIONS ON THE ...

4.2 Warning indications on the boards

High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

A-25
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub 652/552/602/502 INDICATIONS ON THE ...

High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

A-26
 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES
bizhub 652/552/602/502 TO TAKE IN CASE OF...

5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KM must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KM.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.

A-27
 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON
bizhub 652/552/602/502 HANDLING THIS MANUAL

B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
CAUTION
• Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

B-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME

2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
1 bizhub 652/552/602/502: Main body
2 Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
3 Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
4 Microsoft Windows 7: Windows 7
5 Microsoft Windows Server 2003: Windows Server 2003
6 Microsoft Windows Server 2008: Windows Server 2008
7 When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above: Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003
Windows 7/Vista/XP
Windows Server 2008/Server 2003
NOTE
• bizhub 602/502 described in this manual is available only as Taiwan model.

B-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. BRAND NAME

3. BRAND NAME
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
• The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company.

3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

• KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA logo, bizhub and PageScope are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
• © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA, INC.

B-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. FEEDING DIRECTION

4. FEEDING DIRECTION
• When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short edge feeding. The feeding direction which is
perpendicular to the short edge feeding is called the long edge feeding.
• Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the paper size. No specific notation is added for the
long edge feeding. When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be added to the paper size.
Sample notation
Paper size Feeding direction Notation
A4 Long edge feeding A4
Short edge feeding A4S
A3 Short edge feeding A3

B-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub 652/552/602/502
1.1 Type
Type Combination scanner and printer console type
Copying system Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
Printing process Laser electrostatic printing system
PC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability)
Scanning density Main scan direction: 600 dpi, Sub scan direction: 600 dpi
Exposure lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
Platen Stationary (mirror scan)
Original scanning • Mirror scanning CCD optical system
• Sheet through system when ADF is used
Registration Rear left edge
Paper feeding separation system Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
(Manual bypass)
Paper feeding separation system (Tray 1) Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Paper feeding separation system (Tray 2) Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Paper feeding separation system (Tray 3) Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Paper feeding separation system (Tray 4) Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Exposure system 1 polygon 2 beam exposure and polygon mirror scan system
Exposure density (main scanning Equivalent to 1800 dpi
direction)
Exposure density (sub scanning 600 dpi
direction)
Developing system Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system
Charging system DC comb electrode scorotron system with electrode cleaning function
Neutralizing system Red LED system
Image transfer system (1st transfer) Belt image transfer system
Image transfer system (2nd transfer) Roller image transfer system
Paper separating system Combination of curvature, separating claws, and bias system
Fusing system Belt IH fusing system
Heating system Heating: IH heating, Soaking: Halogen lamp

1.2 Functions
Types of original • Sheets
• Books
• Three-dimensional objects
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17
Max. original weight Max. 2 kg
Multiple copies 1 to 9999
Warm-up time (at ambient When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power switch remains ON for a
temperature of 23° C/73.4° F and predetermined period of time or more. (room temperature is 23° C/73.4° F)
rated source voltage) bizhub 652 30 sec. or less
bizhub 552 30 sec. or less
bizhub 602 (Taiwan only) 90 sec. or less
bizhub 502 (Taiwan only) 60 sec. or less
When the main power switch is turned ON during the sub power switch being ON (room temperature is
23° C/73.4° F)
bizhub 652 30 sec. or less
bizhub 552 30 sec. or less
bizhub 602 (Taiwan only) 90 sec. or less
bizhub 502 (Taiwan only) 60 sec. or less
Image loss Copy • Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
• Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
• Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
• Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
PC print • Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
• Trailing edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
• Rear edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)
• Front edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch)

C-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

First copy time (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 bizhub 652 3.8 sec. or less

1/ x 11, full size) bizhub 552 4.3 sec. or less
2
bizhub 602 (Taiwan only) 4.0 sec. or less
bizhub 502 (Taiwan only) 4.3 sec. or less
Processing speed Plain paper • bizhub 652: 310.00 mm/s
• bizhub 552: 264.00 mm/s
• bizhub 602: 288.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
• bizhub 502: 264.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
Thick 1, Thick 1+ • bizhub 652: 155.00 mm/s
• bizhub 552: 132.00 mm/s
• bizhub 602: 155.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
• bizhub 502: 132.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, OHP, • bizhub 652/552/602/502: 120.00 mm/s
Post card, Envelope, Label sheet,
glossy mode
Copying/printing speed for multi- bizhub 652 • 1-sided: 65 copies/min
copy/print cycle (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, • 2-sided: 65 copies/min (8 1/ x 11: 64 copies/min)
2
plain paper, tray 1) bizhub 552 • 1-sided: 55 copies/min
• 2-sided: 55 copies/min
bizhub 602 (Taiwan only) • 1-sided: 60 copies/min
• 2-sided: 60 copies/min
bizhub 502 (Taiwan only) • 1-sided: 50 copies/min
• 2-sided: 50 copies/min
Fixed zoom ratios Full size x1.000
Reduction Metric area • x0.500
• x0.707
• x0.816
• x0.866
Inch area • x0.500
• x0.647
• x0.733
• x0.785
Enlargement Metric area • x1.154
• x1.224
• x1.414
• x2.000
Inch area • x1.214
• x1.294
• x1.545
• x2.000
Zoom ratios memory 3 memories
Variable zoom ratios x0.250 to x4.000 in 0.001 increments
Paper size Tray 1/Tray2 Metric area • A3 Wide
• A3 to A5S
• A6S
• post card
Inch area • 11 x 17 to 8 1/ x 11
2
• 8 x 13
• 16K
• 8K
• 12 1/ x 18
4
Tray 3/Tray 4 • A4
• B5
• A5
• post card
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 5 1/ x 8 1/
2 2
• 16K
Manual bypass tray Metric area • A3 wide
• A3 to B6S
• A6S
• postcard
• long size paper (210 mm to 297 mm x
457.3 mm to 1,200 mm)

C-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

Inch area • 11 x 17 to 5 1/ x 8 1/
2 2
• 8 x 13
• 16K
• 8K
• 12 1/4 x 18
• long size paper (8 1/4 to 11 11/ x 18
16
to 47 1/4)
Copy exit tray capacity (When Plain paper 250 sheets
OT-503 is mounted) Thick paper 10 sheets
OHP film 1 sheet
External memory function Supported external memory • USB flash memory compatible with the USB (2.0) interface
devices • Formatted to the FAT32 file system

1.3 Paper
Paper source (maximum tray capacity)
Type Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Manual bypass
tray
Paper Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 / ○ (500 sheets) ○ (500 sheets) ○ (1500 sheets) ○ (1000 sheets) ○ (150 sheets)
type 16 to 24 lb)
Translucent paper - - - - -
OHP film - - - - ○ (20 sheets)
Thick paper 1 *1 (91 to 120 g/ ○ (400 sheets) ○ (400 sheets) ○ (1150 sheets) ○ (750 sheets) ○ (100 sheets)
m2 / 24.25 to 32 lb)
Thick paper 1+ *1 (121 to 157 ○ (280 sheets) ○ (280 sheets) ○ (800 sheets) ○ (500 sheets) ○ (80 sheets)
g/m2 / 32 to 41.75 lb)
Thick paper 2 *1 (158 to 209 ○ (250 sheets) ○ (250 sheets) ○ (700 sheets) ○ (450 sheets) ○ (70 sheets)
g/m2 / 42 to 55.5 lb)
Thick paper 3 *1,2 (210 to ○ (200 sheets) ○ (200 sheets) ○ (600 sheets) ○ (400 sheets) ○ (60 sheets)
256 g/m2 / 55.75 to 68 lb)
Thick paper 4 *1,2 (257 to - - - - ○ (50 sheets)
300 g/m2 / 68.25 to 80 lb)
Postcards - - ○ (200 sheets) ○ (200 sheets) ○ (50 sheets)
Envelopes - - - - ○(10 sheets)
Labels - - - - ○(50 sheets)
Long size paper *3 - - ○ (1 sheet)
Paper Width • 139.7 to 311.1 mm • A4 • 90 to 311.1 mm
dimensio • 5 1/ to 12 1/ inch • B5 • 3 1/ to 12 1/
2 2 2 4
ns • A5
inch
• 8 1/2 x 11
Length • 182.0 to 457.2 mm • 139.7 to 457.2
• 7 1/ to 18 inch • 5 1/ x 8 1/ mm
4 2 2
• 16K • 5 1/ to 18 inch
2
• postcard
Long size Width - - - - • 210 to 297 mm
paper *3 • 8 1/ to 11 3/
4 4
inch
Length - - - - • 457 to 1200
mm
• 18 to 47 1/
4
inch
• *1: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.
• *2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used.
• *3: 127 to 210 g/m2 / 33.75 to 55.75 lb
Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) or thick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.25 to 68 lb) are
reliably fed.

1.4 Materials
Parts name Field standard yield *1 Type name
Toner cartridge 37,500 prints TN618
Developing unit 1,140,000 prints DV612K
Drum unit 285,000 prints DR612K
Waste toner box 160,000 prints WX-102

C-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

• *1: This machine has the field standard yield which indicates the available print numbers estimated by the quantities and usage of the unit in
the market standard job mode. Yields for each preventative maintenance unit will differ depending on actual usage.
• The market standard job modes for this unit are as follows.
Market standard job modes bizhub 652 bizhub 552 bizhub 602 bizhub 502
Printing 7 P/J 6 P/J 6 P/J 5 P/J
Paper size • A4: 93 %
• A4S: 7 %
Total print volume/month • US: 19,500 • US: 13,500 - -
• EU: 25,600 • EU: 17,200
No. of image No. of times power turned 20 times/month
stabilization on
operations No. of returns from sleep None
mode
Changes in surrounding None
environment

1.5 Print volume

• bizhub 652
US Average 19,500 prints/month
Maximum 190,000 prints/month
EU Average 25,600 prints/month
Maximum 190,000 prints/month
• bizhub 552
US Average 13,500 prints/month
Maximum 150,000 prints/month
EU Average 17,200 prints/month
Maximum 150,000 prints/month

1.6 Machine specifications

Power requirements Voltage • AC 100 V
• 120 V
• 127 V
• 220-240 V
Current 100 V 15 A
110 V 15 A
120 V 16 A
127 V 16 A
220-240 V 10 A
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz ± 3 Hz
Max power consumption 100 V 1,500 W or less
110 V 1,500 W or less
120 V 2,100 W or less
127 V 2,100 W or less
220-240 V 2,100 W or less
Dimensions • 650 *1 (W) x 879 *2 (H) x 1,155 mm (H)
• 25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)
Space requirements • 2,554 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H)*3
• 100.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3
Weight Machine Approx. 201.0 kg / 433.0 lb (without IU and TC)
IU and TC Approx. 4.8 kg / 10.5 lb
• *1: Width when the bypass tray is closed.
• *2: Including the control panel.
• *3: Space requirements are the values when the finisher tray extension, paper trays and LCU are pulled out, and the ADF is open.

1.7 Operating environment

Temperature 10 to 30° C / 50 to 86° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour)
Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)
Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.

1.8 Print functions

Type Built-in printer controller

C-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

RAM 2 GB (shared with the main body)

HDD 250 GB (shared with the main body)
Interface Standard • USB 2.0
• Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Option (EK-604/605) USB 2.0
Frame type • Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet II
• Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols • TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)
• BOOTP
• ARP
• ICMP
• DHCP
• DHCPv6
• AutoIP
• SLP
• SNMP
• FTP
• LPR/LPD
• RAW Socket
• SMB over TCP/IP
• IPP
• HTTP
• POP
• SMTP
• LDAP
• NTP
• SSL
• IPX/SPX
• AppleTalk
• Bonjour
• NetBEUI
• WebDAV
• DPWS
• S/MIME
• IPsec
• DNS
• DynamicDNS
• LLMNR
• LLTD
Print speed (A4 or 8 1/2 x bizhub 652 • 1-sided: 65 ppm
• 2-sided: 65 ppm (64 ppm for 8 1/ x 11)
11, plain paper) 2
bizhub 552 • 1-sided: 55 ppm
• 2-sided: 55 ppm
bizhub 602 (Taiwan only) • 1-sided: 60 ppm
• 2-sided: 60 ppm
bizhub 502 (Taiwan only) • 1-sided: 50 ppm
• 2-sided: 50 ppm
Printer language • PCL5c/6 Emulation
• PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation
• PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
• XPS ver.1.0
Print resolution Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction x 600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Printer fonts • PCL Latin 80 Fonts
• Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts
Supported computer • IBM PC/AT compatible machine
• Macintosh (PowerPC/Intel processor: Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5/10.6 for Intel processor)
Printer driver PCL KONICAMINOLTA • Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
driver (PCL driver) • Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
• Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Windows Vista Business *
• Windows Vista Enterprise *
• Windows Vista Home Basic *
• Windows Vista Home Premium *

C-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

• Windows Vista Ultimate *

• Windows Server 2008 Standard *
• Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
• Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
• Windows 7 Home Basic
• Windows 7 Home Premium *
• Windows 7 Professional *
• Windows 7 Enterprise *
• Windows 7 Ultimate *
PostScript • Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
KONICAMINOLTA driver • Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
(PS driver) • Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
• Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Windows Vista Business *
• Windows Vista Enterprise *
• Windows Vista Home Basic *
• Windows Vista Home Premium *
• Windows Vista Ultimate *
• Windows Server 2008 Standard *
• Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
• Windows 7 Home Basic
• Windows 7 Home Premium *
• Windows 7 Professional *
• Windows 7 Enterprise *
• Windows 7 Ultimate *
XPS KONICAMINOLTA • Windows Vista Business *
driver (XPS driver) • Windows Vista Enterprise *
• Windows Vista Home Basic *
• Windows Vista Home Premium *
• Windows Vista Ultimate *
• Windows Server 2008 Standard *
• Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
• Windows 7 Home Basic
• Windows 7 Home Premium *
• Windows 7 Professional *
• Windows 7 Enterprise *
• Windows 7 Ultimate *
PostScript PPD driver (PS- Mac OS 9.2 or later
PPD)
PostScript PPD driver • Mac OS X 10.2.8
(Mac OS X) • Mac OS 10.3
• Mac OS 10.4
• Mac OS 10.5
• Mac OS 10.6

C-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

Fax driver • Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)

• Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
• Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
• Windows Vista Business *
• Windows Vista Enterprise *
• Windows Vista Home Basic *
• Windows Vista Home Premium *
• Windows Vista Ultimate *
• Windows Server 2008 Standard *
• Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
• Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
• Windows 7 Home Basic
• Windows 7 Home Premium *
• Windows 7 Professional *
• Windows 7 Enterprise *
• Windows 7 Ultimate *
• *: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported

1.9 Scan functions

Scanner Scannable range Same as the copier (Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)
Scan speed 78 pages/min (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, 1-sided, 300 dpi)
(When the ADF is used)
Functions • Scan to E-mail
• Scan to FTP
• Scan to SMB
• Scan to WebDAV
• Scan to BOX
• Scan to Web service
Scanning resolution • 200 dpi
• 300 dpi
• 400 dpi
• 600 dpi
TWAIN Driver • TWAIN Driver
• HDD TWAIN Driver
Supported operating • Windows XP Home Edition (SP3 or later)
systems • Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later)
• Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 or later) *1
• Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 or later) *1
• Windows Vista Business (SP2 or later) *1
• Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later) *1
• Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later) *1
• Windows 7 Home Basic *2
• Windows 7 Home Premium *2
• Windows 7 Professional *2
• Windows 7 Enterprise *2
• Windows 7 Ultimate *2
PC Conform to the specification of operating system
Required memory Conform to the specification of operating system
Network Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set
Hard disk Required 20 MB or more disk space
SMB Supported Windows • Windows NT4.0 Server/Workstation
operating • Windows 2000 Server/Professional
systems • Windows XP Home/Professional
• Windows Server 2003 each edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2 each edition
• Windows Vista each edition
• Windows Server 2008 each edition
• Windows Server 2008 R2 each edition
• Windows 7 each edition
DFS function is supported only in the environment that structured with the following
Windows server operating systems.

C-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 652/552/602/502

• Windows 2000 Server each edition

• Windows Server 2003 each edition
• Windows Server 2003 R2 each edition
• Windows Server 2008 each edition
• Windows Server 2008 R2 each edition
Direct hosting function applies to the following operating systems.
• Windows 2000 each edition
• Windows XP each edition
• Windows Vista each edition
• Windows 2008 each edition
• Windows 2008 R2 each edition
• Windows 7 each edition
Samba *3 • 2.2.x
• 3.x
Novell Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)
Netware
• *1: 32 bits (x86) environment are supported
• *2: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
• *3: This machine supports Unicode. However, if the operating system used in a destination computer does not support Unicode (2 and 3
byte characters), SMB transmission may be unavailable. If SMB transmission is unsuccessful, specify the shared name of the destination
folder using ASCII codes (one-byte alphanumeric characters).

1.10 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-618/SP-501

2. DF-618/SP-501
2.1 Type
Name Reverse automatic document feeder
Type Paper feed section Paper feed from top of stack
Image reading section Sheet-through system
Turnover section Switch back system
Exit section Straight exit system
Installation Screw cramp to the main body
Document alignment Center
Document loading Left image side up

2.2 Functions
Modes • Standard mode
• Mixed original detection mode
• FAX mode

2.3 Paper
Type of document Standard mode 1-sided mode: 35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)
2-sided mode: 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Mixed original detection
mode 1-sided / 2-sided mode: 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)

FAX mode 1-sided mode: 35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)

2-sided mode: 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Detectable document size *1 • Standard mode Metric area B6S to A3
• FAX mode
Inch area 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 to 11 x 17
Capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 (21.25 lb)) or stack of 14 mm and below
• *1: For the combined original detection mode, refer to the mixed original feed chart.

2.4 Paper feed prohibited originals

• If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
Type of original Possible trouble
Sheets stapled or clipped together • Paper feed failure
• Damaged sheet
• Defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips
Sheets glued together • Paper feed failure,
• Damaged sheet
Book original • Paper feed failure
• Damaged sheet
Original weighing less than 35 g/m2 (9.25 lb) or 210 g/m2 (55.75 lb) or • Paper feed failure
more • Transport failure
Sheets folded, torn or wrinkled • Paper feed failure
• Damaged sheet
• Transport failure
Sheets severely curled • Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in askew
OHP film (Transparency film) • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Label paper • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Offset master paper • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Glossy photographic paper or glossy enamel paper • Transport failure
• Damaged sheet
Sheets clipped or notched • Damaged sheet,
• Transport failure
Sheets patched • Patched part folded or torn sheet

2.5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals

• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of original Possible trouble
Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm) • Dog-eared

C-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-618/SP-501

Type of original Possible trouble

• Exit failure
• Transport failure
Heat sensitive paper • Edge folded
• Exit failure
• Transport failure
Ink jet paper • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Sheets with smooth surface (Coated paper) • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Intermediate paper • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit • Paper feed failure
• Transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited to vertical • Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
feeding
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes • Transport failure
Sheets two-folded or Z-folded • Transport failure
• Image deformation
Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) • Paper feed failure

2.6 Mixed original feed chart

• For metric
Max. original size 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm
Mixed original size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S B6S
A3 OK OK - - - - - - -
297 mm
A4 OK OK - - - - - - -
B4 OK OK OK OK - - - - -
257 mm
B5 OK OK OK OK - - - - -
A4S OK OK OK OK OK OK - - -
210 mm
A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK - - -
182 mm B5S NG NG OK OK OK OK OK - -
148 mm A5S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK -
128 mm B6S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK

• For inch
Max. original size 11 8 1/2 5 1/2
Mixed original size 11 x 17 8 1/2 x 11 8 1/2 x 14 8 1/2 x 11S 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
11 x 17 OK OK - - - -
11
8 1/2 x 11 OK OK - - - -

8 1/2 x 14 OK OK OK OK OK -
8 1/2
8 1/2 x 11S OK OK OK OK OK -

5 1/2 x 8 1/2 NG NG OK OK OK -
5 1/2
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S NG NG NG NG NG OK

OK Mixed original feed available (Tilted with in 1.5 % or less)

NG No. mixed original feed
- Can not set original

2.7 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power consumption 60 W or less
Dimensions • 618 mm (W) x 575 mm (D) x 130 mm (H)
• 24.33 inch (W) x 22.64 inch (D) x 5.12 inch (H)
Weight 16.0 kg (35.27 lb)

2.8 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

C-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-618/SP-501

2.9 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. LU-301

3. LU-301
3.1 Type
Name 3,000 sheets Large Capacity Unit
Type External option attached to the right side of the main body
Document alignment Center

3.2 Paper
Type Size Weight Capacity
Plain paper • A4 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 3,000 sheets
• 8 1/ x 11
Thick paper 1 2
91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 2,500 sheets *2
Thick paper 1+ 121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2 1,750 sheets *2
Thick paper 2 158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 1,550 sheets *2
Thick paper 3 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 1,300 sheets *1 *2
• *1: Images are out of guarantee.
• *2: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.

3.3 Machine specifications

Power requirements Supplied from the main body
• DC 24 V
• DC 5 V
• DC 3.3 V
Max. power consumption 23 W or less
Dimensions • 367 mm (W) x 528 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)
• 14.45 inch (W) x 20.79 inch (D) x 15.94 inch (H)
Weight 18.0 kg (39.68 lb)

3.4 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

3.5 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. LU-204

4. LU-204
4.1 Type
Name 2,500 sheets Large Capacity Unit
Type External option attached to the right side of the main body
Document alignment Center

4.2 Paper
Type Size Weight Capacity
Plain paper • A3 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 2,500 sheets
• B4
Thick paper 1 • A4S 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 2,000 sheets *2
Thick paper 1+ • A4
121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2 1,450 sheets *2
• A3W (12 x 18)
Thick paper 2 • 11 x 17 158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 1,250 sheets *2
Thick paper 3 • 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/ x 11S
2
• 8 1/ x 11 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 1,000 sheets *1 *2
2
• 12 x 18
• *1: Images are out of guarantee.
• *2: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.

4.3 Machine specifications

Power requirements Supplied from the main body
• DC 24 V
• DC 5 V
• DC 3.3 V
Max. power consumption 22 W or less
Dimensions • 629 mm (W) x 556 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)
• 24.76 inch (W) x 21.89 inch (D) x 15.94 inch (H)
Weight 25.0 kg (55.12 lb)

4.4 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

4.5 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-13
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. ZU-606

5. ZU-606
5.1 Type
Type Z-folding multi punching device

5.2 Functions
Punch Punching method Reciprocal punching method (punching each paper)
No. of holes • Metric area: 2 holes/4 holes (switched automatically)
• Inch area: 2 holes/3 holes (switched automatically)
Hole diameter • Metric area: 6.5 mm ± 0.5 mm
• Inch area: 8.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
Hole position
Metric area : 11.0 mm± 5 mm
Inch area : 9.5 mm± 5 mm

Hole pitch Metric area :

80 mm± 0.5 mm
Inch area : Center of the
108 mm± 0.5 mm paper

Inch area : 9.5 mm± 5 mm

Hole pitch 108 mm± 0.5 mm

Center of the
paper

Metric area : 11.0 mm± 5 mm

Hole pitch 21 mm± 0.5 mm

Hole pitch 70 mm± 0.5 mm Center of the
paper
Hole pitch 21 mm± 0.5 mm

Folding method Buckle folding method with the roller pair

Z-folding Folding length
a

Paper size L (mm) a (mm)

A3 209 or less
B4 181 or less
4±2
11 x 17 215 or less
8K *1 194 or less

*1: Only for the Taiwan market

Folding precision
2 mm or less 2 mm or less

1st folding 2nd folding

Folding Folding length

C-14
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. ZU-606

Folding precision
2 mm or less

Maximum tray The maximum Z-folding continuous Max. 30 sheets

capacity (80 g/m2) number of sheets Z-folding/stapling
for the FS main tray
at the Z-folding
operation

5.3 Paper
No punch mode Same as the main body
Punch mode Paper Combination with the folding/saddle stitching mode is not available.
size Metric area 2holes • A3
• B4
• A4
• A4S
• B5
• B5S
• A5
• A5S
• 8K *1
• 16K *1
• 16KS *1
• 8 x 13
• 8 1/2 x 13
• 8 1/ x 13
4
• 8 1/ x 13 1/
8 4
4holes • A3
• B4
• A4
• B5
• 8K *1
• 16K *1
Inch area 2holes • 11 x 17
• 8 1/ x 14
2
• 8 1/ x 11
2
• 8 1/ x 11S
2
• 5 1/ x 8 1/
2 2
• 5 1/ x 8 1/ S
2 2
• 7 1/ x 10 1/
4 2
• 7 1/ x 10 1/ S
4 2
3holes • 11 x 17
• 8 1/ x 11
2
Type of paper • 60 to 90 g/m2 of the high-quality paper and the plain paper
• Special paper is not guaranteed.
• The punching of label paper, tab paper, OHP paper, blueprint master and
binding-holed paper are not allowed.
Z-folding mode Paper size • A3
• B4: For B4 paper (including the mix of the paper), the combination with the
stapling mode is not available.
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/ x 14
2
• 8K

C-15
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. ZU-606

Type of paper • 60 to 90 g/m2 of the high-quality paper and the plain paper
• Special paper is not supported.
• Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness
paper are not supported in Z-folding mode.
Folding mode Paper size 8 1/2 x 14
Type of paper • 64 to 90 g/m2 of the high-quality paper and the plain paper
• Special paper is not supported.
• Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness
paper are not supported in folding mode.
Paper curling
5 sheets of paper immediately after the printing
a

a • Excluding the OHP paper: Amount of curl: 15 mm or less

• OHP paper: Amount of curl: 10 mm or less
• *1: Only for the Taiwan market

5.4 Maintenance
Maintenance Same as the main body
Machine service life Same as the main body

5.5 Machine specifications

Power requirements 100 to 240 VAC (automatic switching)
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power consumption 120 W or less
Dimensions • 169 mm (W) x 660 mm (D) x 1027.5 mm (H)
• 6.65 inch (W) x 25.98 inch (D) x 40.45 inch (H)
Weight 45 kg (99.21 lb)

5.6 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

5.7 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-16
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. FS-526

6. FS-526
6.1 Type
Name Flat-stapling finisher: 100 sheets staple
Type Staple finisher attached to the side of the main body
Installation Including horizontal transport unit (Built-in finisher that is mounted from the left of the main body)
Document alignment Center
Consumables Staples

6.2 Functions
Modes • Non-sort
• Sort
• Offset
• Group offset
• Sort staple

6.3 Stapling
Max. flat-stapling capacity 60 to 80 g/m2: 100 sheets or 94 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *2
81 to 90 g/m2: 30 sheets or 28 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *1
91 g/m2 or more: 2 sheets of thick paper or more not guaranteed
Max. stapling capacity for 100 sheets Paper length: 150 to 300 mm
different paper sizes • B5 to A4S
• 8 1/ x 11S
2
70 sheets B5 recycled paper 1-sided mode
65 sheets Paper length: 389 mm or less
• B4S
• 8 1/ x 14S
2
50 sheets Paper sizes other than the above
• Paper length: 150 mm or less*1, *2
• Paper length: 390 mm or more *1, *2
Stapling position • Back of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)
• Front of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)
• Center staple two points (Staple interval is fixed to 145 mm.)
Stapling method Bypass flat clinch
• *1:The stapling capacity for colored paper and enamel paper is 35 sheets (recommended paper).
• *2:And the stapling thickness is 10 mm or less and the stack thickness including curl is 25 mm or less.

6.4 Max. paper capacity

Main tray (80 g/m2) • Non-sort 3,000 sheets • A4
• Sort • A4S
• Offset • B5
• group offset • B5S
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 16K
• 16KS
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 S
1,500 sheets • A3
• B4
• 8 x 13
• 8 1/4 x 13
• 8 1/2 x 13
• 8 1/2 x 13 1/4
• 8 1/2 x 13 1/2
• 12 x 8
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8K
• Wide size paper (Max.: 320 mm X 450 mm)

C-17
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. FS-526

500 sheets • A5
• A5S
• B6S
• A6S
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2
• 5 1/ x 8 1/ S
2 2
No. of sheets in offset mode Size in the sub scan direction is The others
150 to 417 mm or longer
1 sheet Equivalent to the above capacity
Set of 2 to 9 sheets 300 copies 150 copies
Set of 10 sheets 150 copies 150 copies
Main tray Sort staple No. of sheets per stapling Size in the sub scan direction is The others
150 to 417 mm or longer
2 to 9 100 copies 50 copies
10 to 20 50 copies 50 copies
21 to 30 30 copies 30 copies
31 to 40 25 copies 25 copies
41 to 50 20 copies 20 copies
51 to 60 15 copies -
61 to 100 10 copies -
Sub tray (80 g/m2) 100 sheets

6.5 Type of paper

Size • A3
• B4
• A4
• A4S
• B5
• B5S
• A5
• A5S
• B6S
• A6S
• Postcard S
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
• 8 x 13
• 8 1/4 x 13
• 8 1/2 x 13
• 8 1/8 x 13 1/4
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/2 x 11
• /8 1/2 x 11S
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 S
• 8K
• 16K
• 16KS
• Custom size paper
• Wide size paper
• Standard size index paper (Upon paper exit, only the leading edge side but not the trailing edge side is guaranteed.)
• Min.: 100 mm x 139 mm (4 inch x 5.5 inch)
• Max.: 311 mm x 488 mm (12.2 inch x 19.2 inch)
Type • Plain paper
• Bond paper
• Colored paper
• Coated paper
• Speciality paper defined in the main body specifications, and recommended paper are guaranteed.
Weight 60 to 300 g/m2

6.6 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)

C-18
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. FS-526

Max. power consumption 85 W or less

Dimensions • 723.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm
• 28.45 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch
• 848.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm *
• 33.35 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch *
Weight 60 kg (132.24 lb)
• *: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out

6.7 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

6.8 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-19
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. SD-508

7. SD-508
7.1 Type
Name Saddle sticher SD-508
Type Built into the finisher
Installation Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment Center
Stapling function Center parallel two points

7.2 Paper
7.2.1 Saddle stitching
Type • Plain paper
• Thick paper 1
• Thick paper 2
Size • A3
• B4
• A4S
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 8KS
• Min: 210 mm x 279 mm, 8.25 inch x 11 inch
• Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12.25 inch x 18 inch
Max. saddle stitching capacity 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 ,16 to 21.25 lb)
16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,21.5 to 24 lb)
19 sheets (80 g/m2 ,21.25 lb) + 1 sheet (209 g/m2 , 55.5 lb)

7.2.2 Folding
Type Plain paper
Size • A3
• B4
• A4S
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 8KS
• Min: 210 mm x 279 mm, 8.25 inch x 11 inch
• Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12.25 inch x 18 inch
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)

7.2.3 Tri-folding
Type Plain paper
Size • A4S
• 8 1/ x 11S
2
• 16KS
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb) *
• *: It is not guaranteed when folding together more than 2 sheets.

7.3 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the finisher)
DC 5 V (supplied from the finisher)
Max. power consumption 40 W or less
Dimensions • 281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)
• 11.07 inch (W) x 23.48 inch (D) x 20.86 inch (H)
Weight • Approx. 22.6 kg + 3.8 kg (Exit tray)
• Approx. 49.75 lb + 8.5 lb (Exit tray)

7.4 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

C-20
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. SD-508

7.5 Consumables
• Staples 5000 (MS-5C)

7.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-21
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. PK-516

8. PK-516
8.1 Type
Name Punch unit
Type FS-integrated type punching operation device

8.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes • 2-3 holes
• 2-4 holes
• 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch • 2 holes /φ8.0 mm / 70 mm pitch - 3 holes /φ6.5 mm / 108 mm pitch
• 2 holes /φ6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch - 4 holes /φ6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
• 4 holes /φ6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode • Punch mode
• Through mode
Applicable post processing mode • Sort
• Group
• Staple

8.3 Paper
Size 2 hole/Sweden 4 hole punch • A3
setting • B4
• A4
• A4S
• B5
• B5S
• A5
• A5S
• 8 x 13
• 8 x 13S
• 8 1/4 x 13
• 8 1/2 x 13
• 8 1/8 x 13 1/4
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
• 8K
• 16K
• 16KS
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2S
• 8 2/3 x 13S
• 8 1/2 x 13S
• 8 1/4 x 13S
• 8 1/8 x 13 1/4S
• 8 1/2 x 13 1/2S
3 hole/4 hole punch setting • A3
• B4
• A4
• B5
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 7 1/ x 10 1/
4 2
• 8K
• 16K
Supported paper Main unit specifications prioritized
• Plain paper
• Bond paper
• Colored paper
• Coated paper

C-22
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. PK-516

Weight 60 to 300 g/m2

Punch prohibited paper • Label paper
• Tab paper
• Transparency film
• 2nd base paper
• Holed paper
• The other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade

8.4 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power consumption 30 W or less
Dimensions • 146.2 mm (W) x 639.2 mm (D) x 233.8 mm (H)
• 5.75 inch (W) x 25.16 inch (D) x 9.2 inch (H)
Weight 4.5 kg (9.92 lb)

8.5 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

8.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-23
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. JS-602

9. JS-602
9.1 Type
Name Job separator
Type Add-on finishing device externally mounted on top of finisher
Installation Fixed to finisher
Document alignment Center

9.2 Functions
Modes • Group
• Sort (during copy, print, or fax mode)

9.3 Paper
Type Size Weight Tray capacity
Plain paper • A5S to A3 • 60 to 90 g/m2 100 sheets 80 g/m2, 21.25 lb
• 5 1/ x 8 1/ S to 11 x 17 • 16 to 24 lb • A4
2 2
• 8 1/ x 11
2
50 sheets • Except A4, 8 1/ x 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25
2
lb) (Height: up to 28 mm, 1.1 inch)

9.4 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions • 341 mm (W) x 537 mm (D) x 149 mm (H)
• 13.43 inch (W) x 21.14 inch (D) x 5.87 inch (H)
Weight 1.75 kg (3.86 lb)

9.5 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

9.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-24
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. PI-505

10. PI-505
10.1 Type
Name Post inserter unit
Type Torque limiter separation type seat feeding device

10.2 Functions
Auto sheet feeding (online operation) Feeds the sheet to finisher automatically under the instruction from the main body.
Manual sheet feeding (offline operation) Feeds the sheet to finisher under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
You can select the following 5 post processing modes.
• 1 staple/back mode
• 2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
• Punch mode (when PK-516 is installed on finisher)
• Saddle stitching mode (when installed on SD-508)
• Tri-folding mode (when installed on SD-508)

10.3 Paper
Size Tray /Up • A4
• A4S
• B5
• B5S
• A5
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2S
• 16K
• 16KS
• Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 297 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)
Tray / • A3
Low • B4
• A4
• A4S
• B5
• B5S
• A5
• 8 x 13S
• 8 1/4 x 13S
• 8 1/2 x 13S
• 8 1/8 x 13 1/4S
• SRA4S
• 12 x 18
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2
• 8K
• 16K
• 16KS
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
• 7 1/4 x 10 1/2S
• Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 457.2 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)
Type • Plain paper
• Recycle paper
• Color paper
• Special paper
• Coated paper
• High-quality paper
Weight 60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2
Capacity Tray /Up 200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height
Tray /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height

C-25
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. PI-505

10.4 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power consumption 30 W or less
Dimensions • 511 mm (W) x 635 mm (D) x 220 mm (H)
• 20 inch (W) x 25 inch (D) x 8.75 inch (H)
Weight 10.5 kg (23.25 lb)

10.5 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

10.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-26
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. FS-527

11. FS-527
11.1 Type
Name Multi staple finisher
Type Freestanding
Document alignment Center
Consumables Staples

11.2 Functions
Modes • Sort
• Group
• Offset
• Group
• Offset
• Sort staple

11.3 Paper
11.3.1 Non sort/sort/group
Size Type Weight Max. capacity
• A6S • Plain paper • 60 to 90 g/m2 Exit tray1 200 sheets
• A5S • Recycled paper • 16 to 24 lb Exit tray2 • A4S or less
• A5 • 8 1/ x 11S or 3,000
• B5S 2 sheets
• B5 less
• B6S • B4 or greater
• A4S • 8 1/ x 14 or 1,500
2 sheets
• A4
greater
• B4
• A3 • A5S or less
• A3Wide • 5 1/ x 8 1/ S or 500 sheets
2 2
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S less
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 Envelope -
• 8 1/2 x 11S OHP
-
transparencies
• 8 1/2 x 11
Label -
• 8 1/2 x 14
Letterhead -
• 11 x 17
• Thick paper 1 • 91 to 120 g/m2
12 1/4 x 18
• 24.25 to 31.9 lb
• Tray1 (Sub tray) Max.: 311.15 mm x 1200 mm
• Tray1 (Sub tray) Max.: 12.25 x 47.24 inch Thick paper 1+ • 121 to 157 g/m2 20 sheets
• Tray1 (Sub tray) Min.: 90 mm x 139.7 mm • 32 to 41.75 lb
• Tray1 (Sub tray) Min.: 3.54 x 5.5 inch Thick paper 2 • 158 to 209 g/m2
• Tray2 (Main tray) Max.: 311.15 mm x 457.2
mm • 42 to 55.5 lb
• Tray2 (Main tray) Max.:12.25 x 18 inch Thick paper 3 • 210 to 256 g/m2
• Tray2 (Main tray) Min.: 100 mm x 139.7 mm • 55.75 to 68 lb
• Tray2 (Main tray) Min.: 3.94 x 5.5 inch
Thick paper 4 • 257 to 300 g/m2
• 68.25 to 79.8 lb
210 mm to 297 mm x 457.2 mm to 1200 mm Long size paper * • 127 to 160 g/m2
-
• 33.75 to 42.5 lb
• *: Long size paper is available only for non-sort mode.

11.3.2 Sort offset/group offset

Size Type Weight Max. capacity
• A5 • Plain paper • 60 to 90 g/m2 Exit tray2 • A4S or less
• B5S • Recycled paper • 8 1/ x 11S or 3,000
• 16 to 24 lb 2
• B5 sheets *
less
• A4S
• A4 • B4 or greater
• 8 1/ x 14 or 1,500
• B4 2 sheets
• A3 greater
• A3Wide
A5 500 sheets
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 8 1/2 x 11
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 11 x 17
• 12 1/4 x 18

C-27
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. FS-527

Size Type Weight Max. capacity

• Max.: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 x 18 inch Thick paper • 91 to 300 g/m2
• Min.: 182 mm x 148.5 mm, 7.17 x 5.85 inch -
• 24.25 to 79.8 lb
• *: 2,000 sheets when SD-509 is mounted

11.3.3 Sort staple

Max. capacity
Max. No. of sheets
Size Type Weight No. of sheets to be stapled A4S, 8 1/2 x 11 S B4, 8 1/2 x 14 or to be stapled
or less greater
• A5 • Plain • 60 to 90 Exit 2 to 9 sheets 100 copies 50 copies 50 sheets
• B5S paper g/m2 tray2 10 to 20 sheets 50 copies 50 copies
• B5 • Recycled • 16 to 24
• A4S paper 21 to 30 sheets 30 copies 30 copies
lb
• A4 31 to 40 sheets 25 copies 25 copies
• B4 41 to 50 sheets 20 copies 20 copies
• A3
Thick paper • 91 to 209 - 30 sheets
• 8 1/2 x 11S
g/m2 15 sheets
• 8 1/2 x 11 • 24.25 to
• 8 1/2 x 14 55.5 lb
• 11 x 17
• Max.: 297 mm x -
431.8 mm, 11.75
x 17 inch
• Min.:182 mm x
148.5 mm, 7.25 x
5.75 inch

11.4 Stapling
Staple filling mode Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Stapling position Back/Front of the corner (45 degree) • A4
• A3
• 8 1/ x 11
2
• 11 x 17
Back/Front of the corner (35 degree) • B5
• B4
Back/Front of the corner (Parallel) • A4S
• B5S
• A5
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 8 1/ x 14
2
Side: Parallel 2 point • A4S
• A4
• A3
• B5S
• B5
• B4
• A5
• 8 1/2 x 11S
• 8 1/ x 11
2
• 8 1/ x 14
2
• 11 x 17
Manual staple None

11.5 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V ± 10% (supplied from the main body)
Max. power consumption 56 W or less
Dimensions • 528 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,025 (H) mm
• 20.79 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 40.35 (H) inch
• 658 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,087 (H) mm *
• 25.91 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 42.8 (H) inch *
Weight 42 kg (92.59 lb)
• *: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out

C-28
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. FS-527

11.6 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

11.7 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-29
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. PK-517

12. PK-517
12.1 Type
Name Punch kit
Type FS-integrated type punching operation device

12.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes • 2-3 holes
• 4 holes
• Sweden 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch • 2 holes / φ 8.0 mm 70 mm pitch - 3 holes /φ8.0 mm / 108 mm pitch
• 4 holes /φ6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
• Sweden 4 holes /φ6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode Punch mode
Applicable post processing mode • Sort
• Group
• Staple

12.3 Paper
Size • 2 hole punch setting:11 x 17, 8 1/ x 14, 8 1/ x 11/8 1/ x 11S
2 2 2
• 3 hole punch setting:11 x 17, 8 1/ x 11
2
• 4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4, B5
• Sweden 4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5
Supported paper • Plain paper
• Bond paper
• Thick paper 1/2/3 (Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight 60 to 256 g/m2
Punch prohibited paper • Label paper
• Tab paper
• Transparency film
• 2nd base paper
• Holed paper and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch kit or the
punch blade

12.4 Machine specifications

Dimensions • 58 mm (W) x 470 mm (D) x 135 mm (H)
• 2.28 inch (W) x 18.50 inch (D) x 5.31 inch (H)
Weight 1.8 kg (3.97 lb)

12.5 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

12.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-30
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 13. SD-509

13. SD-509
13.1 Type
Name Saddle sticher SD-509
Type Built into the finisher
Installation Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment Center
Stapling function Center parallel two points

13.2 Paper
13.2.1 Saddle stitching
Type • Plain paper
• Thick paper 1
• Thick paper 2
Size • A3
• B4
• A4S
• A3 Wide
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/ x 11S
2
• Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
• Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
Max. saddle stitching capacity 15 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
14 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb) + 1 sheet (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 , 16 to 55.5 lb)

13.2.2 Folding
Type Plain paper
Size • A3
• B4
• A4S
• A3 Wide
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/ x 11S
2
• Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch x 11 inch
• Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch x 18 inch
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)

13.3 Machine specifications

Dimensions • 239 mm (W) x 579 mm (D) x 534 mm (H)
• 9.41 inch (W) x 22.80 inch (D) x 21.02 inch (H)
Weight 24 kg (52.91 lb)

13.4 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

13.5 Consumables
• Staples 5,000 (SK-602: Staple kit)

13.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-31
bizhub 652/552/602/502 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 14. JS-603

14. JS-603
14.1 Type
Name Job separator
Type Fixed to the finisher
Document alignment Center

14.2 Functions
Modes • Sort
• Group

14.3 Paper
Size Type Capacity
• A5S, Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2, 16 to 24 lb) 100 sheets
• B5S
• B5 Special Thick paper 1 (91 to 120 g/m2,
• A4S paper 24.25 to 32 lb)
• A4
Thick paper 1+ (121 to 157 g/m2,
• B4
32.25 to 41.75 lb)
• A3
• A3 Wide Thick paper 2 (158 to 209 g/m2,
• 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S 42 to 55.5 lb)
• 8 1/2 x 11S Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2, 10 sheets
• 55.75 to 68 lb)
8 1/2 x 11
• 8 1/2 x 14 Thick paper 4 (257 to 300 g/m2,
68.25 to 80 lb)
• 11 x 17
• OHP film
12 1/4 x 18
• Max.: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch x 18 inch Label
• Min.: 139.7 mm x 182 mm, 5.5 inch x 7.17 inch Envelope

14.4 Machine specifications

Power requirements DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)
DC5 V ± 5 %
Dimensions • 165 mm (W) x 389 mm (D) x 63 mm (H)
• 6.5 inch (W) x 15.31 inch (D) x 2.48 inch (H)
Weight 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

14.5 Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

14.6 Note for the Specifications

NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

C-32
 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103
bizhub 652/552/602/502 v2/105

15. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105

15.1 Available function for i-Option
• Available function for i-OptionThe functions available for i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105 are as follows.
Application
Function Overview
LK-101 v2 LK-102 LK-103 v2 LK-105
Web browser • From the control panel, access content on the
Internet or Intranet, in order to display or print this
content. Additionally, you can operate PageScope ○ ○
Web Connection to use documents saved in user
boxes.
Image panel • This is a new control panel user interface.
It enables the whole operation workflow to be easily ○ ○
grasped.
Photo registration • You can add photo data to a registered address
book entry.
○ ○
Registered photos are reflected in the Destination
List of the Image Panel.
Assignment of application • Enhanced function can be assigned to the
○ ○ ○
keys application key.
PDF processing • When transmitting documents in PDF format, you
can encrypt PDF file with password or digital ID, ○ ○
add a digital signature, and specify properties.
Searchable PDF • You can create a text searchable PDF file by
pasting transparent text data on the area of a
document in which characters are recognized
through an OCR process. ○
• You can create a searchable PDF file when saving
or sending an original in the PDF format using the
scan or User Box functions.

15.2 Web browser function

• Main specifications of the web browser installed are as follows.
Browser engine NetFront
Supported protocols • HTTP
• HTTPS
• TCP/IP
Supported markup/script languages • HTML
• CSS
• JavaSrcript
• Ajax
Supported image formats • JPEG
• BMP
• PNG
• GIF
• Animation GIF
• PDF
• XPS
• Flash
Supported SSL/TLS versions • SSL2.0
• SSL3.0
• TLS1.0
Supported character codes • Western (ISO-8859-1)
• Unicode (UTF-8)
• Simplified Chinese (GB2312)
• Traditional Chinese (Big5)
• Japanese (Shift-JIS)
• Japanese (ISO-2022-JP)
• Japanese (EUC-JP)
Display modes • Normal
• Just-Fit Rendering
• Smart-Fit Rendering
PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE
Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7
NOTE
The Flash player installed on the MFP does not support the following:
• The function to trigger an event caused by a key operation.
• The function to paste or acquire data such as character strings from the clipboard.
• The context menu.
• The Flash printing function.

C-33
 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103
bizhub 652/552/602/502 v2/105
• The function to execute JavaScript from Flash or to operate Flash by JavaScript.
• A screen that has no window (pop-up).
• The Flash bookmark function.
• The function to send/receive data in real time using the Flash Media Server.
• The function to communicate via the XMLSocket.

15.3 Photo registration function

• Specifications of the photo data to be registered are as follows.
File type • BMP format
• 24-bit color,
• Uncompressed
Image size 48 x 48 pixels
Data size 6,966 Byte

C-34
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System front view
[19] [20] [21] [22]
[2] [3] [4]

[1]

[18] [5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

[10]

[17]
[15] [14]

[11]

[16]

[13] [12]

[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502 [2] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-101

[3] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-102 [4] Authentication unit: IC card type AU-201
[5] Working table WT-506 [6] Keyboard holder KH-101
[7] Local interface kit EK-604 [8] Local interface kit EK-605 *1
[9] Mount kit MK-715 *2 [10] Large capacity unit LU-301
[11] Large capacity unit LU-204 [12] Finisher FS-527
[13] Saddle sticher SD-509 [14] Job separator JS-603
[15] Punch kit PK-517 [16] Z folding unit ZU-606
[17] Saddle sticher SD-508 [18] Finisher FS-526
[19] Punch kit PK-516 [20] Post inserter PI-505
[21] Job separator JS-602 [22] Output tray OT-503
• *1: This option may not be available depending on the sales area.
• *2: Except for the North America and Europe area.

1.2 System rear view

[10] [11] [2]

[1]
[9]
[8]

[7]
[3]
[6]
[5]

[4]

[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502 [2] Stamp unit SP-501

[3] Fax kit FK-502 [4] Heater HT-508 *1
[5] Scan accelerator kit SA-502 [6] Security kit SC-507

D-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

[7] Mount kit MK-720 [8] Key counter kit KIT-1

[9] Key counter kit KIT-CF *2 [10] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2 *3/105
[11] Upgrade kit UK-203
• *1: North America and Europe only
• *2: Europe only
• *3: The LK-103 v2 is not available for North America area.
NOTE
• To install the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) or the Fax kit (FK-502), installing the Mount kit (MK-720) is necessary.
• As the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) and the FAX kit (FK-502) line 2 required for the second fax line need to be installed at the
same place, only one of them can be installed.

D-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. SECTION CONFIGURATION

2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
[1]

[2]

[15]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[13]
[5]
[12]

[11]

[10]

[9] [6]

[8]

[7]

[1] Auto document feed section * [2] Scanner section (IR section)
[3] Fusing section [4] Duplex section (standard)
[5] Paper feed section (Bypass tray) [6] Toner collecting section in front door (dotted line section)
[7] Paper feed section (Tray4) [8] Paper feed section (Tray3)
[9] Paper feed section (Tray2) [10] Paper feed section (Tray1)
[11] Write section (PH section) [12] Imaging unit section (IU section)
[13] Transfer corona section [14] Toner supply section
[15] Paper exit section
• *: Standard

D-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH

3. PAPER PATH

D-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Scanner Inverter board

section Original glass
position control
board
CCD board Scanner
relay board Vendor
R G B Control panel
Key counter

HDD R G B

USB board
Total counter

Authentic Fusing unit

-ation unit
Printer control DC power supply
MFP board
board
Fax board Service EEPROM
PC drum motor
Developing motor
K
High voltage unit

Main
PH relay board body
Paper feed
section
Polygon motor Paper feed/
Laser drive transport Duplex unit
board Index board drive board
Bypass tray
PH section section

Finisher Paper feed unit

D-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

[1]

[15]

[14] [13]

[16]

[10] [9]
[7]
[8]
[11]

[3]

[6] [12]
[5]

[4]

[1] Photoelectric The light reflected off the surface of the original is separated into different colors using the color filters (R, G, and B);
conversion CCD then converts it into a corresponding electric signal and outputs the signal to the printer image processing section
(MFP board).
[2] Printer image • The electric signal is converted to 8-bit digital image signals. After going through some corrections, the digital image
processing (No signals is converted to VIDEO signals (K).
illustration is • D/A conversion will be performed after the VIDEO signals (K) is corrected. This data will control the emission of the
provided) laser diode.
[3] Photo The image of the original projected onto the surface of the photo conductor is changed to a corresponding electrostatic
conductor latent image.
[4] Charging Supply DC ( - ) charge on the photo conductor.
[5] Exposure Expose photo conductor to a laser beam to develop electrostatic latent image.
[6] Developing • The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the developer mixing chamber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent
image formed on the surface of the photo conductor. It is thereby changed to a visible, developed image.
• AC and DC negative bias voltages are applied to the developing roller, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the
background image portion.
[7] 1st transfer A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the transfer belt, thereby allowing the visible, developed image on
the surface of the photo conductor (K) to be transferred onto the transfer belt.
[8] 2nd transfer A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the paper, thereby allowing the visible, developed image on the
surface of the transfer belt to be transferred onto the paper.
[9] Separation The paper, which has undergone the 2nd transfer process, is neutralized so that it can be properly separated from the
transfer belt by the paper separator claws.
[10] Transfer belt The residual toner left on the transfer belt is collected by the cleaning brush to clean the surface of the transfer belt.
cleaning
[11] Main erase The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with LED light, which neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the
surface of the photo conductor.
[12] Photo The residual toner left on the photo conductor is collected by the cleaning blade to clean the surface of the photo
conductor conductor.
cleaning
[13] Fusing The visible toner image transferred onto the surface of the paper is melted by the heat of the heating roller and fixed to
the paper by pressure of the fusing pressure roller.
[14] Paper exit The paper, for which the toner image has been properly fixed, is fed out onto the exit tray.
[15] Paper exit For two-sided printing, the 1-sided printed paper is turned over and transported onto the duplex unit.
(two-sided
print)
[16] Duplex The 1-sided printed paper, which has been turned over, is fed into the main body, so that the paper can be subjected to
the second print cycle.

D-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE FORMING CONTROL

6. IMAGE FORMING CONTROL

Developing bias DC K
Main erase lamp/K (EL/K)
K PC drum motor (M18)
Charge K
K developing motor (M19)
BCL (+)
BCL (-)
Cleaner motor (M38)
Transfer belt motor (M1)
2nd transfer roller pressure retraction
1st transfer pressure retraction
Image write start signal
Developing bias AC K
1st transfer K
2nd transfer
Neutralization
Registration motor (M2)
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
Exit motor (M4)
Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
Suction fan motor (FM1)
Cooling fan motor (FM3)
IU cooling fan motor (FM15)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
PH cooling fan motor (FM14)
Polygon motor (M34)
LD
Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
Dehumidification heater
Fusing motor (M30)

D-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7 PROCESS SPEED

7 PROCESS SPEED
Process speed (mm/s)
Paper type
Plain paper Thick Thick Thick Thick Thick Envelope OHP
Normal mode Gloss mode paper1 paper1+ paper2 paper3 paper4 s
Mode (matte) (postcard
s)
bizhub 652 310 155
bizhub 552/502 264 120 132 120
bizhub 602 288 155

D-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

E SERVICE TOOL
1. bizhub 502/552/602/652
1.1 Service material list
Name Shape Material No. Remarks

Cleaning pad 000V-18-1 10pcs/1pack

Isopropyl alcohol -

SANKOL ECG-25
A00J PP00 ## Heat-resistant conductive grease
grease

1.2 CE tool list

Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks

Original glass
moving unit height 1 9J06 PJG0 ##
adjustment jig

PH window
1 A00J R729 ## This part number include the cleaning pad.
cleaning jig

PH window
1 A00J 1098 ##
cleaning jig pad

Transfer belt unit

1 A00J R728 ##
extension rail

Slit glass cleaning

1 A0HT R707 ##
jig

9J06 PJP1 ## A3

Color chart 1
9J06 PJP2 ## 11 x 17

E-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 E SERVICE TOOL > 2. DF-618/DF-619

2. DF-618/DF-619
2.1 CE tool list
Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks

ADF reading chart 1 9J06 PJG1 XX

E-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 E SERVICE TOOL > 3. SD-508

3. SD-508
3.1 CE tool list
Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks

Stapler positioning
1 13QEJG010
jig

E-3
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. Concept of periodical
bizhub 652/552/602/502 maintenance

F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. Concept of periodical maintenance
• Cleaning/replacement cycle for each maintenance item of main body/options can be evaluated with the total counter value or each life
counter/fixed parts counter value of [Service mode] → [Counter] → [Life].

F-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. Periodical miantenance items

2. Periodical miantenance items

2.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652
2.1.1 Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Conveyance Timing roller - ●
4 section Paper dust remover - ●
Image transfer Around waste toner port
5 - ●
section
6 Processing section PH window - ●
7 Duplex section Duplex transport roller - ●

2.1.2 Periodical maintenance 3 (life counter; every 300,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
Manual bypass tray Pick-up roller 1 ● *1
1 Tray 1 Feed roller 1 ●
Tray 2
Separation roller assy 1 ●
Tray 3 Pick-up roller 1 ● *1
2 Tray 4 Feed roller 1 ●
Separation roller 1 ●
3 Processing section Toner filter 1 ● *2
4 Drum unit 1 ●
5 Ozone filter 1 ● *3
• *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.
*2: Replace these parts when drum unit is replaced, or when either black 285,000 counts is reached.
*3: Replace it when replacing drum unit.

2.1.3 Periodical maintenance 4 (life counter; every 600,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
Conveyance Transfer roller unit
1 1 ●
section
Image transfer Transfer belt unit
2 1 ●
section
3 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 ●
4 IH coil unit 1 ● *1
• *1: When fusing unit is replaced.

2.2 Option
2.2.1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (life counter; every 50,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Paper feed section Pick-up roller - ●
4 Feed roller - ●
5 Separation roller - ●
Conveyance Roller and rolls
6 - ●
section
7 Scanning section Scanning guide - ●
8 Paper feed section Reflective sensor section - ●

(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (life counter; every 200,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 ● *1
2 Feed roller 1 ●
3 Separation roller 1 ●
• *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.

F-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. Periodical miantenance items

2.2.2 LU-204/301
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (life counter; every 300,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 1 ● *1
2 Feed roller 1 ●
3 Separation roller 1 ●
• *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.

2.2.3 ZU-606
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Punch section Punch edge - ●
4 Conveyance Entrance guide plate - ●
5 section Conveyance guide plate - ●
6 Registration roller - ●
7 Conveyance roller - ●
8 Exit guide plate - ●
9 Z folding section Folding roller - ●
10 Folding guide plate - ●
Punch scraps Punch scraps box
11 conveyance - ●
section

(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (fixed parts counter; every 1,000,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Punch scraps Punch scraps conveyance motor 1 ●
conveyance Punch clutch
2 section 1 ●

2.2.4 FS-526
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Conveyance Paper exit roller 6 ●
4 section Paddle/1 1 ●
5 Paddle/2 2 ●
6 Conveyance roller - ●
7 Main drive section - ● ●
8 Main tray section - ● ●
9 Alignment drive section - ● ●
10 Paper exit drive section - ● ●
11 Staple section Staple section - ● ●

(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (fixed parts counter; every 500,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Staple section Stapler unit - ●

2.2.5 SD-508
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
Conveyance Conveyance roller
3 - ●
section
4 Folding section Folding section - ●
5 Folding roller - ●

F-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. Periodical miantenance items

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
6 Paper exit belt - ●
7 Staple section Staple section - ● ●

(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (fixed parts counter; every 200,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Staple section Stapler unit - ●

2.2.6 PK-516
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Punch section Punch edge - ●
4 Punch scraps box - ●
5 Punch scraps full sensor - ●

2.2.7 JS-602
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
Conveyance Conveyance roller
3 - ●
section
4 Paper exit section Exit roller - ●

2.2.8 PI-505
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Paper feed section Feed roller - ●
4 Separation roller - ●
5 Pick-up roller - ●
Conveyance Exit roller
6 - ●
section

(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (fixed parts counter; every 100,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Paper feed section Feed roller/Up - ●
2 Feed roller/Lw - ●
3 Separation roller/Up - ●
4 Separation roller/Lw - ●

(3) Periodical maintenance 3 (fixed parts counter; every 200,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up - ●
2 Pick-up roller/Lw - ●

(4) Periodical maintenance 4 (fixed parts counter; every 600,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter/Up - ●
2 Torque limiter/Lw - ●

2.2.9 FS-527
(1) Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 300,000 counts)
No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Overall Paper feed and image conditions - ●

F-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. Periodical miantenance items

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
2 Appearance - ● ●
3 Conveyance Roller and rolls - ●
4 section Paddles - ●

(2) Periodical maintenance 2 (life counter; every 800,000 counts)

No. Section Description/part name Qt. Clean Check Lubrication Replace Descriptions
1 Conveyance Upper paddle 2 ●
2 section Lower paddle 9 ●

F-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. Periodical replacement parts list

3. Periodical replacement parts list

• To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in
this schedule be carried out as instructed.
• Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the total counter, the life counter, the fixed parts counter or the messages
displayed on the control panel.
• Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 1/ x 11, standard mode and low power mode OFF.
2
(Consumables which adopt field standard yield are excluded.)
B/W
* Standard mode bizhub 652 7 pages per job
bizhub 602/552 6 pages per job
bizhub 502 5 pages per job

3.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652

Classification Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. page
Pick-up roller 9J07 3301 ## 2 200,000 *1 F.8.1.3 Replacing the pick-
Feed roller A00J 5636 ## 1 200,000 *1 up roller / feed roller
DF-618 *3
F.8.1.4 Replacing the
Separation roller A108 5639 ## 1 200,000 *1
separation roller
F.7.9.1 Replacing the tray
Feed roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.2 Replacing the tray
Tray 1 Separation roller assy A0P0 R740 ## 1 300,000 *1 *3
1 separation roller assy
F.7.9.1 Replacing the tray
Pick-up roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.3 Replacing the tray
Feed roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.4 Replacing the tray
Tray 2 Separation roller assy A0P0 R740 ## 1 300,000 *1 *3
2 separation roller assy
F.7.9.3 Replacing the tray
Pick-up roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.5 Replacing the tray
Feed roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.6 Replacing the tray
Tray 3 Separation roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 *3
3 separation roller
F.7.9.5 Replacing the tray
Pick-up roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.7 Replacing the tray
Feed roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.8 Replacing the tray
Tray 4 Separation roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 *3
4 separation roller
F.7.9.7 Replacing the tray
Pick-up roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up
roller
F.7.9.9 Replacing the
manual bypass tray feed
Feed roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1
roller/manual bypass tray
pick-up roller
F.7.9.10 Replacing the
Manual
Separation roller assy A0P0 R741 ## 1 300,000 *1 *3 manual bypass tray
bypass tray
separation roller assy
F.7.9.9 Replacing the
manual bypass tray feed
Pick-up roller A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1
roller/manual bypass tray
pick-up roller
Conveyance F.7.7.1 Replacing the
Transfer roller unit A0P0 R719 ## 1 570,000 *2
section transfer roller unit
Fusing A0P0 R733 ## *4 F.7.12.1 Replacing the
Fusing unit 1 570,000 *2
section A0P0 R734 ## *5 fusing unit
Processing F.7.3.1 Replacing the
Drum unit - 1 285,000 *2 *7
section drum unit

F-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. Periodical replacement parts list

Classification Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. page
F.7.4.1 Replacing the
Developing unit - 1 1,140,000 *2
developing unit
F.7.1.1 Replacing the
Ozone filter A00J R731 ## 1 285,000 *2
ozone filter
Toner cartridge - 1 37,500 *2 *6
F.7.1.2 Replacing the
Toner filter A0P0 R701 ## 1 285,000 *2
toner filter
F.7.6.1 Replacing the
Image Transfer belt unit A2WU R703 ## 1 570,000 *2
transfer belt unit
transfer
section F.7.8.2 Replacing the
Waste toner box A2WYWY1 1 (160,000) *2 *6, *9
waste toner box
• *1: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)
• *2: Field standard yield
C.1.4 Materials
• *3: Replace those three parts at the same time.
• *4: 110 V to 120 V areas only.
• *5: 220-240 V areas only.
• *6: The parts can be replaced either by user or service engineer.
• *7: The ozone filter and the toner filter are furnished with the drum unit/K so that all of them are replaced at same time.
• *8: When either black counter arrived at the replacing cycle.
• *9: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.

3.2 Option
3.2.1 LU-204
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Pick-up roller F.9.1.1 Replacing the pick-
A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1
up roller
Feed roller F.9.1.2 Replacing the feed
A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 *2
roller
Separation roller F.9.1.3 Replacing the
A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1
separation roller
• *1: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)
• *2: Replace those three parts at the same time.

3.2.2 LU-301
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Pick-up roller F.10.1.1 Replacing the
A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1
pick-up roller
Feed roller F.10.1.2 Replacing the
A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1 *2
feed roller
Separation roller F.10.1.3 Replacing the
A00J 5636 ## 1 300,000 *1
separation roller
• *1: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)
• *2: Replace those three parts at the same time.

3.2.3 ZU-606
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Punch scraps conveyance motor F.12.1.1 Replacing the
A111A928 1 1,000,000 *1 punch scraps conveyance
motor (M7)
Punch clutch F.12.1.2 Replacing the
13NKK0010 1 1,000,000 *1
punch clutch (CL1)
• *1: Fixed counter value

3.2.4 FS-526
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Paper exit roller F.13.1.2 Replacing the
122H 4825 # 6 100,000 *1
paper exit roller/A
Stapler unit F.13.1.3 Replacing the
A07P 7901 ## 1 500,000 *2
stapler unit
Paddle/1 F.13.1.4 Replacing the
A11P R745 ## 1 100,000 *1
paddle/1
Paddle/2 F.13.1.5 Replacing the
A11P R746 ## 2 100,000 *1
paddle/2
• *1: Actual durable cycle (life counter value)

F-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. Periodical replacement parts list

• *2: Fixed counter value

3.2.5 SD-508
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Stapler unit F.14.1.1 Replacing the
20AK 4241 ## 1 200,000 *1
stapler unit
• *1: Fixed counter value

3.2.6 PI-505
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Feed roller /Up F.16.1.1 Replacing the
13QN-446 1 100,000 *1 pick-up roller /Up and the
feed roller /Up
Feed roller /Lw F.16.1.2 Replacing the
13QN-446 1 100,000 *1 pick-up roller /Lw and the
feed roller /Lw
Separation roller /Up F.16.1.3 Replacing the
13QN-443 1 100,000 *1 separation roller /Up and
the torque limiter /Up
Separation roller /Lw F.16.1.4 Replacing the
13QN-443 1 100,000 *1 separation roller /Lw and
the torque limiter /Lw
Pick-up roller /Up F.16.1.1 Replacing the
50BA-574 1 200,000 *1 pick-up roller /Up and the
feed roller /Up
Pick-up roller /Lw F.16.1.2 Replacing the
50BA-574 1 200,000 *1 pick-up roller /Lw and the
feed roller /Lw
Torque limiter /Up F.16.1.3 Replacing the
13QN4073 1 600,000 *1 separation roller /Up and
the torque limiter /Up
Torque limiter /Lw F.16.1.4 Replacing the
13QN4073 1 600,000 *1 separation roller /Lw and
the torque limiter /Lw
• *1: Fixed counter value

3.2.7 FS-527
Parts name Parts No. Qt. Replacing cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
Upper paddle F.17.1.2 Replacing the
A0HR 7317 ## 2 800,000 *1
upper paddles
Lower paddle F.17.1.3 Replacing the
A0HR 7348 ## 9 800,000 *1
lower paddles
• *1: Total counter value

F-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. Periodical cleaning parts list

4. Periodical cleaning parts list

• Clean with reference to the numeric values displayed on the total counter, the life counter or the messages displayed on the control panel.

4.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652

Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle Descriptions Ref. Page
ADF Pick-up roller 50,000 F.8.1.1 Cleaning of the
Feed roller 50,000 pick-up roller/feed roller
Separation roller F.8.1.2 Cleaning of the
50,000
separation roller
Rollers and rolls F.8.2.1 Cleaning of the
miscellaneous rolls
50,000
F.8.2.2 Cleaning of the
miscellaneous rollers
Front side scanning guide F.8.3.1 Cleaning of the
50,000
scanning guide
Reflective sensor section F.8.3.2 Cleaning of the
50,000
reflective sensor section
Conveyance section Timing roller F.7.11.1 Cleaning of the
100,000
timing roller
Paper dust remover F.7.10.1 Cleaning of the
100,000
paper dust remover
Duplex section Duplex transport roller F.7.13.1 Cleaning of the
100,000
duplex transport rollers
Processing section PH window F.7.2.1 Cleaning of the PH
100,000
window
Image transfer section Area around the waste F.7.8.1 Cleaning of the
toner collecting port 100,000 area around the waste
toner collecting port
Fusing section IH coil unit When fusing unit is F.7.12.2 Cleaning of the IH
replaced (600,000) coil unit

4.2 Option
4.2.1 ZU-606
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Punch edge 100,000 *1
Entrance guide plate 100,000 *1
Conveyance guide plate 100,000 *1
Registration roller 100,000 *1
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
Exit guide plate 100,000 *1
Folding roller 100,000 *1
Folding guide plate 100,000 *1
Punch waste box 100,000 *1
Appearance 100,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

4.2.2 FS-526
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

4.2.3 SD-508
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
Folding section 100,000 *1
Folding roller 100,000 *1
Exit belt 100,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

4.2.4 PK-516
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Punch edge 100,000 *1

F-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. Periodical cleaning parts list

Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions

Punch scraps box 100,000 *1
Punch scraps full sensor 100,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

4.2.5 JS-602
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
Exit roller 100,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

4.2.6 PI-505
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Feed roller 100,000 *1
Separation roller 100,000 *1
Pick-up roller 100,000 *1
Conveyance roller 100,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

4.2.7 FS-527
Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Descriptions
Roller and rolls 300,000 *1
Upper paddle 300,000 *1
Lower paddle 300,000 *1
• *1: Total counter value

F-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. CMS corresponding parts

5. CMS corresponding parts

5.1 CMS corresponding parts
• “CMS” stands for “customer maintenance support,” and this is applicable when the user wants to change parts by himself.

5.2 CMS corresponding parts list

No. Section Corresponding parts Replacing cycle Clean Replace Ref. page
1 Processing section Drum unit 285,000 prints F.7.3.1 Replacing the
●
drum unit
2 Ozone filter 285,000 prints F.7.1.1 Replacing the
●
ozone filter
3 Toner filter 285,000 prints (Black) F.7.1.2 Replacing the
●
toner filter

5.3 Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set

• There are three types of parts set which correspond to CMS. When conducting CMS, replace all three parts at the same time.

F-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 6. Concept of parts life

6. Concept of parts life

6.1 Life value of consumables and parts
• The life counter value of each consumables and parts is available from [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life].
• Life specification value means an actual life terminated when prints are made under the conditions as defined in the next section,
“Conditions for life specifications values.”
The actual life may vary greatly depending on how the machine has been used and other factors.
F.6.2 Conditions for life specifications values
• “M” refers to the rotation time of each unit.
Life value (Specification
Description Max. life value
value)
Waste toner box The waste toner full sensor detects the amount of toner 160,000 prints *1,2 -
accumulated in the waste toner box and sends a signal that
determines the end of the waste toner box life.
Fusing unit When the number of printed pages *4 reaches the set life value 600,000 counts 615,000 counts *3
shown on the right, the end of unit life is detected.
Rotation time for the fusing unit is also counted for control’s
sake, but not used for detecting life.
Transfer roller unit When the number of printed pages *4 reaches the set life value 600,000 counts 615,000 counts *3
shown on the right, the end of unit life is detected. (printable)
Transfer belt unit Number of prints *4 and rotation time of the transfer belt are 600,000 counts/ 615,000 counts *3/
counted, and detected when one of those two reaches to the 32,638 M 33,333 M *3
life value shown on the right.
Ozone filter Rotation time of the black photo conductor is counted, and 10,302 M 10,750 M
detected when it reaches to the set life value shown on the (printable)
right.
* The PC drum rotation is calculated based on the distance the
PC drum has run.
Toner filter Number of prints *4 for color printing and black printing are Bk: 300,000 counts Bk: 315,000 counts
counted, and detected when one of those two reaches to the (printable)
set life value shown on the right.
For the life counter, value based on the calculation below is
displayed.
Number of prints for black printing
Drum unit Rotation time of the PC drum is counted, and detected when it bizhub 652/602/552/ bizhub 652/602/552/
reaches to the set life value shown on the right. 10,302 M 10,750 M *3
* The PC drum rotation is calculated based on the distance the bizhub 502 bizhub 502
PC drum has run. 10,777 M 11,250 M
Developing unit When the number of printed pages *4 reaches the set life value 1,200,000 counts 1,215,000 counts *3
shown on the right, the end of unit life is detected.
• *1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.
*2: Once the toner-full is detected, it has to be replaced with the new waste toner box in order to reset.
*3: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the max. life value is reached.
*4: For counting with number of prints, the paper size in the sub scan direction is accumulated and counts one when it reaches to 216.0 mm.
For the paper with sub scan size of less than 216.0 mm, it is accumulated with the size of 216.0 mm.

6.2 Conditions for life specifications values

• The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions (see the table given
below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.
Item Description
Job type bizhub 652 Making 7 copies per job
bizhub 602/552 Making 6 copies per job
bizhub 502 Making 5 copies per job
Paper size A4 / 8 1/2 x 11
PV/M bizhub 652 Average 19,500 (US),25,600 (EU)
Maximum 190,000
bizhub 602 Average 15,300
Maximum 150,000
bizhub 552 Average 13,500 (US), 17,200 (EU)
Maximum 150,000
bizhub 502 Average 9,600
Maximum 150,000
Original density B/W = 6 % for black
No. of operating days per month 20 days (main power switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)

F-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 6. Concept of parts life

6.3 Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part
• In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts, make printing prohibited
also for other parts whose life value is reached, and replace those parts at the same time.

6.3.1 Object parts

• Object parts are divided into two groups. Each group has its own control method.
Two groups are listed below.
Group A • Fusing unit, transfer belt unit, developing unit
Group B • Drum unit

6.3.2 Control method

When a part from group A or B is prohibited from printing:
• A part from group A which reached its life is considered to be “printing inhibited” only when the difference between the life counter value and
the maximum life value is for 10,000 prints or under.
• A parts from group B which reached its life is considered to be “printing inhibited” regardless of the difference with maximum life value.

F-13
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...

7. Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub 502/552/602/652

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

7.1 Housing section

7.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Ozone filter: Same as the drum unit.
F.7.3.1.(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the ozone filter [1], and then install the new ozone filter.

[1]

2. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Ozone Filter].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.1.2 Replacing the toner filter

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Toner filter: Same as the drum unit.
F.7.3.1.(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the toner filter [1], and then install the new color toner
filter.
[1]

2. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Toner Filter].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.2 Write section

7.2.1 Cleaning of the PH window
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• PH window Every 100,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the waste toner box.
F.7.8.2 Replacing the waste toner box

F-14
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
2. Pull out tray 1 and remove the cleaning tool [1] from tray 2.

[1]

3. Insert the cleaning tool [1] into the print head cleaning guide [2],
pull it out, and then repeat this back-and-forth movement two or
[2] three times.
NOTE
• When using the cleaning tool, put the side with “UP”
stamping [3] face up.
• Clean the PH window of each color.
• When cleaning the PH window of K color, release the lock
lever for the imaging unit.

[1]

[3]

7.3 Imaging unit section

7.3.1 Replacing the drum unit
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Drum unit: Every 285,000 prints

(2) Removal procedure

NOTE
• In this procedure, the state in which the drum unit and the developing unit are assembled is called “imaging unit.”
1. Open the lower front door.
2. Remove the waste toner box.
F.7.8.2 Replacing the waste toner box
3. Loosen the shoulder screw [1], and pull out the drum unit [2].

[1]

[2]

F-15
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
4. Hold the fixed levers [1] for the drum unit at two positions, and
[1] remove the drum unit [2] while loosening the fixed lever.
[1]

[2]

5. Remove the new drum unit from the black protective bag.
6. Remove caps [1] at the front and the back of the drum unit.
[1] [1]

[1] 7. Put the drum unit [1] on the developing unit.

NOTE
• Do not tilt the drum unit when putting it on the developing
unit. (Keep the drum unit level.)
• Position the drum unit so that part A of the drum unit is
inserted into part B of the developing unit.

NOTE
[1] • Position the drum unit so that part C of the drum unit is
inside the film [1] located on the main body rail. (Check
that Part C is not on the top of the rail.)

OK NG

F-16
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
8. Remove the protective sheet [1] for the PC drum.

[1]

9. Secure the drum unit [1] to the developing unit with the two levers
[2]
[2]
[2].
NOTE
• Push the front and back levers in the direction of the
arrow at a time to secure the drum unit.
• Make sure the drum unit is securely fixed with two levers.
• Check that the front lever [3] of the drum unit is parallel to
the vertical line marked on the label [4] on the developing
unit.

[1]

[3]

[4]

10. Insert the imaging unit [1] into the machine, and tighten the
shoulder screw [2] to secure the drum unit.

[2]

[1]

11. Remount the waste toner box [1], and close the lower front door.
[1]

12. Replace the ozone filter furnished with the drum unit.
F.7.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter
13. Replace the toner filter furnished with the drum unit.

F-17
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
F.7.1.2 Replacing the toner filter

7.4 Developing section

7.4.1 Replacing the developing unit
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Developing unit: Every 1,140,000 prints

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit.
F.7.3.1 Replacing the drum unit
2. Remove the shoulder screw [1].
3. Set A of the developing unit to meet B of the rail to remove the
[1]
developing unit [2].

A
[2]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the toner supply duct [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

5. Open the package [1] of the new developing unit from the part
[1] shown on the left.

6. Place the new developing unit upside down together with its
package.
[1] 7. Remove the tape [1] and the mounting member [2] for the new
developing unit.

[2]

F-18
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
8. Set two springs [1] for mounting and the shutter [2] included to the
new developing unit.

[1]
[2]

[1]
9. Place the new developing unit upside down together with its
[1] package.
10. Open the package [1] of the new developing unit from the part
shown on the left, and take out the developing unit.

11. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1] [1]

[2]

12. Mount the toner supply duct [2] removed in step 4, with two screws
[1] [2] [1] to the new developing unit.

[1]

13. Remove the protective sheet [1].

[1]

F-19
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
14. While aligning part A of the developing unit with the screw hole on
the rail, pass part B of the developing unit under the rail.

B
15. Align part A of the developing unit with part B of the rail and place
A
the developing unit [1] on the rail of the machine.
NOTE
• Make sure that the positioning metal bracket [3] of the rail
[1] fits in the cutout [2] in the developing unit.
B

[2]

[3]

16. Fix the developing unit to the rail using the shoulder screw [1].
[1]

17. Remount the drum unit.

F.7.3.1 Replacing the drum unit

7.5 Toner supply section

7.5.1 Replacing the toner cartridge
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Toner cartridge: Every 37,500 counts

(2) Removal procedure

1. Open the upper front door.
2. Pull out the empty toner cartridge [1].

[1]

F-20
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...

(3) Reinstall procedure

1. Remove the new toner cartridge [1] from its packaging, and then
shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times.

[1]

[1] 2. Remove the protective tape [1].

3. Align the toner cartridge [1] with the slots in the cartridge
compartment, and then insert the cartridge.
Close the upper front door.

[1]

7.6 1st transfer section

7.6.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer belt unit: Every 570,000 prints

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper right door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and the upper right door stopper.

[1]

F-21
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Loosen the shoulder screw [1] and slide the image transfer
entrance guide stopper [2] towards the back of the main body.

[1] [2]

4. Slide the image transfer entrance guide [1] towards the back of the
main body and remove it.
NOTE
• When removing the transfer belt unit, be sure to remove
the image transfer entrance guide. When trying to remove
the transfer belt unit with the image transfer entrance
guide attached, there is a possibility of making damage on
the surface of the transfer belt.

[1]

5. Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2]
[2] [1] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt.
NOTE
• Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks
[2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the
transfer belt.
When mounting the transfer belt unit, also make sure the
transfer belt is completely unlocked.

[1] [2]

6. Install the rail (CE-tool) [1] on the main body and secure it with the
shoulder screw [2].
NOTE
• Make sure that the protrusion (at two places) on the rail is
inserted into the dowel holes [3] (at two places) on the
[3]
main body.

[1] [2]

F-22
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
7. Grip the part [1] of the transfer belt unit and slide it out until it
[2] touches the stopper [2] of the rail.

[1]

8. Change the way of holding the transfer belt unit [1] as shown in the
[1]
picture and remove it.
NOTE
• Do not touch the surface of the transfer belt unit.
• Cover the transfer belt unit with something such shade
cloth to protect its surface from dust or foreign matter.

NOTE
• When removing/reinstalling the transfer belt unit, be sure
not to allow the contact [1] to hit the screw [2] of the
transfer belt unit lock.

[2]

[1]

9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

[2] NOTE
• Insert the transfer belt unit with care not to allow its
docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or
associated part.
• Before reinstalling the transfer belt unit, make sure that
the two transfer belt unit locks [1] are completely
unlocked. Insert the transfer belt unit by pressing the area
[2] (two places) shown in the illustration on the left until
the transfer belt unit is fitted into its place.

[1]
[1]

[2]

10. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Life] → [New Release] and carry out new release for the transfer belt unit.
I.10.12.2 Life
11. Select [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] and carry out gradation adjust.
I.10.5.1 Gradation Adjust

F-23
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...

7.7 2nd transfer/separation section

7.7.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Transfer roller unit: Every 570,000 prints

(2) Removal procedure

1. Open the upper right door.
2. Unlock the lock levers [1] of the transfer roller unit (at two places).
[2] 3. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places), remove the
transfer roller unit [2].

[1]

(3) Reinstall procedure

1. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places), mount the new
[1] transfer roller unit [2].
2. Lock the lock levers [1] (at two places).
NOTE
• Make sure that the levers are locked in position both at
front and rear.

[2]

3. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Transfer Roller Unit].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.8 Toner collection section

7.8.1 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Area around the waste toner collecting port: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the lower front door.
2. Remove the waste toner box.
F.7.8.2 Replacing the waste toner box
3. Wipe the areas around the waste toner collecting port clean of
spilled toner and dirt using a cleaning pad dampened with water or
alcohol.

7.8.2 Replacing the waste toner box

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Waste toner box: Every 160,000 counts

(2) Removal procedure

1. Open the lower front door.

F-24
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
2. Release the securing levers [1] for the waste toner box, and then
[1]
remove the waste toner box [2].

[2] [1]

3. Mount the enclosed cap [2] included in the new waste toner box to
[2]
the waste toner box [1] that has been removed at the step 2.

[1]

4. Place the waste toner box [1] with the cap attached into the plastic
[2] bag [2].

[1]

5. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port.

F.7.8.1 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port

(3) Reinstall procedure

1. Install the new waste toner box [1], and close the lower front door.
[1]

7.9 Paper feed section

7.9.1 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 1.
2. Remove the rear right cover.
G.3.2.22 Rear right cover/1
3. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit.
See the replacement procedures 1 to 8 in “F.7.9.3 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller.”

F-25
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
4. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1] and the edge cover
[1] [2] [2], and disconnect the connector [3].

[3]

5. Remove four screws [1], take out the tray 1 paper feed unit [2] with
[2] [1] the upper right door open.

[1]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller
[2]
installation plate assy [2].

[1]

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 feed roller cover
[2].

[2] [1]

8. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two
[2] [1] wire saddles [2].
9. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch [4].

[2]

[4]

[3]

F-26
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
10. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and two bearings [3], and remove
the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4].
[3] [2]

[3]

[1]

[4]

11. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 1
[2] [3] feed roller [3].

[1]

12. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and bearing [3], and remove the
[1] tray 1 pick-up roller [4].

[3] [2] [4]

13. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

14. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy.
F.7.9.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy
15. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [1st.].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.9.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 1 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 1.
2. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover.
G.3.2.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover
3. Open the manual bypass tray door.
4. Opening the jam clearing cover [1], remove two screws [2] and
take out the tray 1 separation roller assy [3].

[1] [2] [3] [2]

F-27
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
5. Remove the C-clip [1],and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy
[1] [2].

[2]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

7.9.3 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 2 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Tray 2 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 2.
2. Open the lower right-side door.
3. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover.
G.3.2.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover
4. Open the manual bypass tray door.
5. Remove the rear right cover /2.
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
6. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the
[2] wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness, route it so that the harness
ties [4] are positioned as shown in the illustration on the
left.

[3] [4] [1]

7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray 2 paper feed unit [2].
[2]

[1]

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller
[2] installation plate assy [2].

[1]

F-28
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 feed roller cover
[2].

[2] [1]

10. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two
[2] [1] wire saddles [2].
11. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the tray 2 paper feed clutch [4].

[2]

[4]

[3]

12. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and two bearings [3], and remove
the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4].
[3] [2]

[3]

[1]

[4]

13. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 2
[2] [3] feed roller [3].

[1]

14. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and bearing [3], and remove the
[1] tray 2 pick-up roller [4].

[3] [2] [4]

15. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

16. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy.
F.7.9.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy

F-29
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
17. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [2nd.].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.9.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 2 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 2.
2. Open the lower right door.
3. Open the manual bypass tray door.
4. Opening the jam clearing cover [1], remove two screws [2] and
[3] [1] take out the tray 2 separation roller assy [3].

[2]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller
[1] assy [2].

[2]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

7.9.5 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 3 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Tray 3 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 3.
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 3 paper feed cover
[2] [2].

[1]

F-30
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed
[2] [1] [2] roller/pick-up roller assy [3].

[1] [3]

4. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 feed roller [2].
[1] [2]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 pick-up roller [2].

[1] [2]
6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
7. Remove the tray 3 separation roller.
F.7.9.6 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller
8. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [3rd.].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.9.6 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 3 separation roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy.
See the replacement procedures 1 to 4 in “F.7.9.5 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller.”
2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 3 [2] to the end.
[1]

[2] [1]

F-31
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from two
[2] [3] edge covers [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness, route the harness so that
the harness tie [3] is positioned as shown in the
illustration on the left.

[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 3 paper feed unit [2].

[1]

[1] [2]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 separation roller [2].
[2] [1]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

7.9.7 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 4 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Tray 4 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Slide out the tray 4.
2. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed
[1] [3] [1] roller/pick-up roller assy [3].

[2] [2]

F-32
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 4 feed roller [2].
[1] [2]

4. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 4 pick-up roller [2].

[1] [2]
5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
6. Remove the tray 4 separation roller.
F.7.9.8 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller
7. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [4th.].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.9.8 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Tray 4 separation roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy.
See the replacement procedures 1 to 4 in “F.7.9.7 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller.”
2. Remove the two screws [1] and pull out the tray 4 [2] to the end.

[1]

[2] [1]

F-33
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Disconnect four connectors [1], and remove the harness from
three edge covers [2].

[2] [1]

[1]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 4 paper feed unit [2].

[1]

[1] [2]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 4 separation roller [2].
[2]

[1]
6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

7.9.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 300,000 counts
• Manual bypass tray pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.
See the replacement procedures 1 to 2 in “F.7.9.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.”
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray upper
[1] [1] cover [2].

[2]

F-34
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray feed
[1] [2] [1] roller cover [2].

4. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2].

[1] [2] [3] 5. Remove the spring [3], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller
assy [4].

[4] [2] [1]

6. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the manual
[1] bypass tray feed roller [3].

[2] [3]
7. Remove three C-rings [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the
[1] manual bypass tray pick-up roller [3].

[2] [3] [2]

8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
9. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.
F.7.9.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy
10. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray].
I.10.12.2 Life

7.9.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the manual bypass tray door.

F-35
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
2. Opening the jam clearing cover [1], remove the two screws [2] and
take out the manual bypass tray separation roller assy [3].

[1] [2] [3] [2]

3. Remove the E-ring [1], C-clip [2] and the shaft [3], and remove the
[3] [3] [1] manual bypass tray separation roller assy [4].
[2]

[4]
4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

7.10 Vertical conveyance section

7.10.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Paper dust remover: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper right door.
2. Pushing the hook [1], remove the paper dust remover [2].

[1] [2]

3. Using a brush, whisk dust off the paper dust remover [1].
[1]

F-36
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...

7.11 Registration section

7.11.1 Cleaning of the timing roller
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Timing roller: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper right door.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the timing roller
[1] clean of dirt.

[1]

7.12 Fusing section

7.12.1 Replacing the fusing unit

CAUTION
• The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing
unit. You may get burned when you come into contact
with the area. Before replacement operations, make
sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since
the main and sub power switches were turned off.
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Fusing unit: Every 570,000 prints

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper right door.
2. Loosen two screws [1] of the fusing unit.

[1] [1]

F-37
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
3. Hold the position as shown in the left and remove the fusing unit
[1] [1].
NOTE
• When removing the fusing unit, grip it with both hands to
avoid letting the fusing unit fall down.

4. Clean the IH coil unit.

[1] [2] F.7.12.2 Cleaning of the IH coil unit
5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
NOTE
• When reinstalling the fusing unit, be sure to press the
fusing unit into the machine until the surfaces of the A [1]
and B [2] are level with each other.
To remove unevenness between the surfaces of the A and
B, turn the misfeed-clearing dial [3] while pushing the
fusing unit into the machine.
[3]
• After ensuring that the surfaces are level, secure the
fusing unit by tightening the two mounting screws on the
back side first, and then the front side.

6. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] → [New Release] and carry out new release for the fusing unit.
I.10.12.2 Life

7.12.2 Cleaning of the IH coil unit

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• IH coil unit: Every 600,000 counts (When the fusing unit is replaced)

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
F.7.12.1 Replacing the fusing unit
[1] 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the IH coil unit
[1] clean of dirt.

7.13 Duplex section

7.13.1 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Duplex transport rollers: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the duplex door.

F-38
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 7. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure bizhub...
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport
[1] rollers [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

F-39
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618

8. Periodical maintenance procedure DF-618

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

8.1 Take-up section

8.1.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Pick-up roller: Every 50,000 counts
• Feed roller: Every 50,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the feed cover.
G.4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller [1] / feed
[1] roller [2] clean of dirt.

[2]

8.1.2 Cleaning of the separation roller

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Separation roller: Every 50,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the feed cover.
G.4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the separation roller [1]
clean of dirt.

[1]

8.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller / feed roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Pick-up roller: Every 200,000 counts
• Feed roller: Every 200,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the feed cover.
G.4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[2]

[1]

F-40
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618
3. Remove two screws [1], two springs [2], and two pieces of fixation
[5] [2] [3] [4] metal [3].
4. Remove two C-clips [4], the bearing [5], and the pick-up/feed roller
assy [6].

[4] [3] [1] [6]

5. Remove the C-ring [1] and the lever [2].

[6] [4] 6. Remove three C-rings [3].
7. Remove two pins [4].
[3] [3] [6] 8. Remove the belt [5].
9. Remove two pick-up rollers [6].
NOTE
• Be careful not to lose the pin.

[1]

[5] [2]

10. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bushing [2].

11. Remove the feed roller [3].

[3]
[2]
[1]

8.1.4 Replacing the separation roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation roller: Every 200,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the left cover.
2. Lift up the document feed tray.
3. Remove the screw [1] and the mounting plate [2].
NOTE
• Be sure to hold the document feed tray to prevent the tray
from falling down while removing the mounting plate.

[2]

[1]

F-41
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618
4. Hold the two sides [1] between your fingertips to unhook the spring
[1] [2] and remove the separation roller assy [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the separation roller assy, be sure to
hook the spring onto the assy.

[3] [2]

5. While opening up the holder [1], remove the shaft.

NOTE
• Opening the holder too much can break the holder.

[1]

6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the shaft.

NOTE
• Be careful not to lose the pin.

[1]

8.2 Transport section

8.2.1 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Lift up the document feed tray.
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]

[1]

F-42
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618
3. Open the left cover.
[1] 4. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the roll [1] clean of dirt.

5. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.

6. While opening the before scanning film assy [1], wipe the roll [2]
using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol.

[2]

[1]

7. While opening the processing guide, remove four screws [1] and
remove the transport roll assy [2].

[2]

[1]

8. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [1].

[1]

8.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Miscellaneous rollers: Every 50,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the left cover.

F-43
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].

[1]

3. Lift up the document feed tray.

[1] 4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].

[1]

5. While opening the processing guide, remove four screws [1] and
remove the transport roll assy [2].

[2]

[1]

6. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].

[1]

7. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and remove the scanning guide
[2].

[1]

[2]

F-44
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618
8. While turning processing knob [1], wipe the roller [2] using a
[1] cleaning pad dampened with alcohol.

[2]

8.3 Scanning section

8.3.1 Cleaning of the scanning guide
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Scanning guide: Every 50,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.
2. Open the before scanning film assy [1].
[1] 3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the scanning
guide [2] clean of dirt.
NOTE
• Be careful not to damage the film.

[2]

8.3.2 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Reflective sensor section: Every 50,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Clean the sensor [1] using a brush or other similar tools.

[1]

2. Open the left cover.

[1] 3. Clean the cloth [1] using a brush or other similar tools.

F-45
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure DF-618
4. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.
[1] 5. While opening the before scanning film assy [1], clean the cloth [2]
using a brush or other similar tools.

[2]

F-46
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 9. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure LU-204

9. Periodical maintenance procedure LU-204

9.1 Paper feed section
9.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller [1] up.

[1]
3. Remove two C-clips [1], the bushing [2] and remove the feed roller
[2] [3] assy [3].

[1]
4. Remove two C-clips [1], the actuator [2] and remove the pick-up
[2] [3] roller [3].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

[1]

9.1.2 Replacing the feed roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Feed roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller [1] up.

[1]

F-47
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 9. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure LU-204
3. Remove two C-clips [1], the bushing [2] and remove the feed roller
[2] [3] assy [3].

[1]
4. Remove three C-clips [1], the actuator [2] and remove the feed
[2] [3] roller [3].

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

9.1.3 Replacing the separation roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller [1] up.

[1]
3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2].
[2]

[1]

F-48
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 9. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure LU-204
4. Remove the C-clip [1] while pressing the separation roller down to
[2] remove the separation roller [2].

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

F-49
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 10. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure LU-301

10. Periodical maintenance procedure LU-301

10.1 Paper feed section
10.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller [1] up.

[1]
3. Remove two C-clips [1], the bushing [2] and remove the feed roller
[2] [3] assy [3].

[1]
4. Remove two C-clips [1], the actuator [2] and remove the pick-up
[2] [3] roller [3].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

[1]

10.1.2 Replacing the feed roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Feed roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller [1] up.

[1]

F-50
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 10. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure LU-301
3. Remove two C-clips [1], the bushing [2] and remove the feed roller
[2] [3] assy [3].

[1]
4. Remove three C-clips [1], the actuator [2] and remove the feed
[2] [3] roller [3].

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

10.1.3 Replacing the separation roller

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation roller: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller [1] up.

[1]
3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2].
[2]

[1]
4. Remove the C-clip [1] while pressing the separation roller down to
[2] remove the separation roller [2].

[1]

F-51
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 10. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure LU-301
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

F-52
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 11. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure JS-504

11. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-504

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

11.1 Paper exit section

11.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Roller and roll: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1]
[2] [1] and roll [2].

[2]

3. Remove the upper tray.

G.4.5.5 Upper tray (JS-504)
4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1]
[2] [1] and roll [2].

[2]

F-53
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 12. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure ZU-606

12. Periodical maintenance procedure ZU-606

12.1 Punch section
12.1.1 Replacing the punch scraps conveyance motor (M7)
(1) Periodical replaced parts/cycle
• Punch scraps conveyance motor: Every 1,000,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove two screws [2], and
remove the punch scraps conveyance motor assy [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the punch scraps
[2] conveyance motor [2].

[1]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

12.1.2 Replacing the punch clutch (CL1)

(1) Periodical replaced parts/cycle
• Punch clutch: Every 1,000,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the punch unit.
G.4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)
3. Cut three wiring harness bands [1].
[1]

F-54
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 12. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure ZU-606
NOTE
[1] • When bind the wiring harness band [1], face them to the
arrow-marked direction [2] to avoid the contact with the
conveyance section of the main body.
[2]

[2]
[2]

[1]
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the punch motor assy [2].
[3] [1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the punch motor assy [2], press the
punch motor gear [3] to the gear [4]. Be sure to check that
the gears rotate smoothly and there is appropriate
backlash.

[4] [1] [2]

[4] 5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the punch clutch [2].
NOTE
• When reinstalling punch clutch [2], be sure to check the
stopper [3] is engaged with a projection [4] of metal plate.
[3]

[2] [1]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

F-55
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 13. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-526

13. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-526

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

13.1 Paper exit section

13.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts
(1) Periodical cleaning parts/cycle
• Paper exit roller: Every 100,000 prints

(2) Cleaning point

13.1.2 Replacing the paper exit roller/A

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paper exit roller/A: Every 100,000 prints
NOTE
• When replacing the paper exit rollers, be sure to replace all 3 pairs of rollers (6 rollers in all).

(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch and the power switch of the main body.
2. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray top surface sensor (PS4)
with your finger, and then lower the finishing main tray [2].
[1] 3. In the state of the finishing main tray being lowered, turn OFF the
main and sub power switches and unplug the power cord from the
power outlet.

[2]

F-56
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 13. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-526
4. Insert a driver into the groove [1] of the paper exit roller and
remove the paper exit roller/A [2] by prizing it open.

[2]

[1]

5. With each of the depressions [1] of a new paper exit roller and the
shaft brought together, press the paper exit roller until it clicks to fit
it in securely.

[1]

[1]

13.1.3 Replacing the stapler unit

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Stapler unit: Every 500,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the finisher front door.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit cover [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

3. Remove the stapler [1].

[1]

F-57
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 13. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-526
4. Disconnect two connectors [1].
[2] [1] 5. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [2].

[2]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[1]

[2]

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stapler unit [2].
[2] NOTE
• When removing the stapler unit, support it with your hand
to prevent the flat stitch stapling unit moving motor [3]
from coming off and falling down.

[1] [3]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

13.1.4 Replacing the paddle/1

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paddle/1: Every 100,000 prints

(2) Procedure
1. Open the finisher front door.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit cover [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

F-58
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 13. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-526
3. Move the stapler unit [1] to the rear of the finisher.
[1]

4. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the paddle/1 [2].

[2]

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

13.1.5 Replacing the paddle/2

(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Paddle/2: Every 100,000 prints

(2) Procedure
1. Open the finisher front door.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit cover [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

3. Move the stapler unit [1] to the rear of the finisher.

[1]

F-59
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 13. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-526
4. Remove two C-clips [1], and remove two paddle/2 [2].
[1]

[2]
[1]

[2]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

F-60
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 14. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure SD-508

14. Periodical maintenance procedure SD-508

14.1 Stapler section
14.1.1 Replacing the stapler unit
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Stapler unit: Every 200,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
2. Remove the stapler unit cover.
G.4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)
3. Remove the right cover.
G.4.9.2 Right cover (SD-508)
4. Remove the stapler [1].

[1]

5. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[1] 6. Remove the screw [2], and remove the ground earth.
7. Remove the wire saddle [3].

[2] [1] [3]

8. Disconnect the connector [1].

9. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].
10. Remove five screws [3], and remove the guide plate assy [4].

[3]
[1] [2]

[4] [3]

11. Remove two screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[2]

[1]

F-61
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 14. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure SD-508
12. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [3] 13. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].
14. Remove the screw [3], and remove the harness cover [4].

[2] [4]

15. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stapler unit protection
[1] plate [2].

[2]

16. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit [2].
[1]

[2]
[1]

17. Remove two screws [1].

[1] [2]
18. Remove four screws [2] and remove the clincher side from the
stapler unit [3].

[3]

[2]

19. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

F-62
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 15. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure JS-602

15. Periodical maintenance procedure JS-602

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

15.1 Paper exit section

15.1.1 Cleaning of the transport rollers/exit rollers
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Transport roller: Every 100,000 counts
• Exit roller: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the cover.
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the transport rollers [1]
[1] clean of dirt.

3. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the exit rollers [1] clean of
[1] dirt.

F-63
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 16. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure PI-505

16. Periodical maintenance procedure PI-505

16.1 Paper feed section
16.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the feed roller /Up
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Pick-up roller /Up: Every 200,000 counts
• Feed roller /Up: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Replacing procedure

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)
[1] 2. Remove two C-clips [1], and then slide two bearings [2] at the both
[2] [1] sides and remove the feed roller assy /Up [3].

[2]

[3]
[1] 3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].

[2]
[2] 4. Remove two C-clips [1] and remove two bearings [2].

[1]
[3] 5. Remove the C-clip [1].
[2] 6. Slide two roller shafts [2] to the arrow-marked direction to remove
the pick-up roller /Up [3] and the feed roller /Up [4].
NOTE
• Reinstalling the pick-up roller and the feed roller with the
blue faces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller
and the feed roller face to the front.

[4] [1]

F-64
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 16. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure PI-505

[2] [7] [5] 7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the feed roller [2] from the one-
way clutches [3] and [4].
[1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the pick-up roller [1], be sure to insert
its cutout [5] over the protrusion [6] of the one-way clutch
[3].
• When reinstalling the feed roller [2], be sure to insert its
cutout [7] over the protrusion [8] of the one-way clutch [4].

[3]
[4] [8] [6]
8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

16.1.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the feed roller /Lw
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Pick-up roller /Lw: Every 200,000 counts
• Feed roller /Lw: Every 100,000 counts

(2) Replacing procedure

[1] 1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].

[2]

2. Take steps 2 to 7 in the replacement procedure of the pick-up roller /Up and feed roller /Up.
F.16.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the feed roller /Up
3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

16.1.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation roller /Up: Every 100,000 counts
• Torque limiter /Up: Every 600,000 counts

(2) Replacing procedure

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)
[1] 2. Remove two C-clips [1], and then slide two bearings [2] at the both
[2] [1] sides and remove the feed roller assy /Up [3].

[2]

[3]

F-65
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 16. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure PI-505

[2] 3. Release hooks [1] at the both sides, and then lift up and remove
the separation roller assy /Up [2].

[1]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller /Up [2] and
the torque limiter /Up [3].
NOTE
[3] • Install the separation roller with two notches [4] face to
the front and be aligned with the prong [5].

[4]
[5]
5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

16.1.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Separation roller /Lw: Every 100,000 counts
• Torque limiter /Lw: Every 600,000 counts

(2) Replacing procedure

[1] 1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].

[2]

2. Take steps 2 to 4 in the replacement procedure of the separation roller /Up and torque limiter /Up.
F.16.1.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up
3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

F-66
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 17. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-527

17. Periodical maintenance procedure FS-527

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

17.1 Paper exit section

17.1.1 Cleaning procedure for each parts
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Each rollers/Each rolls: Every 300,000 counts
• Paddle: Every 300,000 counts

(2) Cleaning point

17.1.2 Replacing the upper paddles

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Upper paddles: Every 800,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door of the finisher.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the upper paddle assy [2].

[1] [2]

F-67
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 17. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-527
4. Remove two paddles [1].
[1] NOTE
• When installing the paddles, use alcohol to moisten the
surface of the paddles that are inserted into the grooves.

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

17.1.3 Replacing the lower paddles

(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Lower paddles: Every 800,000 counts

(2) Procedure
1. Remove the finisher.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Open the front door of the finisher.
NOTE
[2] • In case SD-509 is not mounted, remove the four screws [1]
[1] and take out the plate [2].

[1]

[1]

3. Slide the stapler unit [1] backward.

[1]

F-68
 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 17. Periodical maintenance
bizhub 652/552/602/502 procedure FS-527
4. Move the stopper [1] forward, and release the lock.
5. Remove the lower paddle assy [2].

[1]

[2]

6. Remove nine paddles [1].

[1]
NOTE
• When installing the paddles, use alcohol to moisten the
surface of the paddles that are inserted into the grooves.

[1]

7. Put the front side of the lower paddle Assy [1] through the belt.
8. Attach the lower paddle Assy to the arm and put the belt on the
gear [2].
9. Move the stopper [3] to secure.

[3]

[1]

[2]

10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

F-69
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 1. Disassembly/adjustment
bizhub 652/552/602/502 prohibited items

G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items
1.1 Paint-locked screws
NOTE
• To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws.
• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to
the vibrations created during transportation.
• If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened.

1.2 Red-painted screws

NOTE
• The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by
mistake.
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are
used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.

1.3 Variable resistors on board

NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.

1.4 Removal of PWBs

CAUTION
• To avoid electrical shock, after turning OFF the power switch, do not touch the DC power supply for 22 minutes.
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal
procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or
circuit board.
• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.

1.5 Precautions for disassembly

• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs of the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with the door open or external covers removed, always be attentive to the motion of the
internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause unexpected hazards.
• When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other moving part, disassembling a unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and units, be
careful about moving parts and use care not to drop any part or unit. During the service procedure, give sufficient support for any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.

1.6 Precautions during setup or transportation

• Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be attentive to the motion of the fellow worker of the joint work.
The fellow worker may be injured with his or her finger or hand pinched between the machine and the option.
• When mounting an option on the machine, be careful about the clearance between the machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand pinched between the machine and the option.
• Do not leave the machine unattended during transportation, installation, and inspection of the machine. If it is to be unavoidably left
unattended, face protrusions toward the wall or take other necessary risk reducing action.
The user may stumble over a protrusion of the machine or be caught by a cable, falling to the floor or being injured.

1.7 Parts not allowed to be removed

1.7.1 ZU-606
(1) Punch section
• The precision of the punch edges is ensured in the punch unit. The normal punch operation may be affected if it is disassembled. Never
loosen or remove these screws and retaining rings.

G-1
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 1. Disassembly/adjustment
bizhub 652/552/602/502 prohibited items

[1]

[1] Screws not allowed to be removed

(2) Z-folding section

• The screws position the clearance of the conveyance guide plate. The precision of the Z-folding may be affected if it is disassembled.
Never loosen or remove these screws.

[2]

[1]
[1]

[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Conveyance guide plate

G-2
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 2. Units from which removing is
bizhub 652/552/602/502 prohibited

2. Units from which removing is prohibited

2.1 CCD unit
2.1.1 Reason for prohibition
• Since the accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, no accuracy is guaranteed if it is disassembled.
Therefore, screws that lead to the disassembly of the CCD unit must not be removed.

2.2 PH unit
2.2.1 Reason for prohibition
• The laser runs inside the PH unit. Opening the cover may cause dust to enter and interrupt the laser. Do no remove any screw which may
disassemble the PH unit.

2.3 Fusing unit

2.3.1 Reason for prohibition
• Inner part of the fusing unit and the position of the fusing belt are adjusted prior to shipping. Do not remove any screw which may
disassemble the fusing unit.

G-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. bizhub 502/552/602/652
3.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list
3.1.1 Exterior parts
No. Part name Ref. page
1 Upper front door G.3.2.1 Upper front door
2 Lower front door G.3.2.2 Lower front door
3 Upper front cover /1 G.3.2.3 Upper front cover /1
4 Upper front cover /2 G.3.2.4 Upper front cover /2
5 Right front cover G.3.2.5 Right front cover
6 Lower front cover G.3.2.6 Lower front cover
7 Upper left cover G.3.2.7 Upper left cover
8 Lower left cover G.3.2.8 Lower left cover
9 Rear left cover G.3.2.9 Rear left cover
10 Paper exit rear cover G.3.2.10 Paper exit rear cover
11 Scanner rear cover G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
12 Scanner right cover G.3.2.12 Scanner right cover
13 Scanner upper rear cover/1 G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
14 Scanner upper rear cover/2 G.3.2.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2
15 Scanner left cover G.3.2.15 Scanner left cover
16 Scanner upper front cover G.3.2.16 Scanner upper front cover
17 Scanner front cover G.3.2.17 Scanner front cover
18 USB interface cover G.3.2.18 USB interface cover
19 Original glass G.3.2.19 Original glass
20 Interface cover/1 G.3.2.20 Interface cover/1
21 Interface cover/2 G.3.2.21 Interface cover/2
22 Rear right cover/1 G.3.2.22 Rear right cover/1
23 Rear right cover/2 G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
24 Manual bypass tray rear cover G.3.2.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover
25 Upper rear cover/1 G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
26 Upper rear cover/2 G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
27 Lower rear cover G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover
28 Front right cover G.3.2.28 Front right cover
29 Control panel assy G.3.2.29 Control panel assy
30 Exit tray G.3.2.30 Exit tray (option: OT-503)
31 Tray 1/2 G.3.2.31 Tray 1/2
32 Tray 3/4 G.3.2.32 Tray 3/4

3.1.2 Units
No. Part name Ref. page
1 PH unit G.3.3.1 PH unit
2 Duplex unit G.3.3.2 Duplex unit
3 Manual bypass tray unit G.3.3.3 Manual bypass tray unit
4 CCD unit G.3.3.4 CCD unit
5 Original glass moving unit G.3.3.5 Original glass moving unit
6 Glass step sheet G.3.3.6 Glass step sheet
7 Exposure unit G.3.3.7 Exposure unit
8 Hard disk G.3.3.8 Hard disk
9 IH coil G.3.3.9 IH coil (FH1)
10 Intermediate transport roller assy G.3.3.10 Intermediate transport roller assy
11 Main drive unit G.3.3.11 Main drive unit
12 LCC drive unit G.3.3.12 LCC drive unit
13 Scanner chassis G.3.3.13 Scanner chassis

3.1.3 Boards
No. Part name Ref. page
1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) G.3.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
2 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) G.3.4.2 Original glass position control board (OGPCB)
3 Inverter board (INVB) G.3.4.3 Inverter board (INVB)

G-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

No. Part name Ref. page

4 PH relay board (REYB/PH) G.3.4.4 PH relay board (REYB/PH)
5 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) G.3.4.5 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
6 DC power supply (DCPU) G.3.4.6 DC power supply (DCPU)
7 Relay drive board (REDB) G.3.4.7 Relay drive board (REDB)
8 Printer control board (PRCB) G.3.4.8 Printer control board (PRCB)
9 PCI board (PCIB) G.3.4.10 PCI board (PCIB)
10 MFP board (MFPB) G.3.4.11 MFP board (MFPB)
11 High voltage unit/2 (HV2) G.3.4.13 High voltage unit/2 (HV2)
12 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) G.3.4.14 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)
13 High voltage unit/1 (HV1) G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
14 IH power supply (IHPU) G.3.4.16 IH power supply (IHPU)
15 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) G.3.4.17 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)
16 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) G.3.4.18 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)

3.1.4 Motors
No. Part name Ref. page
1 ADU transport motor/1 (M31) G.3.5.1 ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
2 ADU transport motor/2 (M32) G.3.5.2 ADU transport motor/2 (M32)
3 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) G.3.5.3 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass
paper feed motor (M27)
4 Bypass paper feed motor (M27) G.3.5.3 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass
paper feed motor (M27)
5 Scanner motor (M201) G.3.5.4 Scanner motor (M201)
6 Original glass moving motor (M202) G.3.5.5 Original glass moving motor (M202)
7 Waste toner agitating motor (M20) G.3.5.6 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
8 Transport motor (M25) G.3.5.7 Transport motor (M25)
9 Vertical transport motor (M26) G.3.5.8 Vertical transport motor (M26)
10 Transfer belt motor (M1) G.3.5.9 Transfer belt motor (M1)
11 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) G.3.5.10 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor
(M3)
12 Registration motor (M2) G.3.5.11 Registration motor (M2)
13 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) G.3.5.12 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)
14 Fusing motor (M30) G.3.5.13 Fusing motor (M30)
15 Switchback motor (M33) G.3.5.14 Switchback motor (M33)
16 Exit motor (M4) G.3.5.15 Exit motor (M4)
17 K PC drum motor (M18) G.3.5.16 K PC drum motor (M18)
18 K developing motor (M19) G.3.5.17 K developing motor (M19)
19 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6) G.3.5.18 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)
20 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8) G.3.5.19 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)
21 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) G.3.5.20 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)
22 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) G.3.5.21 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24)
23 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) G.3.5.22 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
24 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) G.3.5.23 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)
25 Take-up motor (M22) G.3.5.24 Take-up motor (M22)
26 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) G.3.5.25 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
27 Cleaner motor (M38) G.3.5.26 Cleaner motor (M38)
28 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) G.3.5.27 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor
(M21)
29 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) G.3.5.28 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
30 Toner supply motor/K (M12) G.3.5.29 Toner supply motor/K (M12)

3.1.5 Clutches
No. Part name Ref. page
1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) G.3.6.1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2) G.3.6.2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2)
3 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3) G.3.6.3 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)
4 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5) G.3.6.4 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport
clutch (CL6)

G-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

No. Part name Ref. page

5 Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) G.3.6.4 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport
clutch (CL6)
6 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) G.3.6.5 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7)

3.1.6 Others
No. Part name Ref. page
1 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) G.3.7.1 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
2 Scanner drive cables G.3.7.2 Scanner drive cables
3 Tray 3/4 lift wire G.3.7.3 Tray 3/4 lift wire

3.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Exterior parts)

3.2.1 Upper front door
1. Open the upper front door.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Remove the C-clip [1].

[1]

4. Slide the upper front door [1] to the left to remove it.

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.2 Lower front door

1. Open the lower front door.

G-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2].

[2]

[1]

3. Remove the C-clip [1].

[2] [1] 4. Slide the lower front door [2] to the left to remove it.

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.3 Upper front cover /1

1. Open the upper front door.
2. Remove the control panel assy.
G.3.2.29 Control panel assy
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the upper front cover /1 [2].
[1]

[2]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.4 Upper front cover /2

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the upper front cover /2 [2].
[1] G.3.2.29 Control panel assy

[2]

2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.5 Right front cover

1. Remove the upper front door.
G.3.2.1 Upper front door
2. Open the upper right door.
3. Remove the front right cover.
G.3.2.28 Front right cover
4. Open the lower front door.

G-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stoppers [2] of the upper
front door and the lower front door.

[1] [2]

6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the right front cover [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.6 Lower front cover

1. Slide out the tray 1/2.
2. Remove the front right cover.
G.3.2.28 Front right cover
3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the lower front cover [2].
[1] NOTE
• Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the harness.

[2]

4. Turn back the lower front cover [1] and remove four screws [2].
[2] [1]

5. Remove two empty display lenses [1].

[1]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

G-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3.2.7 Upper left cover

1. Open the lower front door.
2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the upper left cover [2].
[1]

[2]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.8 Lower left cover

1. Slide out the tray 1/2/3.
2. Remove the lower rear cover.
G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover
3. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the lower left cover [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.9 Rear left cover

1. Remove the upper left cover.
G.3.2.7 Upper left cover
2. Remove the upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
[2] 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2].

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.10 Paper exit rear cover

1. Remove the rear left cover.
G.3.2.9 Rear left cover

G-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2].

[2]

[1]
3. Remove two screws [1], and slide the paper exit rear cover [2] to
[2] remove it.

[1]
4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.11 Scanner rear cover

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner rear cover [2].
[1]

[2]

2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.12 Scanner right cover

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner right cover [2].
[1]

[2]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1

1. Remove the ADF.
G.4.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-618)
2. Remove the scanner right cover.
G.3.2.12 Scanner right cover

G-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and three screws [2], and remove
[1] [3] the scanner upper rear cover/1 [3].

[2]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2

1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover/1.
G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner upper rear cover/2
[1] [2].

[2]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.15 Scanner left cover

1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1]

[2]

2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the scanner left cover [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.16 Scanner upper front cover

1. Open the ADF.

G-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove the screw [1] and two shoulder screws [2], and remove the
[2] scanner upper front cover [3].

[1] [3]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.17 Scanner front cover

1. Remove the scanner upper front cover.
G.3.2.16 Scanner upper front cover
2. Remove the upper front cover /1 and the upper front cover /2.
G.3.2.3 Upper front cover /1
G.3.2.4 Upper front cover /2
3. Remove the scanner left cover.
G.3.2.15 Scanner left cover
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the scanner front cover [2].
[1] NOTE
• Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the harness.

[1] [2]

5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the scanner front cover
[1] [2] [2].

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.18 USB interface cover

1. Remove the upper front cover /2.
G.3.2.4 Upper front cover /2
2. Remove the cap [1].

[1]

G-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the USB interface cover [2].
[2]

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.19 Original glass

1. Remove the scanner right cover.
G.3.2.12 Scanner right cover
2. Remove the scanner upper front cover.
G.3.2.16 Scanner upper front cover
3. Remove each screw [1], and remove the original glass fixing
[2] [1] bracket (near side/inmost side) [2].

[2]

4. Remove the original glass [1].

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.20 Interface cover/1

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the interface cover/1 [2].
[1]

[2]

2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.21 Interface cover/2

1. Open the interface cover/2.

G-13
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the interface cover/2 [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.22 Rear right cover/1

1. Open the upper right door.
2. Remove the ozone filter.
F.7.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the rear right cover/1 [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.23 Rear right cover/2

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the lower right cover [2].
[2]

[1]

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear right cover/2 [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

G-14
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3.2.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Manual bypass tray rear
[1] cover [2].

[2]

2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper rear cover/1 [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2

1. Remove the toner filter.
F.7.1.2 Replacing the toner filter
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper rear cover/2 [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.27 Lower rear cover

1. Remove six screws [1], and remove the lower rear cover [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.28 Front right cover

1. Open the manual bypass tray door.

G-15
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.29 Control panel assy

1. Loosen two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
[1] [2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the control panel assy [2].
[2] [1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.30 Exit tray (option: OT-503)

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2].

[2]
[1]

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector cover [2].
[1] [2]

G-16
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Disconnect the connector [2] of the fan unit [1].

[2] [1]

4. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2], and remove
the fan unit [3].

[1] [2]

[3]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.31 Tray 1/2

NOTE
• Tray 1 and 2 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 1.
1. Slide out the tray.
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray [2].
[2]

[1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.2.32 Tray 3/4

NOTE
• Tray 3 and 4 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 3.
1. Slide out the tray.

G-17
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1] and six screws [2], and remove the tray [3].
[2]

[1]

[1]

[3] [2]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Units)

3.3.1 PH unit

CAUTION
• Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is
ON.
Laser beam generated during the above mentioned
activity may cause blindness.
• Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit.
Laser beam generated during the above mentioned
activity may cause blindness.
1. Remove the upper left cover.
G.3.2.7 Upper left cover
2. Remove the lower left cover.
G.3.2.8 Lower left cover
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]

4. Remove twelve screws [1], and remove the PH unit protective

[1] [2] [1] shield [2].

[1] [1]

G-18
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Unplug the flat cable [1] and removed if from the cable guide [2].
[2] [1] 6. Remove the screw [3] to remove the ground terminal [4].
NOTE
• Handle the flat cables carefully.
Remove them from the cable guide with care while making
it parallel to the guide.

[4] [3]

7. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from two
[1] wire saddles [2].

[2]

8. Hold up the PH unit [1] slightly and pull it toward to remove.

[1] 9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

10. Execute [LD Timing Adj.] and [LD 1/2 Balance Adj.] after selecting
[Service Mode] -> [Machine] -> [LD adjustment].
I.10.3.8 LD adjustment

3.3.2 Duplex unit

1. Remove two screws [1] and two tabs [2] to take out the duplex unit
[1] [3] [2] cover [3].

G-19
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Open the duplex unit door.

3. Remove three screws [1].

[1]
4. Open the upper right door, and remove the tab [1].

[1]

5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the duplex unit [2].
[2]

[1]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3.3 Manual bypass tray unit

1. Remove the rear right cover /2.
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
2. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from the
wire saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].

[3] [2] [1]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray rear
cover [2].

[2] [1]

G-20
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Open the manual bypass tray.

[1]
[2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1].
6. Remove the hinge shaft [2] from below and remove the manual
bypass tray [3].
[3]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3.4 CCD unit

(1) Removal procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective
[1] [2] [1] shield [2].

[1]

3. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[2] [3] [2] 4. Remove four screws [2], and remove the CCD unit [3].

[1]

(2) Reinstall procedure

1. Set the CCD unit to the mounting position at the center of the
scale, and fix it with four screws.

2. Reinstall the original glass.

3. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.

G-21
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Carry out the [Cross Direction Adjustment]. If the specifications are not met, loosen the CCD unit mounting screws and move the CCD
unit in the sub scan direction as necessary.
I.10.3.6.(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.
NOTE
• Hold the CCD unit by hand when moving it. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it, as a varied distance
between the CCD sensor and lens results.
• When CCD unit is replaced, [Scan Calibration] and [Line Mag Setting] under [System 2] available in Service Mode should be
OFF.

3.3.5 Original glass moving unit

(1) Removal procedure
1. Remove the scanner left cover.
G.3.2.15 Scanner left cover
2. Remove the scanner front cover.
G.3.2.17 Scanner front cover
3. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
4. Remove the original glass moving motor.
G.3.5.5 Original glass moving motor (M202)
5. Remove the glass step sheet.
G.3.3.6 Glass step sheet
6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the original glass moving unit
[2] cover [2].

[1] [1]

7. Remove the C-ring [1] and the collar [2] one each, and remove the
[4] belts [3] of both sides of the original glass mounting unit out of the
gear [4].
NOTE
• Be sure the direction of the collar [2] to be as shown in the
left illustration when mounting it.

[3] [4]

[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2]

[2]

8. Remove four screws [1], and remove the original glass moving unit
[3] [1] [2].
NOTE
• Use care not to lose the spacer [3] mounted on each
screw.
• Write down the type and numbers of the spacer [3].

[2] [3]

G-22
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

The same numbers of the spacer of the same type with

what is written should be mounted when replacing the
original glass moving unit.

(2) Reinstall procedure

NOTE
• When replacing the original glass moving unit, clean the glass surface of the original glass moving unit. Clean the inside of the
glass well since it cannot be easily cleaned once it is mounted.
1. When mounting the new original glass moving unit, take out the original glass moving unit cover.
2. Set the spacers [1] and mount the original glass moving unit [2] to
[1] the machine.
NOTE
• Make sure to set the spacers [1] which are exact same
type and number as before removing the original glass
moving unit.

[2] [1]

3. Tighten four screws [1] loosely and adjust the height of the original
[1] glass moving unit.
I.14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit

4. Tighten four screws [1] fully.

[1]

5. Follow the removing procedures in the opposite steps.

6. Perform the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj]
I.10.16.7 Read Pos Adj

3.3.6 Glass step sheet

(1) Removal procedure
1. Remove the scanner left cover.
G.3.2.15 Scanner left cover
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the glass step sheet [2].
[2]

[1]

G-23
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

(2) Reinstall procedure

1. Mount the glass step sheet [1] to the original glass moving unit [2].
[1] [2]
NOTE
• Set the sheet [3] under the cover of the original glass
moving unit [4].
• Use care not to bend the edge of the glass step sheet.

[4] [4]

[3] [3]

[3] 2. Set the points [1] of the glass step sheet to the edge of the scale
plate on the original glass moving unit [2], and mount it with three
screws [3].

[1] [1]

[2] [2]

3. Perform the following setting.

[Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj]
I.10.16.7 Read Pos Adj

3.3.7 Exposure unit

(1) Removal procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure unit [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure lamp [2] from
[1] the exposure unit.

[2]

G-24
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

(2) Reinstall procedure

1. Fix the exposure lamp [2] to the exposure unit with the two screws
[1] [1].

[2]

2. Tighten the exposure unit [2] with the two screws [1] temporarily.
[2]

[1]

3. Move the exposure unit [1] and the mirror unit to the end of the
right.

[1]

4. Slide the exposure unit until it hits the end of the scanner right
frame.
5. Provide the length of 21.0 mm between the end of the left
indentation [1] on the exposure unit upper surface and the end of
[1] the scanner right frame upper surface. When the length is
[1] ensured, tighten the two screws [2].

[2] [2]

6. Perform the following setting.

[Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj]
I.10.16.7 Read Pos Adj

3.3.8 Hard disk

1. Remove the upper rear cover/1.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1

G-25
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove faive screws [1], and remove the cover [2].

[1]

[1] [2]

3. Remove three screws [1] of the hard disk drive assy.

[1]

[1]

4. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the hard disk drive assy
[1] [2].

[2]

5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[1]

[1] [2]

6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the hard disk drive [2].
[1] 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
NOTE
• When the hard disk is replaced, select [State Confirmation]
→ [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD Format] in Service Mode for
logical format.
After formatting the HDD, make the settings below as
necessary.
• Reinstallation of movie data and OCR dictionary data.
I.10.11.19 Install Data
Resetting of HDD lock password
I.6.76.4 HDD Lock Password
[2]

G-26
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3.3.9 IH coil (FH1)

WARNING
• Tighten the screws of the lead wire terminal of the IH
power supply fully to the direction specified.
The terminal leakage may cause fire.

B A
C

A: The longest harness is installed with the M4 screw.

B: The harness is installed with the M4 screw.
C: The harness is installed with the M3 screw.
D: The harness is installed with the M3 screw.
E: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is
installed with the M4 screw. (Either harness can be connected with
terminal E and F.)
F: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is
installed with the M4 screw. (Either harness can be connected with
terminal E and F.)
1. Remove the fusing unit.
F.7.12.1 Replacing the fusing unit
2. Remove the paper exit rear cover.
G.3.2.10 Paper exit rear cover
3. Remove the IH power supply protective shield.
See the steps 1 to 12 in “G.3.4.16 IH power supply (IHPU).”
4. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness.
[1] [1] 5. Open the right door, and remove three screws [2] from the cover [1].
6. Loosen two screws [1] holding the Switchback unit in place ,
remove three screws [2], and remove the Gear Assy [3].
7. Remove the screw [1] to release the Switchback unit.

[1]

G-27
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

[2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

8. Remove the screw [1], and then while raising the Switchback unit
[2] [2], pull the Exit Cover [3] toward you.

[3] [1]

G-28
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit tray front cover [2].
[2]

[1]

10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2]

[1]

11. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the
[2] [1] harness guide [2].

12. Remove the screw [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
[1] [2]

13. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1].

[1]

[1]

G-29
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

14. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
[2]

[1]

15. Remove the fixture of the IH coil [1] as shown in the left illustration.
[1]

16. Removing the harness [1], remove the IH coil [2].

[1]

[2]

17. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3.10 Intermediate transport roller assy

1. Open the manual bypass tray door.
2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and interface cover /2.
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
G.3.2.21 Interface cover/2
3. Open the lower right door.
4. Remove three screws [1], and slide the lower right door [2] to the
direction as shown in the illustration to remove it.

[2] [1]

G-30
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from four
wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3].

[3] [2] [1]

6. Remove three screws [1], and slide the intermediate transport roller
[2] assy [2] to the direction as shown in the illustration to remove it.

[1]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3.11 Main drive unit

1. Remove the fusing unit.
F.7.12.1 Replacing the fusing unit
2. Remove the transfer belt motor.
G.3.5.9 Transfer belt motor (M1)
3. Remove the K PC drum motor.
G.3.5.16 K PC drum motor (M18)
4. Remove the K developing motor.
G.3.5.17 K developing motor (M19)
5. Remove the service EEPROM board.
G.3.4.14 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)
6. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy.
See the steps 1 to 17 in
“G.3.5.26 Cleaner motor (M38). ”
7. Remove two harness guides on the high voltage unit/1.
See the steps 12 to 15 in
“G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1). ”
8. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the harness guide cover [2].
[1]

[2]

9. Remove the screw [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
[1] [2]

G-31
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

10. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1] and the edge cover
[1] [2], and disconnect the connector [3].

[2] [1]

11. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the gear [2].
[1]

[2]

12. Remove four screws [1], and remove the fusing pressure retraction
[1] unit [2].

[2]

13. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[1]

[2]

14. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the main drive unit [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

15. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3.12 LCC drive unit

1. Slide out the tray 4.
2. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy.
See the steps 1 to 9 in
“G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1). ”

G-32
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove the intermediate transport roller assy.

G.3.3.10 Intermediate transport roller assy
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the lower right cover [2].
[2]

[1]

5. Remove two E-rings [1], the C-clip [2], the bearing [3] and the gear
[4] [2] [1] [4].

[1] [3]

6. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from the
[1] edge cover [1].

[2]

7. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].

[1]

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[1]

[2]

G-33
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

9. Disconnect three connectors [1].

[1]

[1]

10. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and edge cover
[1] [2] [2].

11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
[2]

[1]

12. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2].
[2] [1]

13. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1]

[2]

G-34
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

14. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].

[1]

15. Remove two wire saddles [1].

[1]

16. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] [2] 17. Remove seven screws [2], and remove the power supply code unit
[3].

[3] [2]

18. Remove seven screws [1] of the LCC drive unit.

[1]

[1]

19. Remove the LCC drive unit [2] clearing the harness [1].
[1] [2]

20. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.3.13 Scanner chassis

1. Remove the scanner left cover.
G.3.2.15 Scanner left cover
2. Remove the scanner front cover.
G.3.2.17 Scanner front cover

G-35
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove the scanner right cover.

G.3.2.12 Scanner right cover
4. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
5. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1 and the scanner upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
G.3.2.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2
6. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
7. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
8. Disconnect two connectors [1] on the scanner relay board.

[1]

9. Disconnect a connectors [3], and remove the harness from seven

[1] wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2].

[3] [2]

10. Remove the cable holder [1].

[1]

11. Disconnect two connectors [1] and the USB connector [2].
[3] 12. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [3].

[2] [1] [3]

G-36
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

13. Remove nine screws [1], and remove scanner chassis [2].
[1]

[2]

[1] [1]

[1]

14. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Boards)

3.4.1 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover/1.
G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
2. Disconnect all connectors on the scanner relay board.

3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the scanner relay board [2].
[2]

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.2 Original glass position control board (OGPCB)

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover

G-37
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Disconnect three connectors [1].

[1]

3. Remove two PWB support [1], and remove the original glass
[2] position control board [2].

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.3 Inverter board (INVB)

1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover/1.
G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
2. Disconnect nine connectors [1].
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove the harnesses from four wire saddles [2], two edge covers
[3] and the harness holder [4].

[4] [2] [1]

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Inverter board assy [2].
[2]

[1]

5. Remove two screws [1] and two PWB supports [2], and remove the
[2] inverter board [3].

[3] [1]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

G-38
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3.4.4 PH relay board (REYB/PH)

1. Remove the upper left cover.
G.3.2.7 Upper left cover
2. Remove the lower left cover.
G.3.2.8 Lower left cover
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]

4. Remove twelve screws [1], and remove the PH unit protective

[1] [2] [1] shield [2].

[1] [1]

5. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the PH relay board
[1] [1].

6. Remove for screws [1], and remove the PH relay board [2].
[1]

[2]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.5 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

1. Remove the lower rear cover.
G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover
2. Remove the rear right cover /2.
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2

G-39
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2]
[1] [4] 4. Remove five screws [3], and remove the paper feed/transport drive
board protective shield [4].

[3]

5. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the paper feed/
[1] transport drive board [1].

6. Remove two wire saddles [1].

[1] [2] [1] [3] 7. Remove six screws [2], and remove the paper feed/transport drive
board [3].

[2]

8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.6 DC power supply (DCPU)

1. Remove the lower rear cover.
G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover
2. Remove the rear right cover /2.
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
3. Remove the lower left cover.
G.3.2.8 Lower left cover
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2]
[1] [4] 5. Remove five screws [3], and remove the paper feed/transport drive
board protective shield [4].

[3]

G-40
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

6. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire
saddle [2].

[1] [2]

7. Remove 10 screws [1], and remove the DC power supply protective

[2] [1] shield/1 [2].

[1]
[1]

8. Disconnect the connector [1] of the power supply cooling fan motor.
[1] [2] 9. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].

10. Remove five screws [1], and remove the DC power supply
[2] [1] protective shield/2 [2].

[1]

11. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1] and the edge cover
[2] [2].

[1]

G-41
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

12. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1] and the edge cover
[2] [2].

[1]

13. Remove all the connectors on the DC power supply [1].

[1]

14. Remove five screws [1].

[1]

[1]

15. Clearing the harness, hold up the DC power supply [1] to remove it.
[1]

16. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.7 Relay drive board (REDB)

1. Remove the DC power supply.
G.3.4.6 DC power supply (DCPU)
2. Remove all the connectors from the relay drive board [1].
[1] NOTE
• For reinstallation, position the connectors so that the
harness hangs down from the connectors.

G-42
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove four PWB supports [1], and remove the relay drive board
[1] [2] [2].

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.8 Printer control board (PRCB)

1. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
2. Remove 10 screws [1], and remove the printer control board
[2] [1] protective shield [2].

[1] [1]

3. Remove the harness from twelve wire saddles [1] and three edge
[1] covers [2].

[1] [2]

4. Remove all the connectors on the printer control board [1].

[1]

5. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the printer control board [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

G-43
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

NOTE
• When the printer control board is to be replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.

3.4.9 How to open PWB box/1

1. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
2. Remove nine screws [1], and move the PWB box/1 [2] up to remove
[1] [2] it.

[1] [1]

3. Open the PWB box/1 [1] to the direction shown on the left and set
[1] two fingers [2] to the hook [3] on the frame of the main unit.

[2] [3]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.10 PCI board (PCIB)

1. Remove the upper rear cover /1.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1]

[1] [2]

3. Slide out the PCI board assy [1].

[1]

G-44
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the PCI board [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.11 MFP board (MFPB)

1. Remove the interface cover /1
G.3.2.20 Interface cover/1
2. Remove the interface cover/2.
G.3.2.21 Interface cover/2
3. Remove the hard disk drive assy.
G.3.3.8 Hard disk
4. Remove the PCI board assy.
G.3.4.10 PCI board (PCIB)
5. Remove eleven screws [1], and remove the MFP board protective
[1] [2] [1] shield [2].

[1] [1]

6. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the NVRAM board assy [2] on the
[1] [2] MFP board.

[1]

7. Unlock two lock levers [1], and remove the memory board [2] on the
[1] [2] [1] MFP board.

G-45
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

8. Remove six screws [1] of the MFP control board cooling fan motor
assy.

[1] [1]

[1]

9. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the MFP control board
[2] cooling fan motor assy [2].

[1]

10. Disconnect two connectors [1] and the USB connector [2].
[2] [3] 11. Remove the harnesses from three wire saddles [3].

[1] [3]

12. Remove six bolts [1] and six screws [2], and remove the port
[2] [1] [2] [3] bracket [3].

[2] [1]

13. Disconnect Seven connectors [1] and two flat cables [2].
[1]

[1] [2]

G-46
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

14. Remove ten screws [1], and remove the MFP board [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

15. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

NOTE
• When the MFP board is to be replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.
• When the NVRAM board is replaced to the brand-new one, the error “License management error occurred.” will be occurred.
In this case, it is necessary to repair the i-Option license management information.

3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2

1. Remove the interface cover/1.
G.3.2.20 Interface cover/1
2. Remove the upper rear cover /1.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
3. Remove the upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
4. Remove the rear right cover /1.
G.3.2.22 Rear right cover/1
5. Disconnect two connectors [1] and USB connector [2].
[2] [3] 6. Remove the harnesses from four wire saddles [3].

[1]

7. Remove five screws [1] and open the PWB box/2 [2].
[1]

[1] [2]

8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.13 High voltage unit/2 (HV2)

1. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2
2. Remove all the connectors on the high voltage unit/2 [1].

[1]

G-47
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove five screws [1], and remove two harness guides [2].
[2] [1] [2]

[1]

4. Remove five screws [1] and four tapping screws [2], and remove the
[1] high voltage unit/2 [3].

[1] [3] [2] [1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.14 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)

1. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2
2. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the
[1] [2] service EEPROM board [3].

[3]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

NOTE
• When the Service EEPROM board is replaced to the brand-new one, the error “License management error occurred.” will be
occurred.
In this case, it is necessary to repair the i-Option license management information.
NOTE
After replacing the service EEPROM board, all parts shown below are required to be replaced with new ones.
• Imaging unit
• Toner cartridge
• Waste toner box
• Image transfer belt
• Fusing unit
• Ozone filter
NOTE
• When service EEPROM is replaced, data of all adjustment settings stored in EEPROM disappear and the adjustment settings
are returned to the default ones.
After replacing the service EEPROM board, take the following steps to make readjustments.

4. Open the upper front door and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
5. Enter the Service Mode. Make individual adjustments shown in the following table in the order listed, using the machine maintenance list
and the adjustment lists that were output at the time of main body installation and maintenance.
Order Items that require readjustment in the Service mode Ref. page
1 Machine LD adjustment LD Timing Adj. I.10.3.8.(1) LD Timing Adj.
2 Imaging Process TCR Level Setting I.10.5.4 TCR Level Setting
3 Adjustment Image Background Adj I.10.5.5 Image Background Adj
4 Max Image Density Adj I.10.5.3 Max Image Density Adj
5 Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection I.10.5.11 Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection

G-48
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

NOTE
• After replacing the service EEPROM board, be sure to make the above listed adjustments before the first warm-up is made.

6. Turn OFF the main power switch and sub power switch.
7. Close the upper front door and turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch. Check to see that warm-up and image stabilization
operations are completed normally.
8. Enter the Service mode again. Make individual adjustments shown in the following table in the order listed, using the machine management
list and the adjustment lists that were output at the time of main body installation and maintenance.
Order Items that require readjustment in the Service mode Ref. page
1 Machine LD adjustment LD 1/2 Balance Adj. I.10.3.8.(2) LD 1/2 Balance Adj.
2 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj I.10.3.9 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj
3 Finisher FS-FN adjustment I.10.18 Finisher
4 Machine Printer Reg. Loop Adj. I.10.3.7 Printer Reg. Loop Adj.
5 Imaging Process Thick Paper Density Adjustment I.10.5.8 Thick Paper Density Adjustment
Adjustment
6 Machine Fusing Temperature I.10.3.2 Fusing Temperature
7 Imaging Process Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning I.10.5.2 Transfer Belt
Adjustment
8 Machine Thick Paper Interval Setting I.10.3.11 Thick Paper Interval Setting
9 Imaging Process Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias I.10.5.2.(1) Cleaning Bias
Adjustment
10 System 1 Charging CH cleaning K Charge Manual I.10.10.11.(1) K Charge Manual
Cleaning Cleaning
11 Machine Printer Area Paper Feed Direction Adj. I.10.3.5.(5) Paper Feed Direction Adj.
12 In this step, pull out the tray 3 and 4 and slide them in again.
13 Machine Fusing Transport Speed I.10.3.3 Fusing Transport Speed
14 Printer Area Printer Image Centering I.10.3.5.(2) Printer Image Centering
Side 1 Side 1
Prt. Image Center. Side 2 I.10.3.5.(4) Prt. Image Center. Side 2
(Dup) (Dup)
Leading Edge Adjustment I.10.3.5.(1) Leading Edge Adjustment
Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 I.10.3.5.(3) Leading Edge Adj. Side 2
(Duplex) (Duplex)
15 Imaging Process Transfer Voltage Fine Adj Secondary transfer adj. I.10.5.6.(2) Secondary transfer adj.
16 Adjustment Primary transfer adj. I.10.5.6.(1) Primary transfer adj.
17 Paper separation adjustment I.10.5.9 Paper separation adjustment

3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1)

1. Remove the upper rear cover /1, upper rear cover /2 and lower rear cover.
G.3.2.25 Upper rear cover/1
G.3.2.26 Upper rear cover/2
G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover
2. Remove the rear right cover/1, rear right cover/2, interface cover/1 and interface cover/2.
G.3.2.22 Rear right cover/1
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
G.3.2.20 Interface cover/1
G.3.2.21 Interface cover/2
3. Remove the DC power supply.
G.3.4.6 DC power supply (DCPU)
4. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2
5. Remove 15 connectors [1] and the flat cable [2] on the paper feed/
[1] [2] transport drive board.

[1] [1] [1] [1]

G-49
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

6. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1] and three edge
[2] [1] covers [2].

[2]

7. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1] and the edge cover
[2] [2].

[1]

8. Disconnect eight connectors [1].

[1]

[1] [1]

9. Remove four screws [1], and remove the paper feed/transport drive
[2] [1] board assy [2].

[1]

10. Remove three cable holders [1] and clear the flat cables [2].
[1]

[2]

G-50
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

11. Remove four screws [1] and take out the reinforcing plate [2].

[1]

[1]

[2] [1] [3]

12. Disconnect two connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1].
[1]

[2]

13. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the connectors, hang the harness [2] on
the hook.
Be sure to take the slack out of the harness.

[2]

14. Remove three screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
[1]

[2]

15. Disconnect two connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1].
[2]

[1]

G-51
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

16. Remove six screws [1].

[1]

17. Unhook the tab [1] and remove the high voltage unit/1 [2].
[2]

[1]

18. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.16 IH power supply (IHPU)

WARNING
• Tighten the screws of the lead wire terminal of the IH
power supply fully to the direction specified.
The terminal leakage may cause fire.

B A
C

A: The longest harness is installed with the M4 screw.

B: The harness is installed with the M4 screw.
C: The harness is Installed with the M3 screw.
D: The harness is installed with the M3 screw.
E: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is
installed with the M4 screw. (Either harness can be connected with
terminal E and F.)
G-52
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

WARNING
F: The harness with black (100 V areas) / gray (200 V areas) color is
installed with the M4 screw. (Either harness can be connected with
terminal E and F.)
1. Remove the upper front cover /1.
G.3.2.3 Upper front cover /1
2. Remove the upper front cover /2.
G.3.2.4 Upper front cover /2
3. Remove the right front cover.
G.3.2.5 Right front cover
4. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]

5. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the IH power supply

[2] [1] protective shield [2].

[1]

6. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness.
[1] [1]

[1]

7. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[1]

[1]

G-53
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

8. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the IH power supply [2].
[1]

[1] [1] [2] [1]

9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.17 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)

1. Remove the tray1 and tray2.
G.3.2.31 Tray 1/2
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the
[3] [2] [3] edge cover [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], take out the tray1 lift-up motor assy [4] and
turn it around.

[4] [1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [1] 5. Unhook two tabs [2] and remove the paper size detect board/1 assy
[3].

[2] [2]

6. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size detect board/1 [2].
[1]

[2]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.4.18 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)

1. Remove the tray1 and tray 2.
G.3.2.31 Tray 1/2

G-54
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the
[3] [2] [3] edge cover [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], take out the tray2 lift-up motor assy [4] and
turn it around.

[4] [1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [1] 5. Unhook the tabs [2] and remove the paper size detect board/2 assy
[3].

[2] [2]

6. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size detect board/2 [2].
[1]

[2]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Motors)

3.5.1 ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
1. Remove the duplex unit.
G.3.3.2 Duplex unit
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two
[3] wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3].

[2] [1]

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/1
[2] assy [2].

[1]

G-55
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/1 [2].
[2]

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.2 ADU transport motor/2 (M32)

1. Remove the duplex unit.
G.3.3.2 Duplex unit
2. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

3. Remove six screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/2 assy
[2] [2].

[1]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/2 [2].
[2]

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.3 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27)
1. Remove the manual bypass tray unit.
G.3.3.3 Manual bypass tray unit

G-56
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray upper
[1] cover [2].

[2]
3. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[1]

[1] [2]

4. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[1]

[1]

G-57
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

<1> NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness and connectors which were
removed in step 4, route the harnesses following the
procedure shown in the illustrations on the left.
<1> Fit the harness into the place as shown in the
illustration on the left.
<2> Insert the two connectors and route the harness as
shown in the illustration on the left.
<2> <3> Secure the harness to the harness guide.

<3>

5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2]

[1]

6. Remove six screws [1].

[1]

[1]

7. Pull the manual bypass tray drive assy [1] to the direction shown as
the illustration to remove it.
NOTE
• Do no pull forcedly as the harness is connected.

[1]

G-58
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

8. Remove the screw [1] and the connector [2], and take out the
[1] [2] [3]
bypass tray up down motor [3].

9. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover
[2] [2].
10. Disconnect the connector [3].

[1] [3]

11. Remove two screws [1], and remove the bypass paper feed motor
[2] [2].

[1]

12. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

[1] NOTE
• While pushing the bypass tray up down motor assy [1] in
the direction of the arrow as shown in the illustration on
the left, install the bypass tray up down motor assy [1].
If the pushing force is insufficient, lack of gear backlash is
caused and paper feed problems may occur.

3.5.4 Scanner motor (M201)

(1) Removal procedure
1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
2. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1.
G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the harnesses from two
[4] [1] wire saddles [2].
4. Then remove the screw [3] to take out the 15 degree sensor assy
[4].

[2] [3]

G-59
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Remove the harness from three edge covers [1].

[1]

[1]

6. Remove six screws [1], and remove the ADF table [2].
[1] [2]

[1]
[1]

7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove three screws [2].

[2]

[1]

8. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and remove the scanner
[2] motor assy [3].

[3] [1]

9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner motor [2].
[2]

[1]

G-60
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

(2) Reinstall procedure

1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws
[2] [1] [2].

[2] [2]

2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand
[1] [4] [3] side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the
left and check that it is returned to the original position by the
tension of the spring [3].
Perform this step three times.
3. Turn the pulley and make sure that the belt does not ride up on the
pulley teeth.
4. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the scanner motor assy into
position.

[4] [2] [4]

3.5.5 Original glass moving motor (M202)

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
2. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1 and scanner upper rear cover /2.
G.3.2.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1
G.3.2.14 Scanner upper rear cover/2
3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

4. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1] and four wire saddles
[2].

[2] [1]

G-61
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] 6. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [2].

[2]

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the bracket [2].

[2]

[1]

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass moving
[1] motor assy [2].

[2]

9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass moving
[2] motor [2].

[1]

10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.6 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)

1. Remove the PH relay board.
G.3.4.4 PH relay board (REYB/PH)
2. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1].
[1]

G-62
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove two screws [2] of the bracket [1].

[2] [1]

[2]

4. Remove the wire saddle [1], connector [2] and two screws [3], and
[4] [1] take out the waste toner agitating motor [4].

[3] [2]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.7 Transport motor (M25)

1. Remove the lower rear cover.
G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover
2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and interface cover /2.
G.3.2.23 Rear right cover/2
G.3.2.21 Interface cover/2
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the transport motor cover [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2], and remove the
[1] [3] transport motor [3].

[2]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.8 Vertical transport motor (M26)

1. Remove the lower rear cover.
G.3.2.27 Lower rear cover

G-63
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two
[2] wire saddles [2].

[1]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor
[1] assy [2].

[2]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor [2].
[2]

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.9 Transfer belt motor (M1)

1. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2
2. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the
[2] transfer belt motor [3].

[1] [3]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.10 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)

1. Open the upper right door.

G-64
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the intermediate transport unit [2].

[1] [1]

[2]

3. Remove five screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the 2nd
[1] [2] image transfer pressure retraction drive assy [3].

[1] [3]

4. Remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor assy [1].
[1]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the 2nd image transfer
[2] pressure retraction motor [2].

[1]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.11 Registration motor (M2)

1. Open the upper right door.

G-65
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the intermediate transport unit [2].

[1] [1]

[2]

3. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the harness from the wire
[1] [2] saddle [2].
4. Remove two screws [3] and take out the pressure welding
alienation sensor assy [4].

[4] [3]

5. Remove two screws [1] and the spring [2], and remove the gear
[1] [2] cover [3].
NOTE
• Make sure not to lose the spring.

[3] [1]

6. Remove two E-rings [1], the collar [2] and the rotating knob [3], and
[4] [1] remove two gears [4].

[1] [2] [3]

7. Remove two screws [1], and take out the shaft metal plate [2].
[2]

[1]

G-66
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the registration motor [2].
[1]

[2]

9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.12 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)

1. Remove the rear right cover/1.
G.3.2.22 Rear right cover/1
2. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3] 4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the fusing pressure retraction
motor [3].

[1]

[2]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.13 Fusing motor (M30)

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
2. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2
3. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2], and remove the
[3] [2] fusing motor [3].

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.14 Switchback motor (M33)

1. Remove the scanner rear cover.
G.3.2.11 Scanner rear cover
2. Open the PWB box/2.
G.3.4.12 How to open PWB box/2

G-67
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].

[1]

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[1]

[2]

5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the duct [2].

[2]

[1]

6. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from the
[2] edge cover [2].

[1]

7. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the
[1] [2] connector [2].

G-68
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

8. Remove the screw [1], and remove the rear right cover/3 [2].
[2] [1]

9. Remove five screws [1], and remove the fan motor assy /1 [2].

[1]

[2] [1]

[1]

10. Remove three screws [1], and remove the switchback motor assy
[2] [1] [2].

[1]

11. Remove two screws [1], and remove the switchback motor [2].
[2]

[1]

12. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.15 Exit motor (M4)

1. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See the steps 1 to 8 in
“G.3.5.14 Switchback motor (M33).”

G-69
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire
[2] saddle [2].

[1]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit motor assy [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit motor [2].
[2]

[1]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.16 K PC drum motor (M18)

1. Take out the reinforcing plate. See the steps 1 to 11 in
“G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1).”
2. Open the upper right door.
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the rear right cover/3 [2].
[2] [1]

4. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from two
[4] [2] [3] wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2].
5. Remove the screw [3], and remove the fan motor assy /2 [4].

[5] [1]

G-70
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

6. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2], and remove the K
[3] PC drum motor [3].

[2] [1]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.17 K developing motor (M19)

1. Remove the fan motor assy /2. See the steps 1 to 5 in
“G.3.5.16 K PC drum motor (M18).”
2. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2], and remove the K
[1] developing motor [3].

[2] [3]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.18 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)

1. Remove the tray1 and tray 2.
G.3.2.31 Tray 1/2
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the
[3] [2] [3] edge cover [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], take out the tray1 lift-up motor assy [4] and
turn it around.

[4] [1]

4. Disconnect five connectors [1].

[1] 5. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2] and three wire saddles
[3], and remove the tray1 lift-up motor assy [4].

[4] [3] [2]

G-71
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray1 lift-up motor [2].
[1] [2]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.19 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)

1. Remove the tray1 and tray 2.
G.3.2.31 Tray 1/2
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the
[3] [2] [3] edge cover [2].
3. Remove two screws [3], take out the tray2 lift-up motor assy [4] and
turn it around.

[4] [1]

4. Disconnect five connectors [1].

[1] 5. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2] and three wire saddles
[3], and remove the tray2 lift-up motor assy [4].

[4] [3] [2]

6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray 2 lift-up motor [2].
[1] [2]

7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.20 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)

1. Remove the LCC drive unit.
G.3.3.12 LCC drive unit

G-72
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2], and remove the tray
[1] 3 lift-up motor [3].

[2] [3]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.21 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24)

1. Remove the LCC drive unit.
G.3.3.12 LCC drive unit
2. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the tray
[1] 4 lift-up motor [3].

[2] [3]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.22 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)

1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. See the steps 1 to 9 in
“G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1).”
2. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from two
[2] [1] wire saddles [1].

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray1 vertical transport
[2] [1] motor assy [2].

[1]

G-73
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray1 vertical transport
motor [2].

[1] [2]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.23 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)

1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. See the steps 1 to 9 in
“G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1).”
2. Remove the LCC drive unit.
G.3.3.12 LCC drive unit
3. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2].
[1] [3] [2] 4. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [3], and remove the tray
2 vertical transport motor assy [4].

[4] [1]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray2 vertical transport
[1] motor [2].

[2]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.24 Take-up motor (M22)

1. Slide out tray 1/2.
2. Remove the reinforcing plate.
See the steps 1 to 11 in
“G.3.4.15 High voltage unit/1 (HV1).”
3. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit.
See the steps 1 to 6 in
“F.7.10.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover.”
4. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit.
See the steps 1 to 6 in
“F.7.9.3 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller.”
5. Remove four screws [1].
[1]

[1]

G-74
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2]

[1]
7. Remove the E-ring [1], the collar [2], the belt [3] and the gear [4].
[1] [4]

[3] [2]
8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the take-up motor [2].
[2]

[1]
9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.25 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)

1. Remove the drum unit.
F.7.3.1 Replacing the drum unit
2. Remove the developing unit.
F.7.4.1 Replacing the developing unit
3. Remove the sensor unit.
See the steps 1 to 5 in
“G.3.7.1 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F).”
4. Slide out the developing unit base plate [1].

[1]

G-75
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Remove the screw [1] of the charge cleaning motor/K assy.

[1]

6. Remove the harnesses from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover
[2].
7. Disconnect two connectors [3], and remove the charge cleaning
motor/K assy.
[3]
[3]

[1]
[2]

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].

[1]
[1]

[2]

9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the charge cleaning motor/K
[2] [2].

[1]

[1]

10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.26 Cleaner motor (M38)

1. Remove the fan motor assy /1.
See the steps 1 to 8 in
“G.3.5.14 Switchback motor (M33).”
2. Remove the paper exit rear cover.
G.3.2.10 Paper exit rear cover

G-76
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two
[1] wire saddles [2].

[2]

4. Remove three screws [1], and remove the fan motor assy /3 [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

5. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [1] 6. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [2].

[2]

7. Remove four screws [1], and take out the fan motor assy/4 [2] as
[2] clearing the harness.

[1] [1]

8. Remove five connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/2 [1].

[1]

[2]

G-77
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

9. Remove three screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

10. Remove two screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
[2] [1]

[1]
A0EDF2C000DA

11. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [1].

[1]

12. Remove five screws [1] and four tapping screws [2], and remove the
[1] [1] [3] [1] high voltage unit/2 [3].

[1] [2] [1]

13. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[1] [2] [1]

[1] [1]

G-78
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

14. Close the PWB box/2 once and remove two screws [1] of the
[1] cleaner motor.

15. Open the PWB box/2 again, remove two screws [1] and the
[3] connector [2], and take out the cleaner motor [3].

[1] [2]

16. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.27 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)

1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy.
See the steps 1 to 17 in
“G.3.5.26 Cleaner motor (M38).”
2. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the 1st
[2] [3] image transfer pressure retraction motor [3].

[1]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.28 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)

1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy.
See the steps 1to 17 in
“G.3.5.26 Cleaner motor (M38).”
2. Clear the harness.
[3] 3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from two
wire saddles [1].
4. Remove three screws [3], and remove the toner cartridge motor C/K
Assy [4].

[2] [1] [4]

G-79
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the toner cartridge motor C/K
[1] [2].

[2]
6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.5.29 Toner supply motor/K (M12)

1. Remove the upper front door.
G.3.2.1 Upper front door
2. Remove the upper left cover.
G.3.2.7 Upper left cover
3. Remove the toner cartridges.
F.7.5.1 Replacing the toner cartridge
4. Remove the right front cover.
G.3.2.5 Right front cover
5. Remove two screws [1],and remove the cover/1 [2].
[2]

[1]
A0EDF2C000DA

6. Remove two screws [1],and remove the cover/2 [2].

[2]

[1]
A0EDF2C000DA

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit tray front cover [2].
[2]

[1]

G-80
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

8. Remove the screw [1], and remove the hinge convex part [2].
[1]

[2]

9. Remove seven screws [1], and pull the front cover [2] forward
[2] slowly.
NOTE
• Use care not to mistake in the kind of the screws.

10. Remove for screws [1] then remove the harness from the wire
saddle [2].

[1]

[1]

[1] [2]

11. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

12. Remove two screws [1], dicconnect the connector [2],and remove
[1] the toner supply motor[3].
13. Remove two screws [1], disconnect the connector [2], and remove
the toner supply motor [3].

G-81
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

[1] [2]

[3] [1]

14. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Clutches)

3.6.1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
1. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit.
See the steps 1 to 6 in
“F.7.9.1 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller.”
2. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1], the harness holder
[3] [1] [2], and unplug the connector [3].

[2]

3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch [2].
[2] NOTE
• When mounting the tray 1 paper feed clutch, set the convex
part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 1 paper
feed clutch.

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.6.2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2)

1. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit.
See the steps 1 to 6 in
“F.7.9.3 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller.”
2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the
[2] connector [2].

[1]

G-82
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 2 paper feed clutch [2].
[2] NOTE
• When mounting the tray 2 paper feed clutch, set the convex
part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 2 paper
feed clutch.

[1]

4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.6.3 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)

1. Remove the LCC drive unit.
G.3.3.12 LCC drive unit
2. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the horizontal transport clutch
[1] [2].
NOTE
• When mounting the horizontal transport clutch, set the
convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the
horizontal transport clutch.

[2]

3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.6.4 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6)

1. Slide out the tray 3.
2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 3 [2] to the end.
[1]

[2] [1]

3. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1], and disconnect the
[6] [4] [3] [1] connector [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the tray 3 paper feed clutch [4].
5. Remove the C-clip [5], and remove the tray 3 transport clutch [6].
NOTE
• When mounting the tray 3 paper feed clutch/tray 3
transport clutch, set the convex part of the stopper into the
concave part of the clutch.

[5] [1] [2]

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.6.5 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7)

1. Slide out the tray 4.

G-83
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 4 [2] to the end.

[1]

[2] [1]

3. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1], and disconnect the
[4] [1] connector [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the tray 4 paper feed clutch [4].
NOTE
• When mounting the tray 4 paper feed clutch, set the convex
part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 4 paper
feed clutch.

[2] [3]

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (Others)

3.7.1 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
1. Open the upper right door.
2. Remove the image transfer entrance guide.
See the steps 1 to 4 in
“F.7.6.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit.”
3. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the connector cover [2].
[1]

[2]
4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

G-84
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

5. Remove six screws [1], and remove the sensor unit [2].

[1] [2] [1]

6. Remove seven screws [1] and the spring [2], and remove the
[2] [3] sensor cover [3].

[1]

7. Remove two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2], then
[1] [2] remove the IDC registration sensor/F [3].

[3]
8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

3.7.2 Scanner drive cables

(1) Removal procedure
1. Remove the scanner chassis.
G.3.3.13 Scanner chassis
2. Remove the exposure unit.
G.3.3.7 Exposure unit
3. Remove the scanner motor.
G.3.5.4 Scanner motor (M201)
4. Remove the original glass moving unit.
G.3.3.5 Original glass moving unit
5. Remove the USB board assy.
6. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective
[1] [2] [1] shield [2].

[1]

G-85
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2]

[1]

8. Remove the hook side spring [1] of the scanner drive cables.
[1]

9. Remove the bead side [1] of the scanner drive cables from the
adjustment anchor.

[1]

[1]

10. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing [2].

[2]

[1]

11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner drive gear [2].
[2] [1] 12. Remove the bearing [3].

[3]

G-86
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

13. Remove the shaft [1] and pulleys [2].

[2] [1]

[2] 14. Remove the screw [1] one each and take out the two pulleys [2]
from the shaft.
15. Remove the scanner drive cables [3] from each pulley [2].

[1] [2]
[3]

[3]
[1]

(2) Reinstall procedure

(a) Overall figure

(b) Winding of the scanner drive cables

NOTE
• The scanner drive cable differs in type between the front (silver) and the rear (black), which are colored differently.
Front 1. Set the round bead [1] of the scanner drive cable (silver) to the
pulley [2] at the position as shown in the illustration.
[2] [1]
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the
pulley.
B

G-87
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

Front 2. Twist the A side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting
from the front groove in anticlockwise direction five times.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

[1]

Front 3. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting
from the rear groove in clockwise direction five times.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

[1]

Front 4. Apply the tape to fix the scanner drive cable to the pulley [1].

[1]

Rear 5. Set the round bead [1] of the scanner drive cable (black) to the
pulley [2] at the position as shown in the illustration.
[2] [1] NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the
pulley.
B

G-88
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

Rear 6. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting
from the rear groove in anticlockwise direction five times.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

[1]

Rear 7. Twist the A side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting
from the front groove in clockwise direction five times.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

[1]

Rear 8. Apply the tape to fix the scanner drive cable to the pulley [1].

[1]

Rear 9. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the shaft [2], and fix them with
one screw each [3].
NOTE
• Set the pulley at the direction as shown in the
illustration.
• Fix the pulley at the position as shown in the illustration.
• Apply the screw lock on the screw.

[2] [1] [2] [1]

[3] [3]

G-89
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

Rear 10. Install the C-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

[2]

[1]

Rear 11. Install the bearing [3].

12. Install the gear [2] with the screw [1].
[2] [1] NOTE
• Apply the screw lock on the screw.

[3]

Front 13. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the
pulley B [2], and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor
[1] [3].
NOTE
• Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside
[2]
groove of the pulley B.

[3]

Rear 14. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the
pulley D [2], and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor
[1] [3].

[2]

[3]

Rear 15. Place the hook side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley C
[2].

[2]

[1]

G-90
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

Rear 16. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley D [2] via the pulley C
[1].
NOTE
• Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside
[1]
groove of the pulley D [2].

[2]

Rear 17. Put the scanner drive cable into the scanner frame hole [2] via the
[1] pulley D [1].

[2]

Rear 18. Hook the end of the spring [1] to the wire and the other end to the
hook [2] on the scanner left frame.

[2]

[1]

Front 19. Place the hook side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley A
[2].

[2]

[1]

Front 20. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley B [2] via the pulley A
[1].
NOTE
[2] • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside
groove of the pulley B [2].

[1]

G-91
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

Front 21. Put the scanner drive cable into the scanner frame hole [2] via the
pulley B [1].

[1]

[2]

Front 22. Remove the end of the spring [1] from the hook. Hook the end of
the spring to the wire coming from the front.

[1]

23. Remove the tape that fixes the front/rear pulleys.

24. Adjust the focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit.
I.14.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit
25. Adjust the position of the scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage.
I.14.1.3 Scanner position adjustment
26. Mount the original glass moving unit, and adjust the height of the original glass moving unit.
I.14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit
27. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Feed Direction Adjustment]
I.10.3.6.(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
28. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj]
I.10.16.7 Read Pos Adj

3.7.3 Tray 3/4 lift wire

NOTE
• The tray 3 and 4 are of the same form and mechanism. This procedure shows the steps taken for the tray 3.
1. Remove the tray from the main body.
G.3.2.32 Tray 3/4
2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the tray 3 front cover [2].

[1] [1]

[2] [1]

G-92
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the wire cover /Fr [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear cover [2], and take out the gear
Assy [3].

[3] [2]

[1]

5. Remove the gear [1] and the bearing [2].

[2]

[1]

G-93
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

6. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-
marked direction to remove the wire /2 (white) [4] from the shaft [3].

[3] [1][2][4]

7. Remove the E-ring [1].

8. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3], and then
[4] [3] [2] remove the wire /2 (white) [4] and the wire /1 (black) [5].

[5] [1]

9. Remove the E-ring [1].

[5]
10. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3], and then
remove the wire /2 (white) [4].
11. Pull out and remove the wire /2 (white) toward the rear side of the
lift plate [5].

[1] [3]

[4] [2]

G-94
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

[5] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-
marked direction to remove the wire /1 (black) [4] from the shaft [3].
13. Pull out and remove the wire /1 (black) toward the rear side of the
lift plate [5].

[4]

[3] [1] [2]

14. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-
marked direction to remove the wire /3 (black) [4] from the shaft [3].
[4]

[2] [1] [3]

15. Remove the E-ring [1].

16. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3], and then
[3] [1] remove the wire /3 (black) [4] and the wire /4 (white) [5].
17. Pull out and remove the wire /3 (black) toward the rear side of the
lift plate [6].

[5] [4] [2]

[6]

G-95
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. bizhub 502/552/602/652

18. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-
[2] [4] marked direction to remove the wire /4 (white) [4] from the shaft [3].

[1] [3]

[5] 19. Remove the E-ring [1].

20. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3], and then
remove the wire /4 (white) [4].
21. Pull out and remove the wire /4 (white) toward the rear side of the
lift plate [5].

[3] [4]

[1] [2]

22. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

NOTE
• The same front/rear wires are used for both white and black.

G-96
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Option
4.1 Disassembly/reassembly parts list
4.1.1 DF-618/SP-501
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Feed cover G.4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)
Front cover G.4.2.2 Front cover (DF-618)
Rear cover G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
Document feed tray front cover G.4.2.4 Document feed tray front cover (DF-618)
Unit Reverse automatic document feeder G.4.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-618)
Board and etc. DF control board (DFCB) G.4.2.6 DF control board (DFCB) (DF-618)
Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) G.4.2.7 Document width detection variable resistor
(VR1) (DF-618)
Others Switch back solenoid (SD1) G.4.2.8 Switch back solenoid (SD1) (DF-618)
Exit switch back solenoid (SD2) G.4.2.9 Exit switch back solenoid (SD2) (DF-618)
Reading motor (M1) G.4.2.10 Reading motor (M1) (DF-618)
Take-up motor (M2) G.4.2.11 Take-up motor (M2) (DF-618)
Exit motor (M3) G.4.2.13 Exit motor (M3) (DF-618)
Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) G.4.2.14 Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4)
(DF-618)
Registration motor (M7) G.4.2.12 Registration motor (M7) (DF-618)
Cooling fan (FM1) G.4.2.15 Cooling fan (FM1) (DF-618)
Stamp unit G.4.2.16 Replacing the stamp unit (SP-501)
Stamp G.4.2.17 Replacing the stamp (SP-501)

4.1.2 LU-204
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Large capacity unit G.4.3.1 Large capacity unit (LU-204)
Exterior parts Right cover G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
Front cover G.4.3.3 Front cover (LU-204)
Rear cover G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)
Feed cover G.4.3.5 Feed cover (LU-204)
Board and etc. LU drive board G.4.3.6 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-204)
Others Lift-up motor (M1) G.4.3.7 Lift-up motor (M1) (LU-204)
Paper feed motor (M2) G.4.3.8 Paper feed motor (M2) (LU-204)
Transport motor (M3) G.4.3.9 Transport motor (M3) (LU-204)
Dehumidification heater (DH) G.4.3.10 Dehumidification heater (DH) (LU-204)
Up/down section Lift wire G.4.3.11 Lift wire (LU-204)

4.1.3 LU-301
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Large capacity unit G.4.4.1 Large capacity unit (LU-301)
Exterior parts Upper door G.4.4.2 Upper door (LU-301)
Right cover G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
Front cover G.4.4.4 Front cover (LU-301)
Rear cover G.4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)
Feed cover G.4.4.6 Feed cover (LU-301)
Up/down section Lift wire G.4.4.7 Lift wire (LU-301)
Board and etc. LU drive board (LUDB) G.4.4.8 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-301)
Others Lift-up motor (M1) G.4.4.9 Lift-up motor (M1) (LU-301)
Dehumidification heater (DH) G.4.4.10 Dehumidification heater (DH) (LU-301)

4.1.4 JS-504
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Separator G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
Exterior parts Front cover G.4.5.2 Front cover (JS-504)
Rear left cover G.4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)
Rear right cover G.4.5.4 Rear right cover (JS-504)
Upper tray G.4.5.5 Upper tray (JS-504)

G-97
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

Section Part name Ref. page

Paper guide plate G.4.5.6 Paper guide plate (JS-504)
Board JS control board (JSCB) G.4.5.7 JS control board (JSCB) (JS-504)
Motors Transport motor (M1) G.4.5.8 Transport motor (M1) (JS-504)
Route change motor (M3) G.4.5.9 Route change motor (M3) (JS-504)
Shift motor (M2) G.4.5.10 Shift motor (M2) (JS-504)

4.1.5 ZU-606
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Rear cover G.4.6.1 Rear cover (ZU-606)
Upper cover G.4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606)
Right cover G.4.6.3 Right cover (ZU-606)
Front cover G.4.6.4 Front cover (ZU-606)
Units Z folding unit G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
Punch unit G.4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)
Z folding/conveyance unit G.4.6.7 Z folding/conveyance unit (ZU-606)
Electrical parts Punch motor (M4) G.4.6.8 Punch motor (M4) (ZU-606)
Main motor (M6) G.4.6.9 Main motor (M6) (ZU-606)
Registration motor (M1) G.4.6.10 Registration motor (M1) (ZU-606)
Punch shift motor (M5) G.4.6.11 Punch shift motor (M5) (ZU-606)
Main motor cooling fan (FM1) G.4.6.12 Main motor cooling fan (FM1) (ZU-606)
ZU control board (ZUCB) G.4.6.13 ZU control board (ZUCB) (ZU-606)
Paper size detect board (PSDTB) G.4.6.14 Paper size detect board (PSDTB) (ZU-606)

4.1.6 FS-526
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Upper cover /1 G.4.7.1 Upper cover /1, Upper cover /2, Upper cover /3
Upper cover /2 (FS-526)
Upper cover /3
Rear cover G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
Rear left cover G.4.7.3 Rear left cover (FS-526)
Front left cover G.4.7.4 Front left cover (FS-526)
Right cover G.4.7.5 Right cover (FS-526)
Main tray (Paper exit lower tray) G.4.7.6 Main tray (Paper exit lower tray) (FS-526)
Sub tray (Paper exit upper tray) G.4.7.7 Sub tray (Paper exit upper tray) (FS-526)
Units Finisher G.4.7.8 Finisher (FS-526)
Horizontal transport unit G.4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)
Board and etc. FS control board (FSCB) G.4.7.10 FS control board (FS-526)
Transport control board (TRCB) G.4.7.11 Transport control board (TRCB) (FS-526)
Electrical parts Transport motor/1 (M1) G.4.7.12 Transport motor/1 (M1) (FS-526)
Transport motor/2 (M2) G.4.7.13 Transport motor/2 (M2) (FS-526)
Bypass transport motor (M3) G.4.7.14 Bypass transport motor (M3) (FS-526)
Exit roller motor (M4) G.4.7.15 Exit roller motor (M4) (FS-526)
Main tray lift motor (M5) G.4.7.16 Main tray lift motor (M5) (FS-526)
Paper output roller motor (M6) G.4.7.17 Paper output roller motor (M6) (FS-526)
Stacker entrance motor (M10) G.4.7.18 Stacker entrance motor (M10) (FS-526)
2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) G.4.7.19 2 staples stapler movement motor (M13)
(FS-526)
Trail edge paddle motor (M15) G.4.7.20 Trail edge paddle motor (M15) (FS-526)
Paddle motor (M16) G.4.7.21 Paddle motor (M16) (FS-526)
Stacker plate motor (M17) G.4.7.22 Stacker plate motor (M17) (FS-526)
Rewind paddle motor (M18) G.4.7.23 Rewind paddle motor (M18) (FS-526)
Route change gate solenoid (SD1) G.4.7.25 Route change gate solenoid (SD1) (FS-526)
Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) G.4.7.26 Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) (FS-526)
Switch back solenoid (SD4) G.4.7.27 Switch back solenoid (SD4) (FS-526)
Transport motor (M201) G.4.7.28 Transport motor (M201) (FS-526)
Fan motor/1 (FM1) G.4.7.29 Fan motor/1 (FM1) (FS-526)
Fan motor/2 (FM2) G.4.7.30 Fan motor/2 (FM2) (FS-526)
Others Sub tray paper exit route G.4.7.24 Sub tray paper exit route (FS-526)

G-98
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

Section Part name Ref. page

Lift wire G.4.7.31 Lift wire (FS-526)

4.1.7 PK-516
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Punch kit G.4.8.1 Punch kit (PK-516)
Others Punch oscillating motor (M302) G.4.8.2 Punch oscillating motor (M302) (PK-516)
Punch drive motor (M301) G.4.8.3 Punch drive motor (M301) (PK-516)

4.1.8 SD-508
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Front cover G.4.9.1 Front cover (SD-508)
Right cover G.4.9.2 Right cover (SD-508)
Staple unit cover G.4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)
Units Saddle unit G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
Paper exit tray G.4.9.5 Paper exit tray (SD-508)
Others SD drive board (SDDB) G.4.9.6 SD drive board (SDDB) (SD-508)
Center staple alignment motor /F (M20) G.4.9.7 Center staple alignment motor /F (M20)
(SD-508)
Center staple alignment motor /R (M21) G.4.9.8 Center staple alignment motor /R (M21)
(SD-508)
Leading edge stopper motor (M22) G.4.9.9 Leading edge stopper motor (M22) (SD-508)
Center staple motor (M23) G.4.9.10 Center staple motor (M23) (SD-508)
Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26) G.4.9.11 Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26)
(SD-508)
Center staple paddle/T (M29) G.4.9.12 Center staple paddle/T (M29) (SD-508)
Transport motor (M33) G.4.9.13 Transport motor (M33) (SD-508)
Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5) G.4.9.14 Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5) (SD-508)
Exit grip solenoid (SD6) G.4.9.15 Exit grip solenoid (SD6) (SD-508)

4.1.9 JS-602
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Separator G.4.10.1 Separator (JS-602)
Exterior parts Front cover G.4.10.2 Front cover (JS-602)
Rear cover G.4.10.3 Rear cover (JS-602)
Other 3rd entrance switching solenoid (SD404) G.4.10.4 3rd entrance switching solenoid (SD404)
(JS-602)

4.1.10 PI-505
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Upper cover G.4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)
Rear cover G.4.11.2 Rear cover (PI-505)
Operation panel cover assy G.4.11.3 Operation panel cover assy (PI-505)
Unit Post inserter G.4.11.4 Post inserter (PI-505)
Board and etc. PI drive board (PIDB) G.4.11.5 PI drive board (PIDB) (PI-505)
PI control board (PIOB) G.4.11.6 PI control board (PIOB) (PI-505)

4.1.11 FS-527
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Upper cover G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
Rear cover G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)
Front door G.4.12.3 Front door (FS-527)
Front upper cover G.4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)
Front lower cover G.4.12.5 Front lower cover (FS-527)
Units Finisher G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
Horizontal transport unit G.4.12.7 Horizontal transport unit (FS-527)
Stapler unit G.4.12.8 Stapler unit (FS-527)
Others FS control board (FSCB) G.4.12.9 FS control board (FSCB) (FS-527)
Paper passage motor/1 (M1) G.4.12.10 Paper passage motor/1 (M1) (FS-527)

G-99
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

Section Part name Ref. page

Duplex path switching motor (M2) G.4.12.11 Duplex path switching motor (M2) (FS-527)
Paper passage motor/2 (M3) G.4.12.13 Paper passage motor/2 (M3) (FS-527)
Conveyance motor (M4) G.4.12.14 Conveyance motor (M4) (FS-527)
Exit motor (M5) G.4.12.12 Exit motor (M5) (FS-527)
Upper lower path switching motor (M6) G.4.12.15 Upper lower path switching motor (M6)
(FS-527)
Tray1 path switching motor (M8) G.4.12.16 Tray1 path switching motor (M8) (FS-527)
Exit roller retraction motor (M9) G.4.12.17 Exit roller retraction motor (M9) (FS-527)
Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10) G.4.12.18 Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10)
(FS-527)
Stapler movement motor (M11) G.4.12.19 Stapler movement motor (M11) (FS-527)
Accommodation paddle motor (M12) G.4.12.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12)
(FS-527)
Elevate motor (M15) G.4.12.21 Elevate motor (M15) (FS-527)
Tray2 shift motor (M16) G.4.12.22 Tray2 shift motor (M16) (FS-527)
Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1) G.4.12.23 Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1)
(FS-527)

4.1.12 PK-517
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Punch kit G.4.13.1 Punch kit (PK-517)

4.1.13 SD-509
Section Part name Ref. page
Exterior parts Front cover G.4.14.1 Front cover (SD-509)
Right cover G.4.14.2 Right cover (SD-509)
Staple unit cover G.4.14.3 Staple unit cover (SD-509)
Units Saddle unit G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
Paper exit tray G.4.14.5 Paper exit tray (SD-509)
Staple unit G.4.14.6 Staple unit (SD-509)
Board and etc. SD drive board (SDDB) G.4.14.7 SD drive board (SDDB) (SD-509)
Leading edge stopper motor (M20) G.4.14.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20) (SD-509)
Upper paddle motor (M21) G.4.14.9 Upper paddle motor (M21) (SD-509)
Lower paddle motor (M22) G.4.14.10 Lower paddle motor (M22) (SD-509)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) G.4.14.11 Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
(SD-509)
Center staple alignment motor/F (M24) G.4.14.12 Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
(SD-509)
Center fold roller motor (M25) G.4.14.13 Center fold roller motor (M25) (SD-509)
Center fold plate motor (M26) G.4.14.14 Center fold plate motor (M26) (SD-509)
Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3) G.4.14.15 Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3) (SD-509)

4.1.14 JS-603
Section Part name Ref. page
Unit Separator G.4.15.1 Separator (JS-603)
Other Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) G.4.15.2 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
(JS-603)

G-100
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.2 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (DF-618/SP-501)

4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)
[1]
1. Open the left cover [1].

2. Lift up the document feed tray [1].

[1]

3. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2].

4. Open the feed cover [3].

[2]

[3] [1]

NOTE
[1] [3] • In the reinstallation steps, when tightening two screws [1],
press the feed cover [3] in the direction of the arrow so as
not to leave a clearance between the top of the protrusion
from the surface of the feed cover and the bottom of the
indentation [2].
[1]

[2]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-101
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.2.2 Front cover (DF-618)

1. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.
[2] 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].

[1]

4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)

1. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.
NOTE
• If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted
up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the
stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower
side so that the reverse automatic document feeder can be
opened completely.

2. Remove two screws [1].

[1] [1]

3. Open the left cover.

[2] [1] [3] 4. Lift up the document feed tray.
5. Remove the screw [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
NOTE
• Be sure to press down part [3] in the picture to prevent any
damage when removing the rear cover.

(1) Reinstallation procedure

1. Open the left cover.
[1] [2] 2. Lift up the document feed tray.
3. Press down part [1] in the picture until it slides under the feed
cover [2].
NOTE
• Be careful not to damage the rear cover.

4. Install the rear cover tightening three screws.

G-102
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.2.4 Document feed tray front cover (DF-618)

1. Lift up the document feed tray.
[1] 2. Remove three screws [1].

3. Disconnect two connectors [1] and remove the document feed tray
front cover [2].

[1]

[2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.2.5 Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-618)

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner rear cover [2] of
[2] the main body.

[1]

2. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1].

[2] 3. Disconnect three connectors [2].

[1]

G-103
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.

[1]
NOTE
• If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted
up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the
stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower
side so that the reverse automatic document feeder can be
opened completely.

5. Remove two screws [1].

6. Remove the reverse automatic document feeder [1].

[1]

NOTE
• When carrying the reverse automatic document feeder, be
sure to hold onto the specified positions. The feeder main

OK
body can be distorted if held at inappropriate positions.

NG
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.2.6 DF control board (DFCB) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
2. Disconnect all the fifteen connectors from the DF control board.

G-104
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove the screw [1].

[2] 4. Remove four screws [2] and remove the DF control board [3].
NOTE
• Be sure to perform the following operation when the DF
control board is replaced.

5. Replace the EEPROM.

6. Upgrade the firmware.
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE

[1] [3] [2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.2.7 Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) (DF-618)

(1) Remove procedure
1. Open the feed cover.
G.4.2.1 Feed cover (DF-618)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the document width
detection variable resistor cover [2].

[2]
[1]

3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the document width detection
[2] variable resistor [2].

[1]

(2) Reinstallation procedure

1. Open the side edge stop [1] of the original feed tray.
[1]

G-105
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Reinstall the gear [1].

NOTE
[1] • Note the mounting position of the gear and the document
width detection variable resistor.

3. Use two screws [1] to install the document width detection variable
resistor [2].
[2]
NOTE
• Install the gear and rack gear by aligning the arrows.

4. Connect the connector.

[1]
5. Install the document width detection variable resistor cover and
turn on the main power switch.

NOTE
• Be sure to perform the following operation when the document width detection variable resistor is replaced.
1. Perform document width detection adjustment.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again and check whether size detection operates normally.

4.2.8 Switch back solenoid (SD1) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3] 3. Remove the harness from two edge covers [2] and the wire saddle
[3].

[1] [2]

4. Remove the screw [1] and the spring [2], and remove the switch
[3] [2] [1] back solenoid [3].

G-106
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[2] [3] 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When installing the screw [1], align the dowel [2] with the
scale [3] with which the dowel was aligned before the
screw was removed and then tighten the screw.

[1]

4.2.9 Exit switch back solenoid (SD2) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
2. Remove the take-up motor.
G.4.2.11 Take-up motor (M2) (DF-618)
3. Remove the registration motor.
G.4.2.12 Registration motor (M7) (DF-618)
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
5. Remove the screw [3], and remove the ground terminal.
6. Disconnect two connectors [4] of the sensor.
7. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [5].
8. Remove the E-ring [6] and bearing [7].
[8] [4] 9. Remove four screws [8], and remove the plate [9].

[7] [2] [1] [3]

[4] [8]
[6] [9] [5]

10. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [4] [5]
11. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [2].
12. Remove the screw [3] and spring [4], and remove the exit switch
back solenoid [5].

[2] [1]

[3] [2] 13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
• When installing the screw [1], align the dowel [2] with the
scale [3] with which the dowel was aligned before the
screw was removed and then tighten the screw.

[1]

4.2.10 Reading motor (M1) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)

G-107
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove the take-up motor.

G.4.2.11 Take-up motor (M2) (DF-618)
3. Remove the registration motor.
G.4.2.12 Registration motor (M7) (DF-618)
4. Disconnect the connector [1].
[2] 5. Remove four screws [2], and remove the reading motor assy [3].

[3]

[2] [1]

4.2.11 Take-up motor (M2) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
[1] [3] 3. Disconnect the connector [3].

[2]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the take-up motor [2].
[1]

[2]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.2.12 Registration motor (M7) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[2] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the registration motor [3].

[3] [1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-108
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.2.13 Exit motor (M3) (DF-618)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.2.3 Rear cover (DF-618)
2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and two edge covers
[1] [2].

[2]

3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [2] [4] 4. Remove four screws [2] and the spring [3], and remove the exit
motor assy [4].

[2] [1] [2]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit motor [2].
[2]

[1]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.2.14 Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) (DF-618)

1. Remove the front cover.
G.4.2.2 Front cover (DF-618)
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

G-109
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] [3] 4. Remove two screws [2], and reading roller pressure/retraction motor
assy [3].

[2]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the reading roller pressure/
[1] [2] retraction motor [2].

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.2.15 Cooling fan (FM1) (DF-618)

1. Remove the DF control board.
G.4.2.6 DF control board (DFCB) (DF-618)
2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].
[2] 3. Remove the screw [2], and remove the cooling fan mounting plate
[3].

[1] [3]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cooling fan [2].
[2]

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-110
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.2.16 Replacing the stamp unit (SP-501)

1. Open the left cover.
2. Lift up the document feed tray.
3. Remove the screw [1] and the mounting plate [2].
NOTE
• Be sure to hold the document feed tray to prevent the tray
from falling down while removing the mounting plate.
[2]

[1]

[1] 4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the plate cover [3] while
[3] [2] holding up the exit tray [2].
NOTE
• Take care not to raise the exit tray too much. The stopper
may come off.

[1]

NOTE
• When lowering the exit tray, check that the stopper [1] fits
under the plate spring.

[1]

[3] 5. Remove the cord clamp [1] and disconnect the connector [2].
6. Remove the screw [3] and remove the stamp unit [4].

[4]
[1]

[2]

G-111
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.2.17 Replacing the stamp (SP-501)

1. Lift up the document feed tray [1].
[1]

2. Remove the used stamp [1] and install the new stamp of
replacement [2].
NOTE
• Align the round pin of the stamp with the slit in the stamp
unit side.

[2] [1]

4.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (LU-204)

4.3.1 Large capacity unit (LU-204)
1. Remove the large capacity unit [1] from the main body.
2. Remove two screws [2], and remove the mounting bracket [3].

[1]

[3]
[2]
3. Remove two screws [1] to remove the lower right cover/2 [2] from
the main body.

[1]

[2]

G-112
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Disconnect the connector [1], the screw on the earth wire [2], and
the cord clamp [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness, be sure not to let the
harness be inserted in the wire saddle [4].

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1] 5. Disconnect each of the two connectors [1] and remove the harness
from the wire saddle [2].

[2]

6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [2].

[1]

[2]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)

1. Open the upper door.
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the right cover [2].
[2]

[1]
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.3 Front cover (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the harness from the connector [1] and the wire saddle [2].
[2]

[1]

G-113
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Loosen five screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].

[1]

[1]

[2]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2].
[1]

[2]
3. Loosen five screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
[1]

[1] [2]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.5 Feed cover (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.3.3 Front cover (LU-204)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)

G-114
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the feed cover [2].
[2]

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.6 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)
3. Disconnect six connectors [1] and remove four screws [2], and
[1] [3] remove the LU drive board [3].

[2] [1] [2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.7 Lift-up motor (M1) (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove two screws [2], and
[1] remove the lift-up motor [3].

[3] [2]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.8 Paper feed motor (M2) (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)
3. Remove the transport motor.
G.4.3.9 Transport motor (M3) (LU-204)

G-115
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Disconnect four connectors [1].

[2] [1] [2]
5. Remove the harness from nine wire saddles [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and remove the ground earth.

[1] [3] [1]

[2]
7. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[1]

[2] [1]
8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper feed motor [2].
[1]

[2]
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.9 Transport motor (M3) (LU-204)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)
3. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1] and the edge cover
[3] [1] [2] [4] [2].
4. Disconnect the connector [3].
5. Remove three screws [4], and remove the transport motor assy [5].

[5]

G-116
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the transport motor [2].
[1] [2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.10 Dehumidification heater (DH) (LU-204)

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the left cover [2].
[1]

[2]
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [2] 3. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [2].

4. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1].

[2] [1] 5. Remove four screws [2], and remove the dehumidification heater
[3].

[3] [2]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.3.11 Lift wire (LU-204)

(1) Removal
1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.3.2 Right cover (LU-204)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.3.3 Front cover (LU-204)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.3.4 Rear cover (LU-204)
4. Remove the transport motor.
G.4.3.9 Transport motor (M3) (LU-204)

G-117
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Disconnect four connectors [1].

[2] [1] [2]
6. Remove the harness from nine wire saddles [2].
7. Remove the screw [3], and remove the ground earth.

[1] [3] [1]

[2]
8. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[1]

[2] [1]
9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the bracket [2].
[1] [3] 10. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [3].

[2]
11. Remove five screws [1], and remove the LU drive board assy [2].
[2] [1]

[1]
12. Remove the lift wire/L [2] from the rotation plate [1].

[1] [2]

G-118
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

13. Remove the auxiliary wire [2] from the spring [1] on the front side.

[1] [2]
14. Remove the E-ring [1] on the front side to remove the wire holding
[1] [2] jig [2].

15. Remove the E-ring [1] on the rear side to remove the driving pulley
[2] [1] [2].

16. Pull out three lift wires [1].

[1]

17. Remove two E-rings [1] and two wire pulleys [2] to remove the lift
[2] [1] [2] wire/S [3] and the lift wire/L [4].

[4] [3]

G-119
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

18. Remove the E-ring [1] on the front side to remove the driving
[2] pulley [2].

[1]
19. Pull out the auxiliary wire [1] and two lift wires [2].
[2]

[1]
20. Remove two E-rings [1] and two wire pulleys [2] to remove the lift
[2] [1] [2] wire/S [3] and the lift wire/L [4].

[3] [4]

(2) Reinstall
1. Insert the lift wire/L [2] to the left hole [1] on the rear face.
[2]

[1]
2. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley,
[3] [4] and secure it with the wire holding jig [3] and the E-ring [4].

[1]

[2]

G-120
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Insert the lift wire/S [2] to the right hole [1] on the rear face.
[2]

[1]
4. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley,
and set the lift wire/S [4] to the far side groove [3] and secure them
[3] with the wire holding jig [5] and the E-ring [6].
[2]

[1] [4] [5]

[6]

NOTE
• They are properly fixed if both edges of the wire [1] are at
the same position.

[1]

5. Take the edges of the lift wire/S [1] and the lift wire/L [2] and set
[1] [2] them to the holes on the shaft [3].

[3]

6. Take the edge of the lift wire/L [1] and set it to the hole [2] on the
[2] shaft.

[1]

G-121
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

7. Mount the driving pulley [1] and secure it with the E-ring [2].
[1] [2]

8. Insert the lift wire/L [2] to the right hole [1] on the front face.
[1] [2]

9. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley
[1] [3] and secure it with the wire holding jig [3] and the E-ring [4].

[2]

[4]

10. Insert the lift wire/S [2] to the left hole [1] on the front face.
[2]

[1]
11. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley,
[3] and set the lift wire/S [4] to the far side groove [3] and secure them
with the wire holding jig [5] and the E-ring [6].
[2]

[5] [1]
[4]

[6]

G-122
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

NOTE
• They are properly fixed if both edges of the wire [1] are
placed at the same position.

[1]
12. Take the edges of the lift wire/S [1] and the lift wire/L [2] to set
[2] [1] them to the holes on the shaft [3].

[3]
13. Take the edge of the auxiliary wire [1] and set it to the hole [2] on
the shaft.

[2] [1]
14. Mount the driving pulley [1] and secure it with the E-ring [2].
[1]

[2]

G-123
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

15. Wind the wire to the pulley [2] as rotating the lift up shaft [1] on the
Rear side rear face counterclockwise and moving the tray assy to the upper
end.
NOTE
• Wind the wire to the direction shown by the arrow.

[1] [2]

Front side [2]

16. When the wire is wound with the tray assy being at the up end,
[1] wind the auxiliary wire [2] to the wire pulley [1] clockwise once.

[2]
17. Set the auxiliary wire [1] on the front face to the hook of the slide
[2] spring [2].

[1]
18. Mount the wire holding jig [2] and secure it with the E-ring [1].
[1] [2]

G-124
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

NOTE
[1] • Check to make sure that the wire hook [1] is at the
position shown on the picture when the tray assy is at the
lower end.

19. Place a weight such as a package of paper, etc. [1] to move the
[1] tray assy down to the lower end.

20. Wrap the lift wire/L [2] on the driving pulley [1] on the rear face
clockwise six times.

[2] [1]

[1] 21. Turn the rotation plate [1] one and a half times clockwise from the
position where the plate holds the tension, to set the lift wire/L [2].

[2]
NOTE
• When the tray assy is at the lower limit, make sure that the
part [1] from which the wire is put over the rotation plate
is placed at the position shown by the arrow.
[1]

22. For the rest of the procedure for mounting, take the reverse steps from disassembling.

G-125
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.4 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (LU-301)

4.4.1 Large capacity unit (LU-301)
1. Remove the LCT from the main body to remove three screws [1].
Remove the lower right cover/4 [2] from the main body.

[1]

[2]
2. Remove two screws [1] to remove the lower right cover/2 [2] from
the main body.

[1]

[2]
3. Disconnect the connector [1], the screw on the earth wire [2], and
the cord clamp [3].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the harness, be sure not to let the
harness be inserted in the wire saddle [4].

[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1] 4. Disconnect each of the two connectors [1] and remove the harness
from the wire saddle [2].

[2]

5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [2].

[1]

[2]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.4.2 Upper door (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.4.4 Front cover (LU-301)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)
4. Remove the feed cover.
G.4.4.6 Feed cover (LU-301)
5. Open the upper door.

G-126
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the fixed sheet metal [2].
[2]

[1]
7. Remove two screws [1], the sheet metal [2] and remove the upper
[1] [3] door [3].

[2]
8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)

1. Open the upper door.
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the right cover [2].
[2]

[1]

4.4.4 Front cover (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the harness from the connector [1] and the wire saddle [2].

[2] [1]

G-127
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Loosen five screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2].
[1]

[2]

[1] 3. Loosen five screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].

[2]

[1]

4.4.6 Feed cover (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.4.4 Front cover (LU-301)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)

G-128
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the feed cover [2].
[1]

[2]

4.4.7 Lift wire (LU-301)

(1) Removal
1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.4.4 Front cover (LU-301)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)
[2] 4. Remove the harness from the connector [1] and two wire saddles
[2] on the rear side.

[1]
[4] [2] [1] 5. Remove nine screws [1] and five screws [2] to remove the motor
assy [3] and the drive board assy [4].

[3]

[2] [1]
6. Remove the lift wire/L [2] from the rotation plate [1].
[2]

[1]

G-129
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

7. Remove the auxiliary wire [2] from the spring [1] on the front side.
[2]

[1]
8. Remove the E-ring [1] on the front side to remove the wire holding
[2] jig [2].

[1]
9. Remove the E-ring [1] on the rear side to remove the driving pulley
[2].

[2] [1]
10. Pull out three lift wires [1].

[1]
11. Remove two E-rings [1] and two wire pulleys [2] to remove the lift
[2] [1] [2][3] wire/S [3] and the lift wire/L [4].

[4]

G-130
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

12. Remove the E-ring [1] on the front side to remove the driving
[2] pulley [2].

[1]
13. Pull out the auxiliary wire [1] and two lift wires [2].

[1] [2]
14. Remove two E-rings [1] and two wire pulleys [2] to remove the lift
[2] [1] [2] wire/S [3] and the lift wire/L [4].

[3] [4]

(2) Reinstall
1. Insert the lift wire/L [2] to the left hole [1] on the rear face.

[1] [2]
2. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley,
[1] and secure it with the E-ring [3].

[2]
[3]

G-131
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Insert the lift wire/S [2] to the right hole [1] on the rear face.

[2] [1]
4. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley,
[3] and set the lift wire/S [4] to the far side groove [3] and secure them
[2] with the E-ring [5].
[5]
[1] [4]

NOTE
• They are properly fixed if both edges of the wire [1] are at
the same position.

[1]
5. Take the edges of the lift wire/S [1] and the lift wire/L [2] and set
[1] [2] them to the holes on the shaft [3].

[3]

6. Take the edge of the lift wire/L [1] and set it to the hole on the shaft
[2].

[1] [2]

G-132
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

7. Mount the driving pulley [1] and secure it with the E-ring [2].

[1][2]
8. Insert the lift wire/L [2] to the right hole [1] on the front face.

[1] [2]
9. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley
[1] and secure it with the E-ring [3].

[2]
[3]

10. Insert the lift wire/S [2] to the left hole [1] on the front face.

[1] [2]
11. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley,
[3] and set the lift wire/S [4] to the far side groove [3] and secure them
[2] with the E-ring [5].

[5] [1]
[4]

G-133
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

NOTE
• They are properly fixed if both edges of the wire [1] are
placed at the same position.

[1]
12. Take the edges of the lift wire/S [1] and the lift wire/L [2] to set
[2] [1] them to the holes on the shaft [3].

[3]
13. Take the edge of the auxiliary wire [1] and set it to the hole on the
shaft [2].

[2] [1]
14. Mount the driving pulley [1] and secure it with the E-ring [2].

[2] [1]

G-134
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

15. Wind the wire to the pulley [2] as rotating the lift up shaft [1] on the
Rear side rear face counterclockwise and moving the tray assy to the upper
end.
NOTE
• Wind the wire to the direction shown by the arrow.

[1] [2]

Front side
[2]

16. When the wire is wound with the tray assy being at the up end,
[1] wind the auxiliary wire [2] to the wire pulley [1] clockwise once.

[2]
17. Set the auxiliary wire [1] on the front face to the hook of the slide
[2] spring [2].

[1]
18. Mount the wire holding jig [1] and secure it with the E-ring [2].
[1]

[2]

G-135
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

NOTE
• Check to make sure that the wire hook [1] is at the
position shown on the picture when the tray assy is at the
lower end.

[1]
19. Place a weight such as a package of paper, etc. [1] to move the
tray assy down to the lower end.

[1]
20. Wrap the lift wire/L [2] on the driving pulley [1] on the rear face
clockwise seven times.

[1] [2]

[1] 21. Turn the rotation plate [1] one and a half times clockwise from the
position where the plate holds the tension, to set the lift wire/L [2].

[2]
[1] NOTE
• The rib edge [1] of the rotation plate must be around the
dotted lines as shown in the picture when the tray assy is
at the lowest level.

22. For the rest of the procedure for mounting, take the reverse steps from disassembling.

4.4.8 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)

G-136
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Disconnect five connectors [1], remove four screws [2] and remove
[1] the LU drive board [3].

[2] [1] [3][2]

4.4.9 Lift-up motor (M1) (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.4.5 Rear cover (LU-301)
[2] 3. Disconnect the connector [1], remove three screws [2] and remove
the lift-up motor [3].

[3]

[1]

4.4.10 Dehumidification heater (DH) (LU-301)

1. Remove the right cover.
G.4.4.3 Right cover (LU-301)
2. Remove the harness from the connector [1] and three wire saddles
[1] [2].

[2]
3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the dehumidification heater [2].
[2]

[1]

G-137
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.5 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-504)

4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
1. Remove the relay connector [1].

[1]

2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mount cover [2].

[1] [2]

3. Remove the separator [1].

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.2 Front cover (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Open the misfeed clearing cover [1].
[1]

G-138
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].
[1]

[2]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove three screws [1] and remove the rear left cover [2].
[2]

[1]
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.4 Rear right cover (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the rear left cover.
G.4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)
3. Remove three screws [1] and remove the rear right cover [2].
[2]

[1]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.5 Upper tray (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the screw [1]. Push two protrusions [2] in the directions of
[1] [2] the arrows and remove the upper tray [3].

[3]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-139
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.5.6 Paper guide plate (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the upper tray.
G.4.5.5 Upper tray (JS-504)
3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the paper guide plate cover [2].
[1]

[2]
4. Remove eight paper guide plates [1].
[1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the paper guide plates [1], make sure that
the film side must face the roller.

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.7 JS control board (JSCB) (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the rear left cover.
G.4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)
3. Disconnect all seven connectors [1] from the JS control board.
[1]

[1]
4. Remove four screws [1] and remove the JS control board [2].
[2]

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.8 Transport motor (M1) (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the rear left cover.
G.4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)

G-140
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[4] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the wire
[3] saddle [2].
4. Remove two screws [3] and remove the transport motor assy [4].

[2] [1]

[2] 5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the transport motor [2].

[1]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.9 Route change motor (M3) (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the rear left cover.
G.4.5.3 Rear left cover (JS-504)
3. Remove the rear right cover.
G.4.5.4 Rear right cover (JS-504)
4. Remove the screw [1], disconnect two connectors [2] and the
[3] [2] harness from the wire saddle [3], and remove the route change
motor assy [3].

[1] [4]
5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the route change motor [2].

[2] [1]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.5.10 Shift motor (M2) (JS-504)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.5.1 Separator (JS-504)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.5.2 Front cover (JS-504)
3. Remove the route change motor.
G.4.5.9 Route change motor (M3) (JS-504)

G-141
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Disconnect two connectors [1], remove two screws [2] and remove
[2] the harness from the wire saddles [3]. Pull out the sensor assy [4] in
the direction of the arrow.
[1]

[3] [4]
5. Remove two C-clips [1] and lever [2], and remove the route change
[1] guide [3].

[1]

[3]
[2]

6. Remove six screws [1] and remove the transport guide/lower [2].

[1] [1]

[2]
[1]
7. Remove three screws [1] and two shoulder screws [2].
[2]

[1]

G-142
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

8. Remove two screws [1].

[1]

9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the belt fixed plate [2].
[2]

[1]
10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the ground terminal.
[2] 11. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [2] and pull out the shift
drive section assy [3] in the direction of the arrow.

[3] [1]
12. Remove two screws [1] and remove the shift motor assy [2].
[2]

[1]
13. Disconnect the connector [1], remove two screws [2] and remove
[4] [3] the harness from the wire saddle [3], and remove the shift motor [4].

[2] [1]

G-143
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.6 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (ZU-606)

4.6.1 Rear cover (ZU-606)
1. Remove the screw [1] and the clamp [2], and remove the power
[2] cord [3].

[3]
[1]
[2] 2. Loosen the screw [1], and remove two screws [2], and remove the
rear cover [3].

[3]

[1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.3 Right cover (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)

G-144
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the right cover [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.4 Front cover (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front cover [2].
[1]

[2]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)

(1) Removal from the finisher
1. Open the front door of finisher [1].
2. Remove two screws [2] and slide the finisher as shown in the
illustration.

[1]
NOTE
• To mount the finisher, align the hook portions of the
mounting bracket [1] and [2] with the upper and lower
holes [3] in the finisher.
Then, push the finisher toward the rear.

[3] [1]

[2]

G-145
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[1] 3. Disconnect three connectors [1] and remove the finisher.

[1]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

(2) Removal from the main body

1. Remove the finisher.
G.4.6.5.(1) Removal from the finisher
2. Remove the punch waste box [1].

[1]

[1] 3. Remove three screws [1] and two washers [2].

[2]

[2]
[1]
[1] 4. Disconnect three connectors [1].
[1] NOTE
• When reconnecting the connectors, make sure that the
harness of the Z folding unit is placed below the cable [2]
of the horizontal transport unit.

[1]

[2] [2]
5. Remove the Z folding unit [1].
CAUTION
• Make available collective manpower of an appropriate size
for transporting the machine.

[1]

G-146
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the Z folding unit, use the upper/lower
brackets [1] as a guide for positioning the Z folding unit.

[1]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.6.1 Rear cover (ZU-606)
3. Remove the right cover.
G.4.6.3 Right cover (ZU-606)
4. Pull out the Z folding/conveyance unit [1].
[1]

5. Cut the wiring harness band [1], and disconnect two connectors [2].
[3] [1] NOTE
• When bind the wiring harness band [1], be sure to bind it
so that the wiring harness [3] passes the wiring harness
band [1] from left to right from the view of the rear.
• Be sure to bind the wiring harness band [1] with sufficient
length of the wiring harness [3] when the punch unit move
to forward.

[2]
6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the punch unit [2].
[2]

[1]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.7 Z folding/conveyance unit (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606)

G-147
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Pull out the Z folding/conveyance unit [1].

[1]

4. Disconnect three connectors [1] and remove two screws [2], and
remove the arm [3].

[3] [2]

[1]

5. Reinstall the Z folding/conveyance unit back again.

6. Remove four screws [1], and remove Z-folding/conveyance unit [3]
[2] to the front [4] by holding the rails [2] at the both sides.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[1] [3]
NOTE
[1] • When placing the Z-folding/conveyance unit, place it on the
flat surface with its top or left side down.
• When reinstalling the Z-folding/conveyance unit, be sure to
place the rails on the rail holders [1] at four positions.

[1]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.8 Punch motor (M4) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the punch unit.
G.4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)

G-148
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the punch motor assy [2].
[3] [1] NOTE
• When reinstalling the punch motor assy [2], press the
punch motor gear [3] to the gear [4]. Be sure to check that
the gears rotate smoothly and there is appropriate
backlash.

[4] [1] [2]

4. Remove two screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], and
[3] [2] remove the punch motor [3].

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.9 Main motor (M6) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the conveyance upper cover
[1] [2].

[2]

[1]
4. Remove the Z folding/conveyance unit.
G.4.6.7 Z folding/conveyance unit (ZU-606)
5. Remove three screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2], and
[2] [1] remove the harness from three wire saddles [3].

[1] [3] [1][3]

G-149
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the conveyance encoder sensor
[2] (PS10) [2].

[1]
7. Remove the screw [1], the slit circular disc [2] and the belt [3], and
[4] [1] remove the main motor assy [4].

[3] [2]
8. Remove four screws [1], and remove the main motor [2].
[1] [2]

[1]
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.10 Registration motor (M1) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove three screws [2], and
[1] [2] remove the registration motor assy [3].

[2] [3]
3. Remove the screw [1].
[3] [2] 4. Remove four screws [2], and remove the registration motor [3].

[1] [2]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-150
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.6.11 Punch shift motor (M5) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.6.1 Rear cover (ZU-606)
3. Disconnect two connectors [1] and remove three screws [2], and
[1] remove the punch shift motor assy [3].

[2] [3]

4. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove two screws [2], and
[2] remove the punch shift motor [3].

[1] [3]
NOTE
• When installing the punch shift motor assy, adjust its
position so that there is a clearance of “a”, as specified
below, at the front and rear sides and make sure that the
motor assy is horizontal.
Adjustment value: “a” = 2 mm
a

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.12 Main motor cooling fan (FM1) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.6.1 Rear cover (ZU-606)
3. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606)
4. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove four screws [2], and
[2] [4] [2] remove the harness from wire saddle [3], and remove the main
motor cooling fan assy [4].

[1] [3]

G-151
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the main motor cooling fan [2].
[2]

[1]
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.13 ZU control board (ZUCB) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the punch unit.
G.4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)
[1] 3. Disconnect all thirteen connectors from the ZU control board.
4. Remove seven board supports [1], and remove the ZU control
board [2].

[2]

[1]
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.6.14 Paper size detect board (PSDTB) (ZU-606)

1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the punch unit.
G.4.6.6 Punch unit (ZU-606)
[3] 3. Remove two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2], and
remove the paper size detect board [3].

[2] [1]
4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-526)

4.7.1 Upper cover /1, Upper cover /2, Upper cover /3 (FS-526)
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the upper cover/1 [2].
[2] [1]

G-152
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the upper cover/2 [2].
[1] [2]

3. Open the front door.

[2] 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper cover/3 [2].

[1] [1] [1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)

1. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.3 Rear left cover (FS-526)

1. Remove six screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-153
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.7.4 Front left cover (FS-526)

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front left cover [2].
[1]

[2]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.5 Right cover (FS-526)

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right cover [2].
[1]

[2]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.6 Main tray (Paper exit lower tray) (FS-526)

[4] 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the main tray [2].
[3] NOTE
• To reinstall the main tray, align the four fittings [3] with the
corresponding four guide holes [4] on the main tray and fix
the tray.

[1]
[2]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.7 Sub tray (Paper exit upper tray) (FS-526)

1. Remove the sub tray [1] as shown in the illustration.

[1]

G-154
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.8 Finisher (FS-526)

1. Open the finisher front door.
2. Remove two screws [1] and slide the finisher as shown in the
illustration.

[1]

NOTE
• To mount the finisher, align the hook portions of the
mounting bracket [1] and [2] with the upper and lower
holes [3] in the finisher.
Then, push the finisher toward the rear.

[3] [1]

[2]

[1] 3. Disconnect three connectors [1] and remove the finisher.

[1]

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)

1. Remove the finisher.
G.4.7.8 Finisher (FS-526)
2. Remove the relay connector [1].

[1]

G-155
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the horizontal transport unit [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.10 FS control board (FS-526)

1. Remove rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove all connectors from the FS control board.
[1] [3] [2] [1] 3. Remove four screws [1] and four board supports [2], and remove
the FS control board [3].

[2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.11 Transport control board (TRCB) (FS-526)

1. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
G.4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the horizontal transport unit
[1] [1] rear cover [2].

[2]

3. Remove all connectors from the transfer control board.

[2] [1] 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the transfer control board [2].

[1]

G-156
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.7.12 Transport motor/1 (M1) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the upper cover/1, upper cover/2 and upper cover/3.
G.4.7.1 Upper cover /1, Upper cover /2, Upper cover /3 (FS-526)
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove four screws [2], and
[2] [2] remove the transport motor/1 assy [3].

[3] [1]

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the transport motor/1 [2].
[2] [1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.13 Transport motor/2 (M2) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the upper cover/1, upper cover/2 and upper cover/3.
G.4.7.1 Upper cover /1, Upper cover /2, Upper cover /3 (FS-526)
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove three screws [2], and
[2] [3] [2] remove the transport motor/2 assy [3].

[1]

4. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the gear [2].

[2] [1] NOTE
• Be careful not to lose the pin.

G-157
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the transport motor/2 [2].
[1]

[2]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.14 Bypass transport motor (M3) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove four screws [2], and
[2] [3] remove the bypass transport motor assy [3].

[1] [2]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the bypass transport motor [2].

[1] [2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.15 Exit roller motor (M4) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the stacker plate motor.
G.4.7.22 Stacker plate motor (M17) (FS-526)
3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]

[2]

G-158
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Remove the harness from twelve wire saddles [1] and two edge
[1]
covers [2].

[1] [1] [2]

[1]

5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

[1]

[2]

6. Disconnect the connector [1] of the paper output roller motor (M6).
[3] [2] [2] 7. Remove eight screws [2], and remove the drive assy [3].

[1] [2]

8. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the gear [2].

[1]

[2]

9. Remove six screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

G-159
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

10. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3]
11. Remove three screws [2], and remove the exit roller motor [3].

[2]
[1]

12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.16 Main tray lift motor (M5) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [3] 3. Remove four screws [2], and remove the main tray lift motor [3].

[2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.17 Paper output roller motor (M6) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3] [2] 3. Remove two screws [2], remove the paper output roller motor [3].

[2] [1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.18 Stacker entrance motor (M10) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].
[2] [1]

G-160
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove the harness from ten wire saddles [1] and the edge covers
[3] [1] [3] [2].
4. Disconnect seven connectors [3].

[1] [3] [1] [2]

5. Remove five screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[2] [1]

[1] [1]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stacker entrance motor [2].
[1]

[2]

4.7.19 2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) (FS-526)

1. Remove the stapler unit.
F.13.1.3 Replacing the stapler unit
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [2] 3. Remove four screws [2], and remove the 2 staples stapler
movement motor [3].

[3]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.20 Trail edge paddle motor (M15) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)

G-161
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [2] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the trail edge paddle motor [3].

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.21 Paddle motor (M16) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the sub tray paper route.
G.4.7.24 Sub tray paper exit route (FS-526)
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].
[2] [1]

4. Remove the harness from ten wire saddles [1] and the edge covers
[3] [1] [3] [2].
5. Disconnect seven connectors [3].

[1] [3] [1] [2]

6. Remove five screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[2] [1]

[1] [1]

G-162
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

7. While pressing the plate down, disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [1] 8. Remove three screws [2], and remove the paddle motor [3].

[2]

9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.22 Stacker plate motor (M17) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].
[3] 3. Disconnect the connector [2].
4. Remove three screws [3], and remove the stacker plate motor assy
[4].

[1] [2] [4]

5. Remove three E-rings [1] and two bearings [2].

[1] [1] NOTE
• Be careful not to lose the pin.

[2] [2]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stacker plate motor [2].
[1]

[2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.23 Rewind paddle motor (M18) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the stacker plate motor.
G.4.7.22 Stacker plate motor (M17) (FS-526)

G-163
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[1]

[2]

4. Remove the harness from twelve wire saddles [1] and two edge
[1]
covers [2].

[1] [1] [2]

[1]

5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

[1]

[2]

6. Disconnect the connector [1] of the paper output roller motor (M6).
[3] [2] [2] 7. Remove eight screws [2], and remove the drive assy [3].

[1] [2]

8. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [1] 9. Remove two screws [2], and remove the rewind paddle motor [3].

[3]

10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-164
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.7.24 Sub tray paper exit route (FS-526)

1. Remove the sub tray.
G.4.7.7 Sub tray (Paper exit upper tray) (FS-526)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
3. Remove the front left cover.
G.4.7.4 Front left cover (FS-526)
4. Remove the upper cover/1, upper cover/2 and upper cover/3.
G.4.7.1 Upper cover /1, Upper cover /2, Upper cover /3 (FS-526)
5. Remove five screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

6. Remove the E-ring [1] and bearing [2] to release the transport roller
[3] [3].

[1] [2]

7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper left cover [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

8. Remove ten screws [1], and remove two sub tray mount plates [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

[1]

[2] [1]

G-165
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

9. Remove the tab [1], and remove the gear [2].

[2] [1]

10. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[1] 11. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [2].

[2]

12. Remove six screws [1], and remove the sub tray paper exit route
[1] [1] [2].

[2]

4.7.25 Route change gate solenoid (SD1) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].
[2] [1]

3. Remove the harness from ten wire saddles [1] and the edge covers
[3] [1] [3] [2].
4. Disconnect seven connectors [3].

[1] [3] [1] [2]

G-166
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove five screws [1], and remove the drive assy [2].
[2] [1]

[1] [1]

6. Disconnect the connector [1].

7. Remove the screw [2] and two springs [3], and remove the route
[3] [2] change gate solenoid [4].

[1]

[4]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.26 Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3) (FS-526)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the sub tray paper route.
G.4.7.24 Sub tray paper exit route (FS-526)
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4. Remove two springs [2] and the screw [3], and remove the sub tray
[3] gate solenoid [4].

[4] [1]

[2]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.27 Switch back solenoid (SD4) (FS-526)

1. Open the front door.

G-167
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [1]
3. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2].
4. Remove two springs [3] and the screw [4], and remove the switch
back solenoid [5].

[3] [4]

[5]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.28 Transport motor (M201) (FS-526)

1. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
G.4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the horizontal transport unit
[1] [1] rear cover [2].

[2]

3. Disconnect two connectors [1] from the transport control board.

[1]

[1]

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the transport motor assy [2].
[1] [2]

[1]

G-168
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove three screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[2]

[1]

6. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [1] 7. Remove two screws [2], and remove the transport motor [3].

[3] [2]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.29 Fan motor/1 (FM1) (FS-526)

1. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
G.4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [3] 3. Remove the screw [2].
4. Remove four screw [3], and remove the fan motor/1 [4].

[2] [4] [3]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.7.30 Fan motor/2 (FM2) (FS-526)

1. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
G.4.7.9 Horizontal transport unit (FS-526)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3] [2] [1] 3. Remove the tape [2].
4. Remove four screw [3], and remove the fan motor/2 [4].

[4] [3]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-169
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.7.31 Lift wire (FS-526)

CAUTION
• When the tray 1 lift motor is removed, the finishing
tray 1 may fall down.
When removing the tray 1 lift motor, be sure to
support the finishing tray 1 with your hand.
NOTE
• The following procedure for replacing the lift wire shows the examples on the rear side. The front and rear lift wires are marked as
“F” and “R” on their mounting plates respectively. Be sure to check it when reinstalling the lift wires.

(1) Disassembly procedure

1. Remove the rear left cover.
G.4.7.3 Rear left cover (FS-526)
2. Remove the front door.
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.7.2 Rear cover (FS-526)
4. Remove the main tray (Paper exit lower tray).
G.4.7.6 Main tray (Paper exit lower tray) (FS-526)
5. Remove five screws [1] and remove the reinforcing metal [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

6. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [1].

[5] [1] [2] [3] 7. Remove two screws [2], and remove the earth [3].
8. Disconnect the connector [4].
9. Remove two screws [5], remove the plate [6].

[6] [4] [1] [5]

10. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1].

[3] [2] [1] 11. Remove five screws [2], remove the main tray lift motor unit [3].
NOTE
• When the tray 1 lift motor unit [3] is removed, the finishing
tray 1 may fall down. When removing the main tray lift
motor unit, be sure to support the finishing tray 1 with
your hand.

[2] [2]

G-170
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

12. Remove two screws [1], and remove the wire mounting plate [2] of
[3] the rear lift wire from the lift stay [3].

[2] [1]

13. Loosen two screws [1] on the belt tensioner.

[1]

14. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], and the lift pulley /Lw [3], and
[5] remove the lift wire [4].
NOTE
• When removing the lift pulley /Lw, be sure not to let two
pins [5] fall down.
[4]

[1] [2] [3]

(2) Installation procedure

1. Tighten the wire mounting plate [1] of the new lift wire on the lift
stay [2] with two screws [3] temporarily.
NOTE
• The lift wire should be placed with the short side [4] to the
bottom and the long side [5] to the top.

[5]

[2]

[4] [1]
[3]

G-171
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Fasten the wire end of the lift wire with the inner wire end hole of
the lift pulley /Lw [1]. Then, draw the lift wire through the notch [2]
and wind it 5 turns from inside to outside around the lift pulley with
no slack, and then insert the lift pulley /Lw [1] into the shaft so that
it coincides with the pin [3].

[2] [3]

[1]

3. Hook the lift wire on the lift pulley /Up [1]. Then, wind the lift wire 2
turns from inside to outside around the lift pulley /Lw [2] with no
slack, draw the lift wire through the notch and fasten it with the
[1]
wire end hole [3].
NOTE
• Be sure to wind the lift wire on the lift pulley /UP without
the short side (the side wound in advance) and the long
[3]
side (the side wound subsequently) are overlapped.

[2]

4. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2], and then fasten it with E-ring [3].

[2] [1]

[3]

5. Use a tension gauge or spring balance to pull up the belt tensioner

[1] with a standard force “A” [3] and fasten it with the two screws
[2].
Standard value [3]: A = 2.5 ± 0.25 kg

[3]

[1]
[2]

G-172
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Loosen the two screws [2] on the wire mounting plate [1] at the
front to push down the lift stay [3] to the horizontal position, and
then remove four screws [2] and [4] from both the front and the
rear.
NOTE
[4] • Be sure to check the lift stay [3] is in the horizontal
position.

[2] [3]
[1]

4.8 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PK-516)

4.8.1 Punch kit (PK-516)
1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
2. Remove the board cover [1].

[1]

3. Remove the punch scraps box [1].

[1]
4. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1].

[1]

5. Disconnect three connectors [1].

[1]

[1]

G-173
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [1].

[1]

7. Disconnect the connector [1] from the motor.

[2]
8. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].

[1]

9. Disconnect the connector [1] of the sensor.

[1] 10. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [2] and two edge
covers [3].

[3]

[2]

[3]

11. Remove four screws [1].

[1]

G-174
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

12. Pull the punch kit [1] out and remove it from the finisher.

[1]

13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.8.2 Punch oscillating motor (M302) (PK-516)

1. Remove the punch kit.
G.4.8.1 Punch kit (PK-516)
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the punch oscillating motor [2].
[1]

[2]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.8.3 Punch drive motor (M301) (PK-516)

1. Remove the punch kit.
G.4.8.1 Punch kit (PK-516)
2. Disconnect two connectors [1].
[1] 3. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover
[3].

[2] [3]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the punch drive motor assy [2].
[2]

[1]

G-175
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the punch drive motor [2].
[2]

[1]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (SD-508)

4.9.1 Front cover (SD-508)
1. Remove five screws [1], and remove the front cover [2].
[2] [1]

[1]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.2 Right cover (SD-508)

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right cover [2].
[1]

[2]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit cover [2].
[2]

[1]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)

1. Remove the finisher.
G.4.7.8 Finisher (FS-526)

G-176
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground wire [2] of the
[1] [2] pantograph.

[1] 3. Disconnect two connectors [1] of the pantograph.

[1]

4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the pantograph [2].

[2]

[1]

NOTE
[1]
• When installing the pantograph, insert its hook [2] into the
hole [1] on the back of the saddle unit.

[2]

G-177
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove two screws [1] of the rails.

[1]

[1]

6. Grasp the parts shown in the illustration and raise the saddle unit [1]
to remove it.

[1]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.5 Paper exit tray (SD-508)

[2] 1. Remove three screws [1], and driven parts [2].

[1]

2. Remove three screws [1].

[1]

G-178
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the paper exit tray [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.6 SD drive board (SDDB) (SD-508)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
2. Disconnect all eight connectors on the SD drive board.
[1] [2] 3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the SD drive board [2].

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.7 Center staple alignment motor /F (M20) (SD-508)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.9.1 Front cover (SD-508)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] 5. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple alignment
motor /F [3].

[3] [1]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-179
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.9.8 Center staple alignment motor /R (M21) (SD-508)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.9.1 Front cover (SD-508)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [1] 5. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple alignment
motor /R [3].

[3] [2]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.9 Leading edge stopper motor (M22) (SD-508)

1. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3] [2] 2. Remove two screws [2], and remove the leading edge stopper
motor assy [3].

[1]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the leading edge stopper
[2] motor [2].

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.10 Center staple motor (M23) (SD-508)

1. Remove the stapler unit cover.
G.4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)

G-180
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple motor [3].

[1] [2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.11 Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26) (SD-508)

1. Remove the stapler unit cover.
G.4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[2] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple paddle lift
motor/C [3].

[3] [1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.12 Center staple paddle/T (M29) (SD-508)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
2. Remove the right cover.
G.4.9.2 Right cover (SD-508)
3. Remove the stapler unit cover.
G.4.9.3 Staple unit cover (SD-508)
4. Disconnect two connectors [1].
[3]
5. Remove the screw [2], and remove the ground earth.
6. Remove the wire saddle [3].

[2] [1]

7. Disconnect the connector [1].

[3] [2] [1]
8. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].
9. Remove five screws [3], and remove the guide plate assy [4].

[4]
[3]

G-181
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the motor cover [2].
[1]

[2]

11. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] 12. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2].
13. Remove two screws [3], and remove the center staple paddle/T
assy [4].

[4]
[1]

[3]

14. Remove two screws [1], and remove the center staple paddle/T [2].
[2]

[1]

15. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.13 Transport motor (M33) (SD-508)

1. Disconnect the connector [1].
[2] 2. Remove four screws [2] and two board supports [3], and remove the
transport motor [4].

[3] [1] [3] [4]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.14 Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5) (SD-508)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)

G-182
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] [2] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the tri-folding change solenoid
assy [3].

[3]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tri-folding change solenoid
[2] [2].

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.9.15 Exit grip solenoid (SD6) (SD-508)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
2. Lay the saddle unit.

3. Remove the tape [1], disconnect the connector [2].

[4] [2] [1] 4. Remove two screws [3], and remove the exit grip solenoid [4].

[3]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.10 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-602)

4.10.1 Separator (JS-602)
1. Remove the front cover.
G.4.10.2 Front cover (JS-602)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.10.3 Rear cover (JS-602)

G-183
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[1] 3. Remove two screws [1] and connector [2], and remove the
separator [3].

[2]
[3]

4.10.2 Front cover (JS-602)

[1] 1. Unlock three tabs [1], and remove the front cover [2].
[2]

[1]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.10.3 Rear cover (JS-602)

1. Unlock the tab [1], and remove the spacer [2].

[1] [2]

G-184
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[2] 2. Unlock three tabs [1], and remove the rear cover [2].

[1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.10.4 3rd entrance switching solenoid (SD404) (JS-602)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.10.3 Rear cover (JS-602)
2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and edge cover [2].
[2] 3. Disconnect the connector [3].

[1] [3]

4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the 3rd entrance switching
[2] solenoid [2].

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.11 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PI-505)

4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)
[2] 1. Remove the cap [1].
[1] 2. Remove four screws [2] and remove the upper cover [3].

[3]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.11.2 Rear cover (PI-505)

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)

G-185
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[3] 2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the connector cover [2].
3. Remove three screws [3] and remove the rear cover [4].
[2] [1]

[4]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.11.3 Operation panel cover assy (PI-505)

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)
[1] 2. Remove two screws [1], disconnect the connector [2] and remove
the operation panel assy [3].
[2]

[3]
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.11.4 Post inserter (PI-505)

[2] 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the connector cover [2].

[1]

[1] 2. Open the front door of the finisher.

3. Remove three screws [1].

[1]

G-186
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

[1] 5. Slide the post inserter [1] in the direction of arrow and remove it.

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.11.5 PI drive board (PIDB) (PI-505)

1. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.11.2 Rear cover (PI-505)
2. Disconnect eight connectors [1] from the PI drive board.
[1]

[1]

3. Remove four board supports [1] and remove the PI drive board [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.11.6 PI control board (PIOB) (PI-505)

1. Remove the operation panel cover assy.
G.4.11.3 Operation panel cover assy (PI-505)
[2] 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the PI control board [2].

[1]
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-187
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.12 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (FS-527)

4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)

1. Remove ten screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2].

[1]

[1]

[1]

[2]

2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.3 Front door (FS-527)

1. Remove the screw [1] and the plate [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the front door [2].

[2] [1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-188
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)

1. Remove the front door.
G.4.12.3 Front door (FS-527)
2. Loosen the screw [1], and remove the dial (F2) [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front upper cover [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.5 Front lower cover (FS-527)

1. Remove the front door.
G.4.12.3 Front door (FS-527)
2. Remove the front upper cover.
G.4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the front lower cover [2].
[2]

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)

1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1], and pull out the lever [2].
[2]
NOTE
• At the time of the finisher installation, make sure that the
screw hole [3] locates within the scope of the mounting
[3]
hole of the lever [4].

[4]
[1]

G-189
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[2] 4. Remove the cord clamp [2].
5. Remove the finisher [3] from the main body.

[1]

[3]

CAUTION
• When transporting the finisher, make sure to push it to the
direction as shown in the illustration. (to prevent turnover
during transportation).

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.7 Horizontal transport unit (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the relay connector [1].

[1]

[2] 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the horizontal transport unit
[2].

[1]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-190
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.12.8 Stapler unit (FS-527)

1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stapler unit cover [2].

[1] [2]

3. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[1]

4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stapler unit [2].

[1] [2]

NOTE
• When installing the staple unit, make sure to adjust the
[1] mark-off line [1] with the notch [2].

[2]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.9 FS control board (FSCB) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)

G-191
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove all connectors from the FS control board.

[1] 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the FS control board [2].

[2] [1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.10 Paper passage motor/1 (M1) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
G.4.12.7 Horizontal transport unit (FS-527)
3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2] of the
[1] horizontal transport unit.

[2]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] [3] 5. Remove four screws [2], and remove the paper passage motor assy
[3].

[2]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper passage motor/1 [2].

[2] [1]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.11 Duplex path switching motor (M2) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)

G-192
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2] of the
[1] horizontal transport unit.

[2]

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[2]

[1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [4] [3] 5. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2].
6. Remove two screws [3], and remove the duplex path switching
motor assy [4].

[1]

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the duplex path switching
[2] [1] motor [2].

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.12 Exit motor (M5) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)
4. Remove the accommodation paddle motor.
G.4.12.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12) (FS-527)

G-193
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Remove two E-rings [1] and two bushings [2].

[1]

[2]

6. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1].

[1] [1] 7. Disconnect three connectors [2].

[2]

8. Remove three screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[2]

[1]

9. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit motor assy [2].
[2]

[1]

10. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit motor [2].
[1]

[2]

11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.13 Paper passage motor/2 (M3) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.

G-194
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)

4. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [2] 5. Remove three screws [2], and remove the paper passage motor/2
assy [3].

[3]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper passage motor/2 [2].
[2]

[1]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.14 Conveyance motor (M4) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)
4. Remove the accommodation paddle motor.
G.4.12.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12) (FS-527)
5. Remove two E-rings [1] and two bushings [2].
[1]

[2]

6. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1].

[1] [1] 7. Disconnect three connectors [2].

[2]

G-195
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

8. Remove three screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[2]

[1]

9. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [1].

[1] 10. Remove the spring [2].

[2]

11. Remove two screws [1], and remove the conveyance motor assy
[2].

[1] [2]

12. Remove two screws [1], and remove the conveyance motor [2].
[1] [2]

13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.15 Upper lower path switching motor (M6) (FS-527)

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
2. Remove the front upper cover.
G.4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
[2] [3] 4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the upper lower path switching
motor [3].

[1]

G-196
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.16 Tray1 path switching motor (M8) (FS-527)

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
2. Remove the front upper cover.
G.4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1].
[1] 4. Disconnect the connector [2].

[1] [2]

5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray1 path switching motor
[1] assy [2].

[1] [2]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray1 path switching motor
[1] [2].

[2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.17 Exit roller retraction motor (M9) (FS-527)

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
2. Remove the front upper cover.
G.4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
[3] [1] 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit roller retraction motor
[2].

[2]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.18 Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10) (FS-527)

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
2. Remove the front upper cover.
G.4.12.4 Front upper cover (FS-527)

G-197
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] 4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the accommodation roller
retraction motor [3].

[3] [1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.19 Stapler movement motor (M11) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)
4. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1].
5. Disconnect the connector [2].

[2] [1]

6. Remove the spring [1].

[1] 7. Remove two screws [2], and remove the stapler movement motor
[3].

[2]

[3]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.20 Accommodation paddle motor (M12) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)

G-198
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4. Remove the screw [1].

5. Disconnect the connector [2].

[1] [2]

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the accommodation paddle

[1] motor [2].

[2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.21 Elevate motor (M15) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)
4. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [2] 5. Remove three screws [2], and remove the elevate motor assy [3].

[3]

6. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] 7. Remove four screws [2], and remove the elevate motor [3].

[1] [3]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.22 Tray2 shift motor (M16) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)

G-199
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Disconnect two connectors [1].

[3] [1] 3. Remove three screws [2], and remove the tray2 shift motor assy [3].

[2]

[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the gear assy [2].

[2]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray2 shift motor [2].
[1] [2]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.12.23 Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1) (FS-527)

1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.12.1 Upper cover (FS-527)
3. Remove the rear cover.
G.4.12.2 Rear cover (FS-527)
4. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].
[2] [4] [3] 5. Disconnect the connector [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and remove the plate [4].

[1]

G-200
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the accommodation paddle

[1]
solenoid [2].

[2]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.13 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (PK-517)

4.13.1 Punch kit (PK-517)
1. Remove the finisher from the main body.
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the finisher upper cover [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

4. Remove three screws [1].

[1]

G-201
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[1] 5. Remove two screws [1].

NOTE
• At the time of installation, secure it by adjusting the plate
dowel [2] to the center of the stamp mark.

[2]

6. Remove the plate [1], and remove the punch kit [2].
[1]
NOTE
• At the time of installation, align the position of the three
dowel holes of the plate [3].

[3]

[2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (SD-509)

4.14.1 Front cover (SD-509)
1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the jam clearing dial [2].
[1] [2]

2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the front cover [2].
[1]

[1] [2]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.2 Right cover (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)

G-202
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right cover [2].
[2] [1]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.3 Staple unit cover (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.14.1 Front cover (SD-509)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the staple unit cover [2].
[1] [2]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)

CAUTION

• Be careful not to catch your finger in the edge of the rail when mounting the saddle unit on the right rail for the
saddle unit installation.
• Be careful not to jam your finger in the connecting section of the pantograph.

1. Remove the finisher.

G.4.12.6 Finisher (FS-527)
2. Open the front door of the finisher.
3. Pull out the saddle unit.
[1] 4. Remove the screw [1].
NOTE
• For installation of the saddle unit, install the screw after
confirming that the protruding portion of the rail [2] locates
behind the screw hole.

OK
[2]

NG

G-203
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

[2]
5. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].
6. Disconnect three connectors [2].

[1]

[2] 7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the pantograph [2].

[1]

NOTE
• For installation of the pantograph, insert two hooks on the
pantograph of the saddle unit into the back holes inside the
finisher referring the punch mark [1].

[1]

8. Remove two screws [1].

[1]

[1]

[2] 9. Grip the portion as shown in the illustration [1] to raise the saddle
[1]
unit and take it out.
NOTE
• For installation of the saddle unit, insert two hooks on the
left rail [3] into the two holes of the saddle unit [2].

[3]

G-204
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to catch your finger in the edge of the rail [1]
when mounting the saddle unit on the right rail for the
saddle unit installation.

[1]

CAUTION
• Be careful not to jam your finger in the connecting section
of the pantograph [1].

[1]

4.14.5 Paper exit tray (SD-509)

[1]
1. Remove the screw [1], and unlock the stopper [2].

[2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the paper exit tray [2].

[1] [2]

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.6 Staple unit (SD-509)

1. Remove the front cover.
G.4.14.1 Front cover (SD-509)
2. Remove the staple unit cover.
G.4.14.3 Staple unit cover (SD-509)

G-205
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

4. Remove six screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

5. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] [3] 6. Remove two screws [2], and remove the staple unit [3].

[2]

7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.7 SD drive board (SDDB) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.14.1 Front cover (SD-509)
3. Remove the staple unit cover.
G.4.14.3 Staple unit cover (SD-509)
4. Remove two screws [1].
5. Remove the board support film [3] from two spacer [2].

[2]
[1]

[3]

G-206
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Disconnect all the twelve connectors from the SD drive board.

7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the SD drive board [2].
[1]

[2] [1]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [2] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the leading edge stopper
motor assy [3].

[3]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the leading edge stopper
[2] motor [2].

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.9 Upper paddle motor (M21) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)

G-207
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] 3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the upper paddle motor assy
[3].

[3] [1]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the upper paddle motor [2].
[1]

[2]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.10 Lower paddle motor (M22) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the paper exit tray guide [2].
[2] [1]

3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] [3] 4. Remove three screws [2], and remove the lower paddle motor assy
[3].

[1]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the lower paddle motor [2].
[2] [1]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-208
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

4.14.11 Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Remove the right cover.
G.4.14.2 Right cover (SD-509)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[2] 5. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple alignment
motor/R [3].

[3] [1]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.12 Center staple alignment motor/F (M24) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Remove the right cover.
G.4.14.2 Right cover (SD-509)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]

[2]

[1]

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1] [3] 5. Remove two screws [2], and remove the center staple alignment
motor/F [3].

[2]

G-209
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.13 Center fold roller motor (M25) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1] [2] 3. Remove four screws [2] and two card spacers [3], and remove the
center fold roller motor [4].

[3] [4]

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.14 Center fold plate motor (M26) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)
2. Remove the leading edge stopper motor.
G.4.14.8 Leading edge stopper motor (M20) (SD-509)
3. Lay down the saddle unit as shown in the illustration.

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the center fold plate motor [2].
[1]

[2]

6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.14.15 Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3) (SD-509)

1. Remove the saddle unit.
G.4.14.4 Saddle unit (SD-509)

G-210
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Lay down the saddle unit as shown in the illustration.

3. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the drive lever [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Remove the harness from the cord clamp [1].

[3] [2] 5. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the drive lever [3].
6. Remove the tape [4], and disconnect the connector [5].

[5] [4] [1]

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the leading edge grip solenoid
[2].

[1] [2]

8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

NOTE
• Secure the plate edge section of the leading edge grip
solenoid by fitting the mark-off line [1].

[1]

4.15 Disassembly/reassembly procedure (JS-603)

4.15.1 Separator (JS-603)
1. Remove the horizontal transport unit.
G.4.12.7 Horizontal transport unit (FS-527)

G-211
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cover [2].

[2]

[1]

3. Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the separator [2].

[1]
[2]

[1]

5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

4.15.2 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) (JS-603)

1. Remove the separator.
G.4.15.1 Separator (JS-603)
2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit roller assy [2].

[1]
[2]

[1]

G-212
bizhub 652/552/602/502 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. Option

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the plate [2].

[2]

[1]

4. Remove two E-rings [1] and two bushings [2].

[2]
5. Remove two screws [3], and remove the exit rolls assy [4].

[4] [2]
[1]

[3] [1]

6. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].

[2] [1] 7. Disconnect the connector [2].
8. Remove two screws [3], and remove the tray3 exit roller retraction
motor [4].

[3] [4]

9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

G-213
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PARTS

5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

5.1 Installing the key counter
5.1.1 Configuration

[1]
[2]

[1] Key counter socket [2] Key counter

5.1.2 Procedure
NOTE
• When mounting the key counter, either the optional key counter kit KIT-1 (4623-472) or the key counter kit KIT-CF (4623-481) is
necessary.
• Procedure for directly mounting the key counter to the main unit is described below.
For mounting the key counter to the optional working table WT-506, refer to WT-506 installation manual.

(1) When using the key counter kit KIT-1 (4623-472)

1. Remove the scanner right cover [1].
G.3.2.12 Scanner right cover
2. Cut out the knockouts [2] of the scanner right cover.
3. Remove the two caps [3].
[2]

[1] [3]
4. Open the upper right door.
[1] 5. Remove the harness for the key counter from five wire saddles [1]
and the edge cover [2].

[2] [1]
6. Set the harness for the key counter to the wire saddle [1] and the
[1] edge cover [2].

[2]

G-214
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PARTS
7. Mount the scanner right cover [1], and insert the harness for the
[1] key counter through the hole [2] knockouts were removed from.

[2]
[2] 8. Using two screws [2], secure the counter mounting bracket [1].
NOTE
• Secure the counter mounting bracket passing the
connector into the bracket.
• Use the two long screws (9646 0418 14: M4 x 18) in the key
counter kit to secure the counter mounting bracket.

[1]

9. Mount the edge cover [1] to the counter mounting bracket and set
the harness to the edge cover.
10. Connect the key counter socket connector [2].
[4] 11. Using two screws [4], secure the counter socket [3].
[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

12. Using two screws [2], secure the key counter cover [1].
[1]

[2]

13. Select [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] → [Key Counter Only], [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2
+ Key Counter].
Set color mode and message.
For details on setting, see “Adjustment/Setting.”
I.12.3.2 Management Function Choice

G-215
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PARTS

(2) When using the key counter kit KIT-CF (4623-481)

1. Remove the scanner right cover [1].
G.3.2.12 Scanner right cover
2. Cut out the knockouts [2] of the scanner right cover.
3. Remove the two caps [3].
[2]

[1] [3]
4. Open the upper right door.
[1] 5. Remove the harness for the key counter from five wire saddles [1]
and the edge cover [2].

[2] [1]
6. Set the harness for the key counter to the wire saddle [1] and the
[1] edge cover [2].

[2]
7. Mount the scanner right cover [1], and insert the harness for the
[1] key counter from the hole [2] where knockouts were removed from.

[2]
[2] 8. Using two screws [2], secure the counter mounting bracket [1].
NOTE
• Secure the counter mounting bracket passing the
connector into the bracket.
• Use the two long screws (9646 0418 14: M4 x 18) in the key
counter kit to secure the counter mounting bracket.

[1]

G-216
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PARTS
9. Mount the edge cover [1] to the counter mounting bracket, and set
the harness to the edge cover.
10. Connect the key counter socket connector [2].
11. Using two screws [4], secure the counter socket [3].
[4] [4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

12. Using two screws [2], secure the key counter cover [1].
[1]

[2]

13. Select [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] → [Key Counter Only], [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2
+ Key Counter].
Set color mode and message.
For details on setting, see “Adjustment/Setting.”
I.12.3.2 Management Function Choice

5.2 Installing the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205)

5.2.1 Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.9 Rear left cover
2. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].
[1]

[1]

3. Connect the connector [1] of the original size detection 2 sensor.

[2] [3]
4. Using the screw [2], mount the original size detection 2 sensor [3]
and fix it.

[1]

G-217
 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 5. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PARTS
5. Select [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Original Size Detection],
and set the original glass to [Table2].

6. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj].

I.10.3.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.

7. Check to make sure that the [Org. Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set] is displayed on the original size detection sensor adjustment screen.

G-218
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. bizhub 502/552/602/652
1.1 Cleaning parts list
No. Section Part name Ref. page
1 Processing section Transfer belt unit H.1.3.1 Transfer belt unit
2 Tray 1 Tray 1 feed roller H.1.3.2 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller
3 Tray 1 pick-up roller
4 Tray 1 separation roller H.1.3.3 Tray 1 separation roller
5 Tray 1 transport roller H.1.3.4 Tray 1 transport roller
6 Tray 2 Tray 2 feed roller H.1.3.5 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller
7 Tray 2 pick-up roller
8 Tray 2 separation roller H.1.3.6 Tray 2 separation roller
9 Tray 2 transport roller H.1.3.7 Tray 2 transport roller
10 Tray 3 Tray 3 feed roller H.1.3.8 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller
11 Tray 3 pick-up roller
12 Tray 3 separation roller H.1.3.9 Tray 3 separation roller
13 Tray 3 transport roller H.1.3.10 Tray 3 transport roller
14 Tray 4 Tray 4 feed roller H.1.3.11 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller
15 Tray 4 pick-up roller
16 Tray 4 separation roller H.1.3.12 Tray 4 separation roller
17 Tray 4 transport roller H.1.3.13 Tray 4 transport roller
18 Manual bypass tray Manual bypass tray feed roller H.1.3.14 Manual bypass tray feed roller
19 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller H.1.3.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller
20 Manual bypass tray separation roller H.1.3.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller
21 Transport section Intermediate transport roller H.1.3.17 Intermediate transport roller
22 Scanner Original glass H.1.3.18 Original glass
23 Scanner rails H.1.3.19 Scanner rails
24 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) H.1.3.20 Mirros (1ST/2nd/3rd)
25 Lens H.1.3.21 Lens
26 CCD sensor H.1.3.22 CCD sensor

1.2 Need lubrication parts list

No. Section Part name Ref. page
1 Fusing section Fusing unit H.1.4.1 Fusing unit

1.3 Cleaning procedure

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol isopropyl alcohol.

1.3.1 Transfer belt unit

1. Remove the transfer belt unit.
F.7.6.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit
2. Using a dried cleaning pad, wipe the transfer belt [1].
NOTE
• If it is difficult to clean with dried cleaning pad, dampen a
cleaning pad with a solvent.
• Do not wipe out with water.
• When solvent is used to dampen a cloth, do not use the
ones other than shown below:
Isopropyl alcohol
• After cleaned with the solvent, make copies more than 28-
piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise.

[1]

1.3.2 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller

1. Open the manual bypass tray door.
2. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 in
“F.7.9.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy”.
3. Slide out the tray 1.

H-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 feed
[1] roller [1] clean of dirt.

5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 pick-
up roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.3 Tray 1 separation roller

1. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 in
“F.7.9.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy”.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1
[1]
separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

1.3.4 Tray 1 transport roller

1. Open the manual bypass tray door.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1
transport roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.5 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller

1. Open the lower right door.
2. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 in
“F.7.9.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy”.
3. Slide out the tray 2.

H-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 feed
[1] roller [1] clean of dirt.

5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 pick-
up roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.6 Tray 2 separation roller

1. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 in
“F.7.9.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy”.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2
[1]
separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

1.3.7 Tray 2 transport roller

1. Open the lower front door.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2
transport roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.8 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller

1. Slide out the tray 3.

H-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 3 paper feed cover [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3 feed
roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3 pick-
[1] up roller [1] clean of dirt.

1.3.9 Tray 3 separation roller

1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the steps 1 to 4 in
“F.7.9.5 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller”.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3
[1] separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

1.3.10 Tray 3 transport roller

1. Slide out the tray 3.

H-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 3 paper feed cover [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3

transport roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.11 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller

1. Slide out the tray 4.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 4 feed
[1] roller [1] clean of dirt.

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 4 pick-
up roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.12 Tray 4 separation roller

1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the steps 1 to 4 in
“F.7.9.7 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller”.

H-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 4

[1] separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

1.3.13 Tray 4 transport roller

1. Slide out the tray 4.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 4
transport roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.14 Manual bypass tray feed roller

1. Open the manual bypass tray door.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual
bypass tray feed roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller

1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual
bypass tray pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller

1. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 in
“F.7.9.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy”.

H-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual

[1] bypass tray separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

1.3.17 Intermediate transport roller

1. Open the lower right door.
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the intermediate
transport roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

1.3.18 Original glass

1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the original
glass [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

2. Open the ADF, and remove the cleaner [1].

[1]

3. Clean the slit glass with the cleaner [1].

[1]

H-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

1.3.19 Scanner rails

1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the scanner rails
[1] [1] clean of dirt.
NOTE
• Apply lubricant after cleaning.

[1]

1.3.20 Mirros (1ST/2nd/3rd)

1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the mirror 1/2/3
[1] [1].

1.3.21 Lens
1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass
2. Remove two screws [1] and lens cover [2].
[2]

[1]

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the lens [1]
[1] clean of dirt.

1.3.22 CCD sensor

1. Remove the original glass.
G.3.2.19 Original glass

H-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective
[1] [2] [1] shield [2].

[1]

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ground plate [2].
[1]

[2]

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the CCD sensor cover [2].
[2]

[1]

5. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the CCD
[1] sensor [1] clean of dirt.

1.4 Lubrication procedure

1.4.1 Fusing unit
• When the fusing unit produces abnormal noise under operating conditions, lubricate the brush roller shaft and the sliding member of the
bearings which can make the noise.
1. Remove the fusing unit
F.7.12.1 Replacing the fusing unit

H-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

[1] [1] 2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the fusing unit cover/1 [2].

[2]

[1]

3. Remove the screw [1].

[4] [1]
4. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and disconnect the
connector [3], and remove the fusing unit cover/2 [4].

[2]
[3]

5. Apply the heat resistant conductive grease (SANKOL ECG-25) to the surface [1] where the brush roller shaft contacts the bearings.
NOTE
• Be sure to use heat-resistant conductive grease.
• Do not allow the grease to contact the brush roller.
• Do not disassemble any parts other than those described in the above procedure.
• Take care so that harness in the fusing unit does not get caught between parts when assembling the parts.

[1] [1]

H-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option

2. Option
2.1 Cleaning parts list
2.1.1 LU-204
No. Section Part name Ref. page
1 Feed section Pick-up roller H.2.2.1 Pick-up roller
Feed roller H.2.2.2 Feed roller
Separation roller H.2.2.3 Separation roller
2 Transport section Transport roller H.2.2.4 Transport roller

2.1.2 LU-301
No. Section Part name Ref. page
1 Feed section Pick-up roller H.2.3.1 Pick-up roller
Feed roller H.2.3.2 Feed roller
Separation roller H.2.3.3 Separation roller
2 Transport section Transport roller H.2.3.4 Transport roller

2.1.3 PI-505
No. Section Part name Ref. page
1 Feed section Pick-up roller /Up H.2.4.1 Pick-up roller /Up, feed roller /Up,
separationroller /Up
2 Pick-up roller /Lw H.2.4.2 Pick-up roller /Lw, feed roller /Lw,
separationroller /Lw
3 Feed roller /Up H.2.4.1 Pick-up roller /Up, feed roller /Up,
separationroller /Up
4 Feed roller /Lw H.2.4.2 Pick-up roller /Lw, feed roller /Lw,
separationroller /Lw
5 Separation roller /Up H.2.4.1 Pick-up roller /Up, feed roller /Up,
separationroller /Up
6 Separation roller /Lw H.2.4.2 Pick-up roller /Lw, feed roller /Lw,
separationroller /Lw
7 Transport section Transport roller /Up H.2.4.3 Transport roller /Up
8 Transport roller /Lw H.2.4.4 Transport roller /Lw

2.2 Cleaning procedure (LU-204)

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

2.2.1 Pick-up roller

1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller up.
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller
[1] clean of dirt.

[1]

H-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option

2.2.2 Feed roller

1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller up.
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller
[1] clean of dirt.

[1]

2.2.3 Separation roller

1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller up.
3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2].
[2]

[1]
4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation
roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

2.2.4 Transport roller

1. Remove the feed cover.
G.4.3.5 Feed cover (LU-204)
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport
[1] roller [1] clean of dirt.

2.3 Cieaning procedure (LU-301)

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

H-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option

2.3.1 Pick-up roller

1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller up.
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller
[1] clean of dirt.

[1]

2.3.2 Feed roller

1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller up.
3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller
[1] clean of dirt.

[1]

2.3.3 Separation roller

1. Open the upper door.
2. Move the feed roller up.
3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2].
[2]

[1]
4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation
roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

2.3.4 Transport roller

1. Remove the feed cover.
G.4.4.6 Feed cover (LU-301)

H-13
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport

[1] roller [1] clean of dirt.

2.4 Cleaning procedure (PI-505)

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

2.4.1 Pick-up roller /Up, feed roller /Up, separationroller /Up

1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.11.1 Upper cover (PI-505)
[1] 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up
roller /Up [1] clean of dirt.

[1] 3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller /
Up [1] clean of dirt.

4. Remove the separation roller assy /Up.

F.16.1.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up
[1] 5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation
roller /Up [1] clean of dirt.

2.4.2 Pick-up roller /Lw, feed roller /Lw, separationroller /Lw

[1] 1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].

[2]

H-14
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option

[1] 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up
roller /Lw [1] clean of dirt.

3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller /
Lw [1] clean of dirt.

[1]
4. Remove the separation roller assy /Lw.
F.16.1.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw
[1] 5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation
roller /Lw [1] clean of dirt.

2.4.3 Transport roller /Up

[1] 1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].

[2]

[1] 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport
roller /Up [1] clean of dirt.

2.4.4 Transport roller /Lw

1. Remove the post inserter.
G.4.11.4 Post inserter (PI-505)

H-15
bizhub 652/552/602/502 H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 2. Option

2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport

roller /Lw [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

H-16
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTING SECTION

I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
1.1 Outline
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.

1.2 Advance checks

• Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if:
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner
that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the
installation site.
A.3.3.2 Installation Requirements
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The original glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the
end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use utmost care not to be caught in the scanner
cables or gears of the exposure unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be extremely hot.
• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.

I-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT

2. TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT

2.1 Use
• To adjust the position of the touch panel display.
• Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action.
• Use during the setup procedure.

2.2 Procedure
1. Press the Accessibility key.
2. Touch [Touch Panel Adj.].
3. Using the tip of a pen or similar object, touch the four keys (+) on the screen in sequence.
• These crosses may be touched in any order; but be sure to touch the center of each cross.
• Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen.

4. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in blue.
5. Press the Start key.

I-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

3. UTILITY
3.1 List of utility mode (outline)

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
• For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see “I.6.73 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels.”
Utility Mode One-Touch/User Box Registration Create One-Touch destination I.3.2.1 One-Touch/User Box
Create User Box Registration
Limiting Access to Destinations
User Settings System Settings I.3.2.2 User Settings
Custom Display Settings
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Printer Settings
Change Password
Change E-mail Address**
Change Icon
Register Authentication Settings
Registered Application Setting
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Administrator Settings System Settings I.3.2.3 Administrator Settings
Administrator/Machine Settings
One-Touch/User Box Registration
User Authentication/Account Track
Network Settings
Copier Settings
Printer Settings
Fax Settings
System Connection
Security Settings
License Settings
OpenAPI Authentication Management
Setting
Check Consumable Life Print List I.3.2.4 Other Settings
Banner Printing

I-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

My Panel Settings Language Setting

Measurement Unit Setting
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Color Selection Setting
Main Menu Settings
Initial Screen Setting
Device Information
Meter Count Check Details
Remaining Copy Count *
• *: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number of copies the user or account can make.

3.2 List of utility mode (detail)

3.2.1 One-Touch/User Box Registration

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
One-Touch/User Box Registration Ref. page
Create One-Touch Address Book (Public)/(Personal) E-mail I.4.1.1.(1) E-mail
destination User Box I.4.1.1.(2) User Box
Fax I.4.1.1.(3) Fax
PC (SMB) I.4.1.1.(4) PC (SMB)
FTP I.4.1.1.(5) FTP
WebDAV I.4.1.1.(6) WebDAV
IP Address Fax I.4.1.1.(7) IP Address Fax
Internet Fax I.4.1.1.(8) Internet Fax
Group I.4.1.2 Group
E-mail Settings E-mail Subject I.4.1.3.(1) E-mail Subject
E-mail Body I.4.1.3.(2) E-mail Body
Create User Box Public/Personal User Box I.4.2.1 Public/Personal User Box
Bulletin Board User Box I.4.2.2 Bulletin Board User Box
Relay User Box I.4.2.3 Relay User Box
Limiting Access to Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations Address Book I.4.3.1.(1) Address Book
Destinations Group I.4.3.1.(2) Group
Program I.4.3.1.(3) Program

I-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

3.2.2 User Settings

(1) System Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
• For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see “I.6.73 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels.”
User Settings Ref. page
System Settings Language Selection I.5.1.1 Language Selection
Measurement Unit Settings I.5.1.2 Measurement Unit
Settings
Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection Settings I.5.1.3.(1) Auto Tray Selection
Settings
Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF I.5.1.3.(2) Auto Tray Switch ON/
OFF
No Matching Paper in Tray Setting I.5.1.3.(3) No Matching Paper in
Tray Setting
Print Lists I.5.1.3.(4) Print Lists
Post Inserter Settings I.5.1.3.(5) Post Inserter Settings
Auto Color Level Adjust. I.5.1.4 Auto Color Level Adjust.
Power Save Settings* Low Power Mode Settings* I.5.1.5.(1) Low Power Mode
Settings
Sleep Mode Settings* I.5.1.5.(2) Sleep Mode Settings
Output Settings** Print/Fax Output Print** I.5.1.6.(1) Print/Fax Output
Settings** Fax** Settings
Output Tray Settings** I.5.1.6.(2) Output Tray Setting
AE Level Adjustment** I.5.1.7 AE Level Adjustment
Auto Paper Select for Small Original I.5.1.8 Auto Paper Select for
Small Original
Blank Page Print Settings** I.5.1.9 Blank Page Print Settings
Page Number Print Position** I.5.1.10 Page Number Print
Position
Select Keyboard I.5.1.11 Select Keyboard

(2) Custom Display Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
User Settings Ref. page
Custom Display Copier Settings Default Tab I.5.2.1.(1) Default Tab
Settings Shortcut Key 1 I.5.2.1.(2) Shortcut Key 1/2
Shortcut Key 2
Quick Settings 1 I.5.2.1.(3) Quick Settings 1, 2, 3,
Quick Settings 2 4
Quick Settings 3
Quick Settings 4

I-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

User Settings Ref. page

Default Tab Density Settings I.5.2.1.(4) Default Tab Density
Settings
Scan/Fax Settings Default Tab I.5.2.2.(1) Default Tab
Program Default I.5.2.2.(2) Program Default
Address Book Index Default I.5.2.2.(3) Address Book Index
Default
Shortcut Key 1 I.5.2.2.(4) Shortcut Key 1/2
Shortcut Key 2
Default Address Book I.5.2.2.(5) Default Address Book
Default Address Type I.5.2.2.(6) Default Address Type
User Box Settings Default Tab I.5.2.3.(1) Default Tab
Shortcut Key 1 I.5.2.3.(2) Shortcut Key 1/2
Shortcut Key 2
Copy Screen Copy Operating Screen I.5.2.4 Copy Screen
Fax Active Screen TX Display I.5.2.5.(1) TX Display
RX Display I.5.2.5.(2) RX Display
Color Selection Settings I.5.2.6 Color Selection Settings
Left Panel Display Default I.5.2.7 Left Panel Display Default
Search Option Settings I.5.2.8 Search Option Settings

(3) Copier Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
• For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see “I.6.73 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels.”
User Settings Ref. page
Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple I.5.3.1 Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet I.5.3.2 Auto Zoom for Combine/
Booklet
Auto Sort/Group Selection I.5.3.3 Auto Sort/Group Selection
Default Copy Settings I.5.3.4 Default Copy Settings
Default Enlarge Display Settings I.5.3.5 Default Enlarge Display
Settings
When AMS Direction is Incorrect I.5.3.6 When AMS Direction is
Incorrect
Separate Scan Output Method I.5.3.7 Separate Scan Output
Method
Enlargement Rotation I.5.3.8 Enlargement Rotation
Auto Zoom (Platen) * I.5.3.9 Auto Zoom (Platen)
Auto Zoom (ADF) * I.5.3.10 Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when APS Off* I.5.3.11 Specify Default Tray
when APS Off
Select Tray for Insert Sheet I.5.3.12 Select Tray for Insert
Sheet
Tri-Fold Print Side* I.5.3.13 Tri-Fold Print Side
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification I.5.3.14 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold
Specification
Half-Fold Specification I.5.3.15 Half-Fold Specification
Print Jobs During Copy Operation** I.5.3.16 Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Automatic Image Rotation* I.5.3.17 Automatic Image
Rotation
Finishing Program I.5.3.18 Finishing Program
Card Shot Settings Layout I.5.3.19.(1) Layout
Zoom I.5.3.19.(2) Zoom
Store Original Size I.5.3.19.(3) Store Original Size

(4) Scan/Fax Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.

I-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

User Settings Ref. page

Scan/Fax Settings JPEG Compression Level I.5.4.1 JPEG Compression Level
Black Compression Level I.5.4.2 Black Compression Level
TWAIN Lock Time I.5.4.3 TWAIN Lock Time
Default Scan/Fax Settings I.5.4.4 Default Scan/Fax Settings
Default Enlarge Display Settings I.5.4.5 Default Enlarge Display
Settings
Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level I.5.4.6 Compact PDF/XPS
Compression Level
Color TIFF Type I.5.4.7 Color TIFF Type
OCR Operation Setting I.5.4.8 OCR Operation Setting
Graphic Outlining I.5.4.9 Graphic Outlining

(5) Printer Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
User Settings Ref. page
Printer Settings Basic Settings PDL Setting I.5.5.1.(1) PDL Setting
Number of Copies I.5.5.1.(2) Number of Copies
Original Direction I.5.5.1.(3) Original Direction
Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP I.5.5.1.(4) Spool Print Jobs in
HDD before RIP
A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch I.5.5.1.(5) A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR
Auto Switch
Banner Sheet Setting I.5.5.1.(6) Banner Sheet Setting
Binding Direction Adjustment I.5.5.1.(7) Binding Direction
Adjustment
Line Width Adjustment I.5.5.1.(8) Line Width Adjustment
Gray Background Text Correction I.5.5.1.(9) Gray Background Text
Correction
Paper Setting Paper Tray I.5.5.2.(1) Paper Tray
Paper Size I.5.5.2.(2) Paper Size
2-Sided Print I.5.5.2.(3) 2-Sided Print
Binding Position I.5.5.2.(4) Binding Position
Staple I.5.5.2.(5) Staple
Punch I.5.5.2.(6) Punch
Banner Paper Tray I.5.5.2.(7) Banner Paper Tray
PCL Settings Font Settings I.5.5.3.(1) Font Settings
Symbol Set I.5.5.3.(2) Symbol Set
Font Size I.5.5.3.(3) Font Size
Line/Page I.5.5.3.(4) Line/Page
CR/LF Mapping I.5.5.3.(5) CR/LF Mapping
PS Setting Print PS Errors I.5.5.4.(1) Print PS Errors
XPS Settings Verify XPS Digital Signature I.5.5.5.(1) Verify XPS Digital
Signature
Print Reports Configuration Page I.5.5.6 Print Reports
Demo Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List
TIFF Image Paper Setting I.5.5.7 TIFF Image Paper Setting

(6) Other
NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
User Settings Ref. page
Change Password I.5.6 Change Password
Change E-mail Address I.5.7 Change E-mail Address
Change Icon I.5.8 Change Icon
Register Authentication Settings I.5.9 Register Authentication
Settings

I-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

User Settings Ref. page

Registered Default Application Selection I.5.10 Register Authentication
Application Setting Settings-Default Application
Selection
Cellular Phone/ Link File Error Notification I.5.11.1 Link File Error
PDA Setting Notification
Proxy Server Use I.5.11.2 Proxy Server Use
Print I.5.11.3 Print

3.2.3 Administrator Settings

(1) System Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
• For displaying the keys with *** marks, see “I.11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level.”
Administrator Settings Ref. page
System Settings Power Save Settings Low Power Mode Settings I.6.1.1 Low Power Mode Settings
Sleep Mode Settings I.6.1.2 Sleep Mode Settings
Power Save Key I.6.1.3 Power Save Key
Enter Power Save Mode I.6.1.4 Enter Power Save Mode
Auto Power OFF Settings I.6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Settings
Output Settings Print/Fax Output Print I.6.2.1 Print/Fax Output Settings
Settings Fax
Output Tray Settings I.6.2.2 Output Tray Settings
Shift Output Each Job I.6.2.3 Shift Output Each Job
Date/Time Settings I.6.3 System Settings-Date/Time
Settings
Daylight Saving Time I.6.4 System Settings-Daylight
Saving Time
Weekly Timer Settings Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings I.6.5.1 Weekly Timer ON/OFF
Settings
Time Settings I.6.5.2 Time Settings
Date Settings I.6.5.3 Date Settings
Select Time for Power Save I.6.5.4 Select Time for Power
Save
Password for Non-Business Hours I.6.5.5 Password for Non-
Business Hours
Restrict User Access Copy Program Lock Settings I.6.6.1 Copy Program Lock
Settings
Delete Saved Copy Program I.6.6.2 Delete Saved Copy
Program
Restrict Access to Changing Job Priority I.6.6.3.(1) Changing Job Priority
Job Settings Delete Other User Jobs I.6.6.3.(2) Delete Other User
Jobs
Registering and Changing I.6.6.3.(3) Registering and
Addresses Changing Addresses
Changing Zoom Ratio I.6.6.3.(4) Changing Zoom Ratio
Changing the “From” Address I.6.6.3.(5) Change the “From”
Address
Change Registered Overlay I.6.6.3.(6) Change Registered
Overlay

I-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Biometric/IC Card Info. I.6.6.3.(7) Biometric/IC Card Info.
Registration Registration
Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting I.6.6.4.(1) Restrict Broadcasting
Expert Adjustment AE Level Adjustment I.6.7.1 AE Level Adjustment
Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment I.6.7.2 Printer Adjustment-
Leading Edge Adjustment
Centering I.6.7.3 Printer Adjustment-
Centering
Leading Edge Adjustment I.6.7.4 Printer Adjustment-
(Duplex Side 2) Leading Edge Adjustment:
Duplex Side 2
Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) I.6.7.5 Printer Adjustment-
Centering: Duplex 2nd Side
Erase Leading Edge *** I.6.7.6 Printer Adjustment-Erase
Leading Edge
Vertical Adjustment *** I.6.7.7 Printer Adjustment-Vertical
Adjustment
Media Adjustment I.6.7.8 Printer Adjustment-Media
Adjustment
Finisher Center Staple Position I.6.7.9 Finisher Adjustment-
Adjustment Center Staple Position
Half-Fold Position I.6.7.10 Finisher Adjustment-Half-
Fold Position
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment I.6.7.11 Finisher Adjustment-Tri-
Fold Position Adjustment
Punch Vertical Position I.6.7.12 Finisher Adjustment-
Adjustment Punch Vertical Position
Adjustment
Punch Horizontal Position I.6.7.13 Finisher Adjustment-
Adjustment Punch Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Punch Regist Loop Size I.6.7.14 Finisher Adjustment-
Adjustment Punch Regist Loop Size
Adjustment
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment I.6.7.15 Finisher Adjustment-
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position I.6.7.16 Finisher Adjustment-
Adjustment Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position
Adjustment
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) I.6.7.17 Finisher Adjustment-
Position Adjustment Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold)
Position Adjustment
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment I.6.7.18 Finisher Adjustment-1st
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd
Z-Fold Position Adjustment
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor I.6.7.19 Finisher Adjustment-
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor
Post Inserter Tray Size I.6.7.20 Finisher Adjustment-Post
Adjustment Inserter Tray Size Adjustment
Density Adjustment Thick 1/1+ -Black I.6.7.21 Density Adjustment
Thick 2/3/4-Black
Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only I.6.7.22.(1) Image Stabilization
Only
Initialize+Image Stabilization I.6.7.22.(2) Initialize+Image
Stabilization
Paper Separation Adjustment I.6.7.23 Paper Separation
Adjustment
Gradation Image Stabilization Only I.6.7.24 Gradation Adjustment
Adjustment Print
Copy
Scanner Area *** Scanner Adjustment: Leading I.6.7.26 Scanner Area-Scanner
Edge *** Adjustment: Leading Edge
Scanner Adjustment: Centering I.6.7.27 Scanner Area-Scanner
*** Adjustment: Centering
Horizontal Adjustment *** I.6.7.28 Scanner Area-Horizontal
Adjustment

I-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Vertical Adjustment *** I.6.7.29 Scanner Area-Vertical
Adjustment
ADF Adjustment Centering*** I.6.7.30.(1) Centering
*** Original Stop Position*** I.6.7.30.(2) Original Stop Position
Centering Auto Adjustment*** I.6.7.30.(3) Centering Auto
Adjustment
Auto Adj. of Stop Position*** I.6.7.30.(4) Auto Adj. of Stop
Position
Line Detection Prior Detection Setting I.6.7.31 Line Detection-Prior
Detection Setting
Detection While Feeding Setting I.6.7.32 Line Detection-Detection
While Feeding Setting
Trail Edge Adjust I.6.7.33 Trail Edge Adjust
User Paper Settings *** I.6.7.34 User Paper Settings
Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Operation I.6.7.35 Erase Adjustment-Non-
Settings Image Area Erase Operation
Settings
PS Designer Settings I.6.7.36 PS Designer Settings
List/Counter Management List Job Settings List I.6.8.1 Management List
Paper Size/Type Counter I.6.8.2 Paper Size/Type Counter
Meter Counter List I.6.8.3 Meter Counter List
Check Consumables List I.6.8.4 Check Consumables List
Reset Settings System Auto Reset I.6.9.1 System Auto Reset
Auto Reset I.6.9.2 Auto Reset
Job Reset When Account is changed I.6.9.3.(1) When Account is
changed
When Original is set on ADF I.6.9.3.(2) When Original is set on
ADF
Next Staple Setting I.6.9.3.(3) Next Job: Staple
Job Setting
Original Set/Bind Direction I.6.9.3.(4) Next Job: Original Set/
Bind Direction
Reset Data After Job I.6.9.3.(5) Next Job: Reset Data
After Job
User Box Settings Delete Unused User Box I.6.10.1 Delete Unused User Box
Delete Secure Print Documents I.6.10.2 Delete Secure Print
Documents
Auto Delete Secure Document I.6.10.3 Auto Delete Secure
Document
Encrypted PDF Delete Time I.6.10.4 Encrypted PDF Delete
Time
ID & Print Delete Time I.6.10.5 ID & Print Delete Time
Document Hold Setting I.6.10.6 Document Hold Setting
External Memory Function Settings I.6.10.7 External Memory
Function Settings
Allow/Restrict User Box I.6.10.8 Allow/Restrict User Box
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting I.6.10.9 ID & Print Delete after
Print Setting
Document Delete Time Setting I.6.10.10 Document Delete Time
Setting
Standard Size Setting*** Original Glass Original Size Detect*** I.6.11.1 Original Glass Original
Size Detect
Foolscap Size Setting*** I.6.11.2 Foolscap Size Setting
Stamp Settings Header/Footer Settings I.6.12.1 Header/Footer Settings
Fax TX Settings I.6.12.2 Fax TX Settings
Blank Page Print Settings I.6.13 System Settings-Blank
Page Print Settings
Application Key Settings I.6.14 System Settings-
Application Key Settings
Skip Job Operation Settings I.6.15 System Settings-Skip Job
Operation Settings
Default Bypass Paper Type Setting I.6.16 System Settings-Default
Bypass Paper Type Setting

I-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Page Number Print Position I.6.17 System Settings-Page
Number Print Position
Advanced Preview Setting I.6.18 System Settings-Advanced
Preview Setting

(2) Administrator/Machine Settings · One-Touch/User Box Registration

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
Administrator/ Administrator Registration I.6.19.1 Administrator
Machine Settings Registration
Input Machine Address I.6.19.2 Input Machine Address
One-Touch/User Create One-Touch Address Book E-mail I.6.20.1.(1) E-mail
Box Registration Destination User Box I.6.20.1.(2) User Box
Fax I.6.20.1.(3) Fax
PC (SMB) I.6.20.1.(4) PC (SMB)
FTP I.6.20.1.(5) FTP
WebDAV I.6.20.1.(6) WebDAV
IP Address Fax I.6.20.1.(7) IP Address Fax
Internet Fax I.6.20.1.(8) Internet Fax
Group I.6.20.2 Group
E-mail Settings E-mail Subject I.6.20.3.(1) E-mail Subject
E-mail Body I.6.20.3.(2) E-mail Body
Create User Box Public/Personal User Box I.6.21.1 Public/Personal User Box
Bulletin Board User Box I.6.21.2 Bulletin Board User Box
Relay User Box I.6.21.3 Relay User Box
Annotation User Box I.6.21.4 Annotation User Box
One-Touch/User Box Address Book List I.6.22.1 Address Book List
Registration List Group List I.6.22.2 Group List
Program List I.6.22.3 Program List
E-mail Subject/Text List I.6.22.4 E-mail Subject/Text List
Maximum Number of User Boxes I.6.23 One-Touch/User Box
Registration-Maximum Number of
User Boxes

(3) User Authentication/Account Track

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
User General Settings I.6.24 User Authentication/
Authentication/ Account Track-General Settings
Account Track User Authentication Administrative User Name List I.6.25.1.(1) User Name List
Settings Setting Default Function Permission I.6.25.1.(2) Default Function
Permission
ID & Print Settings I.6.25.1.(3) ID & Print Settings
ID & Print Operation Settings I.6.25.1.(4) ID & Print Operation
Settings
Default Operation Selection I.6.25.1.(5) Default Operation
Selection
User Registration I.6.25.2 User Registration
User Counter I.6.25.3 User Counter
Account Track Settings Account Track Registration I.6.26.1 Account Track
Registration
Account Track Counter I.6.26.2 Account Track Counter
Print without Authentication I.6.27 User Authentication/
Account Track-Print without
Authentication
Print Counter List I.6.28 User Authentication/
Account Track-Print Counter List
External Server Settings I.6.29 User Authentication/
Account Track-External Server
Settings

I-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Limiting Access to Create Group I.6.30.1 Create Group
Destinations Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations I.6.30.2 Apply Levels/Groups to
Destinations
Apply Levels/Groups to Users I.6.30.3 Apply Levels/Groups to
Users
Authentication Device General Settings I.6.31.1 General Settings
Settings Logoff Settings I.6.31.2 Logoff Settings
Auth/Acct Track Common Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting I.6.32.1 Logout Confirmation
Setting Screen Display Setting
Scan to Home Settings I.6.33 User Authentication/
Account Track-Scan to Home
Settings
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings I.6.34 User Authentication/
Account Track-Scan to
Authorized Folder Settings

(4) Network Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
Network Settings TCP/IP Settings IPv4 Settings I.6.35.2 IPv4 Settings
IPv6 Settings I.6.35.3 IPv6 Settings
DNS Host I.6.35.4 DNS Host
DNS Domain I.6.35.5 DNS Domain
DNS Server Settings (IPv4) I.6.35.6 DNS Server Settings
(IPv4)
DNS Server Settings (IPv6) I.6.35.7 DNS Server Settings
(IPv6)
IPsec Settings I.6.35.8 IPsec Settings
IP Filtering (Permit Access) I.6.35.12 IP Filtering (Permit
Access)
IP Filtering (Deny Access) I.6.35.13 IP Filtering (Deny
Access)
RAW Port Number I.6.35.14 RAW Port Number
LLMNR Setting I.6.35.15 LLMNR Setting
NetWare Settings IPX Settings I.6.36.1 IPX Settings
NetWare Print Settings I.6.36.2 NetWare Print Settings
User Authentication Settings (NDS) I.6.36.11 User Authentication
Setting (NDS)
HTTP Server Settings I.6.37 Network Settings-http
Server Settings
FTP Settings FTP TX Settings I.6.38.1 FTP TX Settings
FTP Server Settings I.6.38.6 FTP Server Settings
SMB Settings Client Settings I.6.39.1 Client Settings
Print Settings I.6.39.2 Print Settings
WINS Settings I.6.39.6 WINS Settings
Direct Hosting Settings I.6.39.10 Direct Hosting Setting
LDAP Settings Enabling LDAP I.6.40.1 Enabling LDAP
Setting Up LDAP I.6.40.2 Setting Up LDAP
Default LDAP Server Setting I.6.40.21 Default LDAP Server
Setting
E-mail Settings E-mail TX (SMTP) I.6.41 Network Settings-E-mail
Settings-E-mail TX (SMTP)
E-mail RX (POP) I.6.42 Network Settings-E-mail
Settings-E-mail RX (POP)
S/MIME Communication Settings I.6.43 Network Settings-E-mail
Settings-S/MIME Communication
Settings
SNMP Settings I.6.44.1 SNMP Setting
AppleTalk Settings I.6.45 Network Settings-
AppleTalk Settings
Bonjour Setting I.6.46 Network Settings-Bonjour
Setting

I-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

TCP Socket Settings TCP Socket I.6.47.1 TCP Socket
TCP Socket (ASCII Mode) I.6.47.2 TCP Socket (ASCII
Mode)
Network Fax Settings Network Fax IP Address Fax Function I.6.48.1.(1) IP Address Fax
Function Settings Function
Internet Fax Function I.6.48.1.(2) Internet Fax Function
SMTP TX Settings I.6.48.2 SMTP TX Settings
SMTP RX Settings I.6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings
WebDAV Settings WebDAV Client Settings I.6.49 Network Settings-WebDAV
Settings-WebDAV Client Settings
WebDAV Server Settings I.6.50 Network Settings-WebDAV
Settings-WebDAV Server
Settings
Web Service Settings Web Service Common Settings I.6.51 Network Settings-Web
Service Settings-Web Service
Common Settings
Printer Settings I.6.52 Network Settings-Web
Service Settings-Printer Settings
Scanner Settings I.6.53 Network Settings-Web
Service Settings-Scanner
Settings
SSDP Settings I.6.54 Network Settings-SSDP
Settings
Detail Settings Device Setting I.6.55 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-Device Setting
Time Adjustment Setting I.6.56 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-Time Adjustment Setting
Status Notification Register Notification Address I.6.57 Network Settings-Detail
Setting Settings-Status Notification
Setting
Total Counter Notification Settings I.6.58 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-Total Counter
Notification Settings
PING Confirmation I.6.59 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-PING Confirmation
SLP Setting I.6.60 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-SLP Setting
LPD Setting I.6.61 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-LPD Setting
Prefix/Suffix ON/OFF Setting I.6.62.1 ON/OFF Setting
Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting I.6.62.2 Prefix/Suffix Setting
Error Code Display Setting I.6.63 Network Settings-Detail
Settings-Error Code Display
Setting
IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings I.6.64 Network Settings-
IEEE802.1X Authentication
Settings
Web Browser Setting I.6.65 Network Settings-Web
Browser Setting
Bluetooth Setting I.6.66 Network Settings-Bluetooth
Setting

(5) Copier Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) I.6.67.1 Auto Zoom (Platen)
Auto Zoom (ADF) I.6.67.2 Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when APS OFF I.6.67.3 Specify Default Tray
when APS OFF
Print Jobs During Copy Operation I.6.67.4 Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Tri-Fold Print Side I.6.67.5 Tri-Fold Print Side

I-13
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Automatic Image Rotation I.6.67.6 Automatic Image
Rotation

(6) Printer Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
Printer Settings USB Timeout I.6.68.1 USB Timeout
Network Timeout I.6.68.2 Network Timeout
Print XPS Errors I.6.68.3 Print XPS Errors
PSWC Direct Print I.6.68.4 PSWC Direct Print
Assign Account to Acquire Device Info I.6.68.5 Assign Account to
Acquire Device Info

(7) Fax Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
Fax Settings Header Information I.6.69.1 Header Information
Header/Footer Position Header Position I.6.69.2.(1) Header Position
Print Receiver’s Name I.6.69.2.(2) Print Receiver’s
Name
Footer Position I.6.69.2.(3) Footer Position
Line Parameter Setting Dialing Method I.6.69.3.(1) Dialing Method
Receive Mode I.6.69.3.(2) Receive Mode
Number of RX Call Rings I.6.69.3.(3) Number of RX Call
Rings
Number of Redials I.6.69.3.(4) Number of Redials
Redial Interval I.6.69.3.(5) Redial Interval
Line Monitor Sound I.6.69.3.(6) Line Monitor Sound
Line Monitor Sound Vol. I.6.69.3.(7) Line Monitor Sound
Vol.
TX/RX Settings Duplex Print (RX) I.6.69.4.(1) Duplex Print (RX)
Letter/Ledger over A4/A3 I.6.69.4.(2) Letter/Ledger over
A4/A3
Print Paper Selection I.6.69.4.(3) Print Paper Selection
Print Paper Size I.6.69.4.(4) Print Paper Size
Incorrect User Box No. Entry I.6.69.4.(5) Incorrect User Box
No. Entry
Tray Selection for RX Print I.6.69.4.(6) Tray Selection for RX
Print
Min. Reduction for RX Print I.6.69.4.(7) Min. Reduction for RX
Print
Print Separate Fax Pages I.6.69.4.(8) Print Separate Fax
Pages
File After Polling TX I.6.69.4.(9) File After Polling TX
No. of Sets (RX) I.6.69.4.(10) No. of Sets (RX)
Individual Receiving Line Setup I.6.69.4.(11) Individual Receiving
Line Setup
Individual Sender Line Setup I.6.69.4.(12) Individual Sender
Line Setup
Function Settings Function ON/OFF F-Code TX I.6.69.5.(1) F-Code TX
Setting Relay RX I.6.69.5.(2) Relay RX
Relay Printing I.6.69.5.(3) Relay Printing
Destination Check Display I.6.69.5.(4) Destination Check
Function Display Function
Confirm Address (TX) I.6.69.5.(5) Confirm Address (TX)
Confirm Address (Register) I.6.69.5.(6) Confirm Address
(Register)
Memory RX Setting I.6.69.6 Function Settings-
Memory RX Setting

I-14
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Closed Network RX I.6.69.7 Function Settings-Closed
Network RX
Forward TX Setting I.6.69.8 Function Settings-
Forward TX Setting
Incomplete TX Hold I.6.69.9 Function Settings-
Incomplete TX Hold
PC-Fax RX Setting I.6.69.10 Function Settings-PC-
Fax RX Setting
TSI User Box Setting I.6.69.11 Function Settings-TSI
User Box Setting
PBX Connection Setting I.6.69.12 PBX Connection Setting
Report Settings Activity Report I.6.69.13.(1) Activity Report
TX Result Report I.6.69.13.(2) TX Result Report
Sequential TX Report I.6.69.13.(3) Sequential TX
Report
Timer Reservation TX Report I.6.69.13.(4) Timer Reservation
TX Report
Confidential RX Report I.6.69.13.(5) Confidential RX
Report
Bulletin TX Report I.6.69.13.(6) Bulletin TX Report
Relay TX Result Report I.6.69.13.(7) Relay TX Result
Report
Relay Request Report I.6.69.13.(8) Relay Request
Report
PC-Fax TX Error Report I.6.69.13.(9) PC-Fax TX Error
Report
Broadcast Result Report I.6.69.13.(10) Broadcast Result
Report
TX Result Report Check I.6.69.13.(11) TX Result Report
Check
Network Fax RX Error Report I.6.69.13.(12) Network Fax RX
Error Report
MDN Message I.6.69.13.(13) MDN Message
DSN Message I.6.69.13.(14) DSN Message
Print E-mail Message Body I.6.69.13.(15) Print E-mail
Message Body
Job Settings List I.6.69.14 Job Settings List
Multi Line Settings Line Parameter Dialing Method I.6.69.15.(1) Dialing Method
Setting Number of RX Call Rings I.6.69.15.(2) Number of Rx Call
Rings
Line Monitor Sound I.6.69.15.(3) Line Monitor Sound
Function Settings PC-FAX TX Setting I.6.69.16 Multi Line Settings-
Function Settings
Multi Lines Settings I.6.69.17 Multi Line Settings-Multi
Line Settings
Sender Fax No. I.6.69.18 Multi Line Settings-
Sender Fax No.
Network Fax Settings Black Compression Level I.6.69.19 Network Fax Settings-
Black Compression Level
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method I.6.69.20 Network Fax Settings-
Color/Grayscale Multi-Value
Compression Method
Internet Fax Self Rx Ability I.6.69.21 Network Fax Settings-
Internet Fax Self Rx Ability
Internet Fax Advanced Settings I.6.69.22 Network Fax Settings-
Internet Fax Advanced Settings
IP Address Fax Operation Settings I.6.69.23 Network Fax Settings-IP
Address Fax Operation Settings
Fax Print Quality Settings I.6.69.24 Fax Print Quality
Settings

(8) System Connection

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.

I-15
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

System Connection OpenAPI Settings Access Setting I.6.70.1 OpenAPI Settings-
Access Setting
SSL/Port Settings I.6.70.2 OpenAPI Settings-SSL/
Port Settings
Authentication I.6.70.3 OpenAPI Settings-
Authentication
External Application Connection I.6.70.4 OpenAPI Settings-
External Application Connection
Call Remote Center I.6.70.5 Call Remote Center
Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting I.6.70.6 Prefix/Suffix Automatic
Setting
Printer Information I.6.70.7 Printer Information
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting I.6.70.8 Cellular Phone/PDA
Setting

(9) Security Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
Security Settings Administrator Password I.6.71 Security Settings-
Administrator Password
User Box Admin. Setting I.6.72 Security Settings-User Box
Admin. Setting
Administrator Security Levels I.6.73 Security Settings-
Administrator Security Levels
Security Details Password Rules I.6.74.1 Password Rules
Prohibited Functions When I.6.74.2 Prohibited Functions
Authentication Error When Authentication Error
Confidential Document Access Method I.6.74.3 Confidential Document
Access Method
Manual Destination Input I.6.74.4 Manual Destination Input
Print Data Capture I.6.74.5 Print Data Capture
Job Log Settings I.6.74.6 Job Log Settings
Restrict Fax TX I.6.74.7 Restrict Fax TX
Hide Personal Information I.6.74.8 Hide Personal
Information
Hide Personal Information (MIB) I.6.74.9 Hide Personal
Information (MIB)
Display Activity Log I.6.74.10 Display Activity Log
Initialize I.6.74.11 Initialize
Job History Thumbnail Display I.6.74.12 Job History Thumbnail
Display
Secure Print Only I.6.74.13 Secure Print Only
Copy Guard I.6.74.14 Copy Guard
Password Copy I.6.74.15 Password Copy
Web browser contents access I.6.74.16 Web browser contents
access
Enhanced Security Mode I.6.75 Security Settings-
Enhanced Security Mode
HDD Settings Check HDD Capacity I.6.76.1 Check HDD Capacity
Overwrite HDD Data I.6.76.2 Overwrite HDD Data
Overwrite All Data I.6.76.3 Overwrite All Data
HDD Lock Password I.6.76.4 HDD Lock Password
Format HDD I.6.76.5 Format HDD
HDD Encryption Setting I.6.76.6 HDD Encryption Setting
Function Management Settings Usage Setting for Each Function I.6.77.1 Usage Settings for Each
Function
Maximum Job Allowance I.6.77.2 Maximum Job Allowance
Network Function Usage Settings I.6.77.3 Network Function Usage
Settings
Stamp Settings Apply Stamps I.6.78.1 Apply Stamps
Delete Registered Stamp I.6.78.2 Delete Registered Stamp

I-16
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Administrator Settings Ref. page

Image Log Transfer Settings I.6.79 Security Settings-Image
Log Transfer Settings
Driver Password Encryption Setting I.6.80 Security Settings-Driver
Password Encryption Setting

(10) Other Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Administrator Settings Ref. page
License Settings Get Request Code I.6.81.1 Get Request Code
Install License I.6.81.2 Install License
List of Enabled Functions I.6.81.3 List of Enabled Functions
OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting I.6.82 OpenAPI Authentication
Management Setting

3.2.4 Other Settings

(1) Check Consumable Life

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Other Settings Ref. page
Check Consumable Life Print List -

(2) Banner Printing

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Other Settings Ref. page
Banner Printing I.7.1 Banner Printing

I-17
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

(3) My Panel Settings

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Other Settings Ref. page
My Panel Settings Language Setting I.7.2 My Panel Settings
Measurement Unit Settings
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Color Selection Setting
Main Menu Settings
Initial Screen Settings

(4) Device Information

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Other Settings Ref. page
Device Information I.7.3 Device Information

(5) Meter Count

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Other Settings Ref. page
Meter Count Check Details Print List
Coverage Rate* I.7.4 Meter Count
Copy

I-18
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY

Other Settings Ref. page

Print
Scan/Fax
Other
• *: Coverage rate can be used as a rough toner consumption estimate and may not completely reflect the actual amount of toner used.

(6) Remaining Copy Count

NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
Other Settings Ref. page
Remaining Copy Count * -
• *: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number of copies the user or account can make.

3.3 Starting/Exiting
3.3.1 Starting procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. The Utility Mode screen will appear.

3.3.2 Exiting procedure

1. Touch the [Close] key.

I-19
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX
bizhub 652/552/602/502 REGISTRATION)

4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX REGISTRATION)

One-Touch User Box Registration-Outline
• In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is set to ON, when you operate the copier without
performing user authentication, this menu is not displayed.
• It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to “Set” by the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

4.1 Create One-Touch destination

4.1.1 Address Book (Public)/(Personal)
(1) E-mail
(a) Use
• To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.

(2) User Box

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)

(a) Use
• To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the hard disk in the main body.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.
• At least one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address.

(3) Fax
(a) Use
• To register/change the fax destinations.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.

(4) PC (SMB)
(a) Use
• To register/change SMB address to send scanned data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.

(5) FTP
(a) Use
• To register/change FTP address to send scanned data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.

(6) WebDAV
(a) Use
• To register/change WebDAV address to send scanned data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting.

(7) IP Address Fax

• Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

I-20
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX
bizhub 652/552/602/502 REGISTRATION)

(a) Use
• To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, change or delete the setting.

(8) Internet Fax

• Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(a) Use
• To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, change or delete the setting.

4.1.2 Group
(1) Use
• To register/change a group to send scanned data/fax data simultaneously.

(2) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed group to check, edit or delete them.
• At least one address must be registered for registering a new group.

4.1.3 E-mail Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the management device 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) E-mail Subject

(a) Use
• To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to detail check, edit or delete the setting.
• The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].

(2) E-mail Body

(a) Use
• To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting.
• The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].

4.2 Create User Box

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)
• This menu is not available due to functional restriction during user authentication when [User Box] is set to Restrict.
• It will not be displayed when [Allow/Restrict User Box] is set to “Restrict” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Settings] → [User Box Settings]

4.2.1 Public/Personal User Box

(1) Use
• To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine.
• Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use.

(2) Procedure
• A new box can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

I-21
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX
bizhub 652/552/602/502 REGISTRATION)

4.2.2 Bulletin Board User Box

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)
• It will not be displayed due to functional restriction upon user authentication when [User Box] is set to “OFF.”
• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
• It will not be displayed during user authentication if the fax operation is set to “Restrict” by the function restriction.

(1) Use
• To register/change the bulletin board user box.

(2) Procedure
• A new box can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

4.2.3 Relay User Box

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)
• It will not be displayed due to functional restriction upon user authentication when [User Box] is set to “OFF.”
• It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted.
• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay]

(1) Use
• To register/change the Relay User Box.

(2) Procedure
• A new box can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations

• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(1) Outline
• The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual user’s access to each destination. This enables security control
by restricting information that can be accessed.

(a) Apply Levels

• One of the six levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all destinations. Similarly, one of the levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all
users. Depending on the combination of the destination and user levels, destinations that a user can access can be limited.
For example, users of level 2 can access the destinations that belong to the levels 0 to 2, but cannot access to the destinations that
belong to the levels 3 to 5. Level 5 users can access all destinations of the levels 0 to 5.

(b) Groups
• A group can be made with a certain name to allow its members to access its destinations. Users and destinations can be registered
for the group so that the registered destinations can be accessed by the registered users.
Access restriction depending on an individual level is also applied to the group with access to the destinations determined by the
combination of the user and destination levels within a group.
• A destination can be included in only one group.
• A user can be included in multiple different groups.

4.3.1 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations

(1) Address Book
(a) Use
• Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the address book.

(b) Procedure
• Select a destination, press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting.

(2) Group
(a) Use
• Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the group.

(b) Procedure
• Select a destination, press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting.

I-22
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. UTILITY (ONE-TOUCH/USER BOX
bizhub 652/552/602/502 REGISTRATION)

(3) Program
(a) Use
• Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the program.

(b) Procedure
• Select a destination, press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting.

I-23
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.1 System Settings
5.1.1 Language Selection
(1) Use
• To select the language on the LCD display.
• To change the language used on the control panel.

(2) Procedure
• The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] available from [System 1] under Service Mode.
I.10.10.1 Marketing Area

5.1.2 Measurement Unit Settings

(1) Use
• To select the unit displayed on the LCD display.

(2) Default setting

• The default setting varies depending on the marketing area.

(3) Setting item

• mm (Numerical Value)
• inch (Numerical Value)
• inch (Fraction)

5.1.3 Paper Tray Settings

(1) Auto Tray Selection Settings
(a) Use
• To set the tray for automatic selection when APS is being set.
• To establish the priority for switching the tray when ATS is being set.

(b) Procedure
• Select the tray on the [Auto Tray Select] screen.
• Set the priority on the [Tray Priority] screen.

(2) Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF

(a) Use
• To set whether to automatically switch to another tray with same size paper when the paper feed tray runs out of paper during printing.

(b) Default setting

• Restrict

(c) Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”

(3) No Matching Paper in Tray Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether to switch to another tray automatically when the specified tray runs out of paper during printing.
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) It stops printing when the specified tray runs out of paper.
Switch Trays (Tray Priority) To switch to another tray with the specified paper and print when the tray is out of paper.

(b) Default setting

• Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)

(c) Setting item

• “Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)”
• Switch Trays (Tray Priority)

(4) Print Lists

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)

(a) Use
• To set the paper feed tray for output the list for the meter count or the unit check.

I-24
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

• It sets the simplex/duplex printing of the output for the sales counter or the unit check list.

(b) Default setting

• Paper tray: Tray 1
• Simplex/Duplex: 1-Sided

(5) Post Inserter Settings

• It will be displayed only when the optional post inserter PI-505 is mounted.

(a) Use
• To set the paper tray, paper type and paper size for the post inserter.

(b) Default setting

• Paper Tray: F1
• Paper Type: Plain Paper
• Paper Size: Auto Detect

(c) Setting item

Paper Tray
• “F1”
• F2
Paper Type
• “Plain Paper”
• Thick 1
• Thick 1+
• Thick 2
Paper Size
• “Auto Detect”
• Standard Size
• Custom Size

5.1.4 Auto Color Level Adjust.

(1) Use
• To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-and-white original in the auto color mode.

(2) Default setting

• 3

(3) Setting item

• 1 (Black) to 5 (Full Color)

5.1.5 Power Save Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Administrator Security Level]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Low Power Mode Settings

(a) Use
• To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
• Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.

(b) Procedure
• Use the 10-key pad for setting.

(c) Default setting

• 15 min

(d) Setting range

• 10 to 240

(2) Sleep Mode Settings

(a) Use
• To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
• Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control.
• “OFF” will only be displayed when [Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting] in Service Mode is set.

I-25
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(b) Procedure
• Use the 10-key pad for setting.

(c) Default setting

• 30 min

(d) Setting item

• 15 to 240
• OFF

5.1.6 Output Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)

(1) Print/Fax Output Settings

(a) Use
• To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received.
Batch Print Starts printing when all data are received.
Page Print Starts printing every time data for each page are received.

(b) Default setting

• Printer: Page Print
• Fax: Batch Print
NOTE
• [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.

(2) Output Tray Setting

• It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526/527 is mounted.

(a) Use
• To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports).

(b) Default setting

• Copy: Tray 1
• Print: Tray 1
• Report Output: Tray 2
• Fax: Tray 2
NOTE
• [Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-602 is mounted to the finisher FS-526.
• [Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-603 is mounted to the finisher FS-527.

5.1.7 AE Level Adjustment

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)

(1) Use
• To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure).
The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be.
• To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value
• To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value

(2) Default setting

• 2

(3) Setting range

• 0 to 4

5.1.8 Auto Paper Select for Small Original

(1) Use
• To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small, or no original is being set.
• To copy the original such as business cards with which the original detection is not effective.

I-26
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

Copy on Small Size Copies on A5 paper.

Copy on A4/Letter Copies on A4 or Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper.
Prohibit Copy Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected. Paper feed tray needs to be selected
prior to pressing the Start key.

(2) Default setting

• Prohibit Copy

(3) Setting item

• Copy on Small Size
• Copy on A4/Letter
• “Prohibit Copy”

5.1.9 Blank Page Print Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Use
• Select whether or not to print the stamp/composition on blank pages.

(2) Default setting

• Do Not Print

(3) Setting item

• Print
• “Do Not Print”

5.1.10 Page Number Print Position

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

(1) Use
• Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to
print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position.

(2) Default setting

• Left & Right Bind: All the Same/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same

(3) Setting item

• “Left & Right Bind: All the Same/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same”
• Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical/Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
• Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical/Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical

5.1.11 Select Keyboard

(1) Use
• Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel.
• The type of keyboard to be displayed when [Local Keyboard] is selected depends on the language selected in [User Settings] → [System
Settings] → [Language Selection].
• The type of keyboard corresponding to each language is shown below.
Language Keyboard
Japanese Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Japanese)
English (US) * Standard keyboard (US ASCII) only
English (UK) * Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (UK)
French Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (French)
Italian Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (Italian)
German Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (German)
Spanish Standard keyboard (US ASCII) + Local keyboard (Spanish)
Simplified Chinese Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Simplified Chinese)
Traditional Chinese Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Traditional Chinese)
Korean Standard keyboard (JIS) + Local keyboard (Korean)
• *: If [Marketing Area] is set to Europe and [Language Selection] is set to English, English (UK) takes effect. If another marketing area
and English are selected, English (US) takes effect.

I-27
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(2) Setting item

• Standard Keyboard
• Local keyboard
NOTE
• The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] available from [System 1] under Service Mode.
I.10.10.1 Marketing Area

5.2 Custom Display Settings

5.2.1 Copier Settings
(1) Default Tab
(a) Use
• Selects a default tab display in the copy mode.
Basic Normal basic screen
Quick Copy • This screen displays all options that can be selected for Paper, Zoom, and Duplex/Combine
functions.
• For color functions, all selectable options can be displayed on the screen.
• The normal [Basic] screen is also displayed as another tab on the screen.

(b) Default setting

• Basic

(c) Setting item

• “Basic”
• Quick Copy

(2) Shortcut Key 1/2

(a) Use
• Selects whether to use the shortcut key.
• Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys displayed on the screen.

(3) Quick Settings 1, 2, 3, 4

(a) Use
• Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on the basic settings screen.
• The registered setting condition can be invoked by only pressing the corresponding easy setting key.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When this setting is set to ON, select the copy functions you wish to register.

(4) Default Tab Density Settings

(a) Use
• Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the
basic settings screen to adjust the copy density.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified.

I-28
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.2.2 Scan/Fax Settings

(1) Default Tab
(a) Use
• To set the basic screen display in scan/fax mode.

(b) Default setting

• Address Book

(c) Setting item

• Address Search (LDAP)
• Job History
• “Address Book”
• Direct Input

(2) Program Default

(a) Use
• To set the default display for the program screen during scan/fax mode.
• To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scan/fax mode.

(b) Default setting

• PAGE 1

(c) Setting item

• Temporary One-Touch
• “PAGE1” to PAGE27

(3) Address Book Index Default

(a) Use
• To set the default display for the address book screen during scan/fax mode.
• To keep the default display instead of search string on the address book which frequently changes during scan/fax mode.

(b) Default setting

• Favorite

(c) Setting item

• “Favorite”
• ABC to WXYZ
• etc

(4) Shortcut Key 1/2

(a) Use
• Selects whether to use the shortcut key.
• Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys displayed on the screen.

(5) Default Address Book

(a) Use
• Sets a default screen display for the scan/fax mode where the address book is set to be displayed.

(b) Default setting

• Index

(c) Setting item

• “Index”
• Address Type

I-29
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(6) Default Address Type

(a) Use
• When the Default Address Book setting is set to “Address Type”, select an address type that is displayed as the default in the “Address
Book” tab.

(b) Default setting

• Group

(c) Setting item

• Fax
• E-Mail
• Box
• I-Fax
• IP Ad. Fax
• PC (SMB)
• FTP
• WebDAV
• “Group”

5.2.3 User Box Settings

(1) Default Tab
(a) Use
• Selects a default tab display in the user box mode.

(b) Default setting

• Public

(c) Setting item

• “Public”
• Personal
• System
• Group

(2) Shortcut Key 1/2

(a) Use
• Selects whether to use the shortcut key.
• Adds the shortcut keys of frequently used user box functions to the basic screen.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys displayed on the screen.

5.2.4 Copy Screen

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 1, key counter or vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reservation] is set to License.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Copy Operating Screen

(a) Use
• To set the display on the control panel screen during printing.
Yes The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. The job can be reserved with [Program Next Job].
No The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out. The normal copy setting screen will be displayed. The copy
reservation is available.

(b) Default setting

• No

(c) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

I-30
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.2.5 Fax Active Screen

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter or vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) TX Display
(a) Use
• To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting fax.

(b) Default setting

• No

(c) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

(2) RX Display
(a) Use
• To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving fax.

(b) Default setting

• No

(c) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

5.2.6 Color Selection Settings

(1) Use
• Specifies a color that highlights a selection on the control panel.

(2) Default setting

• Green

(3) Setting item

• “Green”
• Blue
• Yellow
• Pumpkin

5.2.7 Left Panel Display Default

(1) Use
• Specifies an item that is shown as a default on the left panel display.
Job List (List Display) Displays a list of jobs that are both being printed and waiting to be printed.
Job List (Status Display) Displays the status of jobs that are being processed.
Check Job Settings Displays the setting of the copy job that is being printed.

(2) Default setting

• Job List

(3) Setting item

• “Job List”
• Check Job Settings

5.2.8 Search Option Settings

(1) Uppercase and Lowercase Letters
(a) Use
• Select whether or not to differentiate between upper case and lowercase letters.

(b) Default setting

• Differentiate

(c) Setting item

• “Differentiate”

I-31
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

• Do Not Differentiate

(2) Search Option Screen

(a) Use
• Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase Letters] setting in the advanced search.
• Displaying the search option screen allows changing the search criteria for an individual search.

(b) Default setting

• Off

(c) Setting item

• On
• “Off”

5.3 Copier Settings

5.3.1 Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple
• It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher SD-508 is installed in the finisher FS-526.
• It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher SD-509 is installed in the finisher FS-527.

(1) Use
• To set whether to set the auto booklet when fold & staple is selected.

(2) Default setting

• Auto Select Booklet

(3) Setting item

• “Auto Select Booklet”
• OFF

5.3.2 Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet

(1) Use
• To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when combine or booklet is selected during auto paper select.

(2) Default setting

• Auto Display Zoom Ratio

(3) Setting item

• “Auto Display Zoom Ratio”
• OFF

5.3.3 Auto Sort/Group Selection

(1) Use
• Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of two or more sheets.
Yes Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is placed on the ADF and the start key is
pressed. Automatically enables the Auto sort/group selection when two or more sheets of originals are placed on the ADF and
the start key is pressed.
No Disable the Auto sort/group selection.

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

5.3.4 Default Copy Settings

• This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to Set in the [Service Mode] →
[Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].
• This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to inform that the vendor’s main power switch needs to
be checked or coins (a card) are not inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] →
[Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• To make default settings for the copy mode.

I-32
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

Current Setting The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered
as the default settings of copy functions.
Factory Default The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings
of copy functions.
• * The machine is initialized at the following timings:
• The main power switch is turned ON.
• Panel is reset.
• In an Interrupt mode.
• Auto Reset
• The password entry screen for account track is changed.

(2) Setting item

• Current Setting
• Factory Default

5.3.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings

• Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] → [User Settings] → [Copier Settings] in the enlarge display mode.

(1) Use
• To make default settings for the enlarge display mode.
Current Setting The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered
as the default settings of copy functions.
Factory Default The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings
of copy functions.
• * The machine is initialized at the following timings:
• The main power switch is turned ON.
• Panel is reset.
• In an Interrupt mode.
• Auto Reset
• The password entry screen for account track is changed.

(2) Setting item

• Current Setting
• Factory Default

5.3.6 When AMS Direction is Incorrect

(1) Use
• To set whether to print when the original is set in different direction from the set paper during auto zoom select.
Print To print according to the selected direction and size of paper.
Delete Job To display alarm and cancel the job.

(2) Default setting

• Print

(3) Setting item

• “Print”
• Delete Job

5.3.7 Separate Scan Output Method

(1) Use
• To set the output mode at Separate Scan setting.
Page Print Print consecutively during the read operation.
Batch print • Print all at once after reading all data.
• Copy setting can be changed after the read operation.

(2) Default setting

• Page Print

(3) Setting item

• “Page Print”
• Batch Print

5.3.8 Enlargement Rotation

(1) Use
• Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or
the Original glass) in the copying process.

I-33
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

Allow Makes an enlargement rotation.

Restrict Disables an enlargement rotation.

(2) Default setting

• Restrict

(3) Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”

5.3.9 Auto Zoom (Platen)

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

(1) Use
• To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at
automatic paper selection mode.)

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

5.3.10 Auto Zoom (ADF)

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

(1) Use
• To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at automatic
paper selection mode.)

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

5.3.11 Specify Default Tray when APS Off

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

(1) Use
• To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.

(2) Default setting

• Tray Before APS OFF

(3) Setting item

• “Tray Before APS OFF”
• Default Tray

5.3.12 Select Tray for Insert Sheet

(1) Use
• To select the default setting of the tray for cover sheet paper.

(2) Default setting

• Tray 2

5.3.13 Tri-Fold Print Side

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
• It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher SD-508 is installed in the finisher FS-526.

I-34
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(1) Use
• Specifies the side of copies to be folded.
Inside Folds paper in three with the printed side in.
Outside Folds paper in three with the printed side out.

(2) Default setting

• Inside

(3) Setting item

• Outside
• “Inside”

5.3.14 Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification

• It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher SD-508 is installed in the finisher FS-526.

(1) Use
• Specify whether to apply Half-Fold/Tri-Fold for all pages together or for specific pages when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are half-folded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the
sheets are printed without being folded.

(2) Default setting

• Multiple Sheets

(3) Setting item

• One Sheet at a Time
• “Multiple Sheets”

5.3.15 Half-Fold Specification

• It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher SD-509 is installed in the finisher FS-527.

(1) Use
• Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are half-folded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the
sheets are printed without being folded.

(2) Default setting

• Multiple Sheets

(3) Setting item

• One Sheet at a Time
• “Multiple Sheets”

5.3.16 Print Jobs During Copy Operation

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

(1) Use
• To set whether to accept the printing job for print data or fax data during copy operation.
Accept Receives the print data or fax data to print.
Receive Only Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished.

(2) Default setting

• Accept

(3) Setting item

• “Accept”
• Receive Only

5.3.17 Automatic Image Rotation

• [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

I-35
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(1) Use
• Sets whether to automatically rotate images to print if the original and specified paper directions are not consistent with each other.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

5.3.18 Finishing Program

• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.

(1) Use
• Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen.
To display the button, register the contents of the finishing program.
Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• When selecting “ON,” select the contents to be registered in the finishing program.

5.3.19 Card Shot Settings

(1) Layout
(a) Use
• To set the initial copy layout setting in card shot mode.

(b) Default setting

• Top/Bottom

(c) Setting item

• “Top/Bottom”
• Left/Right (Top Half)
• Left/Right

(2) Zoom
(a) Use
• To set the initial zoom setting in card shot mode.

(b) Default setting

• Full Size

(c) Setting item

• “Full Size”
• x 1.0

(3) Store Original Size

(a) Use
• To pre-register original sizes that are used in card shot mode.

(b) Procedure
• Enter an original size, name it, and register the data.

5.4 Scan/Fax Settings

5.4.1 JPEG Compression Level
(1) Use
• To set the JPEG compression method when scanning with JPEG while in scan/fax mode.
High Quality Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
Standard Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning.

I-36
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

High Compression Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning.

(2) Default setting

• Standard

(3) Setting item

• High Quality
• “Standard”
• High Compression

5.4.2 Black Compression Level

(1) Use
• To set the black compression method for scanning in the black mode while in scan/fax mode.

(2) Default setting

• MMR

(3) Setting item

• MH
• “MMR”

5.4.3 TWAIN Lock Time

(1) Use
• To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning.

(2) Default setting

• 120 sec.

(3) Setting range

• 30 to 300 sec.

5.4.4 Default Scan/Fax Settings

• This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to set in the [Service Mode] →
[Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].
• This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to inform that the vendor’s main power switch needs to
be checked or coins (a card) are not inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] →
[Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• To make default settings for the fax/scan mode.
Current Setting The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered
as the default settings of fax/scan functions.
Factory Default The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings
of fax/scan functions.
• * The machine is initialized at the following timings:
• The main power switch is turned ON.
• Panel is reset.
• In an Interrupt mode.
• Auto Reset
• The password entry screen for account track is changed.

(2) Setting item

• Current Setting
• Factory Default

5.4.5 Default Enlarge Display Settings

• Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] → [User Settings] → [Scan/Fax Settings] in the enlarge display mode.

(1) Use
• To make default settings for the enlarge display mode.
Current Setting The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered
as the default settings of fax/scan functions.
Factory Default The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings
of fax/scan functions.
• * The machine is initialized at the following timings:
• The main power switch is turned ON.

I-37
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

• Panel is reset.
• In an Interrupt mode.
• Auto Reset
• The password entry screen for account track is changed.

(2) Setting item

• Current Setting
• Factory Default

5.4.6 Compact PDF/XPS Compression Level

(1) Use
• Selects a compression method applied to scanned data that is produced with the use of Compact PDF/XPS in the scan/fax mode.
High Quality Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
Standard Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning.
High Compression Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning.

(2) Default setting

• Standard

(3) Setting item

• High Quality
• “Standard”
• High Compression

5.4.7 Color TIFF Type

(1) Use
• Select the compression level used for saving TIFF format data in color.
TIFF (TTN2) Scan in TTN2.
TIFF (modified TAG) Scan in modified TAG.

(2) Default setting

• TIFF (TTN2)

(3) Setting item

• “TIFF (TTN2)”
• TIFF (modified TAG)

5.4.8 OCR Operation Setting

• It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-105) is activated.

(1) Use
• To set the method of OCR operation where a searchable PDF file is created.

(2) Default setting

• Prioritize Quality

(3) Setting item

• “Prioritize Quality”
• Prioritize Speed

5.4.9 Graphic Outlining

(1) Use
• To set the precision of outline conversion where outline PDFs are created.
• To set the processing level where scanned document is divided into text areas and image areas and the text is converted to outlines.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• “OFF”
• LOW
• MIDDLE
• HIGH

I-38
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.5 Printer Settings

5.5.1 Basic Settings
(1) PDL Setting
(a) Use
• To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing.

(b) Default setting

• Auto

(c) Setting item

• “Auto”
• PCL
• PS

(2) Number of Copies

(a) Use
• To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• 1

(c) Setting range

• “1” to 9999

(3) Original Direction

(a) Use
• To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing.

(b) Default setting

• Portrait

(c) Setting item

• “Portrait”
• Landscape

(4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP

(a) Use
• To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during RIP process of the current job.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(5) A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch

(a) Use
• To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter (8 1/ x 11) size paper, and A3 and Ledger (11 x 17) size paper in reading.
2
NOTE
• When switching the size, the image will be printed in the same magnification.
• The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(6) Banner Sheet Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to print on the banner (front cover) page.

I-39
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(7) Binding Direction Adjustment

(a) Use
• Specifies the alignment between the sides of paper (binding position adjustment) in duplex printing.
• To achieve faster printing performance, select Productivity Priority. To address misalignment problems between sides of copies in the
horizontal and vertical directions, select Finishing Priority.
Finishing Priority Able to optimize sides aligning operation as the process is performed after the machine
receives all of the print data.
Productivity Priority Able to accelerate print speed as sides alignment proceeds together with data reception and
print operation.
Control Adjustments Comply with the command from the printer driver and does not take the side alignment step.

(b) Default setting

• Finishing Priority

(c) Setting item

• “Finishing Priority”
• Productivity Priority
• Control Adjustments

(8) Line Width Adjustment

(a) Use
• To correct line width of the output data during PC print.

(b) Default setting

• Thin

(c) Setting item

• “Thin”
• Normal
• Thick

(9) Gray Background Text Correction

(a) Use
• Letters or lines on a gray background may look thicker than those on a non-gray background.
ON Makes characters and lines on a grayscale background thicker and sharpens the outlines of characters and figures.
OFF Makes grayscale background text correction by selecting Thin, Normal, or Thick in [Line Width Adjustment]. If selecting
“ON” makes lines too thick, select “OFF.”

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

5.5.2 Paper Setting

(1) Paper Tray
(a) Use
• To set the paper feed tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when paper feed tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• Auto

(2) Paper Size

(a) Use
• To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing.

I-40
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

• To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.

(3) 2-Sided Print

(a) Use
• To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver.
• To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(4) Binding Position

(a) Use
• To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• Left Bind

(c) Setting item

• Top Bind
• “Left Bind”
• Right Bind

(5) Staple
• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.

(a) Use
• To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• 1 Position
• 2 Position
• “OFF”

(6) Punch
• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher and punch kit are mounted.

(a) Use
• To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• 2-Hole/3-Hole/4-Hole *
• “OFF”
*: The number of punch holes being set is available from [Service Mode] → [Finisher].

(7) Banner Paper Tray

(a) Use
• To set the feed tray for printing on the banner (front cover) page.

(b) Default setting

• Auto

I-41
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.5.3 PCL Settings

(1) Font Settings
(a) Use
• To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
• It can be selected from the Resident font or the download font.

(b) Procedure
1. When selecting from the Internal font, touch [Internal], and select the one from the displayed font list.

(c) Default setting

• Courier

(2) Symbol Set

(a) Use
• To set the font symbol set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To use when the font symbol set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.

(b) Default setting

• Roman-8 or PC8, Code Page 437

(3) Font Size

(a) Use
• To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
• To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
• To set scalable font (: Point) and bitmap font (: Pitch) respectively.

(b) Default setting

• Scalable Font: 12.00 points
• Bitmap Font: 10.00 pitch

(4) Line/Page
(a) Use
• To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data.

(b) Default setting

• 60 or 64 lines
NOTE
• Default setting value differs depending on the values by the following two different settings.
[Utility/Counter] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Basic Setting] → [Original Direction]
[Utility/Counter] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Paper Setting] → [Default Paper Size]

(c) Setting range

• 5 to 128

(5) CR/LF Mapping

(a) Use
• To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
Mode 1 CR → CR-LF LF=LF FF=FF
Mode 2 CR=CR LF → CR-LF FF → CR-FF
Mode 3 CR → CR-LF LF → CR-LF FF → CR-FF
OFF Does not replace

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• Mode 1
• Mode 2
• Mode 3
• “OFF”

I-42
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.5.4 PS Setting
(1) Print PS Errors
(a) Use
• To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS rasterizing.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

5.5.5 XPS Settings

• This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed.

(1) Verify XPS Digital Signature

(a) Use
• Selects whether to verify digital signatures attached to XPS (XML Paper Specification) files when printing the files.
• When digital signature verification is selected, files with invalid digital signatures are not printed.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

5.5.6 Print Reports

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)

(1) Use
• To output the report or demo page concerning the print setting.
• To check the setting concerning the printer.
The types of report available for output are as follows.
Configuration Page The list of printer setting will be output.
Demo Page The test page will be output.
PCL Font List PCL font list will be output.
PS Font List PS font list will be output.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports].
2. Select the report to be output.
3. Select the feed tray.
4. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.

5.5.7 TIFF Image Paper Setting

(1) Use
• Select this option to configure how to determine the paper size when directly printing TIFF or JPEG image data.
Auto • Select this option to calculate the size of the image based on its resolution and the number of
pixels to print the image on paper that fits the image size.
• Select this option to print images on paper of the same size as the image.
Priority Paper Size • Select this option to print on paper of the priority paper size specified on the machine.
• If the image size is larger than the paper size, it is automatically reduced.
NOTE
• When “Auto” is selected and paper larger than the image size is not in the paper trays, paper size error occurs.

(2) Default setting

• Auto

(3) Setting item

• “Auto”
• Priority Paper Size

I-43
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

5.6 Change Password

• When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete.
• This menu is available only when box administrator authentication is established during user authentication or account track.

5.6.1 Use
• To modify the password used for the user authentication.

5.6.2 Procedure
• Enter the user authentication password with the keys on the control panel.
1. Current Password: Enter the user authentication password currently used.
2. New Password: Enter the new user authentication password to be used.
3. Retype Password: Enter the new user authentication password again.
NOTE
• When [Password Rules] which can be displayed by the following setting is set to “ON”, password using the single letter or the
password same with the previous one, less than 8-digit will not be modified.
[Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting]
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, entering the incorrect password three times will cause access lock. When an access
lock occurred, turn the main power switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds or more and turn main power switch ON again to enter
the password again.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

5.7 Change E-mail Address

• When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete.
• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

5.7.1 Use
• To modify the e-mail address which is registered as a user.

5.7.2 Procedure
• Enter the new e-mail address using the keys on the control panel.

5.8 Change Icon

• When conducting user authentication, it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete.

5.8.1 Use
• Change the icon specified as registered user information.

5.8.2 Procedure
• Select the icon and press [OK].

5.9 Register Authentication Settings

• It will be displayed when user authentication (MFP) is completed and the following is met; [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] is set to
“Allow” in [Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Settings] → [System Settings] → [Restrict User Access] → [Restrict Access to Job Settings].

5.9.1 Use
• To enable users to register or delete their own biometric/IC card information.

5.10 Register Authentication Settings-Default Application Selection

• It will be displayed only when the intermediate authentication server is used for user authentication and user authentication is completed.
However, it cannot be displayed depending on the setting of the application side.

5.10.1 Use
• For each user, set the application that is started just after the intermediate authentication.

5.10.2 Procedure
• As the applications registered in MFP appear, select an application you wish to set as the one to be started at the beginning, and touch
[OK].

5.11 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting

5.11.1 Link File Error Notification
• It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To set whether to print a job where a link error occurs when you are trying to print a web page and its links (page or file) from a cellular
phone or PDA.

I-44
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. UTILITY (USER SETTINGS)

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

5.11.2 Proxy Server Use

• It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To set whether to use a proxy server when communicating with a cellular phone or PDA.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

5.11.3 Print
• It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To set different print settings used when printing from a cell phone or PDA.

(2) Procedure
• The following items can be set.
• Basic: 1-sided/2-sided, Paper, Finishing
• Application: Page Margin, Stamp/Composition

I-45
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS)

Administrator Settings-Outline
• The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service
Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”)
NOTE
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, entering the incorrect administrator password three times will cause access lock.
The access lock is released after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the main power switch is turned OFF and then
ON more than 10 seconds later.
The access lock can be released by touching keys as follows.
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator unlocking].

6.1 System Settings-Power Save Settings

6.1.1 Low Power Mode Settings
(1) Use
• To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
• Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.

(2) Procedure
• Use the 10-key pad for setting.

(3) Default setting

• 15 min.

(4) Setting range

• 10 to 240

6.1.2 Sleep Mode Settings

(1) Use
• To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
• Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control.
• “OFF” will only be displayed when [Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting] in Service Mode is set.
NOTE
• The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF.”

(2) Procedure
• Use the 10-key pad for setting.

(3) Default setting

• 30 min.

(4) Setting item

• 15 to 240
• OFF

6.1.3 Power Save Key

(1) Use
• To set the type of the power save mode which starts by pressing the Power Save key.

(2) Default setting

• Low Power

(3) Setting item

• “Low Power”
• Sleep

6.1.4 Enter Power Save Mode

(1) Use
• To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax/PC print during power save mode.
Normal Switches to the power save mode according to the normal power save mode after the printing.
Immediately Switches to the power save mode immediately after the printing.

(2) Default setting

• Normal

I-46
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• “Normal”
• Immediately

6.1.5 Auto Power OFF Settings

(1) Use
• To specify the time when the main power switch should be automatically turned off.

(2) Default setting

• Europe area only: “Yes (20:00)”
• Except Europe area “OFF”

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• OFF
NOTE
• If you select "Yes", specify the time when the main power switch should be turned off.

6.2 System Settings-Output Settings

6.2.1 Print/Fax Output Settings
(1) Use
• To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received.
Batch Print Starts printing when all data are received.
Page Print Starts printing every time data for each page are received.

(2) Default setting

• Printer: Page Print
• Fax: Batch Print
NOTE
• [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.

(3) Setting item

• Batch Print
• Page Print

6.2.2 Output Tray Settings

• It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526/527 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports).

(2) Default setting

• Copy: Tray 1
• Print: Tray 1
• Report Output: Tray 2
• Fax: Tray 2
NOTE
• [Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-602 is mounted to the finisher FS-526.
• [Tray 3] will be displayed only when the job separator JS-603 is mounted to the finisher FS-527.

6.2.3 Shift Output Each Job

• It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526/527 or the job separator JS-504 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To set whether to offset each job when paper is printed using the finisher.
• Some paper type may fail to be discharged or get deteriorated loading when large volume copies are printed using the finisher.
This function is used to print large volume copies when finisher is mounted.
(When this function is set to “No”, the paper is discharged without offsetting the paper to the center of the tray.)

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

I-47
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.3 System Settings-Date/Time Settings

6.3.1 Use
• To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock.
• This setting should be carried out for set up.

6.3.2 Procedure
• For time zone, set the time difference with the world standard time.
• Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes)
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, [Set Data] will be displayed. Touch [Set Data] and modify the time.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Detail Settings] → [Time Adjustment Setting]

6.4 System Settings-Daylight Saving Time

6.4.1 Use
• To set whether to set the daylight saving time.
• To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time.

6.4.2 Default setting

• No

6.4.3 Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• When setting to Yes, set the time difference to move up.
• Default setting : 60 min.
• Setting range : 1 to 150

6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings

6.5.1 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use or not to use the weekly timer.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.5.2 Time Settings

(1) Use
• To set the time to turn ON/OFF the weekly timer for each day of the week.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch the key of the day to be set.
2. Using the 10-key pad, input the ON time and the OFF time.
3. For cancelling the setting, press [Clear].

6.5.3 Date Settings

(1) Use
• To select the date or the day of the week for the weekly timer to function.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the Year/Month with [+] / [-] keys.
2. For setting by the date, touch the appropriate key of the day.
3. For setting by the day of the week, touch the appropriate key of the week by [Daily Setting].
4. Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted, and touch [OK].

6.5.4 Select Time for Power Save

(1) Use
• To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the weekly timer is set and the power is ON.

(2) Default setting

• No

I-48
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• When “Yes” is selected, using the 10-key pad, input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again.

6.5.5 Password for Non-Business Hours

(1) Use
• To set whether to input the password before using when the weekly timer is set.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• When setting to Yes, enter the password (eight digits).

6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access

6.6.1 Copy Program Lock Settings
(1) Use
• To set the prohibition for modifying the registered copy program.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch the key for the appropriate copy program.
2. Touch [OK].

6.6.2 Delete Saved Copy Program

(1) Use
• To delete the registered program job.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch the appropriate program job.
2. Touch [Delete].
3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen to delete the program job.

6.6.3 Restrict Access to Job Settings

(1) Changing Job Priority
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the job.

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

(2) Delete Other User Jobs

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict job delete by other users when the user is authenticated.

(b) Default setting

• Restrict

(c) Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”

I-49
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Registering and Changing Addresses

(a) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address.

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(4) Changing Zoom Ratio

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification.

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

(5) Change the “From” Address

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to prohibit the registered from address to be changed.

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

(6) Change Registered Overlay

(a) Use
• Selects allow or restrict for the change of registered overlay.

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

(7) Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration

(a) Use
• Allow or restrict the registration or deletion of authentication information.

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

6.6.4 Restrict Operation

(1) Restrict Broadcasting
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to prohibit sending the fax to more than one address.

I-50
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX
assignment. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting])

6.7.1 AE Level Adjustment

(1) Use
• To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) the larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be.
• To make the background level foggier : Increase the setting value
• To make the background level less foggy : Decrease the setting value

(2) Default setting

• 2

(3) Setting range

• 0 to 4

6.7.2 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment

• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting]
→ [Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in the manual bypass tray.
• The PH unit has been replaced.
• The paper type has been changed.
• The print image deviates in the sub scan direction.
• A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
• Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2, thick 3, thick 4, transparencies, and
envelopes.

(2) Setting range

• Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.
2. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
3. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Leading Edge Adjustment].
4. Select the [Normal].
5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
6. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
7. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
8. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
9. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
10. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
11. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.

I-51
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.7.3 Printer Adjustment-Centering

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no
authentication is set.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting]
→ [Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
• The PH unit has been replaced.
• A paper feed unit has been added.
• The print image deviates in the main scan direction.

(2) Setting range

• Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications 3.0 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering].
3. Select the paper source to be adjusted.
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
5. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
9. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
10. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the bypass.)

6.7.4 Printer Adjustment-Leading Edge Adjustment: Duplex Side 2

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no
authentication is set.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting]
→ [Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• Makes an adjustment by changing the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing for plain
paper.
• When the 2nd side image on paper fed from the tray is shifted in the sub scan direction.
• Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2 and thick 3.

(2) Setting range

Backside

• Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test print.
Specifications 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

I-52
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex side 2)].
3. Select the [Normal].
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
5. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
9. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
10. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.

6.7.5 Printer Adjustment-Centering: Duplex 2nd Side

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no
authentication is set.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting]
→ [Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-sided mode.
• To use when the optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is set up.
• The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.

(2) Setting range

A

Backside

• Width A on the test print produced should fall within the following range.
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test print.
Specifications 3.0 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)].
3. Select the paper source to be adjusted.
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
5. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print on the backside of the copy.
9. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
10. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
(Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray.)

6.7.6 Printer Adjustment-Erase Leading Edge

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”.
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level]

(1) Use
• To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
• To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper.
• To make this setting independently for Front and Back sides.

(2) Default setting

• 4 mm

I-53
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• “4 mm”
• 5 mm
• 7 mm

6.7.7 Printer Adjustment-Vertical Adjustment

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level]

(1) Use
• To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.
• The l adjustment becomes necessary.
• The printed image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk).
• When the printed image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.
• Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2, thick 3 and thick 4.

(2) Setting range

A
B

• Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.
NOTE
• Width A: equivalent to one grid
• Width B: equivalent to 48 grids
Specifications A: 7.9 to 8.3
B: 389.1 to 392.1
Setting range A: -7 to +7
B: -7 to +7

(3) Procedure
1. Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 x 17 plain paper.
2. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
3. Touch these keys in this order: [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Vertical Adjustment].
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.
5. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern.
6. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] keys.
• If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern again.
8. Check width A and width B on the test pattern.
9. If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a check again.
10. If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [OK].
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for [Thick 1 to 3], [OHP], and [Envelope]. (Check width A only for [OHP] and [Envelope].)

6.7.8 Printer Adjustment-Media Adjustment

(1) Use
• Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type.
• This function is provided to open [Transfer Voltage Fine Adj] → [2nd Transfer Adjust] of Service Mode up to administrator and the fine-
adjusted value is reflected in the Service Mode setting.
• To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
• Pressing the [AUTO] key down activates the 2nd image transfer amperage upper and lower limit control. In this case, the machine uses
the voltage determined by the transfer voltage control and the 2nd image transfer voltage fine adj value does not take effect.

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Setting item

• -8 to +7 (Step: 1)
• AUTO

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Media Adjustment].
3. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side), on which the transfer failure occurs.

I-54
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
NOTE
• For envelopes, OHP film and thick paper, only 1st side can be selected.

4. Select the paper type with the transfer failure.

5. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
• To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), increase the setting value.
• To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), decrease the setting value.
6. Touch [OK] to validate the adjustment value.
7. Check the print image for any image problem.
NOTE
• To automatically control the 2nd image transfer output without using the 2nd image transfer voltage fine adj value, press
[Auto].

6.7.9 Finisher Adjustment-Center Staple Position

(1) Use
• Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function.

(2) Setting range

A

• Width A should fall within the following range.

Specifications 0 ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• After half-fold position adjustment, make this center staple position adjustment.
1. Place five sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a set of copy in the saddle stitching mode.
3. Check the amount of horizontal deviation (width A) between the staple and the half fold positions on the set of copy.
4. If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
5. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
6. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Center Staple Position].
7. Touch the paper size where staple position is adjusted.
8. Look at the copy and adjust the staple position with the [+] / [-] key.

9. Touch [OK].
10. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.

6.7.10 Finisher Adjustment-Half-Fold Position

(1) Use
• Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing.

(2) Setting range

Exit direction
• Width A should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 1.0 mm

I-55
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

Setting range -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a copy in the folding mode.
3. Fold the copies along the crease.
4. Measure the amount of width A.
5. If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
6. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
7. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Half-Fold Position].
8. Touch the paper size where half-fold position is adjusted.
9. Look at the copy and adjust the half-fold position with the [+] / [-] key.

10. Touch [OK].

11. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.

6.7.11 Finisher Adjustment-Tri-Fold Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• Use this adjustment to adjust tri-fold position in tri-fold printing.

(2) Setting range

First fold

• Width (a) should fall within the following range.

Specifications 96 mm (A4S), 90.4 mm (8.5 x 11S), 89 mm (16KS)
Setting range -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the tri-folding mode.
2. Check that the tri-fold positions (a) on the copy are within the specified range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment].
5. Touch the paper size where tri-fold position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the tri-fold position with the [+] / [-] key.
• To make width (a) greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width (a) smaller: Enter the value of [-]

7. Touch [OK].
8. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width (a).

6.7.12 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• Adjusts the vertical position of the punch holes.

I-56
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Setting range

A A2
A
A A A1
A
A A2
• Length A should fall within the following range.
Specifications 2-4 hole 80 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.), 1/2 of the
vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
2-3 hole (2 hole) 70 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.), 1/2 of the
vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
2-3 hole (3 hole) 108 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.), 1/2 of
the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
SWE4 hole • A1=70 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.), 1/2
of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
• A2=21 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.), 1/2
of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that 1/2 of the length A is within the following standard range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment].
5. Touch the paper size where punch vertical position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch vertical position with the [+] / [-] key.
• To move the hole position upward: Enter the value of [+]
• To move the hole position downward: Enter the value of [-]

7. Touch [OK].
8. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of length (A).

6.7.13 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• To change the horizontal position of the punch holes.

(2) Setting range

B B B

• Width B should fall within the following range.

Specifications <For PK-516> 9.5 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm (SWE4 hole)
<For PK-517> 9.5 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm ± 1.0 mm
(SWE4 hole)
Setting range <For PK-516> -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
<For PK-517> -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure (PK-516)

1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the specified range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment].
5. Touch the paper size where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+] / [-] key.

I-57
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width B smaller: Enter the value of [-]

7. Touch [OK].
8. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width B.

(4) Procedure (PK-517)

1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the specified range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment].
5. Touch the paper type where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+] / [-] key.
• To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width B smaller: Enter the value of [-]

7. Touch [OK].
8. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width B.

6.7.14 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment

(1) Use
• Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body.
• To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment].
3. Touch the paper size where punch regist loop size is adjusted.
4. Set the correction value using the [+] / [-] keys.
• Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
• Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
5. Touch [OK].

6.7.15 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment

(1) Use
• Adjusts the sensitivity (light intensity) of the PK punch front sensor of the punch kit.
• This adjustment is made at the time of setup.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment].
3. Touch Start key.
4. Confirm that the result is OK.
NOTE
• When NG appears, check whether the punch kit is properly installed.

5. Touch [OK].

6.7.16 Finisher Adjustment-Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the sub-scanning direction when ZU is in use.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

I-58
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Setting range

A
A
A A
A
A

• Width A should fall within the following range.

Specifications 2-4 hole 80 ± 0.5, Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
2-3 hole (2 hole) 70 ± 0.5, Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
2-3 hole (3 hole) 108 ± 0.5, Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
Setting range -5.0 to +5.0 mm (1step: 0.1 mm)
NOTE
• It is possible to adjust the A dimension of half of the top and bottom by ± 0.5 mm from the standard value.
• It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width A is within the following range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
5. Select [ALL] and make the setting using [+] or [-].
• To make width A greater: Enter the Value of [+]
• To make width A smaller: Enter the Value of [-]
NOTE
• The adjustment setting value used for each paper size is the value set with [ALL] plus the value set for each paper size.

6. Touch [OK].
7. Make copies in the punch mode again and check that the punch hole positions have been adjusted properly.

6.7.17 Finisher Adjustment-Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the main scanning direction when ZU is in use.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

(2) Setting range

B B B

• Width B should fall within the following range.

Specifications 12.0 mm
Setting range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
5. Make the setting using [+] or [-].
• To make width B greater: Enter the Value of [+]
• To make width B smaller: Enter the Value of [-]
6. Touch [OK].
7. Make copies in the punch mode again and check that the punch hole positions have been adjusted properly.

6.7.18 Finisher Adjustment-1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust the positions of the 1st Z-fold and 2nd Z-fold for the Z-fold mode.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

I-59
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Setting range

[1]
[2]
a

[4] [3]

[1] Length of the first fold [2] Position of the first fold
[3] Length of the second fold [4] Position of the second fold
• Width a should fall within the following range.
Specifications 11 x 17 Length of 1st fold: 108 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 215 mm
A3 Length of 1st fold: 105 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 209 mm
B4 Length of 1st fold: 91 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 181 mm
8.5 x 14 Length L: Less than 241.7 mm
8K Length of 1st fold: 98 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 194 mm
Setting range -12.8 mm to +12.7 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)
NOTE
• Length of the 1st fold is for standard value.
• The adjustable range for B4 size is only between -2.0 mm and +2.0 mm.
• 8.5 x 14 is available for only an half fold.

(3) Procedure
1. Make copies in the Z-fold mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width a is within the following range.
3. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
4. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] or [2nd Z-Fold Position
Adjustment].
5. Select [ALL] and make the setting using [+] or [-].
• To increase the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a negative value with [-] key.
• To decrease the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a positive value with [+] key.
NOTE
• The adjustment setting value used for each paper size is the value set with [ALL] plus the value set for each paper size.

6. Touch [OK].
7. Make copies in the Z-fold mode and check for possible deviation from the specified 1st and 2nd Z-fold positions.

6.7.19 Finisher Adjustment-Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor

(1) Use
• To adjust sensitivity (light intensity) of the paper size detect board (PSDTB) of the punch unit of ZU.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor].
3. Touch Start key.
4. Confirm that the result is OK.
NOTE
• When NG appears, check whether the punch unit is properly installed.

5. Touch [OK].

6.7.20 Finisher Adjustment-Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment

(1) Use
• To make automatic post inserter size detection adjustments separately in each of the upper and lower trays.
• Make this adjustment at the time of setup or when the post inserter cannot make proper size detection.
• Make this adjustment after performing PI displacement adjustment.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Finisher Adjustment] → [Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment].
3. Touch [Upper Tray].
4. Place A4S paper on the upper tray and touch [A4 ].
5. Touch Start key.

I-60
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
6. Confirm that the result is OK.
7. Touch [Lower Tray].
8. Place A4S paper on the lower tray and touch [A4 ].
9. Touch Start key.
10. Confirm that the result is OK.
11. Touch [OK].

6.7.21 Density Adjustment

(1) Thick Paper Image Density-Black
(a) Use
• To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies.
• To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Density Adjustment].
3. Select a type of thick paper and a color that need to be adjusted.
4. Touch the Lighter or Darker key to correct the image density.
• Light color: Touch the Darker key.
• Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.

6.7.22 Image Stabilization-Image Stabilization Only

(1) Image Stabilization Only
(a) Use
• The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control.
• Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed.
• When [Max Image Density Adj] and [Image Background Adj] of Service Mode are changed.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Image Stabilization] → [Image Stabilization Only] → [Image Stabilization Only].
3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence.
4. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue.

(2) Initialize+Image Stabilization

(a) Use
• To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized.
• Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed.
• Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after image stabilization has been executed.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Image Stabilization] → [Image Stabilization Only] → [Initialize+Image Stabilization].
3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence.
4. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue.

6.7.23 Paper Separation Adjustment

(1) Use
• For duplex printing, the paper separation position is adjusted for the first and second sides of paper.
• To adjust the balance between paper separation and image transfer performances by changing the paper separation position in duplex
printing of thin paper (60 g/m2) in hot and humid conditions.

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Paper Separation Adjustment].
3. Select [Front] or [Back].
4. Change the setting value with [+] or [-] key.
• Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value
• Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value
5. Touch [OK] to determine the adjusted value.
6. Make a print and check the image.

6.7.24 Gradation Adjustment

• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”

I-61
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
[Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no
authentication is set.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting]
→ [Management Function Choice].

(1) Use
• To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the scanner.
• Use this adjustment when reproduction of gradations and density has deteriorated.
• The drum unit or developing unit has been replaced.
• The image transfer belt unit has been replaced.
Image stabilization Only Before gradation adjust, perform image stabilization.
Print Priority is image gradation reproducibility (priority on gradation) as well as reproducibility of
characters and lines (priority on resolution).
Copy Priority is to increase the number of images that can be stored in the memory (priority on
compression). The adjustment conforms to FEET (nonscreen).

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Image stabilization Only] and the Start key to perform image stabilization.
NOTE
• Before executing Gradation adjust, be sure to perform Stabilizer.

2. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.

3. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjustment].
4. Select Print or Copy and select the paper size on which test pattern is printed.
5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.
6. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.
7. Place ten blank sheets of A3/11 x 17 paper on the test pattern and lower the original cover.
8. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
9. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 4 through 8 twice (a total of three times).
NOTE
• If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.

6.7.25 Scanner Area

• Use the following test chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.
• If the test chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level]
• This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting]
→ [Management Function Choice].
B B
send out you can
uable printed mat

compared to a sta
isters and automa

ation from pater t

plate the three osd
longer then ordin
imply makes desti
many as copies c

a simplifies the e

and running off t

nd efficiency to m

rs soft rollers are made of polyurethane to resist chemical attack most hard rollers are for to gripper master and impression cylinders automatically adjust to th
n from a pound of ink copy can be run on both sides of the sheet with multiple colors of on a master turning on the machine and running off the copies its not

a choise of options before while and after copies are run allows the operator to adjust the quality aquamatic control not only assures sharp clean first copies b
o metal plate and from shortrun prese the inking and dampening system permits the three with varying weigts of paper no special adjustments needed cylinders
s its not a press its an office machine heres practical automation the wide image model nylon for longer wear people who arent acquaited you want it to be it p
rating cycle greatly reduces repetitive shortrun duplicating time for example when used and impression cylinders that are selfadjusting for changes is paper or r
anually control even though the machine is running on automatic changeover from pater to scales on paper feed that match scales on rceiving tray of machine
stment and runs job no blanket wash your office offset to cut copying costs with this can on automatic changeover from paper masters and automated short rur

en changes are nccessary now advanced fingertip programming single lever action control the inking and dampening system permits the operator to exercise pre

ollers are large size to insure even distribution of ink the two form rollers are of different machine all without tools a positive vacuum paper feed system keeps
many sizes of materials on almost all kinds of stock rag bond card stock smooth finish adding new versatility speed and efficiency mated run a choice of optior

t runs to metal plates and general duplicating takes only a matter of seconds the machine includes two ductor rollers and five distributor rollers offset rollers las

20㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ
2.0

Ǿ4.8
2.5

12㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
3.2

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝

D
2.0
4.0

7㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ
5.0

2.5
6.3

Ǿ14
20㧙ABCDEFG

3.2
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ

7㧙ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
ABCDEabcdef12345

4.0
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮

12㧙ABCDEFGHIJKL

5.0
ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm1234567890

ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghijk1234567

ABCDEFabcdefg1234567
ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl12345678

6.3
ABCDEFGabcdefg123456789
5.6

4.5

3.6

2.8

2.2

5.6

4.5
1.5

10

3.6

2.8

2.2
C

40
1.5

㧑
)

Text / Photo

C
R

(TEST CHART NO. KMTC-001-01)

8pt.
9pt.
10pt.

12pt.

14pt.

18pt.

8pt.
9pt.
10pt.

12pt.

14pt.

18pt.

A
͠
MANUAL(

PART NO. 4034-7940-01

10

Printed in Japan
2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

2.5

Photo
3.2

㧛
4.0
5.0
6.3

Original-Set Direction :
5.6

4.5

AUTO
TOTAL COUNTER :
3.6

2.8

2.2

Printing Direction :
㧛

Text
MACHINE S/N :

OTHERS :
MODEL :

MODE :
DATE :
EXP. :
20㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ
12㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
7㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ

20㧙ABCDEFG
7㧙ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
12㧙ABCDEFGHIJKL
2.0

2.0
2.5

2.5
3.2

3.2
4.0

4.0
5.0

5.0
6.3

6.3
5.6

5.6
4.5

4.5
3.6

3.6
2.8

2.8
2.2

2.2
while and after

ickness quality c

antly longer than

ets you and impre

tically separate w
nder constant con
you with copy qu

t cylinders to con
al plates and gen

rol over the ink

ts an office mach

ut tools a positive

B B

Adjustment item Ref.

A: Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjustment I.6.7.26 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge
B: Scanner Adjustment: Centering I.6.7.27 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Centering
C: Horizontal Adjustment I.6.7.28 Scanner Area-Horizontal Adjustment
D: Vertical Adjustment I.6.7.29 Scanner Area-Vertical Adjustment

6.7.26 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge

(1) Use
• To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale
by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
• When the original glass is replaced.
• When the original width scale is replaced.

I-62
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Setting range

1
A=20 mm

• A width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications
shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment.
Specifications ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -5.0 to +5.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a copy.
5. Check point A on the image of the test print.
6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
• If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

6.7.27 Scanner Area-Scanner Adjustment: Centering

(1) Use
• To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main
scan direction.
• When the CCD unit is replaced.
• When the original glass is replaced.
• The scanner home sensor has been replaced.

(2) Setting range

B=20 mm

• B width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications
shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment.
Specifications ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -10.0 to +10.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment: Centering].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a copy.
5. Check point B on the image of the test print.
6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
• If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check point B of the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

6.7.28 Scanner Area-Horizontal Adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section.
• The CCD unit has been replaced.

I-63
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Setting range

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮
8pt.
9pt.
10pt.

12pt.

14pt.

18pt.
C

10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Measure C width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
Specifications ± 1.0 mm
Setting range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Horizontal Adjustment].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a test print.
5. Check the C width on the image of the test print.
6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
• If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

6.7.29 Scanner Area-Vertical Adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section.
• The exposure unit has been replaced.
• The scanner motor has been replaced.
• The scanner drive cables have been replaced.

(2) Setting range

D
send out you can
uable printed mat

compared to a sta
isters and automa

ation from pater t

plate the three osd
longer then ordin
imply makes desti
many as copies c

a simplifies the e

and running off t

nd efficiency to m
stment and runs job no blanket wash your office offset to cut copying costs with this

n from a pound of ink copy can be run on both sides of the sheet with multiple colors

a choise of options before while and after copies are run allows the operator to adjust

o metal plate and from shortrun prese the inking and dampening system permits the

ollers are large size to insure even distribution of ink the two form rollers are of

rs soft rollers are made of polyurethane to resist chemical attack most hard rollers are
for to gripper master and impression cylinders automatically adjust to th
of on a master turning on the machine and running off the coachine heres practical a p

the quality aquamatic control not only assures sharp clean first copies b

three with varying weigts of paper no special adjustments needed cylinders

can on automatic changeover from paper masters and automated short rur

different machine all without tools a positive vacuum paper feed system keeps

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ
Ǿ4.8

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ

Ǿ14
ABCDEFG
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
ABCDEabcdef12345
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮

ABCDEFGHIJKL
ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm1234567890

ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghijk1234567

ABCDEFabcdefg1234567
ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl12345678

ABCDEFGabcdefg123456789

5
1.5

10
C

• Measure D width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
Specifications ± 1.5 mm
Setting range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Vertical Adjustment].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a test print.
5. Check the D width on the image of the test print.
6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
• If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

6.7.30 ADF Adjustment

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”

I-64
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level]

(1) Centering
(a) Use
• To adjust the read position in the main scanning direction.
• When the result is Unable in the [Centering Auto Adjustment].
• When ADF has been replaced.

(b) Setting range

• The difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 2.0 mm
Setting range -4.4 mm to +4.4 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(c) Procedure
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
3. Check that the difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
4. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
5. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Centering].
6. Look at the copy and make adjustment with the [+] / [-] key.
• If the difference in the widths of A is greater than the specifications, enter the [+] value.
• If the difference in the widths of A is smaller than the specifications, enter the [-] value.
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of A falls within the specified range.

(2) Original Stop Position

(a) Use
• To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes.
• When the result is Unable in the [Auto Adj. of Stop Position].

(b) Setting range

B

• The difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 2.0 mm
Setting range -4.0 mm to +4.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(c) Procedure
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
NOTE
• In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed tray in the duplex mode and make a
copy. Check the difference in the widths of a between the chart and the second sided surface of the copy sample.

3. Check that the difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
4. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
5. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Original Stop position].
6. Look at the copy and adjust [Front] or [Back] with the [+] / [-] key.
• If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the [+] value.
• If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the [-] value.
7. Touch [OK].
8. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls within the specified range.

I-65
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Centering Auto Adjustment

(a) Use
• To automatically adjust the read position in the main scanning direction.
• When ADF has been replaced.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Centering Auto Adjustment].
3. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
4. Press the Start key.
5. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [New].
6. Touch [Close].
NOTE
• If the result is Unable:
Check and correct the skew of the document.
Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
I.6.7.30.(2) Original Stop Position

(4) Auto Adj. of Stop Position

(a) Use
• To automatically adjust the read position for the sub scanning direction.
• To check skew feed.
• When ADF has been replaced.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Auto Adj. of Stop Position].
3. Touch [Front] or [Back].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray.
• [Front]: Set the chart with its arrow side facing upward.
• [Back]: Set the chart with its blank side facing upward.
5. Press the Start key.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [New].
7. Touch [Close].
NOTE
• If the result is Unable:
Check and correct the skew of the document.
Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
I.6.7.30.(2) Original Stop Position

6.7.31 Line Detection-Prior Detection Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
• To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
• To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected.
• Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the
lines.
TYPE1 Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. (warning code: D-1)
TYPE2 Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen.
TYPE3 Warning will be displayed on all screens.
OFF Warning will not be displayed.

• Use when changing the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the original glass.
Low Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.
Normal Normal detection level
High Stain on the glass will easily be detected.

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No
NOTE
• [Warning Level] and [Detection Level] can be set when “Yes” is selected.
Warning Level Default setting TYPE2

I-66
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

Setting item • TYPE1

• “TYPE2”
• TYPE3
• OFF
Detection Level Default setting Std.
Setting item • Low
• “Std.”
• High

• Be aware that selecting “No” and performing the pre-detection with the following setting will display “NG.”
[Service Mode] → [Machine] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamination]
• When “No” is selected, the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends does not operate.

6.7.32 Line Detection-Detection While Feeding Setting

(1) Use
• To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
• Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
Do not remove The glass will stop moving when the original is fed, and will not perform removing the stain.
Remove The glass will move between originals when feeding the original.

(2) Default setting

• Remove

(3) Setting item

• “Remove”
• Do not remove

6.7.33 Trail Edge Adjust

• Not used

6.7.34 User Paper Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level]

(1) Use
• To set and register individual user paper that includes different basic weight and transfer output fine adjustment data.
• To register a paper type that is suitable for customer’s intended use and use environment.
• The feature available from [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [User Paper Settings] is extended to Administrator. However, the fusing
temperature setting is not possible in Administrator Settings.
• The user paper registration keys and corresponding paper types are as follows:
• User Paper 1, 2: Plain paper
• User Paper 3: Thick 1
• User Paper 4: Thick 1+
• User Paper 5: Thick 2
• User Paper 6: Thick 3

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.
2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Forward] → [User Paper Settings].
3. Select the desired key from [User Paper 1] to [User Paper 6] to register user paper.
4. Select [Basic Weight] and enter a value with the [+] / [-] key.
5. Select one from the following; [Media Front] or [Media Back]. Enter a 2nd transfer output value with the [+] / [-] key.
Setting range: -8 to +7 (1 step: 1 increment or decrement)
6. Load the tray with A4S or 8 1/ x 11S paper.
2
7. Touch [Test Pattern Output]. Specify a paper feed tray and select either 1st side or 2nd side.
8. Press the Start key and check the image of the output test pattern. If the image is not acceptable, adjust the settings, output and check a
test pattern again.

(3) Test pattern in user paper settings

• The printable test pattern for user paper settings is provided to ease determining the most appropriate 2nd transfer output value used
when customizing user paper.
• This test pattern changes output voltage as shown below based on the standard voltage A (voltage determined by the 2nd image transfer
auto transfer voltage control) on a sheet of paper.

I-67
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

A +600 V

A +400 V

A +200 V

A 0V

A -200 V

A -400 V

A -600 V

A: standard voltage

6.7.35 Erase Adjustment-Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings

(1) Use
• Configure Non-Image Area operation settings.
Auto Automatically detects the background density of the original, and selects either [Bevel] or
[Rectangular] accordingly.
Specify Allows you to manually specify an erase method and original density. As an erase method, select
[Bevel] or [Rectangular]. Specify an original density from five levels.

(2) Default setting

• Auto

(3) Setting item

• “Auto”
• Specify

6.7.36 PS Designer Settings

(1) Use
• Specify to switch the density of output image when printing from the PS Driver.
• Density correction is performed when printing from the PS Driver because image density tends to be dark. Specify to print a document
compatible with PostScript specifications.
Yes Disable density correction and print a document according to PostScript specifications.
No Enable density correction.

(2) Default setting

1. “No”

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

6.8 System Settings-List/Counter

6.8.1 Management List
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX
assignment.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting])

(1) Job Settings List

(a) Use
• To output the value set by the setting menu.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Job Settings List].
2. Select the feed tray.
3. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.

6.8.2 Paper Size/Type Counter

(1) Use
• To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type, and to set the count.

I-68
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Procedure
1. Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys.
2. Select the paper type.
3. Touch the paper size key to select the paper size.

6.8.3 Meter Counter List

• Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either management device 2, vendor 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Use
• To output the meter counter list.
• To print out the list in this setting because counter list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Meter Counter] → [Details]

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Meter Counter List].
2. Select the Feed tray.
3. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.

6.8.4 Check Consumables List

• Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device, management device 2, vendor 2 is
mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Use
• To output the consumable life list.
• To print out the list in this setting because the list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Utility] → [Check Consumable Life]

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Consumable Life List].
2. Select the feed tray.
3. Select simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.

6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings

6.9.1 System Auto Reset
• The keys specified by [Administrator Settings] → [System Settings] → [Application Key Settings] is displayed.
• Screen Saver Function is displayed only when the following two conditions are met: The optional i-option LK-101 or LK-103 is enabled. The
screen saver application is registered.

(1) Use
• To set the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning.

(2) Procedure
• To set the functions displayed during system auto reset.

(3) Default setting

• Priority Mode: Copy
• System Auto Reset Time: 1 min.
• Screen Saver Function: No Limit

(4) Setting item

Priority Mode
• “Copy”
• Scan/Fax
• User Box
• Application Menu
• My Panel Settings
• Web browser
• Image panel
System Auto Reset Time
• “1” to 9
• OFF
Screen Saver Function
• Enable
• “No Limit”

I-69
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.9.2 Auto Reset

(1) Use
• To set the period of time until auto reset starts functioning in “Copy” and “Scan/Fax.”

(2) Default setting

• 1 min.

(3) Setting item

• 1 to 9
• No

6.9.3 Job Reset

(1) When Account is changed
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)

(a) Use
• Selects whether to reset (initialize) a machine when the key counter is unplugged, a magnetic card is pulled out, or user authentication/
account track is set.
• To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device.

(b) Default setting

• Reset

(c) Setting item

• “Reset”
• Do Not Reset

(2) When Original is set on ADF

(a) Use
• Select whether to reset the function when originals are placed on the ADF.

(b) Default setting

• Do Not Reset

(c) Setting item

• Reset
• “Do Not Reset”

(3) Next Job: Staple Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(4) Next Job: Original Set/Bind Direction

(a) Use
• To set whether to cancel the original set/bind direction when the job (which original set/bind direction is set) started and the next job
setting has become available.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

I-70
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(5) Next Job: Reset Data After Job

(a) Use
• To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting fax when the scanning is finished or fax is transmitted, making the next
job setting available. (The address will be cleared even when [OFF] is selected.)

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings

6.10.1 Delete Unused User Box
(1) Use
• To delete the unnecessary box without data.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Unused User Box].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.

6.10.2 Delete Secure Print Documents

(1) Use
• To delete the whole classified documents in the box.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Secure Documents].
2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen.

6.10.3 Auto Delete Secure Document

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to delete the confidential documents in the box after a certain period of time. It also sets the period of time to store
data.

(2) Default setting

• 1 Day

(3) Setting item

• 12 Hours
• “1 Day”
• 2 Days
• 3 Days
• 7 Days
• 30 Days
• Save

6.10.4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time

(1) Use
• Specifies whether to delete encrypted PDF data stored in the box after a lapse of a predetermined period of time.
Sets the time period for which encrypted PDF data can be stored.

(2) Default setting

• 1 Day

(3) Setting item

• 12 Hours
• “1 Day”
• 2 Days
• 3 Days
• 7 Days
• 30 Days
• Save

6.10.5 ID & Print Delete Time

(1) Use
• Specifies whether to delete ID & print data stored in the box after a lapse of a predetermined period of time.

I-71
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
Sets the time period for which ID & print data can be stored.

(2) Default setting

• 1 Day

(3) Setting item

• 12 Hours
• “1 Day”
• 2 Days
• 3 Days
• 7 Days
• 30 Days
• Save

6.10.6 Document Hold Setting

(1) Use
• Selects whether to store the document again in the box after it was retrieved from the box.
• If the function is set to No, the document is automatically deleted after it was retrieved.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.10.7 External Memory Function Settings

(1) Use
• This operation enables or disables functions using an external memory connected to this machine.
• Capability to enable [Save Document], [Print Document] and [External Memory Document Scan] separately.
Save Document A function that saves scanned documents into the external memory using [Save Document] in the
box mode.
Print Document A function that prints and sends documents saved in the external memory using [Use/ File] in the
box mode.
External Memory Document Scan A function that saves documents saved in the box using [Use/File] in the box mode.

(2) Default setting

• Save Document: OFF
• Print Document: ON
• External Memory Document Scan: OFF

(3) Setting item

Save Document
• ON
• “OFF”
Print Document
• “ON”
• OFF
External Memory Document Scan
• ON
• “OFF”

6.10.8 Allow/Restrict User Box

(1) Use
• Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box.

(2) Default setting

• Allow

(3) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Prohibit

6.10.9 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting

(1) Use
• Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed.

I-72
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Default setting

• Confirm with User

(3) Setting item

• “Confirm with User”
• Always Delete

6.10.10 Document Delete Time Setting

(1) Use
• This function enables the administrator to specify the time to delete a document from a User Box when you cannot specify the document
deletion time. When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and set the deletion time.

(2) Default setting

• 1 Day

(3) Setting item

• 12 Hours
• “1 Day”
• 2 Days
• 3 Days
• 7 Days
• 30 Days
• Save

6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level]

6.11.1 Original Glass Original Size Detect

(1) Use
• To change the document size detection table.

(2) Default setting

• Table1

(3) Setting item

• “Table1”
• Table2

6.11.2 Foolscap Size Setting

(1) Use
• To set the size for foolscap paper.
• Upon setup.

(2) Procedure
• Select the size from among the following five.

(3) Default setting

• 8 x 13

(4) Setting item

• 220 x 330 mm
• 8 1/ x 13
2
• 8 1/ x 13
4
• 8 1/ x 131/
8 4
• “8 x 13”

6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings

6.12.1 Header/Footer Settings
(1) Use
• Saves or deletes header/footer settings.
• Able to obtain registered header/footer data by [Application] → [Stamp/Composition].

(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register new headers and footers.

I-73
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.12.2 Fax TX Settings

(1) Use
• Specifies whether to reset a stamp setting when fax is sent.

(2) Default setting

• Cancel

(3) Setting item

• “Cancel”
• Do Not Cancel

6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings

6.13.1 Use
• Specifies whether to print a stamp/page number on blank pages.

6.13.2 Default setting

• Print

6.13.3 Setting item

• “Print”
• Do Not Print

6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings

• This is displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 or LK-103) is activated.

6.14.1 Use
• To assign the additional functions provided by i-Option to the application keys.
• This settings allow free application key assignment to additional functions provided by i-Option as well as to “User Box”, “Fax/Scan” and
“Copy” to which the application keys were conventionally assigned. (However, Key 0 is assigned to the function of displaying the application
menu so that other functions cannot be assigned to Key 0.)
• The functions that can be assigned are as follows:
Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box, Image Panel, Web Browser, My Panel

6.14.2 Procedure
1. Select [Key 1] or [Key 2].
2. Select a function to which the key is assigned, and touch [OK].

6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings

6.15.1 Use
• Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to running out of paper in the paper tray.

6.15.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Skip Job Operation Settings].
2. Make settings and touch [OK].

6.16 System Settings-Default Bypass Paper Type Setting

6.16.1 Use
• Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray.

6.16.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Default Bypass Paper Type Setting].
2. Select the desired paper type and touch [OK].

6.17 System Settings-Page Number Print Position

6.17.1 Use
• Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print
the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric with respect to the stapling position.

6.17.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Page Number Print Position].
2. Check test print and fine adjust the position.

I-74
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting

6.18.1 Original direction setting display
(1) Use
• To set whether to display the screen where the original set direction can be selected after touching [Preview] when printing with the
advanced preview function.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.19 Administrator/Machine Settings

6.19.1 Administrator Registration
(1) Use
• Registers administrator information displayed Help service/Administrator information screen as well as sender addresses used for E-mail
transmission from the machine.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Name], [E-mail Address] to input them.
2. Using the 10-key pad, enter the extension No.

6.19.2 Input Machine Address

(1) Use
• To register the name of the machine and e-mail address.
Machine Name When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of document registered in Box is
generated automatically, it is added.
E-mail To be used as from address at internal Fax transmission.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Device Name] and input the name.
2. Touch [E-mail Address] and input the E-mail address.

6.20 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create One-Touch Destination

6.20.1 Address Book
(1) E-mail
(a) Use
• To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new address.
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.

(2) User Box

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To register or change the box address for storing the scanned data to the box in the hard disk of the machine.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new address.
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.
• At least one user box must be registered in order to register the box address.

(3) Fax
• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that fax is set to “set”.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Option Board Status]

(a) Use
• To register or change the fax number for transmitting the fax.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new address.

I-75
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.

(4) PC (SMB)
(a) Use
• To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new address.
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.

(5) FTP
(a) Use
• To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new address.
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.

(6) WebDAV
(a) Use
• To register and change the WebDAV address for transmitting the scanned data by Web-DAV.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new address.
• Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting.

(7) IP Address Fax

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] → [IP Address Fax Function]

(a) Use
• To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, change or delete the setting.

(8) Internet Fax

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] → [Internet Fax Function]

(a) Use
• To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data.

(b) Procedure
• A new address can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed address to check, change or delete the setting.

6.20.2 Group
(1) Use
• To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simultaneously.

(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new group.
• Select any displayed group to check, edit, or delete the setting.
• At least one address must be registered in order to register the group.

6.20.3 E-mail Settings

(1) E-mail Subject
(a) Use
• To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new subject.
• Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit, or delete the setting.

I-76
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].

(2) E-mail Body

(a) Use
• To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new message.
• Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting.
• The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default].

6.21 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box

6.21.1 Public/Personal User Box
(1) Use
• To register or change the box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine.

(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new box.
• Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.

6.21.2 Bulletin Board User Box

(1) Use
• To register or change the bulletin board user box.

(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] to register the new box.
• Select any displayed box to edit or delete it.

6.21.3 Relay User Box

• It will be displayed when the optional fax kit FK-502 is installed.

(1) Use
• To register/change the Relay User Box.

(2) Procedure
• A new box can be registered by touching [New].
• Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

6.21.4 Annotation User Box

(1) Use
• To register or change the annotation user box.
• To attach the image of the date, time, and/or filing number to the document data stored in the scanner mode, and to distribute them.

(2) Procedure
• Touch [New] key to register the new box.
• Select any displayed box to change or delete it.

6.22 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List

6.22.1 Address Book List
(1) Use
• To output the address book list.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the destination type to be output.
2. Touch [Starting destination No.] and enter the number from which output starts.
3. Touch [No. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output.
4. Touch [Print], and select the paper feed tray.
5. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.

6.22.2 Group List

(1) Use
• To output the group list.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Starting destination No.] and enter the number from which output starts.
2. Touch [No. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output.

I-77
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
3. Touch [Print], and select the paper feed tray.
4. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.

6.22.3 Program List

(1) Use
• To output the program list.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the destination type to be output.
2. Touch [Starting destination No.] and enter the number from which output starts.
3. Touch [No. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output.
4. Touch [Print], and select the paper feed tray.
5. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.

6.22.4 E-mail Subject/Text List

(1) Use
• To output the subject or the text list.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the paper feed tray.
2. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.

6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes

6.23.1 Use
• Set the maximum of public, personal, and group boxes that individual users can hold.

6.23.2 Procedure
1. Select a user box type and name.
2. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified, set Max. No. of Use Boxes to [OFF].
3. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified, set Max. No. of Use Boxes to [OFF].

6.24 User Authentication/Account Track-General Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter or vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
NOTE
• Before registering a user, select an authentication method. If all management data is cleared after the authentication method was
selected, the histories of the registered users, print, send, receive, and save jobs are deleted.

6.24.1 User Authentication

(1) Use
• To set the user authentication method.
• To select whether to authenticate the user by the external server or MFP.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• “OFF”
• ON (External Server)
• ON (MFP)
NOTE
• [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• [ON (External Server)] cannot be selected when external servers are not registered in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [External Server Settings]
• Neither [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)] can be selected when the presence of management device is set in the following
setting.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.24.2 Public User Access

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User authentication has been set.
• Able to use the machine without authentication by logging in as a public user when [ON (Without Login)] is selected.

(2) Default setting

• Restrict

I-78
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• “Restrict”
• ON (With Login)
• ON (Without Login)
NOTE
• This setting is not available without user authentication.
• [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• [Allow] cannot be selected when [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] is set to “Do Not Synchronize.”

6.24.3 Account Track

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable the account track function or not.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• “OFF”
• ON

6.24.4 Account Track Input Method

(1) Use
• To set the authentication method for the account track.
• To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password.

(2) Default setting

• Account Name & Password

(3) Setting item

• “Account Name & Password”
• Password Only
NOTE
• This setting is not available without the account track.
• “Password Only” cannot be set when using both user authentication and account track.

6.24.5 Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track

(1) Use
• To set whether to synchronize the user authentication and account track.

(2) Default setting

• Synchronize

(3) Setting item

• “Synchronize”
• Do not synchronize
NOTE
• The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and account track.

6.24.6 When # of Jobs Reach Maximum

(1) Use
• To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job, or to stop the machine, when reaching to the upper limit for the
number of printed pages set by the user authentication and the account track.
• To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the user authentication and the account track.

(2) Default setting

• Skip Job

(3) Setting item

• “Skip Job”
• Stop Job

6.24.7 Number of User Counters Assigned

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

I-79
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(1) Use
• To set the number available to be assigned for the user registration and account registration.

(2) Procedure
• The total number to be registered for the user authentication and account track is 1000.
The number for the user registration will be set.
When setting the [# of Counters Assigned for Users] to 50, the number available for Account Track will be 950.
NOTE
• The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and account track.

(3) Default setting

• 500

6.24.8 Ticket Hold Time Setting

(1) Use
• Specify the desired length of holding time of Kerberos authentication ticket.
NOTE
• This setting takes effect only when the authentication server type is set to active directory.

(2) Default setting

• 60 min.

(3) Setting range

• 1 to “60 min.”

6.25 User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting

6.25.1 Administrative Setting
(1) User Name List
• It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(a) Use
• To set whether to display or not the list key for user names on user authentication screen.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• [ON] cannot be selected when [ON] is specified in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(2) Default Function Permission

(a) Use
• To set the default value for the function permission in user authentication by the external server.
• To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the user by the external server.
• Items available for setting:
Copy, Scan, Fax, Print, User Box, Print Scan/Fax TX, Save to External Memory, Read the stored document in External Memory,
Manual destination input, Cellular Phone/PDA and Web browser

(b) Default setting

• Allow

(c) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

(3) ID & Print Settings

(a) Use
• To set whether to use ID & Print (a job sent by a user cannot be printed until the user authentication is completed).
• To set whether to print a job of unauthenticated or public user or to save the job into the ID & Print User Box.

(b) Default setting

• ID & Print: OFF

I-80
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• Public User: Print Immediately

(c) Setting item

ID & Print
• ON
• “OFF”
Public User
• “Print Immediately”
• Save

(4) ID & Print Operation Settings

• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device is set to “installed”.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print all jobs or only one job from the same authenticated user when ID & Print is selected.

(b) Default setting

• Print All Jobs

(c) Setting item

• “Print All Jobs”
• Print Each Job

(5) Default Operation Selection

(a) Use
• In the Login screen for user authentication where ID and print jobs are stored, specify the default values for the operation to be carried
out after authentication has been completed.
When using this machine while the ID & print function is disabled, the user can select [Access] to log in to this machine without
specifying the operation to be carried out after authentication.

(b) Default setting

• Print

(c) Setting item

• “Print”
• Print & Access Basic Screen
• Access Basic Screen

6.25.2 User Registration

(1) Use
• To register, change or delete the user for authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the user, and touch [Edit].
2. Input the user name, user password, and e-mail address.
NOTE
• It cannot be entered when conducting authentication by external server.

3. Set the [Output Permission], [Max. Allowance Set], [Function Permission], [Pause] and touch [OK].
NOTE
• When the public users are allowed, the output permission and the function permission can be set.
• [Authentication Information Registration] does not appear when the presence of Authentication Device 2 is unset in the
following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• [Output Permission], [Max. Allowance Set], and [Function Permission] do not appear when the presence of Management Device
1 is set in the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.25.3 User Counter

(1) Use
• To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each user.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the user and touch [Counter Details].
2. Select the key to check to see the status of use.
3. For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
4. For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].

I-81
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.26 User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Settings

• The settings are available only when carrying out the account track.

6.26.1 Account Track Registration

(1) Use
• To register and change the account.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the proper Account and touch [Edit].
2. Input the [Account Name], [Password] and [Name].
3. Set the [Output Permission], and [Max. Allowance Set], [Pause] and touch [OK].
NOTE
• When the “Password Only” is selected for [Account Track Input Method], [Account Name] does not appear.
• When the “Account Name & Password” is selected for [Account Track Input Method], [Name] does not appear.

6.26.2 Account Track Counter

(1) Use
• To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each account.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the account and touch [Counter Details].
2. Select the key for the item to be checked.
3. For clearing the counter, touch [Clear Counter].
4. For clearing the all counters, touch [Reset All Counters].

6.27 User Authentication/Account Track-Print without Authentication

• It cannot select [Allow] when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

6.27.1 Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified.
• To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified.
• When Allow is selected, pages printed by unidentified users are counted and included in the count of the public user.

6.27.2 Default setting

• Restrict

6.27.3 Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”

6.28 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List

• The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication or account track.
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor or management device 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.28.1 Use
• To print out the User counter and the account counter.

6.28.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Counter List].
2. Select the simplex or duplex print, and press the start key to output the counter list.

6.29 User Authentication/Account Track-External Server Settings

6.29.1 Use
• Registers and sets an external server that is used for user authentication.

6.29.2 Procedure
1. Select one from No. 1 to No. 20 and touch [NEW].
2. Set [Server Name] and [Server Type].
3. To change settings, select an external server to be edited and touch [Edit].

6.29.3 Setting item

Server Type:
• Active Directory
• NTLM v1
• NTLM v2

I-82
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• NDS
• LDAP
NOTE
• Neither [NTLM v1] nor [NTLM v2] appear when OFF is selected in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [SMB Settings] → [User Authentication (NTLM)]
• [NDS] does not appear when OFF is selected in the following setting.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [NetWare Settings] → [User Authentication Setting (NDS)]

6.30 User Authentication/Account Track-Limiting Access to Destinations

6.30.1 Create Group
(1) Use
• Registers and edits groups of destinations for limiting access.

(2) Procedure
1. Select a group and touch [Edit].
2. Enter [Group Name].
3. Set the Access Allowed Level and touch [OK].

6.30.2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations

(1) Use
• Sets Apply Level and Apply Group for individual destinations.

(2) Procedure
1. Select one from Address Book, Group, and Program.
2. Select a registered address. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings.

6.30.3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users

(1) Use
• Sets Apply Level or Apply Group for individual users.

(2) Procedure
1. Select a registered user. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings.

6.31 User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings

• The function can be displayed only when the authentication device 2 is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management
Function Choice]

6.31.1 General Settings

(1) Use
• Specifies a device used for user authentication.
Card Authentication Select the IC card type and operation settings.
Bio Authentication Select the beep and operation settings.

(2) Procedure
• Select either one of the authentication devices and press the corresponding key to go to the individual operation setting screen.
• The screen displays the authentication device that is selected in [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] →
[Authentication Device 2].
When [Card 1] is selected as the authentication device, select the card type from among [FeliCa], [TypeA], [SSFC], [FCF], and [FCF
(Campus)] and make the operation settings.
If [FeliCa+Type A], [SSFC+Type A], [FCF+Type A], or [FCF (Campus)+Type A] is selected, both the FeliCa and Type A cards can be
used in this machine at the same time.
When [Card 2] is selected as authentication device, the authentication device name will be displayed differently depending on the type of
installed loadable device driver.
• If SSFC (Shared Security Formats Cooperation) is selected in Card Authentication, set [Company Code], [Company Identification Code],
[Area No.], [Building No.], [Floor No.], [Room No.], and [Security Level].
• If LEGIC (PID) is selected in Card Authentication, perform the access setting (STAMP input) for LEGIC (PID).
• If MIFARE (PID) is selected in Card Authentication, perform the MIFARE key setting.

6.31.2 Logoff Settings

(1) Use
• Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy document is scanned.

(2) Default setting

• Do not log off

(3) Setting item

• “Do not log off”

I-83
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• Log off

6.32 User Authentication/Account Track-User/Account Common Setting

6.32.1 Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting
(1) Use
• Select whether or not to display the logout confirmation screen.
• If the setting is made not to display the confirmation screen, the logout sequence is performed only through the access key operation with
no confirmation screen appearing.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.33 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Home Settings

6.33.1 Use
• To set whether or not to enable the Scan to Home function that is used to send scanned data to user’s home folder.

6.33.2 Default setting

• Disable

6.33.3 Setting item

• Enable
• “Disable”

6.34 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings

6.34.1 Use
• Use to restrict specification of sending destinations by users.
• Enabling this item disables manual entry of destinations except for recipients of faxes or IP address faxes. Therefore users can specify
sending destinations only by accessing the address book. Enabling this item also applies the following restrictions.
• Users cannot save documents to User Boxes
• Users cannot transmit documents from User Boxes
• Users cannot use annotation User Boxes
• Users cannot use the image panel
• Users cannot select addresses from the transmission history
• Users cannot use the URL notification function

6.34.2 Default setting

• Do Not Limit

6.34.3 Setting item

• Limit
• “Do Not Limit”

6.35 Network Settings-TCP/IP Settings

6.35.1 TCP/IP Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP settings.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

6.35.2 IPv4 Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv4) directly or to obtain it automatically.

I-84
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Default setting

• Auto Input

(3) Setting item

• Manual Input
• “Auto Input”
NOTE
• When it is set to [Auto Input], select the method to obtain it automatically.
DHCP Setting • ON
• OFF
BOOTP Setting • ON
• OFF
ARP/PING Setting • ON
• OFF
AUTO IP Setting • ON
• OFF

• [ARP/PING Setting] and [Auto IP Setting] cannot be set to “OFF” simultaneously.

• They will all be set to “ON” when [Manual Input] is changed to [Auto Input].
• When it is set to [Manual Input], set the IP address, subnet mask and default gate way.

6.35.3 IPv6 Settings

(1) IPv6 Settings
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use IP address (IPv6).
• To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv6) directly or to obtain it automatically.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(2) Auto IPv6 Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to automatically obtain IP address (IPv6).
When selecting [OFF], set a global address or gateway address.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(3) DHCP IPv6 Setting

(a) Default setting
• ON

(b) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.35.4 DNS Host

(1) DNS Host Name
(a) Use
• To set the DNS host name.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [DNS Host Name].
2. Enter the DNS host name on the screen key board, and touch [OK].

I-85
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Dynamic DNS Settings

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS setting.

(b) Default setting

• No Limit

(c) Setting item

• Enable
• “No Limit”

6.35.5 DNS Domain

(1) DNS Domain Name Auto Retrieval
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name.
• To set the DNS default domain name.

(b) Default setting

• Enable

(c) Setting item

• “Enable”
• No Limit
NOTE
• “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to “Auto Input.”

(2) Search Domain Name Auto Retrieval

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name.
• To set the DNS search domain name.

(b) Default setting

• Enable

(c) Setting item

• “Enable”
• No Limit

(3) Procedure
• Touch [Default DNS Domain Name] or [DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3], and enter the domain name using the keyboard on the screen
and touch [OK].

6.35.6 DNS Server Settings (IPv4)

(1) DNS Server Auto Obtain
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address.

(b) Default setting

• Enable

(c) Setting item

• “Enable”
• No Limit
NOTE
• “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to “Auto Input.”

(2) Priority/secondary DNS server.

(a) Use
• To set the priority/substitute DNS server address.

(b) Procedure
• Touch the corresponding key, and input the server address.

I-86
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.35.7 DNS Server Settings (IPv6)

(1) DNS Server Auto Obtain
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address.

(b) Default setting

• Enable

(c) Setting item

• “Enable”
• No Limit
NOTE
• “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to “Auto Input.”

(2) Priority/secondary DNS server.

(a) Use
• To set the priority/substitute DNS server address.

(b) Procedure
• Touch the corresponding key, and input the server address.

6.35.8 IPsec Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use IPsec protocol for IP network communication.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When selecting [ON], make settings in [IKE Setting], [IPSec SA Setting], and [Peer].

6.35.9 IPsec Settings-IKE Settings

(1) IKE Settings
(a) Use
• To make the settings that relate to IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol which is used for IPsec communication.
• Settings can be made independently for four different sets (Group 1 to 4).

(2) Group
(a) Procedure
• Among four groups (Group 1 to 4), select a group where settings are made.

(3) Encryption Algorithm

(a) Procedure
• Set an encryption algorithm used for IPsec communication.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• DES_CBC
• 3DES_CBC
• “OFF”

(4) Authentication Algorithm

(a) Procedure
• Set an authentication algorithm used for IPsec communication.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• MD5

I-87
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• SHA-1
• “OFF”

(5) Key Validity Period

(a) Procedure
• Set a key validity period.

(b) Default setting

• 28800 (sec.)

(c) Setting range

• 80 to 604800 (sec.)

(6) Diffie-Hellman Group

(a) Procedure
• Set Diffie-Hellman group.

(b) Default setting

• Group 2

6.35.10 IPsec Settings-IPsec SA Settings

(1) IPsec SA Settings
(a) Use
• To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for IPsec communication.
• Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8).

(2) Group Set Number

(a) Procedure
1. Among Group 1 to 8, select a group where settings are made.
2. After touching the key of the Group, make the following settings.
(If the combination of each selection is not allowed among different settings, the key operation of the corresponding option is locked.)

(3) Security Protocol

(a) Procedure
• Set a security protocol.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• AH
• ESP
• ESP_AH
• “OFF”

(4) ESP Encryption Algorithm

(a) Procedure
• Set an encryption algorithm used for ESP protocol.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• DES_CBC
• 3DES_CBC
• AES_CBC
• AES_CTR
• NULL
• “OFF”

(5) ESP Authentication Algorithm

(a) Procedure
• Set authentication algorithm used for ESP protocol.

I-88
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• MD5
• SHA-1
• “OFF”

(6) AH Authentication Algorithm

(a) Procedure
• Set authentication algorithm used for AH protocol.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• MD5
• SHA-1
• “OFF”

(7) Lifetime After Establishing SA

(a) Procedure
• Set the period of time starting from when SA connection is established and ending when the SA connection is cut.

(b) Default setting

• 3600 (sec.)

(c) Setting range

• 120 to 604800 (sec.)

6.35.11 IPsec Settings-Peer

(1) Peer
(a) Use
• To register destinations used for IPsec communication.
• Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10).

(2) Registered Peer

(a) Procedure
1. Among Group 1 to 10, select a group where settings are made.
2. After touching the key of the Group, make the following setting.

(3) Encapsulation Mode

(a) Procedure
• Set a encapsulation mode used for IPsec.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• Tunnel Mode
• Transport Mode
• “OFF”

(4) IP Address
(a) Use
• When the encapsulation mode is set, specify the IP address of destinations.

(b) Procedure
• Touch [IP Address] and enter the IP address with IPv4 or IPv6 format.

(5) Pre-Shared Key Text

(a) Use
• When the encapsulation mode is set, specify a Pre-shared key (Key data).

I-89
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(b) Procedure
• Touch [Input] and enter the Pre-shared key.

(6) Perfect Forward Secrecy

(a) Use
• When the transport mode is selected, set whether to use Perfect forward secrecy.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.35.12 IP Filtering (Permit Access)

(1) Use
• To set the IP filtering (Permit Access).
• To set whether to allow only IP addresses that are within a specified range.

(2) Procedure
1. Select Enable or “Disable”.
2. When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].

6.35.13 IP Filtering (Deny Access)

(1) Use
• To set the IP filtering (Deny Access).
• When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.

(2) Procedure
1. Select Enable or “Disable”.
2. When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and enter the range of IP addresses to be denied using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].

6.35.14 RAW Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the RAW port number.
• Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports.

(2) Procedure
1. Select the necessary port number.
2. When using the selected port, press the Clear key to clear the value, and enter the RAW port number using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [OK].

6.35.15 LLMNR Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable LLMNR (Linklocal Multicast Name Resolution) setting.
• To perform the name resolution to send data to a computer with Windows Vista/Server 2008 installed, select [Enable].
To perform the name resolution especially in the IPv6-only communication environment, enable this setting.

(2) Default setting

• Enable

(3) Setting item

• “Enable”
• No Limit

6.36 Network Settings-NetWare Settings

6.36.1 IPX Settings
(1) IPX Settings
(a) Use
• To enable or disable the NetWare (IPX) setting.

(b) Default setting

• ON

I-90
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(2) Ethernet Frame Type

(a) Use
• To set the ethernet frame type.

(b) Default setting

• Auto Detect

(c) Setting item

• “Auto Detect”
• 802.2
• 802.3
• Ethernet II
• 802.3SNAP

6.36.2 NetWare Print Settings

(1) NetWare Print Settings
(a) Use
• To set whether to use the NetWare print mode.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(2) NetWare Print Mode

(a) Use
• To set the NetWare print mode.

(b) Default setting

• PServer

(c) Setting item

• “PServer”
• Nprinter/Rprinter
NOTE
• After selecting either key in the NetWare print mode setting, proceed to each setting screen.

(3) Status
(a) Use
• To display NetWare status.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Status].
2. Touch up/down arrow keys to select the server to check.
3. Check the NetWare status.

6.36.3 P Server Settings: Print Server Name/Print Server Password

(1) Use
• To set the print server name and print server password.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server name] or [Print Server Password].
2. Enter the print server name or the print server password (up to 63 characters) using the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.36.4 P Server Settings: Polling Interval

(1) Use
• To set the polling interval.
• To set the interval to search the print queue.

I-91
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.36.5 P Server Settings: NDS/Bindery Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the bindery setting when using NetWare4.x model and after.
• To enable the bindery service.

(2) Default setting

• NDS

(3) Setting item

• “NDS”
• NDS/Bindery

6.36.6 P Server Settings: File Server Name

(1) Use
• To set the full server name for the print server to logon.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [File Server Name].
2. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.36.7 P Server Settings: NDS Context Name

(1) Use
• To set the NDS context name (context name to register NDS print server).

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Context name].
2. Enter the NDS context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.36.8 P Server Settings: NDS Tree Name

(1) Use
• To set the NDS tree name (name to login).

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NDS Tree Name].
2. Enter the NDS tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.36.9 Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Print Server Name

(1) Use
• To set the print server name.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Server Name].
2. Enter the printer name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.36.10 Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Printer Number

(1) Use
• To set the printer number.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Auto] and cancel the reverse display.
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-key pad.

6.36.11 User Authentication Setting (NDS)

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the user authentication setting.
• To conduct user authentication in netware environment.

(2) Default setting

• ON

I-92
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.37 Network Settings-http Server Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.37.1 http Server Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the http server setting.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.37.2 PSWC Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.37.3 IPP Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) setting.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.37.4 Accept IPP jobs

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.37.5 Support Information

(1) Use
• To set the operation support information.
• For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Support Information].
2. Set “ON” or OFF for each item.

6.37.6 Printer Information

(1) Use
• To set the printer information.

I-93
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Information].
2. Enter the printer name, printer location, and printer information on the on-screen keyboard.
3. Touch [Print URI] to check the printer URI information.

6.37.7 IPP Authentication Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the IPP authentication setting.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.37.8 Authentication Method

(1) Use
• To set the authentication method for IPP authentication.

(2) Default setting

• requesting-user-name

(3) Setting item

• “requesting-user-name”
• basic
• digest

6.37.9 User Name

(1) Use
• To set the User name for IPP authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Name].
2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.37.10 Password
(1) Use
• To set the password for IPP authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password].
2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.37.11 realm
(1) Use
• To set the realm for identifying the authentication setting for IPP authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [realm].
2. Enter the realm on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.38 Network Settings-FTP Settings

6.38.1 FTP TX Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use FTP TX settings.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-94
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.38.2 FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address

(1) Use
• To set the proxy server address.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.

6.38.3 FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the proxy server port number.

(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.38.4 FTP TX Settings: Port No.

(1) Use
• To set the port number to be used for transmission with FTP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.

6.38.5 FTP TX Settings: Connection Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.

6.38.6 FTP Server Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use this machine as FTP server.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

6.39 Network Settings-SMB Setting

SMB Setting
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.39.1 Client Settings

(1) Client Settings
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use the SMB transmission setting.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-95
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) NTLM Settings

(a) Use
• To set the NTLM version for the user authentication.
NTLM has v1 and v2. Select the version which suits the network environment.

(b) Default setting

• v1

(c) Setting item

• “v1”
• v2
• v1/v2

(3) User Authentication (NTLM)

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the user authentication setting by NTLM.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(4) DFS Setting

(a) Default setting
• Enable

(b) Setting item

• “Enable”
• Invalid
NOTE
• Select [ON] when using SMB transmission under an environment that uses a distributed file system (DFS).

6.39.2 Print Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use SMB port or not in printer mode.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.39.3 Print Settings: NetBIOS Name

(1) Use
• To set NetBIOS name.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NetBIOS Name].
2. Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.39.4 Print Settings: Print Service Name

(1) Use
• To set the print service name.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Print Service Name].
2. Enter the print service name (up to 13 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.39.5 Print Settings: Workgroup

(1) Use
• To set the workgroup.

I-96
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Workgroup].
2. Enter the workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.39.6 WINS Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the WINS setting.
• To use the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) setting is necessary.
• By using the WINS, the traffic by broadcast can be reduced, and the communication becomes available with the network where broadcast
does not reach.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.39.7 WINS Settings: Automatic Retrieval Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the WINS server address.
• To acquire the WINS server address automatically.
• To obtain the WINS server address from DHCP server. If there are more than on address settings, up to two can be acquired.

(2) Default setting

• Enable

(3) Setting item

• “Enable”
• No Limit

6.39.8 WINS Settings: WINS Server Address 1, 2

(1) Use
• To set the WINS server address.
• To use when manually entering the WINS server address.
• The primary address and the secondary address can be set.
(The primary address has the priority during operation.)

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [1] or [2].
2. Enter the WINS server address.

6.39.9 WINS Settings: Node Type Setting

(1) Use
• To set a node type.

(2) Default setting

• H Node

(3) Setting item

• B Node
• P Node
• N Node
• “H Node”

6.39.10 Direct Hosting Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the direct hosting setting.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-97
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.40 Network Settings-LDAP Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.40.1 Enabling LDAP

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.40.2 Setting Up LDAP

• Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP server can be conducted.
• Touch [Setting Up LDAP], and select the optional blank key to register and/or set.

6.40.3 Setting Up LDAP-LDAP Server Name

(1) Use
• Set the LDAP server name.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Server Name].
2. Enter the server name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.40.4 Setting Up LDAP-Max. Search Results

(1) Use
• To set the Max. results of address for LDAP search.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Max. Search Results].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the Max. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-key pad.

6.40.5 Setting Up LDAP-Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for LDAP search.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Timeout].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.

6.40.6 Setting Up LDAP-Initial Setting for Search Details

(1) Use
• To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Initial Setting for Search Details].
2. Touch the key about condition for each search item, and select the condition.

6.40.7 Setting Up LDAP-Check Connection

• It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to “OFF.”
• It will not be displayed when the following is set to “Restrict.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details] → [Manual Destination Input]

(1) Use
• To check the connection with the LDAP server which has been set.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Check Connection].
2. Confirm a proper connection and touch [Close].

I-98
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.40.8 Setting Up LDAP-Reset All Settings

(1) Use
• To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the shipping.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Reset All Settings].
2. Check the message and touch [Yes].
3. Touch [OK].

6.40.9 Setting Up LDAP-Server Address

(1) Use
• To set the LDAP server address.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Server Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and enter the server address.

6.40.10 Setting Up LDAP-Search Base

(1) Use
• To set the directory path for LDAP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Search Base].
2. Enter the search base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.40.11 Setting Up LDAP-SSL Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.40.12 Setting Up LDAP-Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the LDAP server port number.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.

6.40.13 Setting Up LDAP-Port Number (SSL)

(1) Use
• To set the port number for LDAP server when using SSL.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad.

6.40.14 Setting Up LDAP-Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Use
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.

(2) Procedure
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation • Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.

I-99
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.

6.40.15 Setting Up LDAP-Authentication Type

(1) Use
• To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server.
Anonymous User name and password are not necessary.
(Dynamic authentication will be invalid when anonymous is selected.)
Simple Simple method which needs the user name and the password.
Digest-MD5 Method available with normal LDAP server. When failing to authenticate with Digest-MD5, it
automatically switches to CRAM-MD5.
GSS-SPNEGO Method available with Windows active directory (Kerberos authentication).
NTLM (v1) Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT, etc.
NTLM (v2) Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT, etc.
It has been applied to the Windows NT4.0 SP4 and later versions. Its security has been
enhanced compared to v1.

(2) Default setting

• Anonymous

(3) Setting item

• “Anonymous”
• Simple
• Digest-MD5
• GSS-SPNEGO
• NTLM v1
• NTLM v2

6.40.16 Setting Up LDAP-Select Server Authentication Method

(1) Use
• To set the authentication system when conducting LDAP server authentication.
• To use when changing the server authentication system.
Use Set Value It conducts authentication with the setting value set by [LDAP Server Registration].
Use User Authentication ID and Password It conducts authentication with the registration data for the copier’s user
authentication.
Dynamic Authentication It conducts authentication by dynamic authentication.

(2) Default setting

• Use Set Value

(3) Setting item

• “Use Set Value”
• Use User Authentication ID and Password
• Nprinter/Rprinter

6.40.17 Setting Up LDAP-Referral Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use the referral setting.
• To use when tracing the server with referral at the time of LDAP connection.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.40.18 Setting Up LDAP-Login Name

(1) Use
• To set the login name to connect to LDAP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

I-100
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
NOTE
• The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous.

6.40.19 Setting Up LDAP-Password

(1) Use
• To set the password for connecting to LDAP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password].
2. Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous.

6.40.20 Setting Up LDAP-Domain Name

(1) Use
• To set the domain name for connecting to LDAP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.40.21 Default LDAP Server Setting

(1) Use
• To set the server to be used as the default when searching LDAP.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Default LDAP Server Setting].
2. Select the optional server.

6.41 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail TX (SMTP)

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.41.1 E-mail TX (SMTP)

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail transmission setting.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.41.2 Scan to E-mail

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by e-mail.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.41.3 Status Notification

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to inform the status by e-mail.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-101
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.41.4 Total Counter Notification

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to inform the total counter by e-mail.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.41.5 SMTP Server Address

(1) Use
• To set the SMTP server address.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and enter the server address.

6.41.6 Binary Division

(1) Use
• To set whether to carry out binary division for data to be transmitted.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.41.7 Divided Mail Size

(1) Use
• To set the dividing size when carrying out the binary division for data to be transmitted.
• To change the dividing size of the data.

(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 (in 100 increments) using the 10-key pad.

6.41.8 Connection Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.

(2) Procedure
• Select the timeout period using [+] / [-] keys.

(3) Default setting

• 60 sec

(4) Setting range

• 30 to 300, in 30 sec. increments

6.41.9 Server Capacity

(1) Use
• To set the Max. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive.

(2) Default setting

• No Limit

(3) Setting item

• “No Limit”
• 1 to 100

I-102
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.41.10 SSL/TLS Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use SSL/TLS when sending an e-mail.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• SMTP over SSL
• Start TLS
• “OFF”

6.41.11 Port No.

(1) Use
• To set the port number for transmission with SMTP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.41.12 Port Number (SSL)

(1) Use
• To set the port number when using SSL.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.41.13 Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Use
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.

(2) Procedure
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.

6.41.14 Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable SMTP authentication.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When set to “ON”, enter the [User ID], [Password] and [Domain Name].

6.41.15 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP authentication.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

I-103
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.41.16 Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Time

(1) Use
• To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-key pad.

6.42 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-E-mail RX (POP)

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.42.1 E-mail RX (POP)

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.42.2 POP Server Address

(1) Use
• To set the POP server address.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and enter the server address.

6.42.3 Connection Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server.

(2) Procedure
• Select the timeout period of connection using [+] / [-] keys.

6.42.4 SSL Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use SSL when receiving an e-mail.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.42.5 Port No.

(1) Use
• To set the port No. for transmitting with POP server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port No. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

I-104
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.42.6 Port Number (SSL)

(1) Use
• To set the port number when using SSL.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.42.7 Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Use
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.

(2) Procedure
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation • Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
• The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.

6.42.8 Login Name

(1) Use
• To enter a login name used for POP server authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Login Name].
2. Enter a login name.

6.42.9 Password
(1) Use
• To enter a login name used for POP server authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password].
2. Enter a password.

6.42.10 APOP Authentication

(1) Use
• To set whether to use APOP authentication.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.42.11 Check for New Messages

• It will not be displayed when either [Internet Fax] is set to “OFF” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(1) Use
• To set whether to automatically check a POP server for new messages.

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

I-105
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.42.12 Polling Interval

• It will not be displayed when either [Internet Fax] is set to “OFF” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(1) Use
• To set a polling interval at which a POP server is checked for new messages.

(2) Default setting

• 15 minutes

(3) Setting range

• 1 to 60 minutes

6.43 Network Settings-E-mail Settings-S/MIME Communication Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.43.1 S/MIME Communication Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to activate S/MINE communication that provides encrypted E-mail transmission.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.43.2 Digital Signature

(1) Use
• Set whether to add a digital signature to S/MIME messages.

(2) Default setting

• Do not add signature

(3) Setting item

• “Do not add signature”
• Always add signature
• Select when sending

6.43.3 E-mail Text Encryption Method

(1) Use
• To select an encryption method used for S/MIME E-mail text.

(2) Default setting

• 3DES

(3) Setting item

• RC2-40
• RC2-64
• RC2-128
• DES
• “3DES”
• AES-128
• AES-192
• AES-256

6.43.4 Print S/MIME Information

(1) Use
• To select whether to print S/MIME information when sending and receiving E-mail.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes

I-106
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• “No”

6.43.5 Automatically Obtain Certificates

(1) Use
• To set whether to automatically acquire a certificate when sending or receiving E-mail.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

6.43.6 Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Use
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.

(2) Procedure
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation • Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
• The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.

6.44 Network Settings-SNMP Setting

6.44.1 SNMP Setting
(1) SNMP Setting
(a) Use
• To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not.
• To set the SNMP version to be used.
• To readout management information base and to enter community name for writing.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(2) SNMP v1/v2c (IP)

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use SNMP v1/v2c (IP).

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(3) SNMP v3 (IP)

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use SNMP v3 (IP).

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-107
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(4) SNMP v1 (IPX)

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use SNMP v1 (IPX).

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.44.2 UDP Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the UDP standby port number which is used for SNMP (IP).

(2) Procedure
1. Touch the Clear key.
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.44.3 SNMP v1/v2c Settings

(1) Use
• To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c.
• To use when entering the community name for reading the Management Information Base (MIB) and writing to it.

(2) Read Community Name Settings

(a) Procedure
• Enter a read community name.

(3) Write Setting

(a) Default setting
• Enable

(b) Setting item

• “Enable”
• Disable
NOTE
• [Enable] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(4) Write Community Name Settings

(a) Procedure
• Enter a write community name.

6.44.4 SNMP v3 Settings

(1) Context Name Settings
(a) Use
• Set the context name which is used for SNMP v3.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Name].
2. Enter the context name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen key board, and touch [OK].

(2) Discovery User Permissions

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the discovery authority user which is used for SNMP v3.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-108
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Discovery User Name Settings

(a) Use
• To set the name of the discovery authority users which is used for SNMP v3.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Discovery User Name].
2. Enter the discovery user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• The user name same with the read user name or the write user name cannot be set.

(4) Read User Name Settings

(a) Use
• To set the read-only user name used for SNMP v3.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Read User Name].
2. Enter the read user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• The user Name same with the discovery user name cannot be used.

(5) Security Leve

(a) Use
• To set the security level of the read-only user used for SNMP v3.
OFF No authentication will be conducted when the read-only user accesses.
auth-password Conducts authentication only for the authentication password when the read-only user
accesses.
auth-password/priv-password Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy password when read-only user
accesses.

(b) Default setting

• auth-password/priv-password

(c) Setting item

• OFF
• auth-password
• “auth-password/priv-password”

(6) Password Setting

(a) Use
• To set the authentication password for the read-only user which is used for SNMP v3.

(b) Procedure
1. Select a type of password.
2. Enter the password (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

(7) Write User Name Settings

(a) Use
• To set the name of the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Write User Name].
2. Enter the write user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• The user name same with the discovery use name cannot be used.

(8) Security Level

(a) Use
• To set the security level for the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3.
OFF Authentication will not be conducted when reading/writing authority user accesses.
auth-password Conducts authentication only with authentication password when reading/writing authority user
accesses.
auth-password/priv-password Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy password when reading/
writing authority user accesses.

I-109
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(b) Default setting

• auth-password/priv-password

(c) Setting item

• OFF
• auth-password
• “auth-password/priv-password”
NOTE
• [Authentication OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(9) Encryption Algorithm

(a) Use
• To set the encryption algorithm in SNMPv3 communication.

(b) Default setting

• DES

(c) Setting item

• “DES”
• AES-128

(10) Authentication Algorithm

(a) Use
• To set the authentication algorithm in SNMPv3 communication.

(b) Default setting

• MD5

(c) Setting item

• “MD5”
• SHA-1

6.44.5 TRAP Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to allow the TRAP function.

(2) Default setting

• Allow

(3) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

6.44.6 TRAP Setting When Authentication failed

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable the TRAP function when authentication failed.

(2) Default setting

• Invalid

(3) Setting item

• Enable
• “Invalid”

6.45 Network Settings-AppleTalk Settings

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.45.1 AppleTalk Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

I-110
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.45.2 Printer Name

(1) Use
• To set the printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
2. Enter the printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.45.3 Zone Name

(1) Use
• To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Zone Name].
2. Enter the zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.45.4 Current Zone

(1) Use
• To display the current zone on AppleTalk network.

6.46 Network Settings-Bonjour Setting

6.46.1 Bonjour Setting
(1) Use
• To use when operating under the Bonjour service environment.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.46.2 Bonjour Name

(1) Use
• To set the name for identifying over the bonjour network.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Bonjour Name].
2. Enter the Bonjour name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.47 Network Settings-TCP Socket Settings

6.47.1 TCP Socket
(1) TCP Socket
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to set the TCP socket.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(2) Port Number

(a) Use
• To set the port number for TCP socket transmission.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch the Clear key.
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

I-111
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
NOTE
• When SSL Certificate is registered, the following can be set.

(3) SSL Setting

(a) Default setting
• OFF

(b) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(4) Port Number

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Enter].
2. Press Clear key.
3. Enter a port number within the range between 1 and 65535 with the 10-key pad.

(5) Port Number (SSL)

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Enter].
2. Press Clear key.
3. Enter a port number within the range between 1 and 65535 with the 10-key pad.

6.47.2 TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)

(1) TCP Socket/ASCII Mode
(a) Use
• To set whether or not to set the TCP socket for ASCII mode.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(2) Port Number (ASCII Mode)

(a) Use
• To set the port number which is used for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch the Clear key.
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.48 Network Settings-Network Fax Setting

• It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to “OFF” in the following settings.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings]

6.48.1 Network Fax Function Settings

(1) IP Address Fax Function
• Setting will be available only when [IP Address Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings]

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use IP address fax function.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(2) Internet Fax Function

• Setting will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings]

I-112
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use Internet fax function.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.48.2 SMTP TX Settings

(1) Use
• To set SMTP TX when network fax function is being used.
• To set SMTP TX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used.

(2) Port Number

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(3) Connection Timeout

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec.) using the 10-key pad.

6.48.3 SMTP RX Settings

(1) Use
• To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used.
• To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used.

(2) SMTP RX
(a) Default setting
• ON

(b) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(3) Port No.

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(4) Connection Timeout

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec.) using the 10-key pad.

6.49 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Client Settings

6.49.1 WebDAV Client Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether to use WebDAV Client Settings.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.49.2 Proxy Server Address

(1) Use
• To set the proxy server address.

I-113
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.

6.49.3 Proxy Server Port Number

(1) Use
• To set the proxy server port number.

(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.49.4 User Name

(1) Use
• To set the user name for WebDAV authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [User Name].
2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.49.5 Password
(1) Use
• To set the password for WebDAV authentication.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password].
2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.49.6 Connection Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for connecting to WebDAV server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad.

6.49.7 Server Authentication Character Code

(1) Use
• To set a character code used during WebDAV server authentication.

(2) Default setting

• UTF-8

(3) Setting item

• “UTF-8”
• Windows Code page

6.49.8 Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Use
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.

(2) Procedure
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation • Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
• The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.

I-114
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.50 Network Settings-WebDAV Settings-WebDAV Server Settings

6.50.1 WebDAV Server Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use WebDAV Server Settings.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.50.2 SSL Setting

• It is displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.

(1) Use
• To set whether to use SSL/TSL for communications when using the machine as WebDAV server.

(2) Default setting

• Non-SSL Only

(3) Setting item

• “Non-SSL Only”
• SSL Only
• SSL/Non-SSL
NOTE
• When “ON” is selected in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode], only [SSL Only] is
selectable.

6.50.3 Password Setting

(1) Use
• To set a password to access WebDAV server.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Password Setting].
2. Enter a password with the keyboard on the screen, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• Touching [Initial Password] can restore the default password setting.
(Default password: sysadm)

6.51 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Web Service Common Settings

6.51.1 Friendly Name
(1) Use
• To define a friendly name that is used when printing a job with WSD (Web Service on Devices) function.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Friendly Name].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 62 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.51.2 Publication Service

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable Publication Service.
• Select [Enable] when using this machine under an environment where communication is possible only with Windows Vista’s IPv6.

(2) Default setting

• Invalid

(3) Setting item

• Enable
• “Invalid”

6.51.3 SSL Setting

• It will be displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.

I-115
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(1) Use
• To set whether to use SSL when using WSD (Web Service on Devices) function.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.51.4 Certificate Verification Level Settings

• It will be displayed only when SSL Certificate is registered.

(1) Use
• To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate.

(2) Procedure
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation • Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
• The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.

6.52 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Printer Settings

6.52.1 Printer Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use this printer as a WSD printer.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.52.2 Printer Name

(1) Use
• To set the WS printer name.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Name].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.52.3 Printer Location

(1) Use
• To set the WS printer location.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Location].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.52.4 Printer Information

(1) Use
• To set the WS printer information.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Information].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

I-116
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.53 Network Settings-Web Service Settings-Scanner Settings

6.53.1 Scanner Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use this machine as a WSD scanner.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.53.2 Scanner Name

(1) Use
• To set the WS scanner name.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Scanner Name].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.53.3 Scanner Location

(1) Use
• To set the WS scanner location.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Scanner Location].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.53.4 Scanner Information

(1) Use
• To set the WS scanner information.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Scanner Information].
2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.53.5 Connection Timeout

(1) Use
• To set the timeout period for connection of WS scanner.

(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter the connecting timeout period between 30 and 300 using the 10-key pad.

6.54 Network Settings-SSDP Settings

6.54.1 SSDP Settings
(1) Use
• To set whether to use SSDP protocol.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.54.2 Multicast TTL Setting

(1) Use
• To set the multicast TTL value.

(2) Default setting

• 1

I-117
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting range

• “1” to 10

6.55 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Device Setting

6.55.1 MAC Address
(1) Use
• To display the MAC address of the machine.

(2) Procedure
• The address cannot be changed.

6.55.2 Network Speed

(1) Use
• To set the network speed.

(2) Default setting

• Auto

(3) Setting item

• “Auto”
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 1Gbps Full Duplex
NOTE
• When Network speed setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

6.55.3 LLTD Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery).
• By enabling LLTD, Windows Vista's Network Map can show this machine's location on the network.

(2) Default setting

• Enable

(3) Setting item

• “Enable”
• Disable

6.56 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Time Adjustment Setting

6.56.1 Time Adjustment Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting.
• To synchronize the time between the server and the client.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.56.2 Auto IPv6 Retrieval

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to automatically obtain NTP server's IPv6 address.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-118
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.56.3 NTP Server Setting

(1) Host Address
(a) Use
• To set the NTP server address.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address].
2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter the IP address.
3. Select [Host name Input], and enter the host name.

(2) Port Number

(a) Procedure
1. Touch the Clear key.
2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

6.56.4 Auto Time Adjustment

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to automatically adjust time.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.56.5 Polling Interval

(1) Use
• To set a polling interval when Auto Time Adjustment is set to ON.

(2) Procedure
1. Press the Clear key.
2. Enter a polling interval within the range between 1 to 240 hours with the 10-key pad.

6.57 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Status Notification Setting

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• To notify status, notifications both by E-mail and by SNMP TRAP function can be set. For E-mail, up to ten IP addresses and one IPX
address can be set. For SNMP TRAP function, up to five IP addresses and one IPX can be set.

6.57.1 Register Notification Address (IP Address)

(1) Use
• To set IP addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
• Up to 5 addresses can be registered.

(2) Procedure
1. From IP address 1 to 5, select an IP address where settings are made.
2. Touch [Host Address].
3. Select [Input Host], [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
4. Touch the Clear key and enter a port number within the range of 1 to 65535 using the 10-key pad.
5. Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name.
6. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON].
7. Touch [OK] and finish the settings.

6.57.2 Register Notification Address (IPX Address)

(1) Use
• To set IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [IPX Address].
2. Touch [Network Address] or [Node Address] and enter an address.
3. Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name.
4. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON].
5. Touch [OK] and finish the settings.

I-119
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.57.3 Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)

(1) Use
• To set E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
• Up to 10 addresses can be registered.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Forward].
2. From E-mail addresses 1 to 10, select an E-mail address where settings are made.
3. Touch [Edit E-mail Address].
4. Enter an E-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) using the keyboard on the screen and touch [OK].
5. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON].
6. Touch [OK] and finish the settings.

6.58 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Total Counter Notification Settings

6.58.1 Notification Schedule Setting
(1) Use
• To set the schedule for informing the total counter value.
• Two different schedules can be set for reporting.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Schedule 1] or [Schedule 2].
2. Select the reporting cycle from [Daily], [Weekly] or [Monthly].
3. When selecting [Daily] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of day(s).
4. When selecting [Weekly] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of week(s) and day of the Week.
5. When selecting [Monthly] for the reporting cycle, set the Interval of month(s) and date of the month.

6.58.2 Notification Address Setting

(1) Use
• To set the e-mail address for reporting the total counter value.
• Up to three e-mail addresses can be set.
• It can be selected whether to apply the schedule of the [Set Schedule] to each address.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Address 1], [Address 2] or [Address 3].
2. Touch [E-mail Address Edit].
3. Enter the e-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
4. Touch [Set Schedule].
5. Select ON/OFF for each schedule.

6.58.3 Model Name

(1) Use
• To set the device name for identifying the copier when reporting the total counter.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Model Name].
2. Enter the model name (up to 20 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

6.58.4 Send Now

(1) Use
• To transfer the current total counter value to the set address.

6.59 Network Settings-Detail Settings-PING Confirmation

6.59.1 Use
• To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING.

6.59.2 Procedure
1. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission.
2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
3. Touch [Check Connection] key to check the connection.

6.60 Network Settings-Detail Settings-SLP Setting

6.60.1 Use
• To set whether to use SLP or not.
• Device search will be available with TWAIN by setting SLP enable.

I-120
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.60.2 Default setting

• Enable

6.60.3 Setting item

• “Enable”
• Disable

6.61 Network Settings-Detail Settings-LPD Setting

6.61.1 Use
• To set whether to use LPD during printing or not.

6.61.2 Default setting

• Enable

6.61.3 Setting item

• “Enable”
• Disable

6.62 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Prefix/Suffix Setting

6.62.1 ON/OFF Setting
(1) Use
• To set whether to add prefix or suffix to the address when calling or entering an address.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.62.2 Prefix/Suffix Setting

(1) Use
• To register or change the prefix or suffix.
• Eight types of prefix and suffix can be added.
Prefix Letters added to the top of the text (header part)
Suffix Letters added to the bottom of the text (footer part)

(2) Procedure
• Available number to be registered as prefix is up to 20 characters.
• Available number to be registered as suffix is up to 64 characters.

6.63 Network Settings-Detail Settings-Error Code Display Setting

6.63.1 Use
• To set whether or not to display an error code when a network-related error occurs.
• To help to identify the cause of network error by displaying an error code.

6.63.2 Default setting

• OFF

6.63.3 Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.64 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

NOTE
• IEEE802.1X authentication settings are made with PageScope Web Connection.

6.64.1 IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use IEEE802.1X authentication.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

I-121
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.64.2 Auth. Status

(1) Use
• Displays present IEEE802.1X authentication status.

6.64.3 Reset Job Settings

(1) Use
• Returns all IEEE802.1X authentication settings to initial values.

6.64.4 Certificate Verification Level Settings

(1) Procedure
• Sets a certificate verification method for server certificate verification.
Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.

6.65 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting

• It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 v2 or LK-103 v2) is activated.

6.65.1 Use
• To set whether to use the web browser function.

6.65.2 Default setting

• Enable

6.65.3 Setting item

• “Enable”
• Invalid

6.66 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Invalid.”
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Bluetooth Settings]

6.66.1 Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.

6.66.2 Default setting

• Enable

6.66.3 Setting item

• “Enable”
• Invalid

6.67 Copier Settings

6.67.1 Auto Zoom (Platen)
(1) Use
• To set whether to function the auto zoom when the tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at automatic paper
selection mode.)

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.67.2 Auto Zoom (ADF)

(1) Use
• To set whether to function the auto zoom when the feed tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at automatic paper
selection mode.)

I-122
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.67.3 Specify Default Tray when APS OFF

(1) Use
• To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.
• To set the tray (tray 1) for the default setting when cancelling APS.

(2) Default setting

• Tray Before APS ON

(3) Setting item

• “Tray Before APS ON”
• Default Tray

6.67.4 Print Jobs During Copy Operation

(1) Use
• To set whether to receive printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation.
• To restrict receiving printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation.
Accept Receives the print data or fax data and print.
Receive Only Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished.

(2) Default setting

• Accept

(3) Setting item

• “Accept”
• Receive Only

6.67.5 Tri-Fold Print Side

• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.

(1) Use
• Specifies the side of copies to be folded.
Inside Folds paper in three with the printed side in.
Outside Folds paper in three with the printed side out.

(2) Default setting

• Inside

(3) Setting item

• Outside
• “Inside”

6.67.6 Automatic Image Rotation

(1) Use
• Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the document and copy paper orientations are different.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set If the “Auto” Paper setting, “Auto” Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the
image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set If the “Auto” Paper setting or “Auto” Zoom setting is selected, the image is
automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set If the “Auto” Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is
automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Zoom is set If the “Auto” Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the
orientation of the paper.

(2) Default setting

• When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set

I-123
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set
• “When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set”
• When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set
• When Auto Zoom is set

6.68 Printer Settings

6.68.1 USB Timeout
(1) Use
• To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated.

(2) Default setting

• 60 seconds

(3) Setting range

• 10 to 1000 seconds

6.68.2 Network Timeout

(1) Use
• To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated.

(2) Default setting

• 60 seconds

(3) Setting range

• 10 to 1000 seconds

6.68.3 Print XPS Errors

(1) Use
• To set whether to print error information when an error occurs while printing a XPS file.

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

6.68.4 PSWC Direct Print

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to allow direct print with PageScope Web Connection.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

6.68.5 Assign Account to Acquire Device Info

(1) Use
• Specify whether this machine requests the password from the Windows printer driver when the Windows printer driver acquires device
information, for example, which options are installed in this machine.
Yes Sets a password. By setting a password, the speed at which the printer driver obtains the machine information increases.
No Does not set a password. The machine authenticates the printer driver with the OpenAPI feature.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

I-124
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.69 Fax Settings

• Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.

6.69.1 Header Information

(1) Use
• To register the name of the sender and fax ID which will be printed when transmitting the fax.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Sender] and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the onscreen keyboard.
2. Enter Sender Fax No. (up to 20 characters) using the 10-key pad and [+], [Space] displayed on the screen.

6.69.2 Header/Footer Position

(1) Header Position
(a) Use
• To set the position to print the header when transmitting the fax.

(b) Default setting

• Outside Body Text

(c) Setting item

• Inside Body Text
• “Outside Body Text”
• OFF
NOTE
• [Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for Internet Fax/IP Address Fax.

(2) Print Receiver’s Name

• It will not be displayed on the screen when [Fax Target] is set to beside “US” or “HK” in the following settings.
[Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Marketing Area]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print the information of TX destination (Registered name or Fax No.) when transmitting fax.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(3) Footer Position

(a) Use
• To set the position to print the footer when transmitting the fax.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• Inside Body Text
• Outside Body Text
• “OFF”
NOTE
• [Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for the color mode of Internet Fax/IP Address Fax.

6.69.3 Line Parameter Setting

(1) Dialing Method
(a) Use
• To set the dialing method.
• The displays are different depending on the country.

(b) Default setting

• PB

(c) Setting item

• “PB”
• 10 pps

I-125
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
NOTE
• The displays are different depending on the country.

(2) Receive Mode

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To set the fax reception mode.
• To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function, etc. when connected to the external telephone.

(b) Default setting

• Auto RX

(c) Setting item

• “Auto RX”
• Manual RX

(3) Number of RX Call Rings

(a) Use
• To set the number of times to receive call rings.
• To change the number of times of the fake ringback tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving.

(b) Default setting

• 2X

(c) Setting range

• 0 to 15

(4) Number of Redials

(a) Use
• To set the number of redials.
• To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy, etc.
• The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.

(b) Default setting

• 3X

(c) Setting range

• 0 to 7
NOTE
• The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.

(5) Redial Interval

(a) Use
• To set the interval for redialing.

(b) Default setting

• 3 min

(c) Setting range

• 1 to 15

(6) Line Monitor Sound

(a) Use
• To set whether to output the line monitor sound from the speaker or not.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-126
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(7) Line Monitor Sound Vol.

(a) Use
• To set the volume of the speaker.

(b) Procedure
• Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher].

6.69.4 TX/RX Settings

(1) Duplex Print (RX)
• It will not be displayed when [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to “ON.”

(a) Use
• To set whether to carry out the duplex print for the received original when receiving the fax.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(2) Letter/Ledger over A4/A3

(a) Use
• To set whether to use the inch paper priority when receiving the fax.

(b) Default setting

• The default setting is different depending on the country.

(c) Setting item

• ON
• OFF

(3) Print Paper Selection

(a) Use
• To set the priority for paper feed tray when receiving the fax.
Auto select Selected automatically.
Fixed Size Printed only on the fixed size.
Priority Size Printed on size with priority. When the size is not set, it will be printed on the closest size.

(b) Default setting

• Auto Select

(c) Setting item

• “Auto Select”
• Fixed Size
• Priority Size

(4) Print Paper Size

(a) Use
• To set the paper size to print the text when receiving the fax.
• The displays are different depending on the country.
• To make the setting of [Print Paper Size] enable, set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to [Auto].

(b) Default setting

• A4

(c) Setting item

• A3
• B4
• “A4”
NOTE
• The displays are different depending on the country.

I-127
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(5) Incorrect User Box No. Entry

(a) Use
• To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered.

(b) Default setting

• Print

(c) Setting item

• “Print”
• Show Error Message
• Auto Create User Box

(6) Tray Selection for RX Print

(a) Use
• To select the paper tray to be fixed when printing the received text.

(b) Default setting

• Auto

(c) Setting item

• “Auto”
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
NOTE
• Items available for selection are different depending on the paper feed option mounted.

(7) Min. Reduction for RX Print

(a) Use
• To set the print magnification for received text.

(b) Default setting

• 96

(c) Setting item

• 87 to 96
• x1.0

(8) Print Separate Fax Pages

• It will not be displayed when [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to “ON.”

(a) Use
• To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(9) File After Polling TX

(a) Use
• To set whether to delete the original which polling transmission has been completed.

(b) Default setting

• Delete

(c) Setting item

• “Delete”
• Save

I-128
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(10) No. of Sets (RX)

(a) Use
• To set the number of copies to be printed with the received document.

(b) Default setting

• 1 set

(c) Setting range

• “1” to 10 set.

(11) Individual Receiving Line Setup

• It will be displayed only when the optional FAX Kit (FK-502) line 2 is installed and the following setting is set to “TX and RX” or “RX Only”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Multi Line Settings] → [Multi Line Settings] → [Line 2 Setting]

(a) Use
• Specify whether to configure the individual receiving line setup.
• When this setting is set to “ON,” the following settings can be made separately for each fax line:
Forward TX setting, TSI User Box Setting, PC-FAX RX setting, Memory RX Setting

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(12) Individual Sender Line Setup

• It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) line 2 is installed and the following setting is set to “TX and RX” or “TX Only”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Multi Line Settings] → [Multi Line Settings] → [Line 2 Setting]

(a) Use
• Specify whether to configure the individual sender line setup.
• When this setting is set to “ON,” the following settings can be made separately for each fax line:
Header Information

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.69.5 Function Settings-Function ON/OFF Setting

(1) F-Code TX
(a) Use
• To set whether to use the F code transmission.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

(2) Relay RX
• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay]

(a) Use
• To set whether to use the relay RX function.
• To use the machine as the relay delivery station during relay TX.

(b) Default setting

• ON

I-129
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(3) Relay Printing

• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay]

(a) Use
• To set whether to use the relay print function.
• To print out the document that the machine relayed during relay TX.
• The relay print will be output in the following case.
1. When the relay delivery completes appropriately.
2. When the delivery job is cancelled halfway by turning OFF sub power switch.
3. When the delivery job is cancelled due to redial over.
4. When main power switch is turned OFF/ON during relay print error.
5. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during redialing.
6. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during relay delivery.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(4) Destination Check Display Function

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to display the list of specified addresses when sending the fax.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(5) Confirm Address (TX)

(a) Use
• To set whether to use Confirm Address (the machine displays the screen where the user reenters the fax number for confirmation when
the user faxes by entering the fax number directly with the keys).

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(6) Confirm Address (Register)

(a) Use
• To set whether to use Confirm Address (the machine displays the screen where the user reenters the fax number for confirmation when
the user faxes by entering the fax number directly with the keys).

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.69.6 Function Settings-Memory RX Setting

• It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Compulsory Memory RX]
• It will not be displayed when [PC-Fax RX Setting], [Forward TX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON.”
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting]

I-130
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the forced memory RX function.
• To store the received text in the hard disk without printing, and print it out when ordered.

(2) Default setting

• NO
NOTE
• Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to [ON].

6.69.7 Function Settings-Closed Network RX

• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Closed area RX]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting]

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the closed network function.
• To receive data only from the device which password matches.

(2) Default setting

• OFF
NOTE
• When set to [OK], enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used.

6.69.8 Function Settings-Forward TX Setting

• It will not be displayed when [PC-Fax RX Setting], [Memory RX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON.”
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting]

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the forward fax function.
• To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified.
Forward & Print Forward the received text, and print all out.
Forward & Print (If TX Fails) Forward the received text, and prints out only when fails to be forwarded.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• When set to [Yes], set the address to forward to.

6.69.9 Function Settings-Incomplete TX Hold

• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Re-Transmission]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting]

(1) Use
• To set whether to use incomplete TX hold function.
• To re-send the data failed to be sent after a given time.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• When set to Yes, specify the Incomplete TX Hold Time.

6.69.10 Function Settings-PC-Fax RX Setting

• It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON.”

I-131
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting]

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function.
• To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk.

(2) Default setting

• Restrict

(3) Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”
NOTE
• When Allow is selected, make the settings of Receiving User BOX Destination, Print ON/OFF, and Password check ON/OFF.

6.69.11 Function Settings-TSI User Box Setting

• It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX] or [PC-Fax RX Setting] is set to “ON.”
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting]

(1) TSI User Box Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether to use TSI distribution or not.

(b) Procedure
• Touch the [TSI User Box Registration] and register the distribution.

(c) Default setting

• No

(d) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

(2) Action when TSI User Box is not set

(a) Use
• To set setting method when there is no matched box at receiving.
Automatically Print To print the received data.
Memory RX Use Box To store the received data in the forced memory receiving box.
Specified User Box To store the received data in a User Box of this machine.

(b) Procedure
• To use "Specified User Box", touch "Specified User Box" and enter a box number using the ten key pad.

(c) Default setting

• Automatically Print

(d) Setting item

• “Automatically Print”
• Memory RX User Box
• Specified User Box

(3) Print
• Even though [Print] is set to [Yes], faxes distributed to User Box are not printed.

(a) Use
• To set whether to use Print function or not.

(b) Default setting

• Yes

(c) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

I-132
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.69.12 PBX Connection Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not.
• This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line.

(2) Default setting

• No
NOTE
• When set to [Yes], enter the external number between 0 and 9999.

6.69.13 Report Settings

(1) Activity Report
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the activity report or not, and also the timing for printing.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• When this setting is set to ON, make the setting of Output Setting.

(d) Output Setting

Default setting
• Every 100 Comm.
Setting item
• Daily
• “Every 100 Comm.”
• 100/ Daily

(2) TX Result Report

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the TX report, and also the timing for printing.

(b) Default setting

• If TX Fails

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “If TX Fails”
• OFF

(3) Sequential TX Report

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the sequential TX report or not.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(4) Timer Reservation TX Report

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”

I-133
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• OFF

(5) Confidential RX Report

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the confidential RX report.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(6) Bulletin TX Report

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the bulletin TX report or not.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(7) Relay TX Result Report

• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the relay TX result report or not.
• To print out the relay TX result report after the relay delivery is completed when the machine is used as the relay delivery station.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(8) Relay Request Report

• It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the relay request RX report or not.
• To print out the relay request RX report during relay request RX when the machine is used as the relay delivery station.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(9) PC-Fax TX Error Report

(a) Use
• To set whether to print out the PC-fax TX error report or not.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

I-134
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(10) Broadcast Result Report

(a) Use
• To set the format to output the broadcast result report.
All Destinations Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses.
Each Destination Outputs a report after each transmission.

(b) Default setting

• All Destinations

(c) Setting item

• “All Destinations”
• Each Destination

(11) TX Result Report Check

(a) Use
• To set whether to display the TX result report screen.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(12) Network Fax RX Error Report

• Settings will be available when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print RX error report when network fax function is being used.
• To print the error report at unusual situation such as receiving the image data that cannot be processed.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(13) MDN Message

• Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print message when receiving response message to MDN request when internet fax function is being used.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(14) DSN Message

• Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print message when receiving response message to DSN request when network fax function is being used.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON

I-135
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• “OFF”

(15) Print E-mail Message Body

• Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(a) Use
• To set whether to print mail text received normally as the report when internet fax function is being used.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.69.14 Job Settings List

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
(It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX
assignment.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting])

(1) Use
• The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Job Settings List].
2. Select the feed tray.
3. Select the simplex or duplex print, and touch the Start key.

6.69.15 Multi Line Settings-Line Parameter Setting

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.

(1) Dialing Method

(a) Use
• To set the dial method for the expanded line.

(b) Default setting

• PB

(c) Setting item

• “PB”
• 10 pps
NOTE
• The displays are different depending on the country.

(2) Number of Rx Call Rings

(a) Use
• To set the number of RX call rings for the expanded line.
• To change the number of artificial ringback tones with expanded line when receiving calls until it starts receiving operation.

(b) Default setting

• 2X

(c) Setting range

• 0 to 15

(3) Line Monitor Sound

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the speaker.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”

I-136
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• OFF

6.69.16 Multi Line Settings-Function Settings

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.

(1) PC-FAX TX Setting

• This setting does not appear when “RX Only” is selected for [Multi Line Settings].

(a) Use
• To set the number of the line used for PC-FAX transmission.

(b) Default setting

• No Selection

(c) Setting item

• “No Selection”
• Line 1
• Line 2

6.69.17 Multi Line Settings-Multi Line Settings

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.
• To set the system for using each line when using more than one line.

(1) Multi Line Usage

(a) Procedure
• When selecting [Normal], perform the transmission setting for Line 2.

(2) Line 2 Setting

(a) Default setting
• TX and RX

(b) Setting item

• “TX and RX”
• RX Only
• TX Only

6.69.18 Multi Line Settings-Sender Fax No.

• It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To register the fax ID when using the additional line.

(2) Procedure
• Use 10-key pad or [+] / [Space], enter the fax ID (up to 20 characters).

6.69.19 Network Fax Settings-Black Compression Level

• It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(1) Use
• To set black compression level at monochrome TX mode when network fax function is being used.

(2) Default setting

• MH

(3) Setting item

• MMR
• MR
• “MH”

6.69.20 Network Fax Settings-Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method

• It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

I-137
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(1) Use
• To set a color/black multi value compression method used when faxing selecting JPEG or PDF as a file format under network fax
operation.
JPEG (Color) Data is compressed in color JPEG format.
JPEG (Gray Scale) Data is compressed in monochrome JPEG format.
Not Set Data transmission in color or grayscale is disabled. Data is compressed in black and white
(binary) with a specified compression method.

(2) Default setting

• JPEG (Color)

(3) Setting item

• “JPEG (Color)”
• JPEG (Gray Scale)
• Unset

6.69.21 Network Fax Settings-Internet Fax Self Rx Ability

• It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(1) Use
• To set image data compression system, paper size and resolution, which can be received by the machine with internet fax.

(2) Procedure
• The following shows the options of each setting item.
Compression Type Paper Size Resolution
MMR A3 600 x 600dpi (Ultra Fine)
MR B4 400 x 400dpi (Super Fine)
MH A4 200 x 200dpi (Fine)
- - 200 x 100dpi (Standard)

6.69.22 Network Fax Settings-Internet Fax Advanced Settings

• It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]
• To set advanced functions of internet fax.
NOTE
• Only MDN Request will be sent when both MDN Request and DSN Request are set to “ON.”

(1) MDN Request

(a) Use
• To set whether to send MDN (Message Disposition Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(2) DSN Request

(a) Use
• To set whether to send DSN (Delivery Status Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(3) MDN Response

(a) Use
• To set whether to response for MDN request made by the other machine when receiving through internet fax.

I-138
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

(4) MDN/DSN Response Monitoring Time

(a) Use
• To set the period to observe the response from the other machine when sending MDN/DSN request.
In the case of time over, time out message is notified.

(b) Default setting

• 24 hours

(c) Setting item

• 1 to 99
• OFF

(5) Max Resolution

(a) Use
• To set maximum resolution for reading, TX/RX and record when internet fax function is being used.

(b) Default setting

• 600 x 600

(c) Setting item

• “600 x 600”
• 400 x 400

(6) Add Content-Type Information

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to add Content-Type information when using Internet fax.
When [Yes] is selected, “application=faxbw” is added as sub-type to MIME Content-Type header.

(b) Default setting

• Do Not Send

(c) Setting item

• Yes
• “Do Not Send”

6.69.23 Network Fax Settings-IP Address Fax Operation Settings

• It will not be displayed when [IP Address Fax Function] is set to “OFF” in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(1) Operation Mode

(a) Use
• To set the operational mode applied to IP address fax.
Mode1 This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and
models compatible with the Direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ. However, a unique method developed for Konica
Minolta models is used to transmit a color fax.
Mode2 This mode allows communication between Konica Minolta models capable of transmitting IP address faxes and
models compatible with the Direct SMTP standard defined by CIAJ. The transmission in color mode is performed in
the communication mode (Profile-C format) compatible with the Direct SMTP standard.

(b) Default setting

• Mode1

(c) Setting item

• “Mode1”
• Mode2
NOTE
• When selecting Mode 2, make color original transmission settings.

I-139
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.69.24 Fax Print Quality Settings

(1) Use
• Specify whether to correct a received G3 fax according to the resolution.
Prioritize Quality Corrects a received image and prints it.
Prioritize Speed Does not correct a received image to reduce the print time.

(2) Default setting

• Low resolution: Prioritize Quality
• High resolution: Prioritize Speed

(3) Setting item

Low resolution
• “Prioritize Quality”
• Prioritize Speed
High resolution
• Prioritize Quality
• “Prioritize Speed”

6.70 System Connection

6.70.1 OpenAPI Settings-Access Setting
(1) Use
• To allow or restrict the access from other systems with OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator.

(2) Default setting

• Allow

(3) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict

6.70.2 OpenAPI Settings-SSL/Port Settings

(1) Use
• To set the SSL/access port for other systems with OpenAPI.

(2) SSL Setting

(a) Default setting
• Non-SSL Only

(b) Setting item

• “Non-SSL Only”
• SSL Only
• SSL/Non-SSL

(3) Port No./Port No.(SSL)

(a) Procedure
1. Select Port No. or Port No. (SSL), and touch [Input].
2. Press the Clear key.
3. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(4) Client Certificates

(a) Default setting
• Do Not Request

(b) Setting item

• Request
• “Do Not Request”

(5) Certificate Verification Level Settings

Expiration Date Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Key Usage Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by
the issuer.
Chain • Select whether to check that the server certificate chain (certification path) is correct.
• The chain is validated by referencing the external certificates managed on this machine.
Expiration Date Confirmation • Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.

I-140
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• The OCSP service and CRL (Certificate Revocation List) are checked in this order when the
expiration date of the certificate is checked.
CN Select whether to check that the CN of the server certificate matches the server address.

6.70.3 OpenAPI Settings-Authentication

(1) Use
• To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator.
• To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When setting to [ON], enter the login name and the password to be set.

6.70.4 OpenAPI Settings-External Application Connection

(1) Use
• If you use applications, set whether or not to allow this machine to initiate outgoing communication.
• If trouble occurs on the application side and communication does not work properly, select "No."
NOTE
• If "No" is selected, this machine is not allowed to initiate outgoing communication, resulting in connection error. However, this
machine responds to incoming communication initiated by the application side.

(2) Default setting

• Yes

(3) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

6.70.5 Call Remote Center

• It will be displayed when the setup at the CS Remote Care center is complete.

(1) Use
• To call the CS Remote Care center from the administrator, when the CS Remote Care setup is complete.

(2) Procedure
• For details, see “I.10.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines).”

6.70.6 Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting

(1) Use
• Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.70.7 Printer Information

• It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.

(1) Use
• Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer URI].
The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Settings].

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Printer Information].
2. Enter the printer name, printer location and printer information using the keyboard on the display.
3. Touch [Printer URI], and confirm the printer URI information.

I-141
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

6.70.8 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting

• It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted.

(1) Use
• Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or save such data in a User Box.

(2) Default setting

• Restrict

(3) Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”

6.71 Security Settings-Administrator Password

6.71.1 Use
• To set/change the administrator password.

6.71.2 Procedure
• Enter the administrator password on the on-screen keyboard.
1. Current Password : Enter the current administrator password
2. New Password : Enter the new administrator password to be used
3. Re-Input Password : Re-enter the new administrator password
NOTE
• When selecting [Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Security Details] leads to [Password Rules]
being ON, the password with the same letters, the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less than
eight digits cannot be changed.

6.72 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting

• Setting is disabled if user authentication or account track is not performed.

6.72.1 Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict the box administrator to use the system.
• To allow the box administrator to use the system.
The box administrator is the special administrator for box, who is allowed to browse contents in common box / individual box without the
password.
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be set when the user authentication or account track is not carried out.

6.72.2 Default setting

• Restrict

6.72.3 Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be selected when user authentication and account track are not conducted.
• [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• Set the password when setting to [Allow].
• When the following setting shows that [Password Rules] is set to “ON”, the Password using only a single letter or the password
same with the previous one, or the password with less than eight letters cannot be accepted.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings]

6.73 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels

• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

6.73.1 Use
• To set the level for administrator settings item open to the user.
• To make part of the administrator settings items open to the user.
Level 1 [Power Save Setting], [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)], [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)],
[Specify Default Tray when APS Off], [Tri-Fold Print Side] and [Automatic Image Rotation] are
available to users.
Level 2 [Power Save Setting], [Output Setting], [AE Level Adjustment], [Blank Page Print Settings], [Auto
Magnification Selection (Platen)], [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when
APS Off], [Tri-Fold Print Side], [Automatic Image Rotation], [Print Jobs During Copy Operation],
[Change E-mail Address] and [Page Number Print Position] are available to users.

I-142
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

Prohibit Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2

6.73.2 Default setting

• Prohibit

6.73.3 Setting item

• Level 1
• Level 2
• “Prohibit”

6.74 Security Settings-Security Details

6.74.1 Password Rules
(1) Use
• To set whether to apply the password rules.
• To apply the password rule to enhance security.
• Passwords to be covered: CE password, administrator password, public user box password, user password, account track password,
passwords for confidential documents, SNMPv3 WriteUser password, Web-DAV server password.
• Details of the password rules:
• Password except user password, public user box password, SNMPv3 WriteUser password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric
characters. (Case-sensitive)
• User password shall be 8 to 64 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensitive)
• Public user box password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
• SNMPv3 WriteUser password shall be 8 to 32 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.
• Password with only the same letter is prohibited.
• Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited.
NOTE
• When the password rule is set to [ON], the password cannot be changed or registered unless it follows the above
conditions.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhances Security Mode]
• [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “OFF.”
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [CE Authentication]
[CE Authentication] will not be displayed and cannot be set to “OFF” when [Password Rules] is set to “ON.”

6.74.2 Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error

(1) Use
• To set the function for prohibiting authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access.
• To use when setting the system to prohibit authentication failure when conducting authentication by password, etc.
• Authentications which are subjected to this function: CE authentication, administrator authentication, user+ accounts authentication,
SNMP authentication, secure print authentication, user box authentication.
Mode 1 When failed to authenticate, authentication operation (entering the password) will be prohibited
for a certain period of time.
Mode 2 When failed to authenticate, authentication operation (entering the password) will be prohibited
for a certain period of time.
The number of times failure occurred will be counted, and when the number reaches to the
specified time, authentication will be prohibited and the access will be locked.
When the access is locked, touch [Release] on the main body, or turn main power switch OFF/
ON to cancel it.
For CE authentication and administrator authentication, only turning main power switch OFF/ON
will cancel it.
When the machine goes into an access lock condition, release the lock in the following
procedure.
User+ accounts authentication • Touch keys in the following order. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Security
SNMP authentication Details] → [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error]. Then touch [Release].
Secure print authentication
User box authentication
Administrator authentication • After the main power switch is turned OFF and ON, the access lock is released automatically
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.
• [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator unlocking]

I-143
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

CE authentication • The lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter
Count] → [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and
ON. When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.

(2) Default setting

• Mode 1

(3) Setting item

• “Mode 1”
• Mode 2
NOTE
• [Mode2] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• Only the number of times for trials up to the access lock can be changed.
• When [Mode 2] is selected, set the number of times where checks are made before access is locked.

(4) Procedure
• Touch [Release Time Settings] and set a period of time that elapses before access lock is released.

6.74.3 Confidential Document Access Method

(1) Use
• To display the status of the authentication system on the control panel for the confidential document access.
• It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set according to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error]
setting.
• It will be set to [Mode 1] when [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error] is set to [Mode 1].
It will be set to [Mode 2] when [Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error] is set to [Mode 2].
Mode 1 This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID and password. It displays the list of
the corresponding confidential document to print them.
Mode 2 This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID. It displays the list of the
corresponding confidential document, and print them with authentication by password.

(2) Default setting

• Mode 1

(3) Setting item

• “Mode 1”
• Mode 2
NOTE
• [Mode2] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

6.74.4 Manual Destination Input

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the destination Input screen.
Allow All Allows manual destination input in all transmission options.
Enable Functions Individually Allows manual destination input only for G3 fax and restricts it in other transmission options.
Restrict Hides the [Direct Input] tab to prevent you from directly entering destinations.

(2) Default setting

• Allow All

(3) Setting item

• “Allow All”
• Enable Functions Individually
• Restrict

6.74.5 Print Data Capture

(1) Use
• To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the print job data.
• To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Data capture].

(2) Default setting

• Allow

(3) Setting item

• “Allow”

I-144
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• Restrict
NOTE
• [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

6.74.6 Job Log Settings

(1) Use
• Selects whether to keep logs of operations and access made by users and service engineers.
• To set whether to overwrite existing logs.
• To ensure security, this settings is used to keep logs of operations and access including security settings changes, authentication, and job
executions by users and service engineers.
• Logs are saved in HDD and NVRAM.

(2) Job Log Settings

(a) Default setting
• No

(b) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• After selecting “Yes”, the main power switch must be turned OFF and ON so that the new setting takes effect.
• When ON is selected in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode], this setting is
automatically set to “Yes.”

(3) Overwrite
(a) Use
• Set whether to allow or restrict overwriting existing logs when saving audit logs.

(b) Default setting

• Restrict

(c) Setting item

• Allow
• “Restrict”
NOTICE
• To erase audit logs, press [Erase Job Log].

6.74.7 Restrict Fax TX

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to prohibit sending fax.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.74.8 Hide Personal Information

(1) Use
• Selects whether to display file names and destinations in job logs.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.74.9 Hide Personal Information (MIB)

• It will not be displayed when the setting below is as follows:
"ON" is selected in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode].

(1) Use
• Specify whether to display the file name, address, or User Box number as MIB information in Job List.

I-145
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.74.10 Display Activity Log

(1) Use
• Selects whether to display communication logs for scan/fax transmission.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

6.74.11 Initialize
(1) Use
• All data of selected items is cleared.
• Data of the following items can be cleared.
• Job history
• Copy Program
• Network Settings
• One-Touch/User Box Registration

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Initialize].
2. Select the desired item to clear its data and touch [OK].
3. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to initialize the data.

6.74.12 Job History Thumbnail Display

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to display a thumbnail of originals when displaying a job history.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.74.13 Secure Print Only

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to allow only Secure Print for print jobs from PC.
When “ON” is selected in this setting, the Secure Print feature must be always used for printing from a printer driver. As all print jobs
require ID or a password, output documents remains private.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

6.74.14 Copy Guard

• It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.

(1) Use
• Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function.
If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on paper.
• This is used upon set-up of the optional security kit SC-507.

(2) Default setting

• No

I-146
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

6.74.15 Password Copy

• It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.

(1) Use
• Specify whether to use the Password Copy function.
If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password on paper. You can also detect a password embedded on
paper.
• This is used upon set-up of the optional security kit SC-507.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

6.74.16 Web browser contents access

• It will be displayed only when an extended function of the web browser via OpenAPI application is enabled.

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable access to locally-stored files (pre-installed contents, image files, and help files) from the web browser
that is interacting with MFP via OpenAPI applications.

(2) Default setting

• Allow

(3) Setting item

• “Allow”
• Restrict
NOTE
• When using the application where server authentication is carried out by web browser extensions, [Allow] is automatically
selected.

6.75 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode

6.75.1 Use
• To set whether or not to enhance security.
• To use when enhancing the security function at user’s option.
• The following settings are necessary for setting the security enhancement “ON”.
Administrator Password Change it with the one which meets password rules.
User Authentication Set to “User Authentication (MFP)” or “User Authentication (External Server)”.
HDD encryption word Set the encryption word with 20 characters.
SSL Certificate Register self-certificate for SSL communication from the PSWC.
Image Controller Setting Set to [Controller 0].
CE Password Change it with the one which meets password rules.
CE Authentication Set to [ON].
Image Controller Setting Set to [Controller 0].
Management Function Choice Set to “Unset.”

6.75.2 Default setting

• OFF

6.75.3 Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• Note that setting Enhanced Security Mode to “ON” disables the following functions.
• Terminal Debug (forcibly prohibited when Enhanced Security Mode is set to “ON”)
• Print Data Capture (forcibly prohibited when Enhanced Security Mode is set to “ON”)
• In CS Remote Care, the following operation is prohibited.
• Rewriting instructions of firmware, communication of the account track counter information, the setting renewal of the
machine.
• Firmware upgrading through Internet ISW (When the Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON, the setting of this function cannot
be changed from “OFF.”)

I-147
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
• Setting the Enhanced Security Mode “ON” will change the setting values for the following functions.
Function Name Default Setting When Enhanced Security mode is set to [ON]
Password Rules To apply the password rule to OFF ON (not to be changed)
enhance security.
Prohibit Functions To set the function for Mode 1 Mode 2 (not to be changed): Three times is set.
When Auth. Error prohibiting Authentication * The number of times can be changed to once, twice, or
operation in order to prevent three times. (It is twice, four or six times for WebDAV
the unauthorized access. server password.)
Secure Document To display the status of the Mode1 Mode 2 (not to be changed)
Access Method Authentication system on the * In association with Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error,
control panel for the the method is changed from authentication using Secure
Confidential document access. Document ID and password (Mode 1) to that using the
password with the Secure Document first narrowed down
by Secure Document ID (Mode 2).
Public User To permit use by a public user Restrict Restrict (not to be changed)
Access having no user registration if
user authentication setting has
been made.
User List To display the list key for User OFF OFF (not to be changed)
names on User Authentication
screen.
Print without To allow or restrict printing Restrict Restrict (not to be changed)
Authentication which user and account are not
specified.
User Box Admin. To set whether to allow or Restrict Restrict (not to be changed)
Setting restrict the Box Administrator
to use the system.
SSL To set whether to encrypt OFF ON (not to be changed)
access by SSL.
SSL Encryption To set the SSL encryption AES-256, AES/3DES (not to be changed to one containing strength
Strength strength for the SSL encryption 3DES-168, lower than AES/3DES)
communication. RC4-128, DES-56,
RC4-40
Automatically - No No (not to be changed)
Obtain
Certificates of S/
MIME
S/MIME - 3DES 3DES (not to be changed to DES or RC-2)
Encryption
Method
FTP Server To set whether to use FTP ON OFF (not to be changed)
server or not.
SNMPv1/v2c To use when changing Write Read/Write enable Only Read is enabled (not to be changed)
setting.
SNMP v3 Security To set the security level for the auth/priv- • The security level can be selected from among
Level and auth/ Reading/Writing Authority User password [authpassword] and [auth/priv-password].
priv-password which is used for SNMP v3. • An 8-digit-or-more auth-password and privpassword can
both be set.
Print Data Capture To set whether to allow or Allow Restrict (not to be changed)
restrict capturing the Print Job
Data.
Network Setting To clear the network setting Enabled Restrict
Clear through PageScope Web
Connection.
Administrator To clear the network setting Enabled Restrict (not to be changed)
Password Change through PageScope Web
Via Network Connection.
Release Time To set the period of time to be 5 min. The setting value should be 5 min. or more (no value less
Settings elapsed before the access lock than 5 can be set)
state is released.
Destination - Enabled Restrict (not to be changed)
Registration
Change by User
(Address Book
and Program
destination)
Secure Print User - Thumbnail View, Only Detail View is enabled before password
Box Preview Detail View, and authentication (Mode 2)
Document Details
are enabled

I-148
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

Function Name Default Setting When Enhanced Security mode is set to [ON]
Initialize (Network To clear the network related Enabled Restrict (not to be changed)
Settings) settings.
Image Log Specifies whether to transfer OFF OFF (not to be changed)
Transfer Settings the input or output image data
to the server using whenever
MFP inputs or outputs image
data.
Internet ISW Set To set firmware upgrading by OFF OFF (not to be changed)
Internet ISW, and enable or
disable various settings.
Operation Ban To set the period of time to be 5 min. The setting value should be 5 min. or more (no value less
release time elapsed before the access lock than 5 can be set)
state is released in CE
password authentication.

6.76 Security Settings-HDD Settings

6.76.1 Check HDD Capacity
(1) Use
• To display the used space capacity, total space capacity, and the remaining capacity of the hard disk.
• To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk.

6.76.2 Overwrite HDD Data

• When the image becomes unnecessary, temporary data overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are
stored, and destroy the image data itself.
The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen, the remaining data included in the image data will not leak.
Using the HDD lock password function or HDD encryption function along with this function will provide a high level of security which
prevents images of great importance from leaking. It is recommended to use HDD lock password function or HDD encryption function along
with this function for those who require high level of security.

(1) Overwrite HDD Data

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use overwrite temporary data.
• To use when making temporary data overwrite function valid.
• All data are temporarily written into HDD during PC print, copier print, scanning and fax transmission. When the operation is complete,
perform overwriting to the area data were once written in HDD in order to enhance security.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”
NOTE
• When selecting [ON], select an overwrite method.
• [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.”
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(2) Overwrite Method

(a) Use
• To set overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function.
• To change overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function.
Mode 1 To overwrite 0x00 one time.
Mode 2 Overwrite 0x00 → overwrite 0xff → overwrite 0x61 → validation

(b) Default setting

• Mode 1

(c) Setting item

• “Mode 1”
• Mode 2

(3) Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority

(a) Use
• “Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority” can be selected.
Encryption Priority When the encryption word is set, the security level of the data will be enhanced before writing
to HDD. When erasing data, they will all be converted into encryption data before overwritten.

I-149
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
Therefore, overwriting will be executed with the value besides the value specified by the
selected mode.
Overwrite Priority • Standard encryption method will be applied to data written to HDD even when the
encryption word is set, so overwriting and erasing will be performed without fail using the
specified value in the selected mode.
• It is used for performing the overwriting and erasing according to the HDD data erase
standard.
NOTE
• It is necessary to make HDD format when encryption priority/overwrite priority setting is changed.

(b) Default setting

• Encryption Priority

(c) Setting item

• “Encryption Priority”
• Overwrite Priority

6.76.3 Overwrite All Data

(1) Use
• To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting.
• To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM.
• To use when disposing of the hard disk.
• Select the overwriting method from Mode 1 through 8.
Mode 1 It overwrites 0x00 once.
Mode 2 Overwrites with random numbers → overwrites with random numbers → overwrites with 0x00
Mode 3 Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with random numbers → verifies
Mode 4 Overwrites with random numbers → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff
Mode 5 Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff
Mode 6 Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 →
overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with random numbers
Mode 7 Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 →
overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0xaa
Mode 8 Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 →
overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0xaa → verifies

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Overwrite All Data].
2. Touch [Overwrite].
3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen.
4. Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen.
5. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

6.76.4 HDD Lock Password

(1) Use
• To set the lock password for the hard disk.
• To enter, change or delete the lock password for the hard disk.
NOTE
• After setting a lock password, if you replace the HDD due to its breakage or other reasons and install a new HDD, an error
message is displayed. In that case, clear the HDD lock password and set a new password using this function.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [HDD Lock Password].
2. Enter the password (20 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
NOTE
• Password using only a single letter is not acceptable.
• Don’t forget the password. When the password is forgotten, the replacement of hard disk is needed.

3. Re-enter the password to confirm.

4. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after.

6.76.5 Format HDD

(1) Use
• To conduct logical formatting of HDD.
NOTE
• It is subject to logical formatting here, therefore if starting with physical formatting, follow as [Service Mode] → [State
Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD Format].

I-150
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Format HDD].
2. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK].
3. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

6.76.6 HDD Encryption Setting

(1) Use
• To re-set encrypting passphrase due to exchange of NVRAM board or etc.
NOTE
• HDD formatting is required after this setting. Therefore it is necessary to retrieve certain data from HDD in advance.
The following data will be lost after HDD formatting.
1. Address data
2. Authentication data: Authentication mode, user authentication setting, account track setting
3. Box setting data: Box and text in the box, setting information of each box, box for fax
4. Job history, fax transmission history
And after setting the HDD encryption key, the movie data and OCR dictionary data need to be reinstalled as necessary since
these data will be deleted by HDD format.
• If you replace the HDD due to its breakage or other reasons, you can automatically reset the encryption passphrase by installing
a new HDD and performing the logical format.

(2) Procedure
1. Press [HDD Encryption Setting].
2. Enter encryption passphrase (20 characters) with the keyboard on the operation panel and press [OK].
NOTE
• Double-byte and identical characters are not acceptable.

3. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
4. Open [Administrator Settings] and conduct HDD formatting according to the instruction appeared on the panel.
5. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

6.77 Security Settings-Function Management Setting

6.77.1 Usage Settings for Each Function
• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that vendor 2 or management device is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Use
• To set whether to use management function for each item of [Copy], [PC print], [Send data] and [Other Prints].
[Other Prints] is not displayed when vendor 2 is connected.
ON Can be used after authentication or coin insertion.
OFF Can be used without authentication or coin insertion.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
• Restrict

6.77.2 Maximum Job Allowance

• It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

(1) Use
• To set the upper limit of the number of copy or PC print when management function has been set.

(2) Default setting

• 9999

(3) Setting range

• 1 to “9999”

6.77.3 Network Function Usage Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to use network function or not when management function has been set.
• Not to use the network function whose counter is difficult to be managed when management function has been set.
• The following are target functions.

I-151
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
PC-FAX transmission/Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Box Operator to view
and retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes/Using Page-Scope Job Spooler
to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• However, when the vendor or management device setting in the Service Mode is set, this setting is set to OFF.
Exercise caution since it will stay in “OFF” setting even when “unset” is selected on vendor or management device setting in
Service Mode later.

6.78 Security Settings-Stamp Settings

6.78.1 Apply Stamps
(1) Use
• Selects whether to add a stamp to documents when jobs are printed or fax/scanned data is sent.

(2) Default setting

• Do Not Apply

(3) Setting item

• Apply
• “Do Not Apply”

(4) Procedure
• Touch “Apply” to make stamp settings independently for print and transmission modes.

6.78.2 Delete Registered Stamp

(1) Use
• Deletes registered stamps, and copy protect/repeat stamps.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Delete Registered Stamp].
2. Select [Stamp] or [Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat].
3. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to delete the registered stamps.

6.79 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings

• It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.63 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]

6.79.1 Use
• Specifies whether to transfer the input or output image data to the server using whenever MFP inputs or outputs image data.
Makes the settings of the WebDAV server or the FTP server where image data are transferred.
• Use this settings to keep logs of input and output image data for security purpose.

6.79.2 Default setting

• No

6.79.3 Setting item

• Yes
• “No”
NOTE
• When selecting [Yes], make the settings of the server where data are transferred.
• Set the following item.
WebDAV Server setting Host Name, File Path, User Name, Password, Port Number, Proxy, SSL Setting
FTP Server setting Host Name, File Path, User Name, Password, Port Number, PASV, and Proxy

6.80 Security Settings-Driver Password Encryption Setting

6.80.1 Use
• To set whether to use the factory default encryption word or user-defined one as a common key that encrypts a password used for a print
job.
User-Defined Sets an encryption word. Enter an encryption word of 20 letters.
Use Factory Default Uses the factory default encryption word (undisclosed predefined encryption key).

I-152
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. UTILITY (ADMINISTRATOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SETTINGS)
NOTE
• When selecting [User-Defined], set an encryption key being consisted of the same letters in the printer driver. If the encryption
word set in the main body differs from the encryption key set in the printer driver, different encrypted passwords are created and
printing cannot be made.
• The use of OpenAPI allows an encryption key to be obtained from the main body.

6.80.2 Default setting

• Use Factory Default

6.80.3 Setting item

• User-Defined
• “Use Factory Default”

6.81 License Settings

6.81.1 Get Request Code
(1) Use
• To display and print a request code and serial number used to activate i-Option.
• Used to confirm the request code and serial number.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Get Request Code], and [Yes].
2. A serial number and request code are issued.
3. By touching [Print], the serial number and request code are printable.

6.81.2 Install License

• This is displayed only when the additional memory included in the optional upgrade kit UK-203 is installed.

(1) Use
• To allow administrator to activate functions provided by i-Option.
• Used when administrator activates functions provided by i-Option.
• By selecting a desired function and entering the corresponding license code, the function can be activated.
• By making settings in [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting], CE can also activate functions provided by i-Option.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Install License].
2. Touch [Select Function].
3. Select i-Option function to be activated, and touch [Yes].
4. Touch [OK].
5. Touch [License Code].
6. Enter the license code that was issued in the license management server using the key board on the control panel, and touch [OK].
7. Touch [Install] key.
8. Confirm the message, select [Yes], and touch [OK].
9. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch.

6.81.3 List of Enabled Functions

• This is displayed only when the additional memory included in the optional upgrade kit UK-203 is mounted.

(1) Use
• To display currently activated functions.
• Used to check the functions that are activated now.

6.82 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting

6.82.1 Restriction Code Settings
(1) Use
• These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third vendor.
Do not set or change these settings without vendor’s instructions.

I-153
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS)

7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS)

7.1 Banner Printing
• It will not be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526 is mounted.
• It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

7.1.1 Use
• To shift to the banner printing mode.
• To use when printing on the long size paper.

7.1.2 Procedure
1. Set the long size paper to the bypass tray.
2. Touch [Banner Printing], and touch [ON].
3. Send the job for the long paper print.
4. Touch [Finish] to finish banner printing mode.
NOTE
• Only PC print is available for the long paper print.
• Normal job cannot be accepted during banner printing mode.

7.2 My Panel Settings

• This is displayed only when a registered user is logging in after user authentication.
However, this is not displayed when both management device 2 and user authentication are used.

7.2.1 Use
• To make various settings about My Panel.
• To customize My Panel screen for individual registered users.
• Items that can be set are as follows:
Language Setting, Measurement Unit Setting, Copier Settings, Scan/Fax Settings, Color Selection Setting, Main Menu Settings, and Initial
Screen Setting

7.2.2 Procedure
1. Touch [My Panel Settings].
2. Touch a key that represents a desirable item and change its settings.
NOTE
• Registering, editing, and deleting My Panel settings are allowed only when logging in as a registered user.
• When My Panel is not customized, the settings for MFP take effect in the three of the control panel settings, Language setting,
Measurement unit setting, and Color selection setting.
• Depending on the functions provided by each MFP and the optional device configuration, not all My Panel settings may not take
effect.

7.3 Device Information

7.3.1 Use
• To display the function version of the firmware installed in MFP and the IP address.

7.3.2 Procedure
• Touch [Device Information] to check the function version and IP address.
About function version
Function version
Version 1 Version 2 Version 3 Version 4
Model
bizhub 652/552/602/502 - - - Initial firmware
bizhub 423/363/283/223 - - Initial firmware -
bizhub C652/C552 Initial firmware Function enhancement 1 Function enhancement 2 -
bizhub C452 - Initial firmware Function enhancement 2 -
bizhub C652DS/C552DS - - Initial firmware -
bizhub C360/C280/C220 - Initial firmware Function enhancement 2 -

7.4 Meter Count

7.4.1 Counter details
(1) Meter Count
• You can check the total number of pages printed after the counting start date.
Total To check the total number of printed pages.
Black To check the total number of pages printed in Black mode.

(2) Copy
• To check the total number of pages copied.

I-154
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. UTILITY (OTHER SETTINGS)

• This value includes the number of pages on which data saved in a User Box in copy mode is printed, and the number of pages list-output
in [Administrator Settings].
Total Large Size* Total (Copy + Print)
Black Indicates the total number of Indicates the total number of Indicates the total number of
pages copied in Black mode pages copied on large-size paper pages copied in Black mode and
in Black mode that of pages printed in Black
mode through a computer
• *: The large size setting is configured in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Counter Setting].

(3) Print
• Check the total number of pages printed through a computer.
Total Large Size* Total (Copy + Print)
Black Indicates the total number of Indicates the total number of Indicates the total number of
pages printed in Black mode pages copied on large-size paper pages copied in Black mode and
in Black mode that of pages printed in Black
mode through a computer
• *: The large size setting is configured in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Counter Setting].

(4) Scan/Fax
• Check the total number of original pages scanned in the Scan/Fax or User Box mode.
• Check the total number of pages on which a file in a User Box or a received file is printed.
• Check the total number of pages sent and received in the fax mode.
Total Large Size *1
Black Indicates the total number of pages on which Indicates the total number of pages on which
a file in a User Box or a received file is a file in a User Box or a received file is
printed in Black mode *2 printed on large-size paper in Black mode *2
Scans Indicates the total number of original pages Indicates the total number of large-size
scanned in the Scan/Fax and User Box original pages that are scanned in the Scan/
modes Fax and User Box modes.
Fax TX indicates the total number of pages in a sent
-
fax (G3)
Fax RX Indicates the total number of pages in a
-
received fax (G3)
• *1: The large size setting is configured in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Counter Setting].
• *2: In the Memory RX mode, pages are counted when printed.

(5) Other
• Check the total number of scanned and printed original pages, total number of printed sheets, and total number of pages printed on both
sides regardless of functions.
Original Counter To check the total number or original pages that are scanned and printed in the Copy, Print, and Scan/Fax
modes*
Paper Counter To check the total number of sheets that are printed in the Copy, Print, and Scan/Fax modes*
Total Duplex To check the total number of pages printed on both sides
• *: If a file is saved in a User Box, its pages are not counted unless they are printed. Report or list output pages are not targeted for
counting.

(6) Print List

• The counter list is printed.

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Print List].
2. Select a paper tray
3. Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided, and touch [Start] or press the Start key.

(7) Coverage Rate

• This is not displayed when [Service Mode] -> [System 2] -> [Coverage Rate Screen] is set to “Do Not Display.”
• The coverage rate can be cleared in [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [Coverage Rate Clear].

(a) Use
• The coverage rate does not match the actual amount of toner used but only an indication.
• The coverage rate is the average printing dot percentage with A4 paper area as 100 %.
• The coverage rate displays the printing dot accumulated average (calculated in A4) for copy, printer, and fax/scan in unit of 0.001 %.
• The coverage rate is calculated from all output excluding the following items.
<items excluded in the calculation>
• Output of meter counter list
• Output in service mode
• Output automatically performed by MFP such as image stabilization pattern

I-155
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

8.1 Replace paper feed roller
Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace paper feed roller [Service Mode] / [Counter] / [Life] / [Counter Reset] 1

8.2 Replace separation roller assy

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace separation roller assy [Service Mode] / [Counter] / [Life] / [Counter Reset] 1

8.3 Change marketing area

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Change marketing area [Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Org. size Detecting Sensor Adj.] 1

8.4 Install LCT

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Install LCT [Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Printer Image Centering Side 1] 1

8.5 Replace drum unit

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace drum unit [Service Mode] / [Imaging Process Adjustment] / [Gradation Adjust] 1

8.6 Replace transfer belt unit

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace transfer belt unit [Service Mode] / [Imaging Process Adjustment] / [Gradation Adjust] 1

8.7 Replace PH unit

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace PH unit [Service Mode] / [Machine] / [LD adjustment] / [LD Timing Adj.] 1
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Leading Edge Adjustment] 2
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Printer Image Centering Side 1] 3

8.8 Replace printer control board

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace printer control board F/W upgrading 1

8.9 Replace MFP board

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace MFP board Remounting of NVRAM (MFP board) 1
F/W upgrading 2
[Service Mode] / [Imaging Process Adjustment] / [Gradation Adjust] 3
[Service Mode] / [Enhanced Security] / [NVRAM Data Backup] 4

8.10 Replace IDC/registration sensor/F, R

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace IDC/registration sensor/F, R Replace transfer belt unit 1

8.11 Replace hard disk

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace hard disk [Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Memory/HDD Adj.] / [HDD Format] 1
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Memory/HDD Adj.] / [HDD R/W Check] 2

8.12 Add key counter

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Add key counter Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings 1

I-156
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

8.13 Execute initialize

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Execute initialize Re-entry of Utility settings 1
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Table Number] 2
[Service Mode] / [System 1] / [Serial Number] 3
[Service Mode] / [System 1] / [Re-entry of setting values] 4
Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings 5
[Service Mode] / [Touch Panel Adjust] 6

8.14 Execute add. option

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Execute add. option [Service Mode] / [Firmware Version] 1

8.15 Execute F/W update

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Execute F/W update [Service Mode] / [Firmware Version] 1

8.16 Add fax board

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Add fax board F/W upgrading 1

8.17 Replace CCD unit

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace CCD unit [Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Paper Feed Direction Adj.] 1
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Main Scan Zoom Adj.] 2
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Scanner Image Centering] 3

8.18 Replace mirror unit

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace mirror unit Parallel adjustment of scanner/mirrors carriage 1
Positioning scanner unit 2
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj] 3
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Printer Area] / [Paper Feed Direction Adj.] 4
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] 5

8.19 Wind scanner drive cables

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Wind scanner drive cables Scanner motor belt adjustment 1
Parallel adjustment of scanner/mirrors carriage 2
Positioning scanner unit 3
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj] 4
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] 5

8.20 Replace scanner motor

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace scanner motor Scanner motor belt adjustment 1
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] 2

8.21 Replace scanner assy

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace scanner assy Positioning scanner unit 1
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj] 2
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] 3

I-157
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST

8.22 Replace scanner home sensor

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace scanner home sensor [Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Scan Image Centering] 1

8.23 Replace original glass moving unit

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace original glass moving unit Original glass moving unit height adjustment 1
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj] 2

8.24 Replace glass step sheet

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace glass step sheet [Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj] 1

8.25 Replace original glass

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace original glass [Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Scan Image Centering] 1
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Scan Area] / [Image position: Leading Edge] 2

8.26 Replace original size detection sensor

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace original size detection sensor Installation of original size sensor 1
[Service Mode] / [State Confirmation] / [Table Number] 2
[Service Mode] / [Machine] / [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.] 3

8.27 Replace DF-618

Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Procedure
Replace DF-618 ADF adjusting the height 1
Adjusting front side skew feed on ADF 2
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Read Pos Adj] 3
[Service Mode] / [ADF] / [Feed Zoom] 4

I-158
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

9.1 List of service mode (outline)

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Service Mode Machine I.9.2.1 Machine
Firmware Version I.10.4 Firmware Version
Imaging Process Adjustment I.9.2.2 Imaging Process Adjustment
CS Remote Care I.9.2.3 CS Remote Care
System 1 I.9.2.4 System 1
System 2 I.9.2.5 System 2
Counter I.9.2.6 Counter
List Output I.9.2.7 List Output
State Confirmation I.9.2.8 State Confirmation
Test Mode I.9.2.9 Test Mode
ADF I.9.2.10 ADF
FAX *1 I.9.2.11 FAX
Finisher *2 I.9.2.12 Finisher
Internet ISW I.9.2.13 Internet ISW
• *1: It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 1 is mounted.
• *2: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-526 or FS-527) is mounted.

9.2 List of service mode (detail)

9.2.1 Machine

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Machine Ref. Page
Trail Edge Color Alignment Adj I.10.3.1 Trail Edge Color Alignment Adj

I-159
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

Machine Ref. Page

Fusing Temperature I.10.3.2 Fusing Temperature
Fusing Transport Speed I.10.3.3 Fusing Transport Speed
Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. I.10.3.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.
Printer Area Leading Edge Adjustment I.10.3.5.(1) Leading Edge Adjustment
Printer Image Centering Side 1 I.10.3.5.(2) Printer Image Centering Side 1
Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex) I.10.3.5.(3) Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)
Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup) I.10.3.5.(4) Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup)
Paper Feed Direction Adj. I.10.3.5.(5) Paper Feed Direction Adj.
Scan Area Image Position: Leading Edge I.10.3.6.(1) Image Position: Leading Edge
Scanner Image Centering I.10.3.6.(2) Scanner Image Centering
Main Scan Zoom Adj. I.10.3.6.(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.
Sub Scan Zoom Adj. I.10.3.6.(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
Printer Reg. Loop Adj. I.10.3.7 Printer Reg. Loop Adj.
LD adjustment LD Timing Adj. I.10.3.8.(1) LD Timing Adj.
LD 1/2 Balance Adj. I.10.3.8.(2) LD 1/2 Balance Adj.
Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj I.10.3.9 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment I.10.3.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
Thick Paper Interval Setting I.10.3.11 Thick Paper Interval Setting
ADF Scan Glass Contamination I.10.3.12 ADF Scan Glass Contamination
Non-Image Area Erase Check I.10.3.13 Non-Image Area Erase Check

9.2.2 Imaging Process Adjustment

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Imaging Process Adjustment Ref. Page
Gradation Adjust I.10.5.1 Gradation Adjust
Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias I.10.5.2.(1) Cleaning Bias
Auto Cleaning I.10.5.2.(2) Auto Cleaning
Max Image Density Adj Copy I.10.5.3 Max Image Density Adj
Printer
TCR Level Setting I.10.5.4 TCR Level Setting
Image Background Adj I.10.5.5 Image Background Adj
Transfer Voltage Fine Adj Primary transfer adj. I.10.5.6.(1) Primary transfer adj.
Secondary transfer adj. I.10.5.6.(2) Secondary transfer adj.
Stabilizer Stabilization Only I.10.5.7.(1) Stabilization Only
Initialize+Image Stabilization I.10.5.7.(2) Initialize+Image Stabilization
Thick Paper Density Thick 1,1+ I.10.5.8 Thick Paper Density Adjustment
Adjustment Thick 2,3,4
Paper separation adjustment I.10.5.9 Paper separation adjustment
Manual Toner Add I.10.5.10 Manual Toner Add

I-160
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

Imaging Process Adjustment Ref. Page

Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection I.10.5.11 Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection

9.2.3 CS Remote Care

(1) Setting up the CS Remote Care

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
CS Remote Care Ref. Page
Using the telephone line modem I.10.7.1 Using the telephone line modem
Using the fax line modem I.10.7.2 Using the Fax line modem
Using the E-mail I.10.7.3 Using E-mail
When using a WebDAV http (bilateral communication) I.10.7.4.(1) Bilateral communication
server in http http (unilateral communication: Device to Center) I.10.7.4.(2) Unilateral communication: Device to Center
communication

(2) List of software SW for CS Remote Care

SW No. Functions Ref. Page
Communication settings Dial Mode I.10.8.3 SW No. 01
01 Line for send only
Baud rate
Auto call Emergency transmission I.10.8.4 SW No. 02
Date specified transmission
Call parts replace date
Call drum replace date
02
Call regular service date (PM)
Auto call on the IC Life
Auto call of the IR shortage
Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts replacement
Trouble display setting Trouble display setting I.10.8.5 SW No. 03
03 Auto call on the toner empty
Auto call on the waste toner bottle full
04 CS Remote Care communication mode I.10.8.6 SW No. 04
05 Modem redial interval I.10.8.7 SW No. 05
06 Modem redial times I.10.8.8 SW No. 06
07 Redial for response time out I.10.8.9 SW No. 07
08 Retransmission interval on E-Mail/http delivery error I.10.8.10 SW No. 08
09 Retransmission times on E-Mail/http delivery error I.10.8.11 SW No. 09
10 Time zone settings I.10.8.12 SW No. 10
11 Timer 1 RING reception → CONNECT reception I.10.8.13 SW No. 11
12 Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception I.10.8.14 SW No. 12
13 Reservation

I-161
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

SW No. Functions Ref. Page

14 Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery I.10.8.15 SW No. 14
15 Timer 5 Wait time for other side's response I.10.8.16 SW No. 15
16 Reservation
17 Reservation
Attention display To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but I.10.8.17 SW No. 18
18
the power for the modem is OFF.
19 Reservation
20 Reservation
Transmission of misfeed Transmission of paperbased misfeed frequent occurrence warning I.10.8.18 SW No. 21
frequent occurrence Transmission of originalbased misfeed frequent occurrence warning
21 warning
Automatic transmission of chronological misfeed data at the time of
transmission of misfeed frequent occurrence warning
22 Misfeed frequent Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value I.10.8.19 SW No. 22
occurrence threshold Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value I.10.8.20 SW No. 23
23 value
24 to 40 Reservation

9.2.4 System 1

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
System 1 Ref. Page
Marketing Area I.10.10.1 Marketing Area
Tel/Fax Number I.10.10.2 Tel/Fax Number
Serial Number I.10.10.3 Serial Number
Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting I.10.10.4 Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting
Foolscap Size Setting I.10.10.5 Foolscap Size Setting
Original Size Detection I.10.10.6 Original Size Detection
Install Date I.10.10.7 Install Date
Initialization Clear All Data I.10.10.8 Initialization-Clear All Data
Clear Individual Data Copy Program Data I.10.10.9.(1) Copy Program Data
Address Registration Data I.10.10.9.(2) Address Registration Data
Fax Setting Data I.10.10.9.(3) Fax Setting Data
All History Data I.10.10.9.(4) All History Data
Network Setting Data I.10.10.9.(5) Network Setting Data
System Error Clear I.10.10.10 Initialization-System Error Clear
Charging CH cleaning K Charge Manual Cleaning I.10.10.11.(1) K Charge Manual Cleaning
K Charge A/C ON/OFF Setting I.10.10.11.(2) K Charge A/C ON/OFF Setting
Problem Unit Isolation Set. I.10.10.12 Problem Unit Isolation Set.
Post card transfer table I.10.10.13 Post card transfer table
Machine State LED Setting I.10.10.14 Machine State LED Setting

I-162
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

9.2.5 System 2

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
System 2 Ref. Page
HDD I.10.11.1 HDD
Image Controller Setting I.10.11.2 Image Controller Setting
Option Board Status I.10.11.3 Option Board Status
Consumable Life Reminder I.10.11.4 Consumable Life Reminder
Unit Change I.10.11.5 Unit Change
Software Switch Setting I.10.11.6 Software Switch Setting
CCD Calibration I.10.11.7 CCD Calibration
LCC size setting I.10.11.8 LCC Size Setting
LCT Paper Size Setting A4LCT I.10.11.9 LCT Paper Size Setting
A3LCT
Line Mag Setting I.10.11.10 Line Mag Setting
Data Capture I.10.11.11 Data Capture
ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set. I.10.11.12 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.
Stamp I.10.11.13 Stamp
Network Fax Settings I.10.11.14 Network Fax Settings
User Paper Settings I.10.11.15 User Paper Settings
Coverage Rate Screen I.10.11.16 Coverage Rate Screen
JAM Code Display Setting I.10.11.17 JAM Code Display Setting
BootUp Screen I.10.11.18 BootUp Screen
Install Data I.10.11.19 Install Data
Bluetooth Settings I.10.11.20 Bluetooth Settings
Auto Power OFF I.10.11.21 Auto Power OFF

9.2.6 Counter

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.

I-163
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

Counter Ref. Page

Life I.10.12.2 Life
Service Call I.10.12.3 Service Call
Section Service Call I.10.12.4 Section Service Call
Warning I.10.12.5 Warning
Maintenance I.10.12.6 Maintenance
Service Total I.10.12.7 Service Total
Counter Of Each Mode I.10.12.8 Counter of Each Mode
Service Call History (Data) I.10.12.9 Service Call History (Data)
ADF Paper Pages I.10.12.10 ADF Paper Pages
Paper Jam History I.10.12.11 Paper Jam History
Fax Connection Error I.10.12.12 Fax Connection Error
ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter I.10.12.13 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter
Parts Counter (Fixed) I.10.12.14 Parts Counter (Fixed)
Jam I.10.12.15 Jam
Section JAM I.10.12.16 Section JAM
Counter Reset -

9.2.7 List Output

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
List Output Ref. Page
Batch List CSV Output I.10.13.1 Batch List CSV Output
Machine Management List I.10.13.2 Machine Management List
Adjustments List I.10.13.3 Adjustment List
Parameter List I.10.13.4 Parameter List
Service Parameter I.10.13.5 Service Parameter
Protocol Trace Last I.10.13.6 Protocol Trace
Error
Fax Setting List I.10.13.7 Fax Setting List
Fax Analysis List I.10.13.8 Fax Analysis List

I-164
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

9.2.8 State Confirmation

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
State Confirmation Ref. Page
Sensor Check I.10.14.1 Sensor Check
Table Number I.10.14.2 Table Number
Level History1 I.10.14.3 Level History1
Level History2 I.10.14.4 Level History 2
Temp. & Humidity I.10.14.5 Temp. & Humidity
CCD Check I.10.14.6 CCD Check
Memory/HDD Adj. Memory Check I.10.14.7.(1) Memory Check
Compress / Decompression Check I.10.14.7.(2) Compress / Decompression Check
JPEG Check I.10.14.7.(3) JPEG Check
Memory Bus Check I.10.14.7.(4) Memory Bus Check
DSC Bus Check I.10.14.7.(5) DSC Bus Check
HDD R/W Check I.10.14.7.(6) HDD R/W Check
HDD Format I.10.14.7.(7) HDD Format
SSD → HDD Data Copy I.10.14.7.(8) Memory/HDD Adj.-SSD→HDD Data Copy
Memory/HDD State I.10.14.8 Memory/HDD State
IU Lot No. I.10.14.9 IU Lot No.
Adjustment Data List I.10.14.10 Adjustment Data List

9.2.9 Test Mode

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.

I-165
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

Test Mode Ref. Page

Gradation Pattern I.10.15.2 Gradation Pattern
Halftone Pattern I.10.15.3 Halftone Pattern
Lattice Pattern I.10.15.4 Lattice Pattern
Solid Pattern I.10.15.5 Solid Pattern
Paper Passage Test I.10.15.6 Paper Passage Test
Fax Test I.10.15.7 Fax Test

9.2.10 ADF

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
ADF Ref. Page
Original Stop Position I.10.16.1 Original Stop Position
Registration Loop Adj. I.10.16.2 Registration Loop Adj.
Auto Stop Position Adjustment I.10.16.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment
Paper Passage I.10.16.4 Paper Passage
Sensor Check I.10.16.5 Sensor Check
Original Tray Width I.10.16.6 Original Tray Width
Read Pos Adj I.10.16.7 Read Pos Adj
Feed Zoom Auto Adjust I.10.16.8 Feed Zoom
Orig. Feed Zoom Ad
Scanning Light Adjustment I.10.16.9 Scanning Light Adjustment
Mixed Original Size adjustment I.10.16.10 Mixed original Size adjustment

9.2.11 FAX

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.

I-166
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

FAX Ref. Page

Line 1 *1 Modem/NCU *1 I.10.17 FAX
Network *1
System *1
Fax File Format *1
Communication *1
List Output *1
Function Parameter *1
Initialization *1
Line 2 *2 Modem/NCU *2
Network *2
Communication *2
Initialization *2
• *1: It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 1 is mounted.
• *2: It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted.

9.2.12 Finisher

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Finisher *1 Ref. Page
FS-FN adjustment *1 Center Staple Position *1 I.10.18.1 FS-FN adjustment - Center Staple Position
Half-Fold Position *2 *3 I.10.18.2 FS-FN adjustment - Half-Fold Position
Punch Centering Fine Adj *6 I.10.18.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Centering Fine Adj
Punch Edge Adj *7 I.10.18.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Edge Adj
Punch F. Sensor Intensity Adj. *6 I.10.18.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch F. Sensor Intensity
Adj.
Punch vertical position (Z-fold) *5 I.10.18.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-
fold)
Punch horizontal position (Z-fold) *5 I.10.18.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position
(Z-fold)
Punch regist adj. (Z-fold) *5 I.10.18.8 FS-FN adjustment - Punch regist adj. (Z-fold)
Punch Registration Loop Adj *7 I.10.18.9 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Registration Loop
Adj
Punch Resist Loop Size (PI) *4 *6 I.10.18.10 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Resist Loop Size
(PI)
1st Z-Fold position *5 I.10.18.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position/2nd
2nd Z-Fold position *5 Z-Fold Position
Tri-Fold Position *2 I.10.18.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position
Center-Staple Pitch Adj. *2 *3 I.10.18.13 FS-FN adjustment - Center-Staple Pitch Adj.
PI Size Detection *4 I.10.18.14 FS-FN adjustment - PI Size Detection
Post Inserter Adjustment *4 I.10.18.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment
Finisher Components Test Mode *1 I.10.18.16 FS-FN adjustment - Finisher Components
Test Mode
Load Data *1 I.10.18.17 FS-FN adjustment - Load Data

I-167
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. LIST OF SERVICE MODE

Finisher *1 Ref. Page

Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj. *2 *3 I.10.18.18 FS-FN adjustment - Paper Alignment Guides
W. Adj.
Punch unit edge detection *5 I.10.18.19 FS-FN adjustment - Punch unit edge
detection
Max Staple Limit Setting I.10.18.20 Max Staple Limit Setting
Punch Option setting I.10.18.21 Punch Option Setting
Max. # of Folded Sheets Setting I.10.18.22 Max. # of Folded Sheets Setting
• *1: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-526 or FS-527) is mounted.
• *2: It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher (SD-508) is mounted.
• *3: It will be displayed only when the optional saddle stitcher (SD-509) is mounted.
• *4: It will be displayed only when the optional post inserter (PI-505) is mounted.
• *5: It will be displayed only when the optional Z folding unit (ZU-606) is mounted.
• *7: It will be displayed only when the optional punch kit (PK-516) is mounted.
• *8: It will be displayed only when the optional punch kit (PK-516 or PK-517) is mounted.

9.2.13 Internet ISW

NOTE
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Internet ISW Ref. Page
Internet ISW Set I.10.19.1 Internet ISW Set
HTTP Setting * I.10.19.2 HTTP Setting
FTP Setting * I.10.19.3 FTP Setting
Forwarding Access Setting * I.10.19.4 Forwarding Access Setting
Download * I.10.19.5 Download
• *: It will be displayed only when the [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON.”

I-168
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10. SERVICE MODE

10.1 Starting/Exiting
10.1.1 Starting procedure
NOTE
• Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized
person not involved with service jobs.

(1) Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch [Details] on meter count display.
3. Press the following keys in this order.; Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
NOTE
• When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Service Mode, authentication by CE password
is necessary. Enter the 8 digits CE password, and touch [END]. (The initial setting for CE password is “92729272.”)
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, CE password authentication is necessary; [Administrator Settings] → [Security
Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• If a wrong CE password is entered, re-enter the right password. The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE
password is entered correctly. To return to the basic screen, turn OFF the sub power switch and turn it ON again. When the
following setting is set to “Mode 2”, operation will be prohibited since it indicates authentication failure by failing to enter
the correct CE password within the specified number of times.
• If the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter
Count] → [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. When the timer reaches the
time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
• The service code entered is displayed as “ * ”

4. The Service Mode menu will appear.

NOTE
• Be sure to change the CE password from its default value.
• For the procedure to change the CE password, see the “I.11.1 List of Enhanced Security.”

10.1.2 Exiting procedure

1. Touch the [Exit] key.

10.2 Date/Time Input mode

10.2.1 Use
• This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.

10.2.2 Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
• Stop → 1 → 1 → 4 → 4 → Clear
3. Enter year, month, day, hour, and minute, in that order, from 10-key pad.
• Year 4 digits → Month 2 digits → Day 2 digits → Hour 2 digits → Minute 2 digits
NOTE
• Before entering date and time, press the Clear key to delete the present time from the place where data and time is entered.
• When setting the month, day, hour, or minute, enter “0” first if the data one digit.

4. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch [Entry].
5. Touch [END] to return to the Service Mode.

I-169
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.3 Machine

10.3.1 Trail Edge Color Alignment Adj

• Not used.

10.3.2 Fusing Temperature

(1) Use
• To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with
varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions.
• When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change.
• Use when the curling of the paper due to the paper type or environmental change occurred, or when the paper jam, as well as stapling or
folding position error occurred due to the curling of the paper.
• By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print can be improved.
• By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark can be reduced.

(2) Adjustment range

Paper type Setting range Step
Plain Paper
OHP Film
Thick 1
Thick 1+
-20 °C to +5 °C
Thick 2 5 °C
Thick 3
Thick 4
Post.
Enve. -5 °C to +5 °C

I-170
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• To adjust the fusing temperature, adjust on the heating side first. If the further adjustment is necessary, adjust on the pressure
side.
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Temperature].
3. Select the paper type and fusing roller type (Heater Roller or Pressure).
4. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] key.
• If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.
• If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.
• If offset is poor, decrease the setting.
• If curling of the paper occurs, decrease the setting.
5. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
6. Return to the basic screen.
7. Output two or three test printing and check to see whether the image has any problem.
8. Make the adjustment for each type of paper.

10.3.3 Fusing Transport Speed

(1) Use
• To adjust the speed of the fusing motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed.
• Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental conditions or degraded durability.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Transport Speed].
3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred.
bizhub 652
Transport speed Paper Setting
310 mm/s Plain paper (Not glossy)
155 mm/s Thick 1, Thick 1+
120 mm/s Plain paper (Glossy), Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, envelope, postcard, OHP film
bizhub 602
Transport speed Paper Setting
288 mm/s Plain paper (Not glossy)
155 mm/s Thick 1, Thick 1+
120 mm/s Plain paper (Glossy), Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, envelope, postcard, OHP film
bizhub 552/502
Transport speed Paper Setting
264 mm/s Plain paper (Not glossy)
132 mm/s Thick 1, Thick 1+
120 mm/s Plain paper (Glossy), Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, envelope, postcard, OHP film

4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.

• If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.
• If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.
5. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
6. Check the print image for any image problem.

10.3.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.

(1) Use
• To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the original size detection sensor/1.
• To display if the original size detection sensor/2 is mounted.
• When the sensor is replaced with a new one.
• When an optional sensor has been added.
• When an erroneous original size detection is made.
• When the marketing area setting is changed.

(2) Procedure
1. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper on the original glass and lower the original cover.
2. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.].
4. Press the Start key.
If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure.
If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional original size sensors for correct installation and change the defective
sensor or harness.

I-171
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.3.5 Printer Area

(1) Leading Edge Adjustment
(a) Use
• To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types. (to adjust the timing where paper is sent out
from the timing roller)
• The PH unit has been replaced.
• The paper type has been changed.
• The print image deviates in the sub scan direction.
• A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
• This setting can be made independently for plain paper, Thick 1/1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, OHP Film, and envelopes.

(b) Setting range

• Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(c) Procedure
1. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.
2. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
3. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Leading Edge Adjustment].
4. Select the [Plain Paper].
5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
6. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
7. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
8. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
9. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
10. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
11. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP film, and envelope.

(2) Printer Image Centering Side 1

(a) Use
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source.
• The PH unit has been replaced.
• A paper feed unit has been added.
• The print image deviates in the main scan direction.

(b) Setting range

• Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
Specifications 3.0 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(c) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Printer Image Centering Side 1].
3. Select the paper source to be adjusted.
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
5. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.

I-172
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

8. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.

9. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
10. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].
11. Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the bypass.)

(3) Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)

(a) Use
• For individual types of paper, this function allows the adjustment of the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd
side of duplex printing.
• This adjustment is made when the image on the 2nd side of paper deviates from the original position in the sub scan direction.
• This adjustment can be made independently for each of plain paper, thick paper 1/1+, thick paper 2, and thick paper 3.

(b) Setting range

Backside

• Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.
Specifications 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(c) Procedure
1. Place A3 paper on the tray.
2. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
3. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Leading Edge Adj. Side 2 (Duplex)].
4. Select the [Plain Paper].
5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
6. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
7. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
8. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
9. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
10. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.
11. If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].
12. Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper.

(4) Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup)

(a) Use
• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode.
• The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.

(b) Setting range

A

Backside

• Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.
• For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern.
Specifications 3.0 ± 0.5 mm
Setting range -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

(c) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Prt. Image Center. Side 2 (Dup)].
3. Select the paper source to be adjusted.
4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
5. Check the dimension of width A on the test print.
6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.

I-173
 •
•
•
•
•

9.
8.
7.
6.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
9.
8.
7.

13.
12.
11.
10.
11.
10.

(a) Use

NOTE

A
6.3 6.3

10.3.6 Scan Area

5.6 5.6
5.0 5.0
4.5 4.5
4.0 4.0

(c) Procedure
3.6 3.6

Setting range
3.2 3.2
2.8 2.8

Specifications
2.5 2.5
2.2 2.2
2.0 2.0
bizhub 652/552/602/502

1
2 8pt. ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm1234567890
9pt. ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl12345678

(b) Setting range

10pt. ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghijk1234567
3 12pt. ABCDEFGabcdefg123456789
14pt. ABCDEFabcdefg1234567
4
18pt. ABCDEabcdef12345
5 8pt. ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮
9pt. ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
6 10pt. ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ

C
12pt. ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ
7 14pt. ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
8 18pt. ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝
R

B
9

B
B
1.5 1.5
C Ǿ4.8
10
(5) Paper Feed Direction Adj.

Ǿ14
Select [Normal Paper - Black].
6.3
5.6
5.0
4.5
4.0

3.6
5
3.2
2.8 10
2.5
2.2
2.0 40

Call the Service Mode to the screen.

• Width B: equivalent to 48 grids
• Width A: equivalent to one grid
al plates and gen stment and runs job no blanket wash your office offset to cut copying costs with this can on automatic changeover from paper masters and automated short rur imply makes desti
ts an office mach n from a pound of ink copy can be run on both sides of the sheet with multiple colors of on a master turning on the machine and running off the copies its not many as copies c
while and after many sizes of materials on almost all kinds of stock rag bond card stock smooth finish adding new versatility speed and efficiency mated run a choice of optior send out you can
rol over the ink en changes are nccessary now advanced fingertip programming single lever action control the inking and dampening system permits the operator to exercise pre uable printed mat
ickness quality c rating cycle greatly reduces repetitive shortrun duplicating time for example when used and impression cylinders that are selfadjusting for changes is paper or r a simplifies the e

D
ut tools a positive anually control even though the machine is running on automatic changeover from pater to scales on paper feed that match scales on rceiving tray of machine compared to a sta
antly longer than t runs to metal plates and general duplicating takes only a matter of seconds the machine includes two ductor rollers and five distributor rollers offset rollers las isters and automa
you with copy qu s its not a press its an office machine heres practical automation the wide image model nylon for longer wear people who arent acquaited you want it to be it p and running off t
ets you and impre a choise of options before while and after copies are run allows the operator to adjust the quality aquamatic control not only assures sharp clean first copies b nd efficiency to m
tically separate w o metal plate and from shortrun prese the inking and dampening system permits the three with varying weigts of paper no special adjustments needed cylinders ation from pater t
[Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] becomes necessary.

Check width A and width B on the test print.

nder constant con ollers are large size to insure even distribution of ink the two form rollers are of different machine all without tools a positive vacuum paper feed system keeps plate the three osd
t cylinders to con rs soft rollers are made of polyurethane to resist chemical attack most hard rollers are for to gripper master and impression cylinders automatically adjust to th longer then ordin

7㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ MODEL : 7㧙ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫ 12㧙ABCDEFGHIJKL
MACHINE S/N :
20㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ DATE : 㧛 㧛 ͠ 㧑 20㧙ABCDEFG
EXP. : AUTO MANUAL( )
7㧙ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST TOTAL COUNTER : 7㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ

B: -7 to +7
A: -7 to +7
12㧙ABCDEFGHIJKL MODE : Text Photo Text / Photo 12㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫

Following the same procedure, adjust for thick paper.

20㧙ABCDEFG Printing Direction : 20㧙౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ

A: 7.9 to 8.3
Original-Set Direction :
If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END].

6.3
OTHERS : 6.3
5.6 5.6
5.0 5.0
4.5 4.5
4.0 4.0
The print image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk).

B
B
3.6 3.6

Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 x 17 plain paper.

3.2 3.2

• If the test chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.

2.8 2.8
2.5 2.5
2.2 2.2
2.0 2.0

Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.

B: 389.1 to 392.1

If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [END].

PART NO. 4034-7940-01
(TEST CHART NO. KMTC-001-01)
Printed in Japan

Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print again.

• Use the following test chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.
Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Paper Feed Direction Adj.].

I-174
When the print image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.
To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed.
Check the dimension of width A on the test print on the backside of the copy.

• Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Paper Feed Direction Adj].
If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again.

Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test print.

If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] keys.
This setting can be made independently for plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2, thick 3, and thick 4.

If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a check again.
• If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.

• If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one.
• If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.
Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray.)
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Adjustment item Ref. page

A: Image Position: Leading Edge I.10.3.6.(1) Image Position: Leading Edge
B: Scanner Image Centering I.10.3.6.(2) Scanner Image Centering
C: Main Scan Zoom Adj. I.10.3.6.(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.
D: Sub Scan Zoom Adj. I.10.3.6.(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.

(1) Image Position: Leading Edge

(a) Use
• To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width
scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
• When the original glass is replaced.
• When the original width scale is replaced.

(b) Setting range

A=20 mm

• A width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the
specifications shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of [Printer Area].
Specifications ± 0.5 mm (10 ± 0.5 mm if a scale is used)
Setting range -5.0 o +5.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)

(c) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Image Position: Leading Edge].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a copy.
5. Check point A on the test print.
6. If width A on the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the test print is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
• If the test print exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

(2) Scanner Image Centering

(a) Use
• To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main
scan direction.
• When the CCD unit is replaced.
• When the original glass is replaced.
• The scanner home sensor has been replaced.

(b) Setting range

B=20 mm

• B width on the test chart and one on the test print are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the
specifications shown below.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Printer Image Centering Side 1] of [Printer Area].
Specifications ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -10.0 to +10.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)

(c) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Scanner Image Centering].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.

I-175
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

4. Press the Start key to make a copy.

5. Check point B on the image of the test print.
6. If the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the test print is less than the specified length, increase the setting value.
• If the test print exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value.
7. Press the Start key to make a test print.
8. Check point B of the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

(3) Main Scan Zoom Adj.

(a) Use
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section.
• The CCD unit has been replaced.

(b) Setting range ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮
8pt.
9pt.
10pt.

12pt.

14pt.

18pt.

C
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

• Measure C width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj.” of [Printer Area].
Specifications ± 1.0 mm
Setting range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)
* Standard size when using a scale: 200.0 mm

(c) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Main Scan Zoom Adj.].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a test print.
5. Check the C width on the image of the copy.
6. If the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the C width on the test print is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
• If the C width on the test print exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.

(a) Use
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section.
• The exposure has been replaced.
• The scanner motor has been replaced.
• The scanner drive cables have been replaced.

(b) Setting range

D
send out you can
uable printed mat

compared to a sta
isters and automa

ation from pater t

plate the three osd
longer then ordin
imply makes desti
many as copies c

a simplifies the e

and running off t

nd efficiency to m
stment and runs job no blanket wash your office offset to cut copying costs with this

n from a pound of ink copy can be run on both sides of the sheet with multiple colors

a choise of options before while and after copies are run allows the operator to adjust

o metal plate and from shortrun prese the inking and dampening system permits the

ollers are large size to insure even distribution of ink the two form rollers are of

rs soft rollers are made of polyurethane to resist chemical attack most hard rollers are
for to gripper master and impression cylinders automatically adjust to th
of on a master turning on the machine and running off the coachine heres practical a p

the quality aquamatic control not only assures sharp clean first copies b

three with varying weigts of paper no special adjustments needed cylinders

can on automatic changeover from paper masters and automated short rur

different machine all without tools a positive vacuum paper feed system keeps

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ
Ǿ4.8

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ

Ǿ14
ABCDEFG
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ

౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
ABCDEabcdef12345
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮

ABCDEFGHIJKL
ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm1234567890

ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghijk1234567

ABCDEFabcdefg1234567
ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl12345678

ABCDEFGabcdefg123456789

5
1.5

10
C

• Measure D width on the test chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
• An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj.” of [Printer Area].
Specifications ± 1.5 mm

I-176
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Setting range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)

* Standard size when using a scale: 200.0 mm

(c) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.].
3. Position the test chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.
4. Press the Start key to make a test print.
5. Check the D width on the image of the test print.
6. If the test print falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.
• If the D width on the test print is less than one on test chart, increase the setting.
• If the D width on the test print exceeds one on test chart, decrease the setting.
7. Press the Start key to make another test print.
8. Check the image on the test print to see if the specifications are met.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

10.3.7 Printer Reg. Loop Adj.

(1) Use
• To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of tray 1 to tray 4, LCT, bypass, and duplex.
• To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the registration rollers.
• Use “Paper Passage” for paper passage check.
• When a paper skew occurs.
• When a paper misfeed occurs.

(2) Adjustment range

• The adjustable range is different depending on paper source and processing speed.
bizhub 652
Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4, LCT Manual Duplex
310 mm/sec -5 to +5 - -5 to +5 -5 to +5
155 mm/sec -9 to +9 - -9 to +9 -9 to +9
120 mm/sec -10 to +10 - -10 to +10 -10 to +10
420 mm/sec - -3 to +3 - -
216 mm/sec - -5 to +5 - -
bizhub 602
Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4, LCT Manual Duplex
288 mm/sec -5 to +5 - -5 to +5 -5 to +5
155 mm/sec -9 to +9 - -9 to +9 -9 to +9
120 mm/sec -10 to +10 - -10 to +10 -10 to +10
420 mm/sec - -3 to +3 - -
216 mm/sec - -5 to +5 - -
bizhub 552/502
Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4, LCT Manual Duplex
264 mm/sec -5 to +5 - -5 to +5 -5 to +5
132 mm/sec -9 to +9 - -9 to +9 -9 to +9
120 mm/sec -10 to +10 - -10 to +10 -10 to +10
350 mm/sec - -3 to +3 - -
216 mm/sec - -5 to +5 - -

(3) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Printer Reg. Loop Adj.].
3. Select a paper source and a processing speed where the settings are made by touching the corresponding keys.
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.
• To decrease the loop amount: Decrease the setting value
• To increase the loop amount: Increase the setting value

10.3.8 LD adjustment
(1) LD Timing Adj.
(a) Use
• LD delay adjust sets adjustment values by adjusting LD light emission delay amount. (Values to be entered are described on the side of
the PH unit.)
• This setting is made after the PH unit is replaced.
• This adjustment is made when the service EEPROM board is replaced or the backup of information on position settings is lost.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

I-177
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [LD adjustment] → [LD Timing Adj.].
3. Enter the values described on the side of the PH unit using [+/-] key.
4. Touch [OK].

(2) LD 1/2 Balance Adj.

(a) Use
• This function adjusts the LD lightness balance between the two LDs to correct the difference of LD lightness between the LDs.
• This setting is made after the PH unit or the service EEPROM board is replaced.
• This adjustment is made to prevent uneven density in highlighted halftone area processed with error diffusion being caused by
inappropriate laser intensity.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [LD adjustment] → [LD 1/2 Balance Adj.].
3. Select [For adjustment] and press Start key.
4. Patterns are output with LD2 light intensity changed on the basis of LD1.

-9 % -6 % -3 % 0% +3 % +6 % +9 %

5. Each pattern has four squares. The two small squares diagonal to each other are printed with the same LD. (The pair of small squares
where image density change corresponds to LD2.)
6. From the test pattern, select the pattern where the least density difference appears between LD1 and LD2.
7. Enter the adjustment value corresponding to the pattern you selected (see the above illustration) or a value close to the adjustment
value using the ten key pads on the panel.
8. Select [For effect confirmat.] and press Start key.
9. Check that LD2 small squares have no image noise of woodgrain.
10. Touch [OK].

10.3.9 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj

(1) Use
• To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide.
• Use when the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide has been changed.
• Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual bypass is used.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj].
3. Touch [Max. Width].
4. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 297 mm.
5. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
6. Touch [Min. Width.].
7. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 100 mm.
8. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK].
* Make the adjustment again if the results are [NG].

10.3.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment

(1) Use
• To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper.
• Upon user requests, it is possible to specify the void area where image is not printed along the leading edge.

(2) Default setting

• 4 mm

(3) Setting item

• “4 mm”
• 5 mm
• 7 mm

I-178
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

NOTE
• When “4 mm” is selected, 4.2 mm is the actual amount to be erased in print based on the control system of the machine.
• In [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting], if HEX Assignment of Switch No. [65] is set to [08], this setting is
disabled only with copy output.

10.3.11 Thick Paper Interval Setting

(1) Use
• For thick paper, the paper interval can be changed.
• To resolve image failure (black streaks) in the main scan direction due to the vibrations created when the trailing edge of the preceding
paper is passing by the timing roller.
• To reduce the effect of vibrations on image quality by widening paper interval.
Image Quality Operates with the paper interval longer than normal.
Productivity Operates with the paper interval closer to the normal.

(2) Default setting

• Productivity

(3) Setting item

• Image Quality
• “Productivity”

10.3.12 ADF Scan Glass Contamination

(1) Use
• To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result.
• To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the main/sub power switch is turned ON, recovering
from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
• [ADF Scan Glass Contamination] will be conducted with the detection level set by the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity]
When the above setting is set to “Not Set”, “NG” will be displayed even though the pre-detection is conducted.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamination].
3. Press the start key to start the pre-detection.
4. Check to make sure that “OK” is displayed for the result.
* When the result says “NG”, clean the glass and check again.

10.3.13 Non-Image Area Erase Check

(1) Use
• The non-image area erase function may not work properly under bright light source. Incoming light quantity is checked to verify that the
non-image area erase function can work properly under the environment.
• Verification results are shown as follows:
OK Works properly.
NG1 Works properly. However, data that may interfere with the non-image area erase function was
found. This function may not work well with dark original.
NG2 Data that may interfere with the non-image area erase function was found.

• Use this feature when installing a new machine or reinstalling a machine in a new place.
• Use this feature when the non-image area erase function fails to work properly due to the changes of the surrounding environment at the
installation site.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Non-Image Area Erase Check].
3. Press the Start key to start a check.
NOTE
• Before the check, make sure that the ADF is completely opened. In addition, make sure that no scratch or stain exists on the
original glass.

4. Check the result is “OK.”

* If the check result is “NG1” or “NG2,” reinstall the machine in another place or adjust the orientation of the machine to reduce light incidence
on the machine. Then, perform the check again.

10.4 Firmware Version

10.4.1 Use
• To check the firmware version.
• Use when the firmware is upgraded.
• When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced.

I-179
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.4.2 Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Firmware Version].
3. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 5 to check the Firmware Version.

10.5 Imaging Process Adjustment

10.5.1 Gradation Adjust

• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] → [Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection]

(1) Use
• To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the scanner.
• Color reproduction performance becomes poor.
• The drum unit or developing unit has been replaced.
• The image transfer belt unit has been replaced.
* The Adj. Values of “Dark” and “Highlight” shown on the gradation adjust screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an
ideal image output. Conv. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density.
* The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image.
Stabilizer Before gradation adjust, perform image stabilization.
Print Priority is image gradation reproducibility (priority on gradation) as well as reproducibility of characters and lines
(priority on resolution).
Copy Priority is to increase the number of images that can be stored in the memory (priority on compression). The
adjustment conforms to FEET (non-screen).

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Image Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust].
3. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization.
NOTE
• Before executing Gradation adjust, be sure to perform Stabilizer.

4. Select Print or Copy and select the paper size on which test pattern is printed.
5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.
NOTE
• When the image stabilization performed in step 3 is NG, the Start key stops functioning.

6. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.

NOTE
• Depending on the size of the test pattern, it is set in a different position. Set the test pattern according to the instructions
displayed on the control panel.

7. Place ten blank sheets of paper on the test pattern and lower the original cover.
8. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.)
9. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 4 through 8 twice (a total of three times).
10. Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values for Dark and Highlight.
11. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value.
NOTE
• Dark: 0 ± 100 and Highlight: 0 ± 60: It completes the adjustment procedure.
• If neither Dark nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 4 to 8.

I-180
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• If the convergence falls within the specified range after the second Gradation Adjustment, further adjustment may not be
necessary.
• If a fault is detected, “0” is displayed for all values. In that case, after turning off the main power switch, turn it on again more than 10
seconds after and then make the gradation adjustment again.
• If either dark or highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform Max Image Density Adj.
• If a total of four sequences of gradation adjust do not bring the values into the specified range, check the image.
• If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.

10.5.2 Transfer Belt

(1) Cleaning Bias
(a) Use
• To set the level of transfer belt cleaning bias independently for each process speed.
• When the image pattern is not completely removed, it strengthen the transfer belt cleaning bias in order to make the cleaner more
effective.
• For each processing speed, positive and negative output values can be set.

(b) Default setting

• 0

(c) Setting range

• -5 to +5 (step:1 *)
*: One step corresponds to 5 μA.

(2) Auto Cleaning

(a) Use
• To set whether to perform the long regular transfer belt cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec).
• The long cleaning operation (approx. 30 seconds) can be used to take more effective measures against toner filming on the surface of
the transfer belt.
Enable Performs the long cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec) after the normal regular cleaning operations
(approx. 10 sec.) which are performed nine times.
Disable Performs only the normal regular operations (approx. 10 sec) but not the long cleaning operation (approx.
30 sec.).

(b) Default setting

• Disable

(c) Setting item

• Enable
• “Disable”

10.5.3 Max Image Density Adj

(1) Use
• To adjust gradation and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through
auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of gamma after gradation adjust.
• Use this adjustment if the target density is not obtained after performing [Gradation Adjust].

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Setting range

• -10 to +10 (step: 1 *)
*: 1 step corresponds to 0.03 in density difference.

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Max Image Density Adj].
3. Select [COPY] or [Printer].
4. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad or [+/-].
• To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value.
• To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value.
5. Touch [END] to return to the [Process] menu screen.
6. Touch [Stabilizer].
7. Touch [Stabilizer Mode].
8. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
9. Check the print image for any image problem.
NOTE
• If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value.

I-181
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.5.4 TCR Level Setting

(1) Use
• To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and
carrier due to an environmental change.
• Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site.

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Setting range

• -3 to +3
(1 step in positive (+) direction: 0.5 % increase, 1 step in negative (-) direction: 0.5 % decrease, Center value 0 corresponds to 7 % T/C
ratio.)

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Process] → [TCR Level Setting].
3. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key pad and [+/-] key.
• To increase T/C, increase the setting value.
• To decrease T/C, decrease the setting value.
4. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
5. Check the print image for any image problem.

10.5.5 Image Background Adj

(1) Use
• To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color
after gradation adjust.
• Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem.

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Setting range

• -5 to +5 (step: 1)

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Image Background Adj].
3. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.
• To make the background level foggier, decrease the setting value.
• To make the background level less foggy, increase the setting value.
4. Touch [END] to return to the [Image Adjust] menu screen.
5. Touch [Stabilizer].
6. Touch [Stabilization Only].
7. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.
8. Check the print image for any image problem.
NOTE
• If the setting value has been changed, be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value.

10.5.6 Transfer Voltage Fine Adj

(1) Primary transfer adj.
(a) Use
• Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage.
• To use when white spots appeared.

(b) Default setting

• 0

(c) Setting range

• -8 to +7 (step: 1 *)
*1: step is equivalent to 2μA.

(d) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select [Test Mode] → [Halftone Pattern] to output the test pattern.
I.10.15.3 Halftone Pattern
3. When the test pattern image has white spots, adjust with the following procedure.
4. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Transfer Voltage Fine Adj].
5. Select [Primary transfer adj.].

I-182
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

6. Change the setting value using the [+] / [-] keys.

Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by;
• Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease)
• Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value
7. Touch [OK] key to set the adjustment value.
Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern.
NOTE
• PC drum memory may occur by taking measure to white spots occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust
it.
• Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting.

(2) Secondary transfer adj.

(a) Use
• Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type.
• To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.
• Pressing the [AUTO] key down activates the 2nd image transfer amperage upper and lower limit control. In this case, the machine uses
the voltage determined by the auto transfer voltage control and the 2nd image transfer voltage fine adj value does not take effect.

(b) Default setting

• Auto

(c) Setting range

• -8 to +7 (step: 1 *)
*1: step is equivalent to 100 V.
• “Auto”

(d) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Transfer Voltage Fine Adj].
3. Select [Secondary transfer adj.].
4. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side), on which the transfer failure occurs.
NOTE
• For envelopes, OHP film and banner thick, only 1st side can be selected.

5. Select the paper type with the transfer failure.

6. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys.
• To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), increase the setting value.
• To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), decrease the setting value.
7. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value.
8. Check the print image for any image problem.
* Press [Auto] to automatically control the 2nd image transfer output without using the 2nd image transfer voltage fine adj value.

10.5.7 Stabilizer
(1) Stabilization Only
(a) Use
• The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control.
• Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed.
• When [Max Image Density Adj] and [Image Background Adj] of Service Mode are changed.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Stabilization Only].
3. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.
4. The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the stabilizer sequence.
5. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue.

(2) Initialize+Image Stabilization

(a) Use
• To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized.
• Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed.
• Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after stabilizer mode has been executed.
• When color shift correction is needed again after the machine maintenance.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Stabilizer].
3. Touch [Initialize+Image Stabilization].
4. Press the Start key to start stabilizer.
The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the stabilizer sequence.
5. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue.

I-183
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.5.8 Thick Paper Density Adjustment

(1) Use
• To fine-adjust density of printed images for thick paper and OHP transparencies.
• To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies.

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Setting range

• -5 to +5 (step: 1)

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Thick Paper Density Adjustment].
3. Select [Thick 1, 1+] or [Thick 2, 3, 4].
4. Touch the Lighter or Darker key to correct the image density.
• Light color: Touch the Darker key.
• Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.

10.5.9 Paper separation adjustment

(1) Use
• By changing the period between the activation of the timing roller and the 2nd image transfer output, the paper separation position can be
adjusted for the 1st and 2nd sides of paper in duplex print that uses thin paper.
• To ensure proper balance between paper separating and image transferring performances by varying the paper separation position
applied for duplex printing of thin paper (60 g/m2) in hot and humid conditions.

(2) Default setting

• 0

(3) Setting range

• -2 mm to +2 mm (step: 0.1 mm)

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Paper separation adjustment].
3. Select [First Side] or [Second Side].
4. Use the [+] or [-] key to change the setting value.
• Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value.
• Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value.
5. Touch [OK] and determine the adjustment value.
6. Make a print and check the produced image.

10.5.10 Manual Toner Add

(1) Use
• To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of
prints have been made of originals having a high image density.
• When there is a drop in T/C ratio.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Manual Toner Add].
3. Touch [Black].
4. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and; if the density is lower than a reference value, a toner
replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run.
5. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reaches the reference value. If the toner density is
found to be higher than the reference value, only a developer agitation sequence is carried out.

10.5.11 Grad/Dev AC Bias V Selection

(1) Use
• To change the setting of the development AC voltage.
• When this function is turned ON, it decreases the development AC voltage, thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring.
• Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure, such as in high altitudes.
• If ON is set, the screen doesn’t display [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] and the Gradation Adjust is
not allowed.

(2) Default setting

• OFF

I-184
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

10.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines)

• CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to
control the machine.
• CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. It also enables the computer at the center to
contact the machine for the necessary data.
• Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
• Data which show the status of use of the machine such as total count, PM count.
• Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur.
• Data on adjustment
• Data on setting
NOTE
• It cannot be set when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

10.7 Setting up the CS Remote Care

NOTE
• For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up, clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before
resetting.
I.10.9.3.(4) RAM Clear
• When using a telephone line modem for connection, use the data modem which is based on the ITU-T recommendations V.34/V.
32 bis/V.32 and AT command.

10.7.1 Using the telephone line modem

1. Register the device ID
• Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
NOTE
• The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
2. Connecting the modem
• Turn the power for the modem OFF. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable. Connect the modem and the wall jack
with a modular cable.
NOTE
• For connecting the modular cable, see the manual for the modem.
3. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
4. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
I.10.9.3.(4) RAM Clear
5. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
• Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection], and touch [Modem].
6. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
7. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].

I-185
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].

3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
I.10.9.3.(3) Date & Time Setting
8. Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
9. Confirm the Device ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number].
10. Setting the telephone number of the Center
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the center using the 10-keys pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
11. Inputting the device telephone number
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the10-key pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
12. Inputting the AT command for initializing the modem
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [AT Command].
3. Input AT Command.
NOTE
• Change this command only when it is necessary. (They do not need to be changed in normal condition.)
• For details on AT command, see the manual for the modem.
I.10.9.3.(8) AT Command
13. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary.
Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.

14. Executing the initial transmission

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected with the center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
NOTE
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID, the device ID,
Telephone number of the center and the device telephone number have been input.
I.10.9.3 Detail Setting

10.7.2 Using the Fax line modem

NOTE
• Setting will be available only when the optional fax board is installed.
1. Register the device ID
• Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
NOTE
• The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
2. Remove the telephone line modem
• Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the fax line is used.
3. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
4. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
I.10.9.3.(4) RAM Clear
5. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
• Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection], and touch [Fax].
6. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
7. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
I.10.9.3.(3) Date & Time Setting
8. Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)

I-186
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

9. Confirm the Device ID

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number].
10. Setting the telephone number of the Center
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the center using the 10-keys pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
11. Inputting the device telephone number
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the10-key pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
12. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary.
Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.

13. Executing the initial transmission

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected with the center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
NOTE
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID, the device ID,
Telephone number of the center and the device telephone number have been input.
I.10.9.3 Detail Setting

10.7.3 Using E-mail

1. Register the device ID
• Messages can be exchanged only between the center with initial connection and the copier.
NOTE
• The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
2. Remove the telephone line modem
• Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when e-mail is used.
3. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
4. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
I.10.9.3.(4) RAM Clear
5. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
• Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [System Setting], and touch [E-Mail 1] or [E-Mail 2].
6. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
7. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
I.10.9.3.(3) Date & Time Setting
8. Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
9. Confirm the Device ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number].
10. Encryption setting
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Basic Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
11. Retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error
• When selecting [E-mail 2], set the retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error in software SW setting.
I.10.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care
12. Setting the Respond Timeout
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Respond Timeout] and enter the response timeout using the 10-key pad.
NOTE
• Under normal conditions, there is no need to change the default setting.
I.10.9.3.(7) Response Time Out

I-187
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

13. Setting the E-mail address

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Server Set].
2. Touch [Server for RX], and set POP3 server address, POP3 login name, POP3 password and POP3 port number.
3. Press [Receive], and set the E-Mail address, Mail Check, Connection Time Out and APOP Authentication.
4. Touch [Send], and set the SMTP server address, SMTP port number, Connection Time Out, and APOP Authentication.
5. Touch [TX/RX Test], and press Start key to carry out a transmission/reception test. If it fails to exchange messages, see the error
message to take necessary measure, and try again.
I.10.9.4.(1) Server for RX-POP3 server
14. When selecting [E-Mail2]:
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Schedule] and set the schedule of periodic transmission.
3. Touch [Center Notifi. Item] and set items that will be reported to the Center.
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
15. Receiving the initial connection E-mail message
• Sending the initial connection E-mail message from the center to the address of the copier.
NOTE
• When receiving the initial connection E-mail message from the center while CS Remote Care-related screen is being
displayed, the current setting information will be deleted, and CS Remote Care setting will be displayed.
• For sending the initial connection E-mail, see the manual for CS Remote Care center.
• Messages can be exchanged only between the center with initial connection and the copier.
• The initial connection from the center will be carried out, and the E-mail address of the center will be stored in the copier.
• When the initial registration is complete, the E-mail address of the center will be displayed by selecting [Service Mode] →
[CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], [Basic Setting] → [E-Mail address].

10.7.4 When using a WebDAV server in http communication

(1) Bilateral communication
1. Register the device ID
• Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
NOTE
• The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
2. Remove the telephone line modem
• Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the http communication is used.
3. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
4. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
I.10.9.3.(4) RAM Clear
5. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
• Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection], and touch [http1].
6. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
7. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
I.10.9.3.(3) Date & Time Setting
8. Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
9. Confirm the Device ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number].
10. Encryption setting
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Basic Setting] → [Client Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
11. Heart Beat
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and touch [Heart Beat].
2. In [Communication], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat communication. (Default: Yes)
3. Touch [Comm. Interval] and enter a Heart Beat transmission interval (1 to 256 minutes, Default: 30 minutes).
4. In [Specified Transmission], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat transmission at a specified interval. (Default: Yes)
5. Touch [Hour] and [Minute] and enter a time for specified transmission.
NOTE
• Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a specified interval to report that the
device is operating. Heart Beat files include total counter and status information.
12. Setting the http server
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Server Set].
2. Touch [HTTP Server Settings] and set a URL address, account, password, and port number.
3. Touch [Proxy/SSL] and make proxy server and SSL settings.

I-188
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

I.10.9.5 Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)

13. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.

14. Executing the initial transmission

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
NOTE
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID and the URL
address have been input.

3. When the machine is properly connected with the center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
• If communication error between the machine and Center occurs, check the error code that appears.

(2) Unilateral communication: Device to Center

1. Register the device ID
• Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center.
NOTE
• The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
2. Remove the telephone line modem
• Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the http communication is used.
3. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
4. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and touch [OK].
I.10.9.3.(4) RAM Clear
5. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
• Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection], and touch [http2].
6. Inputting the ID code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and touch [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
I.10.9.2 ID Code
7. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-key pad, and touch [Set].
I.10.9.3.(3) Date & Time Setting
8. Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
I.10.9.3.(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
9. Confirm the Device ID
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID], and input Device ID (13 digits).
NOTE
• [Device ID] displays the serial number that is entered in [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number].
10. Encryption setting
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Basic Setting] → [Client Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
11. Heart Beat
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and touch [Heart Beat].
2. In [Communication], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat communication. (Default: Yes)
3. Touch [Comm. Interval] and enter a Heart Beat transmission interval (1 to 256 minutes, Default: 30 minutes).
4. In [Specified Transmission], set whether or not to enable Heart Beat transmission at a specified interval. (Default: Yes)
5. Touch [Hour] and [Minute] and enter a time for specified transmission.
NOTE
• Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a specified interval to report that the
device is operating. Heart Beat files include total counter and status information.
12. Notification Setting
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and touch [Notification Setting].
2. Touch [Schedule] and set the schedule of periodic transmission.
3. Touch [Center Notifi. Item] and set items that will be reported to the Center.
I.10.9.3.(9) Notification Setting
13. Setting the http server
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Server Set].
2. Touch [HTTP Server Settings] and set a URL address, account, password, and port number.
3. Touch [Proxy/SSL] and make proxy server and SSL settings.
I.10.9.5 Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)
14. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.

I-189
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

15. Executing the initial transmission

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
NOTE
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID and the URL
address have been input.

3. When the machine is properly connected with the center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
• If communication error between the machine and Center occurs, check the error code that appears.

10.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care

NOTE
• Software SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident, be
sure to restore the previous state.
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.

10.8.1 Input procedure

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and touch [Software Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.], and input the switch number (two digits) using the 10-key pad.
3. Touch [Bit Assignment], and select switch bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0 or 1 using the 10-key pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, touch [HEX Assignment] key, and input using the 10-key pad or A to F keys.)
4. Touch [Fix].
NOTE
• About functions of each switch, see to “I.10.8.2 List of software SW for CS Remote Care”

10.8.2 List of software SW for CS Remote Care

SW No. Functions Ref. page
01 Dial Mode, Line for send only, Baud rate I.10.8.3 SW No. 01
02 Emergency transmission, Date specified transmission, Call parts replace date, Call I.10.8.4 SW No. 02
drum replace date, Call regular service date (PM), Auto call on the Drum unit Life,
Auto call of the IR shortage, Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts
replacement
03 Trouble display setting, Auto call on the toner empty, Auto call on the waste toner I.10.8.5 SW No. 03
bottle full
04 CS Remote Care communication mode I.10.8.6 SW No. 04
05 Modem redial interval I.10.8.7 SW No. 05
06 Modem redial times I.10.8.8 SW No. 06
07 Redial for response time out I.10.8.9 SW No. 07
08 Retransmission interval on E-Mail/http delivery error I.10.8.10 SW No. 08
09 Retransmission times on E-Mail/http delivery error I.10.8.11 SW No. 09
10 Time zone settings I.10.8.12 SW No. 10
11 Timer 1 RING reception → CONNECT reception I.10.8.13 SW No. 11
12 Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception I.10.8.14 SW No. 12
13 Reservation —
14 Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery I.10.8.15 SW No. 14
15 Timer 5 Wait time for other side’s response I.10.8.16 SW No. 15
16 Reservation —
17 Reservation —
18 Attention display To set weather to give the alarm display when using the I.10.8.17 SW No. 18
modem but the power for the modem is OFF.
19 Reservation —
20 Reservation —
21 Automatic transmission of chronological misfeed data at the time of transmission of I.10.8.18 SW No. 21
misfeed frequent occurrence warning, transmission of paper-based misfeed frequent
occurrence warning, transmission of original-based misfeed frequent occurrence
warning
22 Paper-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value I.10.8.19 SW No. 22
23 Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence threshold value I.10.8.20 SW No. 23
24 Reservation —
:
40

10.8.3 SW No. 01
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

I-190
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

HEX 81

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Baud rate 0110 9600 bps
6 0111 19.2 Kbps
5 “1000” 38.4 Kbps
4 Other Not available
3 Reservation
2
1 Line for send only “Disable” Enable
0 Dial Mode Pulse “Tone”

10.8.4 SW No. 02
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HEX FF

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed
7 Disable “Enable”
parts replacement
6 Auto call of the IR shortage Disable “Enable”
5 Auto call on the Drum unit Life Disable “Enable”
4 Call regular service date(PM) Disable “Enable”
3 Call drum replace date Disable “Enable”
2 Call parts replace date Disable “Enable”
1 Date specified transmission Disable “Enable”
0 Emergency transmission Disable “Enable”

10.8.5 SW No. 03
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
HEX 0A

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Reservation
6
5
4
3 Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Disable “Enable”
2 Reservation
1 Auto call on the toner empty Disable “Enable”
Trouble Display setting Select the type of
message to be displayed
at the time of automatic
trouble notification made
“When the CSRC is not When the CSRC is when the CSRC is
0
connected” connected connected, either the
message when the CSRC
is connected or that when
the CSRC is not
connected.

I-191
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.8.6 SW No. 04
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
HEX 02

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Reservation
6
5
4
3
2
1 CS Remote Care communication mode 00 DATA
01 FAX
0 “10” E-mail
11 Not available

10.8.7 SW No. 05
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
HEX 03

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Reservation
6
5
4 Modem redial interval 00001 1 minute
3 00010 2 minutes
2 “00011” 3 minutes
1 00100 4 minutes
00101 5 minutes
00110 6 minutes
00111 7 minutes
0 01000 8 minutes
01001 9 minutes
01010 10 minutes
Others Not available

10.8.8 SW No. 06
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
HEX 0A

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Modem redial times 0000 0000 0 time
6 0000 0001 1 time
5 : :
4 “0000 1010” 10 times
3 : :

I-192
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
2 0110 0010 98 times
1 0110 0011 99 times
0 Others Not available

10.8.9 SW No. 07
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
HEX 01

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Redial for response time out 0000 0000 0 time
6 “0000 0001” 1 time
5
4
3
Others Not available
2
1
0

10.8.10 SW No. 08
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
HEX 06

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Retransmission interval on E-mail/http 0000 0000 0 minute
6 delivery error 0000 0001 10 minutes
5 : :
4 “0000 0110” 60 minutes
3 : :
2 0000 1011 110 minutes
1 0000 1100 120 minutes
0 Others Not available

10.8.11 SW No. 09
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
HEX 0A

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Retransmission times on E-mail/http 0000 0000 0 time
6 delivery error 0000 0001 1 time
5 : :
4 “0000 1010” 10 times
3 : :
2 0110 0010 98 times
1 0110 0011 99 times

I-193
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
0 Others Not available

10.8.12 SW No. 10
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
HEX 00

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Time zone settings “0000 0000” -12 hours
6 0000 0001 -11 hours
5 : :
4 0110 0010 +12 hours
3 0001 1010 +13 hours
2
1 Others Not available
0

10.8.13 SW No. 11
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
HEX 20

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 • Timer 1 0000 0000 0 sec
6 • RING reception → CONNECT 0000 0001 1 sec
reception
5 : :
4 “0010 0000” 32 sec
3 : :
2 1111 1110 254 sec
1
1111 1111 255 sec
0

10.8.14 SW No. 12
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
HEX 40

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 • Timer 2 0000 0000 Not available
6 • Dial request completed → CONNECT 0000 0001 1 sec
reception
5 : :
4 “0100 0000” 64 sec
3 : :
2 1111 1110 254 sec
1
1111 1111 255 sec
0

I-194
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.8.15 SW No. 14
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
HEX 20

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 • Timer 4 0000 0001 100 msec
6 • Line connection → Start request : :
telegram delivery
5 “0010 0000” 3,200 msec
4 : :
3 1111 1110 25,400 msec
2 25,500 msec
1 1111 1111
0

10.8.16 SW No. 15
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
HEX 1E

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 • Timer 5 0000 0001 1 sec
6 • Wait time for other side’s response : :
5 “0001 1110” 30 sec
4 : :
3 1111 1110 254 sec
2 255 sec
1 1111 1111
0

10.8.17 SW No. 18
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
HEX 01

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Reservation
6
5
4
3
2
1
Attention To set weather to give the
display alarm display when using
0 OFF “ON”
the modem but the power
for the modem is OFF.

I-195
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.8.18 SW No. 21
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
HEX 00

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Reservation
6
5
4
3
Automatic transmission of chronological
2 misfeed data at the time of transmission OFF “ON”
of misfeed frequent occurrence warning
Original-based misfeed frequent If the number of jams
1 OFF “ON”
occurrence threshold value exceeds the threshold
Paper-based misfeed frequent specified per day (0:00 to
occurrence threshold value 23:59), Jam Frequent
Occurrence Warning is
0 OFF “ON” sent. At 12 a.m. of the
next day, the counter is
reset.

10.8.19 SW No. 22
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
HEX 05

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Paper-based misfeed frequent 0000 0001 1
6 occurrence threshold value 0000 0010 2
5 : :
4 “0000 0101” 5
3 : :
2 0000 1110 14
1 0000 1111 15
0 Others Not available

10.8.20 SW No. 23
(1) Default
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
HEX 05

(2) Functions
Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
7 Original-based misfeed frequent 0000 0001 1
6 occurrence threshold value 0000 0010 2
5 : :
4 “0000 0101” 5
3 : :
2 0000 1110 14
1 0000 1111 15

I-196
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Logic
Bit Functions Description
0 1
0 Others Not available

10.9 Detail on settings for CS Remote Care

10.9.1 System Selection
(1) Use
• To select the system type for remote diagnosis.
• Use to newly build or change the system.

(2) Setting range

• E-Mail1
• E-Mail2
• Modem
• Fax
• http1
• http2

(3) Procedure
• Select E-Mail, Modem, or Fax.
• Fax is available only when the optional fax kit is being installed.

10.9.2 ID Code
(1) Use
• To register the service ID.
• Use when registering and changing service ID.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [ID code] and enter the service ID.
• Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-key pad. (0000001 to 9999999)
2. Touch [ID code] to register the ID.
3. The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered.

10.9.3 Detail Setting

(1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax)
(a) Use
• Execute the primary setting.
• Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
<Center Setting>
• Set the center ID, Device ID, and the phone No.
• When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, e-mail address of the center is displayed.
* When entering the phone number, 10-keys and keys on the screen have following meanings.
[-] Pose Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial Carry out pulse dialing
[*], [#] To be used as necessary
<Schedule (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>
• Set the schedule of notification to the center.
• Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
• Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notification (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>
• Select the items of data that will be sent to the center in one-way transmission through E-Mail2.
• The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1] Sales count data [7] EKC data
[2] Error count data [8] Adjustment data
[3] Service count data [9] Coverage data
[4] Life count data [10] Not used

I-197
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Life cycle data

[5] CSRC-System data [11] Not used
Device config data
[6] History data [12] Not used
NOTE
• Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that only EKC data cannot be sent together
with other items of data.
<Initial Transmission>
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care center to register the machine.
(Only when the modem or fax is selected on the system Input.)

(2) Basic Setting (http1 or http2)

(a) Use
• Execute the primary setting.
• Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
<Center Setting>
• Set the center ID.
• Display the device ID.
<Client Setting>
• To set whether or not to encrypt communication.
<Heart Beat>
• To make Heart Beat related settings.
• Heart Beat is a feature that uploads a Heart Beat file to the registered web server at a specified interval to report that the device is
operating. Heart Beat files include total counter and status information.
<Initial Transmission>
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care center to register the machine.

(3) Date & Time Setting

(a) Use
• To set the data and time-of-day.
• Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting.
4. Enter the date (month, day and year), time-of-day, and the time zone from the 10-key pad.
5. Touch [SET] to start the clock.

(4) RAM Clear

(a) Use
• To clear the following data at the center.
• To be used for setting CS Remote Care.
• To be used for reset the every data of the center to default.
NOTE
• If RAM clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be implemented at the time the transmission is
completed regardless of whether it is done properly or not.

(b) Default setting

• Unset

(c) Setting item

• Set
• “Unset”

(5) Communication Log Print

(a) Use
• To print out the communication log.
• Use to output and use the communication log.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Touch [Detail Setting] to access communication log print.

I-198
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

4. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S or 81/ x 11 paper.

2
5. Press Start key to print out the communication log.

(6) Software Switch Setting

(a) Use
• To change the CS Remote Care settings.

(b) Procedure
• Refer to “I.10.8 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care” for the setting.

(7) Response Time Out

(a) Use
• It sets the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred.
• It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
• To use when changing the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred.

(b) Default setting

• 30 minute

(c) Setting range

• 10 to 1440

(8) AT Command
(a) Use
• To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization.
• This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting.

(b) Procedure
• Enter the command and touch [SET] to register.

(9) Notification Setting

(a) Use
• To make the settings of notification to the Center that is performed under unilateral communication via http.
• This setting is available only when [http2] is selected in System Setting.

(b) Procedure
<Schedule>
• Set the schedule of notification to the center.
• Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
• Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notifi. Item>
• The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1] Sales count data [7] EKC data
[2] Error count data [8] Adjustment data
[3] Service count data [9] Coverage data
[4] Life count data [10] Not used
Life cycle data
[5] CSRC-System data [11] Not used
Device config data
[6] History data [12] Not used
NOTE
• Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that only EKC data cannot be sent together
with other items of data.

10.9.4 Server Setting (E-Mail1 or E-mail2 is selected.)

(1) Server for RX-POP3 server
(a) Use
• To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care.
• To set the address of the POP3 Server.
• POP3 server address can be set with IP address or the domain name.

(b) Procedure
<Input IP Address>

I-199
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• IP address version 4 format

[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.

(2) Server for RX-POP3 login name

(a) Use
• To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.

(b) Procedure
• Up to 64 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.

(c) Default setting

• No

(3) Server for RX-POP3 password

(a) Use
• To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.

(b) Procedure
• Up to 15 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.

(c) Default setting

• No

(4) Server for RX-POP3 port number

(a) Use
• To set the POP3 port number used for the CS Remote Care.

(b) Default setting

• 110

(c) Setting range

• 1 to 65535

(5) Receive-E-mail Address

(a) Use
• To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care.

(b) Procedure
• Up to 129 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.

(c) Default setting

• No

(6) Receive-Mail Check

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to use mail check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care.
• To change the time interval for mail check.

(b) Default setting

• No

(c) Setting item

• “No”
• 1 to120 min.

(7) Receive-Connection timeout

(a) Use
• To set the timeout period for connection during reception.

(b) Default setting

• 60 Sec

I-200
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(c) Setting range

• 30 to 300 Sec

(8) Receive-APOP Authentication

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception.

(b) Default setting

• No

(c) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

(9) Send-SMTP server

(a) Use
• To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
• SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name.

(b) Procedure
<Input IP Address>
• IP address version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.

(10) Send-SMTP port number

(a) Use
• To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.

(b) Default setting

• 25

(c) Setting range

• 1 to 65535

(11) Send-SMTP Connection Time-out

(a) Use
• To set the timeout period for transmission.

(b) Default setting

• 60 Sec

(c) Setting range

• 30 to 300 Sec

(12) Send-Authentication Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server.
• To use when authenticating during transmission.
Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP, SMTP authentication

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• “OFF”
• POP Before SMTP
• SMTP Authentication
NOTE
• Setting to “POP Before SMTP” will set the time for POP Before SMTP.
• Default setting: 0 Sec
• Setting range: 0 to “60 Sec”
• When setting to SMTP authentication, touch the “Setting Check” key for authentication.
User ID Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication.
Password Enter the password for SMTP authentication.

I-201
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Domain name Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication.

(13) TX/RX Test

(a) Use
• To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.

(b) Procedure
1. Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test.
2. The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen.

(14) Data Initialization

(a) Use
• To initialize the contents for the sever setting.

(b) Default setting

• No

(c) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

10.9.5 Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected)

(1) HTTP Server Settings
(a) Use
• To set a http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote Care.

(b) Procedure
<URL>
• To set the address of the http server.
<Account>
• To set an account that is used to access the http server.
<Password>
• To set a password that is used to access the http server.
<Port Number>
• To set a port number that is used to access the http server.

(2) Proxy/SSL
(a) Use
• To make proxy/SSL settings of the http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote Care.

(b) Procedure
<Proxy Server>
• To set whether or not to use a proxy server.
<SSL Settings>
• To set whether or not to use SSL communication.

(3) Data Initialization

(a) Use
• To initialize values in the server settings.

10.9.6 Setup confirmation

• Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up.
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed.

10.9.7 Calling the maintenance

• When CE starts maintenance, inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which CE can identify. They are controlled by the
distributor.) will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. When the maintenance is finished,
touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the center and tells that it is finished.

(1) When starting the maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [ID Code], and input ID Code.
3. Touch [ID Coke].
* The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.

I-202
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) When finishing the maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [Maintenance Complete].

10.9.8 Calling the center from the administrator

• When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center.
1. Select [Administrator Settings], and touch [System Connection].
2. Touch [Admin. transmission].
3. Press the Start key.
When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out, the Admin. transmission key will not be displayed, and the
transmission is not available.
NOTE
• For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time, refer to the manual for CS Remote Care
center.

10.9.9 Checking the transmission log

• The transmission log list will be output to be checked.
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail setting].
2. Touch [Communication Log Print].
3. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S paper.
4. Press the Start key to output transmission log.

10.10 System 1

10.10.1 Marketing Area

(1) Use
• To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area.
• Upon setup.

(2) Procedure
Marketing Area
• Select the applicable marketing area and touch [END] to set the marketing area.
Fax Target
1. Touch the [Fax Target].
2. Select the applicable marketing area using [+] and [-] keys, and touch [END].

(3) Setting item

Marketing Area
• JAPAN
• US
• Europe
• Others1 to 5

(a) List of functions affected by marketing area setting

• The listed are the functions of which setting is automatically changed depending on the selected marketing area.
Marketing area
JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 Others5
Setting item
Language (Default Japanese English English English English Simplified Traditional English
value) Chinese Chinese

I-203
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Marketing area
JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 Others5
Setting item
Language Selection • Japanese • English • English • English • English • Simplified • Traditional • English
(Selectable • English • French • French • French • French Chinese Chinese • French
language) • French • Italian • Italian • Spanish • Spanish • English • English • Spanish
• Italian • German • German • Japanese • Traditional • Hangul
• German • Spanish • Spanish Chinese
• Spanish • Japanese • Japanese
Additional • Simplified • Simplified • Simplified • Italian • Italian • French • French • Italian
selectable language Chinese Chinese Chinese • German • German • Italian • Italian • German
when the UK-203 is • Traditional • Traditional • Traditional • Simplified • Japanese • German • German • Japanese
installed. Chinese Chinese Chinese Chinese • Simplified • Spanish • Spanish • Simplified
• Hangul • Hangul • Hangul • Traditional Chinese • Japanese • Japanese Chinese
Chinese • Hangul • Traditional • Simplified • Traditional
• Hangul • Chinese Chinese Chinese
• Hangul • Hangul
Foolscap size 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13 8 x 13
LCT size A4 LEF Letter LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF
LCC size A4 LEF Letter LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF A4 LEF
Unit Metric Inch Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric Metric
Total counter mode Mode1 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2
Size counter No count • A3 • A3 • A3 • A3 • A3 • A3 • A3
• 11 x 17 • B4 • B4 • B4 • B4 • B4 • B4
• 11 x 17 • 11 x 17 • 11 x 17 • 11 x 17 • 11 x 17 • 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14 • 8 1/2 x 14 • 8 1/2 x 14 • 8 1/2 x 14 • 8 1/2 x 14 • 8 1/2 x 14
Unit Change Japan US Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe Europe
NOTE
• The language used in the service mode depends on the Language Selection setting, and changes to the language as following
table.
Language Selection Service Mode
Japanese Japanese
Simplified Chinese Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese Traditional Chinese
Hangul Hangul
Language other than listed above English

10.10.2 Tel/Fax Number

(1) Use
• To enter the tel/fax number of the service contact that will appear on the control panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine.
• Upon setup.

(2) Procedure
• Enter the tel/fax number (19 digits) from the 10-key pad.
• Use Interrupt key to enter “-.”

10.10.3 Serial Number

(1) Use
• To register the serial numbers of the machine and options.
• The numbers will be printed on the list output.
• To use the serial number as machine ID during CS Remote Care communication.
• Upon setup.
NOTE
• When main power switch was turned ON while the serial No. was not entered, the message to require entering the serial No. will
be displayed.
• Do not change the serial number registered in the machine. If memory data is lost and entering the serial number is required,
enter the original correct serial number. Be careful to enter the correct serial number since characters other than alphanumeric
can be also entered. CSRC communication is not available if a wrong serial number is entered.
• The serial number of “Printer” can be checked through the following: [Utility] → [Meter Count] → [Check Details].

(2) Procedure
• Type the serial numbers.
Printer, Scanner, ADF, LCT, Sorter/FN, Duplex, Vendor, Fax1, Fax2, RU, ZU (Not used)

10.10.4 Sleep ON/OFF Choice Setting

(1) Use
• To display the option of “OFF” for the sleep mode setting screen available from administrator settings.

I-204
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

NOTE
• The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF.”

(2) Default setting

• Prohibit

(3) Setting item

• Permit
• “Prohibit”

10.10.5 Foolscap Size Setting

(1) Use
• To set the size for foolscap paper.
• Upon setup.

(2) Setting item

• 81/ x 131/
2 2
• 220 x 330 mm
• 81/ x 13
2
• 81/ x 13
4
• 81/ x 131/
8 4
• 8 x 13

10.10.6 Original Size Detection

(1) Copy Glass
(a) Use
• To change the size detection table for the document glass.

(b) Default setting

• Table1

(c) Setting item

• “Table1”
• Table2
NOTE
• Table 2 can be set only when original size detection sensor 2 is being mounted.

(2) 81/2 x 14/Foolscap Size Detection

(a) Use
• To set whether paper of 81/ x 131/ size is detected as 81/ x 14 or foolscap in original glass or ADF size detection.
2 2 2
• When Table 1 is selected in Copy Glass, paper of 81/ x 131/ size is detected as foolscap despite of the setting of 81/ x 14/Foolscap
2 2 2
Size Detection.

(b) Default setting

• 81/ x 14
2

(c) Setting item

• “81/ x 14”
2
• Foolscap

(3) ADF Size Detection

(a) Use
• To set whether to use 8K/16K or B standards (8K ↔ B4, 16K ↔ B5) for original size detection on the ADF.
(This setting is available only when “Other3” is selected in [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Marketing Area].)

(b) Default setting

• K Size

(c) Setting item

• “K Size”
• B series

I-205
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.10.7 Install Date

(1) Use
• To register the date the main body was installed.
• Upon setup.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Install Date].
3. Enter the date (Year 4 digit → Month 2 digit → date 2 digit) from the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [Entry] to set the date of installation.

10.10.8 Initialization-Clear All Data

(1) Use
• To initialize the setting data.
• For details on items to be cleared, see “I.13. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION.”
NOTE
• When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below, be sure to clear the data.
Referring data: One-touch registration, user authentication/account track.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [Clear All Data].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

10.10.9 Initialization-Clear Individual Data

• Clear Individual Data enables you to select and clear multiple items at a time.

(1) Copy Program Data

(a) Use
• To clear data registered as copy program.
• Use this feature to clear all copy program data at a time.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [Copy Program Data].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

(2) Address Registration Data

(a) Use
• To clear address registration data.
• Use this feature to initialize address registration data.
• The following are address registration data:
Group address data, Program key data, One-touch destination data, Mail body data, Subject data, Prefix/suffix data

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [Address Registration Data].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

(3) Fax Setting Data

(a) Use
• To clear fax-related settings and parameters. However, address-related data is not cleared.
• Use this feature to clear fax-related settings and parameters at a time.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [Fax Setting Data].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

I-206
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(4) All History Data

(a) Use
• To clear history data.
• The following are history data:
Job history, Journal history, Receive reject history, Destination history, Job secure counter (Internal data for history management)

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [All History Data].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

(5) Network Setting Data

(a) Use
• To clear network-related settings.
• Use this feature to initialize and set network-related settings again when the machine does not work properly upon change of network-
related settings.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [Network Setting Data].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

10.10.10 Initialization-System Error Clear

(1) Use
• To reset the trouble data.
• Use to clear the [Jam], [Trouble], [Error] displays, and other improper displays.
• For details on items to be cleared, see “I.13. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION.”

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Initialization] → [System Error Clear].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When [OK] is displayed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

10.10.11 Charging CH cleaning

(1) K Charge Manual Cleaning
(a) Use
• Cleaning operation can be executed to the comb electrode.
• When image problems occur, you can execute the cleaning operation manually.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 1] → [Charging CH cleaning] → [K Charge Manual Cleaning].
3. Press the Start key.
4. When the Start key changes its lighting from red to blue, you can confirm that the cleaning operation has been completed.

(2) K Charge A/C ON/OFF Setting

(a) Use
• This setting allows you to select the self cleaning of the comb electrode section.
• This setting can be used to temporarily stop the self cleaning operation in order to address problems.
ON The self cleaning operation occurs every 2,700 sheets of print, synchronizing the transfer belt cleaning
operation.
OFF The machine does not perform the self cleaning operation.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-207
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.10.12 Problem Unit Isolation Set.

(1) Use
• Individual units and options have a set or unset setting for the problem unit isolation set. function.
• When a problem occurs, this function enables the continuous use of the units that are not affected by separately controlling them and
isolating other units that have a problem.
• The machine isolates only units that have a “set” setting.
NOTE
• The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are being isolated.

• This function can be selected for the following units and options.
Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, LCT, manual, Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling, Post inserter, Z folding unit, Punch, Staple, Scanner, ADF
• Though Problem Unit Isolation Set. is not selected, if the specified malfunctions occur on the above listed units or options, an alert screen
appears and asks users whether to isolate the units or options where malfunction occurs.
See the “K.3.4 List of the trouble code” section for the corresponding trouble codes.

(2) Default setting

• Unset

(3) Setting item

• Set
• “Unset”
NOTE
• After changing the setting, touch [Decision] and turn the main power switch OFF and ON to make the new setting effective.

10.10.13 Post card transfer table

(1) Use
• This setting allows you to select the transfer table to be used for thick3 postcards.
• For the use of thick 3 postcards, you can select the transfer table suitable for postcards.
• This setting is used to improve transfer performance to postcards.
Post. The postcard 2nd image transfer table is used when printing on thick3 postcards.
Thick 3 The normal thick3 2nd image transfer table is used when printing on thick 3 postcards.

(2) Default setting

• Thick 3

(3) Setting item

• Post.
• “Thick 3”

10.10.14 Machine State LED Setting

(1) Use
• To set how to display main body statuses on the machine state LED (state display lamp, paper empty lamp).
NOTE
• Each of Type1 and Type2 has the following LED display forms.
Machine State LED Setting Type1 Type2
Warning statuses Attention • Toner supply door open Blinking Blinking
• Improper toner cartridge placement
Near life Blinking Unlit
Alert code Unlit Unlit
Problem Unit Isolation Blinking Blinking
Fatal error • Trouble code Lit Lit
• Jam
• Door opened
• Life stop
Amount of paper remaining 100 % to near empty Unlit Unlit
(Tray 1 and 2) Near empty Blinking Unlit
Empty Lit Lit
• Being lifted up Unlit Unlit
• Door opened or closed
Amount of paper remaining 100 % to near empty Unlit Unlit
(Tray 3 and 4, LCT) Near empty Blinking Unlit
Empty Lit Lit
• Being lifted up Unlit Unlit
• Door opened or closed

I-208
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Default setting

• Type 2

(3) Setting item

• Type 1
• “Type 2”

10.11 System 2

10.11.1 HDD
• Not used.

10.11.2 Image Controller Setting

(1) Image Controller Setting
(a) Use
• To set the type of the controller.
• When setting up the controller.

(b) Procedure
• Select the controller to be used.

(c) Default setting

• Controller 0

(d) Setting item

• “Controller 0”: The standard controller is used.
• Controller 1: undefined.
• Controller 2: undefined.
• Controller 3: undefined.
• Others: undefined.
* [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected.

(2) Peripheral Mode

(a) Procedure
• Select the operating mode of the Scanner.

(b) Setting item

• Mode 1: undefined.
• Mode 2: undefined.
• Mode 3: undefined.

10.11.3 Option Board Status

(1) Use
• To set when the optional fax board (FK-502), JPEG board (SA-502) or DSC board (SC-507) is mounted.
• Use when setting up the optional fax kit (FK-502), JPEG board (SA-502) or security kit (SC-507) is mounted.

(2) Default setting

• Unset

I-209
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(3) Setting item

Fax (circuit 1)
• Set
• “Unset”
Fax (circuit 2)
• Set
• “Unset”
JPEG
• Set
• “Unset”
DSC1
• Set
• “Unset”
DSC2
• Not used.
NOTE
• When the setting has been changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

10.11.4 Consumable Life Reminder

(1) Use
• To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime
PM parts lifetime display An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached,
prompting the user to replace the part.

• Applicable units:
Transfer belt unit, fusing unit, Drum unit, Developing unit
• Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime.

(2) Default setting

• No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

10.11.5 Unit Change

(1) Unit Change
(a) Use
• To select who is to replace a unit.
• Upon setup.
• To set whether or not to display a toner near empty warning.
• Drum unit and Developing unit are not subject to this setting because they are replaced by customer engineer.

(b) Setting item

Japan US, Europe Others1/2/3/4/5
Toner Cartridge “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service
Waste Toner Box User “Service” “User” Service “User” Service
Punch Dust Box “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service

(2) Warning Display (Toner Near Empty)

(a) Use
• Upon setup.
• When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit.
• When “User” is selected: Printing is inhibited.
• When “Service” is selected: Life warning.

(b) Default setting

• Yes

(c) Setting item

• “Yes”
• No

10.11.6 Software Switch Setting

(1) Use
• To set the operating characteristic of each function from software switch depending on what types of printing are normally made.

I-210
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Software Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.] and enter the intended switch number with the ten-key pad.
3. Touch [Bit Assignment].
4. Use [←] or [→] to select a bit. To set the bit, enter 0 or 1 with the ten-key pad.
5. To set the bit in hex, touch [HEX Assignment] and use the ten-key pad and [A] to [F] keys to enter numbers and characters.
6. Touch [Fix].

(3) Printing on paper of nonstandard size fed from the bypass tray (AnySize mode)
(a) Use
• To enable printing only by the setting made on the printer driver when printing is attempted on paper of nonstandard size fed by way of
the bypass tray (the default setting is the conventional operation).
bit0-0 Conventional operation
bit0-1 The print cycle is initiated for the paper specified on the printer driver regardless of the bypass tray paper
setting.

(b) Procedure
1. Touch [Software Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Switch No.] and enter “69” with the ten-key pad.
3. Touch [BIT Assignment] and select “bit0” with [←]/[→] key.
4. Enter “0” or “1” with the 10-key pad.
5. Touch [Fix].

10.11.7 CCD Calibration

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping.
• To display the current calibration adjustment value.
• When CCD unit has been replaced, set to “OFF.”
After replacing the CCD unit, the default generic value needs to be set since the calibration value set for each unit changes to control the
differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
• The original calibration adjustment value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD
performance difference.

(2) Default setting

• ON

(3) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• When the setting is changed, the function becomes available by turning the main power switch OFF and ON again.

10.11.8 LCC Size Setting

(1) Use
• To set the paper size for the LCC.
• Use to change the paper size for the LCC (tray 3/4).

(2) Default setting

• The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.

(3) Setting item

• A4
• B5
• 8 1/ x 11
2
• 16K
• A5
• 5 1/ x 8 1/
2 2
• Post. S

10.11.9 LCT Paper Size Setting

(1) Use
• To set a LCT type.
• To set the paper size for the LCT.
• Use this feature upon LCT set-up.

(2) Default setting

• A4LCT

I-211
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(3) Setting item

• “A4LCT”
• A3LCT
* For a selected LCT type, set a paper size.
NOTE
• When the LCT type setting is changed, the paper size setting in the LCT is returned to the default.

(4) A4LCT
(a) Default setting
• The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.

(b) Setting item

• A4
• 8 1/ x 11
2

(5) A3LCT
(a) Default setting
• The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.

(b) Setting item

• A3
• B4
• A4S
• A4
• 12 x 18
• 11 x 17
• 8 1/2 x 14
• 8 1/ x 11
2
• 8 1/ x 11S
2

10.11.10 Line Mag Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping.
• To display the current magnification offset value.
• When CCD unit has been replaced, set to “OFF.”
After replacing the CCD unit, the default generic value needs to be set since the magnification offset value between the lines set for each
unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
• The original offset value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD performance difference.

(2) Default setting

Front side
• ON
Back side
• Not used.

(3) Setting item

Front side
• “ON”
• OFF
NOTE
• When the setting is changed, the function becomes valid by turning the main power switch OFF and ON again.
Back side
• Not used.

10.11.11 Data Capture

(1) Use
• When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error.
• When an error occurs, this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data.

(2) Procedure
NOTE
• The following conditions are necessary for this function.
When selecting [Security Setting] → [Security Details] → [Print Data Capture] in Administrator Settings, [Allow] must be set.
• The hard disk must be mounted to the machine.
• When selecting [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [FTP Settings] → [FTP Server Settings], [ON] must be set.
1. Select [Service Mode] → [System 2], and touch [Data Capture]. Select [ON].
(While the Data Capture setting is [ON], the print job data from the PC will be stored in the hard disk.)
NOTE
• Maximum 5 print job data can be stored, and the data will be overwritten beginning with the chronologically oldest one.

I-212
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

2. Check the IP address of the machine.

3. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with ethernet cable.
4. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC, and specify the IP address of the machine to start FTP.

5. Input the user name and the password.

• User name: capture
• Password: sysadm

6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture.

7. Using the “binary” command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer.

8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC.

I-213
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

9. Finish the command prompt.

NOTE
• After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details], and select [Restrict]
for print data capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk.
When HDD Format or Overwrite Temporary Data is performed, job data is deleted.

10.11.12 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.

• To make settings for contamination detection.

(1) ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity

(a) Use
• To set the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.
• Use when changing the setting for whether or not to detect the stain on the ADF original glass when opening/closing ADF as well as its
detection level as the main/sub power being ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
Not Set Detection of stain on the glass will not be conducted.
Low Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.
Normal Normal level detection.
High Stain on the glass will easily be detected.
NOTE
• Be aware that selecting “Not Set” and performing the pre-detection with the following setting will display “NG.”
[Service Mode] → [Machine] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamination]
• When “Not Set” is selected, the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends does not operate.

(b) Default setting

• Normal

(c) Setting item

• Not Set
• Low
• “Normal”
• High

(2) ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Warn/Level

(a) Use
• To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected.
• Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the
lines.
0 Warning will not be displayed.
1 Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. (Warning code: D-1/D-2)
2 Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen.
3 Warning will be displayed on all screens.
NOTE
• This setting is invalid when [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Sensitivity] is set to “Not Set.”

(b) Default setting

• 1

(c) Setting item

• 0
• “1”
• 2

I-214
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• 3

(3) Feed Cleaning Setting

(a) Use
• To set the operation for detection and cleaning operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
• Use when changing the operation for detection and cleaning operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
0 The glass will stop moving when the original is fed, and will not perform cleaning the stain.
1 The glass will move between originals when feeding the original.

(b) Default setting

• 1

(c) Setting item

• 0
• “1”

10.11.13 Stamp
(1) Use
• To set the mounting status of the optional stamp unit SP-501.
• To use when setting up the stamp unit SP-501.

(2) Default setting

• Unset

(3) Setting item

• Set
• “Unset”

10.11.14 Network Fax Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to use network fax function.
• To use network fax function (IP address fax, internet fax).
• Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to "ON" in the following settings.
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings]

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

IP Address Fax
• ON
• “OFF”
SIP-Fax
• Not Used
Internet Fax
• ON
• “OFF”

10.11.15 User Paper Settings

(1) Use
• To set and register individual user paper that includes a different basic weight, fusing temperature, 2nd image transfer fine adjustment
value.
• User Paper Settings is also available from [Administrator Settings] → [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [User Paper Settings].
• To register a paper type that is suitable for individual customer’s intended use and use environment.
• The following shows user paper registration keys and corresponding paper types.
User Paper 1/2 Plain paper
User Paper 3 Thick1
User Paper 4 Thick1+
User Paper 5 Thick2
User Paper 6 Thick3

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the key as follows.
[System 2] → [ ] → [User Paper Settings].
3. Select the desired key from [User Paper 1] to [User Paper 6] to register user paper.
4. Select [Basic Weight] and enter a value with the [+] / [-] key.

I-215
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

5. Select [Heating Side] or [Pressurizing Side] and enter a fusing temperature with the [+] / [-] key.
The setting range is -20 °C to +5 °C. (1 step: 5 °C)
6. Select one from the following: [Front-Black] or [Back-Black]. Enter a 2nd image transfer fine adjustment value with the [+] / [-] key.
The setting rage is -8 to +7. (1 step: 1 increment or decrement)
7. Set paper of A4S or 81/ x 11S on the manual tray.
2
8. Select [1-side] (only front side) or [Front side] (only back side) and press the Start key.
9. Check the image of the output test pattern.
If the image is not acceptable, adjust the settings and output the test pattern again.

(a) Test Pattern in User Paper Settings

• The printable test pattern for user paper settings is provided to ease determining the most appropriate 2nd image transfer output value
when customizing user paper.
• This test pattern changes output voltage as shown below based on the standard voltage A (voltage determined by the 2nd image auto
transfer voltage control) on a sheet of paper.

A +600 V

A +400 V

A +200 V

A 0V

A -200 V

A -400 V

A -600 V

• A: Standard voltage

10.11.16 Coverage Rate Screen

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to display a coverage rate on the sales counter screen and sales counter list.

(2) Default setting

• Display

(3) Setting item

• “Display”
• Do Not Display

10.11.17 JAM Code Display Setting

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to add a jam code to a jam warning display on the control panel when a jam occurs.

(2) Default setting

• Do Not Display

(3) Setting item

• Display
• “Do Not Display”

10.11.18 BootUp Screen

(1) Use
• To customize the BootUp Screen displayed upon machine start-up.
• Use this feature when changing the KonicaMinolta logo displayed on the control panel upon start-up to a client company logo or others for
client’s intended use of the machine.
• Register logo data in the machine’s flash ROM via a USB memory device.
The following are the logo data specifications that should be met.
Image format PNG format
File extension *. png
File name BootupScreen.png
Image size 800 x 480 dots
Color 256 colors (Palette that the machine specifies is used.)
NOTE
• When making the logo data, use the exclusive image making tool.
• If a USB memory device is not connected or a nonconforming USB memory device is connected, “USB NG” is displayed and
logo data cannot be registered.

I-216
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• If the file name of logo data does not conform to the above specifications, "File NG" message is displayed and logo data
cannot be registered.

(2) Procedure
1. Save logo data that conforms to the above specifications in the root directory of a USB memory device.
NOTE
• Be sure to save data in the root directory as the machine cannot detect data saved in other directories.

2. Connect the USB memory device to the machine USB port.

3. Select the key as follows.
[System 2] → [ ] → [BootUp Screen].
4. Touch [Set].
5. Check result “OK” is displayed and touch [END].
NOTE
• If logo data is already registered, new logo data overwrites the existing logo data.
• The color of logo data may look different between the machine control panel and some PC screens. After registering logo
data, restart the machine and check the color of the logo data on the BootUp screen.
* To delete registered data, touch [Delete] and check result “OK” is displayed.

10.11.19 Install Data

(1) Use
• To install movie help data or OCR dictionary data into HDD.
• To use when the logical format of the hard disk is performed.
• To install each data into the machine HDD via USB memory device.

(2) Procedure
NOTE
• To use OCR function, the optional i-Option LK-105 must be activated.
1. Save data (*.tar) into the root directory of a USB memory device.
2. Connect the USB memory device to the machine USB port.
3. Select the key as follows.
[System 2] → [ ] → [Install Data].
4. Touch [Movie Data] or [OCR Dictionary].
You can select the above two types of data at a time and install them.
5. Touch [Set].
6. Press the Start key to install the data.
7. Check result “OK” is displayed and touch [END].
NOTE
• If data is already installed, it is necessary to delete old data before installing new one.
* To delete registered data, select the data to be deleted and touch [Delete]. Check result “OK” is displayed.

10.11.20 Bluetooth Settings

(1) Use
• To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.
• Use this setting upon set-up of the optional local interface kit EK-605.

(2) Default setting

• Invalid

(3) Setting item

• Effective
• “Invalid”

10.11.21 Auto Power OFF

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable Auto Power OFF.
• To enable the Auto Power OFF function at the time specified in Administrator Settings.

(2) Default setting

• 1. No

(3) Setting item

• Yes
• “No”

I-217
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.12 Counter

• The counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the technical representative to check or set as necessary.

10.12.1 Common procedure

1. Touch [Counter] to show the counter menu.
2. Select the specific counter to be displayed.
3. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once, touch [Counter Reset], select the specific
counters to be cleared, and touch [END]. Two or more counters can be selected.
(However, the [Service Call], [Service Total], and [JAM] counters cannot be selected.)

10.12.2 Life
(1) Use
• To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used.
• To clear the count of each counter.
• To perform New Release in fusing unit and transfer belt unit.
• To check how many times maintenance parts have been used.
• When each of the maintenance parts is replaced.

(2) Procedure
(a) Counter clear
• To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
• If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
• It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the fusing unit, transfer belt unit, Drum unit and TCR new article detection.
• For the count method of each counter, see the table “Count method of each life counter.”
Count method of each life counter
Counter item Counting method
Fusing Unit Rotation Time Counts how many hours the fusing unit has turned.
Fusing Unit Page Count Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases by 1 per every 216 mm in
the sub scan direction and shows the total count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the sub
scan direction, the counter uses 216 mm as the paper length.
Transfer belt unit Rotation Time Counts how many hours the transfer belt unit has turned.
Transfer belt unit Page Count Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases by 1 per every 216 mm in
the sub scan direction and shows the total count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the sub
scan direction, the counter uses 216 mm as the paper length.
Transfer Roller Unit Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases by 1 per every 216 mm in
the sub scan direction and shows the total count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the sub
scan direction, the counter uses 216 mm as the paper length.
Ozone Filter Counts how many hours Drum Unit has turned.
Toner Filter Counts how many sheets have been printed. The counter increases by 1 per every 216 mm in
the sub scan direction and shows the total count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the sub
scan direction, the counter uses 216 mm as the paper length.
1st. Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 1
2nd. Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 2
3rd. Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 3
4th. Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 4
Manual Tray Number of sheets of paper fed from the bypass
Imaging Unit Rotation Time (C) Not used.
Imaging Unit Rotation Time (M)
Imaging Unit Rotation Time (Y)

I-218
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Counter item Counting method

Drum Unit (K) Rotation Time Counts how many hours Drum Unit has turned. The counter increases by 1 per every 216 mm
in the sub scan direction and shows the total count. For paper length less than 216 mm in the
sub scan direction, the counter uses 216 mm as the paper length.
Imaging Unit Page Count (C) Not used.
Imaging Unit Page Count (M)
Imaging Unit Page Count (Y)
Developing Unit Page Count (K) Counts how many sheets have been printed.
LCT Parts Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT
ADF Feed Number of sheets of original fed through the take-up section of the ADF
ADF Reverse Number of sheets of original fed through the turnover unit of the ADF
Sorter/Finisher Number of sheets of paper fed out of the sorter/finisher
TCR new article detection (C) Not used.
TCR new article detection (M)
TCR new article detection (Y)
TCR new article detection (K) Period of time over which the toner cartridge has been used.

(b) New Release

• After replacing a fusing unit or transfer belt unit, perform New Release to clear its life counter.
1. Select the key as follows.
[Counter] → [Life] → [New Release].
2. Open the lower front door.
3. Select a unit where New Release is made.
4. Press the Start key and perform New Release.

(c) New Release Disable mode

• To enable a unit that is used temporarily for troubleshooting to be used again as a new unit in another machine, the New Release
Disable mode is provided.
• Applicable units are the following units that have the new unit detection feature
drum unit, developing unit
• See the “I.11.3.9 Engine FW DipSW” for the method of enabling the New Release Disable mode.

10.12.3 Service Call

(1) Use
• To count and display how many times trouble has been detected on a trouble type basis.
• Use this feature to check how many times trouble has occurred.
NOTE
• In the service call counter list, “Reboot” shows how many times abort code (C-FXXX) has occurred.
• In this machine, the counters for the following items are disabled.
2253/4 color PC motor
2255/6 Color Dev. motor
2551/52/59/61 cyan TCR sensor
2553/54/5A/62 magenta TCR sensor
2555/56/5B/63 yellow TCR sensor
2651 EEPROM Access (IU C)
2652 EEPROM Access (IU M)
2653 EEPROM Access (IU Y)
2A21 (TC C) New Release
2A22 (TC M) New Release
2A23 (TC Y) New Release
6303 CIS Cooling Fan 1 Defect
6754 CIS Clamp Adjustment Abnormality
6755 CIS Gain Adjustment Abnormality
691x DSC2 board abnormality
6104 Opposed board home sensor abnormality (initial)
6105 Opposed board home sensor abnormality (normal)
6753 ASIC clock input malfunction (rear)
9403 Exposure lamp lighting failure (back side)
9404 Exposure lamp extinction failure (back side)

10.12.4 Section Service Call

(1) Use
• To count and display how many times trouble has been detected during a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits, on a
trouble type basis.
• Use this feature to check how many times trouble has occurred in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits.
• By clearing the counter at the time of visit to your customer, i.e. service visit, you can check how many times trouble has occurred since
the previous visit.
To reset the counter, use [Counter Reset].
NOTE
• In the zone service call list, “Reboot” shows how many times abort code (C-FXXX) has occurred.

I-219
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• In this machine, the counters for the following items are disabled.
2253/4 color PC motor
2255/6 Color Dev. motor
2551/52/59/61 cyan TCR sensor
2553/54/5A/62 magenta TCR sensor
2555/56/5B/63 yellow TCR sensor
2651 EEPROM Access (IU C)
2652 EEPROM Access (IU M)
2653 EEPROM Access (IU Y)
2A21 (TC C) New Release
2A22 (TC M) New Release
2A23 (TC Y) New Release
6303 CIS Cooling Fan 1 Defect
6754 CIS Clamp Adjustment Abnormality
6755 CIS Gain Adjustment Abnormality
691x DSC2 board abnormality
6104 Opposed board home sensor abnormality (initial)
6105 Opposed board home sensor abnormality (normal)
6753 ASIC clock input malfunction (rear)
9403 Exposure lamp lighting failure (back side)
9404 Exposure lamp extinction failure (back side)

10.12.5 Warning
(1) Use
• To count and display how many times warning code has been detected on a warning code type basis.
• To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type.

(2) Procedure
• To clear the count of a counter, select the specific part and press the Clear key.
• If a counter is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.
• When a warning condition occurs, an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the basic screen.
• Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen.
NOTE
• In this machine, the counters for the following items are disabled.
P-28 IDC Sensor (Rear)
P-6 Imaging Unit (C)
P-7 Imaging Unit (M)
P-8 Imaging Unit (Y)
P-14 skew correction trouble
P-21 Color Regist Test Pattern
P-22 Color Regist
P-31 PC Home Sensor (K)
L-1 Imaging Unit (C) Rotation Time
L-2 Imaging Unit (M) Rotation Time
L-3 Imaging Unit (Y) Rotation Time
S-2 CIS gain adjustment
D-3 Sprit line detection (Back side)

10.12.6 Maintenance
(1) Use
• To set a count value for maintenance of any given part.
• When any given part is replaced.

(2) Procedure
Maint.-Set
• Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad.
Maint.-Count
• The number of sheets that have been ejected is counted up. (1 sided: 1 count, 2 sided: 2 count)
• Pressing the Clear key will clear the count.
• If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.

10.12.7 Service Total

(1) Total
(a) Use
• To display the count value for the service total counter.
• Use to check the total No. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service Mode.

(b) Procedure
• Service Total: No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode.
• Service Total (Duplex): No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode in duplex.

I-220
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Paper Size 1/2

(a) Use
• To display the count value for service total counter of each paper size.
• To check the total number of printed pages including the one at Service Mode according to each paper size.
• The count of Paper Size 1 and Paper Size 2 that contain the following paper sizes is provided respectively.
Paper Size 1 A3, A4, A4S, A5, A6, B4, B5, B5S, B6, Post., 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 7 1/4 x
10 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 4 x 6, Foolscap
Paper Size 2 8K, 16K, long Length, Others

10.12.8 Counter of Each Mode

(1) Use
• To display the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner, and fax. It also displays the count value of using the
specified mode.
• Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner, and fax, as well as No. of times each mode was
used, in order to know the using condition.
Copy/printer/scanner counter Displays individual counts in copy, printer, and scan mode.
Fax-related counter Displays individual counts in fax mode.
Counter by finishing option Displays individual counts on a finishing option basis.
Stabilization counter Displays individual counts on a basis of the factors that cause image stabilization. The counter
helps to understand what causes image stabilization and how to improve image stabilization
control.
PJ counter • Jobs that the machine has processed are divided according to the number of pages per job:
1P/J, 2P/J, ... 10P/J, or 11P/J and more. The total number of jobs in each group is counted
and displayed separately based on whether job is processed.
• The counter is used to understand how the machine has been used in the field.

10.12.9 Service Call History (Data)

(1) Use
• To display the trouble history in chronological order.
• Use to check the trouble history in chronological order.

10.12.10 ADF Paper Pages

(1) Use
• To display the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder.
• Use to check the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder.

10.12.11 Paper Jam History

(1) Use
• To display the jam history in chronological order.
• Use to check the jam history in chronological order.
NOTE
• [Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code.
For details of JAM code, see “K.1.1 List of the JAM code.”

10.12.12 Fax Connection Error

(1) Use
• To display the No. of fax transmission errors occurred.
• Use to check the No. of fax transmission errors occurred.

10.12.13 ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Counter

(1) Use
• To display the average number of detected stain on the ADF original glass (front side) at the pre-detection.
• Used for checking the number of detected stain on the ADF original glass.
Pre-detection Large Size (Front Side) Large-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average
number of detected lines) will be displayed.
Pre-detection Small Size (Front Side) Small-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average
number of detected lines) will be displayed.
Pre-detection Size (Back Side) Not used.
Cleaning brush rotation count (Front Not used.
Side)
Cleaning brush rotation count (Back Not used.
Side)

I-221
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Procedure
• To clear each counter value, select the items to be cleared, and press the Clear key. (When selecting [Pre-detect Large Size] or [Pre-
detect Small Size] is selected, both values will be cleared.)
• If the count is cleared mistakenly, press the Interrupt key, which will undo the clearing operation.

10.12.14 Parts Counter (Fixed)

• It will be displayed only when the optional finisher is mounted.

(1) Use
• When the optional finisher is mounted, the parts counter screen displays the relevant parts and their counts. When the relevant parts are
replaced, their counters need to be reset to update the service history.
• When the optional finisher is mounted, the relevant parts counter can be checked from this menu.
• Service history can be maintained from this menu.
NOTE
• See the table below for the relevant parts and count method.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch in the order of [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [↑] → [Parts Counter (Fixed)].
2. Check the parts counter or display the relevant part of which counter will be reset.
3. Check the part count.
To reset the count value, touch the key of the part where the counter is reset. Touch the Clear key.

(3) Fixed parts to be counted

CSRC
No. Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition
parameter
001 43 FNS 2-Staple Stapler A07P7901 500,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in both 1 staple
and 2 staple mode.
002 44 FNS Center Staple & Fold 20AK4241 200,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in saddle stitch
Stapler mode.
003 - Stacker Accessory Plate 56AA8002 3,000,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in front 1 staple,
Movement Monitor rear 1 staple, 2 staples in sort staple mode as
well as shift sort m
004 47 FNS Center press Knife Motor 120H8001 2,000,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in half-fold,
saddle stitch, and tri-fold mode
005 4A PI sheet paper feed clutch 13QN8201 1,000,000 1 count for each sheet fed from the PI upper
(Upper) tray
006 4B PI sending Roller Pair/A (Upper) 50BA-574 200,000
007 4C PI sending Roller Pair/B (Upper) 50BA-575 100,000
008 4D PI Reversal Rubber Pair 13QN-443 100,000
(Upper)
009 4E PI Torque Limiter (Upper) 13QN4073 600,000
010 - PI Tray Up/Down Motor (Up) 12GQ8002 1,000,000 1 count for each job where paper is fed from the
PI upper tray
011 - PI sheet paper feed clutch 13QN8201 1,000,000 1 count for each sheet fed from the PI lower
(Lower) tray
012 - PI sending Roller Pair/A (Lower) 50BA-574 200,000
013 51 PI sending Roller Pair/B (Lower) 50BA-575 100,000
014 52 PI Reversal Rubber Pair 13QN-443 100,000
(Lower)
015 53 PI Torque Limiter (Lower) 13QN4073 600,000 1 count for each sheet fed from the PI lower
tray
016 - PI Tray Up/Down Motor (Down) 12GQ8002 1,000,000 1 count for each job where paper is fed from the
PI lower tray
017 65 PI Regist 13QN8201 1,000,000 1 count each time a sheet is ejected from PI.
018 66 Punch Motor A11TR90000 1,000,000 Number of sheets ejected in punch mode
019 - FNS Output Roller/A 122H4825 300,000 1 count for each sheet ejection to the FNS main
tray. 1 count for each sheet ejection in staple
mode
020 - PK Counter A11T9100 1,000,000 Number of punch kit punching
A11T9101
A11T9102
021 - Punch scrap transportation A111A928 1,000,000 Number of • 1 count for each sheet printed
motor pair punches in in punch mode when ZU is
ZU installed and PK is not
installed.
• 1 count for each sheet printed
in Z-fold and punch modes
when ZU and PK are installed.

I-222
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

CSRC
No. Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition
parameter
022 - Punch clutch 13NKK001 1,000,000

10.12.15 Jam
(1) Use
• To count and display how many times jam has been detected on a jam location basis.

10.12.16 Section JAM

• To count and display how many times jam has been detected in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits, on a jam location
basis.
• Use this feature to check how many times jam has occurred in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits.
• By clearing the jam counter at the time of visit to your customer site, i.e. service visit, you can check how many times jam has occurred
since the previous visit.
To reset the counter, use [Counter Clear].

10.13 List Output

10.13.1 Batch List CSV Output

(1) Use
• To save various lists data into a USB memory device all together with the CSV format.
• Compared to output to paper, outputting various lists data to the USB memory device can save time, paper, and toner.
With the output data, analyzing the machine statistically becomes easier.
• Lists data to be output are as follows:
Target list Data symbol
Machine Management List S1
Adjustments List S2
Parameter List S3
Service Parameter S4
Protocol Trace List S5
Fax Setting List S6
Management List A1
Paper Size/Type Counter A2
Configuration Page U1
PCL Font List U2
PS Font List U3
Meter Count C1

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [List Output].
3. Insert the USB memory device to the USB port (for user).
4. Touch [USB save] displayed in the Batch List CSV Output.
Then, List data are transferred to the USB memory device.
5. Confirm that “OK” is displayed as the result of data saving.
<File names of lists data>
• Each list data has its file name in accordance with the following file name rule.

I-223
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

[2-digit data symbol that corresponds to each list (see the above table)] + [_(underscore)] + [13-digit serial number] + [6-digit date (year,
month, and day)] + [2-digit hour] + [2-digit minute].csv

10.13.2 Machine Management List

(1) Use
• To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter values, and others.
• At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.

(2) Procedure
• Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.
• Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
• The time-of-day and date will also be printed.

10.13.3 Adjustment List

(1) Use
• To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment, process adjustment, etc. in Service Mode.
• At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.

(2) Procedure
• Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.
• Press the Start key, which will let the machine produce the list.
• The time-of-day and date will also be printed.

10.13.4 Parameter List

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.13.5 Service Parameter

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.13.6 Protocol Trace

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.13.7 Fax Setting List

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.13.8 Fax Analysis List

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.14 State Confirmation

10.14.1 Sensor Check

(1) Use
• To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary.
• Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs.

(2) Procedure
• The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis.

I-224
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a door is open.

(a) Electrical components check procedure through input data check

• When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper feed section of the machine, the tray 2 paper feed sensor is considered to be responsible for
it.
1. Remove the sheet of paper misfed.
2. From the sensor check list that follows, check the panel display of the tray 2 paper feed sensor. For the tray 2 paper feed sensor, you
check the data of “Paper feed” of “Tray 2.”
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Select [State Confirmation] → [Sensor Check] and then select the screen that contains “Paper feed” under “Tray 2.” For “Paper feed”
under “Tray 2,” select “1” on the left-hand side of the screen.
5. Check that the data for “Paper feed” under “Tray 2” is “0” (sensor blocked).
6. Move the actuator to unblock the tray 2 paper feed sensor.
7. Check that the data for “Paper feed” under “Tray 2” changes from “0” to “1” on the screen.
8. If the input data is “0,” change the sensor.

(3) Sensor check screens

• These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine.

(a) Sensor monitor 1 (Main body)

Paper feed tray 1

Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
Paper feed tray 1
PS1 Tray 1 Set Sensor Tray 1 device detection sensor In position Out of position
PS2 Paper empty Tray 1 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
PS3 Near Empty Tray 1 near empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS4 Vertical transport Tray 1 vertical transport sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS5 Paper feed Tray 1 paper feed sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS6 Upper Limit Tray 1 upper limit sensor At raised position Not at raised
position
Paper feed tray 2
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS9 Tray 2 Set Sensor Tray 2 device detection sensor In position Out of position
PS10 Paper empty Tray 2 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
PS11 Near Empty Tray 2 near empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS12 Vertical transport Tray 2 vertical transport sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS13 Paper feed Tray 2 paper feed sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS14 Upper Limit Tray 2 upper limit sensor At raised position Not at raised
position
Paper feed tray 3
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Tray 3 Set Sensor - In position Out of position
PS19 Paper empty Tray 3 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present

I-225
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Operation characteristics/panel display

Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS22 Near Empty Tray 3 near empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS21 Paper feed Tray 3 paper feed sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS20 Upper Limit Tray 3 upper limit sensor At raised position Not at raised
position
Paper feed tray 4
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Tray 4 Set Sensor - In position Out of position
PS24 Paper empty Tray 4 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
PS27 Near Empty Tray 4 near empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS26 Paper feed Tray 4 paper feed sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS25 Upper Limit Tray 4 upper limit sensor At raised position Not at raised
position
Tray 3/4
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS28 Intermediate Roller Intermediate roller sensor Paper present Paper not present
Sensor
PS29 Horizon. Transportat. Horizontal transport sensor Paper present Paper not present
sensor
Manual
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS30 Bypass Set Sensor Bypass set sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS31 Bypass Length Sensor Multi FD size sensor/1 ON OFF
1
PS32 Bypass Length Sensor Multi FD size sensor/2 ON OFF
2
PS33 Bypass Length Sensor Multi FD size sensor/3 ON OFF
3
PS34 Paper empty Bypass paper empty sensor At raised position Not at raised
position
PS35 Upper Limit Bypass paper limit sensor At raised position Not at raised
position
PS36 Lower Limit Bypass paper lower sensor At lower limit Not at lower limit
position position
PS37 Sub Tray Bypass sub tray set sensor Blocked Unblocked
Paper passage transportation
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS38 Sensor in front of tim. Timing roller sensor Paper present Paper not present
roller.
PS39 Paper exit Paper exit sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS40 OHP detection OHP detection sensor OHP Not OHP
PS41 Loop amount detection Loop amount detection sensor/1 Loop present Loop not present
1
PS42 Loop amount detection Loop amount detection sensor/2 Loop present Loop not present
2

I-226
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(b) Sensor monitor 2 (Main body, LCT)

Photo conductor
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS43 Charging Cl Home
Charging cleaner home sensor Blocked Unblocked
Sensor (Rear)
PS44 Charging CL home Charging cleaner return sensor Blocked Unblocked
sensor (interior)
- Black PC Encoder 1 - - -
- Black PC Encoder 2 - - -
LCT
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- LCT detection LCT identification signal Connection No connection
PS1 Tray set sensor • LU-204: Tray set sensor/1 In position Out of position
• LU-301: Tray set sensor
PS2 Upper limit sensor Upper limit sensor At raised position Not at raised
(Blocked) position
(Unblocked)
PS3 Paper feed Paper feed sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS4 Paper empty Paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
PS5 Near empty 1 Near empty sensor /1 Blocked Unblocked
PS6 Near empty 2 Near empty sensor /2 Blocked Unblocked
MS1 Upper Door LU door switch Close Open
Duplex
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS47 Paper passage1 ADU paper passage sensor/1 Paper present Paper not present
PS48 Paper passage 2 ADU paper passage sensor/2 Paper present Paper not present
Secondary transfer
PS50 2nd Transfer Press./ Pressure welding alienation sensor Not Retracted Retracted
Retract.
Secondary transfer
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS50 2nd Transfer Press./ Pressure welding alienation sensor Not Retracted Retracted
Retract.
Transfer belt
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS51 Retraction (black) Pressure welding alienation sensor/K Not Retracted Retracted
- Retraction (color) - - -

I-227
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Waste toner
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS53 Waste Toner Box Set Waste toner box set sensor Blocked Unblocked
- Waste Toner Full 1 Not used.
PS54 Waste Toner Full 2 Waste toner full sensor/1 Blocked Unblocked
Fusing
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS55 Roller retraction Pressure home sensor Not Retracted Retracted
- Fuser Power Switch - No electricity Electricity
restrictions restrictions

(c) Sensor monitor 3 (Main body)

Toner
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Toner (C) Empty - - -
- Toner (M) Empty - - -
- Toner (Y) Empty - - -
PZS/K Toner (K) Empty Toner empty sensor/K Toner not present Toner present
- Toner (C) set detection - - -
- Toner (M) set detection - - -
- Toner (Y) set detection - - -
TCB/K Toner (K) set detection Toner cartridge set board/K In position Out of position
- Toner Cartridge New - - -
Set (C)
- Toner Cartridge New - - -
Set (M)
- Toner Cartridge New - - -
Set (Y)
- Toner Cartridge New - New article Not a new article
Set (K)
IU
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Drum Unit (K) set - In position Out of position
detection
- Drum Unit New Set (K) - New article Not a new article

I-228
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(d) Sensor monitor 4 (FS-526)

Finisher 1
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS1 FNS Entrance Sensor FNS pass sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS2 Z-Fold Punch Regist. Z-fold Punch regist sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS12 Center Staple & Fold Center staple pass sensor Paper present Paper not present
Stacker Inlet
PS3 2 Staples Entrance 2 staples stacker sensor Paper present Paper not present
Sensor
PS15 2 Staples Stacker 2 staples stacker empty sensor Paper not present Paper present
Empty
PS16 Rewind Paddle Up/ Rewind paddle home sensor At home Not at home
Down Movement M HP
PS17 2 Staples Alignment F 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F At home Not at home
HP Detection
PS18 2 Staples Alignment R 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R At home Not at home
HP Detection
PS19 Side-staple paddle 2 staples paddle phase sensor Blocked Unblocked
phase detection
PS10 Paper Output-Driven R Paper output roller home sensor At home Not at home
Movement M HP
PS11 Stacker Accessory Stacker plate home sensor At home Not at home
Plate M HP
PS20 Trail Edge Paddle up/ Trail edge paddle home sensor At home Not at home
Down Movement M HP
PS8 Sub Tray Exit Detection Sub tray exit sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS9 Sub Tray Full Detection Sub tray full sensor Full Other than full
PS4 Main Tray Top Surface Upper limit Not at upper limit
Main tray top surface sensor
Detection
PS5 Main Tray Lower Limit Main tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Not at lower limit
Detection
PS7 Stapled Paper Output Staple paper exit top surface sensor Blocked Unblocked
Top Surface Detection
PS6 Main Tray Empty Main tray empty sensor Blocked Unblocked
Detection
PS201 FNS Front Door open/ Door open/close sensor Open Close
Close 24V Detection
- Side-staple stapler - 50 sheets 100 sheets
cartridge (Blocked) (Unblocked)
- 2-staple stapler HP - At home Not at home
Detection
- Staple Detection for 2 - Staple No staple
staples

I-229
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(e) Sensor monitor 5 (FS-526, SD-508)

Finisher 2
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS24 Shutter open/close
Shutter open/close sensor Close Open
Detection
PS35 SD exit paper full SD exit full sensor Full Other than full
detection
PS41 SD output Upper Limit SD exit upper limit sensor Upper limit Not at upper limit
Detection
PS22 Side-staple rear 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor At home Not at home
stopper move M:HP
PS23 Side-staple rear 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor Standby position Other than standby
stopper move position
M:standby position
PS50 Stapler Position 1 Stapler position sensor/1 Blocked Unblocked
PS51 Stapler Position 2 Stapler position sensor/2 Blocked Unblocked
PS52 Stapler Position 3 Stapler position sensor/3 Blocked Unblocked
PS53 Stapler Position 4 Stapler position sensor/4 Blocked Unblocked
PS27 Fold Detection Fold sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS28 SD Output Detection • SD exit sensor/LED Paper present Paper not present
PS29 • SD exit sensor/PR
PS26 Center Staple & Fold Center staple stacker empty sensor/1 Paper not present Paper present
Stacker Empty
PS37 Paddle Movement M Paddle home sensor/C At home Not at home
(Center) HP
PS34 Half-Fold knife HP Center fold knife home sensor At home Not at home
PS33 Stapler Movement M Stapler home sensor At home Not at home
HP
PS32 Leading Edge Stopper Leading edge stopper home sensor At home Not at home
M HP
PS31 Center Staple & Fold R Center staple alignment motor home sensor/R At home Not at home
Alignment M HP
PS30 Center Staple & Fold F Center staple alignment motor home sensor/F At home Not at home
Alignment M HP

I-230
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(f) Sensor monitor 6 (PK-516, JS-602)

Finisher 3
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS303 PK Punch HP
PK punch oscillating home sensor At home Not at home
Detection
PS307 2-Hole Position Detect 2 hole position sensor 3 holes (4 holes)
PS308 PK Punch Front PK punch front sensor Blocked Unblocked
Detection
PS302 PK Punch-Hole Scraps PK punch scraps box full sensor Full Other than full
Box Full Detection
PS304 PK Punch-Hole Scraps PK punch scraps box set sensor Set Not set
Box Installation
Detection
PS401 3rd tray cover open Job tray cover sensor Open Closed
detection
PS402 3rd tray paper exit Job tray paper exit sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS403 3rd tray exit paper full Job tray full sensor Full Other than full
detection
- 3rd tray detection - Set Not set

(g) Sensor monitor 7 (ZU-606)

I-231
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Finisher 4
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS202 Transport. passage
Paper pass sensor Paper present Paper not present
detect. PS
- FNS connection FNS connection signal Connected Unconnected
detection

(h) Sensor monitor 8 (PI-505)

Finisher 5/ PI operation panel SW

Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Start/Clear button Post inserter unit manual start/clear SW OFF ON
- Punch button Post inserter unit manual punch button SW OFF ON
- Function select button Post inserter unit manual function selection button OFF ON
SW
MS205 PI Door Open Upper door open/close switch Open Close
PS201 PI Upper Sheet Path Paper entrance sensor /Up Paper present Paper not present
Detection
PS202 PI Upper Tray Sheet Paper empty sensor /Up Paper present Paper not present
detection
PS203 PI Upper Sheet set Paper set sensor /Up Paper present Paper not present
Detection (Middle)
PS204 PI Upper Tray Upper Tray upper limit sensor /Up At upper limit Not at upper limit
limit detection position position
PS205 PI Upper Tray lower Tray lower limit sensor /Up At lower limit Not at lower limit
limit detection position position
PS206 PI Lower Tray Sheet Paper entrance sensor /Lw Paper present Paper not present
Detection
PS207 PI Lower Tray Sheet Paper empty sensor /Lw Paper present Paper not present
Detection
PS208 PI Lower Sheet Set Paper set sensor /Lw Paper present Paper not present
Detection (Middle)
PS209 PI Lower Tray upper Tray upper limit sensor /Lw At upper limit Not at upper limit
limit detection position position
PS210 PI Lower Tray lower Tray lower limit sensor /Lw At lower limit Not at lower limit
limit detection position position
PS212 PI Lower Sheet Size L size sensor /Lw Paper present Paper not present
Detection (Large)

I-232
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(i) Sensor monitor 9 (ZU-606)

Finisher 6/ ZU
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PSDTB Entrance detection L:
Paper size detect board Paper not present Paper present
Paper having
PS609 Exit detection L: Paper Exit sensor Paper not present Paper present
having
PSDTB Detection 2 on edge Paper size detect board Paper not present Paper present
side L: Paper having
PSDTB Detection 3 on edge Paper size detect board Paper not present Paper present
side L: Paper having
PSDTB Detection 4 on edge Paper size detect board Paper not present Paper present
side L: Paper having
PS605 Punch movement Punch shift home sensor Paper not present Paper present
home position H: HP
PS604 Two stopper home 2nd folding stopper home sensor At home Not at home
positions L: HP
PS608 Punch rubbish full Punch scraps full sensor Not at home At home
detection L: Full
PS607 Punch rubbish box set Punch scraps box set sensor Set Other than set
H: Set
PS610 Z transportation motor Conveyance encoder sensor Other than lock Lock
lock detection L:
Detection
MS601 Hole switch detection Punch switchover switch 3(/4) holes 2 holes
H:3(4) punch 2/3(4)
hole
PS606 Punch position home Punch home sensor Not at home At home
position L:HP
PS603 One stopper home 1st folding stopper home sensor Not at home At home
position L:HP
ACSW1 Interlock (door opening Door switch Open Closed
and shutting) detection
H: Opening
FM601 Fan motor lock Main motor cooling fan Detection Other than
detection H: Detection detection
PSDTB Detection 5 on edge Paper size detect board Paper not present Paper present
Side L: Paper having
PS601 Sheet detection L: Conveyance sensor Paper not present Paper present
Paper having

I-233
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(j) Sensor monitor 10 (FS-527)

NOTE
• “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and “Tray 2” is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel.
Finisher 7
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS1 Paper passage 1 Paper passage sensor/1 Paper present Paper not present
PS2 Paper passage 2 Paper passage sensor/2 Paper present Paper not present
PS10 Punch regist Registration sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS8 Upper path Upper path sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS9 Lower path lower path sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS6 Tray 2 Path Tray1 path sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS11 Saddle path Saddle path sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS17 Alignment Plate home Alignment plate home sensor At home Not at home
PS20 FD Stopper Home Leading edge stopper home sensor At home Not at home
Main finishing tray
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS16 Paper detection Tray2 paper detection sensor Paper present Paper not present
Staple Movement
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS18 Home Sensor 1 (Rear) Stapler home sensor/1 At home Not at home
PS19 Home Sensor 2 (Front) Stapler home sensor/2 At home Not at home
Staple Unit
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Staple empty - No staple Staple
- Self Prime - Staple No staple
- Home - At home Not at home
SW2 Elevate upper/lower Tray2 upper position switch At lower limit Not at lower limit
SW3 limit SW Tray2 lower position switch position position
M15 Elevate motor lock Elevate motor Lock Other than lock
detection
PS21 Elevate Minimum Tray2 lower position sensor At lower limit Not at lower limit
Detection position position
PS25 Home (Shift) Tray2 shift home sensor Rear Front
PS13 Accommodation R Accommodation roller pressure sensor No electricity Electricity
Retraction home restrictions restrictions
PS12 Tray 1 Exit R Exit roller pressure sensor No electricity Electricity
Retraction Home restrictions restrictions
PS3 2-Side Path switch Duplex path switching sensor Duplex Not duplex
Home

I-234
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Operation characteristics/panel display

Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS26 Upper Lower path Upper lower path switching sensor Upper path Lower path
switch Home
PS7 Tray 2 path Change Tray1 path switching home sensor Tray 1 Upper path
Home

(k) Sensor monitor 11 (FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603)

NOTE
• “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and “Tray 2” is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel.
Finisher 8
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
SW1 Front Door Open
Front door switch Closed Open
Detection
PS14 Upper Door Open Upper door sensor Closed Open
Detection
PS5 Horizontal transport Horizontal conveyance cover sensor Closed Open
open
Tray 1
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS24 Upper position Tray2 upper position sensor Top detected Other than top
Detection detected

I-235
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Tray 2
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS22 Full detection Tray1 full sensor Full Other than full
PS300 Punch pulse Punch pulse sensor/1 ON OFF
PS200 Punch Cam position Punch cam position sensor At home Not at home
PS100 Punch Home Punch home sensor/1 At home Not at home
PS30 Punch Hole Full Detect Punch hole full sensor Full Other than full
- Punch Unit Set - Set Other than set
PS45 Edge Stopper M Home Leading edge stopper home sensor At home Not at home
- Saddle Set - Set Other than set
PS42 Center Staple align M Center staple alignment home sensor/F At home Not at home
HP (F)
PS41 Center Staple align M Center staple alignment home sensor/R At home Not at home
HP (R)
Saddle Tray
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS43 Upper Paper Detection Paper detection sensor/1 Staple No staple
PS44 Lower Paper Detection Paper detection sensor/2 Staple No staple
- Saddle Staple Home - At home Not at home
- Saddle staple 1 Empty - Staple No staple
- Saddle staple 2 Empty - Staple No staple
PS47 Center fold plate M Center fold plate home sensor At home Not at home
Home
M25 Center fold M Lock Center fold roller motor Lock Other than lock
detection
PS48 Booklet tray empty Booklet tray near full sensor Paper present Paper not present
detection
PS50 Booklet tray full Booklet tray full sensor Paper present Paper not present
detection
Tray 3
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- Set Detection - Set Other than set
PS36 Full detection Tray3 full sensor Full Other than full
PS35 Exit R Retraction Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor No electricity Electricity
restrictions restrictions

(l) Sensor monitor 12

I-236
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Finisher 9
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
- - - - -

(m) Sensor monitor 13 (Scanner section of the main body)

Scaner
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS201 Home Sensor Scanner home sensor At home Out of home
- Home sensor opposite - At home Out of home
board
Org. Detecting Sensor
Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS201 Original Cover Original cover sensor Lowered Raised
PS202 20 Degree 20 degree sensor Less than 20 20 degree or more
degree
PS204 Original Size Detection Original size detection 1 sensor • Original loaded Original not loaded
1 • Not mounted
PS205 Original Size Detection Original size detection 2 sensor • Original loaded Original not loaded
2 • Not mounted
- Original Size Detection Not used - -
3
- Original Size Detection Not used - -
4
- Original Size Detection Not used - -
5
- Original Size Detection Not used - -
6
- Original Size Detection Not used - -
7
- Original Size Detection Not used - -
8

10.14.2 Table Number

(1) Use
• When IDC is detected, for plain paper, Thick 1/1+ and Thick 2/3/4, the machine independently displays each Vg/Vdc output value that is
calculated based on the density (toner amount stuck on the belt) of the test pattern created on the transfer belt.
• Used for troubleshooting of image problems.
• Reference values: Vdc: around 400 V, Vg: around 500 V

(2) Procedure
• If the value is high, correct so that the image density becomes low.
• If the value is low, correct so that the image density becomes high.

I-237
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.14.3 Level History1

(1) Use
• To display TCR (T/C ratio), IDC/registration sensor output values, and fusing temperature.
• Used for troubleshooting of image problems.

(2) Procedure
TCR-K Shows the T/C output reading taken last.
IDC1 Shows the latest IDC data.
Middle heat temperature Displays the latest temperature on the middle of the heating roller.
Heat. Protect Temperature Displays the latest temperature of the heating protection.
Heat edge temperature Displays the latest temperature at the edges of the heating roller.
Soaking side temperature Displays the latest temperature of the soaking roller.
NC sensor temperature Displays the temperature detected by NC sensor.
“Reading taken last” means
• Density of toner of the latest image.
• When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while level history 1 is being displayed.

10.14.4 Level History 2

(1) Use
• IDC Sensor (Transfer belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabilization sequence and ATVC value.
• Used for troubleshooting of image problems.

(2) Procedure
IDC Sensor Adjust 1 Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the IDC sensor.
ATVC-K Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value (10 to 100 μA).
ATVC (2nd) Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 to 5000 V).

10.14.5 Temp. & Humidity

(1) Use
• To display the temperature, humidity and paper temperature of a specific location (IDC sensor portion) inside the machine.
• Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs.

(2) Procedure
Temp-Inside 0 to 100 °C in 1 °C increments
Humidity 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments
Absolute Humidity 0 to 100 in 1 increments
Paper Temp. 0 to 100 °C in 1 °C increments

10.14.6 CCD Check

(1) Use
• To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B.
• Used for troubleshooting for the CCD sensor.

(2) Procedure
• Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values.
<CCD>
• CLAMP:The maximum value and the minimum value of the output value should be within the range shown below.
Acceptable clamping rage Minimum value Maximum value
R 600 1500
G 600 1700
B 600 1600

• GAIN :The maximum value and the minimum value of the output value should be within the range shown below.
Acceptable gain rage Minimum value Maximum value
R 20 238
G 10 222
B 70 247

10.14.7 Memory/HDD Adj.

(1) Memory Check
(a) Use
• To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/read check.

I-238
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• If the copy image is faulty.

• The following shows the memory names that correspond to each memory where check is made.
WORK0 Standard memory (DIMM0)
WORK1 Standard memory (DIMM1)
FILE0, 1 Memory of ASIC200 installed in the MFP board
FILE2, 3 Not used.
FILE4, 5 Not used.
<Rough Check>
• A check is made for each memory to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area.
• The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. (calculated based on all checks from WORK0 to FILE1 constituting
100%)
• When the rough checks of all memories are completed, results are displayed beside the memory display (OK/NG).
Rough check time: approx. 10 sec.
Typical rough check result display: Exemplary display when all memories have been checked okay

<Detail Check>
• A write check and a read check are repeated in all areas for each memory.
NOTE
• For a write check, a specific write value is set and the specific value is written in all areas of the memory and the written
data is thereafter read. This sequence is performed for all memories (from WORK0 to FILE1) (which forms one cycle of the
check sequence).
• When one cycle of the check sequence is completed, the write value is changed automatically and a new check cycle is
performed. This sequence is repeated with the write value changed for each sequence.
• Unlike the rough check, the detail check is not automatically terminated. The check cycle is repeated until the Stop key is
pressed.

• The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. (calculated based on all checks from WORK0 to FILE1 constituting
100%)
NOTE
• The check progress status display is 100% when one cycle of the check sequence is completed.
• The check progress status display is automatically reset to 0% and restarted as soon as a new check sequence is started.

• The detail check of all memories (one cycle) is completed in about 3 min.
• The press of the Stop key will terminate the detail check.
• If a write/read error is detected, NG appears beside the memory display and the check sequence is automatically terminated.

(b) Rough check procedure

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [Memory Check].
3. Touch [Rough Check].
4. Press the Start key to start the rough check procedure.
5. The procedure is automatically completed (in about 10 sec.) and the results are shown on the screen.
NOTE
• The rough check procedure can be interrupted by pressing the Stop key.

6. If the check results for WORK0 to 1 are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one.
If the check results for FILE0 to 1 are NG, replace the MFP board with a new one.

(c) Detail check procedure

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [Memory Check].
3. Touch [Detail Check]
4. Press the Start key to start the detail check procedure.
The check sequence is started and the current check progress status is displayed in percentage.
5. When the check progress status display is 100% after the start of the check sequence, the first check cycle is completed (which takes
about 3 min.).

I-239
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

The results are displayed on the screen. (The sequence has been checked okay, if NG does not appear.)
The current check progress status display is associated with the latest check sequence.
NOTE
• If a write/read error is detected, NG appears beside the memory display and the check cycle is automatically terminated.

6. Press the Stop key at any timing to terminate the detail check procedure.
7. If the check results for WORK0 to 1 are NG, check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one.
If the check results for FILE0 to 1 are NG, replace the MFP board with a new one.

(2) Compress / Decompression Check

(a) Use
• To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly.
• If the copy image is faulty.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [Compress / Decompression Check].
3. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence.
4. The check result will be displayed.

(3) JPEG Check

• It will be displayed only when the optional scan accelerator SA-502 is mounted.

(a) Use
• To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly.
• If the copy image is faulty.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [JPEG Check].
3. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence.
4. The check result will be displayed.

(4) Memory Bus Check

(a) Use
• To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory, and from memory to printer.
• Bus check between scanner and memory has two steps; the scanner internal check step as internal processing and the check step
between scanner and memory. If either of the two steps is NG, NG1 or NG2 is displayed respectively.
• If the print image is faulty.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [Memory Bus Check].
3. Select either [Scanner → Memory], [Memory → PRT], or both.
4. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automatically.
5. The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG].

(5) DSC Bus Check

(a) Use
• To check the connection between the DSC board and the scanner section when the optional security kit SC-507 is installed.
• When an error is detected after checking, NG1 or NG2 is displayed depending on the location of the board where the defect is found.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [DSC Bus Check].
3. Touch [Scanner → DSC] of "Front side" .
NOTE
• DSC bus check for "Back side" is not used.

4. Pressing the Start key will start the DSC bus check and be terminated automatically.
5. The check result will be displayed.

(6) HDD R/W Check

(a) Use
• To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed.
• When the hard disk is mounted.

(b) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [HDD R/W Check].

I-240
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

3. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically.
4. The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG].

(7) HDD Format

(a) Use
• To format the hard disk.
• The function proceeds in the order of physical format to logical format.
• If the hard disk is yet to be formatted, the malfunction code “C-D010” will appear. Ignore this code and continue with the formatting
procedure.
• When the hard disk is mounted.
• When the hard disk is to be initialized. (Physical format to logical format)
NOTE
• As HDD formatting deletes Movie data and OCR dictionary data, you need to reinstall these data as necessary after using this
function.

(b) Procedure (Physical Format)

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [HDD Format].
3. Touch [Physical Format].
4. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
5. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
6. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
NOTE
• If [HDD Encryption Setting] is not set to “ON,” when the physical format is completed and the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON, a message that prompts you to set an encrypting word is displayed.
If you perform [HDD Encryption Setting], after setting an encrypting word, perform the logical format.

(c) Procedure (Logical Format (only when initial is set up))

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.] → [HDD Format].
3. Touch [Logical Format].
4. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.
5. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed.
6. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
* Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it.

(8) Memory/HDD Adj.-SSD→HDD Data Copy

• Not used.

10.14.8 Memory/HDD State

(1) Use
• To display the condition and amount of the memory and hard disk.

(2) Procedure
• When the encryption board is mounted, the machine automatically recognizes it and displays [Set].

10.14.9 IU Lot No.

(1) Use
• To display the 10-digit lot number for developing unit.
• The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of developing unit.

(2) Procedure
• The lot number is displayed even with the front door opened; however, the display is blank, since the machine is unable to read the lot
number when the main power switch is turned ON with the front door open. Nonetheless, the lot number will be displayed when the front
door is closed.
(The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the front door is closed.)

10.14.10 Adjustment Data List

(1) Use
• To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main body.
• Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main body.

I-241
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.15 Test Mode

• To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in
paper passage test, as well as the fax transmission.
• The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, and tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for
printing.

10.15.1 Procedure for test pattern output

1. Touch [Test Mode] to display the test mode menu.
2. Touch the desired test pattern key.
3. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key.

10.15.2 Gradation Pattern

(1) Use
• To produce a gradation pattern.
• Used for checking gradation reproducibility.

(a) Test pattern

e.g.
• SINGLE
• HYPER
• 256 gradation
• Gradation
• Black (1PC)

(2) Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
• Select FEET or “HYPER”.
• Select“1-Sided”, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
• 2-Side1: The same pattern is printed on both front and back sides.
• 2-Side2: The front side is blank and the pattern is printed on the back side.
• Select “Gradation”, Resolution or Error diffusion if HYPER has been selected.
• Select “12 Gradations”, 24 Gradations or 256 Gradations.

10.15.3 Halftone Pattern

(1) Use
• To produce a solid halftone pattern.
• Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise.

I-242
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(a) Test pattern

e.g.
• SINGLE
• HYPER
• Gradation
• Black (1PC)
• Density: 255

(2) Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
• Select FEET or “HYPER.”
• Select “Gradation”, Resolution or Error diffusion if HYPER has been selected.
• Select “1-Sided”, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
• 2-Side1: The same pattern is printed on both front and back sides.
• 2-Side2: The front side is blank and the pattern is printed on the back side.
• Type the density level (0 to “255”).

10.15.4 Lattice Pattern

(1) Use
• To produce a lattice pattern.
• Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density.
• A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background.

(a) Test pattern

e.g.
• SINGLE
• FEET
• Black (1PC)
• CD Width: 5
• FD Width: 5
• Density: 255
• Normal

(2) Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
• Select “FEET” or HYPER.
• Select “Gradation”, Resolution or Error diffusion if HYPER has been selected.
• Select “1-Sided”, 2-Side1 or 2-Side2.
• 2-Side1: The same pattern is printed on both front and back sides.
• 2-Side2: The front side is blank and the pattern is printed on the back side.
• Select Gradation or Resolution. (Only select HYPER)
• Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots).
• Type the density level (0 to "255").
• Select “Normal” or Reverse.

10.15.5 Solid Pattern

(1) Use
• To produce solid patterns.
• Used for checking reproducibility of image density.

I-243
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(a) Test pattern

e.g.
• SINGLE
• HYPER
• Gradation
• Density: 255

(2) Procedure
• # of Print (“1” to 999)
• Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).
• Select FEET or “HYPER.”
• Select “Gradation”, Resolution or Error diffusion if HYPER has been selected.
• Type the density level (0 to “255”).

10.15.6 Paper Passage Test

(1) Use
• To test the printing operation in paper passage test.
• Use to check the printing operation in paper passage test from each paper source.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] → [Paper Passage Test].
3. Touch [Select Tray] and select the paper feed tray to be tested.
4. If you select “Manual” in step 2, touch [Paper Size] and select a paper size.
5. Touch [Paper Kind] and select a paper type.
6. Press the Start key to start the paper passage test.
7. Pressing the Stop key will stop operation.

10.15.7 Fax Test

• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.16 ADF

10.16.1 Original Stop Position

(1) Use
• To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes.
• When the result is Unable in the automatic adjustment of the original stop position.

I-244
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Procedure
(a) Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side / Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side
NOTE
• Before performing this adjustment, the feed zoom adjustment needs to be complete.
I.10.16.8 Feed Zoom
B

• The difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 2.0 mm
Setting range -4.0 mm to +4.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
NOTE
• In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed tray in the duplex mode and make a
copy. Check the difference in the widths of a between the chart and the second sided surface of the copy sample.

3. Check that the difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
4. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
5. Touch [ADF] → [Original Stop Position].
6. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side] or [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
7. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
• If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the + value.
• If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the - value.
8. Touch [END].
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
11. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls within the specified range.

(b) Main Scanning (Front) / Main Scanning (Back)

• The difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 2.0 mm
Setting range -4.4 mm to +4.4 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
NOTE
• In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed tray in the duplex mode and make a
copy. Check the difference in the widths of a between the chart and the second sided surface of the copy sample.

3. Check that the difference in the widths of A between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range.
4. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
5. Touch [ADF] → [Original Stop Position].
6. Touch [Main Scanning (Front)] or [Main Scanning (Back)].
7. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
• If the difference in the widths of A is greater than the specifications, enter the + value.
• If the difference in the widths of A is smaller than the specifications, enter the - value.
8. Touch [END].
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
11. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of A falls within the specified range.

10.16.2 Registration Loop Adj.

(1) Use
• To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the registration rollers.
• When an original misfeed or skew occurs.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

I-245
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

2. Touch [ADF] → [Registration Loop Adj].

3. Select either [1-Side] or [Second Side] for the adjustment.
4. Press the clear key and change the setting value using the 10-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.)
The amount of loop increases by the amount of positive (+) value and decreases by the amount of negative (-) value.
5. Touch [END].
6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

(3) Default setting

• 0

(4) Setting range

• -5 mm to + 5 mm (in 1-mm increments)

10.16.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment

(1) Use
• To automatically adjust the read position for the Sub Scanning Direction.
• To check skew feed.
• When ADF has been replaced.

(2) Procedure
(a) Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
3. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
5. Press the Start key.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
• Check and correct the skew of the document.
• Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
I.10.16.1 Original Stop Position

(b) Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
3. Touch [Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing upward).
5. Press the Start key.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
• Check and correct the skew of the document.
• Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
I.10.16.1 Original Stop Position

(c) Main Scanning (Front)

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
3. Touch [Main Scanning (Front)].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
5. Press the Start key.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
• Check and correct the skew of the document.
• Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
I.10.16.1 Original Stop Position

(d) Main Scanning (Back)

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Auto Stop Position Adjustment].
3. Touch [Main Scanning (Back)].

I-246
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (Set the chart with its blank side facing upward.).
5. Press the Start key.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
• Check and correct the skew of the document.
• Manually correct the value of [Original Stop Position].
I.10.16.1 Original Stop Position

10.16.4 Paper Passage

(1) Use
• To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes.
• Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document misfeed occurs.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Paper Passage].
3. Select a paper passage mode to be tested from [1-Sided No Detect], [1-Sided Mixed Org.], [2-Sided], or [AMS Mixed Org.].
4. Set the original in the feed tray.
5. The Start key changes from orange to blue.
6. Press the Start key. The operation starts.
NOTE
• After starting the operation by pressing the Start key, if the Start key is pressed during the operation, the operation will be
suspended. Then, if the Start key is pressed again during the suspension, the operation will be resumed.
• If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation, the test will be forced to end.
• If there is no Original set in the feed Tray, the Start key will not work.
• All Originals set in the feed Tray are passed through. Upon the completion of all Originals passed through, the Paper Through
Test ends.

10.16.5 Sensor Check

(1) Use
• To check sensors on the paper path.
• When a document misfeed occurs.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Sensor Check].
3. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like, and check the screen display.
(Paper detected: 1, No paper detected: 0)

(3) Sensor check screen

• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.

(4) Sensor check list

Operation characteristics/panel display
Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS1 Feed Open&Close Feed open/close sensor Open Close

I-247
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Operation characteristics/panel display

Symbol Panel display Part/signal name
1 0
PS2 Read Open&Shut Read open/close sensor Open Close
- Open/Close Guide under - - -
CIS
PS3 Registration Sensor Registration sensor Paper present Paper not present
(Blocked) (Unblocked)
PS4 After Separate After separate sensor Paper present Paper not present
(Unblocked) (Blocked)
PS5 Exit Sensor Exit sensor Paper present Paper not present
(Unblocked) (Blocked)
PS6 Read Roller Read roller sensor Pressure (Blocked) Retraction
(Unblocked)
PS7 Reverse Roller Reverse roller sensor Pressure (Blocked) Retraction
(Unblocked)
- Conveyance roller - - -
RS201 DF Open Original cover sensor Open Close
PS8 Reverse Regist Reverse registration sensor Paper present Paper not present
(Blocked) (Unblocked)
PS9 Before Read Before read sensor Paper present Paper not present
(Blocked) (Unblocked)
VR1 Original Width Sensor Document width detection variable resistor Analog value
PS10 Length Sensor1 Length sensor/1 Paper present Paper not present
PS11 Length Sensor2 Length sensor/2 Blocked Unblocked
PS12 Length Sensor3 Length sensor/3 Paper present Paper not present
PS203 Glass Home Pos. Glass home sensor At home Out of home
(Unblocked) (Blocked)
PS14 Original Detection Sensor Empty sensor Paper present Paper not present
PS16 Lift Up Lower Lift up lower sensor Unblocked Blocked
PS15 Lift Up Upper Lift up upper sensor Blocked Unblocked
PS19 Mixed Original 1 Consolidation/1 Paper present Paper not present
PS18 Mixed Original 2 Consolidation/2 Paper present Paper not present
PS17 Mixed Original 3 Consolidation/3 Paper present Paper not present
PS20 Original Set Original set sensor In position Out of position

10.16.6 Original Tray Width

(1) Use
• To set the values of maximum (A3 position) and minimum (B6 position) widths on the document width detection variable resistor.
• When an original misfeed occurs.
• When an original size detection error occurs.
• When the document width detection variable resistor has been replaced.
• When the EEPROM has been replaced.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Original Tray Width].
3. Widen the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to the
[1] “A3” position.

4. Touch [Max. Width].

5. Press the Start key.
6. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed.

I-248
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

7. Narrow the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to the
[1] “B6” position.

8. Touch [Min. Width].

9. Press the Start key.
10. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed.
11. Touch [END].
12. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
13. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
If the result is NG:
• Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection variable resistor, wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the
DFCB.

10.16.7 Read Pos Adj

(1) Use
• To adjust the original read position.
• When the first/second carriage, the scanner wire, the scanner assy, the original glass moving unit, ADF and/or the glass step sheet have
been replaced.

(2) Procedure
(a) Auto Adjust
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj].
3. Touch [Auto Adjust].
4. Open the ADF.
5. Place the ADF reading chart [1] so that a triangular mark may
become the original glass side (downward) and the pointed tip of
the triangle points toward the black sheet on the left side.
6. Press the Start key.
NOTE
• Be sure that the ADF reading chart is in position.
• Keep the automatic document feeder open while making
the adjustment.

[1]

7. Make sure that the result is OK.

8. Touch [END].
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
If the result is Unable:
• Check that the chart is in the correct place.
• Make the manual adjustment on the [Read Pos Adj] screen.
I.10.16.7.(2).(b) Read Pos Adj

I-249
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(b) Read Pos Adj

B

• The difference in the widths of B between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -64 mm to +64 mm (1 step: 1 mm)
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
3. B width on the chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the
specifications shown below.
4. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
5. Touch [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj].
6. Touch [Read Pos Adj].
7. Enter the value using the [+] / [-] keys.
• If the difference in the widths of B is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
• If the difference in the widths of B is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
8. Touch [END].
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
11. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of B falls within the specified range.

10.16.8 Feed Zoom

(1) Use
• To adjust the feed zoom in the front side feeding direction on the ADF.
• When ADF has been replaced.

(2) Procedure
(a) Auto Adjust
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Feed Zoom].
3. Touch [Auto Adjust].
4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
5. Press the Start key.
6. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

(b) Orig. Feed Zoom Ad

c
• The difference in the widths of C between the chart and the copy sample should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -2.00% to +2.00% (1 step: 0.1%)
1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
2. Make a full size copy of the chart.
3. C width on the chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of C width satisfies the
specifications shown below.
4. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
5. Touch [ADF] → [FD-Mag. Adj. (F)].
6. Touch [Orig. Feed Zoom Ad].
7. Enter the value using the [+] / [-] keys.
• If the difference in the widths of C is greater than the specifications, enter the - value.
• If the difference in the widths of C is smaller than the specifications, enter the + value.
8. Touch [END].
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
11. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of C falls within the specified range.

I-250
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.16.9 Scanning Light Adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust the scanning light of ADF.
• When the original glass moving unit has been replaced.
• Used for adjusting the difference in the scanning lights between scanning from the original glass and scanning from the ADF original
glass.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Scanning Light Adjustment].
3. Select a color by pressing [Red], [Green], or [Blue].
4. Press the value using the [+] / [-] key.
NOTE
• It is recommended that the scanning light adjustment should be made by the same steps for all the three colors of red,
green, and blue.

5. Touch [END].
6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

(3) Setting range

• -4 to + 4 (1 step)

10.16.10 Mixed original Size adjustment

(1) Use
• To adjust paper length detection accuracy used during paper feed in ADF mixed original mode.
• To set the threshold for each size detection based on the length detected when feeding standard sizes (large size).

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [ADF] → [Mixed original Size adjustment].
3. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).
4. Press the Start key.
5. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
6. Touch [END].
7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

10.17 FAX
• For details, see FK-502 Service Manual.

10.18 Finisher

10.18.1 FS-FN adjustment - Center Staple Position

(1) Use
• Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function.

I-251
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Setting range

A

• Width A should fall within the following range.

Specifications 0 ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• After [Half-Fold Position] adjustment, make this [Center Staple Position] adjustment.
1. Place five sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a set of copy in the saddle stitching mode.
3. Check the amount of horizontal deviation (width A) between the staple and the half fold positions on the set of copy.
4. If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
5. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
6. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Center Staple Position].
7. Touch the paper size where staple position is adjusted.
8. Look at the copy and adjust the staple position with the [+] / [-] key.

9. Press the Reset key.

10. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
11. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
12. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.

10.18.2 FS-FN adjustment - Half-Fold Position

(1) Use
• Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing.

(2) Setting range

Exit direction
• Width A should fall within the following range.
Specifications 0 ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a copy in the folding mode.
3. Fold the copies along the crease.
4. Measure the amount of width A.
5. If width A is out of the specified range, make the following adjustment.
6. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
7. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Half-Fold Position].
8. Touch the paper size where half-fold position is adjusted.
9. Look at the copy and adjust the half-fold position with the [+]/[-] key.

I-252
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10. Press the Reset key.

11. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
12. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
13. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width A.

10.18.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Centering Fine Adj

(1) Use
• Adjusts the vertical position of the punch holes.

(2) Setting range

A A2
A
A A A1
A
A A2
• Length A should fall within the following range.
Specifications 2-4 hole • 80 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.)
• 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
2-3 hole (2 hole) • 70 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.)
• 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
2-3 hole (3 hole) • 108 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.)
• 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
SWE4 hole • A1=70 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.)
• 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
• A2=21 ± 0.5 mm (It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.)
• 1/2 of the vertical length A ± 1.0 mm
Setting range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that 1/2 of the length A is within the following standard range.
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch Centering Fine Adj].
5. Touch the paper size where punch centering is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch centering with the [+] / [-] key.
• To move the hole position upward: Enter the value of [+]
• To move the hole position downward: Enter the value of [-]

7. Press the Reset key.

8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
10. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of length A.

10.18.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Edge Adj

(1) Use
• To change the horizontal position of the punch holes.

I-253
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Setting range

B B B

• Width B should fall within the following range.

Specification <For PK-516> 9.5 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm (SWE4 hole)
<For PK-517> 9.5 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-3 hole), 11.0 mm ± 1.0 mm (2-4 hole), 10.5 mm ± 1.0 mm
(SWE4 hole)
Setting range <For PK-516> -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)
<For PK-517> -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure (For PK-516)

1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range.
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch Edge Adj].
5. Touch the paper size where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+] / [-] key.
• To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width a smaller: Enter the value of [-]

7. Press the Reset key.

8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
10. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width B.

(4) Procedure (For PK-517)

1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range.
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch Edge Adj].
5. Touch the paper type where punch horizontal position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the punch horizontal position with the [+] / [-] key.
• To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width a smaller: Enter the value of [-]

7. Press the Reset key.

8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
10. Make another set of copy sample and check the amount of width B.

10.18.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch F. Sensor Intensity Adj.

(1) Use
• Adjusts the sensitivity (light intensity) of the PK punch front sensor of the punch kit.
• This adjustment is made at the time of setup.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch F. Sensor Intensity Adj.].

I-254
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

3. Touch Start key.

4. Confirm that the result is OK.
NOTE
• When NG appears, check whether the punch kit is properly installed.

5. Press the Reset key.

6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

10.18.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-fold)

(1) Use
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the sub-scanning direction when ZU is in use.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

(2) Setting range

A
A
A A
A
A

• Width A should fall within the following range.

Specifications 2-4 hole 80 ± 0.5, Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
2-3 hole (2 hole) 70 ± 0.5, Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
2-3 hole (3 hole) 108 ± 0.5, Top and bottom A dimension 1/2 ± 1
Setting range -5.0 to +5.0 mm (1step: 0.1 mm)
NOTE
• It is possible to adjust the A dimension of half of the top and bottom by ± 0.5 mm from the standard value.
• It is not possible to adjust the A value of the distance between holes.

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width A is within the following range.
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch vertical position (Z-fold)].
5. Select [ALL] and make the setting using [+] or [-].
• To make width A greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width A smaller: Enter the value of [-]
NOTE
• The adjustment setting value used for each paper size is the value set with [ALL] plus the value set for each paper size.

6. Touch [OK] twice.

7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
9. Make copies in the punch mode again and check that the punch hole positions have been adjusted properly.

10.18.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position (Z-fold)

(1) Use
• To adjust the position of the punch hole in the main scanning direction when ZU is in use.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

(2) Setting range

B B B

• Width B should fall within the following range.

Specifications 12.0 mm
Setting range -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range.

I-255
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch horizontal position (Z-fold)].
5. Make the setting using [+] or [-].
• To make width B greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width B smaller: Enter the value of [-]
6. Touch [OK] twice.
7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
9. Make copies in the punch mode again and check that the punch hole positions have been adjusted properly.

10.18.8 FS-FN adjustment - Punch regist adj. (Z-fold)

(1) Use
• Adjust the size of the punch resist loop that is applied when ZU operates.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch regist adj. (Z-fold)].
3. Set the correction value using the [+] / [-] keys.
• Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
• Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
4. Touch [OK] twice.
5. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
6. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
7. Make copies in the punch mode again and check that the punch hole positions have been adjusted properly.

(3) Setting range

• -16.0 mm to +16.0 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)

10.18.9 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Registration Loop Adj

(1) Use
• Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body.
• To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch Registration Loop Adj].
3. Touch the paper size where punch regist loop size is adjusted.
4. Set the correction value using the [+] / [-] keys.
• Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
• Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
5. Touch [OK] twice.
6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

(3) Setting range

• -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)

10.18.10 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Resist Loop Size (PI)

(1) Use
• To adjust the loop size used for punch registration in the post inserter upper and lower trays.
• To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch Regist Loop Size (PI)].
3. Touch [Upper] or [Lower].
4. Select a type of paper where adjustment is made.
5. Set the correction value using the [+] / [-] keys.
• Misaligned punched holes: Enter the value of [+]
• Wrinkled paper: Enter the value of [-]
6. Touch [OK] twice.
7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

(3) Setting range

• -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)

I-256
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.18.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position/2nd Z-Fold Position

(1) Use
• To adjust the positions of the 1st Z-fold and 2nd Z-fold for the Z-fold mode.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606.

(2) Setting range

[1]
[2]
a

[4] [3]

[1] Length of the first fold [2] Position of the first fold
[3] Length of the second fold [4] Position of the second fold
• Width a should fall within the following range.
Specifications 11 x 17 Length of 1st fold: 108 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 215 mm
A3 Length of 1st fold: 105 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 209 mm
B4 Length of 1st fold: 91 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 181 mm
8.5 x 14 Length L: Less than 241.7 mm
8K Length of 1st fold: 98 mm, Length a: 4.0 ± 2.0 mm, Length L: Less than 194 mm
Setting range -12.8 mm to +12.7 mm (Step = 0.1 mm)
NOTE
• Length of the 1st fold is for standard value.
• The adjustable range for B4 size is only between -2.0 mm and +2.0 mm.
• 8.5 x 14 is available for only an half fold.

(3) Procedure
1. Make copies in the Z-fold mode.
2. Make an adjustment so that the width a is within the following range.
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [1st Z-Fold Position] or [2nd Z-Fold Position].
5. Select [ALL] and make the setting using [+] or [-].
• To increase the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a negative value with [-] key.
• To decrease the length of the 1st fold (2nd fold), enter a positive value with [+] key.
NOTE
• The adjustment setting value used for each paper size is the value set with [ALL] plus the value set for each paper size.

6. Touch [OK] twice.

7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
9. Make copies in the Z-fold mode and check for possible deviation from the specified 1st and 2nd Z-fold positions.

10.18.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position

(1) Use
• Use this adjustment to adjust tri-fold position in tri-fold printing.

(2) Setting range

c
a

b
• Width (a, b, c) should fall within the following range.
Specifications a 96 mm ± 1 mm (A4S), 90.4 mm ± 1 mm (8.5 x 11S), 89 mm ± 1 mm (16KS)

I-257
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

b 101 mm ± 2 mm (A4S), 95.4 mm ± 2 mm (8.5 x 11S), 94 mm ± 2 mm (16KS)

c Not specified
Setting range -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Make a copy sample in the tri-folding mode.
2. Check that the tri-fold positions (a, b, c) on the copy are within the specified range.
3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
4. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Tri-Fold Position].
5. Touch the paper size where tri-fold position is adjusted.
6. Look at the copy and adjust the tri-fold position with the [+] / [-] key.
• To make width (a) greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width (a) smaller: Enter the value of [-]
7. Press the Reset key.
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
10. Make a copy again and check the 1st fold width “a”.
NOTE
• If the 2nd fold width b is not within the specified range, perform mechanical adjustment.
I.20.1.1 Second fold position adjustment

10.18.13 FS-FN adjustment - Center-Staple Pitch Adj.

(1) Use
• Adjust the interval between two staples in saddle stitching.

(2) Setting range

A
A

• Width A should fall within the following range.

Specifications • Paper width of less than 245.3 mm: 42.5 mm ± 3.0 mm
• Paper width of 245.3 mm or more: 60.0 mm ± 3.0 mm
Setting range -38.0 mm to +3.0 mm (1 step: 1 mm)

(3) Procedure
1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF.
2. Make a set of copy in the two position saddle stitching mode.
3. Measure the interval (A) between the two staples on the copy.
4. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
5. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Center-staple pitch adjustment].
6. Touch the paper size where saddle stitching pitch is adjusted.
7. Set and adjust a value with the [+] / [-] key.
• To make width (A) greater: Enter the value of [+]
• To make width (A) smaller: Enter the value of [-]
8. Press the Reset key.
9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
11. Make a copy again and check the interval between the staples.

10.18.14 FS-FN adjustment - PI Size Detection

(1) Use
• To specify paper sizes that the post inserter detects.
• To set a paper size with which size detection is made when a paper having a similar size is placed on the feeder.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [PI Size Detection].
3. Touch [Mode 1].
4. Select a desired paper size with which size detection is made.
5. Make the same setting in [Mode 2] to [Mode 6].
6. Touch [OK] twice.
7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

I-258
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.18.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment

(1) Use
• To make automatic post inserter size detection adjustments separately in each of the upper and lower trays.
• Make this adjustment at the time of setup or when the post inserter cannot make proper size detection.
• Make this adjustment after performing PI displacement adjustment.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Post Inserter Adjustment].
3. Touch [Upper Tray].
4. Place A4S paper on the upper tray and touch [A4 ].
5. Touch Start key.
6. Confirm that the result is OK.
7. Touch [Lower Tray].
8. Place A4S paper on the lower tray and touch [A4 ].
9. Touch Start key.
10. Confirm that the result is OK.
11. Touch [OK] twice.
12. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
13. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

10.18.16 FS-FN adjustment - Finisher Components Test Mode

(1) Use
• Use this adjustment to check finisher’s operation.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Finisher Components Test Mode].
3. Touch [1], [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6] to select a mode.
4. Press the Start key to start finisher operation.
5. Press the Stop key to stop ongoing finisher operation.

(3) Finisher components list (FS-526/SD-508/PK-516/PI-505/ZU-606)

Mode
Finisher Components Test Mode 1 M1 (1st Transport M) Forward Rotation 667 mm/s Linear Speed
M1 (1st Transport M) Backward Rotation 667 mm/s Linear Speed
M2 (2nd Transport M) Forward Rotation 667 mm/s Linear Speed
M2 (2nd Transport M) Backward Rotation 667 mm/s Linear Speed
M5/Tray Up/Down M: Move to HP
M5/Tray Up/Down M: Move to Lower Limit
M5/Tray Up/Down M: Small No. of Paper Tray Up/Down in Staple Mode
M17/Stacker Accessory Plate Movement M: HP Search
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Move to HP
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Move to Standby Position
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Alignment Operation
M11 & 12/Alignment Plate F/R M: Return to Standby Position
M4/Output Roller Drive M: Forward Rotation 667 mm/s Linear Speed
M34/Center Staple & Fold Output M: Fwd Rotation 50 mm/s Linear Sp.
Finisher Components Test Mode 2 M22/Center Staple & Fold Leading Edge Stopper M: HP Search
M6/Paper Output-Driven Roller Position Movement M: HP Search
M6/Paper Output-Driven Roller Position Movement M: Large Opening
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Back at 2 Positions
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Front at 2 Positions
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Front at 1 Position
M13/2-Staple Stapler Movement M: Initial
2-Staple Stapler Unit: Implement Staple Operation
M23/Center Staple & Fold Stapler Movement M: Initial
Center Staple & Fold Stapler Unit: Implement Staple Operation
M23/Center Staple & Fold Stapler Move. M: A3 Paper Binding Pos.
M27/Cent. Staple&Fold Center Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search
M10/Transport to Stacker Inlet M: 667 mm/s
M20 & M21/Center Staple & Fold Alignment M F/R: HP Search
Finisher Components Test Mode 3 M19/rear stopper move M:HP
M19/rear stopper move M:standby position 1

I-259
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Mode
M19/rear stopper move M:standby position 2
M32/Half-Fold Knife Drive M: Implement 1-Cycle
M33/Half-Fold Transport M: High-Speed Forward Rotation
SD2: Bypass Path Switching Gate Solenoid: ON
SD5: DM Gate Solenoid: ON
SD1: Center Staple & Fold Path Switching Gate Solenoid: ON
SD4: Switchback Switching Gate Solenoid: ON
SD6/Leading Edge Nip Solenoid: ON
M3 (Bypass Trans./Sub Tray Paper Output M) Fwd Rotation 667 mm/s
M15: Trail Edge Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search
M18: Rewind Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search
M16: Rewind Paddle Rotation M: Forward Rotation (Stack)
Finisher Components Test Mode 4 M30/Cent. Staple&Fold Center Paddle Rotation M: Fwd Rota. (Stack)
M29/Cent. Staple&Fold Trail Edge Paddle Rotation M: Fwd Rotation
M302/Oscillating Drive M: HP Search
M302/Oscillating Drive M: Edge Sensor Control
M301/Punch Drive M: HP Search
M301/Punch Drive M: Execute Punch (2-Hole)
M301/Punch Drive M: Execute Punch (3- or 4-Hole)
M201 transportation M F rotation (1000 mm/s)
RU Fan Motor Drive
Two punch 2/3(4) change motor hole positional movement
Punch 2/3(4) change motor 3(4) hole position movement
Resist motor/transportation motor drive beginning
Punch Bypass Solenoid Turning ON (Punch bypass solenoid turning ON)
Punch clutch ON
Finisher Components Test Mode 5 Punch rubbish transportation motor transportation beginning
Fan motor drive beginning
Punch drive motor punch operation execution
Punch movement motor HP search
SD3: subtray and 3rd tray switch gate solenoid: on
SD10/3rd tray switch gate solenoid: on
SD401/3rd tray switch gate solenoid: on
M203 (Post Inserter Transport.) 667 mm/s Line Velocity
MC201 (upper paper feed clutch)
MC202 (lower paper feed clutch) ON
M201 (Upper rise descent) Down (HP Search)
M201 (Upper rise descent) Up
M202 (Lower rise descent) Down (HP Search)
M202 (Lower rise descent) Up
Finisher Components Test Mode 6 SD202 (upper row move solenoid) ON
SD203 (the lower move solenoid) ON
MC203 (resist transportation clutch) ON
One Z fold stopper motor HP Search
Two Z fold stopper motor HP Search
Z-Fold Gate Solenoid ON

(4) Finisher components list (FS-527/SD-509)

NOTE
• “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and "Tray 2" is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel.
Mode
Finisher Components Test Mode 1 Stapler Movement
Alignment Moving
Tray up/down operation
FD Stopper Operation
Punch Drive Standard Holes
Punch Drive MC (2 Holed)
Tray 1 Exit Roller open/Close

I-260
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

Mode
Accommodation Roller Open/Close
2-Side Path Switch
Conveyance Drive
Tray 2 Path Switch
Upper/Lower Path Switch
Paddle Operation
Shift Operation
Finisher Components Test Mode 2 Saddle Stapler Operation
Center fold knife operation
Center staple Transport Motor Drive
Edge Stopper Operation
Center Staple Paddle Operation

10.18.17 FS-FN adjustment - Load Data

(1) Use
• Register or call values adjusted for the finisher when it was installed at the customer site.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Load Data].
3. Select a mode from the following.
• Present adjusted value enrollment: Registers values adjusted for the finisher at the installation.
• Enrollment lingua set point call: Calls values adjusted for the finisher at the installation.
4. Press the Start key.
5. Check that [OK] is displayed.
6. Touch [END].
7. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
8. Turn OFF the main power switch. Then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main power switch.

10.18.18 FS-FN adjustment - Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj.

(1) Use
• To fine adjust the horizontal width of the aligning plate.
• Use this feature to fine adjust the aligning plate that aligns ejected paper.

(2) Default setting

• 0.0 mm

(3) Setting range

• -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm)

(4) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Paper Alignment Guides W. Adj.].
3. Select a mode from the following.
4. Set and adjust a value with the [+] / [-] key.
5. Press the Reset key.
6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

10.18.19 FS-FN adjustment - Punch unit edge detection

(1) Use
• To adjust sensitivity (intensity) of the paper size detect board (PSDTB) of the punch unit of ZU.
• Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [FS-FN adjustment] → [Punch unit edge detection].
3. Press the Start key.
4. Check that [OK] is displayed.
NOTE
• If the [NG] appears, check the install condition again.

5. Touch [OK] twice.

6. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
7. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.

I-261
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

10.18.20 Max Staple Limit Setting

(1) Use
• When FS-526 is installed, specify the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled together.
• To change the maximum that can be stapled together.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [Max Staple Limit Setting].
3. Enter a desirable maximum number with the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [END].
5. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
6. Turn OFF the main power switch. Then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main power switch.
NOTE
• If mixed originals includes one or more large size ones (A3/11 x 17 or more), the maximum that can be stapled together is
subject to the setting of large size staple limit restriction.
• If large size staple limit restriction is set to [-20 pieces] and the maximum number of sheets to be stapled together less 20 is 2 or
less, then the restricted number of sheets as the maximum is 2.
• When FS-526 is installed and the staples for 50 sheets are detected, 50 sheets becomes the upper limit even though the setting
of the upper limit up to which sheets can be stapled exceeds 50 sheets.

(3) Default setting

• “100 Piece”. Large size staple limit restriction: “Do not do.”

(4) Setting range

• [2 to 100]. Large size staple limit restriction: [-20 pieces] or [Do not do.]

10.18.21 Punch Option Setting

(1) Use
• Specifies punch settings depending on the optional punch kit attached to the finisher.
• An individual punch setting needs to be made according to the type of the punch option.
• This setting is necessary when ZU-606 is installed.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [Punch Option Setting].
3. Touch [PK-516] or [PK-517].
4. Touch [2-Holes/3-Holes], [2-Holes/4-Holes], [EU4 holes] or [SWE4 holes].
5. When ZU-606 is installed, touch [ZU-606].
6. Touch [decision].
7. Touch [END].
8. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
9. Turn OFF the main power switch. Then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main power switch.

10.18.22 Max. # of Folded Sheets Setting

(1) Use
• Imposes restriction on the number of sheets to be folded in each of different folding modes.
• This function is available only when SD-508 or ZU-606 is installed.
• To change the maximum number of sheets to be folded in each of different folding modes.

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Finisher] → [Max. # of Folded Sheets Setting].
3. Select a folding mode where the maximum is restricted and enter a desirable maximum number with the 10-key pad.
4. Touch [END].
5. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen.
6. Turn OFF the main power switch. then, wait for 10 sec. or more and turn ON the main power switch.

(3) Default setting

• Center Fold: 3 Piece
• Center Staple: 20 Piece
• three fold: 1 Piece
• z fold/staple using together: 10 Piece
• z fold: 50 Piece

(4) Setting range

Center Fold
• 1 to “3 Piece”
Center Staple
• 2 to “20 Piece”
three fold
• “1” to 3 Piece

I-262
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

z fold/staple using together

• 2 to “10 Piece”
z fold
• “50 pieces”
• 40 pieces
• 30 pieces
• 20 pieces

10.19 Internet ISW

• By using this setting, the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading.
• For details for upgrading the firmware, refer to “J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.”

10.19.1 Internet ISW Set

(1) Use
• To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW.
• To use when upgrading the firmware by Internet ISW.
• Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to “ON”.
NOTE
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, this setting will automatically be set to “OFF” and cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

10.19.2 HTTP Setting

• It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”.

(1) Data Input Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP protocol.
• To use when accessing the server using the HTTP protocol.
• Setting on the proxy server will be valid when this setting is “ON”.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(2) Connect Proxy

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to connect via proxy server when accessing the server.

I-263
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

• To use when accessing the server via proxy server.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(3) Proxy Server

(a) Use
• To set the address and the port number for the proxy server.
• To use when accessing the server via proxy server.

(b) Procedure
Server Address
• Enter an address using IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format.
Port Number
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(c) Default setting (Port Number)

• 80

(4) Proxy Authentication

(a) Use
• To set the login name or password when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server.
• To use when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server.

(b) Default setting (Authentication)

• OFF

(c) Setting item (Authentication)

• ON
• “OFF”

(d) Procedure
Log-in Name
• Enter the login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
Password
• Enter the password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

(5) Connection Time-Out

(a) Use
• To set the time for the timeout for accessing the server.

(b) Default setting

• 60 sec

(c) Setting range

• 30 to 300 sec.

10.19.3 FTP Setting

• It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”.

(1) Data Input Setting

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to enable downloading using FTP protocol.
• To use when accessing the server with FTP protocol.
• Setting this to “ON” will enable the proxy server setting.

(b) Default setting

• ON

(c) Setting item

• “ON”
• OFF

I-264
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

(2) Connect Proxy

(a) Use
• To set whether or not to access the server via proxy server.

(b) Default setting

• OFF

(c) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(3) Proxy Server

(a) Use
• To set the address and the port No. of the proxy server.

(b) Procedure
Server Address
• Enter an address using IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format.
Port Number
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

(4) Connection Setting

(a) Use
• To set the port No. and the time for timeout when accessing the FTP server, and also to set whether or not to enable PASV mode.
• To use when accessing the FTP server.
• To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) mode (FTP server side will inform the connection port before connecting).

(b) Procedure
Port Number
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
Connection Time Out
• Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min.) using the 10-key pad.

(c) Default setting (PASV Mode)

• OFF

(d) Setting item (PASV Mode)

• ON
• “OFF”

10.19.4 Forwarding Access Setting

(1) User ID
(a) Use
• To register the user ID for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored.

(b) Procedure
1. Select [User ID].
2. Enter the user ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

(2) Password
(a) Use
• To register the password for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored.

(b) Procedure
1. Select [Password].
2. Enter the password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

(3) URL
(a) Use
• To register the address and directory of the program server where the firmware is to be stored in URL.

(b) Procedure
1. Select [URL].
2. Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
NOTE
• Enter the URL which format suits the protocol to be used.

I-265
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. SERVICE MODE

When connecting to http http:// (Host name or IP address)/ directory name or https:// (Host name or IP address)/directory
name.
When connecting to ftp ftp:// (Host name or IP address) / directory name.

(4) FileName
(a) Use
• To register the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded.

(b) Procedure
1. Select [FileName].
2. Enter the file name (up to 63 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

10.19.5 Download
(1) Use
• Access the program server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the firmware.
• To use when updating the firmware via network.

(2) Procedure
1. Select [Download].
2. Touch [ISW Start] to start downloading the firmware.
3. The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting and transferring data.
NOTE
• When it failed to connect to the program server, or failed to download, the error code and the message will be displayed.
Check the cause of the error by the error code, and follow the message for resetting.
Refer to “K.5.1 Error code list for the Internet ISW” for the error codes.

4. When the firmware is normally upgraded, the main body will automatically be restarted to complete the Internet ISW.

I-266
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 11. ENHANCED SECURITY

11. ENHANCED SECURITY

11.1 List of Enhanced Security
Enhanced Security Ref. Page
CE Password I.11.3.1 CE Password
Administrator Password I.11.3.2 Administrator Password
Administrator Feature Level I.11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level
CE Authentication I.11.3.4 CE Authentication
Life Stop Setting I.11.3.5 Life Stop Setting
NVRAM Data Backup I.11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup
Operation Ban release time I.11.3.7 Operation Ban release time
Administrator unlocking I.11.3.8 Administrator unlocking
Engine FW DipSW I.11.3.9 Engine FW DipSW

11.2 Starting/Exiting
11.2.1 Starting procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
• Stop → 0 → Clear
3. Enhanced Security menu will appear.

11.2.2 Exiting procedure

1. Touch the [Exit].

11.3 Enhanced Security

11.3.1 CE Password
(1) Use
• To set and change the CE password.

(2) Default setting

• 92729272

(3) Procedure
• Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
1. Current Password: Enter the currently using CE password.
2. New Password: Enter the new CE password.
3. Re-Input Password: Enter the new CE password again.
NOTE
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with the same letters as well as the password which
is same as the previous one cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details]
• NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call responsible person of KM.

11.3.2 Administrator Password

(1) Use
• To set and change the administrator password.
• Use this function when the administrator forget the administrator password because a new password can be set without entering the
current administrator password with this.

I-267
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 11. ENHANCED SECURITY

(2) Default setting

• 12345678

(3) Procedure
• Enter the administrator password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
1. New Password: Enter the new administrator password.
2. Re-Input Password: Enter the new administrator password again.
NOTE
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with the same letters, the password which is same
as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details]

11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level

(1) Use
• To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode.
• Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode.
• The modes allowed for the administrator to use in each setting are as follows.
Administrator settings function Level 1 Level 2
[System Setting] → [Expert Printer Adjustment Erase Leading Edge - ○
Setting] Scanner Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment - ○
Centering - ○
Horizontal Adjustment - ○
Vertical Adjustment - ○
ADF Adjustment Centering - ○
Original Stop Position - ○
Centering Auto Adjustment - ○
Auto Adj. of Stop Position - ○
User paper Settings - ○
[Standard Size Setting] Original Glass Original Size Detect - ○
Foolscap Size Setting - ○

(2) Default setting

• Prohibit

(3) Setting item

• Level1
• Level2
• “Prohibit”

11.3.4 CE Authentication
• It will not be displayed when the following settings are set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules].

(1) Use
• To determine whether or not to authenticate CE password as entering Service Mode.
• Use when authenticating CE password as entering Service Mode.
NOTE
• For setting the following setting to “ON”, set the CE Authentication to "ON" and change the initial CE password beforehand.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules].

(2) Default setting

• OFF

(3) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

11.3.5 Life Stop Setting

(1) Use
• To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the drum unit and developing unit reaches its service life.

(2) Default setting

• Stop

(3) Setting item

• “Stop”

I-268
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 11. ENHANCED SECURITY

• No Stop

11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup

(1) Use
• To backup NVRAM data in the main body to the flash memory.
• To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unexpectedly.
• To backup data manually. It usually makes backup every hour automatically.
• Backup data can be restored by following the specified procedure when the trouble (CD3XX) occurred.
• Refer to “TROUBLESHOOTING” for details on restoration procedure.
K.3.16.15 CD3##

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [NVRAM Data Backup].
2. Touch [Start] to start making a backup.
3. Check the message [Backup is completed.], and turn main power switch OFF. Wait for ten seconds or more and turn main power switch
back ON.

11.3.7 Operation Ban release time

(1) Use
• To set the time that elapses before the machine releases an access lock that is activated after the CE password authentication.
• To set the period of time that elapses before the machine releases the access lock, which aims to prevent the unintentional release of the
access lock.
• After the CE password authentication, if the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 →
3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter Count] → [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting, the access lock is released.

(2) Default setting

• 1

(3) Setting range

• “1” to 60 (minutes)
NOTE
• When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode], the
period of time that can be set in this setting is 5 minutes or more.

11.3.8 Administrator unlocking

(1) Use
• To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authentication.
• To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password authentication fails and the access lock is activated.
• When the main power switch is turned OFF and ON or the period of time set in the Release Time Settings elapses, the machine releases
the access lock that is activated after the administrator password authentication.
In addition to these operations, this setting provides another way to release the access lock.

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Administrator unlocking].
2. Touch [unlocking] to release an access lock.
3. When [OK] is displayed, touch [OK].

11.3.9 Engine FW DipSW

• It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.59 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]

(1) Use
• To make printer engine settings.
• The following table shows DIP switches that can be set in this machine.
Switch No. Function Ref. page
1 Not used -
2 Not used -
3 New Release Disable mode I.11.3.9.(3) Details of Each Function-New Release Disable mode
Fusing unit alternative temperature I.11.3.9.(4) Details of Each Function-Fusing unit alternative temperature control
4
control
5 to 7 Not used -
8 Tray 1/2 paper wrinkle prevention
I.11.3.9.(5) Details of Each Function- Tray 1/2 paper wrinkle prevention mode
9 mode
10 to 28 Not used -

(2) Procedure
1. Touch [Engine FW DipSW].

I-269
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 11. ENHANCED SECURITY

2. Touch the key that corresponds to the switch No. of the function to be set and check the key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
3. Touch [OK].

(3) Details of Each Function-New Release Disable mode

• To enable a unit that is temporarily used for troubleshooting or other purposes to be used again as a new unit in another machine, New
Release Disable mode is provided.
• Applicable units are the following that have the new unit detection feature.
Drum unit, Developing unit

(a) Procedure
1. Open the lower front door.
2. Touch [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Engine FW DipSW].
3. Touch [3] and check the key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
4. Touch [OK].
5. Close the lower front door.
By closing the lower front door, the New Release Disable mode takes effect.
NOTE
Notes when using the New Release Disable mode
<1> Before starting the mode
• Output the list in [Service Mode] → [List Output] to check the information on the wear-out rate of each unit and keep the Dmax
density adjustment value.
Replace units that have reached their life or that are near life with new ones, and perform New Release.
<2> During the New Release Disable mode
• The New Release Disable mode is subject to the condition that the New Release Disable mode should not be used for a long
period, i.e. duration of printing only several tens of sheets. Units used in the New Release Disable mode for a long time
cannot be guaranteed as new ones.
• If a unit (developing unit) which has reached its life or for which a accumulated rotation time excess warning has been issued
are replaced with a new one in the New Release Disable mode, the new unit life is judged as normal and the accumulated
rotation time excess warning is reset.
• In the New Release Disable mode, the drum unit life counter is not reset and it continues to count in a normal manner. If the
counter reading becomes close to the value at which an accumulated rotation time excess warning is issued or becomes
close to the end of life value, the accumulated rotation time excess warning or the end of life warning can be issued in the
New Release Disable mode.
(If the drum unit counter should reach the end of life value while temporarily using a new drum unit in the New Release
Disable mode, turn OFF the New Release Disable mode, open and close the lower front door (or turn the main power switch
and sub power switch OFF and ON), and perform New Release in a normal manner. In this case, the previous drum unit/K,
which has been temporarily removed, cannot be used again.)
• After activating the New Release Disable mode in [Engine FW DipSW], do not turn OFF and ON the main power switch and
sub power switch or do not let the machine go into the sleep mode until the work in the New Release mode is completed.
(In case that the main power switch is turned OFF or the machine goes into the sleep mode, be sure to open the lower front
door and turn the main power switch ON or activate the machine from the sleep mode. Then turn ON the New Release Disable
mode and close the lower front door.)
<3> After finishing work in New Release Disable mode
• When continuing to use the new unit used in the New Release Disable mode in the same machine, turn OFF the new Release
Disable mode and open and close the lower front door (or turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch) to
perform New Release.
• To reinstall the previous unit used in the machine, open the lower front door, turn OFF the New Release Disable mode, replace
the new unit with the previous unit, and close the lower front door (or turn the main power switch and sub power switch OFF
and ON).
In this case, perform Initialize + Image Stabilization, Gradation Adjustment, and input of the previous Dmax density
adjustment value in service mode. If these adjustments are not performed, gradation reproducibility cannot be guaranteed.
• After temporarily using a new drum unit in the New Release Disable mode, before reinstalling the previous drum unit, be sure
to check the reading of the drum unit life counter in [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] to learn that New Release is not
performed on the new drum unit, i.e. the counter value have not decreased.
There is no way to judge whether New Release is performed on the new drum unit or not from the appearance of the unit.
Checking the counter reading is necessary to avoid bringing back the drum unit on which New Release is performed,
assuming that the drum unit remains new.

(4) Details of Each Function-Fusing unit alternative temperature control

• Condensation and dirt on the lens of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 disable accurate temperature detection. To prevent this, this
machine provides a control system that detects condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor/1.
• When condensation is detected on the heating roller temperature sensor/1, the heating roller temperature control depends on the
temperature detected by the heating roller thermistor/1 instead of the heating roller temperature sensor/1. (Alternative temperature
control)
• When a print job is sent during the alternative temperature control, temperature control depends on this setting.
• OFF: Prohibits print during alternative temperature control
• ON: Allows print during alternative temperature control
• During alternative temperature control, printing productivity is reduced by 50 %.

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Engine FW DipSW].
2. Touch [4] and check the key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
3. Touch [OK].

I-270
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 11. ENHANCED SECURITY

(5) Details of Each Function- Tray 1/2 paper wrinkle prevention mode
• Function: Prevents paper wrinkle occurring from twist in the paper loop formed during registration control of paper of a special size* fed
from tray 1 or tray 2.
• *: Plain paper having an FD length of 298 mm or more

• Conditions: When all of the following conditions are met, the timing at which the vertical transport roller is activated is corrected to thereby
correct the loop length of the paper.
Conditions for performing the paper wrinkle prevention mode
Paper sorce Tray 1, tray 2
Type of paper Plain paper (processing speed is 310, 288, 264, 240, or 216 mm/s)
Size of paper Paper that can be fed from tray 1 or tray 2 and that has an FD length of 298 mm or more

• Operation: When the registration roller is started, a time delay is introduced to the timing at which the upstream roller* is started relative to
the timing at which the registration roller is started, thereby decreasing the length of the loop in the paper.
• *: Tray 1 vertical transport roller for paper fed from tray 1
• Tray 1 vertical transport roller and tray 2 vertical transport roller for paper fed from tray 2
Details of settings for paper wrinkle prevention mode
Setting Switch No. Setting Amount of delay Paper loop length
Setting 0 8 OFF - -
(default value) 9 OFF
Setting 1 8 OFF Small Long
9 ON
Setting 2 8 ON Medium Medium
9 OFF
Setting 3 8 ON Large Short
9 ON

(a) Procedure
1. Touch [Service Mode] -> [Enhanced Security] -> [Engine FW DipSW].
2. Touch [8] or/and [9] and check the key is highlighted (ON state) in reverse video.
3. Touch [OK].

I-271
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

12. BILLING SETTING

Billing setting
• When using i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2/105, license management is done with the following procedures.
[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [License Management]
• [License Management] can set Activation/Deactivation of each i-Option functions, Repair/Initialize of functions for troubleshooting, or etc.

12.1 List of billing setting

Billing Setting Ref. Page
Counter Setting I.12.3.1 Counter Setting
Management Function Choice I.12.3.2 Management Function Choice
Coverage Rate Clear I.12.3.10 Coverage Rate Clear
License Management *1 Activation *1 I.12.3.11 License management-Activation
Deactivation *1 I.12.3.12 License management-Deactivation
Repair *1, 2 I.12.3.13 License management-Repair
Initialize *1 I.12.3.14 License management-Initialize
Request Code *1 I.12.3.15 License management-Request Code
List *1 I.12.3.16 License management-List
Function list *1 I.12.3.17 License management-Function List
OpenAPI Authentication Restriction Code I.12.3.18.(1) Restriction Code
Management Region Code I.12.3.18.(2) Region Code
• *1: It is displayed only when the expanded memory furnished with the optional upgrade kit UK-203 is mounted.
• *2: It is displayed only when “K.10.3.1 License management error” occurs.

12.2 Starting/Exiting
12.2.1 Starting procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
• Stop → 9
3. Billing Setting menu will appear.

12.2.2 Exiting procedure

1. Touch the [Exit].

12.3 Billing setting

12.3.1 Counter Setting
(1) Use
• To set the counting method for the total counter, size counter and long length paper counter.
• To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.)
• Use to change the counting method for the counters.

(2) Total Counter

(a) Default setting
• Japan: “Mode 1”

I-272
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

• US, Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3, Others 4: “Mode 2”

(b) Setting item

• Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
• Mode 2: Large size is double counts
NOTE
• The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key counter.
• “Others 1” to “Others 4” are setting items in [Marketing Area] available from Service Mode.
I.10.10.1 Marketing Area

(3) Size Counter

(a) Default setting
• US: A3 and 11 x 17
• Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3, Others 4: A3, B4, 11 x 17, and 8 1/ x 14
2
• Japan: Not counted

(b) Setting item

A3/11 x 17 When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direction
(exceeds 399 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
A3/B4/11 x 17/8 1/2 x 14 When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan direction and 355 mm in the sub scan direction
(exceeds 337 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
A3/11 x 17/B4/8 1/2 x 14/Foolscap When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan direction and 330 mm in the sub scan direction
(exceeds 313 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size (However the size in the main
scan direction changes according to the foolscap size setting.)
NOTE
• When the Size Counter setting is set to “Not counted”, the machine operate with following conditions regardless of the each
control panel settings.
• Total Counter: Mode1
• Long Length Paper Count Mode: Mode1
• Banner Counter Double Count Mode: OFF

(c) Count-up table

Print mode 1-Sided 2-Sided
Sizes other than those Sizes other than those
Size Specified sizes Specified sizes
specified specified
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4
Size 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2
2-sided Total 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
• 0: No count
• 1: 1 count
• 2: 2 counts
• 3: 3 counts
• 4: 4 counts

(4) Long Length Paper Counter Mode

• When printing on the long paper (457.2 mm or over), the counting value will be the total of the value set by the total counter mode and the
value by this setting.

(a) Default setting

• Mode 4

(b) Setting item

• Mode 1: + 0 count
• Mode 2: + 1 count
• Mode 3: + 2 counts (457.2 to 915.0 mm will be + 1 count)
• Mode 4: + 3 counts (457.2 to 686.0 mm will be + 1 count, and 686.1 to 915.0 mm will be + 2 count)

(5) Banner Counter Double Count Mode

• To set whether to use normal count or double count when printing long size paper.
• When “ON” is selected, double count is applied to only long size paper.

(a) Default setting

• OFF

I-273
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

(b) Setting item

• ON
• “OFF”

(6) Count methods that are the combination of each setting

• The count method used when printing long size paper depends on the combination of the CounterSetting: Settings in Long Length Paper
Counter Mode and Banner Counter Double Count Mode. The following shows details on count methods that are the combination of each
setting.
Banner Counter
Long Length Paper
Total Counter Double Count Paper size Count
Counter Mode
Mode
Mode 1 Mode 1 OFF Normal size 1 count
Long size 1 count
ON Normal size 1 count
Long size 2 counts
Mode 2 OFF Normal size 1 count
Long size 2 counts
ON Normal size 1 count
Long size 4 counts
Mode 3 OFF Normal size 1 count
Long size 457.3 to 915.0 mm 2 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 3 counts
ON Normal size 1 count
Long size 457.3 to 915.0 mm 4 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 6 counts
Mode 4 OFF Normal size 1 count
Long size 457.3 to 686.0 mm 2 counts
Long size 686.1 to 915.0 mm 3 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 4 counts
ON Normal size 1 count
Long size 457.3 to 686.0 mm 4 counts
Long size 686.1 to 915.0 mm 6 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 8 counts
Mode 2 Mode 1 OFF Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 2 counts
ON Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 4 counts
Mode 2 OFF Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 3 counts
ON Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 6 counts
Mode 3 OFF Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 457.3 to 915.0 mm 3 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 4 counts
ON Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 457.3 to 915.0 mm 6 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 8 counts
Mode 4 OFF Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts
Long size 457.3 to 686.0 mm 3 counts
Long size 686.1 to 915.0 mm 4 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 5 counts
ON Small size 1 count
Large size 2 counts

I-274
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

Banner Counter
Long Length Paper
Total Counter Double Count Paper size Count
Counter Mode
Mode
Long size 457.3 to 686.0 mm 6 counts
Long size 686.1 to 915.0 mm 8 counts
Long size 915.1 mm or more 10 counts
NOTE
• When the Size Counter setting is set to “Not counted”, the machine operate with following conditions regardless of the each
control panel settings.
• Total Counter: Mode1
• Long Length Paper Count Mode: Mode1
• Banner Counter Double Count Mode: OFF

12.3.2 Management Function Choice

• To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted.
Key Counter, Management Device (Data controller), Authentication Device, or Vendor
NOTE
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• When the setting shows that [Management Device 1], [Management Device 2] or [Vendor 2] is mounted, the following applications
will be invalid.
PC FAX transmission / HDD TWAIN/PS Box Operator / PS Scan Direct / PS Job Spooler / Fiery: Scan to Box
Also, the following setting will be set to “OFF”.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Function Management Setting] → [Network Function Usage Setting]

12.3.3 Management Function Choice-Key Counter IF Vendor

• Not used.

12.3.4 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device

(1) Device 1
• Not used.

(2) Device 2
(a) Use
• To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed.
• Set when the authentication unit (biometric type or card type) is mounted.
Card 1 Uses IC card authentication system (AU-201)
Card 2 Uses loadable device card authentication system
Bio1 Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system (AU-101)
Bio2 Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system (AU-102)

• When selecting [Bio1], set a film timeout interval.

• When selecting [Bio2], set a film timeout interval, capture trial time and authentication trial time.
• When selecting [Card 1] or [Card 2], a response timeout interval is displayed. (The interval is unchangeable.)
• When the setting is set to Card 2, the main power switch must be turned OFF and ON to let the new setting take effect.
• Selecting Card 2, a loadable device driver allows to install.

(b) Setting item

Authentication Mode
• Card 1
• Card 2
• Bio1
• Bio2

(c) Installing method of the loadable device driver

• The firmware is updated using the USB memory device.
NOTE
• NEVER remove or insert the USB memory device with the machine power turned ON.
1. Prepare a USB memory device on which the driver data of the loadable device to be used was written.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
3. Remove the screw [1].
4. Loosen the screw [2], and lift up the cover [3] of the service port.
5. Insert the USB memory device to the service port [4] for service.

I-275
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

[2] [3] [4]

[1]

NOTE
• USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch off.
• When updating the firmware, use the service port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another service port.

6. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
7. Select [Yes] on the loadable device driver installation screen.

8. Press the [START] to start installing the driver. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been installed correctly ([Downloading Completed]).
Check also the check sum value ([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (The Start key lights blue.)
10. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
11. Remove the USB memory device from the port.
12. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch.

12.3.5 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only

(1) Use
• To set whether or not the key counter is installed.
• Set when the key counter is mounted.
• Select [Message] when the key counter is mounted.

(2) Color Mode

• Not used.

(a) Setting item

• Mode 1
• Mode 2
• Mode 3
• Mode 4
• Mode 5

(3) Message
(a) Use
• Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.
Type 1 Message for key counter
Type 2 Message for card scanning
Type 3 Message for ID management

I-276
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

Type 4 Message for remote SW

(b) Setting item

• Type 1
• Type 2
• Type 3
• Type 4

(4) Confirmation copy

(a) Use
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.

(b) Default setting

• Ban

(c) Setting item

• License
• “Ban”

(5) The next job reservation

(a) Use
• Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.

(b) Default setting

• Ban

(c) Setting item

• License
• “Ban”
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User
Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting].

(6) Count Setting

(a) Use
• To set the count timing used when the key counter is installed.

(b) Default setting

• Paper feed

(c) Setting item

• “Paper feed”
• Paper out

12.3.6 Management Function Choice-Management Device

(1) Device 1
(a) Use
• To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed.
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and account track is set “Off” or “Account Name +
Password” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings].

(2) Device 2
(a) Use
• To set whether or not the management device 2 is installed.
• Select the Management Setting Mode
Mode 1 Use contact type device (Logout with ID key is not allowed.)
Mode 2 Use non-contact type device (Logout with ID key is allowed.)
NOTE
• Depending on the combination of [PC print] and [Send data] settings of [Usage Settings for Each Function] in Administrator
Settings, some MFP functions can be hidden from the control panel.
Refer to the following table for the setting combinations.
Administrator Settings/ Functions that are hidden
Security Settings/Function System Settings
Management Settings/Usage
Settings for Each Function User Box Settings

I-277
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

Send data PC print External Memory

Function Settings
Restrict Restrict - • Delete Secure Print Documents -
• Auto Delete Secure Document
• Encrypted PDF Delete Time
• ID & Print Delete Time
• External Memory Function Settings
Restrict ON/OFF - ID & Print Delete Time Save Document
ON/OFF Restrict - • Delete Secure Print Documents • Print Document
• Auto Delete Secure Document • External Memory
• Encrypted PDF Delete Time Document Scan
• ID & Print Delete Time
ON/OFF ON/OFF - ID & Print Delete Time -

(b) Setting item (Management Setting)

• Mode 1
• Mode 2
NOTE
• The setting is not available when either “External Server” of user authentication, “Password Only” of account track, “Do not
synchronize” of user authentication and account track or “Allow” of public user access has been set with [Administrator
Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings].

12.3.7 Management Function Choice-Vendor 1

• Not used.

12.3.8 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2

(1) Use
• To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed.
NOTE
• When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode” and
removing it will set it to the “Vendor Mode”.
• Depending on the combination of [PC print] and [Send data] settings of [Usage Settings for Each Function] in Administrator
Settings, some MFP functions can be hidden from the control panel.
Refer to the following table for the setting combinations.
When the vendor 2 is mounted
Administrator Settings/ Functions that are hidden
Security Settings/Function System Settings
Management Settings/
Usage Settings for Each User Box Settings
Function
Send data PC print External Memory
Function Settings
Restrict Restrict User Box - -
Settings
Restrict ON/OFF - • Delete Unused User Box Save Document
• Encrypted PDF Delete Time
• ID & Print Delete Time
• Document Hold Setting
ON/OFF Restrict User Box • Delete Unused User Box • Print Document
Settings (Hidden • Delete Secure Print Documents • External Memory
only when the • Auto Delete Secure Document Document Scan
USB host board • Encrypted PDF Delete Time
is not installed.) • ID & Print Delete Time
• Document Hold Setting
ON/OFF ON/OFF - • Delete Unused User Box -
• Encrypted PDF Delete Time
• ID & Print Delete Time
• Document Hold Setting
When the Vendor 2 and Key Counter are mounted
Administrator Settings/ Functions that are hidden
Security Settings/Function System Settings
Management Settings/
Usage Settings for Each User Box Settings
Function
Send data PC print External Memory
Function Settings
Restrict Restrict - • Delete Secure Print Documents -
• Auto Delete Secure Document
• Encrypted PDF Delete Time
• ID & Print Delete Time
• External Memory Function Settings

I-278
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

Restrict ON/OFF - ID & Print Delete Time Save Document

ON/OFF Restrict - • Delete Secure Print Documents • Print Document
• Auto Delete Secure Document • External Memory
• Encrypted PDF Delete Time Document Scan
• ID & Print Delete Time
ON/OFF ON/OFF - ID & Print Delete Time -

(2) Procedure
• Select color mode and message of key counter. (Only for key counter, the type of the color mode and message are same after mounting.)

(3) Confirmation copy

(a) Use
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.

(b) Default setting

• Ban

(c) Setting item

• License
• “Ban”

(4) The next job reservation

(a) Use
• Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.

(b) Default setting

• Ban

(c) Setting item

• License
• “Ban”

(5) Message
(a) Use
• Select message of vendor.
Type 1 Message for key counter
Type 2 Message for card scanning
Type 3 Message for ID management

(b) Setting item

• Type 1
• Type 2
• Type 3
NOTE
• The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User
Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting].

(6) Count Setting

(a) Use
• To set the count timing used when the key counter is installed.

(b) Default setting

• Paper feed

(c) Setting item

• “Paper feed”
• Paper out

12.3.9 Setting items that automatically change the setting values

NOTE
• Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It needs resetting when
cancelling the setting in order to set back to “not mounted” because the setting value will remain.

I-279
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

(1) When the vendor2 or authentication device 2 is mounted

Setting Item Vendor 2 Authentication Device 2
Default Copy Settings Factory Default -
Default Scan/Fax Settings Factory Default -
Copy Operating Screen [Yes] -
Utility
Fax Active Screen Tx/Rx Display [Yes] -
Scan/Fax Settings Default Tab Direct Input -
Left Panel Display Default [Job List] -
Each Function Setting Copy, PC print, Send Data, and Print others will be set to “ON”.
Network Function Usage Settings OFF -
Administrator Security Level Prohibit -
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting OFF -
Application Key Settings When Key 1 is set to My Panel, reset the -
setting and assign Key 1 to [FAX/
SCAN]. When Key 2 is set to My Panel,
reset the setting and assign Key 2 to
[Copy].
Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority, Deleting Other -
User’s Jobs, Registering and Changing
Addresses, Changing Zoom Ratio will be
set to “Restrict”.
External Memory Save Document and Print Document will
Administr -
Function Settings be set to “OFF”.
ator
Settings Skip Job Operation Settings All settings be set to “Yes”. -
ID & Print Settings - ID & Print will be set to “ON”.
Forward TX Setting OFF -
Memory RX Setting Password for Memory RX Setting is set
to the default value of the administrator -
password
PC-Fax RX Setting Restrict -
TSI User Box Setting No -
OpenAPI Setting Access Setting will be set to “Restrict” -
and Authentication will be changed to
“OFF” setting.
Web Service Settings → Printer setting/ Printer Setting and Scanner setting will
-
Scanner setting be set to “OFF”.
Image Log Transfer Settings [No] -
Software Switch Setting SW No. 63 will be changed to 01 (HEX). -
Service Management function choice Confirmation copy will be set to “Ban”. -
Mode FAX [System] → [Display Setting] → [Re-
-
Transmission] will be set to “OFF”.

(2) When the management device 1/2 is mounted

Setting Item Management Device 1 Management Device 2
Each Function Setting • Copy will be set to “ON”. Copy, PC print, Send Data, and Print
• PC print, Send Data, and Print others others will be set to “ON”.
will be set to “OFF”.
Network Function Usage Settings OFF
Administr Application Key Settings • When Key 1 is set to My Panel, reset
ator the setting and assign Key 1 to [FAX/
Settings SCAN].
-
• When Key 2 is set to My Panel, reset
the setting and assign Key 2 to
[Copy].
Web Service Settings → Printer setting/
Printer Setting and Scanner setting will be set to “OFF”.
Scanner setting

12.3.10 Coverage Rate Clear

(1) Use
• To clear the coverage rate.

(2) Procedure
• Touching [END] key will clear the coverage rate.

I-280
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

(3) Default setting

• Unset

(4) Setting item

• Set
• “Unset”

12.3.11 License management-Activation

(1) Functions
• To activate i-Option functions.

(2) Use
• To activate i-Option functions with CE.
• The functions can be activated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropriate license code and function code.
• Administrators also can activate i-Option functions through Administrator Settings.

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function setting.
• Before accessing the LMS, CE are required to register the E-mail address and the password in the LMS. To register, click [CE
Initial Registration] that is located in the upper right of CE Login screen.
1. Prepare “token certification.”
2. Access the following URL using the PC connected to the Internet.
https://lms.konicaminolta.com/license/KM/support.aspx
3. Click [CE Login].

4. Enter [E-Mail Address] and [Password], and click [Login].

5. Click [Generate License Code].

I-281
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

6. Enter the serial number of the target MFP, and click [Next].
NOTE
• Make sure to enter alphabet letters of the serial number in all capital letters.

7. Click [Next].

8. Enter the token number written in the token certification, and select the product description.
9. Click [Add].

I-282
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

10. Confirm the registered items, and click [Next].

11. Click [Generate license Code].

12. LMS issues license code and function code.

13. Write down the serial number, license code and function code.

I-283
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

14. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management].

15. Select [Activation] -> [Function Code] or [License Code], and enter the function code and the license code confirmed at Step13.
16. Touch [Apply].

17. Follow the massage appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
18. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management] -> [Function List], and confirm that the activated function is displayed
at the list.

12.3.12 License management-Deactivation

(1) Functions
• To deactivate i-Option functions.

(2) Use
• To deactivate i-Option functions due to registration error, expiration of lease term, change to other MFP or etc.
• The functions can be deactivated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropriate deactivation code.

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function setting.

I-284
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

• Before accessing the LMS, CE are required to register the E-mail address and the password in the LMS. To register, click [CE
Initial Registration] that is located in the upper right of CE Login screen.
1. Check the serial number of the target MFP.
2. Access the following URL using the PC connected to the Internet.
https://lms.konicaminolta.com/license/KM/support.aspx
3. Click [CE Login].

4. Enter [E-Mail Address] and [Password], and click [Login].

5. Click [Deactivate License Code].

6. Enter the serial number of the target MFP, and click [Retrieve].
NOTE
• Make sure to enter alphabet letters of the serial number in all capital letters.

I-285
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

7. Select the token to be deactivated, and click [Registration].

8. LMS issues deactivation code and function code.

9. Write down the serial number, deactivation code and function code.

10. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management].

I-286
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

11. Select [Deactivation] -> [Function Code] or [Deactivation Code], and enter the function code and the deactivation code confirmed at
Step9.
12. Touch [Apply].

13. Write down or print out the serial number and deactivation complete code.
NOTE
• When A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S is set to the paper feed tray, the above-mentioned serial number and deactivation complete code
can be printed out by pressing the start key.
• Serial number and deactivation complete code can be confirmed in [List] available from [License Management].

Serial Number 0123456789012

Deactivation
Complete Code
01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234

Turn the main switch OFF and ON.

14. Follow the message appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
15. Access to the LMS and login again.
For detail of the login method, refer to step 2 to step4.
16. Click [Deactivate License Code in LMS].
17. Enter the serial number and the deactivation complete code confirmed at step13.
NOTE
• Make sure to enter alphabet letters of the serial number in all capital letters.

I-287
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

18. “Deactivation Complete” message will be displayed.

The license become invalid at both MFP and LMS, and deactivated token number can be used for another MFP.

12.3.13 License management-Repair

(1) Functions
• To repair license management information.

(2) Use
• To be used when license management information is lost due to replacement of NVRAM board or service EEPROM board or any other
trouble.
• License management information can be repaired by acquiring repair code with repair request code, and entering the repair code.

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function setting.
• Before accessing the LMS, CE are required to register the E-mail address and the password in the LMS. To register, click [CE
Initial Registration] that is located in the upper right of CE Login screen.
• When the message “License management error occurred.” is displayed, carry out the repair operation with the following steps.

License management error occurred.

1. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management].

I-288
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

2. Select [Repair] -> [Repair Request Code].

Repair
Request Code

Repair Code

Repair

3. Write down or print out the serial number, repair request code and request code.
NOTE
• When A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S is set to the paper feed tray, the above-mentioned serial number and repair request code can be
printed out by pressing the start key.

Serial Number 0123456789012

Repair
Request Code 01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234

Request Code 01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789

4. Access the following URL using the PC connected to the Internet.

https://lms.konicaminolta.com/license/KM/support.aspx
5. Click [CE Login].

I-289
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

6. Enter [E-Mail Address] and [Password], and click [Login].

7. Click [Repair License Code].

8. Enter the serial number, repair request code and request code confirmed at step3, and click [Registration].
NOTE
• Make sure to enter alphabet letters of the serial number in all capital letters.

9. LMS issues repair permission code.

10. Write down the serial number and repair permission code.

I-290
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

11. Select [Service Mode] -> [Billing Setting] -> [License Management].

12. Select [Repair] -> [Repair Code], and enter the repair code confirmed at step10.

Repair
Request Code

Repair Code

Repair

13. Touch [Apply].

Repair
Request Code

Repair Code 12345-67890-12345-67890-12345-67890-12345

Repair

I-291
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

14. Follow the massage appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
NOTE
• When carrying out the repair operation after NVRAM board replacement, it is necessary to reactivate the i-Option license.

12.3.14 License management-Initialize

(1) Functions
• To initialize license management information.

(2) Use
• To be used when license management information cannot be repaired.
• License management information should be initialized when the machine fails to generate request code or repair request code due to any
trouble and the information cannot be repaired.

(3) Procedure
NOTE
• You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function setting.
• When license management information cannot be repaired, initialize the information with the following procedure.
1. Contact the license management section of sales company to report the information necessary to issue the initialize code.
2. The license management section of sales company supplies the initialize code.
3. Call the Billing Setting to the screen.
4. Touch [License Management] → [Initialize].
5. Enter the initialize code issued by call center using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [Apply].

6. After completing the initialization, follow the message appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch.

12.3.15 License management-Request Code

• When the license management error is occurred, it will not be displayed until the repair code is input.

(1) Functions
• To display and print request code and serial number.

(2) Use
• To check the request code and serial number.

(3) Procedure
• Set A4S or 8 1/ x 11S paper to the tray, and press start key at request code screen to print.
2

12.3.16 License management-List

(1) Functions
• To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number.

(2) Use
• To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number.

(3) Procedure
• Set A4S or 8 1/ x 11S paper to the tray, and press start key at deactivation complete code screen to print.
2

I-292
bizhub 652/552/602/502 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 12. BILLING SETTING

12.3.17 License management-Function List

(1) Functions/Use
• To display activated functions.

12.3.18 OpenAPI Authentication Management

(1) Restriction Code
(a) Use
• These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third vendor. Do not set or change these settings
without vendor’s instructions.

(2) Region Code

(a) Use
• These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third vendor. Do not set or change these settings
without vendor’s instructions.

I-293
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 13. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 RESET FUNCTION

13. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION

Function for Initialize
clearing Main
Front Clear All Data
power
door Trouble System Job Address
switch Clear Fax All Network
open/ reset Error Memory Registr
OFF/ All Data Setting History Setting
Contents to be close Clear Setting ation
ON Data Data Data
cleared Data Data
Jam display ○ - - ○ ○ - - - - -
Rank
- - ○ ○ ○ - - - - -
A
Malfunction Rank
○ - ○ ○ ○ - - - - -
display B
Rank
- ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - - -
C
Erratic operation /
- ○ - ○ ○ - - - - -
display
Utility Mode
(Except items on - - - - ○ - - - - -
engine adjustment)
Job memory setting
- - - - ○ ○ - - - -
data
Address
- - - - ○ - ○ - - -
registration data
Fax setting data
(Excluding
- - - - ○ - - ○ - -
destination related
data)
History data
(Job history,
Journal history,
Receive reject - - - - ○ - - - ○ -
history, Destination
history, Job secure
counter)
Network setting
data
(Excluding - - - - ○ - - - - ○
destination related
data)
Service Mode
- - - - □*1 - - - - -
(System 1/2)
Man
age
ment
Billing
Func - - - - ○ - - - - -
Setting
tion
Choi
ce
Adjustment of the
touch panel - - - - ○ - - - - -
position
○: Will be cleared (initialized)
- : Will not be cleared
□*1: Items to be cleared
System 1 Marketing Area (Fax Target only)
System 2 HDD
Image Controller Setting

I-294
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...

14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub 652/552/602/502

14.1 Scanner section
14.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The scanner motor assy has been removed.
• The scanner drive cables have been rewound.

(2) Procedure
1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws
[2] [1] [2].

[2] [2]

2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand
[1] [4] [3] side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the
left and check that it is returned to the original position by the
tension of the spring [3].
Perform this step three times.
3. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the scanner motor assy into
position.

[4] [2] [4]

14.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The scanner drive cables have been rewound.

(2) Procedure
1. Move the mirror unit [1] to the center and push it against the
[2] [2]
notches [2] on the rail.

[1]

I-295
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...
2. When the mirror unit do not push its both sides against the
notches, loosen two mirror unit adjustment screws [1] and adjust
[1] the mirror unit position until it pushes its both sides against the
notches.
Tighten the adjustment screw.

3. Then conduct scanner positioning adjustment.

I.14.1.3 Scanner position adjustment

14.1.3 Scanner position adjustment

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The scanner drive cables have been rewound.
• Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit must be completed.

(2) Procedure
1. Move the exposure unit [1] and the mirror unit to the end of the
right.

[1]

2. Slide the exposure unit until it hits the end of the IR right frame.
3. Provide the length of 21.0 mm between the end of the left
indentation [1] on the exposure unit upper surface and the end of
the IR right frame upper surface. When the length is ensured,
[1] tighten the two screws [2].
[1]

[2] [2]

4. Mount the original glass moving unit, and adjust the height of the original glass moving unit.
I.14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit
5. Whenever the scanner drive cables have been removed, be sure to carry out the [Sub Scan Zoom Adj.] procedure.
I.10.3.6.(4) Sub Scan Zoom Adj.
6. Perform the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj]
I.10.16.7 Read Pos Adj

I-296
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...

14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When replacing the original glass moving unit.

(2) Procedure
1. Set the height adjustment jig for the original glass moving unit [1].
[1]
Insert the paper [2] between the original glass and the height
adjusting jig for the original glass moving unit.

[2]

2. Press the height adjusting jig for the original glass moving unit [1]
[1]
on the original glass moving unit side [2].

[2]

[1] 3. Pull the paper [2] while pressing the height adjusting jig for the
original glass moving unit [1] and make sure that the paper will not
come out.
NOTE
• Pull the paper [2] while pressing the height adjusting jig
for the original glass moving unit [1] and make sure that
the paper will not come out.

4. When the paper comes off, the adjustment of the height is

necessary by the following procedure.

[2]

5. Remove four screws [1] from the original glass moving unit.
[1]

6. Install four spacers [1] and make a height adjustment.

[1]

[1]

I-297
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...
NOTE
• Prepare and use the spacers described below as
necessary.
(1) (2) (3) (1) A00J 2903 ##: 0.5 mm thickness
(2) A00J 2908 ##: 0.2 mm thickness
(3) A00J 2909 ##: 0.1 mm thickness
• Each spacer can be identified by the number of holes [1]
which are 1.5 mm in diameter.

[1] [1]

7. Temporarily secure the original glass moving unit [2] with four
[1] screws [1].
8. Check the height repeating step 1 to 3.
9. Secure the original glass moving unit with four screws [1].

[2]

14.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• Only when original jam, bend, or tilt occurred during original feeding by ADF.

(2) Procedure
1. Adjust the guide support for the original glass moving unit by
rotating the small screws (one on the near side and one on the far
side) with the hexagon wrench (1.5 mm) to adjust the height.
• Turning clockwise: Up
• Turning counterclockwise: Down
NOTE
• Feed a paper with ADF, and adjust so that no original jam,
bending, or tilt will occur.

14.2 Paper feed section

14.2.1 Tray3/4 paper size change
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• Upon user requests, the paper size used for the tray3/4 needs to be changed.

(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.

I-298
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the paper guide plates (front
[2] [3] [2]/rear [3]).

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
[2] 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the end guide plates [2].

[1]

4. Align the paper guide plate (rear) with the marking on the bottom
and secure it with four screws.
To set B5/8.5/16K sizes:
• Insert the paper guide plate (rear) into the hole. Align it with
the back marking and secure it.
To set A5/Post card size:
• Insert the paper guide plate (rear) into the hole. Align it with
the front marking and secure it.

5. Insert paper of the size to be placed in the tray, and set the paper guide plate (front) against the edge of the paper.
NOTE
• Gap between paper and the paper guide plate (front): 0 < 1mm

6. Secure the front side of the paper guide plate (front) with two screws, remove the paper and secure the back side with two screws.
7. Align the end guide plate with the marking on the bottom and secure it.
8. Select the tray where paper size needs to be changed and change paper size in the following screen.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [LCC Size Setting]
I.10.11.8 LCC Size Setting
9. Make a test print.

14.2.2 Skew adjustment of the tray 1/2

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• To reduce paper skew that cannot be corrected by the registration loop adjustment when the tray 1 or 2 is within the specifications.

(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.

I-299
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...
2. Load the tray with the paper.
[1] 3. Move the set of the paper guides [1] until no gap is produced
between the both ends of paper and the paper guides.

[2] [2] 4. Remove the paper from the tray.

5. Secure the set of paper guides [1] on the tray using two screws [2]
(M3 x 8 mm: V121 0308 04).

[1]

14.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When an image printed on a copy is displaced from the correct position with the use of the tray1/2.

(2) Procedure
1. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment.
2. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.
3. Stretch the paper guide [1] to the maximum size position.
[1]

4. Loosen two screws [1].

[1]

I-300
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...
5. Move the paper guide [1] complete according to the amount of the
[1] mis-centering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center position
of it.
6. Tighten two screws [2].

[1] [2]

7. Make another test print and check the amount of misalignment.

14.2.4 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem.
[Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Printer Image Centering Side 1]
I.10.3.5.(2) Printer Image Centering Side 1

(2) Procedure
1. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment.
2. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.
3. Stretch the paper guide [1] to the maximum size position.
[1]

4. Loosen ten screws [1].

[1]

[1]

5. Move the paper guide [1] complete according to the amount of the
[2] mis-centering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center position
of it.
6. Tighten ten screws [2].

[1]

7. Make another test print and check the amount of misalignment.

14.2.5 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the tray 3/4

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• In case a no feed jam occurs frequently.

I-301
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...

(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made.
2. Remove two screws (M3 x 6 mm: V118 0306 03) [1].
[1]

3. In the pick-up roller assy, put paper feed assist plate (A00J P001
[2] [3] ##) [2] on the paper feed assist plate holder [1], and fix them with
two accompanying screws (M3 x 8 mm: V118 0308 03) [3].

[1]

4. Set the tray.

5. Perform test print to check whether the no feed or the double feed occurs or not.

14.3 Bypass tray section

14.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The bypass paper size unit has been removed.

(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Align one of the six gear ribs [1] with the match mark [2] on the
bypass guide rack gear.

[1] [2]
[1] 2. Attach the holder [1] with two screws.

I-302
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 bizhub 652/552/602/5...
3. Install the bypass unit cover so that part A (edge) [1] of the rack
gear for the bypass paper size unit and part B [2] of the bypass
[2] unit cover are aligned in a straight line.

[1]

[2]

[1]

4. Align the mark of the gear [1] with the mark [2] on the rack gear so
[2] that those gears are engaged.

[1]

5. After the bypass paper size unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the bypass paper size unit moves smoothly in a manner
operatively connected to the bypass guide.
6. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select [Machine] → [Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj]. Then, carry out manual bypass tray width
adjustment.
I.10.3.9 Manual Bypass Tray Width Adj

I-303
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DF-618

15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-618

15.1 Original document feed section
15.1.1 Adjusting the height
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When the reverse automatic document feeder has been reinstalled.

(2) Procedure
1. Check the clearance between the upper face of scanner and the
protrusion [1] on the reverse automatic document feeder side (2
spots, front/ back).
NOTE
• There must be no clearance between the protrusion [1] on
the reverse automatic document feeder and the upper face
of scanner.

2. If there is any clearance, the following adjustment is needed.

[1]

3. Remove the label [1].

[1]

4. Remove the clearance by turning the adjusting screw [1].

• Clockwise rotation: Lifting up the rear side
• Counterclockwise rotation: Lowering the rear side
5. Use the adjusting screw [2] when further adjustment is needed.
• Clockwise rotation: Lifting up the rear side
• Counterclockwise rotation: Lowering the rear side

[1]
[2]

6. Affix again the labels removed in step 3.

15.1.2 Adjusting skew feed

(1) Procedure
1. Check how the edges of the chart are misaligned.
The amount of the deviation of the chart will be X.

X X

Deviation in + (plus) Deviation in - (minus)

I-304
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DF-618

[1] 2. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having
an arrow facing up).

3. Make copies 5 times repeatedly in single side mode.

4. Fold all 5 sample copies as illustrated and check for any deviation.
Deviation on the sample will be Y.
5. Obtain the difference between the deviation of the chart and the
deviation of the sample.
Y Y Difference of the deviation = Y – X
Specifications: 0 ± 2 mm
6. If the difference of the deviation does not fall within the specified
range, perform the following adjustment.
Deviation in + (plus) Deviation in - (minus)

7. Loosen the mounting screw [1] on the right hinge viewed from the
front.
8. When the difference of the deviation is + (plus), turn the screw
[2]clockwise to adjust.
NOTE
• When turning the screw, be sure not to raise the reverse
[1] automatic document feeder until in an upright position.
• After turning the screw to the limits of the adjustable
range, do not turn the screw any more.
• To prevent the adjustment screw [2] breakage, be sure to
follow the above instructions.

[2]

9. When the difference of the deviation is - (minus), turn the screw [1]
counterclockwise to adjust.
10. After the adjustment is completed, tighten the mounting screw [2]
on right side hinge securely with screwdriver.

[2]

[1]

I-305
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LU-204

16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-204

16.1 Paper feed section
16.1.1 Centering adjustment of the LCT
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem.
[Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Centering]
I.10.3.5.(2) Printer Image Centering Side 1

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Machine].
3. Touch [Printer Area].
4. Touch [Centering].
5. Touch [LCT].
6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
7. Measure the width of printed reference line A.
A Specification: 3.0 mm ± 1.0 mm

8. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range, enter the correction value using the [-] or [+] key.
9. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range.
10. If the use of the [-] or [+] key does not allow the measurement to fall within the specified range, perform the following steps.
11. Open the upper door on LCT to loosen eight screws [1].
NOTE
• During adjustment, in order to keep the same distance
between the paper guide side plates, place a sheet of
[1] [1] paper between the paper guide side plates with 1.0 mm
apart from each of the plates.

[1] [1]

[2] 12. When the width A is larger than the standard value:
Move the paper guide side plates [2] leftward and tighten eight
loosened screws [1].

[1] [1]

[1] [1]

[2]
[2] 13. When the width A is smaller than the standard value:
Move the paper guide side plates [2] rightward and tighten eight
loosened screws [1].

[1] [1]

[1] [1]

[2]
14. Load paper and let the machine produce another test print. Then, check width A.
15. Make the adjustment until width A falls within the specified range.

I-306
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LU-204

16.1.2 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the LCT

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• Incase a no feed jam occurs frequently, perform the pick-up roller load adjustment.

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[1] 2. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm: V116 0308 03) [1] and remove the
paper assist plate assy [2].

[2]
[2] 3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the assist handle [2].

[1]
[1] 4. Add one more paper assist plate (A03N 5604 ##) [1] to the original
ones.
NOTE
• Adding only one paper assist plate is allowed and the total
needs to be up to four.

5. Reinstall the assist handle that was removed in step 3, securing it with the screw.
6. Reinstall the paper assist plate assy with a new screw (M3 X 10 mm: V118 0310 03).
The screw removed in step 2 (M3 X 8 mm: V116 0308 03) cannot be used to reinstall the assy.
7. Close the upper door.
8. Perform copying/printing to check whether the no feed or the double feed occurs or not.

I-307
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LU-301

17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-301

17.1 Paper feed section
17.1.1 Centering adjustment of the LCT
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem.
[Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Centering]
I.10.3.5.(2) Printer Image Centering Side 1

(2) Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Machine].
3. Touch [Printer Area].
4. Touch [Centering].
5. Touch [LCT].
6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test print.
7. Measure the width of printed reference line A.
A Specification: 3.0 mm ± 1.0 mm

8. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range, enter the correction value using the [-] or [+] key.
9. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range.
10. If the use of the [-] or [+] key does not allow the measurement to fall within the specified range, perform the following steps.
11. Open the upper door on LCT to loosen four screws [1].
NOTE
• During adjustment, in order to keep the same distance
between the paper guide side plates, place a sheet of
[1] paper [2] between the paper guide side plates with 1.0 mm
[1] apart from each of the plates.

[2]
[2] [2] 12. When the width A is larger than the standard value.
[1] Move the paper guide side plates [2] leftward and tighten four
loosened screws [1].

[1]
[2] [2] 13. When the width A is smaller than the standard value.
[1] Move the paper guide side plates [2] rightward and tighten four
loosened screws [1].

[1]
14. Load paper and let the machine produce another test print. Then, check width A.
15. Make the adjustment until width A falls within the specified range.

17.1.2 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the LCT

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:

I-308
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LU-301
• Incase a no feed jam occurs frequently, perform the pick-up roller load adjustment.

(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[1] 2. Remove the screw (M3 x 8 mm: V116 0308 03) [1] and remove the
paper assist plate assy [2].

[2]
[2] 3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the assist handle [2].

[1]
[1] 4. Add one more paper assist plate (A03N 5604 ##) [1] to the original
ones.
NOTE
• Adding only one paper assist plate is allowed and the total
needs to be up to four.

5. Reinstall the assist handle that was removed in step 3, securing it with the screw.
6. Reinstall the paper assist plate assy with a new screw (M3 X 10 mm: V118 0310 03).
The screw removed in step 2 (M3 X 8 mm: V116 0308 03) cannot be used to reinstall the assy.
7. Close the upper door.
8. Perform copying/printing to check whether the no feed or the double feed occurs or not.

I-309
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ZU-606

18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT ZU-606

18.1 Gate solenoid/Lw adjustment
18.1.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When the gate solenoid/Lw (SD1) is replaced with a new one.

18.1.2 Procedure
1. Remove the Z folding unit.
G.4.6.5 Z folding unit (ZU-606)
2. Remove the front cover.
G.4.6.4 Front cover (ZU-606)
3. Pull out the Z folding/conveyance unit.
[1] [4] 4. Loosen two screws [1] and then visually adjust so that the gate/Lw
[2] maintains the standard value a relative to the guide plate [3].
Then, tighten the two screws [1].
Standard value: a = 3 mm to 5 mm
5. Loosen two screws [4] and adjust the gate /Lw [2] so that the
clearance between the gate /Lw [2] and the guide plate [3] gets to
the standard value “b” while gate solenoid/Lw turns ON and the
plunger [5] is pulled, and then tighten two screws [4].
Standard value: b = 2 mm to 4.6 mm

[5] [1]

[2]
[3]

b a

18.2 1st folding skew adjustment

18.2.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When the skew of the 1st folding is not within the standard value.
NOTE
• This adjustment affects the 1st Z-fold position. Be sure therefore to perform [1st Z-fold Position] of the service mode whenever
this adjustment has been completed.
I.10.18.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position/2nd Z-Fold Position

18.2.2 Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover.
G.4.6.2 Upper cover (ZU-606)

I-310
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ZU-606
2. Perform the Z-folding printing operation on A3 or 11 x 17 paper and
check to see if the skew of the 1st folding is within the standard
value “a”.
Standard value: a = 2 mm or less
a When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.

3. Open the front door, and pull out the Z folding/conveyance unit.
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the conveyance upper cover
[1] [2].

[2]

[1]

[3] 5. Loosen four screws [1].

[1] 6. Adjust the 1st stopper assembly [2] by moving the front side of the
assembly to right and left by referring to the markings [3], and then
tighten the four screws [1].
• When the skew pattern is [4], move the front side of the 1st
stopper assembly [2] to the left [5].
• When the skew pattern is [6], move the front side of the 1st
stopper assembly [2] to the right [7].
7. Replace the Z folding/conveyance unit, and then perform the Z-
folding printing operation and check to see if the skew of the 1st
folding is within the standard value.

[5] [2]

[7]

[4] [6]
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.

18.3 2nd folding skew adjustment

18.3.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When the skew of the 2nd folding is not within the standard value.
NOTE
• This adjustment affects the 2nd Z-fold position. Be sure therefore to perform [2nd Z-fold Position] of the service mode whenever
this adjustment has been completed.
I.10.18.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position/2nd Z-Fold Position

I-311
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ZU-606

18.3.2 Procedure
1. Perform the Z-folding printing operation on A3 or 11 x 17 paper and
check to see if the skew of the 2nd folding is within the standard
value “a”.
a Standard value: a = 2 mm or less
When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.

2. Open the front door, and pull out the Z folding/conveyance unit.
[2] [1] 3. Loosen four screws [1].
4. Adjust the 2nd stopper assembly [3] by moving it vertically by
referring to the markings [2], and then tighten the four screws [1].
• When the skew pattern is [4], move the back side of the 2nd
stopper assembly [3] upward [5].
• When the skew pattern is [6], move the back side of the 2nd
stopper assembly [3] downward [7].
5. Replace the Z-folding/conveyance unit, and then perform the Z-
folding printing operation and check to see if the skew of the 2nd
folding is within the standard value.
[5] [3]

[7]

[4] [6]
6. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the standard value can be obtained.

18.4 2nd stopper position adjustment

18.4.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When the 2nd folding position cannot be adjusted from the service mode or the skew of the 2nd folding cannot be adjusted by the procedure
in “I.18.3 2nd folding skew adjustment.”
NOTE
• This adjustment affects the 2nd Z-fold amount and 2nd Z-fold position. Be sure therefore to perform the following adjustment
procedure whenever this adjustment has been completed.
• 2nd folding skew adjustment
I.18.3 2nd folding skew adjustment
• [2nd Z-fold Position] of the service mode
I.10.18.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position/2nd Z-Fold Position

I-312
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ZU-606

18.4.2 Procedure
1. Conduct the Z-folding printing operation to move the 2nd stopper [1]
to the home position, and then turn OFF the main power switch of
[3] the main body.
2. Open the front door, and pull out the Z folding/conveyance unit.
3. Check to see if the distance between the 2nd stopper [1] and inside
edge of the guide plate [2] is within a standard value.
Standard value: a = 20 ± 0.5 mm
4. When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.
[1] 5. Loosen two screws [3] with the hex wrench, and then adjust the
distance between the 2nd stopper [1] and the inside of the guide
a plate [2] so that it gets to the standard value a.
NOTE
• Be sure not to rotate the actuator [5] of the 2nd stopper
[2] home sensor [4] during the adjustment. It may be moved
from the home position.
• Conduct the following steps 6 to 14 only if you cannot
reach to the screws [3] with the hex wrench when they are
located in side of the 2nd stopper assembly.

[4]

[5]

I-313
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ZU-606

[7] [4] 6. Rotate the shaft [2] so that you can reach to two screws [1] with the
[4] [5] hex wrench.
7. Loosen two screws [1].
8. Rotate the shaft [2] so that the actuator [3] is roughly positioned to
the home position [5] of the 2nd stopper home sensor [4].
NOTE
• Never remove the screw [6] from the actuator [3].
• At the appropriate position, the anti-rotation pin [7] points
upward when the actuator [3] faces to the left.

9. Rotate the pulley [8] to move the 2nd stopper [9] to the position
within the standard value.
[6] [3] [3] 10. Loosen four screws [10].
[6] 11. Lift up the shaft [12] upward enough to remove the belt [11] from the
pulley [8], and then rotate the pulley [8] without moving the shaft [2]
and the 2nd stopper [9] so that the screw [1] faces outside.
12. Tighten two screws [1].
13. Tighten four screws [10].
NOTE
• Before tightening the screws [10], be sure to check the
tension is exerted on two belts [11].

[10] [12] [10]

[8] [1]
[2]

[11] [9] [12]

14. Repeat the steps 3 to 5 to adjust the 2nd stopper to the position within the standard value.

I-314
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PK-516

19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-516

19.1 Punch section
19.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The punch holes are on a slanted line.

(2) Procedure
1. Insert a piece of paper [1] into the finisher’s interlock to turn it ON.

[1]

2. Turn ON the Main and Sub power switches of the machine, and make sample copies for both the single-side and double-side with any
tray in Punch mode.
3. Fold the output paper in half and check whether the punch holes are aligned. If the punch holes are misaligned, make the following
adjustment.
4. Remove three screws [1], and remove the punch kit cover [2].
[2]

[1]
5. Loosen four screws [1] and move the punch kit to the left or right
[1] by the amount that needs to be corrected referring to the mark [2].
• Wider at the rear [3]: Move the punch kit to the left.
• Wider at the front [4]: Move the punch kit to the right.

[2]

[3] [4]

6. Make copies in punch mode again and check that punch holes are not on the slanted line.

19.1.2 Centering adjustment of the punch kit

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• Centering is not correct in punching.

I-315
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PK-516

(2) Procedure
1. Insert a piece of paper [1] into the finisher’s interlock to turn it ON.

[1]

2. Place approx. 10 sheets of A4 paper on the manual feed tray and make copies in punch mode.
3. When the machine is punching, the connecting plate [1] stops.
Check the alignment between the middle line (among the three
lines on the connecting plate) and the plate [2] shown in the
[1] illustration.

[2]

4. If the punch holes are misaligned significantly, make the following adjustment.
5. Remove two screws [1] and slide the finisher as shown in the
illustration.

[1]

I-316
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PK-516
6. Loosen two screws [1] each and move the two mounting plates [2]
[3]
backward or frontward by the amount that corrects misalignment.
• If the plate [3] is off to the backward: Move the mounting plate
[1]
[2] to the backward.
• If the plate [3] is off to the frontward: Move the mounting plate
[2] to the frontward.

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

7. Make copies in punch mode with paper fed from each tray and perform a check as shown in step 3.
8. If punch holes are still deviated from the appropriate position, make centering adjustment in each tray.

I-317
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-508

20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-508

20.1 Paper exit section
20.1.1 Second fold position adjustment
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• In the tri-fold mode, the width “b” between the 1st and 2nd folds is not within the specified range.

(2) Procedure

c
a

b
1. Adjust [Tri-Fold Position] in service mode.
I.10.18.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position
2. Check the width of the second fold position “b.”
Standard value
Folding position Standard
A4S 8.5 x 11S 16KS
a 96 mm 90.4 mm 89 mm ±1 mm
b 101 mm 95.4 mm 94 mm ±2 mm
c Not specified

3. If the width “b” is not appropriate, follow the steps below for adjustment.
4. Open the front door.
5. Draw out the saddle unit.
6. Open the tri-folding stopper.
7. Loosen two screws [1], and adjust the tri-folding stopper position.
• To make width a greater: Lower the tri-folding stopper.
• To make width a smaller: Raise the tri-folding stopper.

[1]

8. Make copies again and check the second fold position “b” deviate.

20.1.2 Adjustment for Staple Clinch Failure

(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When there is a problem in clinching of the stapler.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to let FS fall down when removing FS from the main body and pulling out the stacker unit from
FS. It may cause the injury.

I-318
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-508

(2) Procedure
1. Make a copy in the staple mode.
2. Check there is failures in clinching staples as described below.
• There is the bucking [1] of the staple.
• The floating [2] of the staple is more than the standard value (L
[1]
= 1 mm).
• The bending height [3] of the staple is more than the standard
value (L = 0.7 mm).
L
[2] 3. If clinching performance is out of the above specifications, make
L=1mm
the following adjustment.

L L=0.5mm
[3]

4. Remove the saddle unit.

G.4.9.4 Saddle unit (SD-508)
5. Remove the right cover.
G.4.9.2 Right cover (SD-508)
6. Remove the staple cartridge.
7. Loosen four screws [1] located on the clincher side of the stapler
[1]
unit.

[1]

8. Install the stapler positioning jig [1] onto the cartridge setting
section.

[1]

I-319
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-508
9. Adjust the clincher position so that the two pins [1] of the stapler
positioning jig are inserted in the positioning holes [3] of the
clincher [2].

[3]

[2]

[3]

[1]

10. Tighten four screws that were loosened in step 7.

11. Remove the stapler positioning jig.
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

I-320
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PI-505

21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-505

21.1 PI displacement adjustment (with PK-516 installed)
21.1.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• When the punch position is displaced when feeding from PI.
NOTE
• Punch hole deviation correction must be completed before making this adjustment.
I.19.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction
• Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2/3/4 must be completed before making this adjustment.
I.14.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2
I.14.2.4 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4
• In the PI displacement adjustment, adjust the tray /Up, and then adjust the tray /Lw.

21.1.2 Procedure
(1) In the upper tray case
1. Set three sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half at the center and check the misalignment of the punch holes.
3. Release the hook [1], and remove the adjustment cover [2].
[2]

[1]

4. Loosen two adjustment screws [1] on the side guide plate /Rr [2]
and slide the side guide plate /Rr twice as long as the
misalignment of the punch hole position (for example, if the
misalignment is 1.5 mm to the rear, slide 3 mm to the rear).
1 index: 2 mm
[2]

[1]

5. Fully tighten the adjustment screws to secure the side guide plate /Rr.
6. For the tray /Lw, reinstall the side guide plate /Rr with two screws.
7. Repeat step 1 to 6 until the misalignment of the punch holes is corrected.
8. Reinstall the adjustment cover.
9. In the service mode, perform [Post Inserter Adjustment.].
I.10.18.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment

(2) In the lower tray case

1. Set three sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half at the center and check the misalignment of the punch holes.
3. Remove the adjustment cover in the same way as the upper tray
[2] case.
Remove two screws [1], slide the side guide plate /Rr [2] to the
front, and remove it.

[1]

I-321
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PI-505
4. Loosen two adjustment screws [1] on the side guide plate /Rr [2]
and slide the side guide plate /Rr twice as long as the
misalignment of the punch hole position (for example, if the
misalignment is 1.5 mm to the rear, slide 3 mm to the rear).
1 index: 2 mm
[2]

[1]

5. Fully tighten the adjustment screws to secure the side guide plate /Rr.
6. For the tray /Lw, reinstall the side guide plate /Rr with two screws.
7. Repeat step 1 to 6 until the misalignment of the punch holes is corrected.
8. Reinstall the adjustment cover.
9. In the service mode, perform [Post Inserter Adjustment.].
I.10.18.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment

21.2 PI tilt adjustment (with PK-516 installed)

21.2.1 Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• If the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.

21.2.2 Procedure
1. Set three sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in the punch mode as samples.
[1] [2] 2. Fold the sheets in half and check the tilt of the punch holes.
[1]: The front is wider
[2]: The back is wider

3. Open the front door of finisher, and then loosen the screw [2] of the
guide plate [1].
4. Adjust the guide plate [1] in accordance with the misalignment of
the punch holes by referring to the mark [3].
• The back is wider: Move to [4]
• The front is wider: Move to [5]
5. Tighten the screw [2].

[1]

[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
6. Repeat step 1 to 5 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.

I-322
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 PK-517

22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-517

22.1 Punch section
22.1.1 Punch hole deviation correction
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The punch holes are on a slanted line.

(2) Procedure
1. Set the mode to Punch mode for printing.
2. Hold the output paper half and check the displacement of the
punch hole.
Standard value: 0 ± 2.0 mm

3. In case the figure exceeds the above mentioned standard value, follow the procedures shown below.
4. Open the upper cover [1].
[1]

5. Loosen two screws [1].

[1]

6. Move the punch unit forward or backward for adjustment referring

[1]
the mark-off line [1].

I-323
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-509

23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-509

23.1 Paper exit section
23.1.1 Half-fold skew adjustment
(1) Purpose
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• Fold line goes off the tolerance in the half-fold mode.

(2) Procedure
1. Make a copy in the half-fold mode.
2. Unfold the paper that exits the machine and lay the paper with the
ridge facing up.

Exit direction

3. Confirm the skew of the fold line [1] of the output copy sample
[A1] [1] (Widths of A1 and A2)
Standard value: A1-A2=±1.0 mm
4. In case the figure exceeds the above mentioned standard value,
follow the adjustment procedures below.

[A2]
5. Open the front door of the finisher.
6. Pull the saddle unit.
7. Remove the screw [1], and pull the saddle unit out completely.

[1]

8. Slide down the movable part [1] of the right rail and remove the
[1]
screw [2].

[2]

I-324
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-509
9. Push down the right rail [2] until the two notches [1] are visible as
[1] [2]
shown in the illustration below.
10. Loosen two screws [3].

[3]

11. Loosen three screws [1].

[1] [1] [1]

[3] [1]
12. Incline the stopper [2] forward or backward according to the skew
of the crease using the shoulder screw [1] as the supporting point.
NOTE
• Push the driver or equivalent into the cover hole [3] to
incline the stopper [2].

[2]

In case the cease [1] skews as the right side: • In case the cease [1] skews as shown in the illustration:
Incline the stopper backward.
[1] • In case the cease [1] skews as shown in the illustration:
Incline the stopper forward.

In case the cease [1] skews as the left side:

[1]

I-325
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-509
13. Move the stopper [1] up and down to confirm that the stopper’s
light blocking plate [2] does not touch the inner surfaces of the
sensor slit [3].
14. In case of <NG>, take the following step.

[3]

[1]

<OK> [2]

[3]

<NG>

<NG>

[1] 15. Raise the stopper [1] and loosen the screw [2] that holds the
sensor mounting plate.

[2] 
[2] 16. To make the light blocking plate pass the center of the sensor slit
[1], move the sensor mounting plate [2] from side to side and
adjust the mounting plate’s position.

[1]

I-326
 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 SD-509
17. Lower the stopper [1] and confirm that the state is that of <OK>.

[1]

[1] 18. Raise the stopper [1] again and tighten the screw [2] that was
loosened in step 15.
19. Make the copy sample again to confirm the cease skew.
20. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

[2] 

I-327
bizhub 652/552/602/502

J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE
• There are two ways to update the firmware: One is by directly connecting with the main body using the USB memory device, and the
other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW.
NOTE
• The settings in the "Utility" mode and the "Service Mode" will not be changed, when the firmware is updated.
1. Touch [BootRom] in the firmware update item display, and touch [START].
2. Check the message “BootRom Update completed successfully”, and touch [OK].
3. Rewrite the firmware data.
4. Select [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Install Data], and update the movie data to the new version.
I.10.11.19 Install Data
5. When operating the machine with the function version 2 or 3, select [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting] and
change the function version of the machine.
(When operating the machine without updating the function version, this setting is unnecessary.)
I.10.11.6 Software Switch Setting
6. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
7. Install the loadable device driver as occasion demands.
I.12.3.4.(2) Device 2
8. Install the OCR dictionary data for the searchable PDF as occasion demands.
I.10.11.20 Bluetooth Settings

J-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. Confirming the firmware version

1. Confirming the firmware version

1.1 Procedure
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Select the [Firmware Version].
3. Check if the firmware version is updated.
NOTE
• After conducting firmware updating, check the firmware version No. and confirm that the firmware has been normally updated.

J-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. USB memory

2. USB memory
NOTE
• USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch off.
• When updating the firmware, use the service port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another service port.

2.1 Preparation
Conditions for USB memory which can be used for updating the firmware are as follows:
• Without security function added (security function can be turned off)
• Memory with 1 GB to 2 GB are recommended (One with 4 GB or more may not operate)
• Corresponds to USB 2.0
• Formatted with FAT32 type
• A USB flash memory that appears as multiple drives on a computer cannot be used.

2.2 Procedure
1. Connect the USB to the PC, and copy the firmware data to the USB memory.
NOTE
• The firmware data to be updated must be copied to the root directory with the file name “A2WUFW.tar”.

• More than one firmware data with a single model or multiple models can be stored in the USB memory. (Maximum of fifteen
files)
When storing more than one firmware data, make a folder with a name “(model code) FW” (“A2WUFW” for this machine) right
under the root directory. (File names can be set arbitrarily)
• When making a folder and storing more than one firmware data, it is also necessary to copy the firmware data “A2WUFW. tar”
to the root directly.

2. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
3. Remove the screw [1].
4. Loosen the screw [2], and lift up the cover [3] of the service port.
5. Insert the USB memory device to the service port [4] for service.
[2] [3] [4]

[1]

NOTE
• USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch off.
• When updating the firmware, use the service port for the service.
It cannot be updated when connected to another service port.

6. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
7. Control panel shows F/W items to be updated, and select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].)

J-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. USB memory

F/W to be updated Appropriate board Remark

MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER MFP board (MFPB)
PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB)
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
ADF (DF-M) DF control board (DFCB)
FINISHER FNS control board (FSCB) Only when the FS-526/527 is mounted
RU Transfer control board (TRCB)
ZU ZU control board (ZUCB) Only when the ZU-606 is mounted
SD SD drive board (SDDB) Only when the SD-509 is mounted
DSC1 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted
DSC2 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted
NOTE
• Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is automatically updated after 30 seconds when the main
power switch/sub power switch is turned on.
• When the BootRom file is in the firmware data, [RootRom] key is displayed. Pressing the key updates data.
• When more than one firmware are stored in step 1, pressing [FW Data Select] enables selection. (Data of other models cannot
be selected.)
(Data with * at the left top of data selection screen will be the default data copied to the root directly in the USB memory.)

8. Press the [START]. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.)
9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly ([Downloading Completed]). Check
also the check sum value ([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (The Start key lights blue.)
10. Turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
11. Remove the USB memory device, and fix the cover of the USB port using a screw.
12. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch.
NOTE
• When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally
updated.
In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number
input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

J-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. USB memory

13. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

14. Select [Firmware Version].
15. Make sure if the version of firmware is updated.

2.3 Action when data transfer fails

• If “NG” appears on the control panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the
following steps.
1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.
2. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the USB memory for a new one and try another rewriting sequence.
3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused “NG” and carry out data rewriting procedure.
F/W to be updated Appropriate board Remark
MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER MFP board (MFPB)
PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB)
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
ADF (DF-M) DF control board (DFCB)
FINISHER FNS control board (FSCB) Only when the FS-526/527 is mounted
RU Transfer control board (TRCB)
ZU ZU control board (ZUCB) Only when the ZU-606 is mounted
SD SD drive board (SDDB) Only when the SD-509 is mounted
DSC1 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted
DSC2 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted

J-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. Internet ISW

3. Internet ISW
3.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting
3.1.1 Outline
• [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body
will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating. With the Internet ISW, the firmware can be
updated when the CE is at the user’s without firmware data.

3.1.2 Service environment

The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function.
• The main body is connected to such a network environment that the firmware can be downloaded on the internet using the ftp or http
protocol.
The “Internet ISW” will not operate under the following conditions.
• Main power switch is set to OFF.
• Sub power switch is set to OFF.
• When the following setting is set to “ON”:
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• Machine is operating, or there are jobs present (including appointed jobs).
• Machine is in idle with suspended job
• Paper jam has occurred
• Image file is in the memory
• Model or the circuit board of the program does not match

3.1.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting

• For using the Internet ISW, the network parameter, program server address as well as firewall address need to be set to the main body.
I.10.19 Internet ISW

(1) Internet ISW Set

1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [Internet ISW].

3. Touch [ON], and touch [END].

NOTE
• Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this setting.
• When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting.
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

(2) Protocol setting

• It performs the setting concerning the protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW.
• When connecting to the program server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a proxy server.

(a) Connecting by http

1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].
2. Data Input Setting
• Touch [HTTP Setting], and select [ON].
3. Connect Proxy
• For connecting via proxy server, select [ON].
4. Proxy Server
• For connecting via proxy server, set the proxy server address and the port number.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the proxy server address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for the proxy server from 1 through 65535.

J-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. Internet ISW

5. Proxy Authentication
• Set the login name and the password which may be necessary for authentication when accessing to the proxy server.
1. When Authentication is necessary for accessing to the proxy server, select [Authentication], and select [ON].
2. Select [Log-in Name], and enter the login name on the on-screen keyboard.
3. Select [Password], and enter the password on the on-screen keyboard.
6. Connection Time-Out
• Select [Connection Time-Out], and set the time for the connection time out between 30 and 300 seconds.

(b) Connecting by ftp

1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].
2. Data Input Setting
• Touch [FTP Setting], and select [ON].
3. Connect Proxy
• For connecting via proxy server, select [ON].
4. Proxy Server
• For connecting via proxy server, set the proxy server address and the port number.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the proxy server address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for the proxy server from 1 through 65535.
5. Connection Setting
• Perform the setting for accessing FTP server.
1. Select [Port Number], and set the port number for FTP server from 1 through 65535.
2. Select [Connection Time Out], and set the time for the connection time out from 1 through 60.
3. When connecting in PASV mode, select [PASV Mode], and select [ON].
NOTE
• PASV Mode:
This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as
inside the firewall. Since with PASV mode, the client with restriction sets the port number, data transmission port
can be secured to enable the file transmission.

(3) Forwarding access setting

• To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data.
1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].
2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting].

3. Select [User ID], and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the program server on the on-screen keyboard, and touch
[END].
4. Select [Password], and enter the password which is necessary for connecting to the program server on the on-screen keyboard, and
touch [END].
5. Select [URL], and enter the directory which stores the program server address and the firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL
method, and touch [END].
NOTE
• Enter the URL which matches to the protocol to be used.
When connecting to http://(host name or IP address)/directory name or https://(host name or IP address)/directory
http name
When connecting to ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name
ftp

6. Select [File Name], and enter the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END].
7. Touch [END] to finish setting.

J-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. Internet ISW

3.2 Firmware rewriting from the control panel

3.2.1 Firmware rewriting from the control panel
NOTE
• When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission beforehand.
• DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading.

(1) Conducting rewriting on the control panel

1. Perform the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Download]
2. Touch [ISW Start].

3. The main body will automatically start running, and it starts accessing the server.
4. Control panel shows F/W items to be updated, and select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].)

F/W to be updated Appropriate board Remark

MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB)
SCANNER MFP board (MFPB)
PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB)
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) Only when the FK-502 is mounted
ADF (DF-M) DF control board (DFCB)
FINISHER FNS control board (FSCB) Only when the FS-526/527 is mounted
RU Transfer control board (TRCB)
ZU ZU control board (ZUCB) Only when the ZU-606 is mounted
SD SD drive board (SDDB) Only when the SD-509 is mounted
DSC1 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted
DSC2 DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted

J-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. Internet ISW

NOTE
• Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is updated after 30 seconds when the unit has restarted.

(2) During firmware updating

1. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data.

(3) Completed or failed

(a) Firmware updated normally
1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return
to the main screen.

(b) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble

1. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network, an error code and the message will be displayed.
2. Restart the main body in auto or manual mode, and touch [OK]. It can be used with the firmware version before conducting updating.
3. Check the settings for the network by error codes, and try updating again.
K.5.1 Error code list for the Internet ISW

(c) Failing to update the firmware after downloading has started

1. Once firmware updating has started, the ROM in the main body will be deleted.
When it failed right after updating has started, restart the main body, and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading.
2. When updating on the control panel, touch [settings] on the standby screen, and check the Network settings again.
Touch [Download], and restart the Internet ISW.
NOTE
• Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the main power switch OFF/ON if the firmware is not updated.
• Firmware can be updated with the USB memory with the main power switch OFF.

J-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 4. CS Remote Care

4. CS Remote Care
4.1 Firmware rewriting from the CS Remote Care
• For detailed error information relating to CS Remote Care, refer to “I.10.6 CS Remote Care (Outlines)”
• For the firmware update procedure using CS Remote Care, refer to CS Remote Care Center Manual.

J-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

K TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM CODE
JAM DISPLAY
(1) JAM DISPLAY
• When the paper jam occurred, the message, the position jam occurred (number blinks), position of the remaining paper (number lights
up), and the JAM code are displayed.
NOTE
• JAM code is displayed on the jam warning screen only when the following setting is set to "Display."
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [JAM Code Display Setting]

(2) Misfeed display resetting procedure

• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfed, and close the door.

1.1 List of the JAM code

JAM code JAM type Ref. page
10-01 Manual bypass feed section K.1.5.1 10-01, 10-02, 10-10, 10-40
10-02
10-10
10-40
11-01 Tray 1 feed section K.1.5.2 11-01, 11-02, 11-40
11-02
11-40
12-01 Tray 2 feed section K.1.5.3 12-01, 12-40
12-40
13-01 Tray 3 feed section K.1.5.4 13-01, 13-40
13-40
14-01 Tray 4 feed section K.1.5.5 14-01, 14-40
14-40
15-01 LCT feed section K.1.5.6 15-01, 15-40
15-40
17-08 LCT transport section K.1.5.7 17-08, 17-20
17-20
17-09 Tray 3/4 horizontal transport section K.1.5.8 17-09, 17-30, 17-31
17-30
17-31
17-10 Tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section K.1.5.9 17-10, 17-11, 17-40, 17-41
17-11
17-40
17-41
20-01 Vertical transport section K.1.6.1 20-01, 20-02, 20-03, 20-10, 20-11, 20-12, 20-20
20-02
20-03

K-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

JAM code JAM type Ref. page

20-10
20-11
20-12
20-20
30-01 2nd transfer section K.1.7.1 30-01, 30-02, 30-03
30-02
30-03
32-01 Exit section K.1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-30
32-05
32-30
66-01 ADF turnover section K.1.8.1 66-01, 66-11, 66-21
66-11
66-21
66-02 ADF paper feed section K.1.8.2 66-02, 66-12
66-12
66-03 ADF transport section K.1.8.3 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33
66-13
66-23
66-33
66-04 ADF paper exit section K.1.8.4 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34
66-14
66-24
66-34
66-05 ADF image reading section K.1.8.5 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15
66-06
66-07
66-15
72-11 FS transport section K.1.9.1 72-11
72-13 K.1.9.2 72-13
72-14 K.1.9.3 72-14
72-15 K.1.9.4 72-15
72-16 K.1.9.5 72-16
72-17 K.1.9.6 72-17
72-18 K.1.9.7 72-18
72-19 K.1.9.8 72-19
72-21 K.1.9.9 72-21
72-22 K.1.9.10 72-22
72-23 K.1.9.11 72-23
72-25 SD exit section K.1.9.12 72-25, 72-26
72-26
72-31 JS exit section K.1.9.13 72-31, 72-34
72-34
72-35 PI section K.1.9.14 72-35
72-38 ZU section K.1.9.15 72-38
72-39 K.1.9.16 72-39
72-40 K.1.9.17 72-40
72-41 K.1.9.18 72-41, 72-42
72-42
72-43 PK section K.1.9.19 72-43
72-44 ZU section K.1.9.20 72-44
72-45 K.1.9.21 72-45
72-46 K.1.9.22 72-46
72-47 K.1.9.23 72-47
72-49 PI section K.1.9.24 72-49
72-50 K.1.9.25 72-50
72-51 K.1.9.26 72-51
72-60 ZU section K.1.9.27 72-60
72-61 K.1.9.28 72-61

K-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

JAM code JAM type Ref. page

72-62 K.1.9.29 72-62
72-64 K.1.9.30 72-64
72-81 FS staple section K.1.9.31 72-81
72-84 SD staple section K.1.9.32 72-84
72-85 K.1.9.33 72-85
72-86 SD transport section K.1.9.34 72-86
72-87 K.1.9.35 72-87
72-90 FS section K.1.9.36 72-90
75-42 RU section K.1.9.37 75-42
75-43 K.1.9.38 75-43
92-01 Duplex pre-registration section K.1.10.1 92-01, 92-02, 92-03, 92-40
92-02
92-03
92-40
93-01 Duplex transport section K.1.10.2 93-01, 93-10
93-10
99-01 Controller JAM K.1.10.3 99-01

1.2 JAM that do not display the JAM code

JAM type Detection timing Ref. page
Tray 1 feed section The tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is turned ON when the main power K.1.5.2 11-01, 11-02, 11-40
switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
Tray 2 feed section Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is turned ON when the main power K.1.5.3 12-01, 12-40
switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
Tray 3 feed section Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is blocked when the main power switch is K.1.5.4 13-01, 13-40
turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
Tray 4 feed section Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) is unblocked when the main power switch is K.1.5.5 14-01, 14-40
turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
Tray 3/4 horizontal Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is blocked when the main power switch is K.1.5.8 17-09, 17-30, 17-31
transport section turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
Tray 3/4 intermediate The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is turned ON when the main power switch K.1.5.9 17-10, 17-11, 17-40,
transport roller section is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction 17-41
is reset.
2nd image transfer section • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is unblocked when the main power switch is K.1.7.1 30-01, 30-02, 30-03
turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction
is reset.
• The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is turned ON when the main power switch
is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
Exit section The exhaust sensor (PC39) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned K.1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-30
ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Duplex transport section ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) is blocked, or ADU paper passage sensor/ K.1.10.2 93-01, 93-10
2 (PS48) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.

K-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

1.3 Sensor layout

1.3.1 bizhub 652/602/552/502

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]
[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[12] [11]

[1] Paper exit sensor (PS39) [2] ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)
[3]* Timing roller sensor (PS38) [3]* OHP detection sensor (PS40)
[4] ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) [5] Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
[6] Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5) [7] Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
[8] Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13) [9] Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
[10] Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) [11] Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)
[12] Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
• *: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3].

1.3.2 ADF

[5] [1]
[4]

[3] [2]

[1] Exit sensor (PS5) [2] Reverse registration sensor (PS8)

[3] Before read sensor (PS9) [4] Registration sensor (PS3)
[5] After separate sensor (PS4)

K-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

1.3.3 LU-204/LU-301

[1]

[2]

[1] Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) [2] Paper feed sensor (PS3)

1.3.4 ZU-606

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] Paper size detect board (PSDTB) [2] Paper pass sensor (PS202)
[3] Exit sensor (PS609) [4] Conveyance sensor (PS601)

K-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

1.3.5 FS-526/PK-516/SD-508

[8]
[1]
[2]

[7]

[3]

[4]
[6]

[5]

[1] Paper pass sensor (PS202) [2] Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2)
[3] PK punch home sensor (PS301) [4] FNS pass sensor (PS1)
[5] SD exit sensor/PR (PS29) [6] 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
[7] 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15) [8] Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)

1.3.6 JS-602

[1]

[1] Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402)

K-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

1.3.7 PI-505

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) [2] Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
[3] FNS pass sensor (PS1)

1.3.8 FS-527/PK-517/SD-509/JS-603

[4]

[3] [1]
[2]

[10]

[9]

[5]

[8]
[6]

[7]

[1] Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) [2] Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
[3] Registration sensor (PS10) [4] Tray2 path sensor (PS6)
[5] Saddle path sensor (PS11) [6] Paper sensor/1 (PS43)

K-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

[7] Paper sensor/2 (PS44) [8] Lower path sensor (PS9)

[9] Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16) [10] Upper path sensor (PS8)

1.4 Initial check items

• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item Action
Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
worn?
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the Set as necessary.
paper?
Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.

1.5 1*-**
1.5.1 10-01, 10-02, 10-10, 10-40
(1) Contents
JAM type Manual bypass feed section
JAM code 10-01, 10-02, 10-10, 10-40
Detection timing The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) even after the
10-01
lapse of a given period of time after the manual bypass starts to feed paper.
For paper fed from the manual bypass, loop forming has not been complete before a sheet enters the
10-02 timing roller because the rise timing of load to perform registration is earlier than the rise timing of load to
form a loop.
• The bypass paper limit sensor (PS35) is not blocked after the lapse of a predetermined period of time
after the paper lifting plate is started to be raised from the standby position to the paper feed position.
10-10 • For paper fed from the manual bypass tray, the bypass paper lower sensor (PS36) is not blocked after
the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the paper lifting plate is started to be lowered from
the paper feed position to the standby position.
For paper fed from the manual bypass, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
10-40
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Misfeed processing Manual bypass tray door
location
Relevant parts • Bypass paper feed motor (M27)
• Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
• Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
• Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS4 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN11-8 (ON) Q-2
3 PS35 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN6<B>-10 (ON) Q-12
4 PS36 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN6<A>-11 (ON) Q-11
5 M27 operation check PFTDB CN6<B>-1 to 4 Q-11
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.2 11-01, 11-02, 11-40

(1) Contents
JAM type Tray 1 feed section
JAM code 11-01, 11-02, 11-40
Detection timing The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) even after the
11-01
lapse of a given period of time after the tray1 starts to feed paper.
For paper fed from the tray1, due to a delay in paper arrival, loop forming in front of the timing roller is
11-02
not complete before the rise timing of the registration motor.
For paper fed from the tray1, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
11-40
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.

K-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

The tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON, a door
-
or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Manual bypass tray door
location
Relevant parts • Take-up motor (M22)
• Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
• Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS4 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN11-8 (ON) Q-2
3 CL1 operation check PFTDB CN11-14 (REM) Q-2 to 3
4 M22 operation check PFTDB CN8-5 to 8 X-12
5 PFTDB ICP1 or ICP3 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.3 12-01, 12-40

(1) Contents
JAM type Tray 2 feed section
JAM code 12-01, 12-40
Detection timing The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) even after the
12-01
lapse of a given period of time after the tray2 starts to feed paper.
For paper fed from the tray2, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
12-40
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON, a door
-
or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Lower right door
location
Relevant parts • Take-up motor (M22)
• Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2)
• Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS12 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON) Q-4
3 CL2 operation check PFTDB CN10<A>-1 (REM) Q-3
4 M22 operation check PFTDB CN8-5 to 8 X-12
5 PFTDB ICP1 or ICP3 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.4 13-01, 13-40

(1) Contents
JAM type Tray 3 feed section
JAM code 13-01, 13-40
Detection timing The leading edge of the paper does not block the tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) even after the lapse of
13-01
a given period of time after the tray 3 starts to feed paper.
For paper fed from the tray3, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
13-40
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is
-
opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit
location
Relevant parts • Transport motor (M25)

K-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

• Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)

• Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS21 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN16-9 (ON) X-6
3 CL5 operation check PFTDB CN15-5 (REM) X-5
4 M25 operation check PFTDB CN13-6 (LOCK) X-11
5 PFTDB ICP4 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.5 14-01, 14-40

(1) Contents
JAM type Tray 4 feed section
JAM code 14-01, 14-40
Detection timing The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) even after the lapse
14-01
of a given period of time after the tray 4 starts to feed paper.
For paper fed from the tray4, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
14-40
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or
-
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Lower right door
location
Relevant parts • Transport motor (M25)
• Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7)
• Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS26 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN18-3 (ON) X-7 to 8
3 CL7 operation check PFTDB CN17-2 (REM) X-7
4 M25 operation check PFTDB CN13-6 (LOCK) X-11
5 PFTDB ICP4 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.6 15-01, 15-40

(1) Contents
JAM type LCT feed section
JAM code 15-01, 15-40
Detection timing The leading edge of the paper does not block the paper feed sensor (PS3) even after the lapse of a
15-01
given period of time after the LCT starts to feed paper.
For paper fed from the LCT, the image write start signal permit continues to be disabled for a
15-40
predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Misfeed processing Lower right door
location
Relevant parts • Paper feed motor (M2)
• Paper feed sensor (PS3)
• LU drive board (LUDB)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -

K-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component

2 PS3 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-8 (ON) LU-204/LU-301 G-4
3 M2 operation check LUDB CN4-5 to 6 LU-204/LU-301 G-3
4 Change LUDB (LU-204/LU-301) - -
5 PFTDB ICP1 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of LU-204 (PDF format, 1.0MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of LU-301 (PDF format, 1.0MB)

1.5.7 17-08, 17-20

(1) Contents
JAM type LCT transport section
JAM code 17-08, 17-20
Detection timing The paper feed sensor (PS3) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it turns
17-08
ON.
The Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is not turn ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
17-20
after the paper feed sensor (PS3) turns ON.
Misfeed processing Lower right door
location
Relevant parts • Paper feed sensor (PS3)
• Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
• LU drive board (LUDB)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS3 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-8 (ON) LU-204/LU-301 G-4
3 PS12 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON) Q-4
4 Change LUDB (LU-204/LU-301) - -
5 PFTDB ICP1 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of LU-204 (PDF format, 1.0MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of LU-301 (PDF format, 1.0MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of bizhub 652/602/552/502 (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.8 17-09, 17-30, 17-31

(1) Contents
JAM type Tray 3/4 horizontal transport section
JAM code 17-09, 17-30, 17-31
Detection timing The tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after
17-09
the paper has blocked the PS21.
The horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after
17-30
the paper has blocked the tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21).
The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
17-31
after the paper has blocked the horizontal transport sensor (PS29).
Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover
-
is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit
location
Relevant parts • Transport motor (M25)
• Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6)
• Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)
• Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
• Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS21 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN16-9 (ON) X-6
3 PS29 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN14-13 (ON) X-10

K-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component

4 CL3 operation check PFTDB CN14-5 (REM) X-9
5 CL6 operation check PFTDB CN16-10 (REM) X-6
6 M25 operation check PFTDB CN13-6 (LOCK) X-11
7 PFTDB ICP4 or ICP5 conduction check - -
8 Change PFTDB - -
9 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.5.9 17-10, 17-11, 17-40, 17-41

(1) Contents
JAM type Tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section
JAM code 17-10, 17-11, 17-40, 17-41
Detection timing A sheet of paper does not block the tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) after a predetermined period of time
17-10
has elapsed since the sheet unblocks the PS26.
A sheet of paper does not unblock the horizontal transport sensor (PS29) after a predetermined period
17-11
of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the PS29.
A sheet of paper does not turn ON the intermediate roller sensor (PS28) after a predetermined period of
17-40
time has elapsed since the sheet unblocks the tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26).
A sheet of paper does not turn ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) after a predetermined
17-41
period of time has elapsed since the sheet turns ON the intermediate roller sensor (PS28).
The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or
-
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing • Lower right door
location • Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit
Relevant parts • Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
• Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26)
• Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
• Horizontal Transport sensor (PS29)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• Transport motor (M25)
• Vertical transport motor (M26)
• Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7)
• Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS12 check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON) Q-4
3 PS26 check, sensor check PFTDB CN18-3 (ON) X-7 to 8
4 PS28 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN14-15 (ON) X-10
5 PS29 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN14-13 (ON) X-10
6 CL3 operation check PFTDB CN14-5 (REM) X-9
7 M25 operation check PFTDB CN13-6 (LOCK) X-11
8 M26 operation check PFTDB CN12-1 to 4 X-10 to 11
9 M7 operation check PFTDB CN8-9 to 12 X-12
10 PFTDB ICP1 conduction check - -
11 Change PFTDB - -
12 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.6 2*-**
1.6.1 20-01, 20-02, 20-03, 20-10, 20-11, 20-12, 20-20
(1) Contents
JAM type Vertical transport section
JAM code 20-01, 20-02, 20-03, 20-10, 20-11, 20-12, 20-20
Detection timing The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the
20-01
paper has turned ON the tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4).
For paper fed from the tray 1/2/3/4 or LCT loop forming has not been complete before a sheet enters the
20-02 timing roller because the rise timing of load to perform registration is earlier than the rise timing of load to
form a loop.

K-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after
20-03
the paper has turned ON the tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4).
The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of
20-10
time after the paper has turned ON the PS4.
The tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of
20-11
time after the paper has turned ON the PS12.
The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after
20-12
the paper has unblocked the PS28.
The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time
20-20
after the paper has turned ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12).
Misfeed processing • Manual bypass tray door
location • Lower right door
Relevant parts • Tray 1 vertical transport motor (M5)
• Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7)
• Vertical transport motor (M26)
• Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
• Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
• Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
• Timing roller sensor (PS38)
• OHP detection sensor (PS40)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS4 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN11-8 (ON) Q-2
3 PS12 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON) Q-4
4 PS28 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN14-15 (ON) X-10
5 PS38 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-6 (ON) Q-5
6 PS40 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-2 (ON) Q-4 to 5
7 M5 operation check PFTDB CN8-1 to 4 X-11
8 M7 operation check PFTDB CN8-9 to 12 X-12
9 Change PFTDB - -
10 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.7 3*-**
1.7.1 30-01, 30-02, 30-03
(1) Contents
JAM type 2nd transfer section
JAM code 30-01, 30-02, 30-03
Detection timing A sheet of paper does not block the timing roller sensor (PS38) after a predetermined period of time has
30-01
elapsed since the sheet unblocks PS38.
A sheet of paper does not turn OFF the OHP detection sensor (PS40) after a predetermined period of
30-02
time has elapsed since the sheet turns ON the PS40.
The leading edge of paper does not unblock the exhaust sensor (PS39) since the registration motor (M2)
30-03
is activated.
• The timing roller sensor (PS38) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
-
• The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or
cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Upper right door
location
Relevant parts • Registration motor (M2)
• Fusing motor (M30)
• Timing roller sensor (PS38)
• OHP detection sensor (PS40)
• Paper exit sensor (PS39)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -

K-13
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component

2 PS38 check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-6 (ON) Q-5
3 PS40 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-2 (ON) Q-4 to 5
4 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) Q-5
5 M2 operation check PFTDB CN9-1 to 4 Q-9
M30 operation check PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
6 K-10
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
7 Change PFTDB - -
8 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.7.2 32-01, 32-05, 32-30

(1) Contents
JAM type Exit section
JAM code 32-01, 32-05, 32-30
Detection timing The ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time
32-01
after the switchback sequence is started.
The exhaust sensor (PC39) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper
32-05
has unblocked PC39.
32-30 Fusing roller had a trouble rotating while printing.
The exhaust sensor (PC39) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is
-
opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Upper right door
location
Relevant parts • Exit motor (M4)
• Fusing motor (M30)
• Switchback motor (M33)
• Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
• Paper exit sensor (PS39)
• ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) Q-5
3 PS47 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN3-3 (ON) Q-7
4 M4 operation check PRCB CN18-17 to 20 C-14
M30 operation check PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
5 K-10
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
6 M33 operation check PRCB CN18-13 to 16 C-14
7 SD1 operation check PRCB CN18-7 (REM) C-13
8 Change PFTDB - -
9 PFTDB ICP7 conduction check - -
10 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.8 6*-**
1.8.1 66-01, 66-11, 66-21
(1) Contents
JAM type ADF turnover section
JAM code 66-01, 66-11, 66-21
Detection timing The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the reverse regist
66-01
motion is performed.
The reverse registration sensor (PS8) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the reverse
66-11
regist motion is performed.
The reverse registration sensor (PS8) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the before read
66-21
sensor (PS9) is turned OFF.
Misfeed processing Transportation cover
location
Relevant parts • Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5)
• Before read sensor (PS9)

K-14
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

• Reverse registration sensor (PS8)

• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS9 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ14-8 (ON) DF-618 B-6
3 PS8 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ12-2 (ON) DF-618 I-3
4 M5 operation check DFCB PJ6-10 to 11 DF-618 I-7
5 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

1.8.2 66-02, 66-12

(1) Contents
JAM type ADF paper feed section
JAM code 66-02, 66-12
Detection timing The after separate sensor (PS4) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the take-up motor
66-02
(M2) is turned ON.
The size of the original on the tray detected by ADF does not match the size of the original detected by
66-12
the main unit.
Misfeed processing Transportation cover
location
Relevant parts • Take-up motor (M2)
• After separate sensor (PS4)
• Length sensor/1 (PS10)
• Length sensor/2 (PS11)
• Length sensor/3 (PS12)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS4 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ11-5 (ON) DF-618 B-5
3 PS10 I/O check, sensor check REYB PJ5-12 (ON) DF-618 K to L-8
4 PS11 I/O check, sensor check REYB PJ5-8 (ON) DF-618 K to L-9
5 PS12 I/O check, sensor check REYB PJ5-6 (ON) DF-618 K to L-9
6 M2 operation check DFCB PJ8-5 to 10 DF-618 I-6
7 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

1.8.3 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33

(1) Contents
JAM type ADF transport section
JAM code 66-03, 66-13, 66-23, 66-33
Detection timing The after separate sensor (PS4) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it
66-03
turns ON.
The registration sensor (PS3) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the after separate
66-13
sensor (PS4) is turned ON.
The registration sensor (PS3) is not turned OFF after a lapse of given time after the after separate
66-23
sensor (PS4) is turned OFF.
The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the registration sensor
66-33
(PS3) is turned ON.
Misfeed processing Transportation cover
location
Relevant parts • Registration motor (M7)
• Take-up motor (M2)
• Registration sensor (PS3)
• After separate sensor (PS4)
• Before read sensor (PS9)
• DF control board (DFCB)

K-15
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
Adjust the height of the guide support for the original
2 - -
glass moving unit.
3 PS3 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ10-11 (ON) DF-618 B-3
4 PS4 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ11-5 (ON) DF-618 B-5
5 PS9 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ14-8 (ON) DF-618 B-6
6 M7 operation check DFCB PJ9-5 to 8 DF-618 I-5
7 M2 operation check DFCB PJ8-5 to 10 DF-618 I-6
8 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

1.8.4 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34

(1) Contents
JAM type ADF paper exit section
JAM code 66-04, 66-14, 66-24, 66-34
Detection timing The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the before read sensor (PS9) is
66-04
turned ON.
The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the before read sensor (PS9)
66-14
is turned OFF.
The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the before read sensor (PS9) is
66-24
turned OFF.
The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the turnover and paper exit
66-34
motion is performed.
Misfeed processing Transportation cover
location
Relevant parts • Exit motor (M3)
• Before read sensor (PS9)
• Exit sensor (PS5)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS9 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ14-8 (ON) DF-618 B-6
3 PS5 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ13-3 (ON) DF-618 I-5
4 M3 operation check DFCB PJ8-1 to 4 DF-618 I-7
5 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

1.8.5 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15

(1) Contents
JAM type ADF image reading section
JAM code 66-05, 66-06, 66-07, 66-15
Detection timing The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the registration sensor
66-05
(PS3) is turned OFF.
The before read sensor (PS9) is turned ON earlier than a given time after the before read sensor (PS9)
66-06
is turned OFF during original transportation.
Due to a remaining sheet of paper that has not been detected by sensors, before the start of a job, a
66-07
sensor detects the sheet at an unexpected timing.
The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the reverse
66-15
registration sensor (PS8) is turned OFF.
Misfeed processing Transportation cover
location
Relevant parts • Reading motor (M1)
• Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4)
• Registration sensor (PS3)
• Reverse registration sensor (PS8)
• Before read sensor (PS9)
• DF control board (DFCB)

K-16
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 Make the adjustment of original stop position. - -
3 PS3 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ10-11 (ON) DF-618 B-3
4 PS8 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ12-2 (ON) DF-618 I-3
5 PS9 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ14-8 (ON) DF-618 B-6
6 M1 operation check DFCB PJ9-1 to 4 DF-618 I-6
7 M4 operation check DFCB PJ6-5 to 6 DF-618 I-4
8 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

1.9 7*-**
1.9.1 72-11
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-11
Detection timing The Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after
72-11
the FNS pass sensor (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • FNS pass sensor (PS1)
• Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8
3 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-5 (ON) FS-526 D-8
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.2 72-13
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-13
Detection timing The Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
72-13
it turns ON.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-5 (ON) FS-526 D-8
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.3 72-14
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-14
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The center staple pass sensor (PS12) is not turned ON even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the FNS pass sensor (PS1)
is turned ON by the paper.
72-14
<When FS-527 is installed> The saddle path sensor (PS11) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the lower path sensor (PS9) is
turned ON by the paper.

K-17
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Misfeed processing Front door

location
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • FNS pass sensor (PS1)
• Center staple pass sensor (PS12)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Lower path sensor (PS9)
• Saddle path sensor (PS11)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8
3 PS12 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-8 (ON) FS-526 D-8 to 9
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS9 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-5 (ON) FS-527 J-4
3 PS11 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-6 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.4 72-15
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-15
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The center staple pass sensor (PS12) is not turn OFF even after the
set period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
75-15
<When FS-527 is installed> The saddle path sensor (PS11) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • Center staple pass sensor (PS12)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Saddle path sensor (PS11)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS12 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-8 (ON) FS-526 D-8 to 9
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS11 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-6 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.5 72-16
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-16
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The FNS pass sensor (PS1) is not turned ON even after the set
72-16 period of time has elapsed after the copier's exhaust sensor (PS39)
is turned ON by the paper.

K-18
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

<When FS-527 is installed> • The paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is not turned ON even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the copier's exhaust sensor
(PS39) is turned ON by the paper.
• The paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is not turned OFF even after
the set period of time has elapsed after it is turned ON by the
paper.
Misfeed processing • Front door <When FS-526 is installed>
location • Horizontal conveyance cover <When FS-527 is installed>
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • Paper exit sensor (PS39)
• FNS pass sensor (PS1)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Paper exit sensor (PS39)
• Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) Q-5
3 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of bizhub 652/602/552/502 (PDF format, 7.5MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) Q-5
3 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-2 (ON) FS-527 I-11 to 12
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of bizhub 652/602/552/502 (PDF format, 7.5MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-527 (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.6 72-17
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-17
Detection timing • The paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.
72-17
• The paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after
it turns ON.
Misfeed processing • Horizontal conveyance cover
location
Relevant parts • Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
• Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-2 (ON) FS-527 I-11 to 12
3 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-8 (ON) FS-527 I-11
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.7 72-18
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-18
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) is not turned ON even after the
72-18 set period of time has elapsed after the Z-fold punch regist sensor
(PS2) is turned ON by the paper.

K-19
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

<When FS-527 is installed> • The registration sensor (PS10) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
is turned ON by the paper.
• The registration sensor (PS10) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
Misfeed processing • Front door <When FS-526 is installed>
location • Horizontal conveyance cover <When FS-527 is installed>
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2)
• 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
• Registration sensor (PS10)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-5 (ON) FS-526 D-8
3 PS3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN17-9 (ON) FS-526 L-7
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-8 (ON) FS-527 I-11
3 PS10 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-8 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.8 72-19
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-19
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
<When FS-527 is installed> • The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the registration sensor (PS10) is
turned ON by the paper.
• The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
• The upper path sensor (PS8) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the registration sensor (PS10) is
72-19 turned ON by the paper.
• The upper path sensor (PS8) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
• The lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned ON by the paper even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the switchback
operation caused by the conveyance motor (M4) is completed.
• After the switchback operation caused by the conveyance motor
(M4) is completed, the lower path sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed after PS9 is turn ON
by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • Stacker entrance motor (M10)
• 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Conveyance motor (M4)
• Upper path sensor (PS8)
• Lower path sensor (PS9)
• Registration sensor (PS10)
• FS control board (FSCB)

K-20
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN17-9 (ON) FS-526 L-7
3 M10 operation check FSCB CN12-7 to 12 FS-526 D-4 to 5
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS8 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ14-12 (ON) FS-527 J-5
3 PS9 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-5 (ON) FS-527 J-4
4 PS10 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-8 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
5 M4 operation check FSCB PJ10-5 to 8 FS-527 B to C-3
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.9 72-21
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-21
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15) is not turn OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the start of exiting
paper.
72-21
<When FS-527 is installed> The tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16) is not turned ON even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the lower path sensor (PS9)
is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Lower path sensor (PS9)
• Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS15 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<B>-5 (ON) FS-526 L-9
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS9 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-5 (ON) FS-527 J-4
3 PS16 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ17-8 (ON) FS-527 B to C-8
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.10 72-22
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-22
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The sub tray exit sensor (PS8) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2)
is turned ON by the paper.
72-22 <When FS-527 is installed> • The tray2 path sensor (PS6) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the registration sensor (PS10) is
turned ON by the paper.
• The tray2 path sensor (PS6) is not turn OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.

K-21
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Misfeed processing Front door

location
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2)
• Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Registration sensor (PS10)
• Tray2 path sensor (PS6)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-5 (ON) FS-526 D-8
3 PS8 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<B>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-8
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS10 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-8 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
3 PS6 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ14-9 (ON) FS-527 J-5
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.11 72-23
(1) Contents
JAM type FS transport section
JAM code 72-23
Detection timing The sub tray exit sensor (PS8) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it turns
72-23
ON.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS8 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<B>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-8
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.12 72-25, 72-26

(1) Contents
JAM type SD exit section
JAM code 72-25, 72-26
Detection timing SD exit sensor/LED (PS28) is not turned ON by the paper even after the set period of time has elapsed
72-25
after the half-fold exit operation started.
<When FS-526+SD-508 is The SD exit sensor/LED (PS28) is not turn OFF even after the set
installed> period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
72-26
<When FS-527+SD-509 is The paper sensor/2 (PS44) is not turn OFF even after the set period
installed> of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Stacker unit
Relevant parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> • Exit motor (M34)
• Fold sensor (PS27)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+SD-509 is installed> • Paper sensor/2 (PS44)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

K-22
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS27 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN406<A>-14 (ON) SD-508 K-9
3 M34 operation check FSCB CN42-1 to 12 SD-508 G-3 to 4
4 Change SDDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS44 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ13-2 (ON) SD-509 G-3
3 Change SDDB - -
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

1.9.13 72-31, 72-34

(1) Contents
JAM type JS exit section
JAM code 72-31, 72-34
Detection timing The job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
72-31
after the z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2) is turned ON by the paper.
The job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed
72-34
after it turns ON.
Misfeed processing Separator cover
location
Relevant parts • Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS402 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN50-6 (ON) FS-526 C-16
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.14 72-35
(1) Contents
JAM type PI section
JAM code 72-35
Detection timing The paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
72-35
after the transfer clutch /Lw (CL202) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Upper door
location
Relevant parts • Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)
• Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
• PI drive board (PIDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS206 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-5 (ON) PI-505 C to D-5
3 CL202 operation check PIDB CN56-1 (ON) PI-505 C to D-7
4 Change PIDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

K-23
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

1.9.15 72-38
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-38
Detection timing None of the leading, trailing, or side edge sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is turned ON
72-38 even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper pass sensor (PS202) in the horizontal
transport unit is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Paper pass sensor (PS202)
• Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• Transport control board (TRCB)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 Q-2 to 3
3 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 ZU-606 C to D-9 to 10
4 Change TRCB - -
5 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of ZU-606 (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.16 72-39
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-39
Detection timing None of the leading, trailing, or side edge sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is turned OFF
72-39
even after the set period of time has elapsed after one of these sensors is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 ZU-606 C to D-9 to 10
3 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.17 72-40
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-40
Detection timing The conveyance sensor (PS601) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
72-40
leading, trailing, or side sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• Conveyance sensor (PS601)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 ZU-606 C to D-9 to 10
3 PS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-2 (ON) ZU-606 C-4
4 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

K-24
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

1.9.18 72-41, 72-42

(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-41, 72-42
Detection timing When the second fold is started in Z-fold mode, the conveyance sensor (PS601) is not switched from
72-41
ON to OFF by the paper after the set period of time has elapsed.
After the second fold is completed in Z-fold mode, the conveyance sensor (PS601) is not switched from
72-42
ON to OFF by the paper even after the set period of time has elapsed.
Misfeed processing • Front door <72-41, 72-42>
location • Z folding/conveyance unit <72-41>
Relevant parts • Conveyance sensor (PS601)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-2 (ON) ZU-606 C-4
3 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.19 72-43
(1) Contents
JAM type PK section
JAM code 72-43
Detection timing <When FS-526+PK-516 is PK punch home sensor (PS301) does not turn ON even after the set
installed> period of time has elapsed after the leading edge detection started.
72-43 <When FS-527+PK-517 is Though the punch home sensor/1 (PS100) is not turned ON after the
installed> punch motor/1 (M100) starts rotating forward, PS100 is turned ON
after M100 starts rotating backward.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts <When FS-526+PK-516 is installed> • Punch drive motor (M301)
• PK punch home sensor (PS301)
• Punch control board (PKDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+PK-517 is installed> • Punch motor/1 (M100)
• Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+PK-516 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS301 I/O check, sensor check PKDB CN36-5 (ON) PK-516 C-3
3 M301 operation check PKDB CN35-1 to 3 PK-516 C-2
4 Change PKDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 0.8MB)
When FS-527+PK-517 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS100 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ19-8 (ON) FS-527 (PK-517) J-9
M100 operation check FSCB PJ19-1 (CW)
3 FS-527 (PK-517) J-8
FSCB PJ19-3 (CCW)
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

1.9.20 72-44
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-44

K-25
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Detection timing The exit sensor (PS609) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the leading,
72-44
trailing, or side edge sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Exit sensor (PS609)
• Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS609 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-8 (ON) ZU-606 C-5
3 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 ZU-606 C to D-9 to 10
4 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.21 72-45
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-45
Detection timing The exit sensor (PS609) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper
72-45
pass sensor (PS202) in the horizontal transport unit is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Paper pass sensor (PS202)
• Exit sensor (PS609)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 Q-2 to 3
3 PS609 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-8 (ON) ZU-606 C-5
4 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of ZU-606 (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.22 72-46
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-46
Detection timing 72-46 The exit sensor (PS609) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it turns ON.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Exit sensor (PS609)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS609 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-8 (ON) ZU-606 C-5
3 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.23 72-47
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-47
Detection timing Paper remains in the Z-fold unit even after the set period of time has elapsed after MFP sends a
72-47
processing stop signal to the Z-fold unit.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Z folding/conveyance unit

K-26
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Relevant parts ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 Change ZUCB - -

1.9.24 72-49
(1) Contents
JAM type PI section
JAM code 72-49
Detection timing The paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
72-49
after the transfer clutch /Up (CL201) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Upper door
location
Relevant parts • Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)
• Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201)
• PI drive board (PIDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS201 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-2 (ON) PI-505 C to D-8
3 CL201 operation check PIDB CN54-3 (ON) PI-505 C to D-4
4 Change PIDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

1.9.25 72-50
(1) Contents
JAM type PI section
JAM code 72-50
Detection timing The FNS pass sensor (PS1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
72-50
paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Upper door
location
Relevant parts • Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201)
• FNS pass sensor (PS1)
• PI drive board (PIDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS201 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-2 (ON) PI-505 C to D-8
3 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8
4 Change PIDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of PI-505 (PDF format, 1.0MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.26 72-51
(1) Contents
JAM type PI section
JAM code 72-51
Detection timing The FNS pass sensor (PS1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
72-51
paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Upper door
location
Relevant parts • Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
• FNS pass sensor (PS1)

K-27
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

• PI drive board (PIDB)

• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS206 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-5 (ON) PI-505 C to D-5
3 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8
4 Change PIDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of PI-505 (PDF format, 1.0MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.27 72-60
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-60
Detection timing The corresponding side edge sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is not turned ON even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the leading, trailing, or side edge sensor on PSDTB is
72-60
turned OFF by the paper. Or the punch home sensor (PS606) is not turned ON by the paper even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the punch clutch (CL601) is turned ON.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Z folding/conveyance unit
Relevant parts • Punch clutch (CL601)
• Punch home sensor (PS606)
• Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS606 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN3-5 (ON) ZU-606 C-7
3 CL601 operation check ZUCB CN11-4 ZU-606 C-7
4 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 ZU-606 C to D-9 to 10
5 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.28 72-61
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-61
Detection timing The conveyance sensor (PS601) is turned ON after the set period of time has elapsed even after the
72-61
leading, trailing, or side edge sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Conveyance sensor (PS601)
• Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-2 (ON) ZU-606 C-4
3 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 ZU-606 C to D-9 to 10
4 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.29 72-62
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-62

K-28
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Detection timing The exit sensor (PS609) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
72-62
conveyance sensor (PS609) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts • Conveyance sensor (PS601)
• Exit sensor (PS609)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-2 (ON) ZU-606 C-4
3 PS609 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-8 (ON) ZU-606 C-5
4 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.30 72-64
(1) Contents
JAM type ZU section
JAM code 72-64
Detection timing The conveyance encoder sensor (PS610) is not turned ON or OFF even after the set period of time has
72-64
elapsed after the main motor (M606) starts running.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Z folding/conveyance unit
Relevant parts • Main motor (M606)
• Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 M606 operation check ZUCB CN8-1 to 6 ZU-606 C-2
3 PS610 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-14 (ON) ZU-606 C-5
4 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.31 72-81
(1) Contents
JAM type FS staple section
JAM code 72-81
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53) does not turn ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the side-staple operation started.
72-81 <When FS-527 is installed> Though the stapler sensor (PS27) is not turned ON after the stapler
motor (M18) starts rotating forward, PS27 is turned ON after M18
starts rotating backward.
Misfeed processing Front door
location
Relevant parts <When FS-526 is installed> • Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527 is installed> • Stapler unit
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS53 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-12 (ON) FS-526 L-14
3 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)
When FS-527 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -

K-29
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component

2 Change stapler unit - -
3 Change FSCB - -

1.9.32 72-84
(1) Contents
JAM type SD staple section
JAM code 72-84
Detection timing Stapler home sensor (PS33) does not turn ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
72-84
center-staple operation started.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Stacker unit
Relevant parts • Center staple motor (M23)
• Stapler home sensor (PS33)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS33 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-17 (ON) SD-508 C-10
3 M23 operation check SDDB CN406<A>-1 to 4 (ON) SD-508 K-8
4 Change SDDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

1.9.33 72-85
(1) Contents
JAM type SD staple section
JAM code 72-85
Detection timing Though the saddle stapler home sensor is not turned ON after the saddle stapler motor starts rotating
72-85 forward, the saddle stapler home sensor is turned ON after the saddle stapler motor starts rotating
backward.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Stacker unit
Relevant parts • Saddle stapler unit
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 Change saddle stapler unit - -
3 Change SDDB - -
4 Change FSCB - -

1.9.34 72-86
(1) Contents
JAM type SD transport section
JAM code 72-86
Detection timing <When FS-527+SD-509 is The paper sensor/1 (PS43) is not turned ON even after the set
72-86 installed> period of time has elapsed after the saddle path sensor (PS11) is
turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Stacker unit
Relevant parts • Saddle path sensor (PS11)
• Paper sensor/1 (PS43)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

K-30
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS11 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-6 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
3 PS43 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ9-8 (ON) SD-509 G-1
4 Change SDDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-527 (PDF format, 1.8MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of SD-509 (PDF format, 1.0MB)

1.9.35 72-87
(1) Contents
JAM type SD transport section
JAM code 72-87
Detection timing <When FS-527+SD-509 is The paper sensor/2 (PS44) is not turned ON even after the set
72-87 installed> period of time has elapsed after the saddle path sensor (PS11) is
turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Stacker unit
Relevant parts • Saddle path sensor (PS11)
• Paper sensor/2 (PS44)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS11 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ13-6 (ON) FS-527 B to C-5
3 PS44 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ13-2 (ON) SD-509 G-3
4 Change SDDB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-527 (PDF format, 1.8MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of SD-509 (PDF format, 1.0MB)

1.9.36 72-90
(1) Contents
JAM type FS section
JAM code 72-90
Detection timing The finisher does not stop even after the set period of time has elapsed after MFP sends a processing
72-90
stop signal to the finisher.
Misfeed processing • Front door
location • Stacker unit
Relevant parts FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 Change FSCB - -

1.9.37 75-42
(1) Contents
JAM type RU section
JAM code 75-42
Detection timing The Paper pass sensor (PS202) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
75-42
copier's exhaust sensor (PS39) is turned ON by the paper.
Misfeed processing Horizontal transport cover
location
Relevant parts • Paper exit sensor (PS39)
• Paper pass sensor (PS202)
• Transport control board (TRCB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

K-31
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) bizhub C652/552 Q-5
3 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 P to Q-2
4 Change TRCB - -
5 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of bizhub 652/602/552/502 (PDF format, 7.5MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.9.38 75-43
(1) Contents
JAM type RU section
JAM code 75-43
Detection timing The Paper pass sensor (PS202) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after it
75-43
turns ON.
Misfeed processing Horizontal transport cover
location
Relevant parts • Paper pass sensor (PS202)
• Transport control board (TRCB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 P to Q-2
3 Change TRCB - -
4 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of FS-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)

1.10 9*-**
1.10.1 92-01, 92-02, 92-03, 92-40
(1) Contents
JAM type Duplex pre-registration section
JAM code 92-01, 92-02, 92-03, 92-40
Detection timing The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a
92-01
duplex paper feed sequence has been started.
For the second-side feed of paper in the duplex mode, loop forming has not been complete before the
92-02 second side of a sheet enters the timing roller because the rise timing of load to perform registration is
earlier than the rise timing of load to form a loop.
The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after a
92-03
duplex paper feed sequence has been started.
For the second-side feed of paper in the duplex mode, the image write start signal permit continues to be
92-40
disabled for a predetermined period of time after the timing of the image write start signal output.
Misfeed processing • Upper right door
location • Duplex door
Relevant parts • ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
• ADU transport motor/2 (M32)
• Timing roller sensor (PS38)
• OHP detection sensor (PS40)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS38 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-6 (ON) Q-5
3 PS40 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-2 (ON) Q-4 to 5
4 M32 operation check PFTDB CN3-10 to 13 Q-8
5 M31 operation check PFTDB CN3-14 to 17 Q-8
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -

K-32
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM CODE

• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.10.2 93-01, 93-10

(1) Contents
JAM type Duplex transport section
JAM code 93-01, 93-10
Detection timing A sheet of paper does not unblock the ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) after a predetermined
93-01
period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the PS47.
A sheet of paper does not unblock the ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) after a predetermined
93-10
period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47).
ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) is blocked, or ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) is unblocked
- when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
Misfeed processing Duplex door
location
Relevant parts • ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
• ADU transport motor/2 (M32)
• ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)
• ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical component
1 Initial check items - -
2 PS47 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN3-3 (ON) Q-7
3 PS48 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN3-6 (ON) Q-7
4 M31 operation check PFTDB CN3-14 to 17 Q-8
5 M32 operation check PFTDB CN3-10 to 13 Q-8
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

1.10.3 99-01
(1) Contents
JAM type Controller JAM
JAM code 99-01
Detection timing • Forced stop command was sent from the controller to the printer engine due to the error in paper size,
99-01 media, etc.
• Media error has occurred in both sides printing.
Misfeed processing
-
location
Relevant parts -

K-33
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE

2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Display procedure
• The machine's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding warning code and
maintenance call mark on the control panel.
• Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the state confirm screen.

2.2 List of the malfunction code

• If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears.
Code Item Ref. page
S-1 CCD gain adjustment failure K.2.3 S-1
D-1 Split line detect K.2.4 D-1
D-2 ADF read guide trouble K.2.5 D-2
P-5 IDC sensor failure K.2.6 P-5
P-9 Black imaging unit failure K.2.7 P-9
P-16 PC charge cleaning trouble 1 K.2.8 P-16, P-18
P-18 PC charge cleaning trouble 2
P-27 Secondary transfer ATVC failure K.2.9 P-27
P-32 Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detection failure K.2.10 P-32
L-4 Drum unit accumulated rotation time excess warning K.2.11 L-4
L-5 Transfer belt unit accumulated rotation time excess warning K.2.12 L-5

2.3 S-1
2.3.1 Contents
Malfunction type CCD gain adjustment failure
Malfunction code S-1
Description timing It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.
Relevant parts • Exposure unit
• CCD board (CCDB)
• MFP board (MFPB)

2.3.2 Procedure
1. Correct the harness connection between CCDB and MFPB if faulty.
2. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.
3. Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty.
4. Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty, or change scanner.
5. Change CCD sensor unit.
6. Change MFPB.

2.4 D-1
2.4.1 Contents
Malfunction type Split line detect
Malfunction code D-1

K-34
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE

Description timing • While recovering from the power save mode or when the main/sub power switch is ON, it detects whether
or not stain exist at the original glass moving unit when the ADF is closed.
This warning will be displayed if the original is set to ADF when stain exist.
• The thin line detection level and the warning display can be changed by the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.]
Relevant parts • Original glass moving unit
• Original glass position control board (OGPCB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

2.4.2 Procedure
• 1. Wipe clean the glass surface of the original glass moving unit.
2. Correct the harness connection between OGPCB and PRCB if faulty.
3. Change original glass moving unit.
4. Change OGPCB.
5. Change PRCB.

2.5 D-2
2.5.1 Contents
Malfunction type ADF read guide trouble
Malfunction code D-2
Description timing • While recovering from the power save mode or when the main/sub power switch is ON, it detects whether
or not stain exist at the scanning guide when the ADF is closed.
This warning will be displayed if the original is set to ADF when stain exist.
• This setting is valid only when the [Detection during Paper Passing] available from the following setting is
set to one between 2 and 6.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [ADF Scan Glass Contamin. Set.]
Relevant parts ADF scanning guide

2.5.2 Procedure
1. Wipe clean the surface of the ADF scanning guide with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
NOTICE
• Cleaning of the scanning guide (DF-618/SP-501)

2.6 P-5
2.6.1 Contents
Malfunction type • IDC sensor failure
Malfunction code P-5
Description timing • When adjusting the IDC sensor, output voltage detected for all eight sample patterns are 4.3 V or more.
• When adjustment is complete, sensor's output voltage with selected light intensity is 1.0 V or under.
• During image stabilization (gamma correction control), detected output value for IDC sensor did not go
below threshold (half the value of what is detected by IDC sensor on the belt surface) for three consecutive
times (position of the pattern end is not detected).
• During image stabilization (gamma correction control), sensor's output value for hyper 0 gradation after the
primary approximation is half the detection level on the belt surface or under.
Relevant parts • IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
• Transfer belt unit

2.6.2 Procedure
1. Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
2. Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.
3. Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F, sensor shutter or connector, if it is installed or connected improperly.
4. Clean IDCS/F if it is dirty.
5. Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
6. Open/close the front door, run an image stabilization sequence, and select [State Confirmation] → [Level History 1] to check the IDC value.
IDC1: IDCS/F
If the value is 1.0 V or less, change IDCS/F.
7. PRCB ICP17 conduction check
8. Change PRCB.

2.7 P-9
2.7.1 Contents
Malfunction type • Drum/Development unit (K) failure
Malfunction code P-9
Description timing All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the transfer belt are 1.0 g/m2 (IDC sensor
photo receiver output) or less during max. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment).

K-35
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE

Relevant parts • Drum unit

• Development unit
• Transfer belt unit
• High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

2.7.2 Procedure
1. Select [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Max Image Density Adj.] and, if the setting value is negative, readjust.
2. Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary.
3. Clean the IDC/registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) window if dirty.
4. Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty.
5. Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.
6. Change drum unit or developing unit.
7. Change the transfer belt unit.
8. HV1 IP101, IP201, IP301 or IP401 conduction check
9. Change HV1.
10. Change PRCB.

2.8 P-16, P-18

2.8.1 Contents
Malfunction type • PC charge cleaning trouble 1 <P-16>
• PC charge cleaning trouble 2 <P-18>
Malfunction code P-16, P-18
Description timing <P-16> Charging cleaner home sensor is not transmitted even after the specified time has passed
while the wire cleaning material is moving forward.
<P-18> Charging cleaner return sensor is not interrupted even after the specified time has passed
when the wire cleaning material is moving forward.
* Under the situation above occurs, control will be switched to the return operation after the
warning is given. When the charging cleaner home sensor is not interrupted after the specified
time has passed during the return operation, trouble code C-2101 will be given.
Relevant parts • Drum unit
• Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
• Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
• Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

2.8.2 Procedure
1. PS43 I/O check, sensor check.
2. PS44 I/O check, sensor check.
3. M15 operation check.
4. Change drum unit.
5. Change M15.
6. Change PRCB.

2.9 P-27
2.9.1 Contents
Malfunction type Secondary transfer ATVC failure
Malfunction code P-27
Description timing An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second transfer ATVC value.
Relevant parts • High voltage unit/2 (HV2)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• Transfer entrance guide
• 2nd transfer assy
• Transfer belt unit

2.9.2 Procedure
1. Check roller opposed to the 2nd transfer roller is grounded.
Clean the joint or correct if necessary.
2. Check the transfer entrance guide for proper installation and correct if necessary.
3. Check that the spring does not come off during the pressure operation of the 2nd transfer roller and correct if necessary.
4. Check the contact at the joint of the 2nd transfer assy and HV2. Clean the joint or correct if necessary.
5. Change the transfer belt unit.
6. HV2 IP101 conduction check
7. Change HV2.
8. Change PRCB.

K-36
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE

2.10 P-32
2.10.1 Contents
Malfunction type Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detection failure
Malfunction code P-32
Description timing • During warm up, the temperature detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/1 exceeded the warm
up complete temperature of the heating roller for over the predetermined value, and stayed for a
predetermined period of time.
• When the predetermined period of time had passed after the warm up became complete, detected
temperature of the heating roller thermistor/1 exceeded the temperature detected by the heating roller
temperature sensor/1 for over the predetermined value for more than the predetermined period of time.
• While printing, temperature detected by the heating roller thermistor/1 exceeded the temperature detected
by the heating roller temperature sensor/1 for more than the predetermined value for a predetermined
period of time.
• This warning indicates that condensation dirt on the heating roller temperature sensor/1 was detected, and
the alternate temperature control is being conducted.
With condensation, the warning is cleared when the condensation is detected to be removed. When the dirt
on the sensor is detected, it is considered as a failure and the trouble code C-392A is issued.
Relevant parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)

2.10.2 Procedure
1. Wipe the TEMS1 clean of dirt if any.
• <Cleaning procedure>
• Clear away a dirt or a foreign object on the sensor with a cotton swab.
• When a dirt is left even if you cleaned the sensor by above procedure, clear away a dirt or a foreign object on the sensor using a
cotton swab dampened with the alcohol.
And, wipe off the sensor with a dry cotton swab afterwards.
2. Check the TEMS1 for installed position and proper connector connection.
3. Check the connection of the fusing unit.
4. Change TEMS1.
5. Change fusing unit.

2.11 L-4
2.11.1 Contents
Malfunction type Drum unit accumulated rotation time excess warning
Malfunction code L-4
Description timing • Count value for PC drum rotation time used for judging drum unit life (the value for PC drum rotation
distance calculated into the rotation time) is above threshold value for the excess warning (8,958 M).
• Printing with this warning being displayed is not included in the image warranty.

2.12 L-5
2.12.1 Contents
Malfunction type Transfer belt unit accumulated rotation time excess warning
Malfunction code L-5
Description timing • Count value for the transfer belt rotation time used for judging the transfer belt unit life is above the
threshold value for excess warning (27,777 M).
• Printing with this warning being displayed is not included in the image warranty.

K-37
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3. TROUBLE CODE
3.1 Display procedure
• The machine's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the
control panel.

3.2 Trouble resetting procedure

• Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble code.
* List of malfunction resetting procedures
Trouble code rank Resetting procedures
Rank A Trouble reset: Refer to the Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key.
Rank B Opening/closing the lower front door
Rank C Turning main power switch OFF/ON

3.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key

(1) Use
• If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the
lower front door, clear the status of the machine.
• To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the lower front
door in case of a trouble.

(2) Procedure
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Turn main power switch ON while pressing the Utility/Counter key.
3. Touch [Trouble Reset].
4. Check to make sure that [OK] is displayed and it has been reset.
5. After turning off the main power switch, turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and check if the machine starts correctly.

3.3 Trouble isolation function

• The trouble isolation function enables you to control MFP temporarily isolating faulty units and options where the trouble isolation function
can be applied when trouble occurs. This allows you to continue using the other units that are not affected and reduce down time that
continues until CE resolves the problem.
• This function can be selected for the following units and options.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• LCT
• Manual
• Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
• Post Inserter
• Z fold
• Staple
• Scanner
• ADF
• If a problem occurs with the units where the trouble isolation function can be applied, the control panel displays a trouble code and a key
with which you decide whether to continue using the MFP. When you press down the key, the control panel displays the units that will be
isolated as well as the next confirmation key with which you decide to continue.

K-38
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• When you press down the confirmation key, the message on the control panel asks you to turn OFF and ON the sub power switch. After
turning OFF and ON the sub power switch, the MFP starts operating, isolating the faulty units. The message on the control panel also tells
that the MFP is working, isolating the faulty units.
• To temporarily isolate faulty units and continue using the MFP with the trouble isolation function, be sure to make the above mentioned
control panel operation. The faulty units cannot be automatically isolated.
NOTE
• The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are being isolated.

3.4 List of the trouble code

Code Item Rank Ref. page
C0104 Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn B K.3.5.1 C0104, C0105
C0105 Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at B
abnormal timing
C0202 Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality B K.3.5.2 C0202
C0204 Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality B K.3.5.3 C0204
C0206 Tray 3 feeder up/down abnormality B K.3.5.4 C0206
C0208 Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality B K.3.5.5 C0208
C0216 LCT up/down abnormality B K.3.5.6 C0216
C0301 Suction fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.5.7 C0301
C0351 Paper cooling fan trouble B K.3.5.8 C0351
C1003 PK communication error B K.3.6.1 C1003
C1004 FNS communication error C K.3.6.2 C1004
C1005 ZU communication error C K.3.6.3 C1005
C1080 Undetectable
C1081 SD communication error C K.3.6.4 C1081
C1101 Undetectable
C1102 Main tray Up/Down motor malfunction B K.3.6.5 C1102
C1103 Side-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.6 C1103
C1104 Paper exit roller drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.7 C1104
C1105 Paper exit auxiliary roller motor malfunction B K.3.6.8 C1105
C1106 Side-staple stapler drive malfunction B K.3.6.9 C1106
C1107 Undetectable
C1108
C1109 Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.10 C1109
C1110 Center-staple head roller motor malfunction B K.3.6.11 C1110
C1111 Undetectable
C1112 Center-staple clinch roller motor malfunction B K.3.6.12 C1112
C1113 Center-staple lead edge stopper motor malfunction B K.3.6.13 C1113
C1114 Center-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.14 C1114
C1115 Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.15 C1115
C1116 Center-staple transfer motor malfunction B K.3.6.16 C1116
C1124 Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (lower) B K.3.6.17 C1124
C1125 Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (upper) B K.3.6.18 C1125
C1127 Punch shift motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.19 C1127
C1130 1st stopper motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.20 C1130
C1131 2nd stopper motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.21 C1131
C1132 Output OP punch driving motor malfunction B K.3.6.22 C1132
C1133 Punch shift motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.23 C1133
C1134 Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction B K.3.6.24 C1134
C1135 Punch motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.25 C1135
C1136 Punch switchover motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.26 C1136
C1137 Undetectable
C1140 Side-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.27 C1140
C1141 Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction B K.3.6.28 C1141
C1142 Side-staple trailing paddle up-down motor malfunction B K.3.6.29 C1142
C1143 Side-staple rewinding paddle up-down motor B K.3.6.30 C1143
malfunction
C1144 Spare stacker board drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.31 C1144
C1145 End stopper drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.32 C1145
C1150 Center-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.33 C1150
C1151 Center-staple stapler drive motor malfunction B K.3.6.34 C1151

K-39
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Code Item Rank Ref. page

C1152 Center-staple paper exit motor malfunction B K.3.6.35 C1152
C1153 Center-staple paddle up-down motor malfunction B K.3.6.36 C1153
C1156 Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing B K.3.6.37 C1156
edge)
C1157 Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (middle) B K.3.6.38 C1157
C1158 Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (leading B K.3.6.39 C1158
edge)
C1182 Shift motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.40 C1182
C1183 Elevate drive malfunction B K.3.6.41 C1183
C1190 Alignment plate motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.42 C1190
C1191 Undetectable
C1194 Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.43 C1194
C11A0 Undetectable
C11A1 Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction B K.3.6.44 C11A1
C11A2 Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction malfunction B K.3.6.45 C11A2
C11A3 Undetectable
C11A4
C11A5
C11A6
C11A7 Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction B K.3.6.46 C11A7
C11B0 Stapler movement drive malfunction B K.3.6.47 C11B0
C11B2 Staple drive malfunction B K.3.6.48 C11B2
C11B3 Undetectable
C11B4 Undetectable
C11B5 Saddle stapler drive malfunction B K.3.6.49 C11B5
C11B6 Undetectable
C11C0 Punch motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.50 C11C0
C11D0 Undetectable
C11E0 Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.51 C11E0
C11E1 Upper lower path switching motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.52 C11E1
C11E2 Tray1 path switching motor drive malfunction B K.3.6.53 C11E2
C1301 Undetectable
C1431
C1432
C1434
C1453
C2101 PC charge cleaning malfunction B K.3.7.1 C2101
C2151 Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation B K.3.7.2 C2151
C2152 Transfer belt pressure welding alienation B K.3.7.3 C2152
C2163 PC charge (K) malfunction B K.3.7.4 C2163
C2204 Waste toner agitating motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.5 C2204
C2257 Cleaner motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.6 C2257, C2258
C2258 Cleaner motor's turning at abnormal timing B
C2259 K developing motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.7 C2259, C225A
C225A K developing motor's turning at abnormal timing B
C225B K PC drum motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.8 C225B, C225C
C225C K PC drum motor's turning at abnormal timing B
C2350 Toner suction fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.9 C2350
C2353 IU cooling fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.10 C2353
C2354 Rear side cooling fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.7.11 C2354
C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR B K.3.7.12 C2557
sensor
C2558 Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR B K.3.7.13 C2558
sensor
C255C Black TCR sensor adjustment failure B K.3.7.14 C255C
C2564 Black TCR sensor failure B K.3.7.15 C2564
C2650 Main backup media access error C K.3.7.16 C2650
C2654 EEPROM access error (DC K) C K.3.7.17 C2654
C2A14 Drum unit new release failure C K.3.7.18 C2A14

K-40
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Code Item Rank Ref. page

C2A24 Toner cartridge/K new release failure C K.3.7.19 C2A24
C3101 Fusing roller separation failure B K.3.8.1 C3101
C3102 Fusing roller failure to turn A K.3.8.2 C3102
C3201 Fusing motor failure to turn B K.3.8.3 C3201, C3202
C3202 Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing B
C3303 Fusing cooling fan motor/1 failure to turn B K.3.8.4 C3303
C3304 Undetectable
C3305 Fusing cooling fan motor/3 failure to turn B K.3.8.5 C3305
C3424 Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) A K.3.8.6 C3424
C3425 Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor) A K.3.8.7 C3425
C3721 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Center A K.3.8.8 C3721, C3722, C3725
of the heating roller)
C3722 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of A K.3.8.8 C3721, C3722, C3725
the heating roller)
C3724 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking A K.3.8.9 C3724
side)
C3725 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC A K.3.8.8 C3721, C3722, C3725
sensor)
C3822 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (Edge of A K.3.8.10 C3822, C3825
the heating roller)
C3824 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking A K.3.8.11 C3824
side)
C3825 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC A K.3.8.10 C3822, C3825
sensor)
C3921 Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the A K.3.8.12 C3921, C3922, C3925
heating roller)
C3922 Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the A K.3.8.12 C3921, C3922, C3925
heating roller)
C3924 Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side) A K.3.8.13 C3924
C3925 Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor) A K.3.8.12 C3921, C3922, C3925
C392A Fusing sensor contamination (NC sensor) A K.3.8.14 C392A
C3B02 IH malfunction (CPU) A K.3.8.15 C3B02, C3B03
C3B03 IH malfunction (monitor) A
C3B05 IH temperature sensor defect A K.3.8.16 C3B05, C3B06, C3B07, C3B08
C3B06 IH surge error A
C3B07 IH input power error A
C3B08 IH input voltage error B
C4101 Polygon motor rotation trouble B K.3.9.1 C4101
C4301 PH cooling fan motor failure to turn B K.3.9.2 C4301
C4501 Laser malfunction B K.3.9.3 C4501
C5104 Transfer belt motor's failure to turn B K.3.10.1 C5104, C5105
C5105 Transfer belt motor's turning at abnormal timing B
C5304 IH cooling fan motor/1's failure to turn B K.3.10.2 C5304
C5306 IH cooling fan motor/2's failure to turn B K.3.10.3 C5306
C5351 Power supply cooling fan motor/1's failure to turn B K.3.10.4 C5351
C5354 Ozone ventilation fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.10.5 C5354
C5356 Cooling fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.10.6 C5356
C5370 MFP control board cooling fan motor's failure to turn C K.3.10.7 C5370
C5372 MFP control board CPU temperature failure C K.3.10.8 C5372
C6001 ADF related configuration error 1 C K.3.11.1 C6001
C6002 ADF related configuration error 2 C K.3.11.2 C6002
C6102 Drive system home sensor malfunction B K.3.11.3 C6102, C6103
C6103 Slider over running B
C6301 Optical cooling fan motor's failure to turn B K.3.11.4 C6301
C6704 Image input time out C K.3.11.5 C6704
C6751 CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure B K.3.11.6 C6751
C6752 ASIC clock input error C K.3.11.7 C6752
C6901 DSC board mount failure 1 C K.3.11.8 C6901, C6902, C6903
C6902 DSC Bus check NG1-1 C
C6903 DSC Bus check NG1-2 C

K-41
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Code Item Rank Ref. page

C6F01 Scanner sequence trouble 1 C K.3.11.9 C6F01
C6F02 Reserved
C6F03 Reserved
C6F04 Reserved
C6F05 Reserved
C6F06 Reserved
C6F07 Reserved
C6F08 Reserved
C6F09 Reserved
C6F0A Reserved
C6FDC Reserved
C8101 Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism B K.3.12.1 C8101
C8102 Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble B K.3.12.2 C8102
C8103 Lift up mechanism trouble (Upward movement) B K.3.12.3 C8103
C8104 Glass movement trouble B K.3.12.4 C8104
C8105 Undetectable
C8106 Lift up mechanism failure (Downward movement) B K.3.12.5 C8106
C8302 Cooling fan failure B K.3.12.6 C8302
C8401 EEPROM failure C K.3.12.7 C8401
C9401 Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection A K.3.13.1 C9401, C9402
C9402 Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection A
CA051 Standard controller configuration failure C K.3.14.1 CA051, CA052, CA053
CA052 Controller hardware error C
CA053 Controller start failure C
CB001 See the FK-502 Service Manual. C
CB002 C
CB003 C
CB051 C
CB052 C
CB110 C
CB111 C
CB112 C
CB113 C
CB114 C
CB115 C
CB116 C
CB117 C
CB118 C
CB119 C
CB120 C
CB122 C
CB123 C
CB125 C
CB126 C
CB127 C
CB128 C
CB130 C
CB131 C
CB132 C
CB133 C
CB134 C
CB135 C
CB136 C
CB137 C
CB140 C
CB141 C
CB142 C
CB143 C

K-42
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Code Item Rank Ref. page

CB144 C
CB145 C
CB146 C
CB150 C
CB151 C
CB152 C
CB153 C
CB154 C
CB160 C
CB161 C
CB162 C
CB163 C
CB164 C
CB165 C
CB166 C
CB167 C
CB168 C
CB169 C
CB170 C
CB171 C
CB172 C
CB173 C
CB174 C
CB175 C
CB176 C
CB177 C
CB178 C
CB185 C
CB186 C
CB187 C
CB188 C
CC001 Vendor connection failure C K.3.15.1 CC001
CC151 ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) C K.3.15.2 CC151, CC152, CC153
CC152 ROM contents error upon startup (scanner) C
CC153 ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) C
CC155 Finisher ROM error C K.3.15.3 CC155
CC156 ADF ROM error C K.3.15.4 CC156
CC157 Finisher ROM error (RU) C K.3.15.5 CC157
CC158 Finisher ROM error (ZU) C K.3.15.6 CC158
CC159 ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1) C K.3.15.7 CC159, CC15A
CC15A ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2) C
CC15B Finisher ROM error (SD) C K.3.15.8 CC15B
CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) C K.3.15.9 CC163
CC164 ROM contents error (MSC) C K.3.15.10 CC164
CC165 ROM contents error (ADF) C K.3.15.11 CC165
CC170 Dynamic link error during starting (AP0) C K.3.15.12 CC170, CC171, CC172, CC173,
CC171 Dynamic link error during starting (AP1) C CC174, CC180, CC181, CC182, CC183,
CC184, CC185, CC186
CC172 Dynamic link error during starting (AP2) C
CC173 Dynamic link error during starting (AP3) C
CC174 Dynamic link error during starting (AP4) C
CC180 Dynamic link error during starting (LDR) C
CC181 Dynamic link error during starting (IBR) C
CC182 Dynamic link error during starting (IID) C
CC183 Dynamic link error during starting (IPF) C
CC184 Dynamic link error during starting (IMY) C
CC185 Dynamic link error during starting (SPF) C
CC186 Dynamic link error during starting (OAP) C
CC190 Outline font load error C K.3.15.13 CC190

K-43
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Code Item Rank Ref. page

CC191 Setting parameter load error (LDR) C K.3.15.14 CC191
CD002 JOB RAM save error C K.3.16.1 CD002
CD004 Hard disk access error (connection failure) C K.3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020
CD00F Hard disk data transfer error C K.3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020
CD010 Hard disk unformat C K.3.16.3 CD010
CD011 Hard disk out of specifications mounted C K.3.16.4 CD011
CD020 Hard disk verify error C K.3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020
CD030 Hard disk management information reading error C K.3.16.5 CD030
CD041 HDD command execution error C K.3.16.6 CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044,
CD042 Address Mark Not Found C CD045, CD046
CD043 C
CD044 C
CD045 C
CD046 C
CD047 HDD SCSI library error C K.3.16.7 CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A,
CD048 C CD04B
CD049 C
CD04A C
CD04B C
CD201 File memory mounting error C K.3.16.8 CD201, CD202, CD203
CD202 Memory capacity discrepancy C
CD203 Memory capacity discrepancy 2 C
CD211 PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure C K.3.16.9 CD211, CD212
CD212 Compression/extraction timeout detection C
CD231 No Fax memory at FAX board mounting C K.3.16.10 CD231
CD241 Encryption ASIC error C K.3.16.11 CD241, CD242
CD242 Encryption ASIC mounting error C
CD251 Undetectable
CD261 USB host board failure C K.3.16.12 CD261
CD271 i-Option activated and additional memory not installed C K.3.16.13 CD271
CD272 i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not C K.3.16.14 CD272
installed
CD3## NVRAM data error C K.3.16.15 CD3##
CD390 NVRAM data multiple errors C K.3.16.16 CD390
CD401 NACK command incorrect C K.3.16.17 CD401, CD402, CD403, CD404,
CD402 ACK command incorrect C CD405, CD406, CD407
CD403 Checksum error C
CD404 Receiving packet incorrect C
CD405 Receiving packet analysis error C
CD406 ACK receiving timeout C
CD407 Retransmission timeout C
CDC## Trouble related to security - K.3.16.18 CDC##
CE001 Abnormal message queue C K.3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005,
CE006, CE007
CE002 Message and method parameter failure C K.3.17.2 CE002
CE003 Task error C K.3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005,
CE004 Event error C CE006, CE007
CE005 Memory access error C
CE006 Header access error C
CE007 DIMM initialize error C
CEEE1 MFP board malfunction C K.3.17.3 CEEE1
CEEE2 Scanner section malfunction A K.3.17.4 CEEE2
CEEE3 Printer control board malfunction A K.3.17.5 CEEE3
CF*** Trouble code (CF***) is referred to as abort code. For - K.4. Abort code
details of abort code, refer to “K.4. ABORT CODE”.

K-44
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.5 C0***
3.5.1 C0104, C0105
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn
Trouble code C0104
Rank B
Detection timing The lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation Tray 3/4
Relevant electrical parts • Transport motor (M25)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code C0105
Rank B
Detection timing The lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Transport motor (M25)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M25 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M25 for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M25 operation check PFTDB CN13-6 (LOCK) X-11
4 Change M25 - -
5 PFTDB ICP6 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.5.2 C0202
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality
Trouble code C0202
Rank B
Detection timing The tray 1 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion
has been started.
Trouble isolation Tray 1
Relevant electrical parts • Tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS6)
• Tray 1 lift-up motor (M6)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M6 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M6 for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS6 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN11-3 (ON) Q-1
4 M6 operation check PFTDB CN23-9 to 10 X-3
5 Change M6 - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

K-45
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.5.3 C0204
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality
Trouble code C0204
Rank B
Detection timing The tray 2 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion
has been started.
Trouble isolation Tray 2
Relevant electrical parts • Tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS14)
• Tray 2 lift-up motor (M8)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M8 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M8 for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS14 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-10 (ON) Q-4
4 M8 operation check PFTDB CN22-9 to 10 X-4
5 Change M8 - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.5.4 C0206
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 3 feeder up/down abnormality
Trouble code C0206
Rank B
Detection timing The tray 3 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion
has been started.
Trouble isolation Tray 3
Relevant electrical parts • Tray 3 upper limit sensor (PS22)
• Tray 3 lift-up motor (M23)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M23 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M23 for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS22 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN16-6 (ON) X-6
4 M23 operation check PFTDB CN14-3 to 4 X-9
5 Change M23 - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.5.5 C0208
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality
Trouble code C0208
Rank B
Detection timing The tray 4 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion
has been started.
Trouble isolation Tray 4
Relevant electrical parts • Tray 4 upper limit sensor (PS27)
• Tray 4 lift-up motor (M24)

K-46
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M24 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M24 for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS27 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN18-6 (ON) X-8
4 M24 operation check PFTDB CN14-1 to 2 X-9
5 Change M24 - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.5.6 C0216
(1) Contents
Trouble type LCT up/down abnormality
Trouble code C0216
Rank B
Detection timing The Upper limit sensor (PS2) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up
operation began.
Trouble isolation LCT
Relevant electrical parts • Upper limit sensor (PS2)
• Lift-up motor (M1)
• LU drive board (LUDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M1 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M1 for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS2 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-3 (ON) LU-204 G-4
4 M1 operation check LUDB CN3-4 (ON) LU-204 G-3
5 Change M1 - -
6 LUDB ICP2 conduction check - -
7 Change LUDB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.5.7 C0301
(1) Contents
Trouble type Suction fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C0301
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Suction fan motor (FM1)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM1 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM1 operation check PFTDB CN5-3 (REM)
3 Q-6
PFTDB CN5-5 (LOCK)
4 Change FM1 - -
5 PFTDB ICP2 conduction check - -

K-47
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

6 Change PFTDB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.5.8 C0351
(1) Contents
Trouble type Paper cooling fan trouble
Trouble code C0351
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM13 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM13 operation check PRCB CN15-7 (REM)
3 K-9
PRCB CN15-9 (LOCK)
4 Change FM13 - -
5 PRCB ICP6 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.6 C1***
3.6.1 C1003
(1) Contents
Trouble type PK communication error
Trouble code C1003
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+PK-516 is When a communication error is detected between the FS control board
installed> (FSCB) and the punch control board (PKDB).
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Punch control board (PKDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change PKDB - -
4 Change FSCB - -

3.6.2 C1004
(1) Contents
Trouble type FNS communication error
Trouble code C1004
Rank C
Detection timing When the FS control board (FSCB) is receiving data, a communication error is detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • FS control board (FSCB)

K-48
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 JSCB F1 conduction check - -
4 JSCB F2 conduction check - -
5 Change FSCB (FS-526/FS-527) - -

3.6.3 C1005
(1) Contents
Trouble type ZU communication error
Trouble code C1005
Rank C
Detection timing When the ZU control board (ZUCB) is receiving data, a communication error is detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change ZUCB - -

3.6.4 C1081
(1) Contents
Trouble type SD communication error
Trouble code C1081
Rank C
Detection timing <When FS-527+SD-509 is When a communication error is detected between the FS control board
installed> (FSCB) and the SD drive board (SDDB).
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold/Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change SDDB - -
4 Change FSCB - -

3.6.5 C1102
(1) Contents
Trouble type Main tray Up/Down motor malfunction
Trouble code C1102
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> • The main tray top surface sensor (PS4) is turned neither ON nor OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed while the main tray lift motor
(M5) is energized.
• The staple paper exit top surface sensor (PS7) is turned neither ON nor
OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed while the main tray lift
motor (M5) is energized.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Main tray lift motor (M5)
• Main tray top surface sensor (PS4)
• Staple paper exit top surface sensor (PS7)

K-49
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M5 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS4 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-18 (ON) FS-526 L-14
4 PS7 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-15 (ON) FS-526 L-14
5 M5 operation check FSCB CN22-1 to 11 FS-526 K-5
6 Change M5 - -
7 FSCB ICP1 conduction check - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.6 C1103
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1103
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F (PS17) is not turned ON even
after the set period of time has elapsed while the Alignment plate motor/F
(M11) is energized.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Alignment plate motor/F (M11)
• 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F (PS17)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M11 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS17 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-6 (ON) FS-526 L-11
4 M1 operation check FSCB CN19-1 to 4 FS-526 D-13
5 Change M1 - -
6 FSCB ICP4 conduction check - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.7 C1104
(1) Contents
Trouble type Paper exit roller drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1104
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The exit roller motor (M4) lock signal remains set to H for a set period of
time while the exit roller motor (M4) is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Exit roller motor (M4)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M4 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M4 operation check FSCB CN18-3 to 10 FS-526 D-12
4 Change M4 - -

K-50
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

5 FSCB ICP2 conduction check - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.8 C1105
(1) Contents
Trouble type Paper exit auxiliary roller motor malfunction
Trouble code C1105
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The paper output roller home sensor (PS10) is turned neither ON nor OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper output roller
motor (M6) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Paper output roller motor (M6)
• Paper output roller home sensor (PS10)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M6 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS10 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<A>-9 (ON) FS-526 L-7
4 M6 operation check FSCB CN13-1 to 6 FS-526 D-5
5 Change M6 - -
6 FSCB ICP6 conduction check - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.9 C1106
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple stapler drive malfunction
Trouble code C1106
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The stapler position sensor/1/2/3/4 (PS50/PS/51/PS52/PS53) is turned
neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 2
staples stapler movement motor (M13) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • 2 staples stapler movement motor (M13)
• Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50)
• Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51)
• Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)
• Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M13 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS50 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-13
4 PS51 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-6 (ON) FS-526 L-13
5 PS52 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-9 (ON) FS-526 L-13 to 14
6 PS53 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<B>-12 (ON) FS-526 L-14
7 M13 operation check FSCB CN15-3 to 8 FS-526 D-11 to 12
8 Change M13 - -
9 FSCB ICP5 conduction check - -
10 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

K-51
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.6.10 C1109
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1109
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The home sensor in the staple unit does not turn ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the side-staple 2 staples stapler motor
turned ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • Stapler unit
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M14 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 Change stapler unit - -
4 FSCB ICP10 conduction check - -
5 FSCB ICP11 conduction check - -
6 Change FSCB - -

3.6.11 C1110
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple head roller motor malfunction
Trouble code C1110
Rank B
Detection timing The stapler home sensor (PS33) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the staple motor (M24) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • Staple motor (M24)
• Stapler home sensor (PS33)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M24 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS33 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-17 (ON) SD-508 C-10
4 M24 operation check SDDB CN406<B>-1 to 2 SD-508 K-9 to 10
5 Change M24 - -
6 SDDB ICP7 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.12 C1112
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple clinch roller motor malfunction
Trouble code C1112
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The stapler home sensor (PS33) is not turned ON even after the set period
installed> of time has elapsed while the clincher motor (M25) is energized.
Trouble isolation • Staple
• Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • Clincher motor (M25)
• Stapler home sensor (PS33)
• SD drive board (SDDB)

K-52
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M25 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS33 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-17 (ON) SD-508 C-10
4 M25 operation check SDDB CN405-4 to 10 SD-508 C-7
5 Change M25 - -
6 SDDB ICP6 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.13 C1113
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple lead edge stopper motor malfunction
Trouble code C1113
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32) is turned neither ON nor
installed> OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the leading edge
stopper motor (M22) is turned ON.
<When FS-527+SD-509 is The leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45) is turned neither ON nor
installed> OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the leading edge
stopper motor (M20) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation • Staple
• Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is • Leading edge stopper motor (M22)
installed> • Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+SD-509 is • Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
installed> • Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M23 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS32 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN407-8 (ON) SD-508 K-7
4 M22 operation check SDDB CN408<A>-1 to 6 (ON) SD-508 K-6
5 Change M22 - -
6 SDDB ICP2 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M20 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS45 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ10-3 (ON) SD-509 G-6
4 M20 operation check SDDB PJ8-1 to 4 SD-509 B-5
5 Change M20 - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -

K-53
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.14 C1114
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1114
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The center staple alignment motor home sensor/F (PS30) is turned neither
installed> ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the center
staple alignment motor /F (M20) is turned ON.
<When FS-527+SD-509 is The center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42) is turned neither ON nor
installed> OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the center staple
alignment motor/F (M24) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is • Center staple alignment motor /F (M20)
installed> • Center staple alignment motor home sensor/F (PS30)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+SD-509 is • Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
installed> • Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M20 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS30 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-14 (ON) SD-508 C-9
4 M20 operation check SDDB CN403-1 to 4 SD-508 C-8
5 Change M20 - -
6 SDDB ICP4 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M24 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS42 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ9-6 (ON) SD-509 G-2
4 M24 operation check SDDB PK7-1 to 4 SD-509 G-3
5 Change M24 - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.15 C1115
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1115
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The center fold knife home sensor (PS34) is not turned ON even after the
installed> set period of time has elapsed while the center fold knife motor (M32) is
energized.
<When FS-527+SD-509 is The center fold plate home sensor (PS47) is turned neither ON nor OFF
installed> even after the set period of time has elapsed after the center fold plate
motor (M26) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is • Center fold knife motor (M32)
installed> • Center fold knife home sensor (PS34)

K-54
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• SD drive board (SDDB)

• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+SD-509 is • Center fold plate motor (M26)
installed> • Center fold plate home sensor (PS47)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M32 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS34 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN407-3 (ON) SD-508 K-6
4 M32 operation check SDDB CN411-1 to 2 SD-508 K-8
5 Change M32 - -
6 SDDB ICP8 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M26 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS47 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ10-6 (ON) SD-509 G-6
M26 operation check SDDB PJ2-1 (CW)
4 SD-509 B-4
SDDB PJ2-3 (CCW)
5 Change M26 - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.16 C1116
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple transfer motor malfunction
Trouble code C1116
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The transport motor (M33) does not reach the specified speed even after
installed> the set period of time has elapsed after it starts to operate.
<When FS-527+SD-509 is The center fold roller motor (M25) does not reach the specified speed even
installed> after the set period of time has elapsed after it starts to operate.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is • Transport motor (M33)
installed> • SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
< When FS-527+SD-509 is • Center fold roller motor (M25)
installed> • SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M33 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M33 operation check SDDB CN409-1 to 11 SD-508 K-5
4 Change M33 - -
5 SDDB ICP5 conduction check - -
6 Change SDDB - -

K-55
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M25 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M25 operation check SDDB PJ4-1 to 11 SD-509 B-3
4 Change M25 - -
5 Change SDDB - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.17 C1124
(1) Contents
Trouble type Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (lower)
Trouble code C1124
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+PI-505 is The tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) or tray lower limit sensor /Lw
installed> (PS210) are not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the tray lift motor /Lw (M202) is energized.
Trouble isolation Post Inserter
Relevant electrical parts • Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
• Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
• Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
• PI drive board (PIDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M202 for proper drive coupling, and
2 - -
correct as necessary.
3 PS209 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-8 (ON) PI-505 C to D-8
4 PS210 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN53<A>-11 (ON) PI-505 C to D-9
5 M202 operation check PIDB CN56-5 to 6 PI-505 C to D-7
6 Change M202 - -
7 PIDB ICP2 conduction check - -
8 Change PIDB - -
9 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.18 C1125
(1) Contents
Trouble type Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (upper)
Trouble code C1125
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+PI-505 is The tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205) or tray upper limit sensor /Up
installed> (PS204) are not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the tray lift motor /Up (M201) is energized.
Trouble isolation Post Inserter
Relevant electrical parts • Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
• Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204)
• Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205)
• PI drive board (PIDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

K-56
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M201 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS204 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN55-8 (ON) PI-505 C to D-5
4 PS205 I/O check, sensor check PIDB CN55-7 (ON) PI-505 C to D-6
5 M201 operation check PIDB CN54-7 to 8 PI-505 C to D-4
6 Change M201 - -
7 PIDB ICP2 conduction check - -
8 Change PIDB - -
9 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.19 C1127
(1) Contents
Trouble type Punch shift motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1127
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+PK-516 is The PK punch home sensor (PS301) is not turned ON even after the set
installed> period of time has elapsed while the punch drive motor (M301) is energized.
Trouble isolation Punch
Relevant electrical parts • Punch drive motor (M301)
• PK punch home sensor (PS301)
• Punch control board (PKDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M301 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS301 I/O check, sensor check PKDB CN36-5 (ON) PK-516 C-3
4 M301 operation check PKDB CN35-1 to 3 PK-516 C-2
5 Change M301 - -
6 PKDB ICP4 conduction check - -
7 Change PKDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 0.8MB)

3.6.20 C1130
(1) Contents
Trouble type 1st stopper motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1130
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+ZU-606 is The 1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603) is not turned ON even after
installed> the set period of time has elapsed after the 1st stopper motor (M602) starts
searching home position.
Trouble isolation Z fold
Relevant electrical parts • 1st stopper motor (M602)
• 1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M602 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS603 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-11 (ON) ZU-606 C-5

K-57
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

4 M602 operation check ZUCB CN15-4 to 6 ZU-606 C-3
5 Change M602 - -
6 ZUCB ICP7 conduction check - -
7 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.21 C1131
(1) Contents
Trouble type 2nd stopper motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1131
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+ZU-606 is The 2nd stopper home sensor (PS604) is not turned ON even after the set
installed> period of time has elapsed after the 2nd stopper motor (M603) starts
searching home position.
Trouble isolation Z fold
Relevant electrical parts • 2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
• 2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M603 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS604 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN4-5 (ON) ZU-606 C-4 to 5
4 M603 operation check ZUCB CN15-7 to 12 ZU-606 C-4
5 Change M603 - -
6 ZUCB ICP6 conduction check - -
7 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.22 C1132
(1) Contents
Trouble type Output OP punch driving motor malfunction
Trouble code C1132
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+PK-516 is The PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303) is turned neither ON nor
installed> OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed while the punch
oscillating motor (M302) is energized.
Trouble isolation Punch
Relevant electrical parts • Punch oscillating motor (M302)
• PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303)
• Punch control board (PKDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M302 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS303 I/O check, sensor check PKDB CN37-2 (ON) PK-516 C-5
4 M302 operation check PKDB CN34-1 to 6 PK-516 C-5
5 Change M302 - -
6 PKDB ICP1 conduction check - -
7 Change PKDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 0.8MB)

K-58
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.6.23 C1133
(1) Contents
Trouble type Punch shift motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1133
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+ZU-606 is The punch shift home sensor (PS605) is not turned ON, or is not turned
installed> OFF after it is turned ON, even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the punch shift motor (M605) starts searching its home position.
Trouble isolation Z fold
Relevant electrical parts • Punch shift motor (M605)
• Punch shift home sensor (PS605)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M605 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS605 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN3-2 (ON) ZU-606 C-6
4 M605 operation check ZUCB CN5-1 to 6 ZU-606 C-2
5 Change M605 - -
6 ZUCB ICP5 conduction check - -
7 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.24 C1134
(1) Contents
Trouble type Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction
Trouble code C1134
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+ZU-606 is Even after the set period of time has elapsed after the main motor cooling
installed> fan (FM601) is turned ON, the FM601 EM signal is faulty and the fan is
turned OFF; the signal is faulty after each of the following three trials.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Main motor cooling fan (FM601)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor connectors for proper connection,
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of FM601 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 FM601 operation check ZUCB CN11-11 (DRV) ZU-606 C-8 to 9
4 Change FM601 - -
5 ZUCB ICP8 conduction check - -
6 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.25 C1135
(1) Contents
Trouble type Punch motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1135
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+ZU-606 is The punch motor (M604) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time
installed> has elapsed after it is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Punch motor (M604)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

K-59
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor connectors for proper connection,
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M604 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 M604 operation check ZUCB CN11-2 (DRV) ZU-606 C-7
4 Change M604 - -
5 ZUCB ICP10 conduction check - -
6 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.26 C1136
(1) Contents
Trouble type Punch switchover motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1136
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+ZU-606 is The punch switchover switch (MS601) is not turned OFF from the ON
installed> position, or not turned ON from the OFF position, even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the punch switchover motor (M608) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Z fold
Relevant electrical parts • Punch switchover motor (M608)
• Punch switchover switch (MS601)
• ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M608 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 MS601 I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN11-9 ZU-606 C-8
4 M608 operation check ZUCB CN11-8 (DRV) ZU-606 C-7 to 8
5 Change M608 - -
6 ZUCB ICP9 conduction check - -
7 Change ZUCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram of ZU-606 (PDF format, 1.5MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of bizhub 652/602/552/502 (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.6.27 C1140
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1140
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18) is not turned ON
even after the set period of time has elapsed while the alignment plate
motor/R (M12) is energized.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
• 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M12 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS18 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-11
4 M12 operation check FSCB CN19-5 to 8 FS-526 D-13
5 Change M12 - -
6 FSCB ICP4 conduction check - -

K-60
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.28 C1141
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction
Trouble code C1141
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The paddle motor (M16) lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time
while the paddle motor (M16) is turning.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • Paddle motor (M16)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M16 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M16 operation check FSCB CN14<A>-1 to 7 FS-526 D-5
4 Change M16 - -
5 FSCB ICP13 conduction check - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.29 C1142
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple trailing paddle up-down motor malfunction
Trouble code C1142
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The trail edge paddle home sensor (PS20) is turned neither ON nor OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the trail edge paddle
motor (M15) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • Trail edge paddle motor (M15)
• Trail edge paddle home sensor (PS20)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M15 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS20 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<A>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-6 to 7
4 M15 operation check FSCB CN14<A>-8 to 12 FS-526 D-5
5 Change M15 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.30 C1143
(1) Contents
Trouble type Side-staple rewinding paddle up-down motor malfunction
Trouble code C1143
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The rewind paddle home sensor (PS16) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the rewind paddle motor (M18)
is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Rewind paddle motor (M18)

K-61
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• Rewind paddle home sensor (PS16)

• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M18 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS16 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<A>-6 (ON) FS-526 L-7
4 M8 operation check FSCB CN14<B>-1 to 4 FS-526 D-6
5 Change M18 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.31 C1144
(1) Contents
Trouble type Spare stacker board drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1144
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> The stacker plate home sensor (PS11) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed while the stacker plate motor (M17)
is energized.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Stacker plate motor (M17)
• Stacker plate home sensor (PS11)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M17 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS11 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-12 (ON) FS-526 L-12
4 M17 operation check FSCB CN18-1 to 2 FS-526 D-12
5 Change M17 - -
6 FSCB ICP9 conduction check - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.32 C1145
(1) Contents
Trouble type End stopper drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1145
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526 is installed> • The 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor (PS22) is turned neither ON
nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 2 staples
trail edge stopper motor (M19) is turned ON.
• The 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/1 (PS23) is turned neither
ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 2
staples trail edge stopper motor (M19) is turned ON.
• The 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/2 (PS42) is turned neither
ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 2
staples trail edge stopper motor (M19) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • 2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19)
• 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor (PS22)
• 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/1 (PS23)
• 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/2 (PS42)
• FS control board (FSCB)

K-62
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M19 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS22 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-15 (ON) FS-526 L-12
4 PS23 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN20<A>-18 (ON) FS-526 L-12 to 13
5 PS42 I/O check FSCB CN20<A>-9 (ON) FS-526 L-12
6 M19 operation check FSCB CN19-9 to 12 FS-526 D-13
7 Change M19 - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 2.7MB)

3.6.33 C1150
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1150
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The center staple alignment motor home sensor/R (PS31) is turned neither
installed> ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the center
staple alignment motor /R (M21) is turned ON.
<When FS-527+SD-509 is The center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41) is turned neither ON nor
installed> OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the center staple
alignment motor/R (M23) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is • Center staple alignment motor /R (M21)
installed> • Center staple alignment motor home sensor/R (PS31)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+SD-509 is • Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
installed> • Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M21 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS31 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-14 (ON) SD-508 C-9
4 M21 operation check SDDB CN403-5 to 8 SD-508 C-9
5 Change M21 - -
6 SDDB ICP4 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M23 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS41 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ9-3 (ON) SD-509 G-2
4 M23 operation check SDDB P7-5 to 8 SD-509 G-2
5 Change M23 - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

K-63
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.6.34 C1151
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple stapler drive motor malfunction
Trouble code C1151
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The stapler home sensor (PS33) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after
installed> the set period of time has elapsed after the center staple motor (M23) is
turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • Center staple motor (M23)
• Stapler home sensor (PS33)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M23 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS33 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN403-17 (ON) SD-508 C-10
4 M23 operation check SDDB CN406<A>-1 to 4 (ON) SD-508 K-8
5 Change M23 - -
6 SDDB ICP4 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.35 C1152
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple paper exit motor malfunction
Trouble code C1152
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The exit motor (M34) lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time
installed> while the exit motor (M34) is turning.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • Exit motor (M34)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M34 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M34 operation check - SD-508 G-3 to 4
4 Change M34 - -
5 SDDB ICP12 conduction check - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.36 C1153
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple paddle up-down motor malfunction
Trouble code C1153
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The paddle home sensor/C (PS37) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after
installed> the set period of time has elapsed after the center staple paddle lift motor/C
(M26) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling

K-64
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Relevant electrical parts • Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26)

• Paddle home sensor/C (PS37)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M26 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS37 I/O check, sensor check SDDB CN406<A>-11 (ON) SD-508 K-9
4 M26 operation check SDDB CN406<A>-5 to 8 SD-508 K-8
5 Change M26 - -
6 SDDB ICP4 conduction check - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.37 C1156
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing edge)
Trouble code C1156
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The center staple paddle/T (M29) lock signal remains set to L for a set
installed> period of time while the center staple paddle/T (M29) is turning.
<When FS-527+SD-509 is Even after the set period of time has elapsed after the upper paddle motor
installed> (M21) starts running, a change of motor lock signal is not detected and
neither the detection sensor/1 (PS43) nor the paper sensor/2 (PS44) is
turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-526+SD-508 is • Center staple paddle/T (M29)
installed> • SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)
<When FS-527+SD-509 is • Upper paddle motor (M21)
installed> • Paper sensor/1 (PS43)
• Paper sensor/2 (PS44)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
When FS-526+SD-508 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M29 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M29 operation check SDDB CN404-1 to 5 SD-508 C-8
4 Change M29 - -
5 SDDB ICP5 conduction check - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)
When FS-527+SD-509 is installed
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M21 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS43 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ9-8 (ON) SD-509 G-1
4 PS44 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ13-2 (ON) SD-509 G-3
5 M21 operation check SDDB PJ5-6 to 10 SD-509 B-3
6 Change M21 - -

K-65
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

3.6.38 C1157
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (middle)
Trouble code C1157
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-526+SD-508 is The center staple paddle/C (M30) lock signal remains set to L for a set
installed> period of time while the center staple paddle/C (M30) is turning.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • Center staple paddle/C (M30)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M30 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 M30 operation check SDDB CN406<B>-11 to 15 SD-508 K-10
4 Change M30 - -
5 SDDB ICP5 conduction check - -
6 Change SDDB - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.5MB)

3.6.39 C1158
(1) Contents
Trouble type Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (leading edge)
Trouble code C1158
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527+SD-509 is Even after the set period of time has elapsed after the lower paddle motor
installed> (M22) starts running, a change of motor lock signal is not detected and
neither the paper sensor/1 (PS43) nor the paper sensor/2 (PS44) is turned
ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling
Relevant electrical parts • Lower paddle motor (M22)
• Paper sensor/1 (PS43)
• Paper sensor/2 (PS44)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M22 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS43 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ9-8 (ON) SD-509 G-1
4 PS44 I/O check, sensor check SDDB PJ13-2 (ON) SD-509 G-3
5 M22 operation check SDDB PJ5-1 to 5 SD-509 B-4
6 Change M22 - -
7 Change SDDB - -
8 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.0MB)

K-66
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.6.40 C1182
(1) Contents
Trouble type Shift motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1182
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> • When moving to the front (home) position:
The tray 1 shift home sensor (PS25) is not turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the tray 1 shift motor (M16) is turned ON.
• When moving to the rear (shift) position:
The tray 1 shift home sensor (PS25) is not turned OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the tray 1 shift motor (M16) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts <When FS-527 is installed> • Tray2 shift motor (M16)
• Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M16 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS25 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ21-6 (ON) FS-527 J-3
4 M16 operation check FSCB PJ5-5 (REM) FS-527 B to C-9
5 Change M16 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.41 C1183
(1) Contents
Trouble type Elevate drive malfunction
Trouble code C1183
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> • During downward movement, the tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS24) is
turned OFF and the tray 1 lower limit sensor (PS21) is turned ON.
• The elevate motor (M15) lock signal remains set to H for a set period of
time while the elevate motor (M15) is turning.
• The tray1 upper position switch (SW2) is turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed while the elevate motor (M15) is energized.
• The tray1 lower position switch (SW3) is turned ON even after the set
period of time has elapsed while the elevate motor (M15) is energized.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Elevate motor (M15)
• Tray1 lower position sensor (PS21)
• Tray1 upper position sensor (PS24)
• Tray1 upper position switch (SW2)
• Tray1 lower position switch (SW3)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M15 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS21 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ21-3 (ON) FS-527 J-3
4 PS24 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-9 (ON) FS-527 J-4
5 SW2 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ3-2 (ON) FS-527 B to C-10
6 SW3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ3-2 (ON) FS-527 B to C-10
7 M15 operation check FSCB PJ4-1 to 11 FS-527 B to C-4
8 Change M15 - -
9 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

K-67
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.6.42 C1190
(1) Contents
Trouble type Alignment plate motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1190
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The alignment plate home sensor (PS17) is turned neither ON nor OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the alignment plate motor
(M13) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Alignment plate motor (M13)
• Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M13 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS17 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ17-3 (ON) FS-527 B to C-8
4 M13 operation check FSCB PJ8-1 to 4 FS-527 B to C-7
5 Change M13 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.43 C1194
(1) Contents
Trouble type Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C1194
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The leading edge stopper home sensor (PS20) is turned neither ON nor
OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the leading edge
stopper motor (M14) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • Leading edge stopper motor (M14)
• Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS20)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M14 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS17 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ17-6 (ON) FS-527 B to C-8
4 M14 operation check FSCB PJ8-9 to 12 FS-527 B to C-6
5 Change M14 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.44 C11A1
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Trouble code C11A1
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the exit roller retraction motor
(M9) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -

K-68
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Relevant electrical parts • Exit roller retraction motor (M9)

• Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M9 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS12 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-12 (ON) FS-527 J-4
4 M9 operation check FSCB PJ9-5 (REM) FS-527 J-1
5 Change M9 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.45 C11A2
(1) Contents
Trouble type Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Trouble code C11A2
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13) is turned neither ON nor
OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the accommodation
roller retraction motor (M10) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10)
• Accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M10 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS13 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-15 (ON) FS-527 J-3
4 M10 operation check FSCB PJ9-8 (REM) FS-527 J-1
5 Change M10 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.46 C11A7
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction
Trouble code C11A7
Rank B
Detection timing <When JS-603 is installed> The exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the exit roller retraction motor
(M9) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
• Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M17 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS35 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ12-6 (ON) FS-527 (JS-603) L-10
4 M17 operation check FSCB PJ30-2 (REM) FS-527 (JS-603) L-9

K-69
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

5 Change M17 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.47 C11B0
(1) Contents
Trouble type Stapler movement drive malfunction
Trouble code C11B0
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> During home position search, neither the stapler home sensor/1 (PS18) nor
the stapler home sensor/2 (PS19) is turned ON or OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the stapler movement motor (M11) is turned
ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • Stapler movement motor (M11)
• Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
• Stapler home sensor/2 (PS19)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M11 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS18 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ17-12 (ON) FS-527 B to C-7
4 PS19 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ17-15 (ON) FS-527 B to C-7
5 M11 operation check FSCB PJ8-5 to 8 FS-527 B to C-6
6 Change M11 - -
7 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.48 C11B2
(1) Contents
Trouble type Staple drive malfunction
Trouble code C11B2
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The stapler home sensor is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the stapler motor is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Staple
Relevant electrical parts • Stapler unit
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
2 Change stapler unit - -
3 Change FSCB - -

3.6.49 C11B5
(1) Contents
Trouble type Saddle stapler drive malfunction
Trouble code C11B5
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527+SD-509 is The center stapler home sensor is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the
installed> set period of time has elapsed after the center stapler motor is turned ON.
Trouble isolation Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling

K-70
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Relevant electrical parts • Saddle stapler unit

• SD drive board (SDDB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
2 Change saddle stapler unit - -
3 Change SDDB - -
4 Change FSCB - -

3.6.50 C11C0
(1) Contents
Trouble type Punch motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C11C0
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527+PK-517 is The punch home sensor/1 (PS100) is not turned ON even after the set
installed> period of time has elapsed while the punch motor/1 (M100) is energized.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Punch motor/1 (M100)
• Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M100 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 PS100 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ19-8 (ON) FS-527 (PK-517) J-9
M100 operation check FSCB PJ19-1 (CW)
4 FS-527 (PK-517) J-8
FSCB PJ19-3 (CCW)
5 Change M100 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.51 C11E0
(1) Contents
Trouble type Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C11E0
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The duplex path switching sensor (PS3) is turned neither ON nor OFF even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex path switching
motor (M2) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Duplex path switching motor (M2)
• Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M2 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS3 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ11-6 (ON) FS-527 I-11
4 M2 operation check FSCB PJ29-1 to 3 FS-527 I-12
5 Change M2 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

K-71
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.6.52 C11E1
(1) Contents
Trouble type Upper lower path switching motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C11E1
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The upper lower path switching sensor (PS26) is turned neither ON nor OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the upper lower path
switching motor (M6) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Upper lower path switching motor (M6)
• Upper lower path switching sensor (PS26)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M6 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS26 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ21-9 (ON) FS-527 J-2
4 M6 operation check FSCB PJ9-1 (REM) FS-527 J-2
5 Change M6 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.6.53 C11E2
(1) Contents
Trouble type Tray1 path switching motor drive malfunction
Trouble code C11E2
Rank B
Detection timing <When FS-527 is installed> The tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7) is turned neither ON nor OFF
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the tray1 path switching
motor (M8) is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Tray1 path switching motor (M8)
• Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M8 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS7 I/O check, sensor check FSCB PJ16-3 (ON) FS-527 J-5
4 M8 operation check FSCB PJ9-4 (REM) FS-527 J-2
5 Change M8 - -
6 Change FSCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.8MB)

3.7 C2***
3.7.1 C2101
(1) Contents
Trouble type PC charge cleaning malfunction
Trouble code C2101
Rank B
Detection timing During backward movement of the cleaner, the charging cleaner home sensor is not blocked after a
predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Drum unit
• Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
• Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)

K-72
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)

• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the drum unit for proper connection and correct
1 - -
as necessary.
Check the M15 connector for proper connection and
2 - -
correct as necessary.
3 PS43 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN25-11 (ON) C-12
4 PS44 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN25-14 (ON) C-12
5 M15 operation check PRCB CN8-1 to 2 C-12
6 Change drum unit - -
7 Change M15 - -
8 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.2 C2151
(1) Contents
Trouble type Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation
Trouble code C2151
Rank B
Detection timing • The pressure welding alienation sensor doesn't turn OFF (retracting) even after the lapse of a given period of
time after the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd transfer roller is
retracting.
• The pressure welding alienation sensor doesn't turn ON (pressuring) even after the lapse of a given period of
time after the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor has started rotating during the transfer roller is
pressuring.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)
• 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M3 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
2 PS50 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-9 (ON) Q-5
3 M3 operation check PFTDB CN5-3 (REM) Q-6
4 Change M3 - -
5 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.3 C2152
(1) Contents
Trouble type Transfer belt pressure welding alienation
Trouble code C2152
Rank B
Detection timing • At the completion of transfer belt pressure/retraction operations, the pressure welding alienation sensor/K is
not in the status corresponding to each of the transfer belt pressure/retraction operations.
• Even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the transfer belt starts pressure/retraction
operation, the pressure welding alienation sensor/K is not in the status corresponding to each of the transfer
belt pressure/retraction operations.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Pressure welding alienation sensor/K (PS51)
• 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M21 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
2 PS51 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN21-1 (ON) C-23

K-73
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

3 M21 operation check PRCB CN20-1 to 4 K-6
4 Change M21 - -
5 PRCB ICP4 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.4 C2163
(1) Contents
Trouble type PC charge malfunction
Trouble code C2163
Rank B
Detection timing When electrostatic charge output is ON, electrostatic charge leak detection system continues to detect leaks for
a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Imaging unit
• High voltage unit/1 (HV1)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the imaging unit for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and
2 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
3 - -
correct as necessary.
4 Change drum unit - -
5 Change HV1 - -
6 Change PRCB - -

3.7.5 C2204
(1) Contents
Trouble type Waste toner agitating motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C2204
Rank B
Detection timing The waste toner agitating motor lock sensor continues to be blocked or unblocked for a predetermined period of
time when the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor (PS23)
• Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Clean the PS23 if it has toner or paper dust, etc. - -
2 Change the waste toner box. - -
Check the M20 connector for proper connection and
3 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling
4 - -
and correct as necessary.
5 M20 operation check PRCB CN23-1 to 4 C-8 to 9
6 Change M20 - -
7 PRCB ICP3 conduction check - -
8 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.6 C2257, C2258

(1) Contents
Trouble type Cleaner motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C2257

K-74
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Cleaner motor (M38)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Cleaner motor's turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code C2258
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Cleaner motor (M38)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M38 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the M38 connector for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
3 - -
correct as necessary.
M38 operation check PRCB CN2-3 (REM)
4 K-13
PRCB CN2-6 (LOCK)
5 Change M38 - -
6 PRCB ICP18 conduction check - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.7 C2259, C225A

(1) Contents
Trouble type K developing motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C2259
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • K developing motor (M19)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type K developing motor's turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code C225A
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • K developing motor (M19)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M19 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the M19 connector for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
3 - -
correct as necessary.
M19 operation check PRCB CN34-1 (REM)
4 K-2
PRCB CN34-4 (LOCK)
5 Change M19 - -
6 PRCB ICP14 conduction check - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

K-75
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.7.8 C225B, C225C

(1) Contents
Trouble type K PC drum motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C225B
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • K PC drum motor (M18)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type K PC drum motor's turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code C225C
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • K PC drum motor (M18)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M18 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the M18 connector for proper drive coupling
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
3 - -
correct as necessary.
M18 operation check PRCB CN35-10 (REM)
4 K-2
PRCB CN35-13 (LOCK)
5 Change M18 - -
6 PRCB ICP14 conduction check - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.9 C2350
(1) Contents
Trouble type Toner suction fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C2350
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM8 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM7 operation check PRCB CN15-1 (REM)
3 K-10
PRCB CN15-3 (LOCK)
4 Change FM7 - -
5 PRCB ICP6 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.10 C2353
(1) Contents
Trouble type IU cooling fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C2353
Rank B

K-76
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IU cooling fan motor (FM15)
• PH relay board (REYB/PH)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM15 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM15 operation check REYB/PH CN5-1 (REM)
3 A to B-6
REYB/PH CN5-3 (LOCK)
4 Change FM15 - -
5 REYB/PH ICP1 conduction check - -
6 Change REYB/PH - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.11 C2354
(1) Contents
Trouble type Rear side cooling fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C2354
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM16 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM16 operation check PRCB CN18-2 (REM)
3 C-12 to 13
PRCB CN18-3 (LOCK)
4 Change FM16 - -
5 PRCB ICP7 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.12 C2557
(1) Contents
Trouble type Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor
Trouble code C2557
Rank B
Detection timing When sampling data is determined in TC ratio calculation control, TCR sensor output is higher than a
predetermined value for a predetermined number of times in a row even though there is toner in the sub
hopper.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Drum unit
• Toner cartridge
• Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)
• Toner supply motor/K (M12)
• Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image
1 - -
density is low.

K-77
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

M12 operation check
2 PRCB CN19-13 to 16 C-20
(At this time, IU must be non-installation.)
3 M14 operation check PRCB CN20-9 to 12 K-8
4 Reinstall drum unit - -
5 Reinstall toner cartridge - -
If the toner empty sensor and its surroundings inside
6 - -
the sub hopper are dirtied with toner, clean them.
7 Change drum unit - -
8 Change PRCB. - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.7.13 C2558
(1) Contents
Trouble type Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor
Trouble code C2558
Rank B
Detection timing TC ratio in the developing unit, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is a
predetermined value or more for a given number of times consecutively.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Drum unit
• Toner cartridge
• Sub hopper unit
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Reinstall drum unit - -
2 Reinstall toner cartridge - -
3 Change drum unit - -
4 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
5 Change PRCB - -
6 Change sub hopper unit - -

3.7.14 C255C
(1) Contents
Trouble type Black TCR sensor adjustment failure
Trouble code C255C
Rank B
Detection timing TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Drum unit
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Reinstall drum unit - -
2 Change drum unit - -
3 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
4 Change PRCB - -

3.7.15 C2564
(1) Contents
Trouble type • Black TCR sensor failure
Trouble code C2564
Rank B
Detection timing Alarm signals for a TCR sensor are detected more than the predetermined number of times.
This detection is used for detecting disconnection of TCR sensor connector.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Developing unit

K-78
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Reinstall developing unit - -
Check the harness from developing unit to PRCB for
2 - -
proper connection and correct as necessary.
3 Change developing unit - -
4 PRCB ICP2 conduction check - -
5 Change PRCB - -

3.7.16 C2650
(1) Contents
Trouble type Main backup media access error
Trouble code C2650
Rank C
Detection timing • The re-written data, which has been read out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as
error.
• The error was found when reading out the counter value.
• The machine detects that the service EEPROM board is not loaded in position.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connector (CN33) on PRCB, the connector
(CN1) on SV ERB, and the harness between the
1 - -
boards for proper connection and correct as
necessary.
Change PRCB
1. Turn OFF the main power switch and replace the
current PRCB with a new one.
(When using a PRCB of another machine in service,
be sure to use a PRCB installed in the same model.)
2. Update the PRCB firmware.
3. After completing the firmware update, turn OFF and
ON the main power switch and check to see that
2 - -
warm-up is started.
Make sure that malfunction codes other than C2650 or
improper IU/TC placement is not detected.
4. When the trouble cannot be solved, reinstall the
removed PRCB to the original board.
NOTE
When taking the above steps, check whether PRCB is
defective or not without replacing the SV ERB.
Change SV ERB
1. Replace the current SV ERB with a new one.
2. Turn ON the main power switch and check to see
that warm-up is started.
3 (One minute is spent to prepare the new SV ERB for - -
use. During the period, the control panel backlight
stays off.)
Make sure that malfunction codes other than C2650 or
improper IU/TC placement is not detected.
3. Make the specified readjustments.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact
4 - -
KM.

3.7.17 C2654
(1) Contents
Trouble type • EEPROM access error (Drum unit)
Trouble code C2654
Rank C
Detection timing • The re-written data, which has been read out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as
error.

K-79
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

• The error was found when reading out the counter value.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Developing unit
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Clean the connection between the developing unit and
1 - -
the machine if dirty
2 Reinstall developing unit - -
Check the harness for proper connection and correct
3 - -
as necessary.
4 Change developing unit - -
5 Change PRCB - -

3.7.18 C2A14
(1) Contents
Trouble type Drum unit new release failure
Trouble code C2A14
Rank C
Detection timing The status with the new unit is not cleared after the new drum unit is set.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Drum unit
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Clean the connection between the drum unit and the
1 - -
machine if dirty.
2 Reinstall drum unit - -
Check the harness for proper connection and correct
3 - -
as necessary.
4 Change drum unit - -
5 Change PRCB - -

3.7.19 C2A24
(1) Contents
Trouble type • Toner cartridge new release failure
Trouble code C2A24
Rank C
Detection timing The status with the new cartridge is not cleared after the new toner cartridge is set.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Toner cartridge
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Clean the connection between the toner cartridge and
1 - -
the machine if dirty.
2 Reinstall toner cartridge - -
Check the harness for proper connection and correct
3 - -
as necessary.
4 Change toner cartridge - -
5 Change PRCB - -

3.8 C3***
3.8.1 C3101
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing roller separation failure
Trouble code C3101

K-80
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Rank B
Detection timing • With the fusing roller being retracted, the pulse of the encoder sensor does not change even after the
specified period of time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started rotating.
• With the fusing roller being pressed, the encoder pulse sensor does not change even after the specified
period of time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started rotating.
• With the pressure roller being pressed, the pressure home sensor did not turn ON (pressed) even after the
fusing retraction position sensor counted up the specified number of pulse after the fusing pressure retraction
motor started rotating.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Roller pressure welding alienation sensor (PS55)
• Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• Fusing unit

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M29 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
2 PS55 I/O check, sensor check - -
3 M29 operation check PRCB CN8-3 to 4 C-16
4 Change M29 - -
5 Change fusing unit - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.8.2 C3102
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing roller failure to turn
Trouble code C3102
Rank A
Detection timing When the IH power supply is turned ON, pulse signals are not input either of the heating roller rotation sensor
within a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56)
• Fusing motor (M30)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• Fusing unit

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for proper installation and correct
1 - -
as necessary.
Check the M30 connector for proper connection and
2 - -
correct as necessary.
3 PS56 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN22-12 (ON) C-17
M30 operation check PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
4 K-10
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
5 Change M30 - -
6 Change fusing unit - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.8.3 C3201, C3202

(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing motor failure to turn
Trouble code C3201
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing motor (M30)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing

K-81
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Trouble code C3202

Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing motor (M30)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M30 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the loading status of the fusing unit drive, and
2 - -
correct the error as necessary.
Check the fusing unit, PRCB for proper connection and
3 - -
correct or change as necessary.
M30 operation check PRCB CN9-3 (REM)
4 K-10
PRCB CN9-6 (LOCK)
5 Change M30 - -
6 PRCB ICP16 conduction check - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.8.4 C3303
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing cooling fan motor/1 failure to turn
Trouble code C3303
Rank B
Detection timing The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM2 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM2 operation check PRCB CN11-1 (REM)
3 K-9
PRCB CN11-3 (LOCK)
4 Change FM2 - -
5 PRCB ICP9 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.8.5 C3305
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing cooling fan motor/3 failure to turn
Trouble code C3305
Rank B
Detection timing The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
• Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM5 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.

K-82
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM5 operation check PFTDB CN5-9 (REM)
3 Q-7
PFTDB CN5-11 (LOCK)
4 Change FM5 - -
5 PFTDB ICP2 conduction check - -
6 Change PFTDB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.8.6 C3424
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side)
Trouble code C3424
Rank A
Detection timing After warm-up operation starts, the soaking roller thermistor does not detect a temperature as high as a
predetermined one though a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and DCPU for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change fusing unit - -
5 Change IHPU - -
6 Change PRCB - -
7 Change DCPU - -

3.8.7 C3425
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor)
Trouble code C3425
Rank A
Detection timing After warm-up operation starts, the heating roller temperature sensor/1 does not detect a temperature as high
as a predetermined one though a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, MFPB and REDB for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change TEMS1 - -
5 Change fusing unit - -
6 Change IHPU - -

K-83
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

7 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
8 Change PRCB - -
9 Change REDB - -

3.8.8 C3721, C3722, C3725

(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Center of the heating roller)
Trouble code C3721
Rank A
Detection timing • The heating roller temperature sensor/2 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one
for a predetermined period of time.
• The signal is turned ON to activate the hard ratchet in the middle of the heating side.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller)
Trouble code C3722
Rank A
Detection timing • The heating roller temperature sensor/3 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one
for a predetermined period of time.
• The signal is turned ON to activate the hard ratchet at the edges of the heating side.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor)
Trouble code C3725
Rank A
Detection timing The heating roller temperature sensor/1 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for
a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, MFPB and REDB for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change TEMS1, TEMS2 or TEMS3 - -
5 Change fusing unit - -
6 Change IHPU - -
7 Change PRCB - -
8 Change REDB - -

K-84
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.8.9 C3724
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side)
Trouble code C3724
Rank A
Detection timing • The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for a
predetermined period of time.
• The signal is turned ON to activate the hard ratchet on the soaking side.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and DCPU for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change fusing unit - -
5 Change IHPU - -
6 Change PRCB - -
7 Change DCPU - -

3.8.10 C3822, C3825

(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller)
Trouble code C3822
Rank A
Detection timing The heating roller thermistor/2 continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a
predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor)
Trouble code C3825
Rank A
Detection timing The heating roller temperature sensor/1 continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a
predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and REDB for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change TEMS1 (C3825) - -
5 Change fusing unit - -

K-85
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

6 Change IHPU - -
7 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
8 Change PRCB - -
9 Change REDB - -

3.8.11 C3824
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side)
Trouble code C3824
Rank A
Detection timing The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a
predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and DCPU for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change fusing unit - -
5 Change IHPU - -
6 Change PRCB - -
7 Change DCPU - -

3.8.12 C3921, C3922, C3925

(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the heating roller)
Trouble code C3921
Rank A
Detection timing At the warm-up stage, the heating roller temperature sensor/2 voltage does not decrease by predetermined
steps (temperature rise) within a predetermined time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the heating roller)
Trouble code C3922
Rank A
Detection timing At the warm-up stage, the heating roller temperature sensor/3 voltage does not decrease by predetermined
steps (temperature rise) within a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor)
Trouble code C3925

K-86
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Rank A
Detection timing At the warm-up stage, the heating roller temperature sensor/1 voltage does not increase by predetermined
steps (temperature rise) within a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2)
• Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and REDB for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change TEMS1, TEMS2 or TEMS3 - -
5 Change fusing unit - -
6 Change IHPU - -
7 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
8 Change PRCB - -
9 Change REDB - -

3.8.13 C3924
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side)
Trouble code C3924
Rank A
Detection timing At the warm-up stage, the soaking roller thermistor/1 voltage does not decrease by predetermined steps
(temperature rise) within a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and DCPU for
3 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
4 Change fusing unit - -
5 Change IHPU - -
6 Change PRCB - -
7 Change DCPU - -

3.8.14 C392A
(1) Contents
Trouble type Fusing sensor contamination (NC sensor)
Trouble code C392A
Rank A
Detection timing While checking the contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor/1, detected temperature of the
heating roller thermistor/1 exceeded the detected temperature of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 for
over the predetermined value for the predetermined period of time.

K-87
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Wipe the TEMS1 clean of dirt if any.
<Cleaning procedure>
• Clear away a dirt or a foreign object on the sensor
with a cotton swab.
1 • When a dirt is left even if you cleaned the sensor by - -
above procedure, clear away a dirt or a foreign
object on the sensor using a cotton swab dampened
with the alcohol.
And, wipe off the sensor with a dry cotton swab
afterwards.
Check the TEMS1 for installed position and proper
2 - -
connector connection.
3 Check the connection of the fusing unit. - -
Check the fusing unit, IHPU, PRCB and DCPU for
4 proper connection and correct or change as - -
necessary.
5 Change TEMS1 - -
6 Change fusing unit - -
7 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
8 Change PRCB - -

3.8.15 C3B02, C3B03

(1) Contents
Trouble type IH malfunction (CPU)
Trouble code C3B02
Rank A
Detection timing A failure in communication with the fusing CPU continues for a predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• IH coil unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type IH malfunction (monitor)
Trouble code C3B03
Rank A
Detection timing • Though the IH heater is ON, this status cannot be detected mechanically. (IH heater operation failure)
• Though the IH heater is OFF, mechanically, the ON status is detected. (Malfunction of IH heater operation)
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Fusing unit
• IH coil unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it
1 - -
is secured in position).
Check the open/close operation of the upper right
2 - -
door.
Check the fusing unit, degaussing coil unit, IHPU,
3 PRCB and REDB for proper connection and correct or - -
change as necessary.
4 Change fusing unit - -
5 Change IH coil unit - -

K-88
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

6 Change IHPU - -
7 Change PRCB - -
8 Change REDB - -

3.8.16 C3B05, C3B06, C3B07, C3B08

(1) Contents
Trouble type IH temperature sensor defect
Trouble code C3B05
Rank A
Detection timing • While the IH heater was ON, IH temperature sensor was disconnected for more than the predetermined
period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, short circuit on IH temperature sensor continued for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, temperature change occurred within the predetermined period of time with over
the predetermined range, and they continued for more than the predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, temperature around the heat radiator stayed high for over the predetermined
period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IH coil unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type IH surge error
Trouble code C3B06
Rank A
Detection timing While the IH heater was ON, IH stopped due to input voltage which exceeded that of surge detection voltage,
and the surge detection voltage continued for more than the predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IH coil unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type IH input power error
Trouble code C3B07
Rank A
Detection timing • While the IH heater was ON, input power stayed at the high voltage power detection value or over for more
than the predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, input power was at the low power detection value or under for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, input power was at the high voltage detection value or over for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, input power was below the low voltage detection value or under for more than
the predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, inverter power stayed at the upper limit value or over for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, output voltage halt was detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IH coil unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type IH input voltage error
Trouble code C3B08
Rank B
Detection timing • While the IH heater was ON, input power was at the high voltage detection value or over for more than the
predetermined period of time.
• While the IH heater was ON, input voltage was at the low power detection value or under for more than the
predetermined period of time.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IH coil unit
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

K-89
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the connection of the fusing unit. - -
Check the fusing unit, degaussing coil unit, IHPU,
2 PRCB and REDB for proper connection and correct or - -
change as necessary.
3 Change degaussing coil unit - -
4 Change IHPU - -
5 Change PRCB - -
6 Change REDB - -

3.9 C4***
3.9.1 C4101
(1) Contents
Trouble type Polygon motor rotation trouble
Trouble code C4101
Rank B
Detection timing • The polygon motor fails to turn stably even after the lapse of a given period of time after activating the
polygon motor.
• Motor lock signal detects HIGH for a given period time consecutively during the polygon motor is rotating.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • PH unit
• PH relay board (REYB/PH)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connector for proper connection and correct
1 - -
as necessary.
2 Change PH unit - -
3 REYB/PH ICP2 conduction check - -
4 Change REYB/PH - -
5 Change PRCB - -

3.9.2 C4301
(1) Contents
Trouble type PH cooling fan motor failure to turn
Trouble code C4301
Rank B
Detection timing The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • PH cooling fan motor (FM14)
• PH relay board (REYB/PH)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM14 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM14 operation check REYB/PH CN4-1 (REM)
3 A to B-7
REYB/PH CN4-3 (LOCK)
4 Change FM14 - -
5 REYB/PH ICP1 conduction check - -
6 Change REYB/PH - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

K-90
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.9.3 C4501
(1) Contents
Trouble type Laser malfunction
Trouble code C4501
Rank B
Detection timing • SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time after staring the laser output.
• SOS signal is not detected for a given period of time during printing or IDC sensor adjustment.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • PH unit
• PH relay board (REYB/PH)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connector for proper connection and correct
1 - -
as necessary.
2 Change PH unit - -
3 REYB/PH ICP6 conduction check - -
4 Change REYB/PH - -
5 PRCB ICP17 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -

3.10 C5***
3.10.1 C5104, C5105
(1) Contents
Trouble type Transfer belt motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C5104
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Transfer belt motor (M1)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble type Transfer belt motor's turning at abnormal timing
Trouble code C5105
Rank B
Detection timing The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Transfer belt motor (M1)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the M1 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
3 - -
correct as necessary.
M1 operation check PRCB CN35-3 (REM)
4 K-3
PRCB CN35-6 (LOCK)
5 Change M1 - -
6 PRCB ICP15 conduction check - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.2 C5304
(1) Contents
Trouble type IH cooling fan motor/1's failure to turn
Trouble code C5304

K-91
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM10 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM10 operation check PRCB CN8-5 (REM)
3 C-16
PRCB CN8-7 (LOCK)
4 Change FM10 - -
5 PRCB ICP10 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.3 C5306
(1) Contents
Trouble type IH cooling fan motor/2's failure to turn
Trouble code C5306
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM12)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM12 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM12 operation check PRCB CN8-8 (REM)
3 C-15
PRCB CN8-10 (LOCK)
4 Change FM12 - -
5 PRCB ICP10 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.4 C5351
(1) Contents
Trouble type Power supply cooling fan motor/1's failure to turn
Trouble code C5351
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (FM9)
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM9 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.

K-92
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

3 FM9 operation check DCPU PJ008-3 (LOCK) X-15
4 Change FM9 - -
5 DCPU F551 conduction check - -
6 Change DCPU - -
7 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.5 C5354
(1) Contents
Trouble type Ozone ventilation fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C5354
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM6 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM6 operation check PRCB CN11-4 (REM)
3 K-8
PRCB CN11-6 (LOCK)
4 Change FM6 - -
5 PRCB ICP9 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.6 C5356
(1) Contents
Trouble type Cooling fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C5356
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Cooling fan motor (FM3)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM3 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
FM3 operation check PRCB CN15-4 (REM)
3 K-9
PRCB CN15-6 (LOCK)
4 Change FM3 - -
5 PRCB ICP6 conduction check - -
6 Change PRCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.7 C5370
(1) Contents
Trouble type MFP control board cooling fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C5370
Rank C

K-93
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP control board cooling fan motor (FM17)
• Slide Interface board (REYB/SL)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM17 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
3 FM17 operation check MFPB PJ26-3 (LOCK) O-25
4 Change FM17 - -
5 Change REYB/SL - -
6 Change MFPB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.10.8 C5372
(1) Contents
Trouble type MFP control board CPU temperature failure
Trouble code C5372
Rank C
Detection timing Temperature failure of CPU on the MFP board was detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • CPU cooling fan motor
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Reboot the machine. - -
Check the fan connector for proper connection and
2 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
3 - -
necessary.
4 Change MFPB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.11 C6***
3.11.1 C6001
(1) Contents
Trouble type ADF related configuration error 1
Trouble code C6001
Rank C
Detection timing Inconsistency in the configuration is detected with the installed ADF.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • ADF
• DF control board (DFCB)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Correct the harness connection between DSIPB and
1 - -
MFPB if faulty.
2 Change DFCB - -
3 Change MFPB - -

3.11.2 C6002
(1) Contents
Trouble type ADF related configuration error 2

K-94
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Trouble code C6002

Rank C
Detection timing The machine detects an ADF other than DF-618.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts ADF

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the type of the installed ADF and replace it if it
1 - -
is a wrong one.
Check the cable connection between the machine and
2 - -
the ADF and correct if the connection is faulty.

3.11.3 C6102, C6103

(1) Contents
Trouble type Drive system home sensor malfunction
Trouble code C6102
Rank B
Detection timing • The scanner home sensor is unable to detect the scanner located at its home position.
• The scanner home sensor is unable to detect a scanner even when the scanner motor has been driven to
move the scanner over the maximum travelling distance.
• The scanner home sensor detects the scanner when the scanner has moved the maximum travelling
distance from the position, at which it blocks the scanner home sensor.
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • Scanner home sensor (PS201)
• Scanner motor (M201)
• Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
• MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type Slider over running
Trouble code C6103
Rank B
Detection timing The scanner home sensor detects the scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the
time when a pre-scan command and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a home return
command is executed.
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • Scanner home sensor (PS201)
• Scanner motor (M201)
• Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Correct or change the scanner drive (cable, pulley,
1 - -
gear, belt) if it is faulty.
2 Correct the scanner motor set screw if loose. - -
Adjust [Image Position Leading Edge] and [Feed
3 - -
Direction Adjustment].
Check the PS201, M201, REYB/SCAN and MFPB
4 connector for proper connection and correct as - -
necessary.
5 PS201 I/O check, sensor check REYB/SCAN PJ3-5 (ON) V-18
6 M201 operation check REYB/SCAN PJ5-4 to 7 V-19
7 Change REYB/SCAN. - -
8 Change MFPB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.11.4 C6301
(1) Contents
Trouble type Optical cooling fan motor's failure to turn
Trouble code C6301
Rank B
Detection timing The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains
stationary.

K-95
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Trouble isolation Scanner

Relevant electrical parts • Optical cooling fan motor (FM201)
• Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the FM201 connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
3 FM201 operation check REYB/SCAN PJ4-3 (LOCK) U-20
4 Change REYB/SCAN - -
5 Change MFPB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

3.11.5 C6704
(1) Contents
Trouble type Image input time out
Trouble code C6704
Rank C
Detection timing Image data is not input from the scanner to the MFP board (MFPB).
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• CCD board (CCDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] →
[Memory/HDD Adj.] → [Memory Bus Check] →
1 - -
[Scanner→Memory], and conduct the memory bus
function.
Check the connectors between scanner section and
2 - -
MFPB for proper connection and correct as necessary.
3 Change MFPB - -
4 Change CCDB - -

3.11.6 C6751
(1) Contents
Trouble type CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure
Trouble code C6751
Rank B
Detection timing • The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment.
• The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment.
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • Exposure unit
• CCD board (CCDB)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Correct the harness connection between CCDB and
1 - -
MFPB if faulty.
Check for possible extraneous light and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading
3 - -
sheet if dirty
Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty, or
4 - -
change scanner.
5 Change CCDB - -
6 Change MFPB - -

K-96
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.11.7 C6752
(1) Contents
Trouble type ASIC clock input error
Trouble code C6752
Rank C
Detection timing When starting the scanner, verification on reading and writing the predetermined value for image processing
ASIC on CCD board was conducted, and verification failure was detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • CCD board (CCDB)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Correct the harness connection of CCDB if faulty. - -
2 Change CCDB - -
3 Change MFPB - -

3.11.8 C6901, C6902, C6903

(1) Contents
Trouble type DSC board mount failure 1
Trouble code C6901
Rank C
Detection timing When MFP detects that DSC board is not properly installed.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • DSC board (SC-507)
• MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type DSC Bus check NG1-1, DSC Bus check NG1-2
Trouble code C6902, C6903
Rank C
Detection timing When DSC bus check detects an error.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • DSC board (SC-507)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Correct the harness connection of DSC board if faulty. - -
2 Change DSC board - -
3 Change MFPB - -

3.11.9 C6F01
(1) Contents
Trouble type Scanner sequence trouble 1
Trouble code C6F01
Rank C
Detection timing The original transport interval becomes shorter than the designed value due to an original transport control error
in original reading in ADF.
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Correct the harness connection between main body
1 - -
and ADF if faulty.
2 Change DFCB - -
3 Change MFPB - -

K-97
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.12 C8***
3.12.1 C8101
(1) Contents
Trouble type Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism
Trouble code C8101
Rank B
Detection timing • During a pressure motion being performed, the read roller sensor (PS6) output does not change from H to L.
• During a retraction motion being performed, the read roller sensor (PS6) output does not change from L to H.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4)
• Read roller sensor (PS6)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M4 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS6 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ6-3 (ON) DF-618 I-4
4 M4 operation check DFCB PJ6-5 to 6 DF-618 I-4
5 Change M4 - -
6 DFCB PS3 conduction check - -
7 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

3.12.2 C8102
(1) Contents
Trouble type Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble
Trouble code C8102
Rank B
Detection timing • During a pressure motion being performed, the reverse roller sensor (PS7) output does not change from H to
L.
• During a retraction motion being performed, the reverse roller sensor (PS7) output does not change from L to
H.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5)
• Reverse roller sensor (PS7)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M5 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS7 I/O check, sensor check REYB PJ3-3 (ON) DF-618 K to L-10
4 DFCB F9 conduction check - -
5 M5 operation check DFCB PJ6-10 to 11 DF-618 I-7
6 Change M5 - -
7 DFCB PS2 conduction check - -
8 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

3.12.3 C8103
(1) Contents
Trouble type Lift up mechanism trouble (Upward movement)
Trouble code C8103
Rank B
Detection timing The lift up upper sensor (PS16) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the lift-up motor (M6) moves
up (is turned forward).
Trouble isolation -

K-98
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Relevant electrical parts • Lift-up motor (M6)

• Lift-up upper sensor (PS16)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M6 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS16 I/O check, sensor check DFCB PJ11-3 (ON) DF-618 B-6
4 M6 operation check DFCB PJ5-6 to 7 DF-618 I-7 to 8
5 Change M6 - -
6 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

3.12.4 C8104
(1) Contents
Trouble type Glass movement trouble
Trouble code C8104
Rank B
Detection timing • The glass home sensor (PS203) output does not change from H to L after a lapse of a given time while the
original glass moving motor (M202) is working.
• The glass home sensor (PS203) output does not change from L to H after a lapse of a given time while the
original glass moving motor (M202) is working.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Original glass moving unit
• Original glass moving motor (M202)
• Original glass position control board (OGPCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M202 for proper drive
2 - -
coupling, and correct as necessary.
3 Change original glass moving unit - -
4 Change OGPCB - -

3.12.5 C8106
(1) Contents
Trouble type Lift up mechanism failure (Downward movement)
Trouble code C8106
Rank B
Detection timing The lift up lower sensor (PS15) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the lift-up motor (M6) goes
down (is turned backward).
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Lift-up motor (M6)
• Lift-up lower sensor (PS15)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
1 - -
connection, and correct as necessary.
Check the connector of M6 for proper drive coupling,
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 PS15 I/O check, sensor check REYB PJ3-6 (ON) DF-618 K to L-10
4 DFCB F9 conduction check - -
5 M6 operation check DFCB PJ5-6 to 7 DF-618 I-7 to 8
6 Change M6 - -
7 DFCB PS1 conduction check - -

K-99
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

8 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

3.12.6 C8302
(1) Contents
Trouble type Cooling fan failure
Trouble code C8302
Rank B
Detection timing While the motor is running, the fan lock signal remains HIGH three times for a predetermined period of
consecutive time.
Trouble isolation ADF
Relevant electrical parts • Cooling fan (FM1)
• DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connector of FM1 for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the fan for possible overload and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
3 FM1 operation check DFCB PJ7-1 to 3 DF-618 I-2 to 3
4 Change FM1 - -
5 DFCB F7 conduction check - -
6 Change DFCB - -
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

3.12.7 C8401
(1) Contents
Trouble type EEPROM failure
Trouble code C8401
Rank C
Detection timing EEPROM does not access normally
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • DF control board (DFCB)
• EEPROM

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
Check that the EEPROM is installed properly and
2 - -
correct if there is a problem.
3 Rewrite the firmware. - -
4 Change DFCB - -

3.13 C9***
3.13.1 C9401, C9402
(1) Contents
Trouble type Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection
Trouble code C9401
Rank A
Detection timing The output from the CCD sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD sensor gain adjustment.
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • Exposure unit
• Flat cable
• Inverter board (INVB)
• CCD board (CCDB)
• Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
• MFP board (MFPB)

K-100
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Trouble type Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection

Trouble code C9402
Rank A
Detection timing The average output value of the CCD sensor with the scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value
or more at the end of a scan job.
Trouble isolation Scanner
Relevant electrical parts • Exposure unit
• Flat cable
• Inverter board (INVB)
• CCD board (CCDB)
• Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connection between the lamp harness and
1 - -
the inverter board, and correct if necessary.
Check the connection between REYB/SCAN and the
2 - -
inverter board, and correct if necessary.
Check the connection between REYB/SCAN and
3 - -
MFPB, and correct if necessary.
Check that the connection between CCDB and MFPB,
4 - -
and correct if necessary.
5 Change INVB - -
6 Change exposure unit - -
7 Change CCDB - -
8 Change REYB/SCAN - -
9 Change MFPB - -

3.14 CA***
3.14.1 CA051, CA052, CA053
(1) Contents
Trouble type Standard controller configuration failure
Trouble code CA051
Rank C
Detection timing The controller of the printer control board (PRCB) is faulty.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type Controller hardware error
Trouble code CA052
Rank C
Detection timing A controller hardware error is detected in the network I/F.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type Controller start failure
Trouble code CA053
Rank C
Detection timing A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check to see if the following setting has been correctly
made: [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Image
1 Controller Setting]. - -
If changing the setting, turn OFF the main power
switch and turn it ON again after 10 seconds or more.
Check the connectors of the MFP board (MFPB) for
2 - -
proper connection and correct as necessary.

K-101
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

3 Change MFPB - -

3.15 CC***
3.15.1 CC001
(1) Contents
Trouble type Vendor connection failure
Trouble code CC001
Rank C
Detection timing It is detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with
"Installed" selected for the setting of vendor installation.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Printer control board (PRCB)
• Coin vendor (Japan)
• Coin vendor kit (North America, Europe)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the vendor connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
2 - -
correct as necessary.
3 Change PRCB - -

3.15.2 CC151, CC152, CC153

(1) Contents
Trouble type ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)
Trouble code CC151
Rank C
Detection timing A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MFPB during starting
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts -
Trouble type ROM contents error upon startup (scanner)
Trouble code CC152
Rank C
Detection timing A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MFPB during starting
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts -
Trouble type ROM contents error upon startup (PRT)
Trouble code CC153
Rank C
Detection timing A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the PRCB during starting.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts -

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the ROM version. - -
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Replace the appropriate board. - -

3.15.3 CC155
(1) Contents
Trouble type Finisher ROM error
Trouble code CC155
Rank C
Detection timing Data of flash ROM of the finishing options is determined to be faulty when the power is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -

K-102
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Relevant electrical parts FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change FSCB (FS-526/FS-527) - -

3.15.4 CC156
(1) Contents
Trouble type ADF ROM error
Trouble code CC156
Rank C
Detection timing Upgrade of the firmware has not been successful.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change DFCB - -

3.15.5 CC157
(1) Contents
Trouble type Finisher ROM error (RU)
Trouble code CC157
Rank C
Detection timing When a communication error is detected between the main body and the horizontal transport unit.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Transport control board (TRCB)
• FS control board (FSCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change TRCB - -
4 Change FSCB (FS-526/FS-527) - -

3.15.6 CC158
(1) Contents
Trouble type Finisher ROM error (ZU)
Trouble code CC158
Rank C
Detection timing Data of flash ROM of the z-folding unit is determined to be faulty when the power is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts ZU control board (ZUCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.

K-103
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change ZUCB - -

3.15.7 CC159, CC15A

(1) Contents
Trouble type ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1), ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2)
Trouble code CC159, CC15A
Rank C
Detection timing A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the DSC board during starting.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts DSC board (SC-507)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the DSC board connector for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
2 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
3 Rewrite the firmware. - -
4 Change DSC board - -

3.15.8 CC15B
(1) Contents
Trouble type Finisher ROM error (SD)
Trouble code CC15B
Rank C
Detection timing Data of flash ROM of the saddle unit is determined to be faulty when the power is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts SD drive board (SDDB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change SDDB (SD-508/SD-509) - -

3.15.9 CC163
(1) Contents
Trouble type ROM contents error (PRT)
Trouble code CC163
Rank C
Detection timing The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine is being
checked.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Rewrite the firmware. - -
2 Change PRCB - -

K-104
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

1. Turn OFF the main power switch and replace the
current PRCB with a new one.
(When using a PRCB of another machine in service,
be sure to use a PRCB installed in the same model.)
2. Update the PRCB firmware.
3. After completing the firmware update, turn OFF and
ON the main power switch and check to see that
warm-up is started.
4. When the trouble cannot be solved, reinstall the
removed PRCB to the original board.
NOTE
• When taking the above steps, check whether PRCB
is defective or not without replacing the SV ERB.
Change SV ERB
1. Replace the current SV ERB with a new one.
2. Turn ON the main power switch and check to see
3 that warm-up is started. - -
(One minute is spent to prepare the new SV ERB for
use. During the period, the control panel backlight
stays off.)
3. Make the specified readjustments.
If the above actions do not solve the problem, contact
4 - -
KM.

3.15.10 CC164
(1) Contents
Trouble type ROM contents error (MSC)
Trouble code CC164
Rank C
Detection timing The wrong model of firmware is detected in the MFP board when the main power switch is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Printer control board (PRCB)
• MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the ROM version. - -
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Replace the corresponding board. - -
When not reviving even if the above-mentioned
4 procedure is done, contact the responsible people of - -
KM.

3.15.11 CC165
(1) Contents
Trouble type ROM contents error (ADF)
Trouble code CC165
Rank C
Detection timing When the power is turned ON, DF control board or firmware error is detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • DF control board (DFCB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
1 OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, - -
and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Rewrite the firmware. - -
3 Change DFCB - -

K-105
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.15.12 CC170, CC171, CC172, CC173, CC174, CC180, CC181, CC182, CC183, CC184, CC185, CC186
(1) Contents
Trouble type Dynamic link error during starting (AP0)
Dynamic link error during starting (AP1)
Dynamic link error during starting (AP2)
Dynamic link error during starting (AP3)
Dynamic link error during starting (AP4)
Dynamic link error during starting (LDR)
Dynamic link error during starting (IBR)
Dynamic link error during starting (IID)
Dynamic link error during starting (IPF)
Dynamic link error during starting (IMY)
Dynamic link error during starting (SPF)
Dynamic link error during starting (OAP)
Trouble code CC170
CC171
CC172
CC173
CC174
CC180
CC181
CC182
CC183
CC184
CC185
CC186
Rank C
Detection timing A dynamic link error occurs in the program on the MFP board due to an insufficient memory space available, a
ROM fault, or other reason when the main power switch is turned ON.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• NVRAM board (NRB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
If the malfunction code "C-C172" has occurred, access
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Image Controller
Setting] and check to see if "Controller 2," "Controller
1 - -
3," or "Others" is set for [Image Controller Setting].
If any of these is set, according to the kind of
controller, select "Controller 0" or "Controller 1."
2 Change MFPB - -
When not reviving even if the above-mentioned
3 procedure is done, contact the responsible people of - -
KM.

3.15.13 CC190
(1) Contents
Trouble type Outline font load error
Trouble code CC190
Rank C
Detection timing An error occurred while loading the outline font.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the hard disk connector for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Format hard disk. - -

K-106
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components

3 Change hard disk. - -
4 Change MFPB - -

3.15.14 CC191
(1) Contents
Trouble type Setting parameter load error (LDR)
Trouble code CC191
Rank C
Detection timing Upon startup, the processing of the loadable device driver setting data file failed.
• RAM disk file creation failed.
• Reading from the flash ROM failed.
• An error occurred in API of the authentication module.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or
1 - -
more, and turn ON the main power switch.
2 Reinstall the loadable device driver. - -
3 Rewrite the firmware. - -
4 Change MFPB - -

3.16 CD***
3.16.1 CD002
(1) Contents
Trouble type JOB RAM save error
Trouble code CD002
Rank C
Detection timing The error in save of job data to the memory/ hard disk and its read error are detected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the hard disk connector for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Format hard disk. - -
3 Change hard disk - -
4 Change MFPB - -

3.16.2 CD004, CD00F, CD020

(1) Contents
Trouble type Hard disk access error (connection failure)
Trouble code CD004
Rank C
Detection timing Unable to communicate between the hard disk and printer control board (PRCB).
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk
Trouble type Hard disk data transfer error
Trouble code CD00F
Rank C
Detection timing Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk

K-107
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Trouble type Hard disk verify error

Trouble code CD020
Rank C
Detection timing The data abnormality is detected by the HDD verify check.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the hard disk connector for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Reinstall the hard disk. - -
3 Change hard disk - -
4 Change MFPB - -

3.16.3 CD010
(1) Contents
Trouble type Hard disk unformat
Trouble code CD010
Rank C
Detection timing Unformatted hard disk is connected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] →
1 [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD Format], and conduct the - -
HDD format function.
2 Change hard disk - -
3 Change MFPB - -

3.16.4 CD011
(1) Contents
Trouble type Hard disk out of specifications mounted
Trouble code CD011
Rank C
Detection timing A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is connected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the hard disk specifications. - -
2 Change the hard disk. - -

3.16.5 CD030
(1) Contents
Trouble type Hard disk management information reading error
Trouble code CD030
Rank C
Detection timing The machine fails to read administrative information data saved in the hard disk.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts -

K-108
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

3.16.6 CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044, CD045, CD046

(1) Contents
Trouble type HDD command execution errorAddress Mark Not Found
Trouble code CD041, CD042, CD043, CD044, CD045, CD046
Rank C
Detection timing The error occurred inside the hard disk.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the hard disk specifications. - -
2 Format hard disk. - -
3 Change the hard disk. - -

3.16.7 CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A, CD04B

(1) Contents
Trouble type HDD SCSI library error
Trouble code CD047, CD048, CD049, CD04A, CD04B
Rank C
Detection timing The error occurred inside the hard disk.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the hard disk specifications. - -
2 Format hard disk. - -
3 Change the hard disk. - -

3.16.8 CD201, CD202, CD203

(1) Contents
Trouble type File memory mounting error
Trouble code CD201
Rank C
Detection timing • The file memory is not mounted.
• The file has any abnormality.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Memory
Trouble type Memory capacity discrepancy
Trouble code CD202
Rank C
Detection timing • File memory capacity on the printer control board (PRCB) is not enough.
• File memory capacity necessary for duplex printing is not enough during duplex unit mounting.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Memory
Trouble type Memory capacity discrepancy 2
Trouble code CD203
Rank C
Detection timing File memory capacity on the printer control board (PRCB) is not enough.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Memory

K-109
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check to see if the memory on MFPB is installed
1 - -
correctly.
2 Change the memory on MFPB. - -
3 Change MFPB - -

3.16.9 CD211, CD212

(1) Contents
Trouble type PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure
Trouble code CD211
Rank C
Detection timing Hardware related to the transfer of memory image of the printer control board (PRCB) fails to respond.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type Compression/extraction timeout detection
Trouble code CD212
Rank C
Detection timing Hardware related to the BTC compression function of the printer control board (PRCB) fails to respond.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Change MFPB. - -

3.16.10 CD231
(1) Contents
Trouble type No Fax memory at FAX board mounting
Trouble code CD231
Rank C
Detection timing • The DIMM for FAX is not mounted during the FAX board is mounting.
• The FAX board is not mounted when the FAX board mounting is set ON at Service Mode.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• FAX board

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check to see if the FAX board is installed correctly. - -
2 Change MFPB - -

3.16.11 CD241, CD242

(1) Contents
Trouble type Encryption ASIC error
Trouble code CD241
Rank C
Detection timing Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
Trouble type Encryption ASIC mounting error
Trouble code CD242
Rank C
Detection timing The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)

K-110
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the MFP board connector for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Change MFPB - -

3.16.12 CD261
(1) Contents
Trouble type USB host board failure
Trouble code CD261
Rank C
Detection timing • When a failure is detected in USB host board included in the local interface kit.
• Non-standard USB device is connected.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• USB host board (EK-604)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
1 Check the operation with another USB device. - -
Check the USB host board connector for proper
2 - -
connection and correct as necessary.
3 Change USB host board. - -
4 Change MFPB. - -

3.16.13 CD271
(1) Contents
Trouble type i-Option activated and additional memory not installed
Trouble code CD271
Rank C
Detection timing While the i-Option is activated, the additional memory included in UK-203 is not installed.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Memory for i-Option (UK-203)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the memory (UK-203) for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Change memory (UK-203). - -
3 Change MFPB. - -

3.16.14 CD272
(1) Contents
Trouble type i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not installed
Trouble code CD272
Rank C
Detection timing While the i-Option is activated, the additional memory included in UK-203 and the HDD are not installed.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk
• Memory for i-Option (UK-203)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the memory (UK-203) for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
Check the HDD for proper connection and correct as
2 - -
necessary.
3 Change memory (UK-203). - -

K-111
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

4 Change HDD - -
5 Change MFPB. - -

3.16.15 CD3##
(1) Contents
Trouble type NVRAM data error
Trouble code CD3##
Rank C
Detection timing Abnormality is detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data.
Trouble isolation -
• When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for restoration.
• Trouble code [C-D390] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected, which can be restored with one
restoration command.
• Data backup will be automatically performed every hour. Backup can also be performed manually with the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [NVRAM Data Back Up]
1. When a trouble caused by NVRAM data error occurs, the screen below appears.

2. Select [Start] and touch [OK].

3. The screen will be shifted to the data restoration screen to perform data restoration.
NOTE
• When the restoration is performed in a short time, data restoration screen may not be displayed.

4. Check the message which indicates that the data restoration was successfully conducted. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON
again more than 10 seconds after.
NOTE
• In case it failed to restore data, return to the trouble code screen.

3.16.16 CD390
(1) Contents
Trouble type NVRAM data multiple errors
Trouble code CD390
Rank C
Detection timing Multiple errors (Over 5) are detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data.
Trouble isolation -

3.16.17 CD401, CD402, CD403, CD404, CD405, CD406, CD407

(1) Contents
Trouble type NACK command incorrect
ACK command incorrect
Checksum error
Receiving packet incorrect
Receiving packet analysis error
ACK receiving timeout
Retransmission timeout
Trouble code CD401

K-112
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

CD402
CD403
CD404
CD405
CD406
CD407
Rank C
Detection timing When abnormality is found in the communication of controller.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check whether there is a strong electromagnetic noise
1 - -
source near the main body.
Check the connectors on MFPB for proper connection
2 - -
and correct as necessary.
3 Change MFPB - -

3.16.18 CDC##
(1) Contents
Trouble type Trouble related to security
Trouble code CDC##
Rank -
Detection timing Contact the responsible people of KM before taking some countermeasures.
Trouble isolation -

3.17 CE***
3.17.1 CE001, CE003, CE004, CE005, CE006, CE007
(1) Contents
Trouble type Abnormal message queue
Task error
Event error
Memory access error
Header access error
DIMM initialize error
Trouble code CE001
CE003
CE004
CE005
CE006
CE007
Rank C
Detection timing MFP board (MFPB) is faulty.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connectors on MFPB for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Change MFPB - -

3.17.2 CE002
(1) Contents
Trouble type Message and method parameter failure
Trouble code CE002
Rank C

K-113
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

Detection timing MFP board (MFPB) is faulty.

Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• Hard disk

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again,
and conduct the following setting.
1 - -
[Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Initialization] →
[Clear All Data].
2 Format hard disk. - -
3 Change hard disk. - -
4 Change MFPB. - -

3.17.3 CEEE1
(1) Contents
Trouble type MFP board malfunction
Trouble code CEEE1
Rank C
Detection timing MFP board (MFPB) is faulty.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts MFP board (MFPB)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the connectors on MFPB for proper connection
1 - -
and correct as necessary.
2 Change MFPB - -

3.17.4 CEEE2
(1) Contents
Trouble type Scanner section malfunction
Trouble code CEEE2
Rank A
Detection timing A scanner part is faulty.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Exposure unit
• CCD board (CCDB)
• Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Correct the connector connection between CCDB and
1 - -
MFPB if faulty.
2 Change REYB/SCAN - -
3 Change CCDB - -

3.17.5 CEEE3
(1) Contents
Trouble type Printer control board (PRCB)
Trouble code CEEE3
Rank A
Detection timing Printer control board (PRCB) is faulty.
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts Printer control board (PRCB)

K-114
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLE CODE

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
2 Change PRCB - -

K-115
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

4. ABORT CODE
Abort code
• The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software
control.
• When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection relating to the specific type of the abort
condition.

(1) Contents
Trouble type Abort code
Trouble code CFB00 to CFFA0
Rank C
Detection timing -
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • MFP board (MFPB)
• DIMM0/DIMM1
• JPEG board (SA-502)

(2) Procedure
Step Action Control signal Location of electrical components
Check the MFPB connector for proper connection and
1 - -
correct as necessary.
Conduct the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [Memory
Check] → [Detail Check].
When "NG" is displayed, replace the appropriate
memory or PWB.
2 - -
WORK0: DIMM0
WORK1: DIMM1
FILE0,1: MFP board
FILE2,3: not used
FILE4,5: not used
Conduct the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [JPEG
3 Check]. - -
When "NG" is displayed, replace the JPEG board
(JPEGB; SA-502).
4 Change MFPB - -

4.1 CF0**
Code Item Component Rank
CF001 CT_singleList table abnormal An exceptional instance occurred MFP board (MFPB) C
CF004 CT_queue full abnormal due to the unexpected parameter
in the system F/W.
CF011 Array link abnormal
CF012 FAT link abnormal
CF013 File size abnormal
CF021 setDelayMessage Table
OverFlow
CF023 MsgQue OverFlow
CF033 setDivTbl() limitation over
CF061 IdeCommand_Set() status
Abnormal
CF062 IdeCommand_Set() parameter
Abnormal

4.2 CF1**
Code Item Component Rank
CF112 Compress table OverFlow Compression malfunctions MFP board (MFPB) C
CF113 Compress table check

K-116
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

4.3 CF2**
Code Item Component Rank
CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane() An exceptional instance occurred MFP board (MFPB) C
Table OverFlow due to the unexpected parameter
in the system F/W.

4.4 CF3**
Code Item Component Rank
CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout Image transfer error on IR input MFP board (MFPB) C
bus

4.5 CF4**
Code Item Component Rank
CF411 Parity error Communication error MFP board (MFPB) C
CF421 Overrun error (between IR-systems)
CF431 Parity error + Overrun error
CF441 Framing error
CF451 Parity error + Framing error
CF461 Overrun error + Framing error
CF471 Parity error + Overrun error +
Framing error
CF412 Parity error
CF422 Overrun error
CF432 Parity error + Overrun error
CF442 Framing error
CF452 Parity error + Framing error
CF462 Overrun error + Framing error
CF472 Parity error + Overrun error +
Framing error

4.6 CF5**
Code Item Component Rank
CF510 Parity error Communication error (between MFP board (MFPB) C
IR-systems)
CF520 Framing error Communication error (IR
CF530 Parity error + Framing error detected)
CF540 Overrun error
CF550 Parity error + Overrun error
CF560 Overrun error + Framing error
CF570 Parity error + Overrun error +
Framing error
CF580 Frame distortion of ADF

4.7 CF6**
Code Item Component Rank
CF600 Report receiving of print start that Communication error (IR MFP board (MFPB)/ C
is out of sequence detected) Engine
CF601 Report receiving of paper feeding
that is out of sequence
CF604 Outside IF/Command queue MFP board (MFPB)
CF614 "Output sequence" queue An exceptional instance occurred
CF624 Panel LCD date queue due to the unexpected parameter
in the system F/W.

4.8 CF7**
Code Item Component Rank
CF704 Common data "Delete-waiting An exceptional instance occurred MFP board (MFPB) C
HDD accumulated job ID" queue due to the unexpected parameter
CF714 IRC/Command queue in the system F/W.

K-117
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

Code Item Component Rank

CF724 Engine/Command queue MFP board (MFPB)/
Engine
CF734 Panel/Command queue MFP board (MFPB)/
Control Panel
CF744 File memory transfer start-waiting MFP board (MFPB)
command queue
CF754 File memory compression
requesting command queue
CF764 Panel instruction delete job queue
CF774 Warning delete job queue
CF784 Application instruction delete job
queue
CF794 Output page information for
duplex back side queue
CF7A4 Paper feed completion output
pate information queue
CF7B4 Exposure compaction output page
information queue
CF7C4 Pre-discharge completion output
page information queue
CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data
queue
CF7E4 Direct key data queue
CF7F4 Scan sequence queue

4.9 CF8**
Code Item Component Rank
CF802 SIO sending port...ENG FP board (MFPB)/Engine C
CF806 SIO sending port...IRC MFP board (MFPB)
CF807 SIO sending port...ADF
CF808 Unsupported option trouble
CF809
CF812 SIO sending port...Fiery External controller I/F C
board
CF815 SIO sending port...PIC/PIC terminal MFP board (MFPB)
CF8ED SIO sending port...EPNet

4.10 CF9**
Code Item Component Rank
CF902 SIO receiving port...ENG MFP board (MFPB)/ C
Engine
CF906 SIO receiving port...IRC MFP board (MFPB)
CF907 SIO receiving port...ADF
CF908 Unsupported option trouble
CF909
CF912 SIO receiving port...Fiery External controller I/F C
board
CF915 SIO receiving port...PIC/PIC terminal MFP board (MFPB)
CF9ED SIO receiving port...EPNet

4.11 CFA**
Code Item Component Rank
CFA01 getOneImgTransInfoFromTh() No An exceptional instance occurred MFP board (MFPB) C
applied thread due to the unexpected parameter
CFA03 setTransBandAndRepeatNum() in the system F/W.
error
CFA06 getOneImgIndexNumFromTh()
No applied thread
CFA11 cancelTransExec() No applied
thread
CFA12 ImgTransInfo No space

K-118
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

Code Item Component Rank

CFA13 Clear Buffer Sequence error
CFA14 Thread software error Whole electrical
components, units, and
options
CFA15 Global semaphore time out (ten seconds) MFP board (MFPB)
CFA16 Thread software error (upper parameter error)
CFA50 IGC control error DB error
CFA51 IGC internal error

4.12 CFB**
4.12.1 CFB0*
Code Item Component Rank
CFB00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFB01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 DIMM0/DIMM1
CFB02 ASIC200 first sheet DMA02
CFB03 ASIC200 first sheet DMA03
CFB04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04
CFB05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05
CFB06 ASIC200 first sheet DMA06
CFB07 ASIC200 first sheet DMA07
CFB08 ASIC200 first sheet DMA08
CFB09 ASIC200 first sheet DMA09
CFB0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10
CFB0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA10
CFB0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12
CFB0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13
CFB0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14
CFB0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15

4.12.2 CFB1*
Code Item Component Rank
CFB10 ASIC200 first sheet DMA16 MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFB11 ASIC200 first sheet DMA17 DIMM0/DIMM1
CFB12 ASIC200 first sheet DMA18
CFB13 ASIC200 first sheet DMA19
CFB14 ASIC200 first sheet DMA20
CFB15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21
CFB16 ASIC200 first sheet DMA22
CFB17 ASIC200 first sheet DMA23
CFB18 ASIC200 first sheet DMA24
CFB19 ASIC200 first sheet DMA25
CFB1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26
CFB1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27
CFB1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28
CFB1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29
CFB1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30
CFB1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31

4.12.3 CFB6*
Code Item Component Rank
CFB60 ASIC7 DMA A MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
board (SA-502)

4.12.4 CFB7*
Code Item Component Rank
CFB73 ASIC7 interruption MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
board (SA-502)

K-119
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

4.12.5 CFB8*
Code Item Component Rank
CFB80 ASIC200 first sheet common register setting MFP board (MFPB)/ C
DIMM0/DIMM1
CFB83 ASIC7 common register setting MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG
board (SA-502)

4.12.6 CFBA*
Code Item Component Rank
CFBA0 ASIC200 first sheet BTC compression/extension unit MFP board (MFPB)/ C
DIMM0/DIMM1
CFBA3 ASIC7 BTC compression/extension unit MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG
board (SA-502)

4.13 CFC**
4.13.1 CFC0*
Code Item Component Rank
CFC00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 error interruption MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFC01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 error interruption DIMM0/DIMM1
CFC02 ASIC200 first sheet DMA02 error interruption
CFC03 ASIC200 first sheet DMA03 error interruption
CFC04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 error interruption
CFC05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05 error interruption
CFC06 ASIC200 first sheet DMA06 error interruption
CFC07 ASIC200 first sheet DMA07 error interruption
CFC08 ASIC200 first sheet DMA08 error interruption
CFC09 ASIC200 first sheet DMA09 error interruption
CFC0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 error interruption
CFC0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 error interruption
CFC0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 error interruption
CFC0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 error interruption
CFC0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 error interruption
CFC0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 error interruption

4.13.2 CFC1*
Code Item Component Rank
CFC10 ASIC200 first sheet DMA16 error interruption MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFC11 ASIC200 first sheet DMA17 error interruption DIMM0/DIMM1
CFC12 ASIC200 first sheet DMA18 error interruption
CFC13 ASIC200 first sheet DMA19 error interruption
CFC14 ASIC200 first sheet DMA20 error interruption
CFC15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21 error interruption
CFC16 ASIC200 first sheet DMA22 error interruption
CFC17 ASIC200 first sheet DMA23 error interruption
CFC18 ASIC200 first sheet DMA24 error interruption
CFC19 ASIC200 first sheet DMA25 error interruption
CFC1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 error interruption
CFC1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 error interruption
CFC1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 error interruption
CFC1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 error interruption
CFC1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 error interruption
CFC1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 error interruption

4.13.3 CFC2*
Code Item Component Rank
CFC20 ASIC200 watchdog timer error interruption MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFC21 ASIC200 first sheet image output interface 1 had underrun DIMM0/DIMM1
CFC22 ASIC200 first sheet image input interface had overflow
CFC23 ASIC200 first sheet LCD output interface had underrun

K-120
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

Code Item Component Rank

CFC24 ASIC200 first sheet JBIG core detected unknown marker
CFC25 ASIC200 first sheet JBIG core detected SC count overflow
CFC26 ASIC200 first sheet SDC slave illegal access error occurred
CFC27 ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Completer Abort
CFC28 ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Unsupported
Request
CFC29 ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Completion Timeout
CFC2A ASIC200 first sheet memory master access had Poisoned TLP
CFC2B ASIC200 first sheet memory target access had Unsupported Request
CFC2C ASIC200 first sheet memory target access had Poisoned TLP
CFC2D ASIC200 first sheet config target access had Unsupported Request
CFC2E ASIC200 first sheet config target access had Poisoned TLP

4.13.4 CFC9*
Code Item Component Rank
CFC90 ASIC7 DMA_A error interrupt MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
CFC93 ASIC7 watchdog timer error board (SA-502)
CFC94 ASIC7 PCI slave error
CFC95 In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC96 In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC97 In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC98 In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC99 In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC9A In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC9B In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC9C In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC9D In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode.
CFC9E In ASIC7 DMA_A, JPEG related interrupt occurred in internal
processing mode in multiple statuses.
CFC9F In ASIC7 DMA_A, during data expansion, even after the specified
amount of codes was transferred, the EOI marker was not provided.

4.13.5 CFCA*
Code Item Component Rank
CFCA0 In ASIC7 DMA_A, during data compression, the compressed data MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
exceeded the setting value. board (SA-502)
CFCA1 In ASIC7 DMA_A, during data compression, even after the specified
amount of codes was transferred, the EOI marker was not provided.
CFCA2 ASIC7 target abort occurred.
CFCA3 ASIC7 master abort occurred.
CFCA4 ASIC7 forced stop occurred.
CFCA5 ASIC7 PCI master detected retry error.
CFCA6 ASIC7 master read data parity error occurred.
CFCA7 ASIC7 master write data parity error occurred.
CFCA8 ASIC7 system error occurred.
CFCA9 ASIC7 slave read data parity error occurred.
CFCAA ASIC7 slave write data parity error occurred.
CFCAB ASIC7 address parity error occurred.

4.13.6 CFCC*
Code Item Component Rank
CFCC0 CPS2007 PCI slave ileagal access error occurred • MFP board (MFPB) C

K-121
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

Code Item Component Rank

CFCC1 CPS2007 watchdog timer error occurred • DIMM0
• DIMM1
CFCC2 CPS2007 address parity error occurred
CFCC3 CPS2007 slave write data parity error occurred
CFCC4 CPS2007 slave read data parity error occurred

4.13.7 CFCD*
Code Item Component Rank
CFCD0 PIC2007 PCI slave illegal access error occurred MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFCD1 PIC2007 address parity error occurred DIMM0/DIMM1
CFCD2 PIC2007 slave write data parity error occurred
CFCD3 PIC2007 slave read data parity error occurred

4.13.8 CFCE*
Code Item Component Rank
CFCE0 ASIC22 watchdog timer error occurred MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFCE1 ASIC22 local bus error occurred DIMM0/DIMM1
CFCE2 ASIC22 another type of error occurred

4.14 CFD**
4.14.1 CFD0*
Code Item Component Rank
CFD00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFD01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 time out DIMM0/DIMM1
CFD02 ASIC200 first sheet DMA02 time out
CFD03 ASIC200 first sheet DMA03 time out
CFD04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 time out
CFD05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05 time out
CFD06 ASIC200 first sheet DMA06 time out
CFD07 ASIC200 first sheet DMA07 time out
CFD08 ASIC200 first sheet DMA08 time out
CFD09 ASIC200 first sheet DMA09 time out
CFD0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 time out
CFD0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 time out
CFD0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 time out
CFD0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 time out
CFD0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 time out
CFD0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 time out

4.14.2 CFD1*
Code Item Component Rank
CFD10 ASIC200 first sheet DMA16 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFD11 ASIC200 first sheet DMA17 time out DIMM0/DIMM1
CFD12 ASIC200 first sheet DMA18 time out
CFD13 ASIC200 first sheet DMA19 time out
CFD14 ASIC200 first sheet DMA20 time out
CFD15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21 time out
CFD16 ASIC200 first sheet DMA22 time out
CFD17 ASIC200 first sheet DMA23 time out
CFD18 ASIC200 first sheet DMA24 time out
CFD19 ASIC200 first sheet DMA25 time out
CFD1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 time out
CFD1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 time out
CFD1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 time out
CFD1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out
CFD1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out
CFD1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out

K-122
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

4.14.3 CFDA*
Code Item Component Rank
CFDA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
CFDA1 ASIC7 DMA_C time out board (SA-502)
CFDA2 ASIC7 DMA_D time out

4.15 CFE**
4.15.1 CFE0*
Code Item Component Rank
CFE00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFE01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 time out DIMM0/DIMM1/EIF board
(IC-412)/DS board (bizhub
CFE02 ASIC200 first sheet DMA02 time out C652DS/C552DS only)
CFE03 ASIC200 first sheet DMA03 time out
CFE04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 time out
CFE05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05 time out
CFE06 ASIC200 first sheet DMA06 time out
CFE07 ASIC200 first sheet DMA07 time out
CFE08 ASIC200 first sheet DMA08 time out
CFE09 ASIC200 first sheet DMA09 time out
CFE0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 time out
CFE0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 time out
CFE0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 time out
CFE0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 time out
CFE0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 time out
CFE0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 time out

4.15.2 CFE1*
Code Item Component Rank
CFE10 ASIC200 first sheet DMA16 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFE11 ASIC200 first sheet DMA17 time out DIMM0/DIMM1/EIF board
(IC-412)/DS board (bizhub
CFE12 ASIC200 first sheet DMA18 time out C652DS/C552DS only)
CFE13 ASIC200 first sheet DMA19 time out
CFE14 ASIC200 first sheet DMA20 time out
CFE15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21 time out
CFE16 ASIC200 first sheet DMA22 time out
CFE17 ASIC200 first sheet DMA23 time out
CFE18 ASIC200 first sheet DMA24 time out
CFE19 ASIC200 first sheet DMA25 time out
CFE1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 time out
CFE1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 time out
CFE1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 time out
CFE1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out
CFE1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out
CFE1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out

4.15.3 CFE2*
Code Item Component Rank
CFE20 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFE21 ASIC200 second sheet DMA01 time out DIMM0/DIMM1/EIF board
(IC-412)/DS board (bizhub
CFE22 ASIC200 second sheet DMA02 time out C652DS/C552DS only)
CFE23 ASIC200 second sheet DMA03 time out
CFE24 ASIC200 second sheet DMA04 time out
CFE25 ASIC200 second sheet DMA05 time out
CFE26 ASIC200 second sheet DMA06 time out
CFE27 ASIC200 second sheet DMA07 time out
CFE28 ASIC200 second sheet DMA08 time out
CFE29 ASIC200 second sheet DMA09 time out
CFE2A ASIC200 second sheet DMA10 time out

K-123
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

Code Item Component Rank

CFE2B ASIC200 second sheet DMA11 time out
CFE2C ASIC200 second sheet DMA12 time out
CFE2D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 time out
CFE2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 time out
CFE2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 time out

4.15.4 CFE3*
Code Item Component Rank
CFE30 ASIC200 second sheet DMA16 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFE31 ASIC200 second sheet DMA17 time out DIMM0/DIMM1/EIF board
(IC-412)/DS board (bizhub
CFE32 ASIC200 second sheet DMA18 time out C652DS/C552DS only)
CFE33 ASIC200 second sheet DMA19 time out
CFE34 ASIC200 second sheet DMA20 time out
CFE35 ASIC200 second sheet DMA21 time out
CFE36 ASIC200 second sheet DMA22 time out
CFE37 ASIC200 second sheet DMA23 time out
CFE38 ASIC200 second sheet DMA24 time out
CFE39 ASIC200 second sheet DMA25 time out
CFE3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 time out
CFE3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 time out
CFE3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 time out
CFE3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 time out
CFE3E ASIC200 second sheet DMA30 time out
CFE3F ASIC200 second sheet DMA31 time out

4.15.5 CFE4*
Code Item Component Rank
CFE40 ASIC200 third sheet DMA00 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFE41 ASIC200 third sheet DMA01 time out DIMM0/DIMM1/EIF board
(IC-412)/DS board (bizhub
CFE42 ASIC200 third sheet DMA02 time out C652DS/C552DS only)
CFE43 ASIC200 third sheet DMA03 time out
CFE44 ASIC200 third sheet DMA04 time out
CFE45 ASIC200 third sheet DMA05 time out
CFE46 ASIC200 third sheet DMA06 time out
CFE47 ASIC200 third sheet DMA07 time out
CFE48 ASIC200 third sheet DMA08 time out
CFE49 ASIC200 third sheet DMA09 time out
CFE4A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 time out
CFE4B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 time out
CFE4C ASIC200 third sheet DMA12 time out
CFE4D ASIC200 third sheet DMA13 time out
CFE4E ASIC200 third sheet DMA14 time out
CFE4F ASIC200 third sheet DMA15 time out

4.15.6 CFE5*
Code Item Component Rank
CFE50 ASIC200 third sheet DMA16 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFE51 ASIC200 third sheet DMA17 time out DIMM0/DIMM1/EIF board
(IC-412)/DS board (bizhub
CFE52 ASIC200 third sheet DMA18 time out C652DS/C552DS only)
CFE53 ASIC200 third sheet DMA19 time out
CFE54 ASIC200 third sheet DMA20 time out
CFE55 ASIC200 third sheet DMA21 time out
CFE56 ASIC200 third sheet DMA22 time out
CFE57 ASIC200 third sheet DMA23 time out
CFE58 ASIC200 third sheet DMA24 time out
CFE59 ASIC200 third sheet DMA25 time out
CFE5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 time out

K-124
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. ABORT CODE

Code Item Component Rank

CFE5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 time out
CFE5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 time out
CFE5D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 time out
CFE5E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 time out
CFE5F ASIC200 third sheet DMA31 time out

4.15.7 CFEA*
Code Item Component Rank
CFEA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
board (SA-502)

4.16 CFF**
4.16.1 CFF0*
Code Item Component Rank
CFF00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFF01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 time out DIMM0/DIMM1
CFF02 ASIC200 first sheet DMA02 time out
CFF03 ASIC200 first sheet DMA03 time out
CFF04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 time out
CFF05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05 time out
CFF06 ASIC200 first sheet DMA06 time out
CFF07 ASIC200 first sheet DMA07 time out
CFF08 ASIC200 first sheet DMA08 time out
CFF09 ASIC200 first sheet DMA09 time out
CFF0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10 time out
CFF0B ASIC200 first sheet DMA11 time out
CFF0C ASIC200 first sheet DMA12 time out
CFF0D ASIC200 first sheet DMA13 time out
CFF0E ASIC200 first sheet DMA14 time out
CFF0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 time out

4.16.2 CFF1*
Code Item Component Rank
CFF10 ASIC200 first sheet DMA16 time out MFP board (MFPB)/ C
CFF11 ASIC200 first sheet DMA17 time out DIMM0/DIMM1
CFF12 ASIC200 first sheet DMA18 time out
CFF13 ASIC200 first sheet DMA19 time out
CFF14 ASIC200 first sheet DMA20 time out
CFF15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21 time out
CFF16 ASIC200 first sheet DMA22 time out
CFF17 ASIC200 first sheet DMA23 time out
CFF18 ASIC200 first sheet DMA24 time out
CFF19 ASIC200 first sheet DMA25 time out
CFF1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 time out
CFF1B ASIC200 first sheet DMA27 time out
CFF1C ASIC200 first sheet DMA28 time out
CFF1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out
CFF1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out
CFF1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out

4.16.3 CFFA*
Code Item Component Rank
CFFA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out MFP board (MFPB)/JPEG C
board (SA-502)

K-125
 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ISW

5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET ISW

5.1 Error code list for the Internet ISW
• When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected, the message on the status and the error
code will be displayed on the control panel.
When updating with CS Remote Care, the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center.

5.2 0x0*
Error code Description Countermeasure
0x00000001 Illegal error on the control • Check if the following setting is set to "Valid".
[Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW Setting]
• Check the status of the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Forwarding Access
Setting]
• If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the
corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x00000010 Parameter error • Check if the following setting is set to "Valid".
[Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW Setting]
• If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the
corresponding error code to KONICA MINOLTA.
0x00111000 Error concerning Connection has been completed. • Check the User's network environment. (LAN cable's
the network connection)
• Check the status of the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Forwarding Access
Setting]
• Check to see if the FTP server operates normally.
0x00111001 Error concerning It cannot be connected to the • Check the network environment of the User.
the network server. • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally.
0x00111100 Error concerning Communication timeout.
the network
0x00111101 Error concerning Disconnection occurred • Check the network environment of the User.
the network • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally.
0x00111110 Error concerning The network is not connected.
the network
0x00110010 Error concerning Others
the network
0x00001### FTP error Reply code when it failed to be • Check to see if FTP server normally operates.
connected • Check the IP address, user's name, etc.
0x00002### FTP error Error reply code for the user Check to see if FTP server operates normally.
command or pass command
0x00003### FTP error Error reply code for CWD
command
0x00004### FTP error Error reply code for the TYPE Check to see if FTP server operates normally.
command.
0x00005### FTP error Error reply code for the PORT
command.
0x00006### FTP error Error reply code for the PASV • Check to see if FTP server operates normally.
command. • Set the PASV mode to "Invalid", and try it again.

K-126
 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 5. ERROR CODE FOR THE INTERNET
bizhub 652/552/602/502 ISW

Error code Description Countermeasure

0x00007### FTP error Error reply code for the RETR • Check to see if FTP server operates normally.
command. • Wait for about 30 minutes and try it again.

5.3 0x1*
Error code Description Countermeasure
0x10000100 • It cannot be accepted because of the job currently Wait for the current job to be completed and try it again.
being executed.
• ISW being executed by other method.
0x10000101 It cannot be accepted because the sub power switch is Turn sub power switch ON and try it again.
OFF.
0x10000102 The Internet ISW is already being executed. Wait for the current Internet ISW to be completed.
0x10000103 It failed to prohibit the job. (It failed to lock the • Check if the following setting is set to "Valid".
operation.) → It failed to lock the job because the [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW Setting]
operation is already locked with PSWC, etc. • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the
0x10000104 There is no space for F/W data to be downloaded. corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x10000106 Check sum error
0x10000107 File access error • The file downloaded has an Check to see if the downloaded F/W is of the correct type.
error.
• The header of the file which has
been read has an error.
• The size of the file to be
downloaded is too large.
• When it is identified to be the
different type of F/W.
0x10000108 The area F/W is stored is destroyed, and another ISW Wait until ISW is automatically executed on MFP side.
is necessary.

5.4 0x2*
Error code Description Countermeasure
0x20000000 The temporary • When starting the Internet ISW Wait until ISW is automatically executed on MFP side.
error when running in a normal program, the
the subset rebooting will start and the
Internet ISW will be executed
with the subset program.
During the process by the
subset program, it has to be in
the "Failed" status unless the
Internet ISW is successfully
conducted. This code is used
temporarily to make it in error
status.

K-127
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

6.1 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care
If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of initial transmitting / administrator transmitting / maintenance start transmitting / maintenance finish transmitting,
the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
• For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure.
Display of communication result Cause Solution
Communicating - -
Communication trouble with the center Although the machine tries to communicate with See the list of error message and confirm the
the center, there is any trouble and the corresponding point.
communication completes unsuccessfully.
Complete successfully - -
Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communicate with • Check if the power of modem in ON.
the center, there is any trouble in the modem. • Check if there is any problem in connection
between the modem and the main body.
Busy line Although the machine tries to communicate with Communicate with the center again.
the center, the line to the center is busy.
No response Although the machine tries to communicate with • Communicate with the center again.
the center, there is no response from the center. • Check the communication environment of the
center side.

6.2 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode

CS Remote Care can be used even when "ON" is selected in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode].
However, to keep the enhanced security level, the following restrictions are accompanied.
• Only SSL communication is available.
• Error occurs if the Center tries to send the following commands.
• Firmware update command
• Command of reading and updating account track information
• Machine settings update command
• Command of reading and updating Internet ISW setting information

6.3 List of the CS Remote Care error code

6.3.1 When connecting by modem
NOTE
• When a code other than the ones listed below is displayed, contact KM and inform the error code.
Error code Error Solution
0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) Transmit again manually.
0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmitting (When the • Check if the power of the modem is ON.
transmission completes with modem initial setting failed) • Check the connecting condition between the modem
and the main body.
0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting (No response to ATD) • Transmit again manually
• Check if the power of the modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition between the modem
and the main body.
0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving (No response to ATA) • Check if the power of the modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition between the modem
and the main body.
0006 Shut down of the data modem line (Host) (Carrier OFF is detected) No solution, because the line is shut down at the host
side.
0008 Timeout of start request telegram delivery (Start request telegram is Transmit again manually.
not delivered after line connection)
0009 Timeout of finish request telegram delivery (Finish request telegram is Transmit again manually.
not delivered (Start of shut down).)
000A Receiving rejection (Receiving is made when the main body is set to • Check the setting condition of the host side.
reject receiving.) • Check the setting condition of the main body side.
000B RS232C driver over run (When the modem detects over run.) If the same error is detected several times, turn the
modem power OFF and ON.
000C If the same error is detected several times, turn the modem power If the same error is detected several times, turn the
OFF and ON. modem power OFF and ON.
000D Break Interrupt (BI) indicator (When the modem detects Break If the same error is detected several times, turn the
Interrupt (BI) indicator.) modem power OFF and ON.
0011 Baud rate ERROR (When selected baud rate is out of the Check the baud rate of the software DipSW.
specification (9600 bps to 38400 bps).)

K-128
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

Error code Error Solution

0018 Machine ID has already been registered (Request telegram 2 (SET- Set the initial registrations again for all including the
UP) comes from the main body that has already registered machine host side.
ID.)
0019 Center ID error (Center ID of the host is not identical with the one of Check center ID setting of the main body side.
start request telegram.)
001A Device ID inconsistency (Device ID of the host is not identical with the • Check device ID setting of the main body side.
one of start request telegram.) • Check the setting of the host side.
001B Device ID unregistered (Request telegram 2 (Constant data • Check device ID setting of the main body side.
transmitting, emergency call) comes from the main body that has not • Check the setting of the host side.
registered machine ID yet.)
001E Impossible to change (during printing) (Setting cannot be changed Try again when the machine is not printing.
because the setting change is made during the machine is printing or
starts printing.)
0020 Timeout of telegram delivery (At waiting mode of telegram delivery the Try communication again.
machine fails to receive the telegram in a given time.)
0027 Transmission / receiving collision (Receiving is detecting during Try communication again.
transmitting processing)

6.3.2 When connecting by e-mails

NOTE
• When a code other than the ones listed below is displayed, contact KM and inform the error code.

(1) 0***
Error code Error Solution
0001 Connection timeout during transmission Check the SMTP server on User side.
0### Transmission error Check the SMTP server on User side.
###: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal)
For SMTP responding code, see RFC issued by IETF after
converting hexadecimal number into decimal one.
0003 Connection timeout when receiving Check the POP3 server on User side.
0005 Receiving error Check the POP3 server on User side.
0020 SMTP communication error Check SMTP authentication setting.

(2) 1***
Error code Error Solution
1030 Machine ID mismatching Received an e-mail which tells that • Check the machine ID setting.
machine ID mismatches. • Check the machine ID setting on host side.
1050 Grammar error • Received mail did not define the CS Check mail content.
Remote Care command (2 digits).
• The Type of Subject and the
command of attached file are not
consistent.
1061 Modifying not allowed The host sent a command mail that Ask the host to send another instruction mail for
asked modifying data of item where modifying.
setting change is not allowed.
1062 Modifying not available When informing the host that it cannot Ask the host to send another instruction mail for
due to the copy job be modified due to the copy job currently modifying.
currently performing performing.
1080 Data length problem LEN value of TEXT data and actual data Ask the host to send another instruction mail for
length are not consistent. modifying.
1081 Frame No. error • The last frame has not been received. Check the status of the machine registration on host
• There are missing frame No. side.
1082 Subject Type problem Received code did not define the Type Ask the host to send another instruction mail for
of Subject. modifying.
1084 Date expired Expiration date for data modification Ask the host to send another instruction mail for
command has passed. modifying.
1091 Oversized command Received attached file exceeds the Ask the host to send another instruction mail for
machine's receive buffer size. modifying.
1092 Received an error mail when center setup is not complete Check the status of the machine registration on host
side.
1099 Illegal request Condition that could not be predicted in Contact KM service representative.
design stage was detected.

K-129
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

(3) 2***
Error code Error Solution
2039 Socket is not connected. LAN cable on the copier side is Check the SMTP server and POP3 server on user
detached. side.
203E Network is down. LAN cable on the copier side is • Check the connection between the copier on the
detached. user's side and the network connector.
• Check the network environment on the user's side.

(4) 3***
Error code Error Solution
3001 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3002 POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3003 POP3_CONNECT_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3004 POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3005 POP3_FORMAT_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3006 POP3_MEMORY_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3007 POP3_JOBID_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3008 POP3_NO_DATA_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3009 POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.
3010 POP3_MAILBOX_FULL Check the POP3 server environment on user's side.

(5) 4***
Error code Error Solution
4103 During polling from MFP, MIO is not active and MFP cannot start Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
communication.
4104 During e-mail transmission from MFP to the center, the SMTP Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
channel is not in the "Ready" status and MFP cannot send e-mail.
4105 During polling from MFP, the POP3 channel is not in the "Ready" Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
status and MFP cannot receive e-mail.
4106 During e-mail transmission from MFP to the center, MIO is not active Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
and MFP cannot start communication.
41F9 Control error In the CS Remote Care's internal Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
sequence, message transfer failed.
41FA Control error MIO response timed out. Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
41FB Control error As the file descriptor of the e-mail that Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
MFP receives from MIO is invalid, MFP
cannot receive the e-mail.
41FC Control error During the creation of data to be sent by Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
e-mail, the CS Remote Care's internal
status error occurs or the data that need
to be sent has not been created.
41FD Control error During e-mail reception, the parameter Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
sent from MIO to the CS Remote Care is
invalid and MFP cannot receive the e-
mail.
41FE Control error After the completion of e-mail Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
transmission, MFP received the
transmission completion message from
MIO. However, the CS Remote Care's
internal status was not the status of
transmission completion.
41FF Control error During e-mail reception, MIO became Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
inactive.
4210 Control error E-mail sent from MIO could not be Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
properly handled in the CS Remote
Care.

(6) 5***
Error code Error Solution
5*** MIO detects error when sending an attached file. Check the SMTP server /POP3 server environment on
user's side.

K-130
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

(7) 6***
Error code Error Solution
6*** MIO detects error during a sending sequence. Check the SMTP server /POP3 server environment on
user's side.

6.3.3 When connecting by http

NOTE
• When a code other than the ones listed below is displayed, contact KM and inform the error code.

(1) 0***
Error code Error Solution
0001 Connection timeout during transmission Check the http server.
0*** Transmission error Check the http server.
###: http responding code (hexadecimal)
For http responding code, see RFC issued by IETF after converting
hexadecimal number into decimal one.
0003 Connection timeout when receiving Check the http server.
0005 Receiving error Check the http server.

(2) 1***
Error code Error Solution
1030 Machine ID mismatching Received file which tells that machine ID • Check the machine ID setting.
mismatches. • Check the machine ID setting on host side.
1050 Grammar error • Received file did not define the CS Check file content.
Remote Care command (2 digits).
• The Type of Subject and the
command of file are not consistent.
1061 Modifying not allowed The host sent a command file that asked Ask the host to send another instruction file for
modifying data of item where setting modifying.
change is not allowed.
1062 Modifying not available When informing the host that it cannot Ask the host to send another instruction file for
due to the copy job be modified due to the copy job currently modifying.
currently performing performing.
1080 Data length problem LEN value of TEXT data and actual data Ask the host to send another instruction file for
length are not consistent. modifying.
1081 Frame No. error • The last frame has not been received. Check the status of the machine registration on host
• There are missing frame No. side.
1082 Subject Type problem Received code did not define the Type Ask the host to send another instruction file for
of Subject. modifying.
1084 Date expired Expiration date for data modification Ask the host to send another instruction file for
command has passed. modifying.
1091 Oversized command Received file exceeds the machine's Ask the host to send another instruction file for
receive buffer size. modifying.
1099 Illegal request Condition that could not be predicted in Contact KM service representative.
design stage was detected.

(3) 2***
Error code Error Solution
2001 http request result Internal status error • Check user network environment.
problem • Check http server environment.
2002 http request result File list acquisition result problem
problem
2003 http request result Request header transmission failure
problem
2004 http request result Request body transmission failure
problem
2005 http request result Response header receive response
problem failure
2006 http request result Response body receive response failure
problem
2007 http request result Session ID inconsistent
problem

K-131
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

(4) 3***
Error code Error Solution
3002 http request result Unopened client ID was specified • Check user network environment.
problem • Check http server environment.
3003 http request result Receive time out occurred
problem
3004 http request result Receive error occurred. Or wrong
problem request URL was specified.
3005 http request result Content-Length or receive size
problem exceeded the specified max. transfer
size. Message body size was too large.
3006 http request result Due to reset, process was stopped. Or
problem message body size exceeded the
specified max. transfer size.
3007 http request result Internal error occurred. Or due to
problem internal reset, process was stopped.
3008 http request result Connection to WebDAV server failed.
problem
3009 http request result Error occurred during transmission to
problem the WebDAV server.
3010 http request result Time out occurred during transmission
problem to the WebDav server.
3011 http request result Connection to the proxy server failed.
problem
3012 http request result The proxy server refused CONNECT
problem request.
3013 http request result The proxy server was set to enabled, but
problem the proxy server host was not set.
3014 http request result Proxy server authentication failed.
problem
3015 http request result Other errors were sent from the proxy
problem server.
3016 http request result Internal error occurred.
problem
3017 http request result As the device application specified
problem MIO_REQBODY_ERROR, process was
stopped.

(5) 4***
Error code Error Solution
4103 After turning the power on, HTTP communication was made while Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
the communication was not ready.
4106 When data is uploaded from MFP to the web server, the network Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
connection is not enabled and MFP cannot start communication.
41FA Control error • MIO response timed out. Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.

(6) 5***
Error code Error Solution
5*** MIO detects error at file sending. Check the http server environment.

(7) 6***
Error code Error Solution
6*** MIO detects error at sending sequence. Check the http server environmen.

(8) 7***
Error code Error Solution
7000 Failure occurred when trying to obtain a certificate for product Obtain a new certificate (Within 6 days after the date of
authentication from a USB flash drive. issue)

6.3.4 When connecting by Fax modem

NOTE
• When a code other than the ones listed below is displayed, contact KM and inform the error code.
Error code Error Solution
T50 Host terminal ID not correct Check the telephone number set for host.

K-132
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 6. CS Remote Care ERROR CODE

Error code Error Solution

R80 Serial number received from the host not correct. Check the status of the Machine registration on host
side.
R81 Disconnection of writing instruction from host during machine is Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
running.
R82 Disconnection of FAX-CSRC instruction when FAX-CSRC is not Check the status of the Machine registration on host
allowed. side.
R83 Host command error. Contact KM and inform the error code.
R84 NVRAM writing error. Contact KM and inform the error code.

K-133
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

7.1 Display procedure
• It displays the error code when a network error occurred.
• Network error code is displayed only when the following setting is in "Display."
[Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Detail Settings] → [Error Code Display Setting]

7.2 IEEE802.1X
Code Description
1 Connection has already been established.
2 Parameter error.
3 Unable to find the destination AP (SSID).
4 The authentication mode does not match the AP (IEEE8021X/WPA-EAP/WPA-PSK/NONE).
5 Negotiation of the EAP method failed.
6 The EAP authentication failed (user ID, password, certificate, etc.)
7 Encryption negotiation with the AP failed (TKIP/CCMP).
8 Failed to retrieve the client certificate.
9 The client certificate has expired.
10 Verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
11 Although the WPA-PSK mode is selected, the Pre-Shared Key is not specified.
12 An authentication error occurred in the WPA-PSK mode (un-matched Pre-Shared Key).
13 The phase 2 method is not specified (PEAP).
14 Negotiation of the phase 2 method failed (PEAP).
15 Response from the server has timed out.
16 Failed to allocate memory.
17 Failed to start the supplicant task.
18 The driver does not work.
19 The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
20 CA verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
21 Server ID verification error of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
22 The CA certificate is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
23 The server ID is not specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
24 The setting combination is correct.
25 Connection and authentication are complete.
26 The server certificate does not have the expected usage (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
27 The server certificate has expired (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
28 Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate is rejected (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
29 Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate has timed out (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
30 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size that has been retrieved to check for the expiration of the server certificate
exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
31 Incorrect format of the server certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
32 Verification of the server certificate is invalid (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
33 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
34 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
35 Parameter error of the certificate (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).
36 Internal error of the certificate verification (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP).

7.3 LDAP
Code Description
1 An invalid operation occurred.
4 The number of search results has exceeded the maximum number of items allowed.
7 The LDAP server does not support SASL.
10 Unable to trace the link although Referral is specified.
32 Cannot find the search route.
49 Failed to log in to the LDAP server.
80 An unexpected error occurred.
85 The connection has timed out.
86 The supported SASL does not match the LDAP server side.

K-134
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
88 Cancelled by the user.
90 A memory shortage occurred.
91 Unable to connect to the LDAP server.
92 The supported LDAP version does not match the LDAP server side.
128 Failed to resolve the LDAP server name using the DNS server.
129 The certificate of the LDAP server has expired.
130 Mutual authentication using GSS-SPNEGO (Kerberos v5) failed.
131 The search result remains.
2238 The CN field of the LDAP server certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The LDAP server certificate does not have the expected usage for a server.
2240 • The LDAP server certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The LDAP server certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the LDAP server certificate is invalid.
2263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The ticket certificate has expired.
12239 The ticket certificate does not have the expected usage for a server.
12240 • The ticket certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
12241 The ticket certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1 MB).
12261 The format of the ticket certificate is invalid.
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate verification.

7.4 E-Mail/Internet fax

Code Description
1 Failed to log in to the E-mail server.
2 An internal error occurred.
3 Failed to connect to the server.
4 The connection has timed out.
5 Decoding failed due to invalid MIME format or S/MIME format.
6 Available free memory is insufficient. Reception is not possible.
7 Job ID is invalid.
9 Failed to delete an E-mail message.
10 The mail box is full.
11 Failed to search the certificate.
12 Failed to retrieve the device certificate or private key.
13 • An I/O error occurred.
• An HDD operation error occurred, or memory capacity of the computer may be insufficient.
14 The S/MIME function is disabled.
15 The HDD is disabled.
16 The format of the certificate from the E-mail sender is invalid.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.

K-135
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.

7.5 FTP transmission

Code Description
22 Parameter error (e.g. the file name is NULL).
27 Parameter is invalid.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
56 The FTP connection is already open.
57 Failed to connect to the server.
60 The connection has timed out.
61 The connection has been interrupted.
62 The device is not connected to the network.
70 The network connection is busy.
450 The file has not been deleted.
451 The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
452 The file transfer failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).
530 Incorrect login name or password.
550 The specified folder does not exist.
552 The file operation failed (e.g. due to insufficient server capacity).

7.6 SMB transmission

Code Description
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
57 Failed to connect to the server.
62 • The device is not connected to the network.
• The connection has been interrupted.
70 The network connection is busy.
4096 • The host name is not specified.
• The specified host name does not exist on the network.
4097 • The user name is not specified.
• Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
• The user does not have write permission to the folder.
• Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4098 • The folder name is not specified.
• The specified folder does not exist.
4099 • The user name is not specified.
• Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
• The user does not have write permission to the folder.
• Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4100 The specified file name is invalid.
4101 • The specified file already exists and is write-protected.
• The folder and the disk are write-protected.
4102 • The specified media to be written is not formatted.

K-136
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
• The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4103 The server capacity is full.
4104 The server capacity has become full while writing data.
4105 Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
12239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
12240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
12241 The certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1 MB).
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
12267 The device certificate does not exist.
12268 No certificate is sent from the server.

7.7 SMTP transmission

Code Description
22 Invalid argument.
27 The file size is too large.
28 Insufficient memory of the device.
32 The pipe is broken.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
51 Unable to reach the destination network.
52 The connection aborted by the network.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
57 The socket is not connected.
58 The connection has been interrupted.
60 The operation has timed out.
61 The connection is rejected.
62 The device is not connected to the network.
67 The host is shut down.
70 The operation is expected to be blocked.
421 SMTP server error.
Since the service is unavailable, the transfer channel is closed.
432 SMTP server error. The password must be changed.
450 SMTP server error. Unable to access to the mail box.
451 SMTP server error.
The requested action has been cancelled because an error occurred while processing a job.
452 SMTP server error. Shortage of the system storage capacity.
453 SMTP server error. No E-mail massage.
454 SMTP server error. Temporary authentication failure.
458 SMTP server error. Unable to queue a message to the node.
459 SMTP server error. The node is not permitted.
499 SMTP server error.
An unsupported SMTP error code of 400s is received from the SMTP server.
500 SMTP server error. Syntax error (command unrecognized).
501 SMTP server error. Syntax error in parameters or arguments.
502 SMTP server error. The command is not implemented.
503 SMTP server error. Bad sequence of commands.
504 SMTP server error. The command parameter is not implemented.
521 SMTP server error. The server does not receive E-mail messages.
530 SMTP server error. The access is rejected.
534 SMTP server error. The authentication mechanism is too weak.
535 SMTP server error. Authentication error.

K-137
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
538 SMTP server error.
The requested authentication mechanism requires encryption.
550 SMTP server error. The requested action is not executed.
551 SMTP server error. The user is not connected locally.
552 SMTP server error. The requested E-mail action is cancelled.
553 SMTP server error. The requested action is not accepted.
554 An SMTP server error or an internal error when sending data.
The transaction failed.
555 SMTP server error. MAIL/RCPT parameter error.
599 SMTP server error.
An unsupported SMTP error code of 500s is received from the SMTP server.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 • The certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.
3000 An unexpected error occurred.
3001 An unexpected error occurred within the library being used.
3002 An invalid channel is specified.
3003 SMTP server address is invalid.
3004 Parameter error (MIMEBodyHeader).
3005 Parameter error (DisplayName).
3006 Parameter error (character set).
3007 Parameter error (From address).
3008 Parameter error (To address).
3009 Parameter error (CC address).
3010 Parameter error (BCC address).
3011 Parameter error (pEmailSet is NULL).
3012 Parameter error (destination certificate is NULL).
3013 Parameter error (E-mail body).
3014 The HDD is disabled.
3015 The S/MIME function is disabled.
3016 The device certificate cannot be used in S/MIME (e.g. self-signed certificate error, the private key type is not RSA).
3018 An invalid encryption algorithm is specified.
3019 An invalid signature algorithm is specified.
3020 The E-mail address included in the destination certificate does not match the destination address (To/Cc/Bcc).
3021 The E-mail address included in the certificate does not match the sender (From) address.
3022 Format error of the certificate.
3023 Parameter error (Disposition-Notification-To).
3024 Message syntax error of the receiver side.
3025 The SMTP server does not support the STARTTLS command.
3026 PKI card access error.

7.8 WebDAV transmission

Code Description
22 • The format of the URL of the target resource is invalid.
• Parameter error.
27 Attempted to send data that exceeds the maximum transferrable size for transfer coding.

K-138
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The process is cancelled by a device reset.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
56 The connection has already been established.
57 The connection to the WebDAV server failed (including connection time out).
62 The device is not connected to the network.
70 The network connection is busy.
72 The connection has been interrupted with the condition that is insufficient to the specified size.
401 Authentication error.
407 Proxy authentication error.
1001 • The server does not support WebDAV.
• Unable to upload data to the server.
1002 The intermediate resource is not a collection (directory) (e.g. the specified folder does not exist).
1003 The target resource is a collection (directory).
1011 Although "https" is specified for the resource URL, it is unavailable because the SSL library is not included for the modularity.
1012 Although "https" is specified for the resource URL, the connection is interrupted because the WebDAV server certificate has
expired.
1013 The CONNECT method is issued to the proxy server to establish an SSL connection via a proxy, but it is rejected.
1017 A communication error occurred while sending a request.
1018 A communication error occurred while receiving a response.
1027 nContentLength exceeds the maximum transferable size.
1030 Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting information is unavailable.
1031 The connection to the proxy server failed (including connection time out).
1098 Failed in chunk TX to SharePoint Server.
1099 Other internal error occurred (e.g. memory shortage).
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 • The certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.

7.9 SMB browsing

Code Description
32 The connection has been interrupted.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
57 Failed to connect to the server.
62 • The device is not connected to the network.
• The internal channel detected an error immediately before establishing communication.
67 The host is shut down.
4096 • The group name/host name is not specified.
• The specified group name/host name does not exist on the network.
4097 • The user name is not specified.
• Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
• Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.
4098 • Administrative shares do not exist.
• The shared resource name is not specified.
• The shared resource does not exist.
4099 • The user name is not specified.
• Unable to log in with the specified user name and password.
• Failed to log in due to an SMB protocol error.

K-139
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
4102 • The specified media to be written is not formatted.
• The file system of the specified media to be written is faulty.
4105 Other errors to which an error code is not assigned.
4352 The browser machine (master browser/backup browser) is not found.
4353 Unable to log in to the browser machine (master browser/backup browser).
4354 The sub folder does not exist.
4355 The request is not accepted due to an invalid call sequence etc.
4368 The number of groups is too large.
4369 The number of host PCs is too large.
4370 The number of shared resources is too large.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
12239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
12240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
12241 The certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1 MB).
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
12267 The device certificate does not exist.
12268 No certificate is sent from the server.

7.10 User authentication

Code Description
1 • Invalid parameter (e.g. the number of characters exceeds the limit, blank).
• The authentication function setting is disabled.
2 Failed to resolve the name using the DNS server.
3 Unable to find the authentication server.
4 Failed to authenticate.
5 • Failed to allocate memory.
• An unexpected error occurred (which does not occur under normal usage conditions).
6 An authentication request is received while an internal task of the user authentication client is being performed.
7 The connection was interrupted while the user authentication was being performed.
10000 Failed in authentication using a PKI card.
12236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
12239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
12240 The certificate is not trusted. To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
12241 The certificate has expired.
12242 The CA server rejected the connection.
12243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
12244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1 MB).
12261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
12263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
12264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
12266 Internal error of the certificate verification.

7.11 WebDAV client

Code Description
2 The ID of the client that is not opened is specified.
3 The reception has timed out.
4 • A reception error occurred.
• An invalid request URL is specified.
5 • Content-Length or the received data size exceeds the maximum transferable size.
• The size of the message body is too large.

K-140
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
6 • The process is cancelled by a device reset.
• The size of the message body exceeds the maximum transferable size.
7 • An internal error occurred.
• The process is cancelled by an internal reset.
8 Failed to connect to the WebDAV server.
9 An error occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
10 A timeout occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server.
11 Failed to connect to the proxy server.
12 The proxy server rejected the connection request.
13 Although use of a proxy has been specified, the proxy setting in-formation is unavailable.
14 Failed to authenticate the proxy server.
15 Other error was returned from the proxy server.
16 An internal error occurred.
17 The process is cancelled because MIO_REQBODY_ERROR is specified by the device application.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 • The certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.
2263 Failed to initialize the certificate verification.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.

7.12 WS scan
Code Description
1 The specified client is not registered.
2 Parameter is invalid.
3 The Web service or WS scan function is disabled.
4 The device is not connected to the network.
5 Waiting for connection from CP.
6 The certificate of the destination computer is not valid when the validity period of a certificate is checked.
22 Invalid argument.
42 The specified protocol is unavailable.
52 The connection aborted by the network.
53 The connection has been interrupted.
55 A buffer shortage occurred.
57 The socket is not connected.
60 The operation has timed out.
70 The operation is expected to be blocked.
72 The RetrieveImage waiting period has timed out.
2236 The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started.
2238 The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address.
2239 The certificate does not have the expected usage.
2240 • The certificate is not trusted.
• To trust the certificate, the certificate must be registered to the system.
2241 The certificate has expired.
2242 The CA server rejected the connection.
2243 The connection to the server that checks for expiration of the certificate has timed out.
2244 Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB).
2261 The format of the certificate is invalid.

K-141
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 7. NETWORK ERROR CODE

Code Description
2263 Although the environment is configured to use the HDD, it is unable to perform verification because the HDD path has not been
specified.
2264 Unable to perform verification because there are too many certificates to be verified (the maximum number of certificates that
can be verified at a time is 20).
2265 Parameter of the certificate verification is invalid.
2266 Internal error of the certificate verification.
2267 The device certificate does not exist.
2268 No certificate is sent from the server.

K-142
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 8. OpenAPI RELATED TROUBLE

8. OpenAPI RELATED TROUBLE

8.1 Outline
• Through the Certification Management System provided by OpenAPI, if error is found in communication between the machine and
interacting applications developed by company other than KM, an error message is displayed.

8.2 Types of Trouble

• The Certification Management System provided by OpenAPI certificates and manages communication between MFP and non-KM
applications that run on the computer connected to the machine. If trouble is detected, the trouble message is displayed on the control panel
of the machine or the screen of the computer on which the applications run.
Trouble messages displayed on the control panel of the machine and actions are described below.
NOTE
• A message that appears on the computer screen may be different depending on the application being used for
communication. The corresponding action may be different, so contact the application vendor for an appropriate action.
Example of trouble messages

8.3 Solution
• The below describes the OpenAPI certification related trouble messages displayed on the control panel of the machine and actions, dividing
them by possible situation.
When using an application
No. Symptom and message Action
1 When starting an application, the following message is 1. In [Administrator Settings] → [System Settings] →[Date/Time
displayed: Settings], check that the date and time that is set is same as the
Application has expired. Failed to start the registered actual date and time. If a wrong date and time is set, correct it.
application. 2. Contact the application vendor and obtain a new Solution Key (or
When starting the machine, the following message is the application software itself). Using it, perform the steps below.
displayed: 1) Delete the application.
The Enhanced Server Authentication application has expired. 2) Using the Solution Key (or the application software itself), register
Change the User Authentication method to one other than the application again.
Enhanced Server Authentication.
2 When starting an application, the following message is In [System1] → [Marketing Area], change the marketing area of the
displayed: machine to the one that was selected when the application was
Failed to start the registered application. Please contact your registered.
service representative.
When starting the machine, the following message is
displayed:
The enhanced server authentication application cannot be
used. Please contact your service representative.
3 In the screen saver application, after a time set, the screen 1. In [Administrator Settings] → [System Settings] → [Date/Time
saver does not work. Settings], check that the date and time that is set is same as the
actual date and time. If a wrong date and time is set, correct it.
2. Contact the application vendor and obtain a new Solution Key (or
the application software itself). Using it, perform the steps below.
1) Delete the application.
2) Using the Solution Key (or the application software itself), register
the application again.
3. In [System1] →[Marketing Area], change the marketing area of the
machine to the one that was selected when the application was
registered.

K-143
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 8. OpenAPI RELATED TROUBLE

After rewriting the firmware of the machine

No. Symptom and message Action
1 When starting an application, the following message is After deleting the application in question, register the application
displayed: again.
Failed to start the registered application. Please contact your
service representative.
When starting the machine, the following message is
displayed:
The enhanced server authentication application cannot be
used. Please contact your service representative.
In the screen saver application, after a time set, the screen
saver does not work.

K-144
 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 9. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 THE TROUBLE CODE

9. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE TROUBLE CODE

9.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check)
9.1.1 Contents
Trouble type Machine is not energized at all
Trouble code -
Rank -
Detection timing -
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Main switch (SW1)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• DC power supply (DCPU)

9.1.2 Procedure
Location of
Step Check item electrical Result Action
components
Is a power voltage supplied across PJ001DCPU-1 and K-24 NO Check the WIRING from the wall outlet to
1
2 on DCPU? SW1 PJ001.
2 Are the fuses on DCPU conducting? - NO Change DCPU.
3 Is DC24 V being output from PJ10DCPU-4 on DCPU? I-25 to 26 NO Change DCPU.
4 Is DC5 V being input to PJ011DCPU-5 to 7 on DCPU? I-26 to 27 NO Change DCPU.
Is DC5 V being input to CN12PRCB-5 on the printer H-24 NO Change DCPU.
5 control board? (LED on PRCB does not blink.) YES Change PRCB.
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

9.2 Fusing heaters do not operate

9.2.1 Contents
Trouble type Fusing heaters do not operate
Trouble code -
Rank -
Detection timing -
Trouble isolation -
Relevant electrical parts • Right door switch (MS1)
• Fusing unit
• DC power supply (DCPU)
• IH power supply (IHPU)
• Relay drive board (REDB)

9.2.2 Procedure
Location of
Step Check item electrical Result Action
components
Is the power source voltage applied across K-24 NO Check wiring from power outlet to REDB
1 PJ002DCPU-1 to 4 on DCPU? to PJ002.
During this time, the right door should be closed.
Is the power source voltage applied across CN1IHPU-1 Y-18 NO Check wiring from power outlet to REDB
2
to 4 on IHPU? to CN1.
Is the power source voltage applied across C-18 YES Fusing unit
3 CN259<C>-3 and 4? NO Change DCPU.
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 7.5MB)

9.3 Power is not supplied to ADF

9.3.1 DF-618
(1) Procedure
Location of
Step Check item electrical Result Action
components
1 Is DC24 V being output from CN610 on ADF? P-20 YES Malfunction in ADF
2 Is DC24 V being output from PJ013-3 on DCPU? K-26 NO Check wiring from DCPU to ADF.
Is the fuse on DCPU conducting? - YES Change DCPU.
3
NO Malfunction in DF-618

K-145
 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 9. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY
bizhub 652/552/602/502 THE TROUBLE CODE
• Link to the wiring diagram (PDF format, 1.4MB)

9.4 Power is not supplied to option

9.4.1 LU-204/301
(1) Procedure
Location of
Step Check item electrical Result Action
components
1 Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector CN425? W-12 to 13 NO Malfunction in LU-204/301
Is DC24 V being output from CN19 on PFTDB? U-12 to 13 NO Check wiring from PFTDB to CN19 to
2
LU-204/301.
Is the fuse on DCPU conducting? - YES Change DCPU.
3
NO Malfunction in LU-204/301
• Link to the wiring diagram of LU-204 (PDF format, 1.0MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of LU-301(PDF format, 1.0MB)

9.4.2 FS-526/527
(1) Procedure
Location of
Step Check item electrical Result Action
components
1 Are DC24 V being applied to CN331<L>? L-26 NO Malfunction in finisher.
2 Are DC24 V being applied to PJ006-3 on DCPU? K-26 NO Check wiring from DCPU to finisher.
Is the fuse on DCPU conducting? - YES Change DCPU.
3
NO Malfunction in finisher.
• Link to the wiring diagram of FN-526 (PDF format, 2.7MB)
• Link to the wiring diagram of FN-527 (PDF format, 1.8MB)

K-146
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 10. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option

10. TROUBLESHOOTING OF i-Option

10.1 Structure of license management
• The functions available with i-Option can be activated by entering "License code" to the MFP.
• License code is issued and controlled by License Management System (LMS).
To prevent unauthorized use of the license code, each MFP is identified individually so that the license code cannot be activated unless it
matches with the authorized MFP.

10.2 License management information

• Since license code needs to identify each MFP, it is issued using the serial number of MFP and "unique value" that is generated inside MFP.
• The "unique value" is stored to the NVRAM board on the MFP board and at the same time some parts of it are memorized by service
EEPROM board. The activated function cannot be used unless the both figures conform.
Since these figures are out of target of NVRAM data back, when any trouble occurs at either nonvolatile memory or either of them is
replaced with new one, "license management error" is generated due to discordance of the figures.

10.3 Error message

10.3.1 License management error
• When abnormal value is detected in the license management information that is stored to the NVRAM board or service EEPROM board, or
some values are detected cleared, warning is issued to let the user know the abnormality.
• The abnormality is detected at the timing of start-up or restart due to any condition.
• When the abnormality is detected, the corresponding i-Option function cannot be used, other ordinal functions, however, such as copy,
scanning, print or etc, can be used without interruption.

(1) Example of error message

(2) Main reasons of trouble

• The following shows the possible trouble factors and their countermeasure.
Board replacement Countermeasure
• When NVRAM board on MFP board is replaced with new one. Repair -> Activation
• When service EEPROM board is replaced with new one. Repair
• When NVRAM board and service EEPROM board are replaced Initialize -> Activation
with the new ones at the same time.
• When mounting the NVRAM board of the machine whose Initialize -> Activation
function(s) have already been activated.
• When mounting the service EEPROM board of the machine Initialize -> Activation
whose function(s) have already been activated.
• When mounting the NVRAM board and the service EEPROM Initialize -> Activation
board of the machine whose function(s) have already been
activated.

K-147
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.1 How to read element data
• As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for "State Confirmation" available from "Service Mode" can be used to isolate
the cause of the image problem.

11.1.1 Table number

• Vdc-C (not used) • Shows the developing bias value of toner when an image is produced.
• Vdc-M (not used) • Standard values: around 400 V (200 V to 800 V)
• Vdc-Y (not used) • A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.
• Vdc-K • A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.
• Relevant components: Drum unit, developing unit, high voltage unit/1 (HV1)
• Vg-C (not used) • Shows the grid voltage value of toner when an image is produced.
• Vg-M (not used) • Standard values: around 500 V (200 V to 800 V)
• Vg-Y (not used) • A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.
• Vg-K • A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.
• Relevant components: Drum unit, developing unit, high voltage unit/1 (HV1)

K-148
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.1.2 Level history 1

• TCR-C (not used) • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).
• TCR-M (not used) • Standard value: 6 to 8 %
• TCR-Y (not used) • Relevant components: TCR sensor
• TCR-K
• IDC1 • Shows the IDC bare surface output value (in 0.01 V increments).
• IDC2 (not used) • It should normally be around 4.3 V.
• The output range is 0 V to 5 V.
• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit
• Middle heat temperature • Shows the temperature of the each part of the fusing unit (in 1 °C increments).
• Heat. Protect Temperature • Relevant components: Fusing unit
• Heat edge temperature
• Soaking side temperature
• NC sensor temperature

11.1.3 Level history 2

• IDC Sensor Adjust 1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value.

• IDC Sensor Adjust 2 (not used) • It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255.
• The value becomes greater as the transfer belt unit has been used more.
• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit
• ATVC -C (not used) • Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type).
• ATVC -M (not used) • 10 μA to 100 μA (ATVC-K)
• ATVC -Y (not used) • 300 V to 5000 V (ATVC-2nd)
• ATVC -K • Relevant components: Transfer belt unit, High voltage unit/2 (HV2), 2nd transfer assy
• ATVC -2nd

11.2 How to identify problematic part

• This chapter is divided into two parts: "Initial check items" and "Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem."

K-149
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

• When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the "Initial check items" and, if the cause is yet to be identified, go to
"Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem."

11.2.1 Initial check items

(1) Initial check items 1
• Determine if the failure is attributable to a basic cause or causes.
Section Step Check Item Result Action
Paper 1 Recommended paper is used. NO Instruct user.
2 Paper is damp. YES Replace paper.
Instruct user on proper paper storage.
Original 3 Original not flat. YES Correct
4 Faint original (light pencil, etc.) YES Instruct user.
5 Highly transparent original (OHP film, etc.) YES Instruct user.
6 Dirty or scratched original glass. YES Clean or Replace.
PM parts 7 PM parts relating to image formation have reached the YES Clean or Replace.
end of cleaning/replacement cycles.
Adjustment items 8 There are settings that can be readjusted to remedy YES Readjust.
the image failure.

(2) Initial check items 2

• Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between scanner and memory, and between memory and printer.
Action Result Next Step
Enter the Service Mode, select [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [Memory Bus OK Initial check items 2
Check], and select and carry out [Scanner→Memory] and [Memory→PRT] checks. NG C6704 (action as
NOTE instructed)
• For the bus check as the internal process between the scanner and the memory, there are two
types, "scanner internal check" and "check for the scanner and the memory." NG1 or NG2 is
displayed depending on the type of NG detected.

(3) Initial check items 3

• Determine if the failure is attributable to the Scanner system or the Printer system.
Check Item Result Cause
Make copies at different zoom ratios. Full size

Scanner system
Reduction

K-150
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Check Item Result Cause

Full size

Printer system
Reduction

11.3 Solution (Scanner system)

NOTE
• Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed or scanned with A3 setting.

11.3.1 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in sub scan direction
(1) Typical faulty images

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[1] White lines [2] White bands

[3] Color lines [4] Color bands

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

When the original glass is used
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
2 ADF Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
4 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
5 Mirror, lens, exposure Mirror is dirty YES Clean.
Lamp, and reflectors Lens is dirty YES Clean.
Exposure lamp is dirty YES Clean.
Reflectors are dirty YES Clean.
6 [Machine] → [Scan Area] The adjustment value for [Image Position: Side Edge] NO Readjust.
→ [Image Position: Side falls within the specified range.
Edge] (Service Mode)
7 - The white lines/bands or colored lines/bands are YES • Change exposure unit.
blurry. • Change CCD unit.
When the ADF is used
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
2 ADF reading section Glass is dirty. YES Clean.

K-151
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Step Section Check Item Result Action

3 ADF scanning guide ADF scanning guide is damaged or dirty. YES Clean.
4 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
5 Mirror, lens, exposure Mirror is dirty YES Clean.
lamp, and reflectors Lens is dirty YES Clean.
Exposure lamp is dirty YES Clean.
Reflectors are dirty YES Clean.
6 [ADF] → [Original Stop The adjustment value for [Main Scanning Direction] NO Readjust.
Position] (Service Mode) falls within the specified range.
7 Glass step sheet for the The glass step sheet is tilted. YES Readjust.
original glass moving unit
8 ADF read position The white lines/bands or colored lines/bands occurs YES Readjust.
when reading the original from ADF.
9 - The white lines/bands or colored lines/bands are YES • Change exposure unit.
blurry. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.2 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in main scan direction
(1) Typical faulty images

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[1] White lines [2] White bands

[3] Color lines [4] Color bands

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
2 ADF Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
4 [Machine] → [Scan Area] The adjustment value for [Image Position: Leading NO Readjust.
→ [Image Position: Top Edge] falls within the specified range.
Edge] (Service Mode)
5 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 4. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.3 Scanner system: color spots

(1) Typical faulty images

AA

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.

K-152
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Step Section Check Item Result Action

2 ADF Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
3 Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
4 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 3. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.4 Scanner system: fog

(1) Typical faulty images

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original.
2 ADF Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
3 ADF does not lie flat. YES • Adjust the ADF height.
• Change ADF if it is deformed or
hinges are broken.
4 Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
5 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
6 Mirror, lens, exposure Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
7 lamp, and reflectors Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
8 Exposure lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
9 Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
10 Basic screen The problem is eliminated when the image is produced NO Try another exposure level in manual.
Quality/Density in the manual exposure setting.
11 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 10. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
2 ADF ADF does not lie flat. YES • Adjust the ADF height.
• Change ADF if it is deformed or
hinges are broken.
3 Original glass Original glass tilts. YES Position original glass correctly.
Check original loading position.

K-153
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Step Section Check Item Result Action

4 Slider Exposure unit is not aligned with the 2nd/3rd mirrors YES Perform "Focus Positioning of the
carriage. scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage"
and "Scanner Position Adjustment."
5 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 4. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction)
(1) Typical faulty images

AA

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
2 ADF ADF does not lie flat. YES • Adjust the ADF height.
• Change ADF if it is deformed or
hinges are broken.
3 Scanner rails Foreign matter on rails. YES Clean and apply lubricant.
4 Drive cables Cable kinks or is damaged. YES Correct or change.
5 Exposure unit Scanner moves smoothly. NO • Adjust the scanner motor timing
belt.
• Change bushing.
• Change scanner motor.
• Change scanner relay board.
6 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change CCD unit.
of steps up to 5.

11.3.7 Scanner system: moire

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Moire distortions recur even after the orientation of NO Change the original mode (select one
original has been changed. other than that resulted in moire).
2 Basic screen Moire distortions recur even after the original mode YES Select "Text Mode" or "Photo Mode".
Quality/Density has been changed.
3 Basic screen Zoom The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO Change the zoom ratio.
of steps up to 2.

K-154
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image

(1) Typical faulty images

AA

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original Original is skew. YES Reposition original.
2 Original glass Original glass is in positive contact with the flat spring NO • Reinstall the glass.
without being tilt. • Check the original loading position.
3 Slider Exposure unit is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd YES Perform "Focus Positioning of the
mirrors carriage. scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage"
and "Scanner Position Adjustment."
4 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 3. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image

(1) Typical faulty images

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Installation Machine is installed on a level surface. NO Reinstall.
2 Slider Exposure unit is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd YES Perform "Focus Positioning of the
mirrors carriage. scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage"
and "Scanner Position Adjustment."
3 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 2. • Change CCD unit.

11.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image

(1) Typical faulty images

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

K-155
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Original glass Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
2 Shading sheet Shading sheet is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
3 Mirror, lens, exposure Mirror is dirty. YES Clean.
4 lamp, and reflectors Lens is dirty. YES Clean.
5 Exposure lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Reflectors are dirty. YES Clean.
7 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Clean exposure lamp.
of steps up to 6. • Change exposure unit.
• Change CCD unit.

11.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS

(1) Typical faulty images

AA [1]
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE [2]

ABCDE
ABCDE

[1] Colored area of original [2] Black-and-white area of original

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 [User Setting] → [System The problem persists even after the ACS YES Change the original loading direction.
Settings] → [Auto Color determination level adjust function has been changed. Make manual settings according to
Level Adjust.] the type of original. (If the original
contains a colored area in one of its
corners, the machine may fail to
properly detect the colored area.)

11.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy

(1) Typical faulty images

[1] [2]

[1] Blank copy [2] Black copy

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Cable connecting scanner Connector is connected properly with no pins bent. NO Reconnect.
and printer
2 MFP board (MFPB) Connectors on the MFP board are connected properly. NO Reconnect.
3 CCD Unit Connectors of the CCD unit are connected properly. NO Reconnect.
4 Test Mode [Service Mode] The problem is eliminated as checked with the image NO Change I/F connection cable.
on a test pattern produced.

K-156
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Step Section Check Item Result Action

5 MFP board (MFPB) The problem is eliminated after the I/F connection NO Change MFP board.
cable has been changed.

11.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image

(1) Typical faulty images

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE [1]
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE AA [2]

[1] Data on previous page [2] Data on current page

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Cable connecting scanner Connector is connected properly with no pins bent. NO Reconnect.
and printer
2 MFP board (MFPB) Connectors on the MFP board are connected properly. NO Reconnect.
3 MFP board (MFPB) Data on previous page is mixed with data on current NO Reinstall the memory.
page.
4 Test Mode [Service Mode] The problem is eliminated as checked with the image NO Change interface connection cable.
on a test pattern produced.
5 MFP board (MFPB) The problem is eliminated after the interface NO Change MFP board.
connection cable has been changed.
6 • Printer control board Check the connection of connectors, harness, and flat NO • Change printer control board.
(PRCB) cables between PRCB and REYB/PH, and correct if • Change PH relay board.
• PH relay board (REYB/ necessary.
PH)

11.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

When the original glass is used
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Slider Exposure unit is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd YES Perform "Focus Positioning of the
mirrors carriage. scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage"
and "Scanner Position Adjustment."
2 Scanner motor Scanner motor turns smoothly. NO • Change belt.
• Change scanner motor.
3 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change exposure unit.
of steps up to 2. • Change CCD unit.
When the ADF is used
Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 ADF read position The uneven density occurs when reading the original YES Readjust.
from ADF.

K-157
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Step Section Check Item Result Action

2 Guide support for the Guide support is tilted. YES Readjust.
original glass moving unit
3 Original glass moving unit The original glass moving unit is tilted. YES Readjust.

11.4 Solution (Printer system)

Solution
NOTE
• Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed or scanned with A3 setting.

11.4.1 Printer system: Blank copy or black copy

(1) Typical faulty images

[1] [2]

[1] Blank copy [2] Black copy

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit (blank copy) Developing unit drive is being transmitted. NO Correct or change drive coupling
mechanism.
2 Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or YES Clean or correct.
deformed.
3 Developing bias contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
4 Imaging unit (black copy) Drum unit charge contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
5 PH unit PH shutter (shutter in the path of the laser beam from NO Correct.
the PH unit to the drum) opens and closes properly.
6 PWBs Connectors are securely connected with no bent pins NO Correct.
on the printer control board or PH Unit.
7 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
6. • Change PH unit.
• Change High voltage unit/1.
• Change printer control board.

11.4.2 Printer system: Low image density or rough image

(1) Typical faulty images

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The drum unit or the developing unit is used to the YES Replace the unit whose life value has
extent that its life value has been exceeded. been reached.
2 Image transfer current contact terminal is dirty or YES Clean or correct.
deformed.

K-158
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

Step Section Check Item Result Action

3 Developing bias contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
4 State Confirmation → Check TCR data. (specified rang: 4 to 8 %) NO Go to next step.
Level History 1 (Service
Mode)
5 Level history data check Low TCR YES Go to step 8.
6 results TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 7.
7 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty. YES Clean with cleaning jig.
8 Image Process Toner is properly supplied when TCR toner supply is NO Go to next step.
Adjustment → TCR Toner run.
Supply (Service Mode)
9 Image Process Execute the Maximum Density Adjustment. YES Go to step 10.
Adjustment “Conv. Value” falls within the specified range as
→ Gradation Adjust checked through gradation adjust.
(Service Mode) Dark: 0 ± 100
Highlight: 0 ± 60
10 Service Mode → Max Select [Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] YES Make setting again.
Image Density Adj → [Max Image Density Adj].
The image problem can be corrected by selecting an
Max Image Density Adj setting toward the + end.
11 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
10. • Change PH unit.
• Change High voltage unit/1.
• Change printer control board.

11.4.3 Printer system: Foggy background

(1) Typical faulty images

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 - Sunlight or any other extraneous light enters the YES Protect the copier from extraneous
machine. light.
2 Imaging Unit The drum unit is used to the extent that its life value YES Replace the unit whose life value has
has been exceeded. been reached.
3 Comb electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
4 Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
5 Erase lamp Erase lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
6 Is there continuity across the erase lamp? NO Change erase lamp.
7 Service Mode → Select [Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] YES Make setting again.
Gradation Adjust → [Gradation Adjust].
The image problem can be corrected by executing the
gradation adjustment.
8 Service Mode → Image Select [Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] YES Make setting again.
Background Adj → [Image Background Adj].
The image problem can be corrected by selecting an
Image Background Adj setting toward the + end.
9 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
10. • Change developing unit.
• Change PH unit.
• Change High voltage unit/1.
• Change printer control board.

K-159
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.4.4 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in sub scan direction

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Image check A white line or black line in sub scan direction is sharp. YES Clean the electrostatic charger wire.
2 When printing thick paper, black lines appear. YES Select [Service Mode] → [Machine]
→ [Thick Paper Interval Setting] and
set [Image Quality].
3 Drum unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched. YES Change drum unit.
4 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
5 Contact terminals make good connection between NO Clean contact terminals.
each drum unit and machine.
6 Developing bias contact terminal makes good NO Clean contact terminal and check
connection. terminal position.
7 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty. YES Clean with cleaning jig.
8 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change drum unit.
of steps up to 7. • Change transfer belt unit.
• Change PH unit.

11.4.5 Printer system: Black streaks or bands in main scan direction

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Image check A white line or black line in main scan direction is NO Clean the electrostatic charger wire.
sharp.
2 Drum unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched. YES Change drum unit.
3 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.
4 Contact terminals make good connection between NO Clean contact terminals.
each drum unit and machine.
5 Developing bias contact terminal makes good NO Clean contact terminal and check
connection. terminal position.
6 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty. YES Clean with cleaning jig.
7 - The problem has been eliminated through the checks NO • Change drum unit.
of steps up to 6. • Change transfer belt unit.
• Change PH unit.

K-160
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.4.6 Printer system: Black spots

(1) Typical faulty images

AA

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Paper path Toner is on the paper path. YES Clean.
2 Drum unit Drum is scratched. YES Change drum unit.
3 Appearance is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Fusing unit Fusing rollers are dirty or scratched. YES Change fusing unit.
5 Drum unit Comb electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
6 Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or deformed. YES Clean or correct.
7 Erase lamp Erase lamp is dirty. YES Clean.
8 Is there continuity across the erase lamp? NO Change erase lamp.
9 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
8. • Change developing unit.
• Change high voltage unit/2.
• Change printer control board.

11.4.7 Printer system: White streaks or bands in sub scan direction

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller is dented or scratched. YES Change transfer roller unit.
2 - The drum unit, developing unit or the transfer roller unit YES Replace the unit whose life value has
is used to the extent that its life value has been been reached.
exceeded.
3 Imaging unit Drum is scratched. YES Change drum unit.
4 Appearance is dirty. YES Clean.
5 Fusing unit Fusing rollers are dirty or scratched. YES Change fusing unit.
6 PH unit Window glass of the PH unit is dirty. YES Clean.
7 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
6. • Change developing unit.
• Change printer control board.

K-161
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.4.8 Printer system: White streaks or bands in main scan direction

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 - The drum unit, developing unit or the transfer roller unit YES Replace the unit whose life value has
is used to the extent that its life value has been been reached.
exceeded.
2 Imaging unit Drum is scratched. YES Change drum unit.
3 Appearance is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller is dirty or scratched. YES Change transfer roller unit.
5 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper path. YES Remove foreign matter.
6 Image transfer paper separator fingers are damaged YES Clean or change.
or dirty.
7 Fusing unit Fusing rollers are dirty or scratched. YES Change fusing unit.
8 PH unit Window glass of the PH unit is dirty. YES Clean.
9 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
8. • Change developing unit.
• Change printer control board.

11.4.9 Printer system: Void areas

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 - The developing unit or the transfer roller unit is used to YES Replace the unit whose life value has
the extent that its life value has been exceeded. been reached.
2 Imaging unit Drum is scratched. YES Change drum unit.
3 Appearance is dirty. YES Clean.
4 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller is dented or scratched. NO Change transfer roller unit.
5 Fusing unit Fusing rollers are scratched or deformed. YES Change fusing unit.
6 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
5. • Change developing unit.
• Change printer control board.

K-162
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

11.4.10 Printer system: Smears on back of paper

(1) Typical faulty images

AA

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Paper path Toner is on the paper path. YES Clean.
2 - The drum unit is used to the extent that its life value YES Replace the unit whose life value has
has been exceeded. been reached.
3 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller is dirty. YES Change transfer roller unit.
4 Fusing unit Fusing roller is dirty. YES Change fusing unit.

11.4.11 Printer system: Uneven image density

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The drum unit or the developing unit is used to the YES Replace the unit whose life value has
extent that its life value has been exceeded. been reached.
2 Transfer roller unit The transfer roller unit is used to the extent that its life YES Change transfer roller unit.
value has been exceeded.
3 Transfer roller is dirty or deformed. YES
4 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
1. • Change developing unit.
• Change printer control board.

11.4.12 Printer system: Gradation reproduction failure

(1) Typical faulty images

K-163
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 11. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 - The developing unit or the developer is used to the YES Replace the unit whose life value has
extent that its life value has been exceeded. been reached.
2 State Confirmation → Check TCR data. (specified rang: 4 to 8 %) NO Go to next step.
Level History 1 (Service
Mode)
3 Level history data check Low TCR YES Go to step 5.
4 results High TCR or TCR falling within specified range YES Go to step 6.
5 Image Process Toner is properly supplied when TCR toner supply is NO Go to next step.
Adjustment → TCR Toner run.
Supply (Service Mode)
6 Image Process Execute the Maximum Density Adjustment. YES Go to next step.
Adjustment →Gradation “Conv. Value” falls within the specified range as
Adjust (Service Mode) checked through gradation adjust.
Dark: 0 ± 100
Highlight: 0 ± 60
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller is dirty or deformed. YES Change transfer roller unit.
8 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
7. • Change developing unit.
• Change printer control board.

11.4.13 Printer system: Uneven pitch

(1) Typical faulty images

(2) Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check Item Result Action
1 Imaging unit The developing unit is used to the extent that its life YES Replace the unit whose life value has
value has been exceeded. been reached.
2 Developing unit drive is being transmitted. NO Correct or change drive coupling
mechanism.
3 Drum and transfer roller drive is being transmitted. NO Correct or change drive coupling
mechanism.
4 Transport section Registration roller unit drive is being transmitted. NO Correct or change drive coupling
mechanism.
5 Fusing Section Fusing unit drive is being transmitted. NO Correct or change drive coupling
mechanism.
6 PH unit PH unit is securely installed. YES Correct.
7 - The problem has been eliminated after performing step NO • Change drum unit.
6. • Change developing unit.
• Change printer control board.

K-164
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

12. IC PROTECTOR
12.1 Outline
• To increase product safety, this MFP has an IC protector (ICP) installed in each board. ICP is a component that protects IC. If the amount of
the current supplied to the electrical parts such as motor exceeds the set level, ICP trips to protect IC from over current.
The following list contains ICP installed in each board, related devices, and symptoms that occur when ICP trips.

12.2 IC protector list

12.2.1 bizhub 652/602/552/502
(1) Printer control board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP2 M12 Toner supply motor/K Abnormally low toner density caused by toner C-2557
supply motor/K and its adjustment failure C-255C
C-2564
ICP3 M20 Waste toner agitating motor Waste toner agitating motor's failure to turn C-2204
ICP4 M21 1st transfer pressure retraction motor Transfer belt pressure/retraction failure C-2152
ICP5 M14 Toner cartridge motor C/K Toner empty detection (TC replacement -
message)
ICP6 FM3 Cooling fan motor Cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-5356
FM7 Toner suction fan motor Toner suction fan motor's failure to turn C-2351
FM13 Paper cooling fan motor Paper cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-0351
ICP7 FM16 Rear side cooling fan motor Rear side cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-2354
SD1 Gate switch solenoid Paper exit section jam -
ICP8 FM101 Tucking fan motor/1 Occurrence of tucking problem -
FM102 Tucking fan motor/2 Occurrence of tucking problem -
FM103 Tucking fan motor/3 Occurrence of tucking problem -
ICP9 FM2 Fusing cooling fan motor/1 Fusing cooling fan motor/1's failure to turn C-3303
FM6 Ozone ventilation fan motor Ozone ventilation fan motor's failure to turn C-5354
ICP10 FM10 IH cooling fan motor/1 IH cooling fan motor/1's failure to turn C-5304
FM12 IH cooling fan motor/2 IH cooling fan motor/2's failure to turn C-5306
ICP11 EL/K Main erase lamp/K No change (Unlit. Image persistence and stain -
on copy may occur.)
ICP12 - Key counter Unable to count -
TCT Total counter Unable to make a copy (LED of Start Key blinks -
in red.)
ICP14 M18 K PC drum motor K PC drum motor's failure to turn C-225B
M19 K developing motor K developing motor's failure to turn C-2259
ICP15 M1 Transfer belt motor Transfer belt motor's failure to turn C-5104
REDB Relay drive board No change (Dehumidifier heater remains ON, -
causing no negative effects.)
ICP16 M30 Fusing motor Fusing motor's failure to turn C-3201
ICP17 TCRS/K TCR sensor/K Abnormally high toner density detected by TCR C-2558
sensor/K and its adjustment failure C-255C
REYB/PH PH relay board P-14 color shift may occur. P-14
INDEXB Index board Laser failure C-4501
PZS_K Toner empty sensor/K K toner empty detection (TC replacement -
message)
IDCS/F IDC registration sensor/F IDC registration sensor/F malfunction P-5
TEMS1 Heating roller temperature sensor/1 Fusing heater failure/abnormally low fusing C-3425
temperature/fusing sensor wire disconnection / C-3825
stain on fusing sensor
C-3925
C-392A
TEMS2 Heating roller temperature sensor/2 Fusing sensor wire disconnection C-3921
TEMS3 Heating roller temperature sensor/3 Abnormally low fusing temperature/fusing C-3822
sensor wire disconnection C-3922
ICP18 M38 Cleaner motor Cleaner motor's failure to turn C-2257
ICP19 - Toner cartridge new artcle detection “Install toner cartridge.” will be displayed. (As -
polyswitch is used, the problem disappears by
turning OFF the main power switch and leaving
MFP alone.

K-165
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

When ICP trips

ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP20 - Drum unit new article detection Drum unit installation error. -

(2) MFP board

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F201 - - Control panel unlit (As polyswitch is used, the -
problem disappears by turning OFF the main
power switch and leaving MFP alone.
F250 - - MFP does not boot up. (As polyswitch is used, -
the problem disappears by turning OFF the
main power switch and leaving MFP alone.)
F300 - - USB device does not work. (As polyswitch is -
used, the problem disappears by turning OFF
the main power switch and leaving MFP alone.)
IC301 - - Unable to download (As polyswitch is used, the -
problem disappears by turning OFF the main
power switch and leaving MFP alone.)
ICP200 - - Management device does not communicate. -

(3) Paper feed/transport drive board

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 LUDB LU drive board LCT feed section/transport section jam -
PS3 Paper feed sensor LCT feed section/transport section jam -
PS28 Intermediate roller sensor Tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section -
jam
PS4 Tray1 vertical transport sensor Tray 1 feed section jam -
PS5 Tray1 paper feed sensor Tray 1 feed section jam -
PS12 Tray2 vertical transport sensor Tray 2 feed section jam -
PS13 Tray2 paper feed sensor Tray 2 feed section jam -
ICP2 FM1 Suction fan motor Suction fan motor's failure to turn C-0301
FM5 Fusing cooling fan motor/3 Fusing cooling fan motor/3's failure to turn C-3305
ICP3 CL1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch Tray 1 feed section jam -
CL2 Tray2 paper feed clutch Tray 2 feed section jam -
ICP4 CL5 Tray3 paper feed clutch Tray 3 feed section jam -
CL6 Tray3 transport clutch Tray 3/4 horizontal transport section jam -
CL7 Tray4 paper feed clutch Tray 4 feed section jam -
ICP5 CL3 Horizontal Transport clutch Tray 3/4 horizontal transport section jam -
ICP6 M25 Transport motor Tray 3/4 feeder transport motor failure to turn C-0104
detection
ICP7 M23 Tray3 lift-up motor Tray 3 feeder up/down abnormality C-0206
ICP8 M24 Tray4 lift-up motor Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality C-0208

(4) PH relay board

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 LDDB/K Laser drive board/K Laser failure C-4501
ICP2 FM14 PH cooling fan motor PH cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-4301
FM15 IU cooling fan motor IU cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-2353
ICP3 M34 Polygon motor Polygon motor's turning at abnormal timing C-4101

K-166
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

(5) High voltage unit/1

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
IP401 - Charge corona/grid/developing Abnormal image (Stabilization is not completed P-6/9
section_K successfully.)

(6) High voltage unit/2

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
IP101 - Image transfer, paper separation, belt Abnormal image (transfer failure, ATVC P-27
cleaning malfunction, paper separation JAM and belt
cleaning failure)

(7) DC power supply

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F551 FM9 Power supply cooling fan motor Power supply cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-5351

(8) Scanner relay board

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
PTR1 PS14 Empty sensor JAM caused by the last original fed from DF -
RS201 Original cover sensor Unable to detect a close of DF -
REYB/ Scanner relay board_WAKE signal Opening and closing DF or placing original on -
SCAN generation section DF cannot cause MFP to wake from sleep
mode.
MCMB Machine condition monitor board Unlit InfoLine (blue and orange) located at the -
front of scanner section
- Local interface board (option) USB device does not work. -
PTR2 PS204 Original size detection sensor/1 Wrong original size detection -
PS205 Original size detection sensor/2 Wrong original size detection -
F1 FM201 Optical cooling fan motor Optical cooling fan motor's failure to turn C-8302

12.2.2 DF-618
(1) DF control board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F8 - DC to DC converter input section 24V Unable to produce DC5V in ADF and MFP -
line unable to detect ADF
F6 SD1 Switch back solenoid ADF paper exit / image reading section JAM -
SD2 Exit switch back solenoid ADF image reading section JAM -
F7 SD3 Stamp solenoid Unable to place a stamp -
FM1 Cooling fan Cooling fan failure C-8302
F10 PS3 Registration sensor ADF transport section JAM -
PS8 Reverse Registration sensor ADF turnover section JAM -
PS4 After separate sensor ADF transport section JAM -
F9 PS7 Reverse roller sensor Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble C-8102
PS9 Before read sensor ADF transport section JAM -
PS10 Length sensor/1 Wrong original size detection -
PS11 Length sensor/2 Wrong original size detection -
PS12 Length sensor/3 Wrong original size detection -
PS15 Lift up lower sensor Lift up mechanism failure C-8106
F11 PS20 Original set sensor Original reset indication -
F2 M7 Registration motor ADF transport section JAM -
F3 M1 Reading motor ADF image reading section JAM -
F1 M3 Exit motor ADF paper exit section -

K-167
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

When ICP trips

ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F4 M2 Take-up motor ADF paper feed section JAM -
PS1 M6 Lift-up motor Lift up mechanism failure C-8106
PS2 M5 Switchback roller pressure/retraction Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble C-8102
motor
PS3 M4 Reading roller pressure/retraction motor Before reading pressure welding alienation C-8101
mechanism

12.2.3 LU-204/LU-301
(1) LU drive board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 M1 Lift-up motor LCT up/down abnormality C-0216
ICP3 M3 Transport motor LCT transport section JAM -
ICP4 M2 Paper feed motor LCT feed section JAM -
ICP5 PS3 Paper feed sensor LCT feed section JAM -

12.2.4 ZU-606
(1) ZU control board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -
ICP3 M601 Registration motor Entrance JAM -
ICP4 M606 Main motor Folding section JAM -
ICP5 M605 Punch shift motor Punch shift motor drive malfunction C-1133
ICP6 M603 2nd stopper motor 2nd stopper motor drive malfunction C-1131
ICP7 M602 1st stopper motor 1st stopper motor drive malfunction C-1130
ICP8 SD601 Gate solenoid/Lw Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction C-1134
SD602 Gate solenoid/Up
CL601 Punch clutch
FM601 Main motor cooling fan
ICP9 M608 Punch switchover motor Punch switchover motor drive malfunction C-1136
ICP10 M604 Punch motor Punch motor drive malfunction C-1135
ICP12 M607 Punch scraps conveyance motor Punch scraps full -

12.2.5 FS-526
(1) FS control board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 M5 Main tray lift motor Main tray Up/Down motor malfunction C-1102
ICP2 M4 Exit roller motor Paper exit roller drive motor malfunction C-1104
SD1 Route change gate solenoid SD staple section JAM -
SD2 Bypass gate solenoid Bypass transport JAM -
SD3 Sub tray gate solenoid Sub tray exit JAM -
SD4 Switch back solenoid JAM during saddle stitch with paper fed from PI -
SD404 3rd Entrance switching solenoid Job tray paper exit JAM -
ICP3 M1 Transport motor/1 Entrance JAM -
M2 Transport motor/2 Entrance JAM -
ICP4 M11 Alignment plate motor/F Side-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction C-1103
M12 Alignment plate motor/R Side-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction C-1140
M15 Trail edge paddle motor Trail edge paddle up/down drive malfunction -
M18 Rewind paddle motor Rewind paddle motor drive malfunction -
M19 2 staples trail edge stopper motor End stopper drive motor malfunction C-1145
ICP5 M3 Bypass transport motor Bypass transport motor drive malfunction -
M13 2 staples stapler movement motor Side-staple stapler drive malfunction C-1106

K-168
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

When ICP trips

ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP6 M6 Paper output roller motor Paper exit auxiliary roller motor malfunction C-1105
M10 Stacker entrance motor Stacker entrance motor drive malfunction -
ICP7 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -
ICP8 - DC3.3V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -
ICP9 M17 Stacker plate motor Spare stacker board drive motor malfunction C-1144
ICP10 M14 2 staples stapler motor Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction C-1109
ICP11 - 24V in interlock board Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction C-1109
ICP12 M34 Exit motor (SD-508) Center-staple paper exit motor malfunction C-1152
ICP13 M16 Paddle motor Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction C-1141

(2) Interlock board

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction C-1109

(3) Transport control board

When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 M201 Transport motor Transport section JAM -
ICP2 FM1 Fan motor/1 Fan motor drive malfunction -
FM2 Fan motor/2
ICP3 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -

12.2.6 PK-516
(1) Punch control board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 M302 Punch oscillating motor Output OP punch driving motor malfunction C-1132
ICP2 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -
ICP4 M301 Punch drive motor Punch shift motor drive malfunction C-1127

12.2.7 SD-508
(1) SD drive board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP2 M22 Leading edge stopper motor Center-staple lead edge stopper motor C-1113
malfunction
ICP3 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -
ICP4 M20 Center staple alignment motor /F Center-staple front adjust drive motor C-1114
malfunction
M21 Center staple alignment motor /R Center-staple rear adjust drive motor C-1150
malfunction
M23 Center staple motor Center-staple stapler drive motor malfunction C-1151
M26 Center staple paddle lift motor/C Center-staple paddle up-down motor C-1153
malfunction
ICP5 M29 Center staple paddle/T Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction C-1156
(trailing edge)
M30 Center staple paddle/C Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction C-1157
(middle)
M33 Transport motor Exit motor drive malfunction C-1116
SD5 Tri-folding change solenoid SD paper exit JAM -
SD6 Exit grip solenoid -
ICP6 M25 Clincher motor Center-staple clinch roller motor malfunction C-1112
ICP7 M24 Staple motor Center-staple head roller motor malfunction C-1110

K-169
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

When ICP trips

ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP8 M32 Center fold knife motor Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction C-1115

12.2.8 PI-505
(1) PI drive board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
ICP1 CL201 Transfer clutch /Up Paper feed JAM -
CL202 Transfer clutch /Lw -
CL203 Registration clutch -
SD201 Pick-up solenoid /Up -
SD202 Pick-up solenoid /Lw -
ICP2 M201 Tray lift motor /Up Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (upper) C-1125
M202 Tray lift motor /Lw Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (lower) C-1124
ICP3 - DC5V sensor and others in the board Unable to be detected -
ICP4 M203 Transfer motor Paper feed JAM -

12.2.9 FS-527
(1) FS control board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F1 - Between connection with MFP and 24V No operation (Due to no power supply to CPU, -
power line FS connection not detected)
F3 - 24V to 5V DC to DC converter -
F4 - 5V to 3.3V DC to DC converter -
F5 M1 Paper passage motor/1 JAM between MFP and the paper receiving -
section
F6 M3 Paper passage motor/2 JAM between RU and the intermediate section -
F7 M4 Conveyance motor JAM between the intermediate and lower path -
sections
F8 M5 Exit motor JAM or multiple sheets/sets ejection JAM -
between the accommodation and exit sections.
F9 M11 Stapler movement motor Stapler movement drive failure C-11B0
F10 M13 Alignment plate motor Alignment plate motor drive malfunction C-1190
F11 M14 Leading edge stopper motor Leading edge stopper motor drive malfunction C-1194
F12 SD1 Accommodation paddle solenoid Accommodation section JAM -
F13 M16 Tray2 shift motor Shift motor drive failure C-1182
F14 M2 Duplex path switching motor Duplex path switching motor drive malfunction C-11E0
(Paper may be fed in the mode where this
motor does not operate)
F15 M6 Upper lower path switching motor Upper lower path switching motor drive C-11E1
malfunction (Paper may be fed when no
finishing options are selected.)
F16 M8 Tray1 path switching motor Tray1 path switching motor drive malfunction C-11E2
(Paper may be fed when it is not ejected to the
tray 1.)
F17 M17 Tray3 exit roller retraction motor Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction failure C-11A7
(Only when JS is installed)
F18 M9 Exit roller retraction motor Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction failure C-11A1
F19 M10 Accommodation roller retraction motor Accommodation roller pressure/ retraction C-11A2
failure
F20 M100 Punch motor/1 Punch motor drive malfunction (Only during the C-11C0
initial operation or the punch operation in punch
mode)
F21 M18 Stapler motor Staple drive failure (Paper may be fed when C-11B2
stapling is not selected)
F22 M15 Elevate motor Elevate drive malfunction C-1183

K-170
bizhub 652/552/602/502 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 12. IC PROTECTOR

When ICP trips

ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F23 M12 Accommodation paddle motor Accommodation section JAM (Depending on -
conditions, paper may be ejected when no
finishing options are selected.)
F25 M15 Elevate motor Elevate drive malfunction C-1183
F26 PS200 Punch cam position sensor Punch motor drive malfunction C-11C0
PS300 Punch pulse sensor/1
PS100 Punch home sensor/1
F27 - Stapler home sensor Staple drive failure (Likely to staple repeatedly C-11B2
- Stapler self-priming sensor depending on conditions)
- Staple empty sensor
F29 PS1 Paper passage sensor/1 JAM -
PS2 Paper passage sensor/2
PS10 Registration sensor
PS30 Punch hole full sensor
F30 PS9 Lower path sensor JAM -
PS16 Tray2 paper detection sensor

12.2.10 SD-509
(1) SD drive board
When ICP trips
ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code and
Symptom in each load
others
F1 PS43 Paper sensor/1 Saddle section JAM -
PS44 Paper sensor/2
F2 - 24V to 5V DC to DC converter No operation (Due to no power supply to CPU, -
SD connection is not detected)
F3 M24 Center staple alignment motor/F Center-staple front adjust drive motor C-1114
malfunction
F4 M23 Center staple alignment motor/R Center-staple rear adjust drive motor C-1150
malfunction
F5 M20 Leading edge stopper motor Center-staple lead edge stopper motor C-1113
malfunction
F7 M26 Center fold plate motor Center-staple knife drive motor malfunction C-1115
F8 - Saddle stapler Saddle stapler drive failure C-11B5
F9 SD3 Leading edge grip solenoid Misalignment, misalignment of sheets in a copy -
set, and misaligned saddle stitch and fold
positions
F10 - Stapler home sensor Center-stapler drive failure or staple empty C-11B5
- Staple empty sensor 1 indication
- Staple empty sensor 2
F11 M25 Center fold roller motor Center-staple transfer motor malfunction C-1116
F12 M25 Center fold roller motor Center-staple transfer motor malfunction C-1116
F13 M21 Upper paddle motor Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction C-1156
(trailing edge)
F14 M22 Lower paddle motor Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction C-1158
(Leading edge)

K-171
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652
1.1.1 Scanner section

[1]
[17] [2]
[16] [3]

[18] [4]

[15]

[5]
[14] [6]

[13]
[8]
[12] [7]
[11] [10] [9]

[1] Scanner motor (M201) [2] 15 degree sensor (PS202)

[3] Original size detection sensor/2 (PS205)* [4] CCD board (CCDB)
[5] Original cover sensor (RS201) [6] USB board (UB)
[7] Control panel assy [8] Fax speaker (SP)
[9] Machine condition monitor board (MCMB) [10] Scanner home sensor (PS201)
[11] Exposure lamp (FL201) [12] Inverter board (INVB)
[13] Original glass moving motor (M202) [14] Glass home sensor (PS203)
[15] Original glass position control board (OGPCB) [16] Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)
[17] Optical cooling fan motor (FM201) [18] Original size detection sensor/1 (PS204)
• *: Option

1.1.2 Front side

(1) Load

[1]

[2]

[3]

L-1
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[1] IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM12) [2] IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
[3] Toner supply motor/K (M12)

(2) Board/switch/sensor/others
[9]
[8]

[1]

[2]

[7] [3]

[6] [4]

[5]

[1] IH power supply (IHPU) [2] Power switch (SW1)

[3] Total counter (TCT) [4] Waste toner box set sensor (PS53)
[5] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [6] Front door switch (MS3)
[7] Toner cartridge cover switch (RS1) [8] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K)
[9] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)

1.1.3 Back side

(1) Board
[1]
[2]

[11] [3]

[10]

[9]

[8]

[4]

[5]

[7]

[6]

L-2
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[1] MFP board (MFPB) [2] NVRAM board (NRB)

[3] PCI board (PCIB) [4] Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)
[5] High voltage unit/1 (HV1) [6] Relay drive board (REDB)
[7] DC power supply (DCPU) [8] Service EEPROM board (SVERB)
[9] High voltage unit/2 (HV2) [10] Printer control board (PRCB)
[11] Hard disk (HDD)

(2) Load

[16] [1]
[15]
[2]
[14]
[3]

[4]

[13]

[12]

[11]

[10]

[9] [5]

[6]

[8]

[7]

[1] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) [2] Transfer belt motor (M1)
[3] Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6) [4] K PC drum motor (M18)
[5] Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) [6] K developing motor (M19)
[7] MFP control board cooling fan motor (FM17) [8] Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)
[9] IU cooling fan motor (FM15) [10] Cleaner motor (M38)
[11] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) [12] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
[13] Toner suction fan motor (FM7) [14] Cooling fan motor (FM3)
[15] Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16) [16] Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)

L-3
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

(3) Switch/sensor/others
[8] [1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[7]

[6]

[1] Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41) [2] Loop amount detection sensor/2 (PS42)
[3] Pressure welding alienation sensor/K (PS51) [4] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
[5] Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) [6] Dehumidification heater switch (SW2)
[7] Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1) [8] Service port sensor (PS60)

1.1.4 Around the write section

[1]

[5]

[2]
[4]
[3]

[1] PH unit [2] Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor (PS23)
[3] PH cooling fan motor (FM14) [4] Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
[5] PH relay board (REYB/PH)

L-4
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.1.5 Manual bypass tray

[1]
[2]
[11]

[10]
[9]

[3]

[8]
[4]

[7]
[6]

[5]

[1] Bypass tray up down motor (M28) [2] Bypass paper feed motor (M27)
[3] Bypass sub tray set sensor (PS37) [4] Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33)
[5] Multi FD size sensor/2 (PS32) [6] Multi FD size sensor/1 (PS31)
[7] Bypass paper width detection resistor (VR1) [8] Bypass set sensor (PS30)
[9] Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34) [10] Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
[11] Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)

1.1.6 Tray 1
[13]
[1]
[12]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
[11]

[10]
[9]

[6]

[8]

[7]

[1] Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) [2] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
[3] Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6) [4] Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
[5] Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5) [6] Tray1 paper empty sensor (PS2)
[7] Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3) [8] Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7)
[9] Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) [10] Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS8)
[11] Tray1 device detection sensor (PS1) [12] Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)
[13] Take-up motor (M22)

L-5
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.1.7 Tray 2

[13] [1]
[2]
[4] [5]
[6]
[12] [3]

[11]
[10]

[7]

[9]

[8]

[1] Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) [2] Tray2 paper feed clutch (CL2)
[3] Tray2 door set sensor (PS17) [4] Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14)
[5] Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) [6] Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13)
[7] Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS10) [8] Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11)
[9] Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/1 (PS15) [10] Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)
[11] Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/2 (PS16) [12] Tray2 device detection sensor (PS9)
[13] Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)

1.1.8 Tray 3
[11] [1] [3]
[10] [2]
[9]

[4]

[5]

[8]

[7]
[6]

[1] Tray3 near empty sensor (PS20) [2] Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19)
[3] Intermediate roller sensor (PS28) [4] Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)
[5] Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) [6] Tray3 dehumidifier heater (DH1)
[7] Paper temperature thermistor (TH8) [8] Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)
[9] Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS22) [10] Tray3 paper feed clutch (CL5)
[11] Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)

L-6
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.1.9 Tray 4
[14] [15] [1] [2] [3]
[13]
[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[12]

[11]
[10]

[1] Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58) [2] Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL7)
[3] Tray4 near empty sensor (PS25) [4] Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24)
[5] Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) [6] Tray1 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/1)
[7] Tray2 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/2) [8] Tray3 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/3)
[9] Tray4 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/4) [10] Tray4 dehumidifier heater (DH2)
[11] Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) [12] Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS27)
[13] Transport motor (M25) [14] Vertical transport motor (M26)
[15] Horizontal Transport clutch (CL3)

1.1.10 2nd transfer section

[1] [2]

[3]
[8]

[4]

[5]

[7]
[6]

[1] Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50) [2] Suction fan motor (FM1)
[3] 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) [4] Timing roller sensor (PS38)
[5] IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) [6] OHP detection sensor (PS40)
[7] Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS) [8] Registration motor (M2)

L-7
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.1.11 Duplex section

[1]
[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1] ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) [2] ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48)
[3] ADU transport motor/2 (M32) [4] ADU door sensor (PS49)
[5] ADU transport motor/1 (M31)

1.1.12 Fusing/paper exit section

[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[14]

[4] [5]

[13]

[6]
[12]

[7]

[11] [10] [9] [8]

[1] Switchback Motor (M33) [2] Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
[3] IH coil (FH1) [4] Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
[5] Paper exit sensor (PS39) [6] Pressure home sensor (PS55)
[7] Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS3) [8] Heating roller temperature sensor (TEMS1)
[9] Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS2) [10] Right door switch (MS2)
[11] Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56) [12] Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)
[13] Fusing retraction position sensor (PS59) [14] Exit motor (M4)
[15] Fusing motor (M30)

L-8
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.2 DF-618/SP-501

[10] [11]
[12]

[9]

[8]

[7]

[1]
[6]

[5]
[4] [2]
[3]

[1] Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) [2] Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5)
[3] Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) [4] Stamp solenoid (SD3) *
[5] Lift-up motor (M6) [6] Exit switch back solenoid (SD2)
[7] Reading motor (M1) [8] Registration motor (M7)
[9] Take-up motor (M2) [10] Exit motor (M3)
[11] Switch back solenoid (SD1) [12] Cooling fan (FM1)
• *: Option

[21] [1]
[2]
[20]

[19]
[3]

[18]
[4]

[17]

[5]
[16]

[6]
[15]
[8] [7]

[14] [13]
[12] [10] [9]
[11]

[1] Length sensor/1 (PS10) [2] Length sensor/3 (PS12)

[3] Length sensor/2 (PS11) [4] Lift-up upper sensor (PS16)
[5] Empty sensor (PS14) [6] After separate sensor (PS4)
[7] Original set sensor (PS20) [8] Reverse roller sensor (PS7)
[9] Lift up lower sensor (PS15) [10] Read roller sensor (PS6)
[11] Consolidation/3 (PS17) [12] Consolidation/2 (PS18)
[13] Consolidation/1 (PS19) [14] Reverse registration sensor (PS8)
[15] Before read sensor (PS9) [16] Registration sensor (PS3)
[17] Exit sensor (PS5) [18] Read open/close sensor (PS2)
[19] Feed open/close sensor (PS1) [20] DF control board (DFCB)

L-9
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[21] Relay board (REYB)

1.3 LU-204 (Option)

[1]

[14] [2]
[3]
[13] [4]
[12]

[11]
[10]

[9]

[5]
[8]

[7] [6]

[1] LU door switch (MS1) [2] Near empty sensor /2 (PS6)

[3] Paper empty sensor (PS4) [4] Tray LED (LED)
[5] Dehumidification heater (DH) [6] Tray set sensor/2 (PS7)
[7] Paper feed sensor (PS3) [8] Upper limit sensor (PS2)
[9] Tray set sensor/1 (PS1) [10] Lift-up motor (M1)
[11] Paper feed motor (M2) [12] Transport motor (M3)
[13] LU drive board (LUDB) [14] Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)

1.4 LU-301 (Option)

[13] [1]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]

[10]

[9]

[8] [5]

[7]
[6]

[1] LU door switch (MS1) [2] Near empty sensor /2 (PS6)

[3] Paper empty sensor (PS4) [4] Tray LED (LED)

L-10
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[5] Dehumidification heater (DH) [6] Paper feed sensor (PS3)

[7] Upper limit sensor (PS2) [8] Tray set sensor (PS1)
[9] Lift-up motor (M1) [10] Paper feed motor (M2)
[11] Transport motor (M3) [12] LU drive board (LUDB)
[13] Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)

1.5 JS-504 (Option)

[13] [1]
[12] [2]
[3]
[11] [4]
[5]

[10] [9] [7] [6]

[8]

[1] Upper tray exit sensor (PS2) [2] Lower tray exit sensor (PS1)
[3] Route change home sensor (PS4) [4] Shift motor (M2)
[5] Shift home sensor (PS6) [6] Front door sensor (PS3)
[7] Lower tray paper full detect board/LED (T1FDTB/LED) [8] Upper tray paper full detect board/LED (T2FDTB/LED)
[9] Route change motor (M3) [10] Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR)
[11] JS control board (JSCB) [12] Transport motor (M1)
[13] Upper tray paper full detect board/PR (T2FDTB/PR)

L-11
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.6 ZU-606 (Option)

[1]
[15]

[14]

[2]

[13]
[3]
[12]

[11] [4]

[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[8] [7]

[1] Main motor cooling fan (FM601) [2] Punch shift motor (M605)
[3] Punch shift home sensor (PS605) [4] ZU control board (ZUCB)
[5] Circuit breaker/2 (CBR2) [6] Circuit breaker/1 (CBR1)
[7] Power relay (RY1) [8] Noise filter (NF1)
[9] Coil (COIL) [10] DC power supply/1 (DCPU1)
[11] Door switch (MS602) [12] DC power supply/2 (DCPU2)
[13] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607) [14] Punch scraps full sensor (PS608)
[15] Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)

[9] [10] [11]

[8] [1]
[2]

[7] [3]

[4]
[5]
[6]

[1] Main motor (M606) [2] Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610)

[3] Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601) [4] Registration motor (M601)
[5] 2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604) [6] Exit sensor (PS609)
[7] 2nd folding stopper motor (M603) [8] Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)
[9] Conveyance sensor (PS601) [10] 1st folding stopper motor (M602)
[11] 1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)

L-12
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[6]
[1]

[5]

[2]

[4] [3]

[1] Punch motor (M604) [2] Punch home sensor (PS606)

[3] Paper size detect board (PSDTB) [4] Punch switchover switch (MS601)
[5] Punch switchover motor (M608) [6] Punch clutch (CL601)

1.7 FS-526 (Option)

[18] [19] [1]
[2] [3]
[17] [4]
[16]
[15]
[5]
[14]

[13]
[6]

[7]
[8]
[12]

[9]

[11]
[10]

[1] Paper output roller motor (M6) [2] Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3)
[3] Bypass transport motor (M3) [4] Transport motor/2 (M2)
[5] Transport motor/1 (M1) [6] Stacker entrance motor (M10)
[7] Trail edge paddle motor (M15) [8] Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
[9] Route change gate solenoid (SD1) [10] Main tray lift motor (M5)
[11] Switch back solenoid (SD4) [12] 2 staples stapler movement motor (M13)
[13] Alignment plate motor/F (M11) [14] Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
[15] 2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19) [16] Paddle motor (M16)
[17] Stacker plate motor (M17) [18] Exit roller motor (M4)
[19] Rewind paddle motor (M18)

L-13
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[28] [30] [1] [2]

[24] [26] [29] [3]
[27]
[25] [4]

[5]

[23]
[6]
[22]
[21]

[20] [7]

[19]
[8]

[18] [9]

[10]

[12] [11]
[17]
[13]
[16] [15] [14]

[1] Shutter open/close switch (MS2) [2] Rewind paddle home sensor (PS16)
[3] Paper output roller home sensor (PS10) [4] Trail edge paddle home sensor (PS20)
[5] 2 staples paddle phase sensor (PS19) [6] Interlock board (IRB)
[7] Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50) [8] FS control board (FSCB)
[9] FNS pass sensor (PS1) [10] Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2)
[11] 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/1 (PS23) [12] Main tray lower limit sensor (PS5)
[13] Center staple pass sensor (PS12) [14] Door switch (MS1)
[15] Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51) [16] 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor (PS22)
[17] 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15) [18] Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53)
[19] Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52) [20] 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F (PS17)
[21] Staple paper exit top surface sensor (PS7) [22] Stacker plate home sensor (PS11)
[23] Shutter open/close sensor (PS24) [24] 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3)
[25] Sub tray full sensor (PS9) [26] Sub tray exit sensor (PS8)
[27] Main tray top surface sensor (PS4) [28] 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/2 (PS42)
[29] 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18) [30] Main tray empty sensor (PS6)

[5] [6]

[4] [1]

[2]

[3]

[1] Fan motor/2 (FM2) [2] Fan motor/1 (FM1)

[3] Paper pass sensor (PS202) [4] Transport motor (M201)

L-14
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[5] Transport control board (TRCB) [6] Door open/close sensor (PS201)

1.8 PK-516 (Option)

[11]

[1]

[2]
[10] [3]
[4]

[9] [5]

[7]

[6]

[8]

[1] Punch drive motor (M301) [2] PK punch front sensor (PS308)
[3] 2 hole position sensor (PS307) [4] Punch drive motor (PS301)
[5] PK punch scraps box set sensor (PS304) [6] Punch control board (PKDB)
[7] PK punch scraps box full sensor (PS302) [8] Punch oscillating motor (M302)
[9] PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303) [10] Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
[11] Punch motor pulse sensor (PS306)

1.9 SD-508 (Option)

[13] [1]
[14] [2]
[12]
[3]

[11] [4]

[5]

[10]

[9]

[8]
[6]
[7]

L-15
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[1] Center staple paddle/T (M29) [2] Center staple paddle/C (M30)
[3] Center staple alignment motor /R (M21) [4] Staple motor (M24)
[5] Clincher motor (M25) [6] Center staple alignment motor /F (M20)
[7] Center fold knife motor (M32) [8] Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
[9] Leading edge stopper motor (M22) [10] Exit motor (M34)
[11] Center staple paddle lift motor/C (M26) [12] Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)
[13] Center staple motor (M23) [14] Transport motor (M33)

[1]
[15] [2]

[3]
[14]

[4]

[13]

[5]

[12]

[11]

[10] [9]
[6]
[8] [7]

[1] Center staple stacker empty sensor/2 (PS39) [2] Center staple alignment motor home sensor/R (PS31)
[3] Center fold knife home sensor (PS34) [4] Center staple stacker empty sensor/1 (PS26)
[5] Stapler home sensor (PS33) [6] Center staple alignment motor home sensor/F (PS30)
[7] Paddle home sensor/C (PS37) [8] Fold sensor (PS27)
[9] Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32) [10] SD exit full sensor (PS35)
[11] Lift up switch (SW3) [12] SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)
[13] SD exit sensor/LED (PS28) [14] SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)
[15] SD drive board (SDDB)

L-16
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.10 JS-602 (Option)

[4]
[1]

[2]
[3]

[1] 3rd Entrance switching solenoid (SD401) [2] Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402)
[3] Job tray full sensor (PS403) [4] Job tray cover sensor (PS401)

1.11 PI-505 (Option)

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[23] [24]
[5]
[22] [6]
[21]
[20] [7]
[8]

[19] [9]

[10]

[18]

[17] [15] [13]

[16] [14]
[12] [11]
[1] PI drive board (PIDB) [2] Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)
[3] Registration clutch (CL203) [4] Paper empty sensor /Up (PS202)
[5] Paper size VR /Up (VR201) [6] Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201)
[7] Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) [8] Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
[9] Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202) [10] PI control board (PIOB)
[11] Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201) [12] Upper door open/close switch (MS205)
[13] Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) [14] Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)
[15] Paper empty sensor /Lw (PS207) [16] Paper set sensor /Lw (PS208)
[17] Paper set sensor /Up (PS203) [18] L size sensor /Lw (PS212)
[19] Tray lift motor /Lw (M202) [20] Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
[21] Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205) [22] Transfer motor (M203)
[23] Tray lift motor /Up (M201) [24] Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)

L-17
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.12 FS-527 (Option)

[14] [1]
[2]

[4]
[13]
[3]

[12]

[11] [5]

[6]
[10]

[9]

[7]

[8]

[1] Paper passage motor/2 (M3) [2] Conveyance motor (M4)

[3] Accommodation paddle motor (M12) [4] Tray1 path switching motor (M8)
[5] Upper lower path switching motor (M6) [6] Accommodation roller retraction motor (M10)
[7] Exit roller retraction motor (M9) [8] Leading edge stopper motor (M14)
[9] Tray2 shift motor (M16) [10] Stapler movement motor (M11)
[11] Alignment plate motor (M13) [12] Exit motor (M5)
[13] Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1) [14] Elevate motor (M15)

L-18
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[23] [24] [1]

[2] [3]

[22]
[4]
[5]

[21]
[6]
[20]

[7]

[19]
[8]

[18]

[17] [16]
[9]
[15]
[10]

[14]
[11]

[13]

[12]

[1] Tray1 full sensor (PS22) [2] Upper door sensor (PS14)
[3] Registration sensor (PS10) [4] lower path sensor (PS9)
[5] Punch hole full sensor (PS30) [6] Upper lower path switching sensor (PS26)
[7] Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7) [8] Accommodation roller pressure sensor (PS13)
[9] Upper path sensor (PS8) [10] Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12)
[11] Stapler home sensor/2 (PS19) [12] Front door switch (SW1)
[13] Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25) [14] Tray2 lower position sensor (PS21)
[15] Tray2 lower position switch (SW3) [16] Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)
[17] Tray2 upper position switch (SW2) [18] FS control board (FSCB)
[19] Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18) [20] Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS20)
[21] Alignment plate home sensor (PS17) [22] Tray2 paper detection sensor (PS16)
[23] Saddle path sensor (PS11) [24] Tray1 path sensor (PS6)

L-19
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[1]
[6]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

[1] Duplex path switching sensor (PS3) [2] Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
[3] Horizontal conveyance cover sensor (PS5) [4] Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
[5] Paper passage motor/1 (M1) [6] Duplex path switching motor (M2)

1.13 PK-517 (Option)

[1]

[2]

[4]
[3]

[1] Punch cam position sensor (PS200) [2] Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
[3] Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300) [4] Punch motor/1 (M100)

L-20
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.14 SD-509 (Option)

[8]
[1]

[7]

[2]

[6]

[5]

[4] [3]

[1] Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) [2] Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
[3] Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3) [4] Center fold plate motor (M26)
[5] Leading edge stopper motor (M20) [6] Lower paddle motor (M22)
[7] Center fold roller motor (M25) [8] Upper paddle motor (M21)

L-21
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

[1]

[2]

[9]

[3]

[8]

[4]

[7]

[6] [5]

[1] Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41) [2] Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43)
[3] Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42) [4] Center fold plate home sensor (PS47)
[5] Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45) [6] Booklet tray full sensor (PS50)
[7] Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) [8] Booklet tray near full sensor (PS48)
[9] SD drive board (SDDB)

1.15 JS-603 (Option)

[3]
[1]

[2]

[1] Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) [2] Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
[3] Tray3 full sensor (PS36)

L-22
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 652/552/602/502 DRAWING

1.16 OT-503 (Option)

[1]
[2]
[3]

[1] Exit paper cooling fun motor/2 (FM102) [2] Exit paper cooling fun motor/3 (FM103)
[3] Exit paper cooling fun motor/1 (FM101)

L-23
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 BOARD CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2.1.1 bizhub 502/552/602/652
(1) Printer control board (PRCB)
CN16 (14pin) CN18 (20pin) CN20 (12pin)
CN17 (7pin) CN19 (16pin) CN21 (18pin)

CN15
(9pin) CN22
(18pin)

CN14 CN23 CN24

(20pin) (4pin) (14pin)

CN25
CN13 (14pin)
(12pin)

CN12 CN26
(6pin) CN39 (19pin)
(50pin)
CN11
(6pin)
CN28
CN10 (20pin)
(6pin) CN27
CN9 (18pin)
(7pin)
CN8 CN29
(18pin) (10pin)
CN7 CN38
(11pin) (30pin)
CN2
(7pin)
CN6
(15pin)
CN32
(12pin)

CN4 (7pin) CN37 (6pin) CN35 (16pin) CN33 (13pin)

CN3 (10pin)
CN5 (18pin) CN1 (8pin) CN34 (19pin)

L-24
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

(2) MFP board (MFPB)

DIMM0 (200pin) PJ24 (8pin)
PJ28 (3pin) DIMM1 (200pin) PJ04 (8pin)

PJ07
(NC) PJ14
(40pin)
PJ16
(NC)
PJ13
(50pin)
PJ05
(NC) PJ29
(2pin)
PJ19
(5pin) PJ12 (4pin)

PJ11 (7pin)

PJ21
PJ15 (NC) PJ10 PJ03
(24pin) (140pin) (30pin)

PJ02
PJ01 (7pin)
(26pin)

PJ26 (4pin)

(3) PCI board (PCIB)

PJ03 (102pin)

PJ02 (102pin)

PJ01 (140pin)

L-25
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

(4) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB)

CN9 (4pin) CN7 (12pin) CN4 (12pin) CN2 (50pin)
CN8 (12pin) CN6 (12pin) CN3 (17pin)

CN1
(8pin)
CN10 CN5 (11pin)
(11pin)
CN24
(9pin)
CN11
(15pin)
CN15 (10pin)
CN19 (8pin) CN23
CN12 (10pin)
(4pin) CN17 (8pin) CN21 (9pin)

CN16 (11pin) CN20 (18pin)

CN13 (8pin) CN14 (16pin) CN18 (13pin) CN22 (10pin)

(5) PH relay board (REYB/PH)

CN9 (4pin) CN8 (18pin) CN1 (4pin) CN2 (6pin)

CN6 (17pin)

CN3
(5pin)

CN7 (7pin) CN5 (3pin) CN4 (3pin)

(6) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN)

PJ1 (10pin)

PJ7
(4pin)
PJ6
(10pin)

PJ4 (3pin)

PJ5 (9pin) PJ3 (15pin) PJ2 (40pin) PJ9 (13pin)

L-26
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

(7) Original glass position control board (OGPCB) (bizhub C652/C552/C452 only)

PJ1 (4pin)

PJ2 (7pin) PJ3 (5pin)

2.1.2 DF control board (DFCB)

(1) DF-618

PJ11 (10pin) PJ13 (7pin) PJ16 (11pin)

PJ10 (12pin) PJ20 (3pin) PJ14 (9pin)

PJ1
(12pin)
PJ9
(8pin)
PJ2
(2pin)

PJ8
(10pin)

PJ7
(3pin)

PJ5 (12pin) PJ3 (5pin)

PJ6 (6pin) PJ4 (4pin)

L-27
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

(2) DF-619

PJ2 (16pin) PJ3 (20pin) PJ4 (5pin) PJ14 (9pin)

PJ5 (8pin) PJ6 (14pin) PJ13 (3pin)

PJ1
(2pin)

PJ12
(9pin)

PJ9 (8pin) PJ11 (18pin)

PJ7 (12pin) PJ8 (10pin) PJ10 (7pin)

2.1.3 LU drive board (LUDB)

CN4 (8pin) CN5 (20pin)

CN3 (5pin) CN6 (3pin)

CN1 (8pin) CN2 (18pin)

2.1.4 Punch control board (PKDB)

(1) PK-516

CN35 (3pin) CN33 (9pin) CN38 (11pin)

CN34 (6pin) CN32 (8pin) CN36 (15pin)

CN300
(3pin)
CN37 (6pin) CN310
(9pin)

L-28
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1.5 ZU control board

CN2 (11pin) CN3 (6pin)

CN10 (9pin)

CN4 (19pin)
CN9 (7pin)

CN6 (4pin)

CN11 (13pin)

CN15 (12pin)

CN8 (12pin)

CN102 (40pin)

CN5 (6pin)

CN14 (6pin)

CN1 (3pin)

CN7 (4pin)

L-29
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1.6 FS control board (FSCB)

(1) FS-526

CN12 (12pin) CN14 (24pin) CN16 (7pin) CN50 (13pin)

CN11 (12pin) CN13 (6pin) CN15 (8pin) CN18 (10pin) CN60 (8pin)

CN4
(6pin) CN61
CN91 (3pin) (16pin)
CN30
(8pin)
CN19
CN31 (12pin)
(9pin)

CN10
(9pin) CN20
(36pin)
CN3
(4pin)
CN2 CN21
(7pin) CN105 CN106 (24pin)
(20pin) (40pin)
CN1 CN17
(2pin) (12pin)

CN102 (3pin) CN100 (24pin) CN103 (10pin) CN40 (8pin) CN22 (11pin)

CN104 (14pin) CN101 (18pin) CN41 (24pin) CN42 (19pin)

(2) FS-527

PJ6 (4pin) PJ7 (12pin) PJ29 PJ30 (6pin)

(3pin)
PJ28 (4pin) PJ8 (12pin) PJ9 (8pin) PJ10 (5pin)

PJ11
PJ27 (3pin) (13pin)
PJ5 (7pin)
PJ12
(8pin)
PJ4
(11pin) PJ13
PJ3 (9pin)
(2pin)
PJ14
PJ2
(14pin)
(3pin)
PJ1
(4pin)
PJ25 PJ16
(5pin) (16pin)
PJ24
(6pin)

PJ22 (10pin) PJ20 (5pin)

PJ23 (7pin) PJ21 (10pin) PJ19 (17pin) PJ17 (15pin)

L-30
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1.7 Interlock board (IRB)

(1) FS-526

CN27 (6pin)

CN26 (6pin)

CN25 (3pin)

2.1.8 SD drive board (SDDB)

(1) SD-508

CN403 (17pin)

CN405 (10pin) CN404 (5pin)

CN401 (8pin) CN406 (34pin)

CN402 (24pin)

CN411 (2pin)

CN407 (13pin) CN409 (11pin)

CN408 (5pin)

L-31
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

(2) SD-509


PJ11 (10pin)
PJ8 (4pin)

PJ9 (9pin)
PJ7 (8pin)

PJ6 (3pin)

PJ5 (10pin)

PJ4 (11pin)
PJ10 (11pin)

PJ3 (10pin)

PJ13 (9pin)
PJ2 (3pin)

PJ1 (4pin)

2.1.9 PI drive board

CN53 (24pin) CN56 (6pin)

CN52 (16pin) CN58 (13pin)

CN51 (8pin) CN54 (8pin)

CN7 (11pin) CN55 (15pin)

2.2 RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.2.1 How to read the relay connector layout drawing
Mark Meaning of mark Number of pin
○ Possible to confirm by removing external cover. The number in the mark represents the number of pin of the relay
□ Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. connector.

(1) Sample display

• ②: Represent a 2-pin connector which can be confirmed by removing external cover.

L-32
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

2.2.2 bizhub 502/552/602/652

[1]
[2]
[3]

[4]
[12]

[11]
[5]
[10]

[9]

[8]

[7]

[6]

No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location

[1] CN178 R-11 [2] CN174 R-9
[3] CN180 R-10 [4] CN186 R-9
[5] CN154 W-12 [6] CN195<A> S-10
[7] CN195<B> S-11 [8] CN172 S-9 to 10
[9] CN142 S-9 [10] CN152 W-11
[11] CN153 W-12 [12] CN290 E-15

L-33
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

[20] [1] [2]

[3]
[19]
[4]

[18]

[5]

[6]

[17]

[16]

[15] [7]
[14]

[13] [8]

[12]

[11]
[10] [9]

No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location

[1] CN170 R-8 [2] CN602 V-18
[3] CN605 V-17 [4] CN604 V-18
[5] CN289 D-15 [6] CN293 D-16
[7] CN171 R-8 [8] CN198 S-7 to 8
[9] CN202 B-7 [10] CN386 E-1
[11] CN203 C-7 [12] CN706 W-15
[13] CN267 W-15 [14] CN707 C-6
[15] CN333 W-16 [16] CN334 I-7
[17] CN333 W-16 [18] CN330 I-8
[19] CN166 S-7 to 8 [20] CN321 J-8
[21] CN381 P-27 to 28

L-34
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

[25] [1]

[24] [2]
[22] [23]
[3]

[21]

[20]

[19]

[18]

[17]

[16] [4]
[15]

[5]

[6]
[14]

[7]
[13]
[8]
[12] [11]

[10] [9]

No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location

[1] CN282 Q-7 [2] CN275 Q-5 to 6
[3] CN280 R-6 to 7 [4] CN131 W-9
[5] CN121<A> V-7 [6] CN121<B> V-8
[7] CN194 W-7 to 8 [8] CN123 W-7
[9] CN131 W-9 [10] CN122 W-7
[11] CN129 W-7 [12] CN134 W-7
[13] CN119 W-6 [14] CN193 V-6
[15] CN113<A> V-5 [16] CN113<B> V-6
[17] CN143 V-9 [18] CN197 W-10
[19] CN137 W-10 [20] CN144 W-10
[21] CN324 J-9 [22] CN326 J-9 to 10
[23] CN325 J-9 [24] CN323 J-9
[25] CN260 D-17 [26] CN258 E-16 to 17
[27] CN326 J-8 [28] CN325 J-9

L-35
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

[19] [1] [2]

[18] [3]

[17] [4]

[16]

[5]
[15]
[6]
[14]
[7]

[8]
[13]
[9]

[12]

[10]
[11]

No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location

[1] CN318 E-28 [2] CN613 D-28
[3] CN511 D-19 to 20 [4] CN298 E-17
[5] CN241 E-23 to 24 [6] CN165 D-13
[7] CN228 E-24 to 25 [8] CN702 D-19
[9] CN287 E-18 [10] CN378 D-13
[11] CN235 E-25 [12] CN242 E-27
[13] CN249 E-13 [14] CN164 D-14
[15] CN163 D-14 [16] CN253 E-21
[17] CN316 D-23 [18] CN328 D-12
[19] CN383 E-28

L-36
 L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 652/552/602/502 LAYOUT DRAWING

[1]

[2]
[3]

[11]
[4]

[10]

[9]

[5]

[6]

[8] [7]

No. CN No. Location No. CN No. Location

[1] CN155<A> S-3 [2] CN145 S-1 to 2
[3] CN279 R-6 to 7 [4] CN278 Q-6
[5] CN151 Q-2 [6] CN156 Q-3
[7] CN217 E-11 [8] CN395 E-10
[9] CN271<A> S-5 [10] CN271<B> S-6 to 7
[11] CN155<B> S-4

L-37
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 1. bizhub 502/552/602/652

M TIMING CHART
1. bizhub 502/552/602/652
1.1 Timing chart in color mode
1.1.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Paper source Tray1

1.1.2 Timing chart

Developing bias DC K
Main erase lamp K
K PC drum motor (M18)
Charge K
K developing motor (M19)
BCL (+)
BCL (-)
Cleaner motor (M38)
Transfer belt motor (M1)
2nd transfer roller pressure/retraction
1st transfer pressure/retraction
Image write start signal
Developing bias AC K
1st transfer K
2nd transfer
Neutralizing
Registration motor (M2)
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
Tray 1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
Exit motor (M4)
Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
Suction fan motor (FM1)
Cooling fan motor (FM3)
IU cooling fan motor (FM15)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM12)
PH cooling fan motor (FM14)
Tucking fan motor/1 (FM101)
Tucking fan motor/1 (FM102)
Polygon motor (M34)
LD
Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
Fehumidifier heater
Fusing motor (M30)

M-1
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-618

2. DF-618
2.1 1-sided mode
2.1.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Zoom ratio Full size
Sheet of original 2 originals

2.1.2 Timing chart

ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
READY signal
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
After separate sensor
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
Reverse registration sensor
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor Brake OFF
ON
Read open/close sensor
OFF
Reverse roller pressure/ ON
retraction motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reverse roller sensor
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor CW/CCW
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
Lift up upper sensor
OFF
ON
Lift up lower sensor
OFF
Reverse path switching ON
solenoid OFF
Exit reverse path ON
switching solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/1
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/2
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/3
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
OFF

M-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-618

ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
READY signal
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
After separate sensor
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
Reverse registration sensor
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
Reading roller pressure/retraction ON
motor ST/SP OFF
Reading roller pressure/retraction ON
motor Brake OFF
ON
Read open/close sensor
OFF
Reverse roller pressure/ ON
retraction motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reverse roller sensor
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor CW/CCW
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
Lift up upper sensor
OFF
ON
Lift up lower sensor
OFF
Reverse path switching ON
solenoid OFF
Exit reverse path ON
switching solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/1
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/2
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/3
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
OFF

2.2 2-sided mode

2.2.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Zoom ratio Full size
Sheet of original 2 originals

2.2.2 Timing chart

ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
READY signal
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
After separate sensor
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
Reverse registration sensor
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor Brake OFF
ON
Read open/close sensor
OFF
Reverse roller pressure/ ON
retraction motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reverse roller sensor
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor CW/CCW
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
Lift up upper sensor
OFF
ON
Lift up lower sensor
OFF
Reverse path switching ON
solenoid OFF
Exit reverse path ON
switching solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/1
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/2
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/3
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
OFF

M-3
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-618

ON
PAGEON signal
OFF
ON
READY signal
OFF
ON
Empty sensor
OFF
ON
After separate sensor
OFF
ON
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
Reverse registration sensor
OFF
ON
Exit sensor
OFF
ON
Before read sensor
OFF
ON
Take-up motor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
OFF
ON
Reading motor
OFF
ON
Exit motor
OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reading roller pressure/retraction
motor Brake OFF
ON
Read open/close sensor
OFF
Reverse roller pressure/ ON
retraction motor ST/SP OFF
ON
Reverse roller sensor
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor CW/CCW
OFF
ON
Lift-up motor ST/SP
OFF
ON
Lift up upper sensor
OFF
ON
Lift up lower sensor
OFF
Reverse path switching ON
solenoid OFF
Exit reverse path ON
switching solenoid OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/1
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/2
OFF
ON
Consolidation sensor/3
OFF
ON
Cooling fan
OFF

M-4
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 3. LU-204

3. LU-204
3.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Zoom ratio Fill size

3.2 Timing chart

Paper feed motor (M2)

Transport motor (M3)

Paper feed sensor (PS3)

Main body: Tray2 vertical transport

motor (M7)
Main body: Tray2 vertical transport
sensor (PS12)

M-5
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 4. FS-526/SD-508

4. FS-526/SD-508
4.1 Straight paper exit mode
4.1.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Type of original 1-side

4.1.2 Timing chart

Paper exit sensor

(PS39)

FNS pass sensor

(PS1)

Transport motor/1
(M1)

Z-fold Punch regist

sensor (PS2)

Transport motor/2
(M2)

Bypass transport
motor (M3)

Bypass gate
solenoid (SD2)

Sub tray gate

solenoid (SD3)

2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)

Stacker entrance
motor (M10)

2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)

Paper output roller

motor (M6)

Paper output roller

home sensor (PS10)

Stacker entrance
motor (M10)

Exit roller motor

(M4)

2 staples stacker
empty sensor
(PS15)

Stacker entrance
motor (M10)

Main tray lift motor

(M5)

Main tray top

surface sensor
(PS4)

Staple paper exit

top surface sensor
(PS7)

M-6
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 4. FS-526/SD-508

4.2 2 flat stitching staples mode

4.2.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Type of original 1-side

4.2.2 Timing chart

Paper exit sensor (PS39)

FNS pass sensor (PS1)

Transport motor/1 (M1)

Z-fold Punch regist

sensor (PS2)
Route change gate
solenoid (SD1)

Transport motor/2 (M2)

Bypass transport motor

(M3)
Bypass gate solenoid
(SD2)
Sub tray gate solenoid
(SD3)

2 staples stacker
sensor (PS3)

Stacker entrance motor

(M10)

Paper exit sensor (PS39)

FNS pass sensor (PS1)

Transport motor/1 (M1)

Z-fold Punch regist sensor

(PS2)
Route change gate solenoid
(SD1)

Transport motor/2 (M2)

Bypass transport motor (M3)

Bypass gate solenoid

(SD2)
Sub tray gate solenoid
(SD3)

2 staples stacker sensor

(PS3)

Stacker entrance motor (M10)

M-7
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 4. FS-526/SD-508

2 staples stacker sensor

(PS3)
Paddle motor(M16)

Rewind paddle motor(M18)

Rewind paddle home sensor

(PS16)
Trail edge paddle motor(M15)

Trail edge paddle home sensor

(PS20)
Alignment plate motor/R (M12)

2 staples alignment motor home

sensor/R (PS18)
Alignment plate motor/F (M11)

2 staples alignment motor home

sensor/R (PS18)

Stacker plate motor (M17)

Stacker plate home sensor (PS11)

Paper output roller motor (M6)

Paper output roller home sensor

(PS10)

2 staples trail edge stopper motor

(M19)

4.3 Saddle stitching mode

4.3.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Type of original 1-side

4.3.2 Timing chart

Paper output roller
motor (M6)

Paper pass sensor

(PS202)
FNS pass sensor
(PS1)
Center staple pass
sensor (PS12)

Transport motor/1
(M1)

Stacker entrance
motor (M10)

Route change gate

solenoid (SD1)

FNS pass sensor

(PS1)

Center staple pass

sensor (PS12)
Center staple alignment
motor /R(M21)
Center staple alignment
motor home sensor/F
(PS30)
Center staple alignment
motor /F(M20)
Center staple alignment
motor home sensor/R
(PS31)
Leading edge stopper
motor (M22)

Center staple paddle/T

(M29)

Center staple paddle/C

(M30)
Center staple paddle
lift motor/C (M26)
Paddle home
sensor/C (PS37)

M-8
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 4. FS-526/SD-508

Center staple pass sensor (PS12)

Center staple alignment motor /R

(M21)
Center staple alignment motor /F
(M20)

Center staple paddle/T (M29)

Center staple paddle/C (M30)

Center staple paddle lift motor/C

(M26)

Paddle home sensor/C (PS37)

Center staple paddle lift motor/C

(M26)

Paddle home sensor/C (PS37)

Exit grip solenoid (SD6)

Leading edge stopper motor (M22)

* Center staple mode

Leading edge stopper motor (M22)

* Center staple mode

Center staple motor (M23)

* Center staple mode

Staple motor (M24)

* Center staple mode

Center fold knife motor (M32)

Center fold knife home sensor

(PS34)

Transport motor (M33)

* Center staple: 6 sheets to

Transport motor (M33)

* Center staple:2 sheets to 5sheets

SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)

4.4 Tri-folding mode

4.4.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Type of original 1-side

4.4.2 Timing chart

FNS pass sensor (PS1)

Center staple pass sensor

(PS12)
Center staple alignment
motor /R (M21)

Center staple alignment

motor /F (M20)

Center staple paddle/T (M29)

Center staple paddle/C (M30)

Center staple paddle lift

motor/C (M26)

Paddle home sensor/C

(PS37)

Exit grip solenoid (SD6)

Leading edge stopper

motor (M22)

Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)

Center fold knife motor (M32)

Center fold knife home sensor

(PS34)

Exit motor (M34)

SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)

M-9
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 5. ZU-606

5. ZU-606
5.1 Z-folding+Punch mode
5.1.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A3
Sheet of original 3 originals
Type of original 1-side

5.1.2 Timing chart

Item

Main body paper exit signal

Loop Loop Loop
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
-leading/trailing edge
790mm/s
Registration motor (M601)
370mm/s
790mm/s
Main motor (M606)
370mm/s
Release
1st folding stopper motor (M602)
Set Release Set Release Set Release
2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Exit sensor (PS609)
FNS pass sensor
F
Punch shift motor (M605)
R
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
-side edge
Punch motor (M604)
Punch clutch (CL601) Punch Punch Punch
Punch scraps conveyance motor
(M607)
Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)

M-10
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 6. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517

6. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517
6.1 Shift mode
6.1.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Sheet of original 2 originals
Type of original 1-side

6.1.2 Timing chart

Main body paper exit signal

Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
Registration sensor (PS10)
Lower path sensor (PS9)
Speed Speed
Up Down
Paper passage motor/1 (M1) Start Stop

Paper passage motor/2 (M3) Start Stop

Conveyance motor (M4) Start Stop

Exit motor (M5) Start Stop

Elevate motor (M15) Down Rise Down Rise Down Rise

Tray2 shift motor (M16) Shift Shift

6.2 2 flat stitching staples mode

6.2.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4 or 8 1/2 x 11
Sheet of original 2 originals
Type of original 1-side

M-11
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 6. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517

6.2.2 Timing chart

Main body paper exit signal

Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)

Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
Registration sensor (PS10)
Lower path sensor (PS9)
Upper path sensor (PS8)
Tray2 paper detection
sensor (PS16)
Speed Loop Loop Loop
Up Loop
Paper passage motor/1 (M1) Start
Align Start
Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
Stop

Conveyance motor (M4) Start

Switch Back Stop
Exit motor (M5) Start Back Back Stop Start
Stop Stop
Accommodation roller
retraction motor (M10)

Exit roller retraction motor (M9) Press

Release Press Release

Accommodation paddle solenoid (SD1) FD Align FD Align FD Align

Accommodation paddle motor (M12) Stop Stop

Alignment plate motor (M13) CD Align CD Align CD Align

Home Move

Stapler movement motor (M11) Staple Point Move Second Staple Second Staple Home Move
Point Move Point Move
Tray1 path switching motor (M8)

Elevate motor (M15)

6.3 Center staples mode

6.3.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Sheet of original 2 originals
Type of original 1-side

M-12
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 6. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517

6.3.2 Timing chart

Main body paper exit signal

Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)

Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
Registration sensor (PS10)
Lower path sensor (PS9)

Saddle path sensor (PS11)

Paper passage motor/1 (M1)

Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
Conveyance motor (M4)
Exit roller retraction motor (M9)
Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12)

Tray2 paper detection sensor (PS16)

Center staple alignment motor/F (M24)
Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41)
Upper paddle motor (M21)
Lower paddle motor (M22)
Leading edge stopper motor (M20)

Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)

Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)
Saddle staple motor
Saddle staple home sensor
Center fold plate motor (M26)
Center fold plate home sensor (PS47)
Center fold roller motor (M25)
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)

Booklet tray near full sensor (PS48)

Booklet tray full sensor (PS50)
Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44)

6.4 Punch mode

6.4.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Sheet of original 2 originals
Type of original 1-side

M-13
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 6. FS-527/SD-509/PK-517

6.4.2 Timing chart

Main body paper

exit signal

Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)

Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)

Registration sensor (PS10)

Lower path sensor (PS9)

Speed Up Speed Up
Loop Loop
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)

Paper passage motor/2 (M3)

Conveyance motor (M4)

Exit motor (M5)

Punch motor/1 (M100)

M-14
bizhub 652/552/602/502 M TIMING CHART > 7. JS-603

7. JS-603
7.1 Tray3 paper exit mode
7.1.1 Operating conditions
Paper size A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S
Sheet of original 2 originals
Type of original 1-side

7.1.2 Timing chart

Main body paper

exit signal

Paper passage Speed Up Speed Up Speed Up Speed Up

sensor/1 (PS1)
Paper passage Speed Down Speed Down Speed Down
motor/1 (M1)
Release
Tray3 exit roller
retraction motor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller
retraction sensor (PS35)

M-15
 N-1
• bizhub 652/552/602/502 Wiring diagram (a2wum0nc801da.pdf 7.2 MB)
I

Z
T
F

Y
X
V
S
P
K
E
B
A

U
R
N
H
D
C

Q
O
G

W
17

Nov.2010
23-I

CN101 NC
PJ005-9 CN386
DC3.3V DC24V NC
PJ005-10
GND DC24V NC GND
A2WU-B001-0A

Tray1 device detection sensor PJ005-11

3 2 1

PS1 ON GND NC NC
PS1

PJ005-12
1
1

DC3.3V GND NC SOS

PJ007-5
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4

GND GND NC DC5V

CN1
CN29

602/502

CN102 PJ007-4
CN24

PS8 ON DC5V NC GND

PJ007-3
DC3.3V GND NC GND
PJ007-2 CN146 CN304
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND DC3.3V NC M1
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PS7 ON M16_GAIN M2
PS8

CN145 M16_LOCK
Tray1 upper limit sensor
3 2 1

M16_CLK
PS6

CN103 K PC drum motor

CN34

DC3.3V GND
M18

GND M16_REM
PS6 ON
CN149 DC3.3V
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1
3 2 1

GND GND
PS7

PS5 ON M19_GAIN
Tray1 paper feed sensor
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DC5V M19_LOCK
PS5

CN104 GND M19_CLK

PS4 ON
CN303 GND
CN147
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN11

DC5V M19_REM
Tray1 near empty sensor GND
3 2 1

NC
PS3
1

DATA2[-]_K
DC3.3V
Tray1 vertical transport sensor K developing motor DATA2[+]_K
3 2 1

DC3.3V GND
PS4
M19

GND
GND PS2 ON POWER_LIMIT
CN7

2
2

DATA1[-]_K
24-S
To PJ02

PS3 ON CL1_REM NC
CN150 DATA1[+]_K
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 DC24V BK_PC_M_GAIN DC24V

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND
2 NC GND
POLYGON
3 PSDTB/1 M18_CLK S/S
CN23

PJ1

MOTOR
CN3

Paper size detect board/1 Tray1 paper empty sensor

3 2 1

4 GND LOCK
PS2

5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5

GND M18_REM CLK

DC24V NC
PSDTB/1

M6 CN151 CN300
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GND GND
CN35

M1_GAIN
CN106 M1_LOCK
2 1
1 2

Tray1 paper feed clutch M1_CLK

CL1

Transfer belt motor

M1

NC
2 1
2

Tray1 lift-up motor GND

M6

M1_REM
CN156 LDPC_K1
CN155<A> DC3.3V
LDPC_K2
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND
CN107 GND
23-I

CL2_REM
2 1
1 2

Tray2 paper feed clutch GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

DC24V
CL2

DATA1[+]_K
NC PJ007-10
Tray2 device detection sensor DC5V DATA1[-]_K
3 2 1

NC GND PJ007-11
PS9

CN158 GND GND

NC DC24V PJ005-3
DC24V DATA2[+]_K
CN1

3
3

DC3.3V DC3.3V GND PJ005-4

CN6

1 2 3 4

GND DATA2[-]_K
GND GND GND
Tray2 paper empty sensor GND
3 2 1

CN10<A>

PS9 ON PS10 ON DC24V

3

PS10

S/H1_K
1 GND DC24V
CN3

S/H1B_K
2 PS13 ON NC
CN159 LDENB_K
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

3 PSDTB/2 DC5V NC
CN22

PJ1

S/H2_K
25-I

Paper size detect board/2 4 NC

S/H2B_K
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Tray2 paper feed sensor DC5V

3 2 1

DC24V
PS13

PSDTB/2

M8 B
PH unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

GND
A
CN160 NC
CN109 NC
NC
2 1

Tray2 lift-up motor Tray2 vertical transport sensor B

3 2 1

M8

GND NC
PS12

A
PS12 ON NC
NC
DC5V NC
CN110 CN161 NC
NC NC
652/552

NC
DC3.3V DC3.3V NC
CN26

B
GND GND NC
Tray2 CD paper size sensor/1 Tray2 door set sensor CN304 A
3 2 1
3 2 1

PS15 ON PS17 ON NC
4
4

PS15
PS17

NC
CN10<B>

DC3.3V DC3.3V M16_GAIN

NC NC
GND GND M16_LOCK
CN111 CN162 GND GND
CN21

PS16 ON PS14 ON M16_CLK

K PC drum motor NC NC
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CN34

DC3.3V NC GND
M18

REM S/S
CN2
REYB/PH

GND M16_REM POLYGON POLYGON

Tray2 CD paper size sensor/2 Tray2 upper limit sensor LOCK LOCK
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 2 1

PS11 ON CN155<B> DC3.3V MOTOR MOTOR

6 5 4 3 2 1

PS16
PS14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

CLK CLK
PH relay board

GND
M19_GAIN
CN112 CN272
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

M19_LOCK
M19_CLK
CN303 DC5VLD_MONI DC5VLD_MONI
GND
Tray2 near empty sensor OHP detection sensor GND GND
3 2 1
3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M19_REM
PS11
PS40

NC NC
NC NC
bizhub 652/602/552/502 Overall wiring diagram

CN114 CN273 K developing motor NC NC

M19

NC NC
NC
TAPE

CN113<A> NC NC
CN271<A> NC
Tray3 near empty sensor Timing roller sensor S/H2B_K S/H2B_K
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

BK_PC_M_GAIN
PS20
PS38

3RD_TRAY_SET S/H2_K S/H2_K

DC3.3V NC
DC3.3V LDENB_K LDENB_K
CN8

CN27

PS40 ON M18_CLK
5
5

CN118 GND CN274 S/H1B_K S/H1B_K

OHP_LED_REM GND
PS20 ON S/H1_K S/H1_K
DC3.3V M18_REM
CN15

CL5_REM GND GND

GND NC
1 2
2 1

Tray3 paper feed clutch DC24V Pressure welding alienation sensor CN300 FM14_LOCK FM14_LOCK
3 2 1

PS38 ON NC
CL5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PS50
CN35

GND FM14_HALF FM14_HALF

DC3.3V M1_GAIN
CN4

FM14_REM FM14_REM
GND CN275 M1_LOCK
CN115 CN276 FM15_LOCK FM15_LOCK
PS50 ON M1_CLK
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Transfer belt motor FM15_REM FM15_REM

M1

DC3.3V NC
GND M1_REM
Tray3 paper empty sensor Paper exit sensor
3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PS39 ON DC3.3V
PS19
PS39
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND
S/H2B_Y
CN116 CN193 S/H2_Y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CN277 NC
DC3.3V
NC
GND GND
2 1

Tray3 upper limit sensor 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor NC

3 2 1
M3

PS19 ON DC24V
PS22

S/H2B_M
DC3.3V GND
S/H2_M
GND CN278 GND
CN117 NC
PS22 ON DC24V
NC
CN16

DC3.3V DC24V
CN3

NC
6
6

GND NC
Tray3 paper feed sensor Suction fan motor NC
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
CN28

PS21 ON NC
PS21
FM1

Y_LDPWM2
CL6_REM NC
M_LDPWM2
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DC24V DC24V NC CN707

M3 NC
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN119
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

GND
K_LDPWM2
FM1_REM FM15_REM
CN113<B> GND IU cooling
GND GND
1 2
2 1

CN279 CN280 NC NC
CN5

Tray3 transport clutch

1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3

FM1_LOCK FM15_LOCK
CL6
FM15

NC LDPWM_K2 fan motor

FM4_REM
NC GND
CN5
CN9

GND
4 3 2 1

CN282
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CN123 K_LDPWM1 LDPWM_K1

FM4_LOCK
FM5_REM CN335 CN203 CN202
GND
1 2
2 1

Tray4 paper feed clutch Fusing cooling fan motor/3

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
3 2 1
1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

FM5_LOCK FM14_REM
CL7
FM5

CN334 CN334 GND

PH cooling
CN4

Tucking fan motor/1

3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3
3 2 1
1 2 3

CN121<A> CN271<B> FM14_LOCK

FM101
FM14

CN120
fan motor
4TH_TRAY_SET
CL7_REM CN336
GND
2 1

Tray3 paper empty indicator board DC24V FM101

REM
CN134 CN129 CN122 DC3.3V CN167 GND
7
7

PEIB/3_REM Tucking fan motor/2 FM102

3 2 1
1 2 3

CN17

REM
FM102

DC3.3V
CN17

CN128 CN166 CN198 LOCK

PEIB/4_REM ADU paper passage sensor/1
3 2 1
OT-503(Option)

GND FM103
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CN337
PS47

GND
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 6 5 4 3 2 1

DC3.3V
Duplex

REM
2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1

Tray4 paper empty indicator board GND

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN168
PEIB/3 PEIB/4

PS47 ON
Tucking fan motor/3
3 2 1
1 2 3

CN194 DC3.3V
FM103

CN124 GND
ADU paper passage sensor/2
3 2 1

PS48 ON
PS48

DC3.3V DC3.3V
Tray4 paper feed sensor
3 2 1

GND GND
PS26

PS26 ON PS49 ON
CN169 CN321 CN330
CN3

DC3.3V A
CN125 A
PFTDB

GND B
M32 ADU door sensor A
3 2 1

PS27ON A M14
PS49

Toner cartridge motor C/K B

DC3.3V B
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4

M14

Tray4 upper limit sensor B

3 2 1

CN170
CN18

GND A
PS27

A
PS24 ON B
M31 A
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

DC3.3V A M13
CN126 B
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CN20

GND B CN319
ADU transport motor/2 B
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8
8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PS25 ON
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M32

A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

NC
Tray4 paper empty sensor 1st transfer A
3 2 1

CN121<B> M21
PS24

CN171 B
Paper feed/transport drive board
1 2 3 4
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

pressure retraction motor B

CN127
CN322
ADU transport motor/1
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M31

Tray4 near empty sensor CN219

3 2 1

PS25

Ozone ventilation fan motor

3 2 1
1 2 3

B
FM6

FM6_LOCK B
M20
CN130 CN142 CN186 CN323 GND A Waste toner agitating motor
CN23
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
M20

FM6_REM A
A FM2_LOCK
2 1
CN11

Tray4 lift-up motor B GND

M24

M2 Fusing cooling fan motor/1

3 2 1
1 2 3
6 5 4 3 2 1

A FM2_REM
CN9

Registration motor
M2
FM2

1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4

B
CN132 CN325
CN173
2 1

Tray3 lift-up motor GND

M24
9
9

M23

DC24V Paper cooling fan motor

3 2 1
1 2 3

Bypass paper empty sensor

3 2 1
FM13

GND
PS34

M23 FM13_LOCK
CN131 CN143 DC24V
CN324 GND
CL3_REM CN172 CN174 CN175 FM13_REM
DC24V
FM3_LOCK
1 2
2 1

Horizontal transport clutch NC DC3.3V

GND
CL3

DC3.3V GND Cooling fan motor

3 2 1
1 2 3
CN15

Multi FD size sensor/3 FM3_REM

3 2 1
FM3

GND PS34 ON
PS33

CN14

FM7_LOCK
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1

CN136 PS58 ON DC3.3V

CN326 GND CN214
DC3.3V GND
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN176 FM7_REM CN395

GND PS33 ON
PS29 ON DC3.3V
CN7

Horizontal transport set sensor

3 2 1

DC3.3V
PS58

GND GND Toner suction fan motor

3 2 1
1 2 3

Multi FD size sensor/2 K_CS

3 2 1
FM7

PS28 ON PS32 ON
PS32

CN197 K_SK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CN135 DC5V DC3.3V

K_DO
GND CN312
CN177 K_DI
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PS31 ON
M30_GAIN GND
Horizontal transport sensor
3 2 1

M30_LOCK DC5V Imaging unit/K

PS29
CN32

1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1

Multi FD size sensor/1 M30_CLK TCR SENSOR/K ON

3 2 1

Fusing motor
PS31

M30_CW/CCW *4 GND
M30
CN9

CN138 CN137 M30_REM DC3.3V

10
10

CN181 GND *
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN195<A>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DC24V *
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Intermediate roller sensor

3 2 1
1 2 3
3 2 1

GND CN180
PS28

Bypass paper width detection resistor

3 2 1

VR1 ON
VR1

CN144 DC3.3V
NC
CN182 T1_1_PWM T1_1_PWM
A DC3.3V
T1_2_PWM T1_2_PWM
B GND (W) (W)
T2

M26 2nd image transfer T1_3_PWM T1_3_PWM

Vertical transport motor A PS37 ON CN217
CN12

Bypass sub tray set sensor T1_4_PWM T1_4_PWM

1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
3 2 1

M26

B NC
CN6<A>
PS37

B_CL+_REM B_CL+_REM
DC3.3V (W) (W) GND
E

CN139 Paper separator B_CL-_REM B_CL-_REM

GND NC
CN184 E_PWM E_PWM
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PS36 ON GND
T2I_MON T2I_MON
CN1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CN16

DC24V NC (W) (W) NC

HV2

Paper separator BCL- T2_PWM T2_PWM

BC-

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

GND NC
Transport motor Bypass paper lower sensor T2_REM T2_REM
3 2 1

EN NC
M25
PS36

T2_CC/CV *3 T2_CC/CV *3
NC M25 (R) (R) GND
CN178 Paper separator BCL+ T2V_MON T2V_MON
BC+

CLK EL/K_REM
CN13
CN25

GND GND
LOCK DC3.3V
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A DC24V DC24V
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

11
11

CHANGE GND
High voltage unit/2

B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CN152 NC M27 PS43 ON

A Bypass paper feed motor DC3.3V
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M27

B
GND CN389
DC3.3V CN390
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

PS44 ON
GND CN183
Tray1 vertical transport motor
M5

PS30 ON DC24V DC24V

1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2
2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DC3.3V DC24V DC24V

Main erase lamp/K
CN6<B>
EL/K

GND Bypass set sensor NC NC

3 2 1

CN153
PS30

PS35 ON NC NC
A
CN4

CN225
CN1

+ SCD SCD CN299

B M28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

M5 - CN185 GND GND

A CN8-2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

GND GND
Take-up motor B CN8-1 Charging cleaner home sensor
2 1
1 2
3 2 1

1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1

M22
PS43

A CN195<B> Bypass paper limit sensor

3 2 1

B
4

PS35

M22
A CN226
CN8

CN154 G4_PWM G4_PWM

B
GND KBACCK KBACCK
A CN179
GND C2_REM C2_REM
16-E

B Charging cleaner return sensor

3 2 1

M7 GND B4_AC_REM B4_AC_REM

PS44

Tray2 vertical transport motor A

2 1

M7

GND Bypass tray up down motor C3_REM C3_REM

1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

B
M28
HV1

KH_RESET B4_DC_PWM B4_DC_PWM

12
12

GND C4_REM C4_REM CN224

(W) (W)
C4

MULTI_WIDTH_SENS_REF P.C. drum ch. corona K *5 NC NC

MULTI_WIDTH_SENS NC NC
2 1

GND NC NC
Charge cleaning motor/K
CN5

CN2
M15

CN425 GND NC NC
High voltage unit/1

GND NC NC CN328
DC24V DC24V KH_CLK NC NC
DC24V DC24V GND B2_AC_REM B2_AC_REM
GND GND KH_WR G3_PWM G3_PWM
(W) (W) Rear side cooling fan motor
3 2 1
1 2 3

GND GND GND B_AC_PP B_AC_PP

G4

Grid voltage K
FM16

GND GND KH_RD C1_REM C1_REM GND

CN19
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

DC5V DC5V GND B2_DC_PWM B2_DC_PWM FM16_REM CN249

GND GND KH_CS FM16_LOCK
CN251
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DC3.3V DC3.3V GND DC3.3V

KH_A6 GND
Waste toner box set sensor
3 2 1

GND PS53 ON
PS53

CN426 KH_A5
CN301 SD1_REM
MIDDLE_M_CLK MIDDLE_M_CLK GND DC24V DC24V
7

MIDDLE_M_EN MIDDLE_M_EN KH_A4 GND DC3.3V CN165

MIDDLE_M_IUP MIDDLE_M_IUP GND M38_REM PEIB/1 ON

13
13

PAPER_FEED_M_CLK PAPER_FEED_M_CLK KH_A3

Cleaner motor NC DC3.3V
CN2
2 1
1 2

M38
CN18

22-I
CN2

Gate switch solenoid

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

To CN39

PAPER_FEED_M_EN PAPER_FEED_M_EN GND M38_CLK PEIB/2 ON

SD1

PAPER_FEED_M_IUP PAPER_FEED_M_IUP KH_A2 M38_LOCK A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NC NC GND M38_GAIN B
M33
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

LIFT_UP_M_REM LIFT_UP_M_REM KH_A1 A CN378 CN187

PAPER_EMPTY_LED_REM PAPER_EMPTY_LED_REM GND B
NC NC KH_A0 A
2 1

CN20

CN331<A>-6 Tray1 paper empty indicator board

SET SET GND TXD *2 B
CN331<A>-5 M4
DETECT DETECT KH_D7 GND A
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4

CN331<A>-4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

DOOR_DETECT DOOR_DETECT GND RXD *1 B

CN331<A>-3
UPPER_SENS UPPER_SENS KH_D6 GND CN188
CN37

CN331<A>-2
PAPER_EMPTY_SENS PAPER_EMPTY_SENS GND CTS
CN331<A>-1
1 2 3 4 5 6

NEAR_EMPTY_SENS1 NEAR_EMPTY_SENS1 KH_D5 RTS

2 1

NEAR_EMPTY_SENS2 NEAR_EMPTY_SENS2 GND

Tray2 paper empty indicator board
PEIB/1 PEIB/2

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

FEED_SENS FEED_SENS KH_D4

GND CN163
CN418 KH_D3
GND
27-L

5
L KH_D2
6 Switchback motor
1 2

N GND
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
M33

14
14

KH_D1
GND
KH_D0 CN164
LU-204(Option) GND
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND
18 16-W